The Nitro Group in Organic Synthesis

The Nitro Group in Organic Synthesis. Noboru Ono Copyright © 2001 Wiley-VCH ISBNs: 0-471-31611-3 (Hardback); 0-471-22448-0 (Electronic)

THE NITRO GROUP IN ORGANIC SYNTHESIS

ORGANIC NITRO CHEMISTRY SERIES Managing Editor Dr. Henry Feuer Purdue University West Lafayette, Indiana 47907 USA

EDITORIAL BOARD Hans H. Baer Ottawa, Canada

George Olah Los Angeles, CA, USA

Robert G. Coombes London, England

Noboru Ono Matsuyama, Japan

Leonid T. Eremenko Chernogolovka, Russia

C.N.R Rao Bangalore, India

Milton B. Frankel Canoga Park, CA, USA

John H. Ridd London, England

Philip C. Myhre Claremont, CA, USA

Dieter Seebach Zurich, Switzerland

Arnold T. Nielsen China Lake, CA, USA

François Terrier Rouen, France

Wayland E. Noland Minneapolis, MN, USA

Heinz G. Viehe Louvain-la-Neuve, Belgium

Also in the Series: Nitroazoles: The C-Nitro Derivatives of Five-Membered N- and N,O-Heterocycles by Joseph H. Boyer Nitrile Oxides, Nitrones, and Nitronates in Organic Synthesis: Novel Strategies in Synthesis by Kurt B.G. Torssell Nitro Compounds: Recent Advances in Synthesis and Chemistry Edited by Henry Feuer and Arnold T. Nielsen Nitration: Methods and Mechanisms by George A. Olah, Ripudaman Malhotra, and Sabhash C. Narong Nucleophilic Aromatic Displacement: The Influence of the Nitro Group by François Terrier Nitrocarbons by Arnold T. Nielsen

THE NITRO GROUP IN ORGANIC SYNTHESIS Noboru Ono

A JOHN WILEY & SONS, INC., PUBLICATION New York

Chichester

Weinheim

Brisbane

Singapore

Toronto

Designations used by companies to distinguish their products are often claimed as trademarks. In all instances where John Wiley & Sons, Inc., is aware of a claim, the product names appear in initial capital or ALL CAPITAL LETTERS. Readers, however, should contact the appropriate companies for more complete information regarding trademarks and registration. Copyright © 2001 by Wiley-VCH. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including uploading, downloading, printing, decompiling, recording or otherwise, except as permitted under Sections 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act, without the prior written permission of the Publisher. Requests to the Publisher for permission should be addressed to the Permissions Department, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 605 Third Avenue, New York, NY 10158-0012, (212) 850-6011, fax (212) 850-6008, E-Mail: PERMREQ @ WILEY.COM. This publication is designed to provide accurate and authoritative information in regard to the subject matter covered. It is sold with the understanding that the publisher is not engaged in rendering professional services. If professional advice or other expert assistance is required, the services of a competent professional person should be sought. ISBN 0-471-22448-0 This title is also available in print as ISBN 0-471-31611-3. For more information about Wiley products, visit our web site at www.Wiley.com.

CONTENTS Series Foreword

ix

Preface

xi

Acknowledgments

xiii

Abbreviations

xv

1. Introduction

1

2. Preparation of Nitro Compounds

3

2.1 Nitration of Hydrocarbons / 3 2.1.1 Aromatic Compounds / 3 2.1.2 Alkanes / 7 2.1.3 Activated C-H Compounds / 10 2.1.4 Alkenes / 11 2.1.5 Synthesis of =-Nitro Ketones / 16 2.1.6 Nitration of Alkyl Halides / 17 2.2 Synthesis of Nitro Compounds by Oxidation / 20 2.2.1 Oxidation of Amines / 20 2.2.2 Oxidation of Oximes / 21 3. The Nitro-Aldol (Henry) Reaction

30

3.1 Preparation of β-Nitro Alcohols / 31 3.2 Derivatives from β-Nitro Alcohols / 38 3.2.1 Nitroalkenes / 38 3.2.2 Nitroalkanes / 44 3.2.3 =-Nitro Ketones / 46 3.2.4 >-Amino Alcohols / 48 3.2.5 Nitro Sugars and Amino Sugars / 48 3.3 Stereoselective Henry Reactions and Applications to Organic Synthesis / 51 4. Michael Addition

70

4.1 Addition to Nitroalkenes / 70 v

vi

CONTENTS

4.1.1 Conjugate Addition of Heteroatom-Centered Nucleophiles / 70 4.1.2 Conjugate Addition of Heteroatom Nucleophiles and Subsequent Nef Reaction / 80 4.1.3 Conjugate Addition of Carbon-Centered Nucleophiles / 85 4.2 Addition and Elimination Reaction of β-Heterosubstituted Nitroalkenes / 100 4.3 Michael Addition of Nitroalkanes / 103 4.3.1 Intermolecular Addition / 103 4.3.2 Intramolecular Addition / 113 4.4 Asymmetric Michael Addition / 115 4.4.1 Chiral Alkenes and Chiral Nitro Compounds / 115 4.4.2 Chiral Catalysts / 118 5. Alkylation, Acylation, and Halogenation of Nitro Compounds

126

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5

Alkylation of Nitro Compounds / 126 Acylation of Nitroalkanes / 128 Ring Cleavage of Cyclic α-Nitro Ketones (Retro-Acylation) / 131 Alkylation of Nitro Compounds via Alkyl Radicals / 133 Alkylation of Nitro Compounds Using Transition Metal Catalysis / 138 5.5.1 Butadiene Telomerization / 138 5.5.2 Pd-Catalyzed Allylic C-Alkylation of Nitro Compounds / 140 5.6 Arylation of Nitro Compounds / 147 5.7 Introduction of Heteroatoms to Nitroalkanes / 149 6 . Conversion of Nitro Compounds into Other Compounds

159

6.1 Nef Reaction (Aldehydes, Ketones, and Carboxylic Acids) / 159 6.1.1 Treatment With Acid (Classical Procedure) / 159 6.1.2 Oxidative Method / 160 6.1.3 Reductive Method / 164 6.1.4 Direct Conversion of Nitroalkenes to Carbonyl Compounds / 165 6.2 Nitrile Oxides and Nitriles / 167 6.3 Reduction of Nitro Compounds into Amines / 170 6.3.1 Ar-NH2 From Ar-NO2 / 170 6.3.2 R-NH2 From R-NO2 / 172 6.3.3 Oximes, Hydroxylamines, and Other Nitrogen Derivatives / 175 7. Substitution and Elimination of NO2 in R–NO2 7.1 R–Nu from R–NO2 / 182 7.1.1 Radical Reactions (SRN1) / 182 7.1.2 Ionic Process / 185 7.1.3 Intramolecular Nucleophilic Substitution Reaction / 191 7.1.4 Allylic Rearrangement / 192 7.2 R–H from R–NO2 / 193 7.2.1 Radical Denitration / 193 7.2.2 Ionic Denitration / 211 7.3 Alkenes from R–NO2 / 214

182

CONTENTS

vii

7.3.1 Radical Elimination / 214 7.3.2 Ionic Elimination of Nitro Compounds / 218 8. Cycloaddition Chemistry of Nitro Compounds

231

8.1 Diels-Alder Reactions / 231 8.1.1 Nitroalkenes Using Dienophiles / 231 8.1.2 Asymmetric Diels-Alder Reaction / 243 8.2 1,3-Dipolar Cycloaddition / 249 8.2.1 Nitrones / 249 8.2.2 Nitrile Oxides / 258 8.2.3 Nitronates / 267 8.3 Nitroalkenes as Heterodienes in Tandem [4+2]/[3+2] Cycloaddition / 274 8.3.1 Nitroalkenes as Heterodienes / 275 8.3.2 Tandem [4+2]/[3+2] Cycloaddition of Nitroalkenes / 279 9. Nucleophilic Aromatic Displacement

302

9.1 SNAr / 302 9.2 Nucleophilic Aromatic Substitution of Hydrogen (NASH) / 309 9.2.1 Carbon Nucleophiles / 310 9.2.2 Nitrogen and Other Heteroatom Nucleophiles / 316 9.2.3 Applications to Synthesis of Heterocyclic Compounds / 318 10. Synthesis of Heterocyclic Compounds

325

10.1 Pyrroles / 325 10.2 Synthesis of Indoles / 338 10.3 Synthesis of Other Nitrogen Heterocycles / 346 10.3.1 Three-Membered Ring / 346 10.3.2 Five- and Six-Membered Saturated Rings / 346 10.3.3 Miscellaneous / 355 Index

365

SERIES FOREWORD In the organic nitro chemistry era of the fifties and early sixties, a great emphasis of the research was directed toward the synthesis of new compounds that would be useful as potential ingredients in explosives and propellants. In recent years, the emphasis of research has been directed more and more toward utilizing nitro compounds as reactive intermediates in organic synthesis. The activating effect of the nitro group is exploited in carrying out many organic reactions, and its facile transformation into various functional groups has broadened the importance of nitro compounds in the synthesis of complex molecules. It is the purpose of the series to review the field of organic nitro chemistry in its broadest sense by including structurally related classes of compounds such as nitroamines, nitrates, nitrones, and nitrile oxides. It is intended that the contributors, who are active investigators in various facets of the field, will provide a concise presentation of recent advances that have generated a renaissance in nitro chemistry research. Henry Feuer Purdue University

ix

PREFACE The purpose of this book is to emphasize recent important advances in organic synthesis using nitro compounds. Historically, it was aromatic nitro compounds that were prominent in organic synthesis. In fact they have been extensively used as precursors of aromatic amines and their derivatives, and their great importance in industrial and laboratory applications has remained. This book is not intended to be a comprehensive review of established procedures, but it aims to emphasize new important methods of using nitro compounds in organic synthesis. The most important progress in the chemistry of nitro compounds is the improvement of their preparations; this is discussed in chapter 2. Environmentally friendly methods for nitration are emphasized here. In recent years, the importance of aliphatic nitro compounds has greatly increased, due to the discovery of new selective transformations. These topics are discussed in the following chapters: Stereoselective Henry reaction (chapter 3.3), Asymmetric Micheal additions (chapter 4.4), use of nitroalkenes as heterodienes in tandem [4+2]/[3+2] cycloadditions (chapter 8) and radical denitration (chapter 7.2). These reactions discovered in recent years constitute important tools in organic synthesis. They are discussed in more detail than the conventional reactions such as the Nef reaction, reduction to amines, synthesis of nitro sugars, alkylation and acylation (chapter 5). Concerning aromatic nitro chemistry, the preparation of substituted aromatic compounds via the SNAr reaction and nucleophilic aromatic substitution of hydrogen (VNS) are discussed (chapter 9). Preparation of heterocycles such as indoles, are covered (chapter 10). Noboru Ono Matsuyama, Ehime

xi

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Mr. Satoshi Ito, a graduate student in my group, has drawn all figures. It would have been impossible to complete the task of writing this book without his assistance. I would like to dedicate this book to the late Dr. Nathan Kornblum whom I met 30 years ago at Purdue University. Since then I have been engaged in the chemistry of nitro compounds. It is a pleasure to express my gratitude to all persons who contributed directly or indirectly to the accomplishment of the task. Dr. Henry Feuer advised me to write this monograph and also provided many helpful suggestions, for which I thank him. Thanks to professors Node, Vasella, Ballini, Ohno and Ariga, who kindly sent me their papers. I also express my gratitude to Dr. H. Uno for his careful proofreading. Finally, thanks to my wife Yoshiko and daughter Hiroko for their constant encouragement.

Professors Kornblum and Ono.

xiii

ABBREVIATIONS Ac AIBN Ar 9-BBN BINAP BINOL Boc Bn = Bzl Bu BuLi Bz CAN CTAB Cbz DBN DBU DCC DDQ DEAD DMAP DME DMF DMI DMSO dba d.e. d.s. dppe dppp dppb dppf DABCO E Et e.e. HMDS Im LDA L-Selectide MCPBA

acetyl α,α-azobisisobutyronitrile aryl 9-borabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane 1,1′-bisnaphthalene-2,2′-diyl-bisdiphenylphosphine 1,1′-bi-2-naphthol tert-butoxycarbonyl benzyl butyl n-butyllithium benzoyl ceric ammonium nitrate cetyltrimethylammonium bromide benzyloxycarbonyl 1,8-diazabicyclo[4.3.0]nonene-5 1,8-diazabicylo[5.4.0]undecene-7 dicyclohexylcarbodiimide 2,3-dichloro-5,6-dicyano-1,4-benzoquinone diethylazodicarboxylate 4-N,N-dimethylaminopyridine dimethoxyethane N,N-dimethylformamide 1,3-dimethyl-2-imdazolizinone dimethyl sulfoxide dibenzylideneacetone diastereomeric excess diastereoselectivity 1,2-bis(diphenylphosphino)ethane 1,3-bis(diphenylphosphino)propane 1,4-bis(diphenylphosphino)butane 1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene 1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane electrophiles ethyl enantiomeric excess hexamethyldisilazane 1-imidazolyl lithium diisopropylamide lithium tri-sec-butyl borohydride m-chloroperbenzoic acid xv

xvi

ABBREVIATIONS

Me MEM MOM NBS NMO Nu PCC Phth PMB PNB TBDMS TMG TBAF TFA TFAA THF Tf THP Tr TMEDA TMS Tol Ts SET

methyl 2-methoxyethoxymethyl methoxymethyl N-bromosuccinimide N-methylmorpholine N-oxide nucleophiles pyridinium chlorochromate phthaloyl p-methoxybenzyl p-nitrobenzyl tert-butyldimethylsilyl tetramethylguanidine tetrabutylammonium fluoride trifluoroacetic acid trifluoroacetic anhydride tetrahydro+furan trifluoromethanesulfonyl tetrahydropyranyl trityl tetramethylethylenediamide trimethylsilyl p-tolyl p-tolenesulfonyl, tosyl single electron transfer reaction

The Nitro Group in Organic Synthesis. Noboru Ono Copyright © 2001 Wiley-VCH ISBNs: 0-471-31611-3 (Hardback); 0-471-22448-0 (Electronic)

1 INTRODUCTION The remarkable synthetic importance of nitro compounds has ensured long-standing studies of their utilization in organic synthesis. Historically, nitro compounds, especially aromatic nitro compounds, are important for precursors of azo dyes and explosives. Of course, the importance of nitro compounds as materials for dyes and explosives has not been changed; in addition, they have proven to be valuable reagents for synthesis of complex target molecules. The versatility of nitro compounds in organic synthesis is largely due to their easy availability and transformation into a variety of diverse functionalities. Preparation and reaction of nitro compounds are summarized in Schemes 1.1 and 1.2. Although there are many excellent books and reviews concerning nitro compounds, as listed in the references, the whole aspect of synthetic utility of nitro compounds has not been documented. This book has paid special emphasis to newly developing areas of nitro compounds such as radical reaction of nitro compounds, the stereoselective nitro-aldol reaction, and environmentally friendly chemistry (green chemistry). The control of the stereochemistry of the reactions involving nitro compounds is a quite recent progress. Furthermore, the reactions of nitro compounds have been regarded as non-selective and dangerous processes. However, clean Ar–H R–H

Ar–NH2 R–NH2

R NO2

R CH

Ar NO2 R CHO CH3NO2

NOH

R NO2 RN3 R X X = Br, I, OTs Scheme 1.1. Preparation of nitro compounds

1

2

INTRODUCTION

Michael addition R NH2 Ar NH2

Cyclo addition

R H

R NO2 or Ar NO2

Nitro-aldol reaction

R Nu, alkenes

R′CHO

R′CNO R′CO2H

Scheme 1.2. Reaction of nitro compounds

synthesis, synthesis in water or without solvents, the use of a fluorous phase, waste minimization, and highly selective reactions have been devised in many cases using nitro compounds. Such recent progresses are described in this book. General reviews for preparation of nitro compounds1 and for the reaction of nitro compounds2–5 are listed in the references.

REFERENCES 1. Houben-Weyl: Methoden der Organische Chemie, edited by E. Muller, and Georg Thieme Verlag, Stuttgardt, vol 10/1 (1971) and vol E16D/1 (1992). 2. The Chemistry of the Nitro and Nitroso Group (parts 1 and 2), edited by H. Feuer, Wiley Interscience, New York, 1969/1970. 3. Seebach, D., E. W. Colvin, F. Lehr, and T. Weller. Chimia, !!, 1 (1979). 4. Rosini, G., and R. Ballini. Synthesis, 833 (1988). 5. Barrett, A. G. M., and G. G. Graboski. Chem. Rev.,&$, 751 (1986).

The Nitro Group in Organic Synthesis. Noboru Ono Copyright © 2001 Wiley-VCH ISBNs: 0-471-31611-3 (Hardback); 0-471-22448-0 (Electronic)

2 PREPARATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS 2.1 NITRATION OF HYDROCARBONS

2.1.1 Aromatic Compounds Aromatic nitration is an immensely important industrial process. The nitro aromatic compounds are themselves used as explosives and act as key substrates for the preparation of useful materials such as dyes, pharmaceuticals, perfumes, and plastics. Therefore, nitration of hydrocarbons, particularly of aromatic compounds, is probably one of the most widely studied organic reactions.1,2 The classical nitration method usually requires the use of an excess of nitric acid and the assistance of strong acids such as concentrated sulfuric acid. Although this process is still in use in industries, nitrations are generally notoriously polluting processes, generating nitrogen oxide (NOx) fumes and large quantities of waste acids. Although many methods to improve the classical nitration method have been reported,1,2 there is a great need for new nitration methods that can overcome such problems. Nitration has been well documented in the book by Olah, in which the following nitrating agents are discussed:1 (a) HNO3 + acid catalyst (H2SO4, H2PO4, polyphosphoric acid, HClO4, HF, BF3, CH3SO3H, CF3SO3H, FSO3H, NafionH); (b) RONO2 + acid catalyst (H2SO4, AlCl3, SnCl4, BF3); (c) RCO2NO2; (d) NO2Cl + acid catalyst (AlCl3, TiCl4); (e) N2O5 or N2O4 + acid catalyst (H2SO4, HNO3, AlCl3 et al.); (f) NO+2BF −4, NO+2PF −6; and (g) N-nitropyridinum salts. A new nitration process, that is environmentally friendly, has been the focus of recent research. Clark has pointed out that aromatic nitration, a particularly wasteful and hazardous industrial process, has benefited relatively little from the environmentally friendly catalytic methods.3 An environmentally friendly nitration process requires high regioselectivity (ortho to para) and avoidance of excess acids to minimize waste. The use of solid acid catalysts is potentially attractive because of the ease of removal and recycling of the catalyst and the possibility that the solid might influence the selectivity.3 The use of Nafion-H and other polysulfonic acid resins reduces the corrosive nature of the reaction mixture, although it does not improve regioselectivity.4 A new class of solid acid catalyst systems, a high surface-area Nafion resin entrapped within a porous silica network, has been developed to mono-nitrate benzene in 82% conversion.5 Copper nitrate supported on montmorillonite K-10 nitrates toluene in the presence of acetic anhydride to produce high para selectivity.6 Nitration of benzocy3

4

PREPARATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

clobutene using acetyl nitrate generated in situ by a continuous process in the presence of montmorillonite K-10 clay gives 3-nitrobicyclo[5.4.0]-1,3,5-triene in 60% yield.7,8 High para selectivity (95%) is reported in the nitration of toluene catalyzed by zeolite ZSM-5 and alkyl nitrate.9 The selective nitration of 4-hydroxbenzaldehyde to give the 3-nitro derivative has been achieved using iron(III) nitrate and a clay in quantitative yield.10 Smith and coworkers have screened the solid catalysts for aromatic nitration, and found that zeolite β gives the best result. Simple aromatic compounds such as benzene, alkylbenzenes, halogenobenzenes, and certain disubstituted benzenes are nitrated in excellent yields with high regioselectivity under mild conditions using zeolite β as a catalyst and a stoichiometric quantity of nitric acid and acetic anhydride.11 For example, nitration of toluene gives a quantitative yield of mononitrotoluenes, of which 79% is 4-nitrotoluene. Nitration of fluorobenzene under the same conditions gives p-fluoronitrobenzene exclusively (Eqs. 2.1 and 2.2) NO2 H3C

HNO3, Ac2O

H3C

H3C +

Zeolite-β, 0–20 ºC, 30 min

+ NO2

18%

79%

3%

(2.1)

NO2 F

HNO3, Ac2O

H3C

NO2

F

F

NO2

F +

+

Zeolite-β, 20 ºC, 30 min

NO2 0%

6%

(2.2)

94%

To avoid excessive acid waste, lanthanide(III) triflates are used as recyclable catalysts for economic aromatic nitration. Among a range of lanthanide(III) triflates examined, the ytterbium salt is the most effective. A catalytic quantity (1–10 mol%) of ytterbium(III) triflate catalyzes the nitration of simple aromatics with excellent conversions using an equivalent of 69% nitric acid in refluxing 1,2-dichloromethane for 12 h. The only by-product of the reaction is water, and the catalyst can be recovered by simple evaporation of the separated aqueous phase and reused repeatedly for further nitration.12 However, this catalyst is not effective for less reactive aromatics such as o-nitrotoluene. In such cases, hafnium(IV) and zirconium(IV) triflates are excellent catalysts (10 mol%) for mononitration of less reactive aromatics. The catalysts are readily recycled from the aqueous phase and reused (Eqs. 2.3 and 2.4).12 NO2

H3C

HNO3 Yb(OTf) 3 ClCH2CH2Cl reflux

H3C

HNO3

H3C

NO2

+

+ NO2

52%

7%

41% NO2

NO2

NO2 H3C

H3C

(2.3)

H3C

H3C +

Zr(OTf)4

NO2 65%

O2N

(2.4)

35%

Phenols are easily mononitrated by sodium nitrate in a two-phase system (water-ether) in the presence of HCl and a catalytic amount of La(NO3)3.13 Various lanthanide nitrates have been used in the nitration of 3-substituted phenols to give regioselectively the 3-substituted 5nitrophenols.14

2.1

5

NITRATION OF HYDROCARBONS

Vanadium oxytrinitrate is an easy to handle reagent that can be used to nitrate a range of substituted aromatic compounds in dichloromethane at room temperature, leading to >99% yields of nitration products (Eq. 2.5).16 NO2 H3C

VO(NO3)3 CH2Cl2, RT, 5 min

H3C

H3C

H3C

NO2

+

+

50%

NO2 47%

3%

(2.5)

A novel, mild system for the direct nitration of calixarenes has been developed using potassium nitrate and aluminum chloride at low temperature. The side products of decomposition formed under conventional conditions are not observed in this system, and the p-nitrocalixarenes are isolated in 75–89% yields.17 Such Friedel-Crafts-type nitration using nitryl chloride and aluminum chloride affords a convenient system for aromatic nitration.18 Nitryl chloride was previously prepared either by the oxidation of nitrosyl chloride or by the reaction of chlorosulfonic acid with nitric acid. However, these procedures are inconvenient and dangerous. Recently, a mixture of sodium nitrate and trimethysilyl chloride (TMSCl) has been developed as a convenient method for the in situ generation of nitryl chloride (Eq. 2.6). NO2 TMSCl, NaNO3 AlCl3, CCl4 0 ºC

(2.6) 97%

Nitration with dinitrogen pentoxide (N2O5) has increased in its importance as an environmentally cleaner alternative to conventional procedures. It might become the nitration method of the future. Dinitrogen pentoxide can be produced either by ozone oxidation of dinitrogen tetraoxide (N2O4) or electrolysis of N2O4 dissolved in nitric acid.19 Dinitrogen pentoxide (prepared by the oxidation of N2O4 with O3) in nitric acid is a potent nitration system. It can be used for nitrating aromatic compounds at lower temperatures than conventional system. It is also convenient for preparing explosives that are unstable in nitrating media containing sulfuric acid (Eq. 2.7).20 C2H5

C2H5

C2H5 N2O5, HNO 3

N2O5, HNO 3

5 ºC, 5 min

25 ºC, 10 min

NO2

(2.7) NO2

NO2

Dinitrogen pentoxide in liquid sulfur dioxide has been developed as a new nitration method with a wide potential for aromatic nitration, including deactivated aromatics, as shown in Eq. 2.8.21 Electrophilic aromatic substitution of the pyridine ring system takes place under forcing conditions with very low yields of substituted products. Thus, nitration of pyridine with HNO3/H2SO4 gives 3-nitropyridine in 3% yield. Bakke has reported a very convenient procedure for the nitration of pyridine using N2O5. Pyridines are nitrated in the β-position by the reaction with N2O5 in MeNO2 followed by treatment with an aqueous solution of sodium bisulfate (Eq. 2.9). The reaction proceeds via the N-nitropyridinium ion.22 O 2N

CO2Me

CO2Me

N2O5, SO2 –78 ºC CO2Me

(2.8) CO2Me 90%

6

PREPARATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

NO2 N2O5 MeNO2, NaHCO3

N

(2.9)

N 68%

Nitrogen dioxide, in the presence of ozone, is a good nitrating system for various aromatics.23 Suzuki and coworkers have proposed a mechanism that proceeds in a dual mode, depending on the oxidation potential of the aromatic substrate; nitrogen dioxide reacts with ozone to form nitrogen trioxide, which oxidizes the aromatic substrate to form a radical cation, an intermediate in the ring substitution. In the absence of an appropriate oxidizable substrate, the nitrogen trioxide reacts with another nitrogen dioxide to form dinitrogen pentoxide, which is a powerful nitrating agent in the presence of an acid. The mechanism of this nitration is well discussed in Ref. 27. This method has several merits over the conventional ones. As the reaction proceeds under neutral conditions, acid-sensitive compounds are nitrated without decomposition of acid-sensitive groups.24a The regioselectivity of this nitration process differs from that of the conventional nitration process, in that, for example, substrates bearing an electron-withdrawing group are preferentially nitrated in the ortho-position (Eqs. 2.10 and 2.11).25 O O O Me

NO2-O3

O Me

(2.10)

CH2Cl2, 0°C NO2 58% (o:m:p = 22:19:59) O

O NO2-O3 –10 ºC

(2.11) NO2

o- 52%, m- 48%

Reaction of benzanthrone with nitrogen dioxide alone or in admixture with ozone gives a mixture of nitrated products including 3-nitrobenzanthrone, which is a new class of powerful direct-acting mutagens of atmospheric origin (Eq. 2.12).26 NO2 NO2-O3

O

(2.12) O

The regioselectivity of aromatic nitration depends on the conditions of nitration. Discussion of the regiochemistry of nitration is voluminous and is beyond the scope of this book; Ref. 1 and other appropriate references should be utilized for this discussion. Some recent interesting related topics are described here. The regiochemistry on the nitration of naphthalenes with various nitrating agents is compared. Unusually high 1-nitro-to-2-nitro isomer ratios are observed in the nitration with NO2 and O3, which proceeds via radical cation intermediates.27 In a practical synthesis of polycyclic aromatics, regioselectivity of nitration is important. Classical nitration of azatricyclic systems using potassium nitrate and sulfuric acid yield mainly 9-nitro derivatives via the ionic process. However, the use of tetrabutylammonium nitrate (TBAN) and trifluoroacetic anhydride (TFAA) gives exclusively the 3-nitro derivatives. It is

2.1

7

NITRATION OF HYDROCARBONS

suggested that the nitrating species in this case is the nitrosyl radical, generated from the homolytic decomposition of the TBAN/TFAA adduct (Eq. 2.13).28 The easily prepared dinitrogen tetroxide complexes of iron and nickel nitrates have been shown to selectively mono- or dinitrate phenolic compounds in high yields.29 It is well recognized that NO2 is a very reactive radical taking part in atmospheric chemistry. Atmospheric reactions of polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons forming mutagenic nitro derivatives have also been investigated.30 Cl

O2N N

Cl

Cl KNO3

N

N

H2SO4 N CO2R

N CO2R

N CO2R

44%

NO2

TBAN TFA

(2.13)

76%

Recently, nitration of organolithiums and Grignards with N2O4 has been developed for the preparation of certain kinds of nitro compounds (Eqs. 2.14 and 2.15).31 The success of this process depends on the reaction conditions (low temperature) and the structure of substrates. For example, 3-nitrothiophene can be obtained in 70% overall yield from 3-bromothiophene; this is far superior to the older method. 3-Nitroveratrole cannot be prepared usefully by classical electrophilic nitration of veratrole, but it can now be prepared by direct ortho-lithiation followed by low-temperature N2O4 nitration. The mechanism is believed to proceed by dinitrogen tetroxide oxidation of the anion to a radical, followed by the radical’s combination. Br

NO2 1) n-BuLi 2) N2O4, –78 ºC

S

(2.14)

S 77% NO2

OMe OMe

OMe

1) n-BuLi

(2.15)

2) N2O4, –78 ºC

OMe 67%

Nitration of aromatic compounds published in recent years is summarized in Table 2.1.

2.1.2 Alkanes In contrast to the nitration of aromatic hydrocarbons, saturated aliphatic hydrocarbons are inert toward conventional nitrating agents under ambient conditions. Under forced conditions, they undergo cleavage of the C-C bond to give a complex set of oxidation products and lower nitroalkanes. The nitration in the gas phase has been used in industry since the 1940s, producing nitromethane, nitroethane, 1-nitropropane, 2-nitropropane, 1-nitrobutane and 2-nitrobutane.1 Although this method is important for the preparation of nitroalkanes in industry, it is not practical for the laboratory preparation of nitroalkanes. Electrophilic nitration of alkanes is a more difficult process than aromatic nitration due to the fast formation of byproducts. Olah has reported nitration of adamantane with nitronium salts in aprotic solvents at ambient temperature, but the yield of 1-nitroadamantane is only 10%.32 Since then, many attempts of nitration of adamantane have been tried, and the yield has been improved to 60–70% by using purified nitrile-free nitromethane as a solvent.33 This reaction proceeds by electrophilic substi-

8

PREPARATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Table 2.1 Nitration of aromatic compounds Substrate

Reagent

Condition

CH3

CH3

HNO3, Ac2O, K-10

CCl4 reflux

HNO3, Ac2O, K-10

CCl4 reflux

HNO3, Ac2O, Zeolite β

0–20 °C 30 min

HNO3, Yb(Otf)3 (10 mol%)

ClCH2CH2Cl reflux

CH3

HNO3, Me3SiCl AlCl3

CCl4 0 °C, 1 h

VO(NO3)3

CH2Cl2 RT, 6 min

VO(NO3)3

CH2Cl2 RT, 15 min

o-31 m-2 p-67

Ref.

(75–98)

6

(60)

8

o-18 m-3 p-79

NO2

(99)

11

CH3 NO2

o-52 m-7 p-79

(95)

12

CH3 NO2

o-42 m-3 p-55

(90)

15

o-50 m-3 p-47

NO2

(99)

16

NHAc

NHAc

o-46 p-54

(85)

16

NO2

o-43 p-57

(99)

16

NO2

o-51 m-6 p-43

(99)

24b

o-22 m-66 p-13

(21)

24b

(98)

24c

Cl

Cl

VO(NO3)3

CH3

Yield (%)a

O2N

CH3

CH3

CH3

NO2

CH3

CH3

CH3

Product

NO2, O3

CH2Cl2 RT, 20 min

CH2Cl2 0 °C, 1 h

NO2, O3 pyridine (3 equiv)

CH2Cl2 0 °C, 2 h

NO2, O3

CH2Cl2 0 °C, 2.5 h

CH3 NO2

CH3 NO2

NHAc

NHAc

NO2

o-81 p-19

2.1

NITRATION OF HYDROCARBONS

9

Table 2.1 Continued Substrate

Reagent

Condition

Yield (%)a

Ref.

(99)

24a

COMe

COMe

NO2, O3

CH2Cl2 –10 °C, 4 h

NO2 Cl

Cl

NO2, O3

CH2Cl2 0 °C, 3 h

NO2 CO2H

CO2H

OCOMe

Product

NO2, O3

ClCH2CH2Cl 0 °C, 1.5 h

NO2, O3

CH2Cl2 0 °C, 2 h

NO2 OCOMe NO2 CH2OMe

CH2OMe

NO2, O3

CH2Cl2 0 °C, 2 h

NO2

o-52 m-48

27

o-43 m-1 p-56

(97)

o-29 m-69 p-2

(98)

24d

(100)

24e

(99)

24f

o-60 p-40

o-69 m-4 p-27

a

o-, m-, p-ratio and yield.

tution at single bonds. On the other hand, radical nitration of adamantane using N2O5 gives a mixture of several compounds arising from the N- and O-attacks at the secondary and tertiary positions.34 Selective N- and O-functionalization of adamantane has been reported. In the presence of ozone at –78 °C, nitrogen dioxide selectively reacts with adamantane at the bridgehead position to give the nitrated product, whereas, in the presence of methanesulfonic acid at 0 °C, N2O5 reacts with this hydrocarbon at the same position to give the nitrooxylated product (Eq. 2.16).35 NO2

ONO2 N2O5

NO2-O3

MeSO3H 0 ºC, 1 h

–78 ºC, 0.5 h

(2.16) 90%

36

37

Nitrodesilylation (Eq. 2.17) and nitrodestanylation (Eq. 2.18) are efficient methods for the preparation of some kinds of nitroalkanes from readily available alkylsilanes or allylstannanes. Similar nitration also takes place at the vinylic positions (see Eq. 2.36 in Section 2.1.4). SiMe3

NO2

NO2BF4 80%

SiMe3

C(NO2)4 DMSO, 17 ºC

NO2 56%

(2.17)

(2.18)

10

PREPARATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

2.1.3 Activated C-H Compounds The nitration of active methylene compounds generally proceeds via the reaction of carbanionic intermediates with an electrophilic nitrating agent such as alkyl nitrate (alkyl nitrate nitration). Details of this process are well documented in the reviews.38 The alkyl nitrate nitration method has been used extensively for the preparation of arylnitromethanes. The toluene derivatives, which have electron-withdrawing groups are nitrated with alkyl nitrates in the presence of KNH2 in liquid ammonia (Eqs. 2.19 and 2.20).39 O2NCH2

H3C

1) KNH2, NH3

(2.19)

2) C3H7ONO2

CN

CN 47% CH2NO2

CH3 1) KNH2, NH3 2) C3H7ONO2

(2.20)

N

N

66%

Nitration of delocalized carbanions with alkyl nitrates in the presence of bases provides a useful method for the preparation of nitro compounds. As a typical example, cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, and cyclooctanone react with amyl nitrate in the presence of potassium t-butoxide in THF at a low temperature (–30 °C) to give α,α-dinitrocycloalkanones in 35–72% yield. The products are converted into α,ω-dinitroalkanes. Thus, the potassium salt of 2,6-dinitrocyclohexanone is converted to 1,5-dinitropentane in 78% yield on treatment with acid. In a similar way, 1,5-dinitropentane and 1,4-dinitrobutane are prepared in about 70% yield.40 Dianions derived from carboxylic acids are nitrated to give nitroalkanes in 45–68% yield (Eq. 2.21).41 Arylnitromethanes are readily prepared by this method (Eq. 2.22).42 This method is useful for the preparation of arylnitromethanes with electron-rich aryl groups, which are generally difficult to prepare by nitration of the corresponding halides. R-CH2CO2H

1) LDA 2) C3H7ONO2

(2.21)

R-CH2NO2

R- = n-C7H15- (68%), n-C10H21- (66%), CH3(CH2)6CH=CHCH2- (40%) CH2CO2H

CH2NO2 1) LDA 2) C3H7ONO2

MeO

(2.22)

MeO 72%

The sodium salts of 1,3,5,7-tetranitrocubane and 1,2,3,5,7-pentanitrocubane can be nitrated successfully with N2O4 in THF at low temperature. These reactions proceed by N2O4 oxidation of the anion to the radical and its combination with NO2 (Eq. 2.23).43 Such highly nitrated cubanes are predicted to be shock-insensitive, very dense, high-energy compounds with great potential as explosives and propellants. NO2 O2N

NO2 Na

O2N

N2O4

O2N O2N

NO2

NO2 N2O4

O2N

NO2

O2N NO2

NO2

(2.23)

2.1

NITRATION OF HYDROCARBONS

11

1-Nitrocyclopropane-1-carboxylate is prepared in 71% yield by nitration of the enolate derived from the cyclopropane carboxylate with isoamyl nitrate (Eq. 2.24). It is a precursor of α-amino acid, containing a cyclopropane ring.44

CO2R

1) t-BuLi, –78 ºC

CO2R

2)

NO2

ONO2

R=

(2.24)

OMe

71%

2.1.4 Alkenes Nitration of alkenes gives conjugated nitroalkenes, which are useful and versatile intermediates in organic synthesis. Nitroalkenes are generally prepared either by nitration of alkenes or dehydration of 2-nitro alcohols formed via the Henry reaction (see Section 3.2.1). Nitration of alkenes with HNO3 gives nitroalkenes in moderate yields, but this process has not been used for organic synthesis in a laboratory because of the lack of selectivity and decomposition of alkenes. Early references are found in Ref. 1. Nitration of the steroid canrenone using nitric acid and acetic anhydride occurs at the 4-position in 52% yield (Eq. 2.25).45 This regiochemistry is noteworthy; early papers on nitration of the steroids with HNO3 report the nitration at the 6-position.46 O

O O H H

H

O HNO3, Ac2O

H

CH2Cl2 1 h, 25 ºC

H

H

(2.25)

O

O

NO2

A convenient preparative method for conjugated nitroalkenes has been developed based on the reaction of nitrogen oxides. Nitric oxide (NO) is commercially available and used in the industry for the mass production of nitric acid. Nitric oxide is currently one of the most studied molecules in the fields of biochemistry, medicine, and environmental science.47 Thus, the reaction of NO with alkenes under aerobic conditions is of a renewed importance.48 There are many reports for nitration of alkenes using various nitrating agents, which proceeds via an ionic or radical addition process.49 Nitration of cyclohexene with acetyl nitrate gives a mixture of β-and γ-nitrocyclohexenes, 1,2-nitroacetate, and 1,2-nitronitrate. This reaction is not a simple ionic or radical process; instead, [2+2] cycloaddition of nitryl cation is proposed.50 Two important methods for the preparation of nitroalkenes are reported in Collective Volume 6 in Organic Synthesis. Methyl 3-nitroacrylate, which is a very important reagent for organic synthesis, is prepared by the reaction of methyl acrylate with N2O4 in the presence of iodine, which is followed by the subsequent treatment with sodium acetate (Eq. 2.26).51 The reaction of alkenes with nitrogen oxides in the presence of oxygen gives a mixture of vicinal nitro nitrates and dinitro compounds, which are precursors of nitroalkenes. Thus, 1-nitrocyclooctene is prepared in 63–64% yield by the reaction of cyclooctene and N2O4 in the presence of O2 (Table 2.2).52

CH2=CHCO2Me

1) N2O4, I2 2) AcONa

O2N H

H CO2Me

(2.26)

12

PREPARATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Table 2.2 Preparation of cyclic nitroalkenes via nitration Cyclic alkenes

Reagent

Product

NO Al2O3

NO2

NO2

NO H-zeolite

1) PhSeBr, AgNO2 HgCl2 2) H2O2

CH3 SiMe3

NO2

NO2

C(NO2)4, DMSO 1) t-BuLi/THF Me3SnCl 2) C(NO2)4, DMSO AcONO2 1) KNO2, 18-crown-6, I2, THF 2) pyridine

53

76

54

86

54

63

52

81

66

94

37

72

72

73

73

90

64

96

56

NO2

1) N2O4, O2 2) Et3N

O

Ref.

86

NO2

NO H-zeolite

SnMe3

Yield (%)

O NO2 CH3 NO2

NO2

NaNO2 Ce(NH4)3(NO3)6 AcOH

NO2

NaNO2, NaNO3 anodic oxidation

NO2

41

59

NaNO2, I2 HOCH2CH2OH

NO2

72

63

92

74

90

74

1) NaNO2, HgCl2 2) NaOH 1) NaNO2, HgCl2 2) NaOH

NO2

NO2

2.1

NITRATION OF HYDROCARBONS

13

A very attractive method for the preparation of nitroalkenes, which is based on the reaction with NO, has been reported. Treatment of alkenes at ambient pressure of nitrogen monoxide (NO) at room temperature gives the corresponding nitroalkenes in fairly good yields along with β-nitroalcohols in a ratio of about 8 to 2. The nitroalcohol by-products are converted into the desired nitroalkenes by dehydration with acidic alumina in high total yield. This simple and convenient nitration procedure is applied successfully to the preparation of nitroalkenes derived from various terminal alkenes or styrenes (Eq. 2.27).53 This process is modified by the use of HY-zeolites instead of alumina. The lack of corrosiveness and the ability to regenerate and reuse the catalyst make this an attractive system (Eq. 2.28).54 NO2 NO acidic Al2O3

(2.27) 95% NO2

NO H-zeolite

(2.28) 86%

Addition of the NO2 radical to alkenes, followed by oxidation to a carbocation or by halogenation is now widely used for the preparation of nitroalkenes. However, the use of dinitrogen tetroxide is not simple in the laboratory because N2O4 is very toxic and a small syringe for this gas is rather expensive. To avoid the use of N2O4, several nitrating systems using liquid or solid reagents have been developed. The direct conversion of styrene to β-nitrostyrene using clay doped with nitrate salts has been reported. Styrene and clayfen (iron nitrate on clay) or clayan (ammonium nitrate on clay) are mixed well and then heated at 100–110 °C in solid state to give β-nitrostyrene in 68% yield.55a A more simple one-pot synthesis of β-nitrostyrene from styrene has been reported; β-nitrostyrene is prepared in 47% yield on treatment of styrene with CuO⋅HBF4, I2, and NaNO2 in MeCN at room temperature.55b Sonication of a chloroform solution containing the alkenes, NaNO2 (10 equiv), Ce(NH4)2(NO3)6 (2.0 equiv), and acetic acid (12 equiv) in a sealed tube at 25–73 °C provides an excellent way to prepare nitroalkenes. For example, cyclohexene is converted into 1-nitrocyclohexene in 96% yield by this method (Eq. 2.29).56 When the reaction is carried out in acetonitrile, the carbocation intermediates are trapped by acetonitrile to give nitroacetamides in good yield.57 Analogous nitroacetamidation is possible by using nitronium tetrafluoroborate and acetonitrile (Eq. 2.30).58 NO2

NaNO2, Ce(NH4)2(NO3)6

(2.29)

AcOH 96% NHAc

NO2BF4 Ph

MeCN

NO2

Ph

(2.30)

84%

Electrochemical oxidation of a mixture of alkenes, NaNO2 and NaNO3, in water is also a good method for the preparation of nitroalkenes.59 The regioselective addition of nitryl iodide to alkenes, followed by base-induced elimination, gives nitroalkenes. Nitryl iodide is generally prepared by the reaction of AgNO2 and iodine.

14

PREPARATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

The synthetic applications of this reagent to the synthesis of nitroalkenes have been known since the 1960s.60 Nitration of alkenes with nitryl iodide, generated in situ from iodine and silver nitrite, is convenient for the synthesis of β-nitrostyrenes with various functional groups.61 This method is applied to the synthesis of ortho-methoxylated phenylisopropylamines, which are potent serotonine agonists (Eq. 2.31).62 CH3

CH3

NO2 OMe

1) AgNO2, I2 OMe MeO

2) Et3N MeO

OMe

(2.31)

OMe 80%

Replacement of silver nitrite by inexpensive sodium or potassium nitrite enhances the utility of this process. Treatment of alkenes with sodium nitrite and iodine in ethyl acetate and water in the presence of ethylene glycol gives conjugated nitroalkenes in 49–82% yield.63 The method for generation of nitryl iodide is improved by the treatment of iodine with potassium nitrite complexed with 18-crown-6 in THF under sonication, as shown in Eq. 2.32.64 NO2

1) KNO2, I2, 18-crown-6, THF, RT, )))) 2) pyridine

(2.32) 90%

Nitrosulfonylation using sodium nitrite and sulfenyl halides65 or nitroselenation using phenylselenyl bromide, silver nitrite, and mercuric chloride,66 as shown in Eq. 2.33 may be useful for the preparation of conjugated nitroalkenes from alkenes. 2-Nitro-1,3-dienes are prepared from the corresponding conjugated 1,3-dienes via a nitroselenation-elimination sequence (Eq. 2.34).67 Such nitrodienes are of interest synthetically for further reaction with electron-rich alkenes like enol ethers or enamines.68 They are also transformed into synthetically useful 3,4-epoxy-3-nitro1-alkenes.69 On the other hand, the reaction of conjugated dienes with ammonium nitrate in trifluoroacetic anhydride gives 1-nitro-1,3-dienes in good yield (Eq. 2.35).70 Me3Si

1) PhSeBr

Me3Si

2) AgNO2/ HgCl2 3) H2O2

(2.33)

NO2 66%

1) PhSeBr 2) AgNO2/ HgCl2

(2.34)

O2N

O2N

SePh

NO2 NH4NO3, TFA HBF4, CH2Cl2 20 ºC, 15 h

(2.35) 70%

Cyclic nitroalkenes are prepared from cyclic ketones via nitration of vinylstannanes with tetranitromethane in DMSO, as shown in Eq. 2.36, where DMSO is a critical choice of solvent for replacing tin by nitro at the unsaturated carbon. The conversion of ketones to vinylstannanes

2.1

NITRATION OF HYDROCARBONS

15

can be performed in good yield via arylhydrazone intermediates.71 Regioselective nitration of 3-alkyl-1-benzofurans at the 2-position is also possible by stannylation and treatment with tetranitromethane in DMSO.72 SnMe3

NO2 C(NO2)4

(2.36)

DMSO 80%

The reaction of acetyl nitrate with cyclic vinylsilanes gives 1-nitrocycloalkenes or 1,1-dinitro 2-nitrated cycloalkanes, depending on the ring size, as shown in Eqs. 2.37 and 2.38.73 SiMe3

NO2 AcONO2

(2.37)

–15 ºC 73% NO2 SiMe3

NO2

AcONO2 –15 ºC

(2.38)

ONO2 70%

In 1978, Corey reported a general synthetic route for the conversion of alkenes to conjugated nitroalkenes via nitro-mercuration and demercuration.74 Since then, many chemists have used this method for the preparation of cyclic nitroalkenes such as 1-nitrocyclohexene. However, the use of mercury salts is not recommended even for the small-scale preparation of nitroalkenes. This reaction is not as clean as expected, and formidable efforts are required to remove the mercury in the waste. The synthesis of cyclic nitroalkenes via nitration of cycloalkenes is summarized in Table 2.2. Acyclic nitroalkenes are more readily prepared via the Henry reaction than by nitration of alkenes (see Section 3.2.1). Because nitration of alkenes with nitronium salts proceeds via carbocation intermediates, nitration of electron-deficient alkenes with nitronium salts is rare. Only a few cases are reported. The reaction of α,β-unsaturated esters with nitronium salts affords products via highly reactive α-carbonyl cations.75 Nitration of aromatics or alkenes with nitronium tetrafluoroborate gives a variety of nitro compounds.1 However, this process is not always useful because the reagent is expensive and very moisture sensitive. The difficulty is solved by the use of an electrochemically-generated nitronium salt. Anodic oxidation of an acetonitrile solution of nitrogen dioxide at constant current (500 mA/cm2) using a divided H-cell (Pt electrode, LiBF4 as electrolyte) gives a solution of NO2BF4, which effectively nitrates aromatics, enol silyl ethers, alkenes, and dienes to give, respectively, nitroaromatics, α-nitro ketones, vicinal nitroamides, and nitroacetamides.76 Nitration of acetylenes with nitryl iodide followed by elimination of HI gives nitroacetylenes, but nitroacetylenes are too thermally unstable to be useful for organic synthesis.77 Recently, nitro-trimethylsilyl-acetylenes are prepared as stable nitroacetylenes by the reaction of bis(trimethylsily)acetylene with nitronium tetrafluoroborate (Eq. 2.39).78 Me3Si

C

C

SiMe3

NO2BF4

Me3Si C 70%

C NO2

(2.39)

16

PREPARATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

2.1.5 Synthesis of =-Nitro Ketones Nitration of ketones or enol ethers provides a useful method for the preparation of α-nitro ketones. Direct nitration of ketones with HNO3 suffers from the formation of a variety of oxidative by-products. Alternatively, the conversion of ketones into their enolates, enol acetates, or enol ethers, followed by nitration with conventional nitrating agents such as acyl nitrates, gives α-nitro ketones (see Ref. 79, a 1980 review). The nitration of enol acetates of alkylated cyclohexanones with concentrated nitric acid in acetic anhydride at 15–22 °C leads to mixtures of cis- and trans-substituted 2-nitrocyclohexanones in 75–92% yield. 4-Monoalkylated acetoxycyclohexanes give mainly cis-compounds, and 3-monoalkylated ones yield trans-compounds (Eq. 2.40).80 O

OAc

NO2 HNO3-Ac2O

(2.40)

15–22 ºC R 75–92%

R

Nitration of the potassium enolates of cycloalkanones with pentyl nitrate81 or nitration of silyl enol ethers with nitronium tetrafluoroborate82 provides a method for the preparation of cyclic α-nitro ketones. Trifluoroacetyl nitrate generated from trifluoroacetic anhydride and ammonium nitrate is a mild and effective nitrating reagent for enol acetates (Eq. 2.41).83 O2N

OAc

O

(2.41)

(CF3CO)2O NH4NO3 H 100%

Cyclic and acyclic silyl enol ethers can be nitrated with tetranitromethane to give α-nitro ketones in 64–96% yield (Eqs. 2.42 and 2.43).84 The mechanism involves the electron transfer from the silyl enol ether to tetranitromethane. A fast homolytic coupling of the resultant cation radical of silyl enol ether with NO2 leads to α-nitro ketones. Tetranitromethane is a neutral reagent; it is commercially available or readily prepared.85 OSiMe3 R X X = H, OMe; R = H, Me

O R

C(NO2)4 DMSO

NO2

(2.42)

X 92–95%

O

OSiMe3 C(NO2)4 DMSO

NO2

(2.43)

90%

A novel one-pot synthesis of α-nitro ketones from alkenes has been observed on treatment with trimethylsilyl nitrate-chromium trioxide or a trimethylsilyl nitrate-DMSO reagent system (Eq. 2.44).86

2.1

Reagent

O

Me3SiONO2

17

NITRATION OF HYDROCARBONS

(2.44) NO2

Yield (%)

CrO3

61

DMSO

73

α-Nitro ketones, which are important intermediates for organic synthesis, are alternatively prepared either by oxidation of 2-nitroalcohols (see Section 3.2.3) or by acylation of nitroalkanes (see Section 5.2). Synthetic application of cyclic α-nitro ketones has been well summarized in recent reviews.87,88 Because α-nitrocycloalkanones are more readily prepared than nitrocycloalkenes, the former can be used as precursors for nitrocycloalkenes (Eq. 2.45).89 Sodium borohydride reduction of α-nitro ketones and successive dehydration with Ac2O N,N-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP) and basic alumina gives, in a one-pot procedure, conjugated nitrocycloalkenes. OH

O Me

NO2

NO2

Me

NaBH4

Ac2O

Me

NO2

DMAP Al2O3 65%

60%

(2.45)

Ring cleavage of cyclic 2-nitro ketones by external nucleophiles gives a variety of functionalized nitro compounds, ketones, or carboxylic acids. The ring cleavage of 2-nitrocycloalkanones with ROH-KF gives ω-nitro esters (Eq. 2.46).90 A significant improvement of this ring cleavage is obtained by using Amberlyst A-21.91 O NO 2

ROH KF

O 2N

CO2R

(2.46)

70–98%

2.1.6 Nitration of Alkyl Halides The reaction of alkyl halides with metal nitrites is one of the most important methods for the preparation of nitroalkanes. As a metal nitrite, silver nitrite (Victor-Meyer reaction), potassium nitrite, or sodium nitrite (Kornblum reaction) have been frequently used. The products are usually a mixture of nitroalkanes and alkyl nitrites, which are readily separated by distillation (Eq. 2.47). The synthesis of nitro compounds by this process is well documented in the reviews, and some typical cases are listed in Table 2.3.92a Primary and secondary alkyl iodides and bromides as well as sulfonate esters give the corresponding nitro compounds in 50–70% yields on treatment with NaNO2 in DMF or DMSO. Some of them are described precisely in vol 4 of Organic Synthesis. For example, 1,4-dinitrobutane is prepared in 41–46% yield by the reaction of 1,4-diiodobutane with silver nitrite in diethyl ether.92b 1-Nitrooctane is prepared by the reaction with silver nitrite in 75–80% yield. The reaction of silver nitrite with secondary halides gives yields of nitroalkanes of about 15%, whereas with tertiary halides the yields are 0–5%.92c Ethyl α-nitrobutyrate is prepared by the reaction of ethyl α-bromobutyrate in 68–75% yield with sodium nitrite in DMF.92d Sodium nitrite is considerably more soluble in DMSO than in DMF; as a consequence, with DMSO, much more concentrated solutions can be employed and this makes shorter reaction times possible.92e RX

+

NO2–

RNO2

+

RONO

(2.47)

18

PREPARATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Table 2.3 Synthesis of nitroalkanes from alkyl halides NO−2

Solvent

RNO2 (%)

RONO (%)

Et2O Et2O Et2O DMF DMF DMF

73 80 20 61 60 58

31 29

(CH2)5CH3

AgNO2 AgNO2 AgNO2 NaNO2 NaNO2 NaNO2

Br

NaNO2

DMF

57

25

Br

NaNO2

DMF

0

(product: cyclohexane)

Br

NaNO2

DMF

55

RX n-C4H9Br n-C8H17Br i-C3H7Br n-C6H13Br n-C8H17Br H3C Br

Thus, the reaction of alkyl halides and α-halo esters with sodium nitrite provides a very useful synthetic method for nitroalkanes and α-nitro esters. However, ethyl bromoacetate is exceptional in that it fails to give ethyl nitroacetate on treatment with sodium nitrite.93 This is due to the acidic hydrogen of the ethyl nitroacetate, which undergoes a further reaction with sodium nitrite to give the oxidized products (see Section 6.1, which discusses the Nef reaction). In a similar way, the reaction of benzyl bromide with sodium nitrite at 25 °C gives benzoic acid predominantly. To get phenylnitromethane, the reaction must be carried out at low temperature (–16 °C) (Eq. 2.48).93 CO2H

NaNO2 RT

CH2Br

NaNO2

CH2NO2

(2.48)

DMF –16 ºC

Several improved methods for the nitration of alkyl halides have been reported. For example, the use of KNO2 in the presence of 18-crown-694 or nitrite ion bounded to macroporous quaternary ammonium amberlite resin (amberlite IRA 900) improves the yield of nitro compounds (Eq. 2.49).95 BrCH2CH2CO2Et

+

IRA-900-NO2–

benzene

O2NCH2CH2CO2Et 100%

(2.49)

Mosher and coworkers have prepared 2-(2-nitroethyl)-1,3-dioxolane from the corresponding 2-bromo compounds by various procedures (Eq. 2.50).96 They found that IRA-900-NO−2 is best for this conversion. The preparation of nitroalkanes from alkyl halides has been used extensively for organic synthesis. Interestingly, nitroalkylpyridine alkaloids, which have anti-macrofouling activity, are isolated from the Okinawan marine sponge Callyspongia sp. The synthesis of such compounds has been done by the nitration of the corresponding bromide with silver nitrite (Eq. 2.51). The biogenesis of nitroalkyl compounds is an interesting process, since nitroalkyl compounds are extremely rare metabolites of marine organisms.97

2.1

NO2-

O O

NaNO2 AgNO2 IRA-900-NO−2

(2.50)

Br

O

Solvent

Condition

Yield (%)

RT, 12 h RT, 12 h RT, 18 h

35 36 37

RT, 18 h 35 °C, 96 h RT, 36 h

51 47 82

(CH2)10Br

NO2

(CH2)10NO2

AgNO2 Et2O, 48 h

N

N

(2.51)

58%

Table 2.4 Synthesis of nitro compounds from halides Halide

Condition O

Br

N

Ph

OTs

Br

NaI, acetone NaNO2, DMSO

O

Product

N

NO2 O

Si

O

Ref.

63

98

67

99

78

100

58

101

60

102

70

103

67

104

Si

Me

NC CO2Et Me Me

NC CO2Et Me

NaNO2, DMF

Me

Et

NO2 Et

I NaNO2, DMSO

(CH2)6Br

NO2

NaNO2, DMSO

(CH2)6NO2 OH

OH

NO2

I

O Si

Yield (%)

Ph

NO2

Me

Br

O

O2N

NaI, DMF NaNO2, DMF

AgNO2, Et2O

O

O Si

AgNO2, Et2O

O Si

19

O

DMSO DMSO-urea DMSO 18-crown-6 DMSO phloroglucinol Et2O Benzene

NaNO2 NaNO2 KNO2

NITRATION OF HYDROCARBONS

O Si

20

PREPARATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

A number of nitro compounds used in natural product synthesis have been prepared by the nitration of alkyl halides. Some recent examples are summarized in Table 2.4. β-Nitro carbonyl compounds are important for synthesis of natural products. The reaction of alkyl vinyl ketones with sodium nitrite and acetic acid in THF gives the corresponding β-nitro carbonyl compounds in 42–82%.105 This method is better for the preparation of β-nitro carbonyl compounds than the nitration of the corresponding halides. Schneider and Busch have showed that tetraaza[8.1.8.1]paracyclophane catalyzes the nitration of alkyl bromides with sodium nitrite. In dioxane-water (1:1) at 30 °C, the reaction of 2-bromomethylnaphthalene with sodium nitrite is accelerated by a factor of 20 in the presence of the catalyst.106 Concomitantly, the product ratio of [R-ONO]: [RNO2] changes from 0.50:1 to 0.16:1. Thus, an accumulation of nitrite ions at the positively charged cyclophanes or IRA-900-nitrite form provides a new method for selective nitration of alkyl halides.

2.2 SYNTHESIS OF NITRO COMPOUNDS BY OXIDATION 2.2.1 Oxidation of Amines The direct oxidation of primary amines into the corresponding nitro derivatives is very useful for fundamental and industrial applications because it provides nitro compounds, which may otherwise be difficult to synthesize by direct nitration methods. Efficient synthetic methods for the conversion of primary amines into the nitro compounds are described in this section. Saturated primary amines undergo oxidation reactions by ozone to give the corresponding nitroalkanes accompanied by several other compounds depending on the reaction conditions.107 This drawback is overcome by ozonation on silica gel. Amines are absorbed on the silica gel by mixing with dry silica gel (dried for 24 h at 450 °C). The silica gel (ca 30 g) containing the amine (0.1–0.2 wt/wt%) was cooled to –78 °C and a stream of 3% of ozone in oxygen passed through it. By this procedure, nitro compounds are obtained in 60–70% yield (Eq. 2.52).108 1-Nitroadamantane is prepared by oxidation of 1-aminoadamantane with peracetic acid and ozone in 95% yield.109 R NH2

O3 silica gel

R NO2

(2.52)

60–70%

The use of heterogeneous catalysts in the liquid phase offers several advantages compared with homogeneous counterparts, in that it facilitates ease of recovery and recycling. A chromium-containing medium-pore molecular sieve (Si:Cr > 140:1), CrS-2, efficiently catalyzes the direct oxidation of various primary amines to the corresponding nitro compounds using 70% t-butylhydroperoxide (TBHP).110 Aliphatic and aromatic primary amines are rapidly and efficiently oxidized to nitro compounds by dimethyldioxirane.111 Dimethyldioxirane is prepared by reaction of OXONE (DuPont trademark)⋅2KHSO5-KHSO4-K2SO4 with buffered aqueous acetone.112 In a typical reaction, n-butylamine (0.052 g, 0.7 mmol) in 5 ml of acetone is treated with 95 ml of dimethyldioxirane in acetone solution (0.05 M). The solution is kept at room temperature for 30 min with the exclusion of light (Eq. 2.53). Aromatic amines are converted into nitro compounds by oxidation using OXONE itself.113

R NH2

O O

acetone

R NO2 80–90%

(2.53)

2.2

SYNTHESIS OF NITRO COMPOUNDS BY OXIDATION

21

Oxidation of amines to nitro compounds has been carried out with peracids such as peracetic acid or peroxytrifluoroacetic acid.114 However, the difficulty in handling the hazardous nature of the anhydrous peracids makes these methods less attractive. Gilbert found a general, high-yield synthesis of nitroalkanes from amines using m-chloroperbenzoic acid (m-CPBA) at elevated temperatures.115 A simple synthesis of fully saturated 2-nitrosugar derivatives from the corresponding amino derivatives utilizes an m-CPBA and sodium sulfate reagent system, giving the product in good yields (Eq. 2.54).116 AcO

AcO AcO AcO

O

OAc

m-CPBA CHCl3

O

AcO AcO

OAc

NO2 85%

NH2

(2.54)

Tertiary amines have been oxidized to the corresponding nitro compounds with KMnO4. For example, 2-methyl-2-nitropropane is prepared in 84% yield from t-butylamine with KMnO4 (Eq. 2.55).117 In a similar fashion, 1-aminoadamantane has been oxidized to 1-nitroadamantane in 85% yield with KMnO4 (see Eq. 2.63).118

NH2

KMnO4

NO2

(2.55)

83%

Recently, the oxidation of primary aliphatic amines to the corresponding nitro compounds has also been achieved using the catalyst system based on zirconium tetra tert-butoxide and tert-butyl hydroperoxide in a molecular sieve (50–98% yield) (Eqs. 2.56 and 2.57 and Table 2.5).119 OEt H2N

OEt

OEt

t-BuOOH Zr(Ot-Bu)4

O2 N

OEt

(2.56)

70% NO2

NH2

t-BuOOH Zr(Ot-Bu)4

(2.57) 80%

2.2.2 Oxidation of Oximes Conversion of carbonyl to nitro groups (retro Nef Reaction) is an important method for the preparation of nitro compounds. Such conversion is generally effected via oximes using strong oxidants such as CF3CO3H.120 Anhydrous peroxytrifluoroacetic acid is not easy to handle, but the procedure has recently been revised.121 Namely, reaction of urea-hydrogen peroxide complex (UHP) with trifluoroacetic anhydride in acetonitrile at 0 °C gives solutions of peroxytrifluoroacetic acid, which oxidize aldoximes to nitroalkanes in good yields (Eqs. 2.58 and 2.59). Ketoximes fail to react under these conditions, the parent ketone being recovered. Various convenient methods for the oxidation of oximes to nitro compounds have been developed in recent years. Olah has reported a convenient oxidation of oximes to nitro compounds with sodium perborate in glacial acetic acid (Eq. 2.60).122

22

PREPARATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

NOH O

O

NO2 UHP•(CF3CO)2O

O

O

(2.58)

CH3CN, 0 ºC, 4 h 75%

NOH

NO2

UHP•(CF3CO)2O

NOH

(2.59)

MeO

CH3CN, 0 ºC, 5 h (UHP: urea•H2O2)

MeO

65%

NO2

NaBO3•4H2O

(2.60)

AcOH, 55–65 ºC 65%

The conversion of oximes to nitroalkanes has been achieved by employing an Mo(IV) oxodiperoxo complex as oxidant in acetonitrile. Both aldoximes and ketoximes are converted into the corresponding nitroalkanes (Eqs. 2.61 and 2.62),123 representing a complementary synthetic route to the use of the UHP method. Table 2.5 Conversion of amines to nitro compounds Amine

Condition NH2

NH2

CH2NH2

O3, SiO2, –78 °C , acetone, RT, O O 30 min CrS2, TBHP, MeOH, 65 °C, 5 h m-CPBA, CICH2CH2Cl, 83 °C, 3 h TBHP, Zr(Ot-Bu)4 m-CPBA, ClCH2CH2Cl, 83 °C, 3 h O3, SiO2, –78 °C , acetone, RT O O O3, SiO2, –78 °C CrS2, TBHP

Nitro compound

Yield (%)

Ref

69 95

108 111

85

110

75

115

82 92

119 110

12 97 66 0

108 111 108 109

NO2

NO2

CH2NO2

CH=NOH

n-C4H9NH2

t-C4H9NH2

O3, SiO2, –78 °C O O, acetone, RT m-CPBA, ClCH2CH2Cl, 83 °C, 3 h KMnO4 , acetone, RT O O O3, SiO2, –78 °C TBHP, Zr(Ot-Bu)4

76

n-C4H9NO2

65 84 63

108 111 115

t-C4H9NO2

83 90 70 64

117 111 108 119

2.2

23

SYNTHESIS OF NITRO COMPOUNDS BY OXIDATION

NO2

NOH

BzOMoO(O2)2–

(2.61)

CH3CN, 40 ºC 55% NO2

BzOMoO(O2)2–

NOH

(2.62)

CH3CN, 40 ºC 92%

Oxidation of oximes to nitro compounds with m-CPBA has been applied to the synthesis of dialkyl 1-nitroalkanephosphonates (Eq. 2.63),124 which are useful reagents for conversion of carbonyl compounds to nitroalkenes.125

C2H5

OH N O Oi-Pr C P Oi-Pr

NO2 O Oi-Pr C2H5 CH P Oi-Pr 65%

m-CPBA CH2Cl2 RT, 72 h

(2.63)

Indirect conversion of oximes to nitro compounds via α-halo nitro compounds has provided a useful method for synthesis of nitro compounds, as shown in Scheme 2.1. Halogenation of oximes to halonitroso compounds has been achieved by a number of reagents, including chlorine,126 bromine,127 aqueous hypochlorous acid,126, t-butyl hypochlorite,37 and N-bromosuccinimide.128 The resulting halonitroso intermediate is then oxidized to halonitro product with nitric acid,128 ozone,129 aqueous sodium hypochlorite,130 or n-butylammonium hypochlorite.37 The conversion of oximes to α-chloronitro compounds can be carried out by a one-flask operation. For example, 1-chloronitrocyclohexanone is prepared in 98% yield by treatment of cyclohexanone oxime with aqueous hypochlorous acid and by subsequent treatment with a mixture of tetra-n-butylammonium hydrogen sulfate and aqueous sodium hypochlorite. The reductive dechlorination of the α-chloronitro compounds is achieved by catalytic hydrogenolysis with 1 atm H2 over 5% Pd/C in methanol-water (4:1). The final step can be replaced by treatment with either Mg or Zn dust (Eq. 2.64).37 N

OH

Cl HClO, pH 5.5

n-Bu4NHSO 4

benzene

NaClO

NO2

NO2 H2/ Pd-C

98%

93%

(2.64) The one-pot conversions of oximes to gem-halonitro compounds have been achieved by using N,N,N,-trihalo-1,3,5-triazines,131 chloroperoxidase in the presence of hydrogen peroxide and potassium chloride,132 or commercial OXONE and sodium chloride.133 Of these methods, the case of OXONE may be the most convenient (Eq. 2.65). NO2 NOH

OXONE, NaCl CHCl3, 45 ºC, 1 h

Cl

(2.65) 83%

NOH

O R

1

R

2

1

R

R

2

Cl R

1

NO 2

R

Scheme 2.1.

Cl

NO2

1

2

R

R

H 1

R

NO2 R2

24

PREPARATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Table 2.6 Preparation of polycyclic nitro compounds from oximes Oxime

Condition

Nitro compound

1) Br2, NaHCO3 aq (CF3CO)2O, H2O2 2) NaBH4

NOH

1) NBS, dioxane/H2O 2) O3, CH2Cl2

O2N

1) Na/NH3, MeOH 2) m-CPBA, ClCH2CH2Cl

NOH

134

16

141

13

126

95

30

CO2CH3 NO2 H NO2

NOH HO

17

H

H NO2

CO2CH3 NOH

N

Ref.

O2N

NOH

O2N

Yield (%)

H NO2

OH

H2NCONH2, Na2HPO4 m-CPBA, MeCN, ∆

N

O2N

NO2

Energetically rich polynitro compounds have been prepared from polycyclic ketones by the conversion of oximes to nitro compounds, as shown in Table 2.6. The conversion of oximes to nitro compounds have provided a useful method for the preparation of nitro sugars (see Eqs. 2.66–2.69).36,136,137,138 PhCO2

PhCO2 O HON

O

(CF3CO)2O, H2O2 CH3CN

O O

O O

O2N

(2.66)

90% Ph3CO

Ph3CO OH O

O

NOH

O2N

NO2 O

CHO O

O3, CH2Cl2

O

(2.67)

90%

RCO2

RCO2 OH OO O

1) pyridine, Cr2O7

O

2) H2NOH 3) H2O2, CH3CN

O O

(2.68)

NO2 98% O

O O

O 1) pyridine, Cr2O7

OH O O O

2) H2NOH 3) H2O2, CH3CN

NO2 O O O 95%

(2.69)

25

REFERENCES

In general, azides are more easily available than nitro compounds by SN2 reaction of the corresponding halides. Thus, the direct conversion of an azide into a nitro group is useful for the synthesis of nitro compounds. Corey and coworkers have reported the easy conversion of azides to nitro compounds via ozonolysis of phosphine imines (Eq. 2.70).139 X O

O O

N

O

NaN3

X=I

DMF

Ph3P

X = N3

OCH2CCl3 O X = N=PPh3

(2.70) O3

X = NO2 50% (overall)

The standard reaction sequence for transformation of a carboxylic acid into a nitro group is lengthy. Eaton has shortened this conversion via oxidation of isocyanates to nitro compounds with dimethyldioxirane in wet acetone (Eq. 2.71).140 CO2H

1) SOCl2

CON3

2) Me3SiN3

HO2C

∆

NCO OCN 78%

N3OC

OO H2O, acetone

NO2 O2N

(2.71) 85%

REFERENCES 1. Olah, G. A., R. Malhotra, and S. C. Narang. Nitration: Methods and Mechanism, VCH, New York, 1989. 2. Schofield, K. Aromatic Nitrations, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1980. 3a. Laszlo, P. Preparative Chemistry Using Supported Reagents, Academic Press, London, 1987. 3b. Smith, K. Solid Supports and Catalysts in Organic Synthesis, Ellis Horwood, Chichester, 1992. 3c. Clark, J. H., and D. J. Macquarrie. Chem. Soc. Rev., 25, 3445 (1996). 4. Olah, G. A., R. Malhotra, and S. C. Narang. J. Org. Chem., 43, 4628 (1978). 5. Harmer, M. A., W. E. Farneth, and Q. Sun. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 118, 7708 (1996). 6. Laszlo, P., and J. Vandormael. Chem. Lett., 1843 (1988). 7. Cornelis, A., A. Gerstmans, and P. Laszlo. Chem. Lett., 1839 (1988). 8. Thomas, R. J., and R. G. Pews. Syn. Commun., 23, 505 (1993). 9. Kwok, T. J., K. Jayasuriya, R. Damavaparu, and B. W. Brodmanj. J. Org. Chem., 59, 4939 (1994). 10. Bekassy, S., T. Cseri, M. Horvath, J. Farkas, and F. Figueras. New. J. Chem., 22, 339 (1998). 11a. Smith, K., A. Musson, and G. A. DeBoos. J. Org. Chem., 63, 8448 (1998). 11b. Smith, K., A. Musson, and G. A. DeBoos. Chem. Commun., 469 (1996). 12a. Waller, F. J., A. G. M. Barrett, D. C. Braddock, and D. Ramprasad. Chem. Commun., 613 (1997). 12b. Waller, F. J., A. G. M. Barrett, D. C. Braddock, R. M. McKinnell, and D. Ramprasad. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 867 (1999). 12c. Barrett, A. G. M., D. C. Braddock, R. Ducray, A. M. McKinnell, and F. G. Waller. Synlett., 57 (2000). 13. Waller, F. J., A. C. M. Barrett, D. C. Braddock, and D. Ramprasad. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 1641 (1998). 14. Ouertani, M., P. Girard, and H. B. Kagan. Tetrahedron Lett, 23, 4315 (1982). 15. Gu, S. X., H. W. Jing, and Y. M. Liang. Synth. Commun., 27, 2793 (1997).

26

PREPARATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

16. Dove, M. F. A., B. Manz, J. Montogomery, G. Pattenden, and S. A. Wood. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 1589 (1998). 17. Zhang, W. C., Y. C. Zheng, and Z. T. Huang. Synth. Commun., 27, 3763 (1997). 18. Olah, G. A., P. Ramaiah, G. Sandford, A. Orlinkov, and G. K. S. Prakash. Synthesis, 468 (1994). 19. Fisher, J. W. The Chemistry of Dinitrogen Pentoxide in Nitro Compounds ed. by H. Feuer and A. T. Nielsen, VCH, New York, 1990. 20. Freemantle, M. Chem. Eng. News, 7 (1996). 21. Bakke, J. M., and I. Hegbom. Acta. Chem. Scand., 48, 181 (1994). 22a. Bakke, J. M., and E. Ranes. Synthesis, 281 (1997). 22b. Suzuki, H., M. Iwaya, and T. Mori, Tetrahedron Lett., 38, 5647 (1997). 22c. Bakke, J. M., E. Ranes, and J. Riha. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 911 (1998). 23. Mori, T., and H. Suzuki. Synlett, 383 (1995). 24a. Suzuki, H., and T. Murashima. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 903 (1994). 24b. Suzuki, H., T. Murashima, and T. Mori. J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun., 1443 (1994). 24c. Suzuki, H., T. Ishibashi, T. Murashima, and K.Tsukamoto. Tetrahedron Lett., 32, 6591 (1991). 24d. Suzuki, H., J. Tomaru, and T. Murashima. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 2413 (1994). 24e. Suzuki, H., A. Tatsumi , T. Shibasaki, and K. Tsukamoto. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 339 (1995). 24f. Suzuki, H., T. Takeuchi, and T. Mori. J. Org. Chem., 61, 5944 (1996). 25. Suzuki, H., T. Mori, and K. Maeda. Synthesis, 841 (1994). 26. Enya, T., H. Suzuki, and Y. Hisamatsu. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 71, 2221 (1998). 27. Suzuki, H., and T. Mori. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 2, 677 (1996). 28. Njoroge, F. G., B. Vibulbhan, P. Pinto, T. M. Chan, R. Osterman, S. Remiszewski, J. Del Rosario, R. Doll, V. Girijavallabhan, and A. K. Ganguly. J. Org. Chem., 63, 445 (1998). 29. Firouzabadi, H., N. Iranpoor, and M. A. Zolfigol. Synth. Commun., 27, 3301 (1997). 30. Pitts, J. N., K. A. Van Cauwenberghe, D. Grosjean, J. P. Schmid, D. R. Fritz, W. L. Belser, G. B. Kunsdon, and P. M. Hynds. Science, 202, 515 (1978). 31. Tani, K., K. Lukin, and P. E. Eaton. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1997, 119, 1476. 32. Olah, G. A., and C. H. Lin. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 93, 1259 (1971). 33. Olah, G. A., P. Ramaish, C. B. Rao, G. Sandfold, R. Golam, N. J. Trivedi, and J. A. Olah. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 115, 7246 (1993). 34. Tabushi, I., S. Kojo, and Z. Yoshida. Chem. Lett., 1431 (1971). 35. Suzuki, H., and N. Nonomiya. Chem. Commun., 1783 (1996). 36. Olah, G. A., and C. Rochin. J. Org. Chem., 52, 701 (1987). 37. Corey, E. J., and H. Estreicher. Tetrahedron Lett., 21, 1113 (1980). 38a. Larsen, H. O. In the Chemistry of the Nitro and Nitroso Groups, Part 1, ed. by H. Feuer, Interscience, New York, p. 310 (1969). 38b. von Schickh, O., H. J. Padeken, and A. Segnitz. In Houben-Weyl: Methoden der Organischen Chemie, Vol.10/1 ed. by E. Mulleer, George Thieme Verlag, Stutttgart, 1969, p, 310. 38c. Coomers, R. G. In Comprehensive Organic Chemistry, Vol. 2 ed. by I. O. Sutherland, Pergamon Press, Oxford, p. 326 (1979). 38d. Feuer, H. The Chemistry of Amino, Nitroso and Nitro Compounds and Their Derivatives, Supplemental F; . ed. by S. Patai, John Wiley and Sons; New York, 1982, p. 805–848. 39a. Feuer, H., and J. P. Lawrence. J. Org. Chem., 37, 3662 (1972). 39b. Feuer, H., and H. Friedman. J. Org. Chem., 40, 187 (1975). 40a. Feuer, H., J. W. Shepherd, and C. Savides. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 78, 4364 (1956). 40b. Feuer, H., and R. S. Anderson. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 78, 4364 (1961). 40c. Black, A. P., and F. H. Babers. Org. Synth. 2, 512 (1943). 41. Pfeffer, P.E., and L. S. Silbert. Tetrahedron Lett., 30, 831 (1981). 42. Hauser, F. M., and V. M. Baghdanov. J. Org. Chem., 53, 2872 (1988). 43a. Lukin, K., J. Li, R. Gilardi, and P. E. Eaton. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 35, 864 (1996). 43b. Zang, M. X., P. E. Eaton, and R. Gilardi. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 39, 401 (2000). 44. Haner, R., and D. Seebach. Chimia, 39, 356 (1985). 45. Megges, R., J. Weiland, B. Undeutsch, H. Buchting, and R. Schon. Steroids, 62, 762 (1997). 46. Bull, J. R., E. R. H. Jones, and G. D. Meakins. J. Chem. Soc., 2601 (1965). 47. Pfeiffer, S., B. Mayer, and B. Hemmens. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 38, 3714 (1999). 48a. Ischia, M. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 5773 (1996).

REFERENCES

27

48b. Kelly, D. R., S. Jones, J. O. Adogun, K. S. V. Koh, D. E. Hibbs, M. B. Hurdthous, and S. K. Jackson . Tetrahedron, 53, 17221 (1997). 48c. Werner, G., J. Kastler, R. Looser, and K. Ballschmiter. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed,. Engl., 38, 1634 (1999). 49a. Larkin, J. M., and K. L. Kreuz. J. Org. Chem., 36, 2574 (1973). 49b. Lachowicz, D. R., and K. L. Kreuz. J. Org. Chem., 32, 3885 (1967). 49c. Stevens, T. E., and W. D. Emmons. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 80, 338 (1958). 49d. Shechter, H., F. Conrad, A. I. L. Daulton, and R. B. Kaplan. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 74, 3052 (1952). 49e. Bordwell, F. G., and E. W. Garbisch, Jr. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 82, 3588 (1960). 50. Borisenko, A. A. A., V. Nikulin, S. Wolfe, N. S. Zefirov, and Z. V. Zyk. J. Am Chem. Soc., 106, 1074 (1984). 51. McMurray, J. E., J. H. Musser, I. Fleming, J. Fortunak and C. Nubling. Org. Synth. Coll. 6, 799 (1988). 52. Seifert, W. K. Org. Synth. Coll. Vol. 6, 837 (1988). 53a. Mukaiyama, T., E. Hata, and T. Yamada. Chem. Lett., 1395 (1995). 53b. Hata, E., T. Yamada, and T. Mukaiyama. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 68, 3269 (1995). 54. Streekumar, R., R. Padmakumar, and P. Rugmini. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 2695 (1998). 55a. Valmer, R. S., K. P. Naicker, and P. J. Liesen. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 3977 (1998). 55b. Campos, P. J., B. Garcia, and M. A. Rodriguez. Tetrahedron Lett., 41, 979 (2000). 56. Hwu, J. R., K. L. Chen, and S. Ananthan. J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun., 1425 (1994). 57. Reddy, M. V. R., B. Mehrotra, and Y. D. Vankar. Tetrahedron Lett., 36, 4861 (1995). 58a. Schienbaum, M. L., and M. Dines. J. Org. Chem., 36, 33641 (1971). 58b. Bloom, A. J., M. Fleischman, and J. M. Mellor. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 2357 (1984). 59. Kunai, A., Y. Yanagi, and K. Sasaki. Tetrahedron Lett., 24, 4443 (1983). 60a. Hassner, A., J. E. Krop, and J. Kent. J. Org. Chem., 34, 2629 (1969). 60b. Szarek, W. A., D. G. Lance, and R. E. Beach. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 356 (1968). 61. Sy, W., and A. W. By. Tetrahedron Lett., 26, 1193 (1985). 62. Waldman, S. R., A. P. Monte, A. Bracey, and D. E. Nichols. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 7889 (1996). 63. Jew, S. S., H. D. Kim, Y. S. Cho, and C. H. Cook. Chem. Lett., 1747 (1986). 64. Ghosh, D., and D. E. Nichols. Synthesis, 195 (1996). 65. Trost, B. M., and T. Shibata. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 104, 3225 (1982). 66a. Hayama, T., S. Tomoda, Y. Takeuchi, and Y. Nomura. Tetrahedron Lett., 23, 4733 (1982). 66b. Hayama, T., S. Tomoda, Y. Takeuchi, and Y. Nomura. J. Org. Chem., 49, 3235 (1984). 67. Backvall, J. E., U. Karlsson, and R. Chinchilla. Tetrahedron Lett., 32, 5697 (1991). 68. Chinchilla, R., and J. E. Backvall. Tetrahedron Lett., 33, 5641 (1992). 69. Najera, C., M. Ysu, U. Karlsson, A. Gogoll, and J. E. Backvall. Tetrahedron Lett., 31, 4199 (1990). 70. Bloom, A. J., and J. Mellor. Tetrahedron Lett., 27, 873 (1986). 71a. Corey, E. J., and H. Estreicher. Tetrahedron Lett., 21, 1113 (1980). 71b. Barrett, A. G. M., M. L. Boys, and T. L. Boehm. J. Org. Chem., 61, 685 (1996). 71c. Chamberlin, A. R., J. E. Stemke, and E. T. Bond. J. Org. Chem., 43, 147 (1978). 72. Einhorn, J., P. Demerseman, and R. Royer. Synthesis, 978 (1984). 73. Patil, G. S., and G. Nagendrappa. Chem. Commun., 1079 (1999). 74. Corey, E. J., and H. Estreicher. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 100, 6294 (1978). 75. Hewlins, S. A., J. A. Murphy, and J. Lin. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 559 (1995). 76a. Bloom, A. J., M. Fleischmann, and J. M. Mellor. Tetrahedron Lett., 25, 4971 (1984). 76b. Bloom, A. J., M. Fleischmann, and J. M. Mellor. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 79 (1986). 77. Jager, V., J. C. Mott, and H. G. Viehe. Chimica, 29, 516 (1975). 78a. Schmitt, R. J., and C. D. Bedford. Synthesis, 132 (1984). 78b. Schmitt, R. J., J. C. Bottaro, R. Malhotra, and C. D. Bedford. J. Org. Chem., 52, 2294 (1987). 79. Fisher, R. H., and H. M. Weitz. Synthesis, 261 (1980). 80a. Ozbal, H., and W. W. Zajac, Jr. J. Org. Chem., 46, 3082 (1981). 80b. Elfehali, F. E., and W. W. Zajac, Jr. J. Org. Chem., 46, 5151 (1981). 81. Feuer, H., and P. M. Pivawer. J. Org. Chem., 31, 3152 (1966). 82. Dampawan, P., and W. W. Zajac, Jr. J. Org. Chem., 47, 1176 (1982). 83. Dampawan, P., and W. W. Zajac, Jr. Synthesis, 545 (1983). 84. Rathore, R., and J. K. Kochi. J. Org. Chem., 61, 627 (1996). 85. Liang, P. Org. Synth., 3, 803 (1955).

28

PREPARATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

86a. Reddy, M. V. R., R. Kumareswaran, and Y. D. Vankar. Tetrahedron Lett., 36, 7149 (1995). 86b. Shahi, S.P., A. Gupta, S. V. Pitre, M. V. R. Reddy, R. Kumareswaran, and Y. D. Vankar. J. Org. Chem., 64, 4509 (1999). 87. Stach, H., and M. Hesse. Tetrahedron, 44, 1573 (1988). 88. Ballini, R. Synlett, 1009 (1999). 89a. Ballini, R., and C. Pslestini. Tetrahedron, 35, 5731 (1994). 89b. Dampawan, P., and W. W. Zajac Jr. Tetrahedron Lett., 23, 135 (1982). 90. Ballini, R., and M. Petrini. Synthetic Commun., 16, 1781 (1986). 91. Ballini, R., M. Petrini, and V. Polzonetti. Synthesis, 335 (1992). 92a. Kornblum, N. Org. React., 12, 101 (1962). 92b. Feuer, H., and G. Leston. Org. Synth., Coll. Vol. 4, 368 (1963). 92c. Kornblum, N., and H. E. Ungnade. Org. Synth., Coll. Vol. 4, 724 (1963). 92d. Kornblum, N., and R. K. Blackwood. Org. Synth., Coll. Vol. 4, 454 (1963). 92e. Kornblum, N., and J. W. Powers. J. Org. Chem., 22, 455(1957). 93. Kornblum, N., and W. M. Weaver. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 80, 4333 (1958). 94. Childs, M. E., and W. P. Weber. J. Org. Chem., 41, 3486 (1976). 95. Gelbard, G., and S. Colonna. Synthesis, 113 (1972). 96. Crumbie, R. L., J. S. Nmitz, and H. S. Mosher. J. Org. Chem., 47, 4040 (1982). 97. Wang, C-Y-S., M. Kuramoto, and D. Uemura. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 1813 (1996). 98. Blake, A. J., E. C. Boyd, R. O. Gould, and R. M. Paton. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 2841 (1994). 99. Mateos, A. F., G. P. Coca, R. R. Gozalez, and C. T. Herandez. J. Org. Chem., 61, 9097 (1996). 100. Evans, D. A., D. H. B. Ripin, D. Halstead, and K. R. Campos. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 121, 6816 (1999). 101. Grossman, R. B., R. H. Rasne, and B. O. Patrick. J. Org. Chem., 64, 7173 (1999). 102. Fumoto, Y., T. Eguichi, H. Uno, and N. Ono. J. Org. Chem., 64, 6518 (1999). 103. Ballini, R., G. Bisica, and G. Rafaiani. Helv. Chim. Acta, 78, 879 (1995). 104. Sekine, A., N. Kumagai, K. Uotsu, T. Oshima, and M. Shibasaki. Tetrahedron Lett., 41, 509 (2000). 105. Miyakoshi, T., S. Saito, and J. Kumanotani. Chem. Lett., 1677 (1981). 106. Schneider, H. J., and R. Busch. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 23, 911 (1984). 107. Bailey, P. S., and J. E. Keller. J. Org. Chem. 33, 2680 (1968). 108. Keinan, E., and Y. Mazur. J. Org Chem. 42, 844 (1977). 109. Zajac, W. W., Jr., T. R. Walters, and J. M. Woods. J. Org. Chem., 54, 2468 (1989). 110. Jayachandran, B., M. Sasidharan, A. Sudalai, and T. Ravindranathan. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1523 (1995). 111. Murray, R. W., R. Jeyaraman, and L. Mohan. Tetrahedron Lett., 27, 2335 (1986). 112. Murray, R. W., and R. Jeyaraman. J. Org. Chem., 50, 2847 (1985). 113. Zbrowksi, D. L., A. E. Moorman, and K. R. Beck, Jr. Tetrahedron Lett., 29, 4501 (1988). 114. Emmons, W. D. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 79, 5528 (1957). 115. Gilbert, K. E., and W. T. Borden. J. Org. Chem., 44, 659 (1973). 116. Vega-Perez, J. M., J. I. Candela, and F. Iglesias-Guerra. J. Org. Chem., 62, 6606 (1997). 117. Calder, A., A. R Forrester, and S. P. Hepburn. Org. Synth., Coll. Vol. 6, 803 (1988). 118. Stetter, H., and E. Smulders. Chem. Ber., 104, 917 (1971). 119. Krohn, K., and J. Kupke. Eur. J. Org. Chem., 679 (1998). 120. Emmons, W. D., and A. S. Psgano. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 77, 4557 (1955). 121. Ballini, R., E. Marcantoni, and M. Petrini. Tetrahedron Lett., 33, 4835 (1992). 122. Olah, G. A., P. Ramaiah, C. S. Lee, and G. K. S. Prakash. Synlett., 337 (1992). 123. Ballistreri, F. P., E. Barbuzzi, G. A. Tomaselli, and R. M. Toscano. Synlett, 1093 (1996). 124. Zon, J. Synthesis, 661 (1984). 125. Fujii, M. Chem. Lett., 933 (1992). 126. Archibald, T. G., L. C. Garvier, K. Baum, and M. C. Cohen. J. Org. Chem., 54, 2869 (1989). 127. Marchand, A. P., B. E. Arney, Jr., and P. R. Dave. J. Org. Chem., 53, 443 (1988). 128. Iffland, D. C., and G. X. Criner. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 27, 1933 (1962). 129. Barnes, M. W., and J. M. Patterson. J. Org. Chem., 41, 733 (1976). 130. Baum, K., and T. G. Archibald. J. Org. Chem., 53, 4645 (1988). 131. Walters, T. R., W. W. Zajac, Jr., and J. M. Woods. J. Org. Chem., 57, 316 (1992). 132. Zaks, A., A. V. Yabannavar, D. R. Dodds, C. A. Evans, P. R. Das, and R. Malchow. J. Org. Chem., 61, 8692 (1996).

REFERENCES

29

133. Ceccherell, P., M. Crini, F. Epifano, M. C. Marcotullio, and O. Rosati. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 4385 (1998). 134. Marchand, A. P., and D. S. Reddy. J. Org. Chem., 49, 4078 (1984). 135. Waykole, L. M., C. C. Shen, and L. A. Paquette. J. Org. Chem., 53, 4969 (1988). 136a. Takamoto, T., R. Sudoh, and T. Nakagawa. Tetrahedron Lett., 2053 (1971). 136b. Takamoto, T., M. Ohki, R. Sudoh, and T. Nakagawa. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 46, 670 (1973). 136c. Takamoto, T., and R. Sudoh. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 48, 3413 (1975). 137. Aebischer, B., and A. Vasella. Helv. Chim. Acta, 66, 789 (1983). 138. Weber, J. E., J. W. Talhouk, R. J. Nachman, T. P. You, R. C. Halaska, T. M. Williams, and H. S. Mosher. J. Org. Chem., 51, 2702 (1986). 139. Corey, E. J., B. Samuelsson, and F. A. Luzzio. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 106, 3682 (1984). 140. Eaton, P. E., and G. E. Wicks. J. Org. Chem., 53, 5353 (1988). 141. Marchand, A. P., P. Jin, J. L. F. Anderson, R. Gilardi, and C. George. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1108 (1987).

The Nitro Group in Organic Synthesis. Noboru Ono Copyright © 2001 Wiley-VCH ISBNs: 0-471-31611-3 (Hardback); 0-471-22448-0 (Electronic)

3 THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION The nitro-aldol reaction between nitroalkanes and carbonyl compounds to yield β-nitro alcohols was discovered in 1895 by Henry.1 Since then, this reaction has been used extensively in many important syntheses. In view of its significance, there are several reviews on the Henry reaction.2–5 These reviews cover synthesis of β-nitro alcohols and their applications in organic synthesis. The most comprehensive review is Ref. 3, which summarizes the literature before 1970. More recent reviews are Refs. 4 and 5, which summarize literatures on the Henry reaction published until 1990. In general, the Henry reaction gives a mixture of diastereomers and enantiomers. The lack of selectivity is due to the reversibility of the reaction and the easy epimerization at the nitro-substituted carbon atom. Existing reviews have hardly mentioned the stereochemistry of the Henry reaction. Recently, Shibasaki has found that the modification of the Henry reaction can control the stereochemistry to give β-nitro alcohols with high diastereo- and enantio-selectivity.6 In Section 3.3, the progress of the stereoselective Henry reaction and its application to biologically active compounds are discussed. The β-nitro alcohols are generally obtained in good yield by the reaction of aldehydes with nitroalkanes in the presence of a catalytic amount of base. When aryl aldehydes are used, the β-nitro alcohols formed may undergo elimination of water to give aryl nitroalkenes. Such side reactions are not always disadvantageous, for nitroalkenes are sometimes the ultimate target for the Henry reaction. The choice of reaction conditions is important to stop the reaction at the stage of β-nitro alcohols in aromatic cases. The synthetic utility of the Henry reaction is shown in Scheme 3.1, where β-nitro alcohols are converted into β-amino alcohols, amino sugars, ketones and other important compounds.

R

NO2

+ R′CHO

NO2

base R

R′ OH

30

PREPARATION OF β-NITRO ALCOHOLS

3.1

NH2 R

NO2

R′ a

OH

O

e R′

R

b

31

R′

R

NO2 R

OH

d R

Diels-Alder reaction

R′

Michael addition

c NO2

R′

R′

R OH

d

R′

R O

O

a: Reduction with H2 b: Dehydration with DCC c: Oxidation with PCC d: Denitration with Bu3SnH/AIBN e: Nef reaction with TiCl3 Scheme 3.1. Henry reaction and its applications

3.1 PREPARATION OF >-NITRO ALCOHOLS The Henry reaction is catalyzed in homogeneous solution with various catalysts, as shown in Eq. 3.1. R

NO2

+

R′CHO

NO2

base R

R′

OH Base: NaOR, Et3N, DBU, DBN, tetramethylguanidine (TMG),P(RNCH2CH2)3N (PAP), KF, n-Bu4NF, Al2O3, Al2O3-KF, amberlyst A-21, amberlite IRA-420, NaOH+cetyltrimethylammonium chloride (CTACl)

R

N

N N DBU

R P N R N N PAP

(3.1)

The reaction is generally conducted at room temperature in the presence of about 10 mol% of base to give the desired β-nitro alcohols in good yield. The most popular bases and solvents employed in the Henry reaction are alkali metal hydroxides, carbonates, bicarbonates, and alkoxids in water or ethanol.7 Recently, powdered KOH in dry medium has been used for this conversion.7d This approach is quite simple and inexpensive. It is suitable for the reaction of both aromatic and aliphatic aldehydes with lower nitroalkanes such as nitromethane, nitroethane, and 1-nitropropane. The reaction of aromatic aldehydes with nitromethane using sodium hydroxide (1 equiv) in methanol followed by acidification is a standard method for the preparation of β-nitrostyrenes.8 Recently, considerable work concerning new reactions mediated by rare earth metal reagents has been reported. The Henry reaction is catalyzed either by rare earth metal alkoxides such as La3(O-t-Bu)9 or rare earth hexamethyldisilazides (HMDS) such as Sm(HMDS)3.9 Shibasaki and coworkers have developed catalytic asymmetric nitro-aldol reaction using binaphthol (BINOL)-rare earth metal complexes, as discussed in the section of the stereoselective Henry reaction (Section 3.3). Organic nitrogen bases such as ammonia or various amines are generally effective for the Henry reaction.10 The reaction between nitromethane and simple aldehydes is particularly simple. Just mixing aldehydes, nitromethane, and amines followed by acidification gives the desired nitro alcohols in good yields. However, the Henry reactions of higher nitroalkanes with aldehydes or ketones proceed very slowly under the conditions using sodium hydroxide or amines. Nonionic strong bases such tetramethylguanidine (TMG),11 1,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]un-

32

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

dec-7-ene (DBU), and 1,5-diazabicyclo[4.3.0]non-5-ene (DBN)12–14 in THF or acetonitrile are more effective catalytic systems than simple amines (see Eqs. 3.2–3.4). OH

O H

NO2

TMG (0.1 equiv)

+ CH3NO2

(3.2)

0 ºC, 30 min 94%

OH DBU (0.1 equiv) C6H13CHO

+

C6H13CH2NO2

C6H13

C6H13

CH3CN RT, 24 h

(3.3)

NO2 95% OH

OH CF3

OH

+

DBU (1 equiv)

CH3CH2NO2

CH3

CF3

RT, 24 h

(3.4)

NO2 65%

Dendritic molecules with a single triethylene amine core surrounded by hyperbranched polyether sectors catalyze the nitro-aldol reaction between aromatic aldehydes and nitroalkanes (Eq. 3.5).15 The activity of the catalysts decreases when the generation number increases. No significant changes in stereo-control are observed on passing from lower- to higher-generation dendrimers. O Catalyst

Time

Et3N

0.5 h

95

2:1

4h

90

2:1

+ O 2NCH2CH2OH

H

OH cat.

OH

Ph

O

N

Yield (%) syn:anti

3

NO2

(3.5) Fluoride ion is effective as a base for the Henry reaction, and potassium fluoride in isopropanol (Eq. 3.6)16 and tetrabutylammonium fluoride in THF (Eq. 3.7)17 have been widely used. CHO

NO2

CH3NO2 OH

KF, i-PrOH RT, 6 h

NO2 O

+ O

CH3CHO

Bu4NF•3H2O (0.48 equiv) 0–6 ºC, 23 h

90% O2N

(3.6)

O O

(3.7)

OH 52% (anti/syn = 62/38)

Thus, various kinds of bases are effective in inducing the Henry reaction. The choice of base and solvent is not crucial to carry out the Henry reaction of simple nitroalkanes with aldehydes, as summarized in Table 3.1. In general, sterically hindered carbonyl or nitro compounds are less reactive not to give the desired nitro-aldol products in good yield. In such cases, self-condensation of the carbonyl compound is a serious side-reaction. Several modified procedures for the Henry reaction have been developed.

PREPARATION OF β-NITRO ALCOHOLS

3.1

Table 3.1. Preparation of >-nitro alcohol by the Henry reaction Nitro compound

Carbonyl compound H

O O

NO2

Condition

CO2H O CHO

CH3NO2 Cl

N O

HO

CH3NO2

NaOH EtOH 1h

OH

PhCHO

Yield (%) (syn/anti)

Ref.

100

36

85

37

61

38

94

11

71

27

85

27

70

25

95

25

69

22

78

23

77

23

51 (70/30)

20

95 (47/53)

20

67

13

60

40

NO2

O

CO2H

O

OH OH

KF i-PrOH

NO2 Cl

OH

HO

CH3NO2

Product

N NO2

CH3ONa CH3OH 50 h

OH

OH HO

OH OH

TMG 30 min 0 °C

OH NO2

Ph OH

CH3CH2NO2 NO2

HO(CH2)6CH2NO2

PhCHO

CTACl NaOH H2O, 2 h CH3CH2CHO CTACl NaOH H2O, 3 h CH3CHO A-21 20 h

Ph NO2 NO2

OH OH HO(CH2)6

CH3 NO2

O NO2

OH

CHO A-21 5h

Ph

CHO NO2

CH3CH2NO2

OH Ph NO2

OH

CH3

CH3

O

CH3 CH3

Al2O3 24 h

CH3

KF-Al2O3 5h

O

KF-Al2O3 15 h

CHO

CH3CH2NO2

CHO

OH CH3

CH3

NO2 CH3 OH CH3

CH 3 CH 3 NO2 NO2 CH3

O OH

(EtO)2CHCH2NO2

CH3CH2NO2

PhCHO

PhCHO

OH

CH3CH2NO2

CF3CH

CH3CH2NO2

OEt CF3CH OH

OH

Et3N Bu4NF⋅3H2O tBuMe2SiCl THF, 2 h Et3N Bu4NF⋅3H2O tBuMe2SiCl THF DBU 24 h K2CO3

OH

OEt OEt

Ph NO2

OH Ph NO2 OH CH3

CF3 NO2

OH CH3

CF2H NO2

33

34

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

Table 3.1. Continued Nitro compound CH3CH2NO2

Carbonyl compound OEt CF2HCH OH O

CH3NO2

Condition

Product

O

CH3NO2

O

Ref.

68 (54/46)

41

95

21

91

21

60

21

78

9

100

9

57

39

OH

K2CO3

CH3

CF2H NO2

PAP (see Eq. 3.1, 10 mol%) MgSO4

CH3NO2

Yield (%) (syn/anti)

OH NO2

NO2

PAP (10 mol%) MgSO4

OH

PAP (10 mol%) MgSO4

NO2 OH

OH

CHO

CH3NO2

NO2

La3(O-t-Bu3)9 (3.3 mol%) THF, 0 °C OH

CH3NO2

CHO

NO2

Sm(HMDS)3 (10 mol%) RT, 25 h OH O2N

Cl3CNO2

PhCHO

SnCl2 0 °C

Ph

Cl Cl

Nitroalkanes are silylated with trialkylsilyl chloride and triethylamine to form stable silyl nitronates, which react with aldehydes to give β-nitro alcohol O-silyl ethers in the presence of a catalytic amount of Bu4NF⋅3 H2O at –78 °C in THF. Because the retro nitro-aldol reaction cannot occur, a high diastereoselectivity is observed, as shown in Eq. 3.8.18 The product is directly reduced to the corresponding β-amino alcohol with retention of the stereochemistry. The dilithium salts of nitroalkanes are formed on treatment with 2 equiv of n-butyllithium in THF/HMPA at –90 °C. They react with aldehydes to give β-nitro alcohols with high diastereoselectivity after careful protonation (Eq. 3.9). The dilithium salt is much reactive toward carbonyl compounds than the mono-anion, and this often leads to better yields of β-nitro alcohols than the conventional Henry reaction.19 The Henry reaction is accelerated by the presence of Et3N, Bu4NF⋅3H2O and tBuMe2SiCl (Eq. 3.10).20 The use of non-ionic strong bases such as the proazaphosphatrane (PAP) is also a good choice for overcoming the low reactivity of the Henry reaction (see Eq. 3.20).21 NO2 t

NO2

t-Bu2MeSiCl Et3N

–

Bu O O Si Me N But

C5H11 C5H11CHO Bu4NF, THF –78 ºC

O

But Si

Me But 69% (de: 95%)

(3.8)

3.1

–

O

BuLi, HMPA

NO2

N

PREPARATION OF β-NITRO ALCOHOLS

O

OLi

C5H11CHO

THF, –90 ºC

N

OLi C5H11

–70 to –60 ºC

Li

35

OLi

NO2 C5H11

AcOH, THF –90 ºC

(3.9)

OH (de: 62%)

NO2 PhCHO

Et3N, Bu4NF•3H2O

NO2

+

Ph

t-BuMe2SiCl THF, 5 min

Me

(3.10)

OH 95% (erythro/threo = 53/47)

It is inconvenient to remove the base by acidification in the work-up procedure, because acidification may lead to the Nef reaction (Section 6.1). To avoid this inconvenience the reactions catalyzed in heterogeneous systems with Al2O3, Al2O3-supported KF, and polymer-supported bases, have been developed. Commercial chromatographic alumina (activity 1 according to Brockmann) is used without solvents for the preparation of functionalized β-nitro alcohols. Acid- or base-sensitive substrates are prepared by this method (Eqs. 3.11 and 3.12).22 The reactivity is enhanced by a modification using alumina-supported potassium fluoride.23 Dehydration of β-nitro alcohols is also catalyzed by Al2O3.24 One-pot synthesis of nitroalkenes from aldehydes and nitroalkanes using Al2O3 is convenient (see Section 3.2.1); this process has been applied to a short synthesis of spiro-ethers, (often found in pheromones) involving hydrogenation of the nitroalkene and subsequent Nef reaction (Eq. 3.13).24b Importantly, no dehydration is observed when neutral Al2O3 is employed at room temperature; however, simply warming to 40 °C results in the formation of nitroalkenes. OH

OH

CH3 +

CH3

Al2O3

CHO

NO2

CH3

CH3

RT, 24 h

CH3

OH

(3.11)

NO2 CH3 69% OH

O

Al2O3

+ n-C6H13CHO

O

O

RT, 24 h

H

NO2

O

+

OH

Al2O3 OTHP

H

(3.12)

C6H13 NO2 86%

NO2 OH

O

CH2Cl2, 40 ºC

O2N OTHP

H 53%

O 1) NaBH4 2) H+

O 64%

(3.13)

A more effective catalyst for the Henry reaction is a polymer-supported base such as amberlyst A-21. Various β-nitro alcohols can be obtained with the help of amberlyst with or without solvent (Eq. 3.14).25 A recent report claims that amberlite IRA-420 (OH-form) or DOWEX-1 (OH-form) is more effective for the Henry reaction than amberlyst A-21.26 Poly-

36

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

mer-supported bases are attractive for getting a library of β-nitroalcohols, which are important intermediates for biologically active compounds (Eq. 3.15). NO2 +

HO(CH2)6CH2NO2

A-21

CH3NO2

(3.14)

HO(CH2)6

20 h

OH 70%

O

O

O

F

R-CH2NO2 R: Me, Et

R

NMe3+OH-

R

MeO

O2N

R

NO2

NO2

NO2 R

F

OH

OH

OH NO2

NO2

NO2

O N

F

OH

OH

OH

O

O

O2N

MeO

F

R

N

R

(3.15)

The nitro-aldol reaction can also be carried out in water using NaOH in the presence of cetyltrimethylammonium chloride (CTACl) as a cationic surfactant. CTACl (5 mmol) is added to a mixture of nitroalkane (50 mmol) and aldehyde (50 mmol) in NaOH 0.025 M (150 mL) at room temperature. The mixture is stirred for 2–3 h and worked up to give the product in 70–90% yield. Compared with the classical methods, this procedure has economical and environmental advantages (Eq. 3.16).27 NO2

HO(CH2)6CH2NO2 NaOH, CTACl

+ CHO

(3.16)

HO(CH2)6

H2O, RT, 3 h

OH 75%

The nitro-aldol reaction with ketones is sensitive to steric factors and generally gives a complex mixture of products depending on the ratio of reactants, base, temperature, and time.27 Nitromethane is reactive enough toward ketones to give the β-nitro alcohol under various conditions. Cyclohexanone reacts with nitromethane to give 1-(nitromethyl) cyclohexanol in 69–94% yield in the presence of sodium ethoxide in ethanol.7f This transformation is more simply carried out using tetramethylguanidine (TMG) as the base (Eq. 3.17).11 Stronger nonionic bases like proazaphosphatrane (PAP) are more effective in the Henry reaction with ketones (see Eq. 3.20). NH

O +

CH3NO2

HO

NO2

Me2N NMe2 RT, 48 h

(3.17) 71%

However, 3- or 4-methylcyclohexanone is less reactive to nitromethane than cyclohexanone. Although 2-methylcyclohexanone does not react with nitromethane under the conventional conditions, under high pressure and a fluoride ion catalysis the reaction proceeds to give the β-nitro alcohol in moderate yields (Eq. 3.18).29

PREPARATION OF β-NITRO ALCOHOLS

3.1

HO Me

O Me

+

CH3NO2

Bu4NF

37

NO2

(3.18)

9 kbar, 30 ºC 50%

Another method for improving the reactivity of nitro compounds is provided by the double deprotonation of nitroalkanes. In this case, the reaction with ketones affords β-nitro alcohols in 40–60% yield (Eq. 3.19).30 NO2 HO

O

2 BuLi, HMPA

NO2

(3.19)

THF, –90 ºC 65%

Proazaphosphatrane, P(RNCH2CH2)3N, is an efficient catalyst for the Henry reaction, and various ketones give nitro-aldols by the reaction with nitromethane and other nitroalkanes (Eq. 3.20).21

R N

P

+

CH3CH2NO2

R R

NO2

N

cat.

O

N

HO

(3.20)

N

MgSO4, 7 h 82%

Allylic nitro compounds are obtained by the reaction of cyclic ketones with nitromethane in the presence of 1,2-diaminoethane (1 mol%) as catalyst. Because exo-cyclic nitroalkenes are rearranged to the endo-cyclic β,γ-nitroalkenes, allylic nitro compounds are selectively produced (Eq. 3.21).31 NO2 O +

CH3NO2

H2NCH2CH2NH2 MeO

MeO

70%

(3.21)

If N,N-dimethylethylenediamine is used as the base, allylic nitro compounds are obtained in good yields from both acyclic and alicyclic ketones (Eqs. 3.22 and 3.23).32 R O +

NO2

H2NCH2CH2NMe2 R

NO2

(3.22)

benzene, 80 ºC 61–99%

38

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

R

O

+

R

NO2

H2NCH2CH2NMe2

CH3NO2

(3.23)

benzene, 80 ºC 55–80%

Conjugated nitroalkenes are isomerized to allylic nitro compounds under basic conditions. Reactions of α,β-unsaturated nitro compounds with aldehydes under basic conditions lead directly to γ,δ-unsaturated β-nitro alcohols (Eq. 3.24).33 This reaction is very useful for preparing allylic nitro compounds. NO2

+

OH NO2

Et3N

HCHO

(3.24)

80%

Barrett and coworkers have used this method for the synthesis of 2,4′-linked bisoxazole, which constitutes a partial structure of hennoxazole A.34 Condensation of the nitroalkene in Scheme 3.2 with isobutylaldehyde affords the nitro alcohol in 61% yield. Recrystallization gives the pure syn-stereoisomer, which is protected as its tert-butyldimethylsilyl (TBS) ether and dihydroxylated using osmium tetraoxide as catalyst. Reduction of the nitro group to the amine occurs by hydrogenation over Raney nickel. The subsequent glycol cleavage with NaIO4 followed by cyclization gives the oxazole. Stille coupling of stannyloxazole with iodooxazole using Pd(0) gives the desired bis-oxazole (Scheme 3.2).35

1) O5O4

OH NO2

CHO

OH OH

2) H2 / Raney Ni

Dabco

O O 3) HC–O–CCH3

NO2 61% (ds = 5.5:1)

NHCHO

Me3Sn OTBS 1) NaIO4

N

2) Ph3P, I2 O

BuLi I2

OTBS

N

OTBS O I

N

Ph

N O

OTBS

Pd(PPh3)4

O

N O

Scheme 3.2. Model studies on the synthesis of hennoxazole A

3.2 DERIVATIVES FROM >-NITRO ALCOHOLS 3.2.1 Nitroalkenes Dehydration of β-nitro alcohols provides an important method for the preparation of nitroalkenes. Because lower nitroalkenes such as nitroethylene, 1-nitro-1-propene, and 2-nitro-1-propene tend to polymerize, they must be prepared carefully and used immediately after preparation. Dehydration with phthalic anhydride is the most reliable method for such lower nitroalkenes.42,43 Such lower nitroalkenes have been used as important reagents for Michael acceptors or dienophiles in the Diels-Alder reaction, which will be

3.2

DERIVATIVES FROM β-NITRO ALCOHOLS

39

discussed in Chapters 4 and 8. Some typical nitroalkenes which are useful reagents in organic synthesis are presented here.42

• Nitroethylene: Dehydration of 2-nitroethanol44 using phthalic anhydride (80%) is • •

the best choice of preparation;43 bp 38–39 °C/80 mm Hg. 1-Nitro-1-propene: Preparation is accomplished by dehydration of 2-nitro-1propanol with phthalic anhydride (73%)45 or acetic anhydride-AcONa46; bp 56–57 °C/80 mmHg. 2-Nitro-1-propene: Preparation is accomplished by dehydration of 1-nitro-2propanol with methanesulfonyl chloride and triethylamine (30% yield),47 acetic anhydride-AcONa (85% yield),46 or phthalic anhydride (55%)45; bp 58 °C/35 mmHg (Eq. 3.25). O O O2N

R

O2 N

O

R

140–180 ºC 80 mmHg

HO

(3.25)

R = H (80%) R = Me (73%)

Dehydration of β-nitro alcohols is generally carried out by the following reagents, phthalic anhydride,44 CH3SO2Cl-Et3N,47 dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC),48 Ac2O-AcONa, Ph3PCCl4,49 and TFAA-Et3N,50 as exemplified in Eqs. 3.2648 and 3.2747b. n-C4H9

NO2 OH

PhO

CHO

35 ºC, 10 h

NO2

(3.26)

90% NO2

PhO 1) CH3NO2, Et3N

(3.27)

N

2) MeSO2Cl, Et3N

N O

n-C4H9

DCC, CuCl

O

An

An 85%

Dehydration of β-nitro alcohols using DCC gives a mixture of E/Z nitroalkenes.48 The pure (E)-isomers are obtained on treatment with catalytic amounts of triethylamine or polymer-bound triphenylphosphine (TPP) (Eq. 3.28).51 When (Z) nitroalkenes are desired, the addition of PhSeNa to the E/Z mixture and protonation at –78 °C followed by oxidation with H2O2 gives (Z)-nitroalkenes (Eq. 3.29).52 n-C3H7

n-C3H7

Me

NO2 E/Z = 55/45

TPP 20 h

Me

(3.28)

NO2 100% (E/Z = 100/0) NO2

Me

Me NO2

PhSeNa AcOH –78 ºC

Me

Me

SePh 70 % (anti/syn = 91/9)

Me

NO2

H2O2 Me 99% (Z/E = 90/10)

(3.29)

40

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

Al2O3 can be used both as a base for the Henry reaction and as a dehydrating agent. Thus, nitroalkenes are simply prepared by mixing of aldehydes and nitroalkanes with Al2O3 and subsequent warming at 40 °C (Eq. 3.30).53

O

CHO

NO2

Al2O3

+ CH3CH2NO2

40 ºC, 44 h

(3.30)

Me

O

In general, base-catalyzed reactions of aromatic aldehydes with nitroalkanes give nitroalkenes directly (Knoevenagel reaction).54 The reaction is very simple; heating a mixture of aromatic aldehydes, nitroalkanes, and amines in benzene or toluene for several hours using a Dean-Stark water separator gives the desired nitroalkenes in good yield, as shown in Eqs. 3.31–3.34.54–58 NO2 CHO

+

C4H9NH2

CH3CH2NO2

OMe MeO CHO

+

CH3CH2NO2

(3.31)

Me OMe 80–90% OMe

toluene reflux

CH3CO2NH4

NO2 MeO

Me

MeO

(3.32)

65%

CH2NO2

+

CHO

C4H9NH2

(3.33) O2N 65%

Br

+

CHO

NO2

CH3CO2NH4

NO2

CH3CO2H

Br

Br O2N

(3.34)

NO2

82%

Instead of using the Dean-Stark apparatus, the reaction can be carried out at reflux using MeNH3Cl/AcOK/MeOH with HC(OMe)3 as a water scavenger. A wide variety of nitroalkenes can be prepared in good yields by this method (Eq. 3.35).59 MeO MeO BzO

MeO NO2

+ BzO

CHO

MeNH3Cl, AcOK HC(OMe)3 MeOH, reflux

NO2 OMe

BzO 77%

OBz

(3.35) In recent years, there has been a considerable growth of interest in the catalysis of organic reactions by inorganic reagents supported on high surface areas.60 Envirocat, a new family of supported reagents, which exhibits both Brönstead and Lewis acid character, are ideal for environmentally friendly chemistry. These reagents are non-toxic powders that can be easily

3.2

DERIVATIVES FROM β-NITRO ALCOHOLS

41

filtered from the reaction mixture and may be reused.61 With the use of this new heterogeneous catalyst, nitroolefins are prepared directly by heating a mixture of aldehyde and nitroalkane at 100 °C in the absence of solvents (Eq. 3.36). Me CHO

NO2

+

Envirocat EPZG NO2

100 ºC, 20 min

(3.36)

95%

Application of ultrasound62 or microwave irradiation63 greatly assists these condensation reactions as shown in Eqs. 3.37 and 3.38, respectively, rendering the use of a Dean-Stark apparatus unnecessary. OMe MeO

CHO

Yield (%)

Condition +

CH3NO2 OMe

MeO

NO2

Cl +

CH3CH2NO2

CHO

NH4OAc/ AcOH 100 ºC, 3 h

35

NH4OAc/ AcOH 22 ºC, 3 h, ))))

99

N H Microwave 400 W 8 min

Cl

(3.37)

NO2 Me

(3.38)

64%

Reactions of methyl nitroacetate with aldehydes are induced by TiCl4 in pyridine. They afford nitroalkenyl-esters,64 which are used in the preparation of various nonnatural amino acids (Eq. 3.39).65 NO2 CHO + N Me

O2N

CO2Me

TiCl4

CO2Me O

N Me

THF, 0–25 ºC

N Me 75%

(3.39)

Nitroalkenes prepared from aromatic aldehydes are especially useful for natural product synthesis. For example, the products are directly converted into ketones via the Nef reaction (Section 6.1) or indoles (Section 10.2) via the reduction to phenylethylamines (Section 6.3.2). The application of these transformations are discussed later; here, some examples are presented to emphasize their utility. Schemes 3.3 and 3.4 present a synthesis of 5,6-dihydroxyindole66 and asperidophytine indole alkaloid,67 respectively. Seebach and coworkers have developed the multiple coupling reagent, 2-nitro-2-propenyl 2,2-dimethylpropanoate (NPP). The reaction of nitromethane with formaldehyde gives 1,3dihydroxy-2-nitropropane in 95% yield. Subsequent acylation with two equivalents of pivaloyl chloride and elimination of pivalic acid affords NPP. The reaction may be run on a 40- to 200-g

42

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

HO

HO

CHO

NO2

CH3NO2

C(NO2)4, ZnSO4 HO

NH4OAc-AcOH

HO

EtOH 95%

HO

NO2

HO

Na2S2O4, ZnSO4 HO

NO2

pH 4

N H

HO

70%

52%

Scheme 3.3. Synthesis of 5,6-dihydroxyindole

NO2 1) Fe, AcOH, silica gel, toluene, ∆ MeO

MeO

2) MeI, KOH, Bu4NI, THF, 23 ºC

NO2 OMe

N OMe Me 67%

1) POCl3, DMF, 35 ºC, 1 h, then NaOH aq 2) MeNO2, NH4OAc, ∆, 1 h CHO

NH2

NO2

OHC

O SiMe3

LiAlH4, THF, ∆, 1 h MeO

O

N OMe Me 91%

MeO

MeCN, 23 ºC, then TFA, 0 ºC, then NaBH3CN, 23 ºC

N OMe Me 88%

O N H

N

Oi-Pr

O

O MeO

N H OMe Me

MeO

N H OMe Me aspidophytine

66% Scheme 3.4. Synthesis of aspidophytine

scale without problems (Eq. 3.40).68 NPP allows successive introduction of two different nucleophiles Nu1 and Nu2 as shown in Eq. 3.41. The conversion of the resulting products via the Nef reaction or reduction into various compounds, makes NPP a useful reagent for convergent syntheses, as demonstrated in Eqs. 3.42 and 3.43.

CH3NO2 + HCHO

1) MeONa/MeOH 2) Salicylic acid

NO2 HO

OH

t-BuCOCl

75%

NO2

t-Bu

O O

t-Bu

O O

NO2 AcONa

O O NPP 45%

t-Bu

(3.40)

DERIVATIVES FROM β-NITRO ALCOHOLS

3.2

43

O Nef NPP

NO2

Nu1

NO2

Nu2

Nu1

Nu1

Nu1

Nu2

(3.41)

Nu2

NH2

Reduction

Nu1

Nu2

NO2 OEt

Li NPP

OLi

THF, –70 °C

THF, –70 °C 88%

NO2

O OEt

(3.42)

N H

H2/Ni Et2O-EtOH

O 66%

82%

OLi

O

NO2

n-C4H9Li

NPP THF, –70 °C

THF, –70 °C 77%

NO2

O

75%

(3.43)

1) MeONa/ MeOH O

2) H2SO4 78%

Chiral multiple-coupling reagents have been prepared in enantiomerically pure form by enantio-selective saponification of diesters of meso-2-nitrocyclohexane-1,3-diols (Eq. 3.44) with pig liver esterase (PLE).69 NO2

NO2 AcO

OAc

PLE

HO

NO2 OAc

90% (95% ee)

1) Piv2O 2) MeOH/H+ 3) DCC/CuCl

t-Bu

O O 67%

(3.44)

The nitro-aldol reaction followed by dehydration gives 2-nitro-1,3-dienes, which are useful reagents for cycloaddition (Eq. 3.45).70

CH3NO2 O

O

OH NO2

MeONa

+

H

OTHP NO2

(3.45)

O 1) HCHO, MeONa

heat O

2) PhCOCl NO2

Ph

NO2 65% (overall)

44

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

The nitro-aldol approach is impractical for the synthesis of 2,2-disubstituted 1-nitroalkenes due to the reversibility of the reaction when ketones are employed as substrates. Addition-elimination reactions are used for the preparation of such nitroalkenes (see Chapter 4). 3.2.2 Nitroalkanes Reduction of nitroalkenes with NaBH4 has been widely used for the synthesis of nitroalkanes.71 In some cases, however, small amounts of dimeric products are also formed, although their formation can be completely suppressed using acidic conditions.72 Silica gel is also effective in preventing the dimerization of nitrostyrenes. 2-Aryl-1-nitroethanes are obtained in near quantitative yields by the reduction with NaBH4.73 This route provides a simple route to phenylethylamines of biochemical and pharmacological interest.74 A simple and efficient method for the large-scale preparation of phenylnitroethanes has been reported, in which solutions of nitrostyrenes in 1,4-dioxane are added to an efficiently stirred suspension of NaBH4 in a mixture of 1,4-dioxane and ethanol (Eq. 3.46).75 Hydrogenation of nitrostyrene derivatives with bis(triphenylphosphine)rhodium chloride (Wilkinson catalyst) gives also good yields of products. 76 NO2

1) NaBH4, dioxane-EtOH 30 ºC, 1.5 h

NO2

(3.46)

2) AcOH 95%

The reduction of nitroalkenes with ZnBH4 in 1,2-dimethoxyethane (DME) gives the corresponding oximes or nitroalkanes depending on the structure of nitroalkenes. α-Substituted nitroalkenes are reduced to the oximes, whereas those having no α-substituents afford the nitroalkanes (Eq. 3.47).77

MeO

NO2

MeO DME

MeO

NO2

ZnBH4

(3.47)

MeO 86%

Very selective reduction of nitroalkenes into the corresponding nitroalkanes is achieved using NaCNBH3 in the presence of the zeolite H-ZSM 5 in methanol (Eq. 3.48).78 O

O NaCNBH3

(3.48)

Zeolite H-ZSM5 NO2

NO2 70%

Nitromethylation of aldehydes has been carried out in a one pot procedure consisting of the Henry reaction, acetylation, and reduction with sodium borohydride, which provides a good method for the preparation of 1-nitroalkanes.16b,79 It has been improved by several modifications. The initial condensation reaction is accelerated by use of KF and 18-crown-6 in isopropanol. Acetylation is effected with acetic anhydride at 25 °C and 4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP) as a catalyst. These mild conditions are compatible with various functional groups which are often

DERIVATIVES FROM β-NITRO ALCOHOLS

3.2

45

present in the synthesis of natural products.16b Readily available methyl 6-oxohexanoate has been converted into methyl 7-oxoheptanoate via nitromethylation and subsequent Nef reaction (Eq. 3.49).79b

1) CH3NO2, KF, i-PrOH CHO CO2Me 2) Ac2O, DMAP 3) NaBH4

CHO

Nef

NO2 CO2Me

CO2Me

(3.49)

100%

Additional examples of the synthetic utility of this procedure are demonstrated in Eqs. 3.50–3.52.80 The nitro and nitroalkyl groups in the products are further converted into various functional groups such as carbonyl, amino, and alkyl groups. This is discussed in Chapter 6.

NHBz N O

O2N O

N

N N

Cbz +

NH

O

BnO

H O

O

NHBz Cbz

1) KOt-Bu, t-BuOH, THF

N O

2) Ac2O, DMAP, THF 3) NaBH4, EtOH, THF

N

NH

BnO

N

N

NO2

O

O

(3.50)

O

53% NHBz N O

O2N O

N

N N

Boc +

NH

O

Ph2CHO

H O

O

NHBz Boc

N

NH O

Ph2CHO

1) n-Bu4NF, THF, 18 h 2) Ac2O, DMAP 3) NaBH4, EtOH

O

N

N N

(3.51)

NO2 O

O

70%

AcO AcO

CHO

AcO AcO

OAc O OAc

+ NO2

O O O O O

1) KF 2) Ac2O 3) NaBH4

OAc O

NO2

OAc O O O O O 71%

(3.52)

46

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

Reduction of 1-nitro-1-alkenes with fermenting Baker’s yeast proceeds enantioselectively to give optically active nitroalkanes (Eq. 3.53).81 Ph

Ph

CH2NO2

Baker's yeast

(3.53)

Me Me

H 50% (98% ee)

NO2

3.2.3 =-Nitro Ketones α-Nitro ketones are useful intermediates in organic synthesis, and they are generally prepared either by nitration of ketones (Chapter 2.1) or by oxidation of β-nitro alcohols. Acylation of nitroalkanes with acylimidazoles or other acylating reagents is also a reliable method for the preparation of α-nitro ketones (see Chapter 5) (Eq. 3.54). O NO2

+ X

O

OH oxidation NO2

(X = N

oxidizing agent CrO3, Na2Cr2O7, PCC, etc.

NO2

OM

NO2X (X = Cl, OAc)

N)

(3.54)

In this chapter the synthesis of α-nitro ketones by the hydroxyalkylation of nitroalkanes (Henry reaction) followed by oxidation is discussed. The oxidation is normally carried out by treating the nitro alcohols with CrO3 or Na2Cr2O7 in strong acidic media.82 To avoid acidic conditions, pyridinum chlorochromate (PCC)83 or K2Cr2O7 under phase-transfer conditions 84a has been used. Acid labile groups are retained under these conditions as shown in Eqs. 3.55 and 3.56. Recently, Ballini and coworkers established a one-pot, solvent-free synthesis of acyclic α-nitro ketones (by using neutral alumina) in the Henry reaction followed by in situ oxidation of the nitro alcohol using wet alumina supported with CrO3. 84b O

OH PCC O2N

O

O

12 h

O2N

O

(3.55)

O

78% Me NO2 OH

Me NO2 K2Cr2O7, 30% H2SO4 n-(C4H9)4N+HSO-4 CH2Cl2, −10 ºC, 2 h

(3.56) O 77%

In general, alkylation or acylation of nitronate ions takes place at the oxygen to yield the O-alkylated or O-acylated products. However, the choice of alkylating or acylating reagents can alter the reaction course to give the C-alkylated or acylated products. The acylation of primary nitroalkane salts with acyl cyanides gives the O-acylated product in 30–70% yield.85 A combination of diethyl phosphorocyanidate and triethylamine allows the direct C-acylation of nitromethane by aromatic carboxylic acids to give α-nitro ketones.86 Acyl imidazoles are more effective as C-acylating agents of nitroalkane salts, and α-nitro ketones are obtained in good

DERIVATIVES FROM β-NITRO ALCOHOLS

3.2

47

yields.87 Although the isolated lithium salts of nitroalkanes are used in the original paper, the potassium salt prepared in situ by treatment of nitro compounds with t-BuOK in DMSO is reactive enough with acyl imidazoles to give α-nitro ketones in 60–90% yield (see Section 5.2, Acylation of Nitro Compounds) (Eq. 3.57).88

O

O

1) t-BuOK/ DMSO

O NO2

2)

n-C6H13

N

O

NO2

n-C6H13 N

(3.57)

O 88%

O

The nitro group of α-nitro ketones is readily removed either by treatment with Bu3SnH89 or reduction with LiAlH4 of the corresponding tosylhydrazones (Eq. 3.58).90 Details of denitration are discussed in Section 7.2, and some applications of this process are shown in Schemes 3.5–3.7. Bu3SnH, AIBN

NO2 R1

R O

R1

80 ºC

2

R2 O

NO2

TsNHNH2 R1

(3.58)

LiAlH4 2

R NNHTs

Construction of the carbon frameworks by using the activating property of the nitro group followed by denitration provides a useful tool for the preparation of various natural products as shown in Schemes 3.5–3.7. For example, (Z)-jasmone and dihydrojasmone, constituents of the essential oil of jasmone flowers, have been prepared as shown in Scheme 3.5.91 Schemes 3.6 and 3.7 present a synthesis of pheromones via denitration of α-nitro ketones.92,93

O

O

NO2

O

+ H

O

1) Al2O3 2) K2Cr2O7

R

O

NO2 R

TsNHNH2

O

O

O

NO2 R

LiAlH4

O

O R

H+ acetone

NNHTs

NNHTs O OH−

R

Scheme 3.5.

R = CH 2 R = (CH2)4CH3

O R O

48

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION NO2

NO2

O

OCH3

+ H3C

H

OCH3

amberlyst A-21 OH

O

O 86%

NO2 OCH3

PCC CH2Cl2

O

Bu3SnH, AIBN benzene

O 71%

O

SCH3

1) (CH2OH)2, H+ 2) LDA, –78 ºC

OCH3

OCH3

3) (CH3S)2, HMPA, 0 ºC 4) (CO2H)2

O 71%

O

O 80%

OCH3

1) NaIO4 O

2) 100 ºC

O 86% OH O

O

Scheme 3.6.

O O

C5H11

+ NO2

H

(CH2)9CH3

1) amberlyst A-21 C H 5 11 2) K2Cr2O7

(CH2)9CH3 NO2 78%

NNHTs TsNHNH2 MeOH

C5H11

(CH2)9CH3 NO2 90%

LiAlH4 THF, 0 ºC

NNHTs C5H11

(CH2)9CH3

O amberlyst A-15 Me2CO/ H2O

90%

C5H11

(CH2)9CH3 95%

Scheme 3.7.

3.2.4 >-Amino Alcohols β-Nitro alcohols prepared by the Henry reaction are important precursors for β-amino alcohols. The reduction of the nitro group to the amino function is commonly carried out by hydrogenation in the presence of Raney Ni in EtOH or Pd/C in THF and MeOH (see Section 4.2). The conversion into β-amino alcohols is also described in the Sections 3.2.5 and 3.3.

3.2.5 Nitro Sugars and Amino Sugars The chemistry and biochemistry of nitro sugars and amino sugars have stimulated extensive research. They are the components of various antibiotics, which show important biological

3.2

DERIVATIVES FROM β-NITRO ALCOHOLS

49

activities.94 Synthesis of nitro and amino sugars is one of the most important applications of nitro-aldol condensation. Synthesis of nitro sugars has been well reviewed by Wade and Giuliano,95 also there are many other excellent reviews on this topic.96 Only selected recent papers are described here to show the importance of nitro-aldol reaction in carbohydrate chemistry. The Baer-Fisher procedure is one of the simplest and shortest methods for obtaining 3-deoxy-3-nitrohexopyranosides and 3-amino-3-deoxyhexose derivatives by means of the Henry reaction with sugar dialdehydes. Sugar dialdehydes are obtained by glycol cleavage of glycosides.95,96 The reaction of nitromethane with sugar dialdehydes as shown in Eq. 3.59 is catalyzed with KF in isopropanol to give one isomer. If this reaction is carried out with sodium methoxide, the stereoselective becomes poor.97 X +

OHC OHC

KF i-PrOH

MeNO2

X NO2

X = O, S

HO

(3.59)

OH

Base-catalyzed nitromethane cyclization of the dialdehyde generated by periodate oxidation of 1,2-O-cyclohexylidene-myo-inositol affords the nitrodiol with 1,4/2,3,5-configuration. This is converted into the α-mannosidase inhibitor, mannostatin A (Eq. 3.60).98 OH

OH

OHC

OH HO O OH O

NaIO4

OHC

MeNO2

O O

NaOMe MeOH

OH O2N

O O

X Several steps

H2N OH HO OH

X = SMe (mannostatin A) X = SOMe (mannostatin B)

(3.60)

A mixture of methyl 3-deoxy-3-C-methyl-3-nitro-α-D- and β-L-glucopyranosides (1:1) is formed by the reaction of nitroethane with the sugar dialdehyde obtained from D-glucose. The products are separated and converted into branched-chain fluoro nitro D- and L-sugars (Eq. 3.61).99 HO HO O2N

HO O

O O

EtNO2 NaOMe

OMe

MeHO OMe + Me HO OMe O HO OH O2N

F HO O2N

F HO

MeHO OMe Me O

O2N

OMe OH

(3.61)

The anion of nitromethane adds easily to the carbonyl functions of sugars. This is a useful strategy for extension of the carbon chain.100 2-Acetamido-2-deoxy-β-D-glucose (N-acetyl-Dglucosamine) is the carbohydrate unit of glycoproteins that occurs most often. The nitromethylation method provides a straightforward route to a series of C-glycosyl compounds with the acetamido functionality (Eq. 3.62).101

50

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

HO HO

OH O NHAc

NaOH H2O, O3

NO2

MeNO2

HO HO

NaOMe MeOH

OH O

HO HO

OH O CHO NHAc

OH

+ HO HO

Ac2O NO2

OH O CO2H NHAc OH O

HO HO

H2SO4

1) H2, Pd/C AcOEt 2) NaOMe MeOH

NO2

NHAc

NHAc

HO HO

OH O NO2

(3.62)

NHAc

If a carbohydrate already contains a nitro group, the nitro-bearing carbon atom can become the nucleophilic center for the coupling of two monosaccharide units (see Section 3.2.2). Suami and coworkers have used this method for the synthesis of antibiotics bearing sugars.102 A typical example is presented in Eq. 3.63.102b OH

O 2N

NO2 O

O

O O

MTMO O

KF i-PrOH

O

+

O

CHO

(3.63)

O O

MTM = CH2SCH3

MTMO O

3-Nitro and 3-amino sugars have been prepared via stepwise construction from acyclic precursors by the nitro-aldol strategy as shown in Scheme 3.8.103 3-Amino-2,3,6-trideoxy-L-hexoses (A-D in Scheme 3.9) occur naturally, forming the glycone part of anthracyclinone antibiotics, important in anti-tumor treatment.104 Several approaches based on nitro-aldol for the synthesis of amino sugars have been reported. Alumina-catalyzed reaction of methyl 3-nitropropanoate with O-benzyl- D lactaldehyde gives the D-ribo-nitro-aldol (anti, anti isomer) in 63% yield, which is converted into L-daunosamine17b,105 (see Section 3.3). Jager and coworkers have reported a short synthesis of L-acosamine based on the stereoselective nitro-aldol reaction of 2-O-benzyl-L-lactaldehyde with 3-nitropropanal dimethyl acetal as shown in Scheme 3.10.106 The stereoselective nitro-aldol reaction is carried out by the silyl nitronate approach as discussed in Section 3.3.

O O R

NH2 (NO 2) OH OH X

O +

R

NO2

R = H, Me Scheme 3.8.

OH X X = H, OH

3.3

STEREOSELECTIVE HENRY REACTIONS AND APPLICATIONS TO ORGANIC SYNTHESIS

O

O

H2N

NH2

HO HO

O

OH

OH

NH2

H2N

HO HO CH3

O

HO

HO CH3

CH3

CH3

L-ritosamine (L-ribo)

L-acosamine (L-arabino)

3-epi-L-daunosamine (L-xylo)

L-daunosamine (L-lyxo)

A

B

C

D

O

OH

51

O R OH

MeO

O

OH

O

daunomycin (R = H, 4′ -OH α) adriamycin (R = OH, 4′ -OH α) epirubicin (R = H, 4′ -OH β)

O 4′

OH NH2 Scheme 3.9.

O + OR

0.1 Bu4NF ("anhydrous")

OMe [Si]O2N

OMe

THF, −78 to −3 ºC, 14 h

1) separation 2) H2, Pd/C

OH OMe NO2 OMe RO ca. 60% (dr: 29:51:3:12)

L-acosamine

82% Scheme 3.10.

3.3 STEREOSELECTIVE HENRY REACTIONS AND APPLICATIONS TO ORGANIC SYNTHESIS β-Nitro alcohols can be hydrogenated to the corresponding amino alcohols with retention of configuration; the stereoselective Henry reaction is a useful tool in the elaboration of pharmacologically important β-amino alcohol derivatives including chloramphenicol, ephedrine, norephedrine, and others. Some important β-amino alcohols are listed in Scheme 3.11.107 In general, the Henry reaction proceeds in a non-selective way to give a mixture of anti (erythro) and syn (threo) isomers. Ab initio calculations on the Henry reaction suggest that free nitronate anions (not influenced by cations) react with aldehydes via transition states in which the nitro and carbonyl dipoles are antiperiplanar to each other. This kind of reaction yields anti-nitro alcohols. The Henry reaction between lithium nitronates and aldehydes is predicted to occur via cyclic transition states yielding syn-nitro alcohols as major products (Eq. 3.64).108

52

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

OH

OH

OH NHCOCHCl2

O2N

NHMe Ephedrin (Ref. 107a)

Chloramphenicol (Ref. 107a)

H N

O

OH N

SO2

O

OH NH2

HO NH2 HO

(Anti-HIV) (Ref. 107b) Sphingosine (Ref. 107c) OMe

OAc

NH2 O Ph

N H Anisomycin (Ref. 107d) Scheme 3.11

O 1

R

R2

Allophenylnorstatine (Ref. 107e)

Biological active β-amino alcohol derivatives

R2

OH H

+

2

R

R1

NO2 NO2

anti

OH OH

R2

OH

H

NO2

H

OH R1 erythro

+

R

R1

2

NO2 syn

NO2

H HO

H R1 threo

(3.64) Seebach and co-workers have developed complementary protocols for stereocontrol of the Henry reaction (Scheme 3.12).18,19

• Method A: α,α-Doubly deprotonated nitroalkanes react with aldehydes to give

intermediate nitronate alkoxides, which afford syn-nitroalcohols as major products (18:7–47:3) by kinetic protonation at –100 °C in THF-HMPA. The carcinogenic hexamethylphosphorous triamide (HMPA) can be replaced by the urea derivative (DMPU).

• Method B: In contrast, reprotonation of the tert-butyldimethylsilyl-protected nitronate anions gives anti-isomers selectively (41:9–19:1).

• Method C: High anti-selectivity is also observed in the fluoride-catalyzed reaction of

silyl nitronates with aldehydes. Trialkyl silyl nitronates are prepared in good yield from primary nitroalkanes by consecutive treatment with lithium diisopropylamide and trialkylsilyl chloride at –78 °C in THF.

They react with a wide range of aliphatic and aromatic aldehydes in the presence of catalytic amounts of tetrabutylammonium fluoride (TBAF) to give the trialkylsilyl ethers of β-nitro alcohols with high anti-selectivity (98%). The diastereoselective Henry reaction is summarized in Table 3.2. The products are reduced to β-amino alcohols using Raney Ni-H2 with retention of the configuration of β-nitro alcohols (Scheme 3.12). Tetrahydropyranyl (THP)-protected nitroethanol can be doubly deprotonated to lithium α-lithionitronate, which is stable to react with various electrophiles. Higher β-nitro alcohols,

3.3

53

STEREOSELECTIVE HENRY REACTIONS AND APPLICATIONS TO ORGANIC SYNTHESIS

Method A Li

OLi

R

R′CHO

NO2Li

–90 ºC

R

R′

NO2Li

OH AcOH R R′ R′ THF-HMPA −100 ºC NO2 O CH3 H3C N N DMPU =

H NO2 HX OR

Method B

Sit-BuMe2

O

R

R′

O

LDA

Sit-BuMe2 R

R′

NO2 O

Li Me2t-BuSi

N

O

NO2Li

O−

OH AcOH

H

R

R′

–90 ºC

NO2

R′ R

Method C O Sit-BuMe2

R N

+ R′CHO

O

Bu4NF

O

–70 ºC

Sit-BuMe2 R

R′

NO2 Scheme 3.12.

hydroxynitro ketones, and nitrodiols are prepared in good yields after deprotection of THP with an acidic ion-exchange resin in methanol. The nitrodiols are formed with high syn-diastereoselectivity (ds 75 to >95%). Because the nitro diols crystallize eventually, pure samples of single diastereomers can easily be prepared (Eqs. 3.65 and 3.66).109

Li THP O

O

N

O

NO2

1) E+ HO

2) H+

Li

H +

E =

R

E

C+ , R+ , R

C+

OH

O

(3.65) THP

1) n-BuLi, THF-HMPA O

NO2

2) RCHO, H

OH HO

R

Overall yield (%)

ds (%)

Me2CH-

68

93

Ph-

75

>95

p-MeOC6H4-

79

80

C12H25 C C

74

91

+

R NO2

(3.66)

54

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

Table 3.2. Stereoselective Henry reaction Nitro compound

Aldehyde

CH3CH2NO2

C5H11CHO

CH3CH2CH2NO2

CH3CH2CH2NO2

H Me 2t-BuSi

O

H Me 2t-BuSi

O

CHO

1) 2 n-BuLi in THF-HMPA 2) AcOH, –100 °C

81/19

C5H11 NO2

90/10

OH Ph NO2 OH

94/6

NO2

OMe

O

Sit-BuMe2

5/95

Sit-BuMe2

22/78

Sit-BuMe2

10/90

C2H5CHO NO2

Bu4NF

O

CHO O–

NO2

O

AcOH (Method B)

Sit-BuMe2 C 2H5

C3H7

O

C2H5

C3H7

NO2

NO2Li O C5H11

AcOH

Sit-BuMe2

O

CH3

O

Sit-BuMe2

5/95

C2H5

C5H11

NO2

NO2Li

Ph

syn/anti

OH

O–

CH2CH3 N

1) 2 n-BuLi in THF-HMPA 2) AcOH, –100 °C (Method A)

Bu4NF (Method C)

CH2CH3 N

Product

1) 2 n-BuLi in THF-HMPA 2) AcOH, –100 °C

PhCHO

MeO

Condition

AcOH

Sit-BuMe2

O

C2H5

Sit-BuMe2

18/82

C2H5

Ph

NO2

NO2Li

The products are reduced to amino diols with H2-Raney Ni in ethanol without loss of configurational purity (Eq. 3.67).109 OH

OH OH MeO

NO2

Raney Ni H2

OH NH2

MeO

(3.67)

98%

Bicyclic trimethylsilyl nitronates undergo stereoselective Henry reactions with benzaldehyde in the presence of fluoride ion to give cyclic hemiacetals in good yield with high diastereo-selectivity (95% ds) (Eq. 3.68).110

3.3

55

STEREOSELECTIVE HENRY REACTIONS AND APPLICATIONS TO ORGANIC SYNTHESIS

Me3SiO

H

O

N

Me3SiO

O− PhCHO Bu4NF

O

Ph

(3.68)

NO2

H

Ph 86% (95% ds)

Ph

Silyl nitronates of 2,2,2-trifluoronitroethane react with aldehydes in the presence of Bu4NF in THF to give the syn-diastereomers of β-nitro alcohol, as shown in Eq. 3.69. This is in sharp contrast with the results of anti-isomers prevailing for non-fluorinated analogues. This is due to the syn/anti equilibrium of CF3-substituted O-silyl nitro aldols. The anti-epimer in the trifluoromethyl series can be prepared by diastereoselective protonation of the corresponding O-silyl lithium nitronates (Eq. 3.70).111 −

F3C

O

N

NO2 F3C O

RCHO Bu4NF

R

O

R

Yield (%)

syn/anti

i-Pr-

52

76/24

Ph-

72

75/ 25

p-MeOC6H4-

72

73/ 27

Sit-BuMe2

H

Sit-BuMe2 CF3 NO2

(3.69) O C6H13

Sit-BuMe2 CF3

O 1) LDA 2) AcOH, −95 ºC

NO2

C6H13

Sit-BuMe2 CF3

(3.70)

NO2 anti/syn = 93/7

An experimentally simple procedure for stereoselectively preparing β-nitro alcohols has been developed. The alkyl nitronates, formed by the action of n-butyllithium on nitroalkanes in THF solution, react with aldehydes in the presence of isopropoxytitanium trichloride at room temperature to give the β-nitro alcohols enriched in the anti-diastereoisomers (Eq. 3.71).112 OH O2N

CHO +

NO2

1) n-BuLi 2) TiCl3(Oi-Pr) THF, RT

O2N

NO2

72% (anti/syn = 7/1)

(3.71)

This method is particularly useful for electron-deficient aromatic aldehydes, but it is not efficient with aliphatic aldehydes, probably a consequence of competitive aldol reaction. A new heterogeneous catalyst exists that uses Mg-Al hydrotalcites for the diastereoselective synthesis of β-nitro alcohols. The positively charged Mg-Al double hydroxide sheets are charge-balanced by the carbonate anions residing in the interlayer section of the clay structure. Both aromatic and aliphatic aldehydes react with nitroalkanes using this catalyst to give β-nitro alcohols in good yields. Diastereoselectivity depends on the structure of the aldehydes, 4-nitrobenzaldehyde and 2-chlorobenzaldehyde react with nitroethane to give the corresponding nitro alcohols in 100% anti-selectivity.113 However, the reaction with aliphatic aldehydes exhibits low selectivity (Eq. 3.72).

56

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

ArCHO

+

Ar

Yield (%)

anti/syn

Ph-

87

3.75/ 1

p-O2NC6H4-

84

100/ 0

p-ClC6H4-

82

100/ 0

p-MeOC6H4-

62

1.23/1

NO2 OH

Mg-Al hydrotalcite

Me

Ar

THF, reflux

NO2

(3.72)

The stereoselective intramolecular Henry reactions have been reported by Seebach. The Michael addition of doubly deprotonated acetyl acetaldehyde to 1-methylenedioxyphenyl-2-nitroethene followed by subsequent intramolecular nitro-aldol cyclization leads to the diastereomerically pure cyclohexanone derivative, where the nitro and OH groups are cis as shown in Eq. 3.73.114 This reaction is applied to the synthesis of 1-desoxy-2-lycorinone as shown in Eq. 3.74.115 O O

NO2

O

THF

+

H O

OH NO2

O O

H

O

(3.73)

58% O

NO2

O

+

O

O OCH3

O

THF

O

H

OH

O H O

O

NO2 CO2CH3

55%

Several steps

O H O

N

(3.74)

In consideration of the structure of the valuable anticancer alkaloids pancratistatin and trans-dihydrolycorcidine,116 the development of an intramolecular nitro-aldol cyclization exhibiting alternative diastereoselectivity to that of Eq. 3.74 has been achieved. In contrast to cyclization of Eq. 3.74, a neutral alumina-promoted nitro-aldol cyclization provides the desired diastereoselectivity. Scheme 3.13 shows key steps of the total synthesis of lycoricidine alkaloids. Michael addition of the copper-zinc reagent derived from ethyl 4-bromobutanoate to nitroalkene117 followed by the reduction with diisobutylaluminum hydride (DIBAL-H) gives the requisite nitro-aldehyde, which is the key substrate for the intramolecular nitro-aldol reaction. The alumina-promoted 6-exo-trig intramolecular nitro-aldol cyclization proceeds in a highly diastereoselective way via a chelation-controlled chair-like transition state. The major isomer has the correct relative configuration at three stereoisomers, as observed in the pancratistatin series of anti-tumor agents.118 Over the last few years several examples have been reported in the field of asymmetric catalysis that are based on the interaction of two centers.6,119 Recently, Shibasaki and coworkers have developed an asymmetric two-center catalyst. Scheme 3.14 shows preparation of optically active La binaphthol (BINOL). This catalyst is effective in inducing the asymmetric nitro-aldol reaction, as shown in Scheme 3.15. These heterobimetallic M1-M2-binol complexes constitute a new class of widely applicable chiral catalysts as shown in Scheme 3.16. The new catalysts consist of a central metal ion (e.g., La3+, Al3+, Sm3+, Ga3+), three alkali metal ions (e.g., Li+, Na+, K+), and three chiral diphenol

3.3

STEREOSELECTIVE HENRY REACTIONS AND APPLICATIONS TO ORGANIC SYNTHESIS

57

O NO2

O

Br

Zn, LiI, DMF, 75 ºC, 5 h, then CuCN, LiCl

O

CO2Et

O

OEt

NO2

O 81%

DIBAL-H CH2Cl2, −78 ºC, 5 h

NO2

O OH Al RO O

H O

OH NO2

O

H 1) H2 (650 psi), Raney Ni, MeOH, 20 ºC, 4 h 2) ClCO2Me, Et3N

O N

O

71% (90% ds)

Al2O3

CHO

O

Ar H

H O

OR NHCO2Me

O

Tf2O, DMAP

O

CH2Cl2, 0−15 ºC, 15 h

O

OR NH O

96% OH HO H O

OH OH

OH H

H OH NH

O

H OH NH

OH O pancratistatin (Ref. 116)

O dihydrolycorcidine (Ref. 116) Scheme 3.13.

[1,1′-(R)- or 1,1′-(S)-binaphthol]. These catalysts exhibit basic as well as Lewis acid properties. They are easily prepared, stable to air and moisture, and nontoxic. By careful choice of the metal centers, various types of organic reactions are catalyzed. Asymmetric nitro-aldol reactions are catalyzed by lanthanoid-lithium-BINOL (LLB),9,120 asymmetric Michael reactions are catalyzed by lanthanoid-sodium BINOL (LSB),122 asymmetric hydrophosphonylation of imines is catalyzed by lanthanoid-potassium-BINOL (LPB),121 and asymmetric Michael-aldol reactions

+

LaCl 3

NaOH (1 mol equiv) H2O (10 mol equiv)

OLi OLi Method A

Optically active La catalyst Method B

La3(O-t-Bu)9 Contaminated by NaO-t-Bu

+

OH OH

LiCl (2 mol equiv) H2O (10 mol equiv)

Scheme 3.14. Preparation of the optically active La-BINOL complex

58

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

OH CHO

NO2

La cat. (10 mol%) CH3NO2 (10 equiv) THF, –50 ºC, 20 h

CHO

79% (73% ee) OH

La cat. (10 mol %)

NO2

CH3NO2 (10 equiv) THF, –40 ºC, 41 h

91% (62% ee) OH

CHO

NO2

La cat. (10 mol%) CH3NO2 (10 equiv) THF, –42 ºC, 2 days

80% (85% ee) OH

CHO

NO2

La cat. (10 mol%) CH3NO2 (10 equiv) THF

–50 ºC, 18 h: 91% (90% ee) –70 ºC, 53 h: 43% (95% ee)

Scheme 3.15. La-BINOL complex-catalyzed asymmetric nitro-aldol reactions

and hydrophosphonylation of aldehydes are catalyzed by aluminum-lithium-BINOL (ALB).122 The nitro-aldol reactions catalyzed by these catalysts are summarized here. The enantioselective nitro-aldol reaction catalyzed by (R)-LLB is effectively applied to the synthesis of three kinds of optically active β-receptor blocking drugs (S)-metoprolol,123a (S)-propanolol,123b and (S)-pindolol123c (Scheme 3.17). Shibasaki has also extended the use of LLB catalyst to tandem nitro-aldol reactions providing bicyclic adducts with 65% ee (Eq. 3.75).124 O

O CH3NO2

OHC

HO

(R)-LLB (5 mol%) O

(3.75) OH NO2 65% ee

Diastereoselective catalytic nitro-aldol reactions of optically active N-phthaloyl-L-phenylalanal with nitromethane in the presence of LLB proceed with high diastereoselectivity (anti:syn = 99:1) as shown in Eq. 3.76.125 The product is converted via the Nef reaction into (2S,3S)-3amino-2-hydroxy-4-phenylbutanoic acid, which is a subunit of the HIV-protease inhibitor OH Ph

CHO NPhth

CH3NO2 (R)-LLB (3.3 mol%) THF, –40 ºC, 72 h

Ph

NO2

NPhth 92% (96% ee: syn/anti = 99/1) OH

12 N HCl 100 ºC, 40 h

Ph

CO2H NH2 80%

(3.76)

59

Scheme 3.16.

60

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

(R)-LLB (3.3 mol%)

Ar

O

CHO

Ar

CH3NO2 (10–50 equiv) –50 ºC, THF

H2, PtO2, CH3OH

Ar

OH

O

acetone, 50 ºC

O

OH

a: 90% (94% ee) NO2 b: 80% (92% ee) c: 76% (92% ee)

a: Ar =

b: Ar =

a: 80% (S)-metoprolol b: 90% (S)-propranolol c: 88% (S)-pindolol

N H

OCH3

HN

c: Ar =

Scheme 3.17. Asymmetric syntheses of β-blockers with (R)-LLB as catalyst

KNI-272. The reaction of the same aldehyde with nitromethane using (S)-LLB leads to the reduced diastereoselectivity (74:26). LLB-type catalysts are able to promote diastereo-selective and enantio-selective nitro-aldol reactions from prochiral materials. However, LLB gives unsatisfactory results in terms of both diastereoselectivity (Syn:Anti: 63:37 ~ 77:23) and enantioselectivity (<78% ee) in many cases (Scheme 3.15).120a A number of complexes a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h, and i are prepared, as shown in Scheme 3.18, in which BINOL rings are substituted by alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, and cyano groups. The effect of substituents on the BINOL rings is tested by the reaction of Eq. 3.77. Thus, stereoselectivity is affected by the substituents of BINOL, and alkynyl-substituted BINOLs, such as f–i, give the better optical activity of the product than LLB.126 Another advantage is conferred by introducing 6,6′-substituents to BINOL. CHO

Ph

cat. (3.3 mol%) THF, –40 ºC, 91 h

R O

Li R

O O R

Yield (%)

1

LLB a

79

73

2

80

67

3

b

84

63

4

c

67

55

5

d e

69

71

74 85

79 88

84

85

59 54

85 86

8

f g

9 10

h i

R

OH OH OH

R R

R

(3.77)

ee (%)

a

6,6′-Dicyano-BINOL with 93% ee was used.

R

O Li

NO2

Catalyst

R O Li La O

Ph

Entry

6 7

a

OH

CH3NO2 (10 equiv)

OH R

LLB: R = H a : R = Br b: R = Me c : R = CN d : R = C≡CH

Scheme 3.18. Structural modification of LLB

e : R = C≡CPh f : R = C≡CSiMe3 g : R = C≡CSiEt3 h : R = C≡CTBS i : R = C≡CSiMe2Ph TBS–tert-butyldimethylsilyl

3.3

STEREOSELECTIVE HENRY REACTIONS AND APPLICATIONS TO ORGANIC SYNTHESIS

61

The heterobimetallic asymmetric catalyst, Sm-Li-(R)-BINOL, catalyzes the nitro-aldol reaction of α,α-difluoroaldehydes with nitromethane in a good enantioselective manner, as shown in Eq. 3.78. In general, catalytic asymmetric syntheses of fluorine containing compounds have been rather difficult. The S configuration of the nitro-aldol adduct of Eq. 3.78 shows that the nitronate reacts preferentially on the Si face of aldehydes in the presence of (R)-LLB. In general, (R)-LLB causes attack on the Re face. Thus, enantiotopic face selection for α,α-difluoroaldehydes is opposite to that for nonfluorinated aldehydes. The stereoselectivity for α,α-difluoroaldehydes is identical to that of β-alkoxyaldehydes, as shown in Scheme 3.19, suggesting that the fluorine atoms at the α-position have a great influence on enantioface selection. Ph

CHO F F

+

CH3NO2

SmLi3tris[(R)-binaphthoxide] THF, –40 ºC, 96−168 h

OH NO2

Ph

(3.78)

F F 74% (87% ee)

A syn-selective asymmetric nitro-aldol reaction has been reported for structurally simple aldehydes using a new catalyst generated from 6,6-bis[(triethylsilyl)ethynyl]BINOL (g in Scheme 3.18).126 The syn selectivity in the nitro-aldol reaction can be explained by steric hindrance in the bicyclic transition state as can be seen in Newman projection. In the favored transition state, the catalyst acts as a Lewis acid and as a Lewis base at different sites. In contrast, the nonchelation-controlled transition state affords anti product with lower ee. This stereoselective nitro-aldol reaction has been applied to simple synthesis of threo-dihydrosphingosine by the reduction of the nitro-aldol product with H2 and Pd-C (Eq. 3.79).

(3.79) The LLB catalysts requires at least 3.3 mol% of asymmetric catalyst for efficient nitro-aldol reactions, and the reactions are rather slow (first generation). Second-generation LLB catalysts are prepared by addition of 1 equiv of H2O and 0.9 equiv of n-BuLi. The second-generationcatalysts are more reactive than the first generation LLB as shown in Eq. 3.80. The proposed mechanism of asymmetric nitro-aldol reaction using these catalysts is presented in Scheme 3.20.128 The diastereoselectivity is observed in the Henry reaction using optical active nitro compounds or α-heteroatom substituted aldehydes. For example, the reaction of O-benzyl-D-lactaldehyde with methyl 3-nitropropionate in the presence of neutral alumina leads to a mixture of three nitro-aldol products from which D-ribo isomer is isolated by direct crystallization. D-Ribo

62

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

(R)-LnLB complex Nu −

(R)-LnLB complex Nu −

Si face F H

F R

O

Re face

Si face H

R

Si face H

O

O

R

O

Re face

Re face –

Nu (R)-LnLB complex Scheme 3.19.

(3.80)

Scheme 3.20. Proposed mechanism of asymmetric nitro-aldol reactions catalyzed by LLB, LLB-II, or LLB-Li nitronate

3.3

STEREOSELECTIVE HENRY REACTIONS AND APPLICATIONS TO ORGANIC SYNTHESIS

63

isomer is the thermodynamic product, which is converted into N-benzoyl-L-daunosamine, as shown in Eq. 3.81.129

(3.81)

The Henry reactions of N,N-dibenzyl-L-phenylalaninal with nitroalkanes using 1.2 equiv of tetrabutylammonium fluoride (TBAF) as the catalyst proceed in a highly stereoselective manner, as shown in Eqs. 3.82 and 3.83.130 This reaction provides rapid and stereoselective access to important molecules containing 1,3-diamino-2-hydroxypropyl segments, which are central structural subunit of the HIV protease inhibitor amprenavir (in Scheme 3.21).

(3.82)

(3.83)

Corey has discovered that chiral quaternary ammonium salts shown in Schemes 3.21 and 3.22 are more effective for inducing re- and si-face-selective nitro-aldol reactions than TBAF.131 The sequence utilized for the synthesis of amprenavir is shown in Scheme 3.21. The reaction of N,N-dibenzyl-(S)-phenylalanial with nitromethane gives the desired syn-nitro alcohol with a 17:1 diastereoselectivity. The diastereoselectivity is only 4:1 when TBAF is used. This nitro alcohol is reduced to the corresponding amino alcohol with NaBH4 in the presence of NiCl2 in 85% yield. The reductive alkylation with isobutyraldehyde followed by sulfonylation with p-nitrobenzenesulfonyl chloride, deprotection with H2-Pd/C, and acylation with (S)-3-tetrahydrofuranyl-N-oxysuccinimidyl carbonate gives amprenavir in 50% overall yield from the starting amino aldehyde. The (2S,3S) isomer of amprenavir is prepared from N-tert-butoxycarbonyl derivative of (S)-phenyalaninal as shown in Scheme 3.22. The use of rigid chiral quaternary ammonium cations as shown in Schemes 3.21 and 3.22 control the face selectivity in nucleophilic addition of nitromethyl anion to aldehydes, re- or si-face selectivity depending on the N-protecting group of the S-phenylalaninal moiety. This provides a new strategy for stereocontrol of the Henry reaction. Jager and coworkers have used the TBAF catalyzed-stereoselective nitro-aldol reaction for the synthesis of cyclic amino alcohols such as iminopolyols, imino sugars, and cyclic amino acids. They are important classes of compounds and have the potential utility as anti-diabetic,

64

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

Scheme 3.21.

Scheme 3.22.

anti-viral, or anti-tumor agents.132 TBAF-catalyzed reaction of α-alkoxy aldehydes with nitroacetaldehyde diethylacetal yields anti-syn diastereomers as predominant thermodynamic products (Eq. 3.84).133 The products are good precursors of cyclic amino alcohols.

(3.84)

REFERENCES

65

Another application of diastereoselective nitro-aldol reactions catalyzed by Bu4NF⋅3H2O is demonstrated in a simple synthesis of 1,4-dideoxy-1,4-imino-D-mannitol (DIM) and amino analogues (Eq. 3.85).134 The nitro-aldol reaction of nitro compounds bearing α-oxy or α-amino function with glyceraldehyde leads to nitrohexitols, which can be reduced to the corresponding amino compounds. Cyclization gives iminopolyols, as shown in Eq. 3.85.

(3.85) The nitro-aldol reaction using 1,1-diethoxy-2-nitroethane is useful for lengthening of the carbon chain of carbohydrates. The reaction of Eq. 3.86 proceeds in a stereoselective way (ds 75%) to give the syn-nitro alcohol in 58% isolated yield.135 The product is converted into 2-amino-2-deoxyaldoses by reaction with H2/Raney Ni.

(3.86) REFERENCES 1. Henry, L., and C. R. H. Seances. Acad. Sci., 120, 1265 (1895). 2. Baer, H. H., and L. Urbas, The Chemistry of the Nitro and Nitroso Groups, ed. by H. Feuer, Interscience, New York, Vol. 2, 1970. 3. Houben-weyl, Methoden der Organischen Chemie, 4th Ed., ed. by E. Muller, Vol. X/I, Georg Thieme Verlag, Stuttgart, 1971. 4. Rosini, G. Comprehensive Organic Synthesis, ed. by B. M. Trost, Vol. 2, Pergamon, New York, 1992. 5. Shvekhgeimer, M. C. A. Russian Chemical Reviews, 67, 35 (1998). 6. Shibasaki, M., H. Sasai, and T. Arai. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 36, 1236 (1997). 7a. Vanderbilt, B. M., and H. B. Hass. Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, 32, 34 (1940). 7b. Herman, L. W., and J. W. ApSimon. Tetrahedron Lett., 26, 1423 (1985). 7c. Simaneck, V., V. Preininger, A. Klasek, and J. Jurina, Heterocycles, 4, 1263 (1976). 7d. Cavallo, A. S., H. Lapitais, P. Buchert, A. Klein, and S. Colonna, J. Organomet. Chem., 330, 357 (1987). 7e. Ballini, R., G. Bosica, and M. Petrini. Chem. Lett., 1105 (1999). 7f. Dauben, H. J., Jr, H. J. Ringold, R. W. Wade, D. L. Pearson, and A. G. Anderson, Jr. Org. Synth, 4, 221 (1963). 8. Worrall, D. E. Org. Synth. 1, 413 (1941). 9a. Sasai, H., S. Arai, and M. Shibasaki. J. Org. Chem., 59, 2661 (1994).

66

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

9b. Sasai, H., T. Suzuki, S. Arai, T. Arai, and M. Shibasaki. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 114, 4418 (1992). 10. Torssell, K., and O. Zeuthen. Acta Chem. Scand., B32, 118 (1978). 11. Simoni, D., F. P. Invidiata, S. Manfredini, R. Ferroni, H. Lampronti, M. Roberti, and G. P. Po llini. Tetrahedron Lett., 38, 2749 (1997). 12. Ono, N., H. Katayama, S. Nishiyama, and T. Ogawa. J. Heterocyclic Chem., 31, 707 (1994). 13. Ono, N., H. Kawamura and K. Maruyama. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 62, 3386 (1989). 14. Ono, N., and K. Maruyama. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 61, 4470 (1988). 15. Morao, I., and F. P. Cossio. Tetrahedron Lett., 38, 6461 (1997). 16a. Kambe, S., and H. Yasuda. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 41, 1444 (1968). 16b. Wollenburg, R. H., and S. J. Miller. Tetrahedron Lett., 3219 (1978). 17a. Clark, J. H., and J. M. Miller. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 940 (1978). 17b. Ohrlein, R., and V. Jager. Tetrahedron Lett., 29, 6083 (1988). 18. Seebach, D., A. K. Beck, F. Lehr, T. Weller, and E. Colvin. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 20, 397 (1981). 19. Seebach, D., A. K. Beck, T. Mukhopadhyay, and E. Thomas. Helv. Chim Acta, 65, 1101 (1982). 20. Fernandez, R., C. Gasch, A. G-Sanchez, and J. E. Vichezz. Tetrahedron Lett., 32, 3225 (1991). 21. Kisanga, P. B., and J. G. Verkade. J. Org. Chem., 64, 4298 (1999). 22. Rosini, G., R. Ballini, and P. Sorrenti. Synthesis, 1014 (1983). 23. Melot, J. M., F. Texier-Boullet, and A. Foucaud. Tetrahedron Lett., 27, 493 (1986). 24a. Rosini, G., R. Ballini, and M. Petrini. Synthesis, 46 (1986). 24b. B. Ballini and M. Petrini, J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 3159 (1992). 25. Ballini, R., G. Bosica, and P. Forconi. Tetrahedron, 52, 1677 (1996). 26. Caldarelli, M., J. Habermann, and S. V. Ley. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 107 (1999). 27. Ballini, R., and G. Boscia. J. Org. Chem., 62, 425 (1997). 28. Torssell, K. B. G., and K. V. Gothelf. Nitromethane and nitroethane, in Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis, ed. by L. Paquette, Wiley, New York, 1996. 29. Matsumoto, K. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 23, 617 (1984). 30. Seebach, D., and L. Lehr. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 15, 505 (1976). 31a. Barton, D. H. R., W. B. Motherwell, and S. Z. Zard. J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun., 551 (1982). 31b. Barton, D. H. R., W. B. Motherwell, and S. Z. Zard, Bull. Soc. Chim. Fr., II, 61 (1983). 32. Tamura, R., M. Sato, and D. Oda. J. Org. Chem., 51, 4368 (1986). 33. Ono, N., I. Hamamoto, A. Kamimura, A. Kaji, and R. Tamura. Synthesis, 259 (1987). 34. Wipf, P., and S. Lin. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 117, 558 (1995). 35. Barrett, A. G. M., and J. T. Kohrt. Synlet, 415 (1995). 36. Williams, T. M., R. Crumbie, and H. S. Mosher. J. Org. Chem., 50, 91 (1985). 37. Pandey, G., T. D. Bagul, and A. K. Sahoo. J. Org. Chem., 63, 760 (1998). 38. Grethe, G., T. Mitt, T. H. Williams, and M. R. Uskokovic. J. Org. Chem., 48, 5309 (1983). 39. Demir, A. S., C. Tanyeli, A. S. Mahasneh, and H. Aksoy. Synthesis, 155 (1994). 40. Poupart, M. A., G. Fazal, S. Goulet, and L. T. Mar. J. Org. Chem., 64, 1356 (1999). 41. Kaneko, S., T. Yamazaki, and T. Kitazume. J. Org. Chem., 58, 2302 (1993). 42. Nitroethylene, 1-nitro-1-propene and 2-nitro-1-propene, see Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis, ed. by L. Paquette, Wiley, New York, 1996. 43. Ranganathan, D., C. B. Rao, S. Ranganathan, A. K. Mehrotra, and R. Iyengar. J. Org. Chem., 45, 1185 (1980). 44. Noland, W. E. Org. Synth., 5, 833 (1973). 45. Miyashita, M., T. Yanami, and A. Yoshikoshi. Org. Synth. 7, 396 (1990). 46. Hass, H. B., A. G. Susie, and R. Heider. J. Org. Chem., 15, 8, (1950). 47a. Melton, J., and J. E. McMurry. J. Org. Chem., 40, 2138 (1975). 47b. Palomo, C., J. M. Aizpurua, F. P. Cossio, J. M. Garcia, M. C. Lopez, and M. Oiarbide. J. Org. Chem., 55, 2070 (1990). 48. Knochel, P., and D. Seebach. Synthesis, 1017 (1982). 49. Saikia, A. K., N. C. Barua, R. P. Sharma, and A. C. Ghosh. Synthesis, 685 (1994). 50. Denmark, S. E., and L. R. Marcin. J. Org. Chem., 58, 3850 (1993). 51. Stanetty, P., and M. Kremslehner. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 811 (1998). 52. Ono, N., A. Kamimura, T. Kawai, and A. Kaji. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1550 (1987). 53a. Ballini, R., R. Castagnani, and M. Petrini. J. Org. Chem., 57, 2160 (1992).

REFERENCES

67

53b. Rosini, G., R. Ballini, M. Oetrini, and P. Sorrenti. Synthesis, 515 (1985). 54. Mathieu, J., and J. Weill-Raynal. Formation of C-C Bonds, Vol. II, George Thieme, Stuttgart, 1975, pp 576–577. 55. Heinzelman, R. V. Org. Synth., 4, 573 (1963). 56. Ahmad, S., W. B. Whaley, and D. F. Jones. J. Chem. Soc. (C), 3590 (1971). 57. Drehal, G., and H. Ehrhardt, Chem. Ber., 93, 500 (1960). 58. Remberz, G., and M. Schwill. J. Prakt. Chem., [4] 31, 127 (1966). 59a. McDonald, E., and R. T. Martin. Tetrahedron Lett., 1317 (1977). 59b. Ono, N., H. Kawamura, M. Bougauchi, and K. Maruyama. Tetrahedron, 46, 7483 (1990). 60a. Clark, J. H., A. P. Kybett, and D. J. Macquarrie. Supported Reagents, VCH, New York, 1992. 60b. Clark, J. H., and D. J. Macquarrie. Chem. Soc. Reviews, 303 (1996). 61. Bandgar, B. P., M. B. Zirange, and P. P. Wadgaonkar. Synlett., 149 (1996). 62a. McMulty, J., J. A. Steere, and S. Wolf. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 8013 (1998). 62b. Ayoubi, S. A. E., F. T. Boullet, and J. Hamelin. Synthesis, 258 (1994). 63. Valma, R. S., R. Dahiya, and S. Kumar. Tetrahedron Lett., 38, 5131 (1997). 64a. Lahnert, W. Tetrahedron, 28, 663 (1972). 64b. Dauzonne, D., and R. Royer. Synthesis, 399 (1987). 65a. Fornicola, R. S., E. Oblinger, and J. Montogomery. J. Org. Chem., 63, 3528 (1998). 65b. Rodrigues, R., A. Diez, M. Rubiralta, and E. Giralt. Heterocycles, 43, 513 (1996). 66. Novellino, L., M. d’Ischia, and G. Prota. Synthesis, 793 (1999). 67. He, F., Y. Bo, J. D. Altom, and E. J. Corey. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 121, 6771 (1999). 68a. Seebach, D., and P. Knochel. Helv. Chim. Acta, 67, 261 (1984). 68b. Knochel, P., and D. Seebach. Tetrahedron Lett., 23, 3897 (1982). 69. Eberle, M., M. Egli, and D. Seebach. Helv. Chim. Acta, 71, 1 (1988). 70a. Barco, A., S. Benetti, G. P. Pollini, G. Spalluto, and V. Zanirato. Tetrahedron Lett., 32, 2517 (1991). 70b. Barco, A., S. Benetti, C. De-Risi, C. F. Morelli, G. P. Pollini, and V. Zenirato. Tetrahedron, 52, 9275 (1996). 71a. Schechter, H., D. E. Ley, and E. B. Robertson, Jr. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 78, 4984 (1956). 71b. Nair, V., and A. K. Sinhababu. J. Org. Chem., 45, 1893 (1980). 71c. Hassner, A., and C. Heathcock. J. Org. Chem., 29, 1350 (1964). 72. Meyers, A. I., and J. C. Sircar. J. Org. Chem., 32, 4134 (1967). 73. Sinhababu, A. K., and R. T. Borchardt. Tetrahedron Lett., 24, 227 (1983). 74. Nagatsu, T. Biochemistry of Catecholamines, Univ. of Tokyo Press, 1973. 75a. Bhattachariya, A., R. Mukhopadhyay, and S. C. Pakrashi. Synthesis, 886 (1985). 75b. Dauzonne, D., and R. Royer, 1054 (1984). 76. Mahboobi, S., and K. Bernauer. Helv. Chim. Acta, 71, 2034 (1988). 77a. Ranu, B. C., and R. Charkraborty. Tetrahedron Lett., 32, 3579 (1991). 77b. Ranu, B. C. Synthesis, 885 (1983). 78. Gupta, A., A. Hasque, and Y. D. Vankar. Chem. Commun., 1653 (1996). 79a. Bachman, G. B., and R. J. Maleski. J. Org. Chem., 37, 3810 (1972). 79b. Bosone, E., P. Farina, G. Guazzi, S. Innocenti, V. Marottaand, and U. Valcavi. Synthesis, 942 (1983). 80a. Mock, G. A., and J. G. Moffatt. Nucleic Acids Res., 10, 6223 (1982). 80b. Buchanan, J. G., A. Flinn, P. H. C. Mundill, and R. H. Wightman. Nucleosides Nucleotides, 5, 136 (1986). 80c. Martin, O. R., and W. Lai. J. Org. Chem., 58, 176 (1993). 81a. Ohta, H., N. Kobayashi, and K. Ozaki. J. Org. Chem., 54, 1802 (1989). 81b. Kawai, Y., M. Hayashi, Y. Inaba, K. Saitou, and A. Ohno. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 5225 (1999). 82. Hurd, C. D., and M. E. Nilson. J. Org. Chem., 20, 927 (1955). 83. Rosini, G., and R. Ballini. Synthesis, 543 (1983). 84a. Rosini, G., R. Ballini, P. Sorrenti, and M. Petrini. Synthesis, 607 (1984). 84b. Ballini, R., G. Bosica, and M. Oarrini. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 7963 (1998). 85. Bachman, G. B., and T. Hokoma. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 81, 4882 (1959). 86. Hamada, Y., K. Ando, and T. Shioiri. Chem. Pharm. Bull., 29, 259 (1981). 87. Crumbie, R. L., J. S. Nimitz, and H. S. Mosher. J. Org. Chem., 47, 4040 (1982). 88. Ono, N., M. Fujii, and A. Kaji. Synthesis, 532 (1987).

68

THE NITRO-ALDOL (HENRY) REACTION

89. 90. 91. 92. 93. 94a. 94b. 95. 96a. 96b. 96c. 97. 98. 99. 100a. 100b. 101. 102a. 102b. 102c. 102d. 102e. 103. 104a. 104b. 105a. 105b. 106. 107a. 107b. 107c. 107d. 107e. 108. 109. 110. 111. 112. 113. 114. 115. 116. 117. 118. 119. 120a. 120b. 121.

Ono, N., and A. Kaji. Synthesis, 693 (1986). Rosini, G., and R. Ballini. Synthesis, 833 (1988). Rosini, G., R. Ballini, and P. Sorrenti. Tetrahedron, 39, 4127 (1983). Rosini, R., R. Ballini, and M. Petrini. Synthesis, 269 (1985). Ballini, R. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 1419 (1991). Hauser, F. M., and S. Ellenberger, Chem. Rev., 86, 35 (1986). Rinhalt, K. L., and T. Suami. Aminocyclitol Antibiotics, American Chemical Society, Washington DC, 1980. Wade, P. W., and R. M. Giuliano. Nitro Compounds Recent Advances in Synthesis and Chemistry, ed. by H. Feuer and A. T. Nielsen, VCH, New York, 1990. Baer, H. H. Adv. Carbohyd. Chem. Biochem. 24, 67 (1969). Lichtentaler, F. W., Fortsch. Chem. Forsch, 14, 556 (1970). Gonzalev, F. S., and F. H. Mateo. Synlett, 715 (1990) and references therein. Gonzalez, F. S., and B. A. Vargas. Tetrahedron, 46, 4083 (1990). Ogawa, S., and Y. Yuming. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 890 (1991). Carmona, A. T., P. Borrachero, F. C. Escribano, M. J. Dianez, M. D. Estrada, A. L. Castro, R. Ojeda, M. G. Guillen, and S. P. Garrido. Tetrahedron Asymmetry, 10, 1751 (1999). Thronchet, J. M. J., K. D. Pallie, and F. B. Rey. J. Carbohydr. Chem., 4, 29 (1985). Binkley, R. W., and J. C. Fan. J. Carbohydr. Chem., 2, 213 (1982). Petrusova, M., J. N. BeMiller, and L. Petrus. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 2341 (1996). Fukuda, Y., H. Kasai, and T. Suami. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 54, 1830 (1981). Sakanaka, O., T. Ohmori, S. Kozaki, T. Suami, T. Ishii, S. Ohba, and Y. Saito. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 59, 1753 (1986). Sakanaka, S., T. Ohmori, S. Kozaki, and T. Suami. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 60, 1057 (1987). Kanai, K., J. Nishigaki, S. Ogawa, and T. Suami. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 60, 261 (1987). Maguire, M. P., P. L. Feldman, and H. Rapoport. J. Org. Chem., 55, 948 (1990). Hauser, F. M., and S. R. Ellenberger. Chem. Rev., 86, 35 (1986). Hanessian, S., and J. Klose. Tetrahedron Lett., 26, 1261 (1985). Hanessian, S., and P. V. Decasthale. Tetrahedron Lett. 37, 987 (1996). Jager, V., and V. Wehner. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 28, 469 (1989). Kies, F. M., P. Poggendorf, S. Picasso, and V. Jager. Chem. Commun., 119 (1998). Menzel, A., R. Ohrlein, H. Griesser, V. Wehner, and V. Jager. Synthesis, 1691 (1999). Lednicer, D. A., and L. A. Mitscher. The Organic Chemistry of Drug Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1975. Shibata, N., T. Katoh, and S. Terashima. Tetrahedron Lett., 38, 619 (1997). Koskinen, P. M., and M. P. Koskinen. Synthesis, 1075 (1998). Veith, U., O. Schwardt, and V. Jager. Synlett., 1181 (1996). Bunnage, M. E., S. G. Davis, C. J. Goodwin, and O. Ichihara. Tetrahedron, 50, 3975 (1994). Lecca, B., A. Arrieta, I. Morao, and F. P. Cossio, Chem. Eur. J., 3, 20 (1997). Eyer, M., and D. Seebach. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 107, 3601 (1985). Brook, M. A., and D. Seebach. Can. J. Chem., 65, 836 (1987). Marti, R. E., J. Heinzer, and D. Seebach. Liebigs Ann., 1193 (1995). Barrett, A. G. M., C. Robyr, and C. D. Spilling. J. Org. Chem., 54, 1233 (1989). Bulbule, V. J., V. H. Deshpande, S. Velu, A. Sudalai, S. Sivasankar, and V. T. Sathe. Tetrahedron, 55, 925 (1999). Ehrig, V., and D. Seebach. Chem. Ber., 108, 1961 (1975). Weller, T., and D. Seebach. Tetrahedron Lett., 23, 935 (1982). Pettit, G. R., G. R. Pettit III, R. A. Backhaus, M. R. Boyd, and A. W. Meerow. J. Nat. Prod., 56, 1682 (1993). Jubert, C., and P. Knochel. J. Org. Chem., 57, 5431 (1992). McNulty, J., and R. Mo. Chem. Commun., 933 (1998). Steinhagen, H., and G. Helmchen. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 35, 2239 (1996). Sasai, H., T. Suzuki, N. Itoh, K. Tanaka, T. Date, K. Okamura, and M. Shibasaki. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 115, 10372 (1993). Sasai, H., T. Arai, Y. Satow, K. N. Houk, and M. Shibasaki. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 117, 6194 (1995). Sasai, H., S. Arai, Y. Tahara, and M. Shibasaki. J. Org. Chem., 60, 6656 (1995).

REFERENCES

69

122. Arai, T., H. Sasai, K. Aoe, K. Okamura, T. Date, and M. Shibasaki. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 35, 104 (1996). 123a. Sasai, H., T. Suzuki, N. Itoh, S. Arai, and M. Shibasaki, Tetrahedron Lett., 34, 2657 (1983). 123b. Sasai, H., N. Itoh, T. Suzuki, and M. Shibasaki. Tetrahedron Lett., 34, 855 (1983). 123c. Sasai, H., Y. M. A. Yamada, T. Suzuki, and M. Shibasaki. Tetrahedron, 50, 12313 (1994). 124. Sasai, H., M. Hiroi, Y. M. A. Yamada, and M. Shibasaki. Tetrahedron Lett., 38, 6031 (1997). 125. Sasai, H., W. S. Kim, T. Suzuki, and M. Shibasaki. Tetrahedron Lett., 33, 6123 (1994). 126. Sasai, H., T. Tokunaga, S. Watanabe, T. Suzuki, N. Itoh, and M. Shibasaki. J. Org. Chem., 60, 7388 (1995). 127. Iseki, K., S. Oishi, H. Sasai, and M. Shibasaki. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 9081 (1996). 128. Arai, T., Y. M. A. Yamada, N. Yamamoto, H. Sasai, and M. Shibasaki. Chem. Eur. J., 2, 1368 (1996). 129. Hanessian, S., and J. Kloss. Tetrahedron Lett., 26, 1261 (1985). 130. Hanessian, S., and P. V. Devasthale. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 987 (1996). 131. Corey, E. J., and F. Y. Zhang. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 38, 1931 (1999). 132a. Gasiraghi, G., F. Zanardi, G. Rassu, and P. Spanu. Chem. Rev., 95, 1677 (1995). 132b. Hudlicky, T., D. A. Entwistle, K. K. Pitzer, and A. J. Thorpe. Chem. Rev., 96, 1195 (1996). 133. Wehner, V., and V. Jager. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 29, 1169 (1990). 134. Kiess, F. M., P. Poggendorf, S. Picasso, and V. Jager. Chem. Commun., 119 (1998). 135. Fernandez, R., C. Gasch, A. G. Sanchez, J. E. Vilchez, A. L. Castro, M. J. Dianez, M. D. Estra da, and S. P. Garrido. Carbohydrate Research, 247, 239 (1993).

The Nitro Group in Organic Synthesis. Noboru Ono Copyright © 2001 Wiley-VCH ISBNs: 0-471-31611-3 (Hardback); 0-471-22448-0 (Electronic)

4 MICHAEL ADDITION Conjugate addition of nucleophiles to electron-deficient alkenes is an important tool for the creation of carbon-carbon bond or carbon-heteroatom bond frameworks. This type of reaction is generally called as Michael addition. Because the nitro group is a strong electron-withdrawing group, nitroalkenes serve as good Michael acceptors and the anions of nitroalkanes serve as good Michael donors. These reactions proceed under very mild conditions and tolerate various functional groups. Because the nitro group can be converted into various functional groups as discussed in the Chapters 6 and 7, the Michael addition of nitro compounds has been used extensively in organic synthesis. The synthetic utility of the Michael addition of nitro compounds is shown in Scheme 4.1.

4.1 ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

4.1.1 Conjugate Addition of Heteroatom-Centered Nucleophiles Heteroatom-centered nucleophiles such as oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, and phosphorous anions are good nucleophiles for the Michael addition to nitroalkenes, which provides a useful method for the introduction of two heteroatoms on vicinal positions. Because this type of reaction may undergo a reverse elimination reaction, the addition products of nitrogen nucleophiles are often unstable. Because the addition products of sulfur and oxygen nucleophiles are more stable, the addition of alcohols and thiols has been frequently used for organic synthesis. In general, the experimental procedure for this addition is very simple. For example, the reaction of thiols with nitroalkenes readily proceeds in the presence of catalytic amounts of base to give β-nitro sulfides in quantitative yields.1 The stereoselectivity of this type of addition is generally low, and two diastereomeric isomers, syn and anti isomers, are formed in about a 1 to 1 ratio (Eq. 4.1).

+ NO2

70

XH X = RS, RO, R2N, R2P

NO2

base X

syn / anti = 1/ 1

(4.1)

4.1

71

ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

O R1 1

R

R

+

R1

Nu H+

Nu (Chapter 6)

NO2

NO2

R2

Nef

R2

2

R2

Nu R1

Nu– = RO–, RS–, RNH–, carbanions

2

Nu (Chapter 6)

R =H R2 R1

NH2

R1

CNO

H Nu (Chapter 7)

Nu (Chapter 6)

R1 R1

1

R

+

R2

X X= COR, CO2R, CN, SO2R, etc.

R2

X

R2CH2NO2

NO2

2

R R1 2

R

X NH2

X

X CNO

O

R1

R2 = H R1

X

H

Scheme 4.1.

β-Nitro sulfides are conveniently prepared by simply mixing carbonyl compounds, nitroalkanes, and thiols in the presence of triethylamine.2 β-Nitro sulfide, which is used for synthesis of d-biotin, is prepared by this procedure (Eq. 4.2).3 O + H

CH3NO2

+

HSCH2CO2H

CO2Me O HO

O S

NO2

HN H

NH H

(4.2)

CO2Me S

CO2H

H

d-biotin

Treatment of β-nitro acetates with thiols in the presence of base is also a simple method for the preparation of β-nitro sulfides (Eq. 4.3).4

72

MICHAEL ADDITION

OAc

O2N

+

THF

PhSH

SPh

O2N

Et3N

(4.3)

~100%

β-Nitro sulfides are useful intermediates for the preparation of various heterocycles containing sulfur atoms. Synthetic applications are demonstrated in Schemes 4.25 and 4.3,6 in which biotin is prepared via cycloaddition of nitrile oxides (see Chapter 8). (CH2)4CO2Me

SH

S

(CH2)4CO2Me

+ O 2N

O2N

O 2N O 2N 80%

S

S

(CH2)4CO2Me

(CH2)4CO2Me

1) Zn/Ag, (CF3CO)2O

POCl3 N

O

HN

2) Pd/C, H2 3) COCl2

N

O

NH O

81% Scheme 4.2.

NO2 EtONa

AcS

O2N

Ph N C O Et3N

S

LiAlH4

S

O

S

HO H2N

N

1) DMSO, Ac2O 2) NH2OH 3) Beckmann rearrangement

H2N

O HN C

1) OH– 2) COCl2

biotin

S

Scheme 4.3.

Synthesis of thiopheno[3,4-c]isoxazoline is shown in Eq. 4.4, in which the Michael addition of allyl thiol to β-nitro enones and subsequent nitrile oxide cyclization are involved.7 O

O O Me + HS

O2N

Me

Et3N THF

Me Me PhNCO NO2 Et N 3

S

Me 99%

S

Me N O

H 82% (ds 71/29) (4.4)

The base-catalyzed joint reaction of nitroalkenes with thiophenol in the presence of aldehydes gives γ-phenylthio-β-nitro alcohols in one pot (Eq. 4.5).8 The joint reaction of nitroalkenes with thiols and α,β-unsaturated nitriles (or esters) has also been achieved. (Eq. 4.6).9 β-Nitro sulfides thus prepared show unique reactivity toward nucleophiles or tin radicals. The nitro

4.1

73

ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

group can be replaced by various nucleophiles in the presence of Lewis acid.10 The reaction of β-nitro sulfides with tin radical gives alkenes, in which both the nitro and alkylthio groups are eliminated as shown in Eq. 4.7. Details of such substitution and elimination reactions are described in Chapter 7. NO2

NO2 +

PhSH

+

TMG

HCHO

OH

(4.5) SPh

TMG: tetramethylguanidine

MeO

88%

SEt

NO2

EtSH

MeO

NO2

Et3N

MeO

MeO

SEt CN

MeO CN (Me2CH)2NH

NO2

MeO

(4.6)

80% (ds 1:1) SR

SR Me3SiX TiCl4

Bu3SnH AIBN NO2

(4.7) X X = H, CN,CH2=CHCH2

Ono and Kamimura have found a very simple method for the stereo-control of the Michael addition of thiols, selenols, or alcohols. The Michael addition of thiolate anions to nitroalkenes followed by protonation at –78 °C gives anti-β-nitro sulfides (Eq. 4.8).11 This procedure can be extended to the preparation of anti-β-nitro selenides (Eq. 4.9)12 and anti-β-nitro ethers (Eq. 4.10).13 The addition products of benzyl alcohol are converted into β-amino alcohols with the retention of the configuration, which is a useful method for anti-β-amino alcohols. This is an alternative method of stereoselective nitro-aldol reactions (Section 3.3). The anti selectivity of these reactions is explained on the basis of stereoselective protonation to nitronate anion intermediates. The high stereoselectivity requires heteroatom substituents on the β-position of the nitro group. The computational calculation exhibits that the heteroatom covers one site of the plane of the nitronate anion.14

Me

Me + NO2 NO2

NO2 Me

Me SPh

+

Me

Me SPh

Reagent and condition

Yield (%) anti/syn

PhSLi, –78 ºC, AcOH

71

91/9

PhSH, Et3N, RT

88

40/60

(4.8)

74

MICHAEL ADDITION

NO2 Me +

Me

Me

AcOH –78 ºC

PhSeNa

NO2

(4.9)

Me SePh

68% (syn/anti = 91/9) NO2 Ph Me

PhCH2ONa AcOH –78 ºC

NO2

NH2

Me

Me

Pd/C, H2

Ph OCH2Ph 73% (syn/anti = 91/9)

Ph OH 72% (syn/anti = 91/9)

EtOH, HCl

(4.10) Enantioselective synthesis of β-amino alcohols is also reported by the application of the oxa-Michael addition to nitroalkenes (Eq. 4.11). The sodium salt derived from (1R,2S)-Nformylnorephedrin and NaH reacts with nitroalkenes at –78 °C with high diastereoselectivity (de: 93–98%) in good yields. Virtually diastereomerically pure compounds can be obtained by using column chromatography. After the reduction of the nitro group to the amino group, the cleavage of the ether with sodium in liquid NH3 at –78 °C leads to amino alcohols without racemization.15 Ph H N

H O

Ph

Me OH

Me

+ NO2

NHCHO

O

1) NaH, –78 ºC

Me

2) AcOH

Me NO2 66% (de 94%) OH

1) NaBH4, Pd/C 2) Boc2O

Na/ NH3

OR

NHBoc Me 80% (NO2 → NHBoc)

–78 ºC

OH

75% (ee 96%)

(4.11) The Michael addition of alkoxides to nitroalkenes gives generally a complex mixture of products due to the polymerization of nitroalkenes.16 The effect of cations of alkoxides has been examined carefully, and potassium- or sodium-alkoxides give pure β-nitro-ethers in 78–100% isolated yield (Eqs. 4.12 and 4.13).17 When lithium-alkoxides are employed, the yields are decreased to 20–40%. Ph OH

KH, THF RT

1) Ph

NO2

NO2 O

(4.12)

2) 1 N-HCl 80%

OH

NaH, THF RT

1)

NO2

NO2

O

(4.13)

2) 1 N-HCl 94%

4.1

75

ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

The Michael addition of oxygen-nucleophiles followed by subsequent cyclization or cycloaddition provides an important method for the preparation of oxygen-heterocycles such as tetrahydrofurans. For example, 3-nitro-2H-chromenes bearing various substituents are prepared by the reaction of substituted salicylaldehydes with nitroalkenes (Eq. 4.14).18a The reaction with nitroethanol in the presence of di-n-butylammmonium chloride in refluxing isopentyl acetate gives 2-unsubstituted 3-nitro-2H-chromene in 50% yield.18b Some 3-nitro-2H-chromenes display efficient optical second harmonic generation for nonlinear optical applications.19 R1

CHO

R1

Ar +

OH

1) Et3N, RT NO2

2

NO2

R R1, R2 = H, Cl, OMe Ar = Ph, p-MeOC6H4, 2-thienyl

Ar (4.14)

O

2) Al2O3

2

R

70–84%

The Michael addition of allyl alcohols to nitroalkenes followed by intramolecular silyl nitronate olefin cycloaddition (Section 8.2) leads to functionalized tetrahydrofurans (Eq. 4.15).20 Me +

HO

NO2 OSiMe3 N O

Me O

Me

t-BuOK –98 ºC

NO2

Me3SiCl

O Me

Me O

OSiMe3 N O

N

Bu4NF

O

O

74% (tandem reaction)

(4.15) Recently, tandem (domino) Michael addition initiated by oxygen nucleophiles has received much attention for the construction of octahydrobenzo[b]furans. The reaction of 1-nitrocyclohexene with 4-hydroxy-2-butynoates, catalyzed by t-BuOK at 0 °C, gives the desired furan in 90–100% yield (Eq. 4.16).21 Similarly, 4-chlorobut-2-yn-1-ols (Eq. 4.17)22 or prop-2-ynyl alcohols (Eq. 4.18)23 react with nitroalkenes in the presence of t-BuOK to give the furans. Anionic domino transformations induced by the addition of alkoxides to nitroalkenes proceed with high diastereoselectivity due to allylic 1.3-strain.22 The reduction of the nitro group in the products of Eq. 4.18 with SmI2 affords 3,6-dihydro-1,2-oxazines (Eq. 4.19). The cleavage of the N-O bond of the product generates 1,4-bifunctional groups.24a The [2,3]sigmatropic rearrangement of the allylic nitro compounds is also possible.24b Such anionic domino transformations have been reviewed.25 CO2Me

O2N NO2 +

HO CO2Me

t-BuOK 0 ºC

O H 100%

(4.16)

76

MICHAEL ADDITION

NO2

•

O2N

HO

t-BuOK 0 ºC

+ Cl

(4.17) O H 70–78%

O 2N NO2

O2N

t-BuOK

+ HO

O2N

+ O

0 ºC

O H H 78% (5-exo/6-endo = 1.7/1) (4.18) O HN

• SmI2

(4.19) O H 60–90%

O H

The addition-elimination reaction of hetero-atom-substituted nitroalkenes provides functionalized derivatives of unsaturated nitro compounds.26 Nitroenamines are generally prepared from α-nitro ketones and amines (see Chapter 5 regarding acylation of nitro compounds).26 The addition of alkoxides to 2-nitro-1-phenylthio-1-alkenes affords β-nitro-aldehyde acetals.27d The reaction of the same nitroalkenes with amines gives nitroenamines.27c They are important intermediates for organic synthesis and are generally prepared by the reaction of nitroalkanes with triethylorthoformate in the presence of alcohols or secondary amines.27a–c The methods of Eqs. 4.20 and 4.21 have some merits over the conventional methods, for variously substituted β-nitro-aldehydes acetals or nitroenamines are readily prepared by these methods.

PhS

PhS

NO2

+

N H MeONa RT, 24 h

NO2

THF RT, 2 h

N

NO2

(4.20)

85% MeO MeO

NO2

(4.21)

H 78%

Interesting push-pull dienes, 1-dialkylamino-4-nitro-1,3-butadienes, are prepared by the application of this addition-elimination reaction. (Eq. 4.22).28

PhS

+ NO2

CH2Cl2 N H

N

NO2

RT

(4.22)

80%

A new synthesis of β-nitroenamines by amination of nitroalkenes with methoxyamine in the presence of base is reported (Eq. 4.23).29

4.1

ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

Ph

H2NOMe

Ph

NO2

H

(4.23)

H2N NO2 94%

t-BuOK

77

The Michael addition of a nitrogen-centered nucleophile to nitroalkenes affords compounds that may serve as precursors of vicinal diamines, since the nitro group can be reduced to an amino function by reduction. The very convenient method for the preparation of 1,2-diamines is developed by the addition of O-ethylhydroxylamines to nitroalkenes followed by reduction with H2 in the presence of Pd/C (Eq. 4.24).30 NH2 NO2

R1

1) EtONH2•HCl, NaHCO3, THF

NH2

R1

2) H2, Pd/C, EtOH

R2

R2

(4.24)

54–90%

The conjugate addition of chiral-nitrogen nucleophiles to nitroalkenes provides access to chiral compounds having nitrogen functionalities on vicinal carbon atoms. Various natural products belong to this class of compounds such as biotin, penicillin, and several amino acids that are components of the peptide antibiotics. Chiral nitrogen nucleophiles, (S)-2-methoxymethylpyrrolidine (SMP) and its enantiomer (RMP) have been used for this process.30 Fuji and Node developed an elegant method for asymmetric synthesis using (S)-2-methoxymethylpyrrolidine and nitro enamines,118 which is discussed in Section 4.2 (Eq. 4.25). OMe O

N

+

N H

NO2

OMe

THF RT

(4.25)

N NO2

Amino alcohols like (S)-prolinol react with nitroalkenes very rapidly with very high facial selectivity.31 Rapid and stereoselective reduction of the nitro function is essential for the conversion of the products to 1,2-diamine derivatives with the retention of the configuration. Samarium diiodide is recommended in the stereoselective reduction of thermally unstable 2-aminonitroalkanes to give a range of useful 1,2-diamines (Eq. 4.26).32

NO2 +

OH

CH2Cl2, RT

N H

30 min OH

OH

NO2 N

SmI2

NH2 N

MeOH-THF 95% (trans/cis = 99/1 facial selectivity = 97/3)

90%

(4.26)

78

MICHAEL ADDITION

The asymmetric synthesis of 1,2-diamines using (2S,3R,4R,5S)-1-amino-3,4-dimethoxy2,5-bis(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidine with high enantiomeric excess (93–96% ee) has been developed, as in Eq. 4.27.33 MeO

OMe

MeO

OMe N NH2

Me

NO2

–78ºC→20ºC

MeO

OMe

MeO

(4.27)

NH2 N

MeO

N

Raney Ni, H2

H

NH2

Me 70% (ee 96%)

NO2

Me 75%

The conjugate addition of (R)- or (S)-4-phenyl-2-oxazolidinone to nitroalkenes is catalyzed by t-BuOK at –78 °C to give the addition product with excellent diastereoselectivity, the products are converted into vicinal diamines (Eq. 4.28).34 O O O

NO2 N H

Ph

+

O

N

t-BuOK, THF

NO2

–78 ºC, 15 min

75% (ds 98%)

NHAc 1) HCO2NH4, Pd/C

Ph

NHAc

(4.28)

2) Li/NH3 3) AcCl 46%

An alternative method for the stereoselective preparation of 1,2-diamines is shown in Eq. 4.29, in which the addition of nitroalkanes to imines is used as a key reaction.35 Ph EtCH2NO2

1) n-BuLi, –78 ºC, THF

N

+

OMe

MeO

NH Ph NO2 anti/syn = 10/1

2) AcOH

1) SmI2 THF-MeOH 2) CAN MeCN-H2O RT

(4.29) NH2

Ph NH2

The products of the conjugate addition of (R)-4-phenyl-2-oxazolidinone to nitroalkenes are converted into D-α-amino acids with high enantiomeric purity (Eq. 4.30).36

4.1

ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

79

O O

NaNO2, AcOH

Ph

N

DMSO, 40 ºC

NO2

O O

Ph

N

CO2H

NH2 1) Li/NH3

(4.30)

CO2H

2) DOWEX 50W-X4-400

62% (96% ee)

51%

An intramolecular Michael type reaction of a nitrogen nucleophile to nitroalkene, as shown in Eq. 4.31, provides a useful method for the preparation of 2,2-dimethyl-1-carbapenam.37 H KF 0 ºC

NSiMe3

O

O

NO2

(4.31)

N NO2 78%

The Michael addition of phosphine nucleophiles to nitroalkenes provides novel β-nitro phosphonates, as in Eq. 4.32.38 Yamashita and coworkers have shown that the nucleophilic addition of Ph2POH to chiral nitroalkenes derived from sugars proceeds stereoselectively to the 5-(S)-isomer (Eq. 4.32) in high diastereoselectivity (ds 11:1). NO2 O

O

O Ph2PH

H

O

MeO

H

MeO

NO2 O PPh2 O

(de = 11:1)

(4.32)

O

O

The base-catalyzed reaction of dialkyl phosphite with nitroalkenes results in the formation of alkenyl phosphonates (Eq. 4.33).39

Ph

Me + (MeO)2P(O)H

H

NO2

Et3N THF

O (MeO)2P

Me

(4.33)

H Ph 72% (E/Z = 3/1)

Combining, in tandem, the nitro-aldol reaction with the Michael addition using thiophenol is a good method for the preparation of β-nitro sulfides as shown in Eqs. 4.2 and 4.3. This reaction is applied to a total synthesis of tuberine. Tuberine is a simple enamide isolated from Streptomyces amakusaensis and has some structural resemblance to erbastatin, an enamide which has received much attention in recent years as an inhibitor of tyrosine-specific kinases. The reaction of p-anisaldehyde and nitromethane in the presence of thiophenol yields the requisite β-nitro sulfide, which is converted into tuberine via reduction, formylation, oxidation, and thermal elimination of

80

MICHAEL ADDITION

the sulfoxide (Eq. 4.34).40 The selective reduction of β-nitrostyrenes to β-aminostyrene derivatives provides a direct method for the preparation of the same enamides, but the reduction of nitroalkenes leads to a formation of complex products involving carbonyl compounds (see Chapter 6). MeO

CH3NO2, PhSH Et3N

CHO MeO

MeO NO2 PhS 82%

1) Zn/HCl

(4.34)

2) HOCOCOCF3 3) NaIO4 53%

NHCHO

1-Nitro-2,2-bis(methylthio)ethylene is a useful reagent for the preparation of various heterocycles, which is described in Chapter 10. 4.1.2 Conjugate Addition of Heteroatom Nucleophiles and Subsequent Nef Reaction Barrett and coworkers have explored hetero-substituted nitroalkenes in organic synthesis. The Michael addition of nucleophiles to 1-alkoxynitroalkenes or 1-phenylthionitroalkenes followed by oxidative Nef reaction (Section 6.1) using ozone gives α-substituted esters or thiol esters, respectively.41 As an alternative to nucleophilic addition to 1-(phenylthio)-nitroalkenes, Jackson and coworkers have used the reaction of nucleophiles with the corresponding epoxides (Scheme 4.4).42 Because the requisite nitroalkenes are readily prepared by the Henry reaction (Chapter 3) of aldehydes with phenylthionitromethane, this process provides a convenient tool for the conversion of aldehydes into α-substituted esters or thiol esters. 1-(Benzyloxy)nitroalkene is useful for the synthesis of bicyclic β-lactam systems and has been applied for the construction of an oxapenam (Eq. 4.35).43 Desilylation and cyclization take place on treatment of N-silylated nitroalkene with Bu4NF to give the nitronate of the bicyclic β-lactam, which is treated with ozone in situ to give the benzyl ester of oxapenam. When (phenylthio)nitromethane is used instead of (benzyloxy)nitromethane, the phenylthio ester of oxapenam is obtained (Eq. 4.36).44

NO2

Nu Nu

Nu O3

NO2

XR

O

XR

XR 60–80%

O X = O, S

Nu = OMe,

N , CH(CO2Me)2 O

NO2 XR

t-BuOOLi

O

Nu NO2

XR Scheme 4.4.

Nu

XR O

4.1

O

O

NO2 OCH2Ph

N

1) Bu4NF, THF, O3

O

(4.35)

CO2CH2Ph 52% O

NO2 Bu4NF, O 3

SPh

N

N

(4.36)

O

THF

Si

O

N O

2) DBU

Si

O

81

ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

COSPh 64%

Stereocontrolled total syntheses of penicillanic acid S,S-dioxide and 6-aminopenicillanic acid from (S)-asparatic acid and (R,R)-tartaric acid, respectively, have been reported (Eq. 4.37).45 H

HO

Si O

S

NO2

Bu4NF, O 3

OCH2Ph

N O

N

THF

Si

S

O CO2CH2Ph 80%

H3N

H

S

1) CF3SO2Cl

(4.37)

N

2) LiN3 3) H2, Pd/C

O CO2

A stereospecific total synthesis of polyoxin C and related nucleosides is reported, in which the reaction of 1-(phenylthio)-1-nitroalkenes with nucleophiles and subsequent ozonolysis are key reactions. Addition of potassium trimethylsilanoate to 1-(phenylthio)-nitroalkenes derived from D-ribose followed by ozonolysis gives the α-hydroxy thioester, which is formed with excellent diastereoselectivity (Scheme 4.5).46 This conformation meets the stereo-electronic requirements for antiperiplanar addition of the nucleophile with the result of high 5-(S) stereochemical bias in the reactions. However, not all nucleophiles show the same bias as shown in Scheme 4.5 on addition to the nitroalkene. The product of the addition of potassium phthalimide has 5(R) stereochemistry (Eq. 4.38).47 This stereoselective addition is applied for the synthesis of other related antibiotics, such as nikkomycine B.48

O O2N

SPh

1)

O

OMe

H

O 2) O3

O

NK

O COSPh O N H O

O

OMe O

O 80% (ds 15:1)

(4.38)

82

MICHAEL ADDITION

O

O

OMe

H

1) PhSCH2NO2, t-BuOK O

O 2N

2) MsCl, i-Pr2NEt

O

SPh

OTMS

O

OMe

H O

O

1) KOTMS, DMF, 0 ºC

O2N

2) O3, MeOH, –78 ºC

PhS

H O O O

83%

OMe

HO

COSPh O

OH OMe

O

CO2

H O

O

H3N

O

HO

94% (ds 50:1)

NH

N

H

O OH

Scheme 4.5.

Diastereoselective conjugate addition of oxygen and nitrogen- centered nucleophiles to nitroalkenes derived from (+)-camphorsulfonic acid and ozonolysis give α-hydroxy and α-amino thiol acid derivatives (Eq. 4.39). In all cases, the (R)-diasteromer is formed as the major component.49 O 1)

O S

O

S SO2NiPr2

NK , –40 ºC (R)

2) O3

SO2NiPr2

NO2

N

O

O 61% (de 71%)

(4.39)

1-(Phenylthio)nitroalkenes are also excellent intermediates for the synthesis of other heterocyclic ring systems. For example, tetrahydropyran carboxylic acid derivatives are formed by the intramolecular addition of oxygen nucleophile to 1-(phenylthio)nitroalkene predominantly as the cis-isomer (9.1:1) (see Eq. 4.40). The reaction may proceed via the chair-like transition state with two pseudo-equatorial substituents.50

SiO

HF, pyridine

SPh

Ph

NO2 SPh Ph

O H

t-BuOK, O3

NO2H H

Ph

O

COSPh (4.40)

4.1

O O

t-BuOOLi O O

STol

O

NH3

O

O

NO2

STol

syn 12:1

–78 ºC

STol

O

83

ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

NH2

Ph3COOK

NO2

–78ºC

O O

O

STol

O

NH3

O

O

NO2

STol NH2

anti 15:1 Scheme 4.6.

Jackson and coworkers have used a new approach to the synthesis of β-hydroxy-α-amino acids using (arylthio)nitrooxiranes. D-Isopropylideneglyceraldehyde is converted into the corresponding 1-arylthio-1-nitroalkene, which is a key material for stereoselective synthesis of β,γ-dihydroxyamino acids (Scheme 4.6). The key step is stereoselective nucleophilic epoxidation of the 1-arylthio-1-nitroalkene. Syn and anti epoxides are selectively obtained by appropriate choice of epoxidation reagent.51 The rationalization of stereoselectivity is based on two assumptions. (1) The 1-arylthio1-nitroalkenes adopt a reactive conformation in which the allylic hydrogen occupies the inside position, minimizing 1,3-allylic strain. (2) The epoxidation reagent can then either coordinate to the allylic oxygen (in the case of Li), which results in preferential syn epoxidation or in the absence of appropriate cation capable of strong coordination (in the case of K); steric and electronic effects play a large part, which results in preferential anti epoxidation (Scheme 4.7).52 Extension of this strategy enables syntheses of both protected D-threonine and L-allothreonine, in which reagent-controlled stereoselective epoxidation of a common intermediate is the key step (Scheme 4.8).53 The stereoselective synthesis of anti-β-amino-α-hydroxy acid derivatives using nucleophilic epoxidation of 1-arytlthio-1-nitroalkenes has been reported (Eq. 4.41).54 O

t-BuO

NH

LiOOBut

STol

Ph

–78 ºC

NO2

O

O

t-BuO Ph

O2N

Ph

NO2

t-BuO O Li

TolS

HN

NH O STol

O2N O

O

TolS

O COSTol 43%

O

O

H

H Ph3COO K syn

anti Scheme 4.7.

(4.41)

84

MICHAEL ADDITION

Si

O

Si

Ph3CO2K

STol

O

THF, –78 ºC

NO2

NH3

STol

STol 86%

OH STol O NO2 65% (ds 100%)

Ph3CO2Li THF, –78 ºC

NO2

O

NH2

82% (ds 20:1)

STol

O

NO2

BF3•Et2O OH

Si O

Si

TBSOTf

O

O

Si

NH3

STol

O

O STol

NO2

NH2 65%

82% (ds 20:1)

Scheme 4.8.

An elegant synthesis of (5R, 6S, 8R)-6-(α-hydroxyethyl)-2-(hydroxymethyl)penem-3-carboxylic acid has been accomplished by the strategy based on the Michael addition and Nef reaction (Scheme 4.9).55

1) KS

Si

O

KS OC(O)Ph

Me

Si NO2

SMe

NH O

O

76% Si

O

Cl

NO2

S

Me

2) Me2SO4

NH

1)

O

CO2PNB

O NO2

S

Me

2) P(OMe)3

N

LiN(SiMe3)2

SMe

O CO2PNB 1) 75%, 2) 90% Si

OH

O

Me

S N

S

Me

SMe

OCONH2

N

NO2

O

O 60% Scheme 4.9.

CO2Me

4.1

ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

85

4.1.3 Conjugate Addition of Carbon-Centered Nucleophiles

4.1.3a Active Methylene Compounds Nitroalkenes are powerful Michael acceptors that can serve as synthons of the type +C-C-NH2 and +C-(C=O)R. Classically, the reactions of nitroalkenes with carbon-centered nucleophiles have been limited to reactions carried out under mildly basic conditions using relatively acidic reaction partners such as malonate derivatives and 1,3-diketones.56 The Michael addition of such active methylene compounds to nitroalkenes is catalyzed by various bases, including ROM (M = metal), triton B, and triethylamine. For example, the reaction of acetyl acetone or ethyl acetate with nitrostyrene proceeds in the presence of catalytic amounts of triethylamine at room temperature to give the adduct in 98% or 78% yield, respectively. The addition products are useful intermediates for the preparation of furans or pyrroles.57 Metal complex catalysts such as Ni(acac)2 are also effective to induce the Michael addition of acetyl acetone to nitrostyrene.58 Yoshikoshi and coworkers have found that the potassium fluoride-catalyzed addition of 1,3-dicarbonyl compounds to nitroalkenes leads to the formation of furans (Eq. 4.42) or Michael adducts and their Nef products (Eqs. 4.43 and 4.44), depending on substrates and conditions.59

O

O Me

KF, xylene

+ Me Me

O

Me Me

reflux

NO2

O

(4.42)

52% O

O Me

Me

Me

KF, xylene

+

reflux

NO2

O

Me

(4.43)

O

O 96%

O

Me CO2Et

+

KF, xylene reflux

NO2 O

O CO2Et

Me

CO2Et

+

Me

(4.44)

NO2

O 20%

47%

The Michael addition of nitroalkanes to nitroalkenes is catalyzed by triethylamine to give 1,3-dinitro compounds (Eq. 4.45).60 In some cases, the intramolecular displacement of the nitro group takes place to give cyclic nitronates (Eq. 4.46).61 R2 2

R R1

+ NO2

R3

NO2

Et3N or K2CO3

O2N

NO2 1

3

R R 51-98%

(4.45)

86

MICHAEL ADDITION

CO2Et

Ph Me

NO2

Me

H

+ Ph

CO2Et

KF/Al2O3

Me Me

MeCN

NO2

O

(4.46)

N O

70%

The asymmetric Michael addition of 1,3-dicarbonyl compounds to nitrostyrene is promoted by chiral alkaloid catalysts to give the addition products in good chemical yield, but the enantioselectivity is rather low (Eq. 4.47).62

Me O

O +

Me

(–)-quinine

Ph

Ph NO2

O

(4.47)

NO2

Me

O Me 89% (16% ee)

Recently, very effective asymmetric conjugate addition of 1,3-dicarbonyl compounds to nitroalkenes has been reported, as shown in Scheme 4.10. The reaction of ethyl acetoacetate with nitrostyrene is carried out in the presence of 5 mol% of the preformed complex of magnesium triflate and chiral bis(oxazoline) ligands and a small amount of N-methylmorpholine (NMM) to give the adduct with selectivity of 91%. The selectivity depends on ligands. The effect of ligands is presented in Scheme 4.10.63

O Me Ph

ligand (5.5 mol%) Mg(OTf)2 (5 mol%) NMM (6 mol%) CHCl3, sieves

O OEt NO2

RT, 3 h

O

R R

ligand:

Ph

O

O

NO2

Me

N

N

CO2Et

Entry

Ligand

Selectivity (%)

Conversion (%)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1a 1b 1c 2c 3c 4c 4a

95 65 77 58 0 76 82

96 33 44 9 7 15 99

1 R R O R2

O N

N

R2

R1 R1 2: R1 = Ph, R2 = H 3: R1 = CMe3, R2 = H 4: R1 = R2 = Ph a: R = -CH2CH2-; b: R = H, c: R = Me

Scheme 4.10.

4.1.3b Enolates Derived From Ketones and Esters and Carbanions Stabilized by Sulfur In recent years, a variety of procedures for the successful addition of simple ketones or esters to nitroalkenes have been developed. Seebach and coworkers have reported

4.1

ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

87

the Michael-type addition of lithium enolates, sulfur-substituted organolithium reagents, and other reactive carbanions to nitroalkenes. Some typical examples are presented in Eqs. 4.48 and 4.49.64a NO2 OLi

NO2

O + O

Me S

LDA THF, –78ºC

S

O

THF –78 ºC

(4.48)

O

O 93%

S

NO2 O2N

(4.49)

S Me 65%

Dianions or trianions derived from 1,3-dicarbonyl compounds react with nitroalkenes at low temperature to give the adduct, which undergoes a nitro-aldol type cyclization (Eq. 4.50).64c Nitroethylene is extremely reactive and sensitive to strong basic conditions, but various ketone and ester enolates undergo alkylation with nitroethylene at low temperature (Eq. 4.5165 and Table 4.1). OMe OMe O

O

1) LDA, THF, –78 ºC O

2) MeO

O NO2

NO2

MeO

HO

NO2 OMe

(4.50)

OMe O 68%

O

O

NO2

1) LDA, THF, –78 ºC 2)

(4.51)

NO2 74%

Nitroalkenes react with lithium dianions of carboxylic acids or with lithium enolates at –100 °C, and subsequent treatment of the Michael adducts with aqueous acid gives γ-keto acids or esters in a one-pot operation, respectively (Eq. 4.52).66 The sequence of Michael addition to nitroalkenes and Nef reaction (Section 6.1) provides a useful tool for organic synthesis. For example, the addition of carbanions derived from sulfones to nitroalkenes followed by the Nef reaction and elimination of the sulfonyl group gives α,β-unsaturated ketones (Eq. 4.53).67

88

MICHAEL ADDITION

Table 4.1. Michael Addition to Nitroalkenes R-H

Base O Ph

Me

Nitroalkene

LDA

NO2

LDA

NO2

Product O NO2

Ph

O

Yield (%)

Reference

81

65

72

65

62

71

57

65

94

65

90

72

85

73

66

74

O NO2

O2N

O

LDA

O

NO2

N CH2Ph

N CH2Ph O

O

LDA

BuO

NO2

NO2

BuO Me

Me

O

O MeO

LDA

PhO2S

LDA

NO2

NO2

MeO

NO2

Me

NO2

PhO2S

Me NO2

O

SPh

LDA

NO2

O CO2Et OEt SPh

OEt CO2Et Ph

N

CO2Et

LDA

Ph Ph

Ph

NO2

Ph

Ph

N

O

NO2 CO2Et

SPh

1) LDA, THF, –78 ºC PhS

CO2H

3) H+

(4.52)

CO2H

2) 80%

NO2

1) LDA 2) Et SO2Ph

NO2 3) H+ 4) DBU

O 82% (E/Z = 2/1)

(4.53)

4.1

ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

89

A simple synthesis of allethrolone, the alcohol component of the allethrine (commercially important insecticide), is shown in Scheme 4.11. The conjugated addition of 3-phenylthio-5hexene-2-one to 1-nitro-1-propene followed by the Nef reaction and aldol condensation gives allethrolone in good yield.68

1) NaH PhS

2) Me O

PhS Me

NO2

1) MeONa/MeOH 2) H+, H2O

O

NO2

84% O EtONa EtOH

PhS Me O

CHO

HO

Me

81%

67% Scheme 4.11.

Pyroglutamic acid is a useful starting material for the synthesis of several natural products, such as pyrrolidine alkaloids, kainoids, and other unnatural amino acids. Interesting chemoselective Michael additions of anions derived from pyroglutamates have been reported (see Eqs. 4.54 and 4.55).69 NO2 O O

CO2Me

N

LiHMDS

N Boc

CO2Me NO2 N

(4.54)

Ph N Boc

Ph

55%

NO2 NO2 LiHMDS O

CO2Me N Boc

CO2Me

N Boc

NBoc O

(4.55)

N Boc 59%

A short synthesis of prostaglandin derivatives via a three component coupling reaction is reported, in which the enolates are trapped with nitroalkenes. The nitro group is removed via

90

MICHAEL ADDITION

radical denitration (Section 7.2) or is transformed into the carbonyl group by the Nef reaction (Section 6.1) (Eq. 4.56).70 O Li +

CO2Me

+

t

OSiMe2Bu

ButMe2SiO

NO2

O

NO2

CO2Me

CuI

(4.56)

THF

t

Bu Me2SiO

OSiMe2But 71%

A variety of carbanions have been employed for the conjugate addition to nitroalkenes; recent results are shown in Table 4.1. Seebach and coworkers have developed a useful multiple coupling reaction using nitropropenyl pivalate. This opens a possibility of successive introduction of two different nucleophiles, as exemplified in Eq. 4.57 (see also Section 3.2).75 1)

S Ph

2)

S Li OEt

NO2 OCOBut

S

S

NO2 OEt

Ph

(4.57)

O

OLi

66%

Asymmetric Michael addition of chiral enolates to nitroalkenes provides a useful method for the preparation of biologically important compounds. The Michael addition of doubly deprotonated, optically active β-hydroxycarboxylates to nitroalkenes proceeds with high diastereoselectivity to give erythro-hydroxynitroesters (Eq. 4.58).76 OH

CO2Et H

H

LDA

HO

H

–78 ºC

Me

O

NO2

OEt

(4.58)

NO2 56%

Chiral enolates of 1,3-dioxalan-4-ones, methyl 1,3-oxazolidine-4-carboxylates, and 1,3-imidazolidine-4-ones derived from chiral natural sources such as (S)-proline, (S)-serine, and (S)-threonine are added to nitroalkenes in high diastereoselectivity (Scheme 4.12).77 Enantioselective synthesis of the antidepressant rolipram can be done by the asymmetric Michael addition of the enolate of N-acetyloxazolidone to nitrostyrene. Chirally branched pyrrolidones like rolipram are highly active antidepressants with novel postsynaptic modes of action. The synthesis is shown in Scheme 4.13.78 Seebach and Brenner have found that titanium enolates of acyl-oxazolidinones are added to aliphatic and aromatic nitroalkenes in high diastereoselectivity and in good yield. The effect of bases on diastereoselectivity is shown in Eq. 4.59. Hydrogenation of the nitro products yields γ-lactams, which can be transformed into γ-amino acids. The configuration of the products is assigned by comparison with literature data or X-ray crystal-structure analysis.

4.1

CO2H H2N H CH2OH

H N H

CO2H

H

OLi OLi

O

N

N

N

OMe

OMe

Ph O

O

OMe

OLi

Ph

OMe MeO

CO2H H OH CH3

H2N H

O

OLi

N

91

ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

O

Me

Me

Me NO2 OMe OMe

N

NO2

NO2

NO2 O

Me

N

NO2 CO2Me

H

NO2

N

CO2Me

NO2

CO2Me

N

Ph

NO2

Ph O

O

O

Me

Me

O

O

40% (85% ds)

27% (>90% ds)

78% (>95% ds)

75% (>95% ds)

Scheme 4.12.

Thus, (S)-chiral auxiliary gives rise to combination of the trigonal centers of enolate and nitroalkene with Si/Si topicity.79 O O Ph

O

O N

1) base 2)Ph

Ph

Base/additive BuLi EtN(i-Pr)2/2TiCl4

–75 ºC

O NO2

Ph

O

Ph NO2

N

(4.59)

Ph TiCl4

Si

Solvent

Yield (%)

THF

58

90:10

CH2Cl2

60

>99:1

ds R O

O

O

R R

N H

N H O

MXn

O (S)

Ph

Ph

Si

The titanated bislactim ethers of cyclo(L-Val-Gly-) are added to nitroalkenes with high diastereo-selectivity (Eq. 4.60).80a Michael addition of lactam bearing (S)-2-(1-ethyl-1methoxypropyl) pyrrolidine as auxiliary on the lactam nitrogen to nitroalkenes proceeds with high selectivity (de >96%, ee >96%).80b

92

MICHAEL ADDITION

O O

BnO

O N

NaN(SiMe3)2

Me

NO2

O

MeO

O

NO2

O

OBn

N Ph

Ph

OMe

65% (ds 94:6) Ar H H O2N

Ar H H

O

H Bn

N

M O

H

O

N

O

MeO NH

O

O

Si: < 6

H2, Raney Ni

NO2

M

O

HO

Bn H

H

72%

Re: >94

Scheme 4.13.

MeO

1) base

MeO

N N

N N

2) Me

NO2

OMe

O2N

(4.60) OMe

H Me

Yield (%)

Base/additive BuLi

81

BuLi/ClTi(NEt 2)3

51

ds 50:42:5:3 99:1

Nitroalkens are effective Michael acceptor B units for sequential, convenient A + B + C coupling reactions, as shown in Eq. 4.61.81 This process is very simple and convenient to synthesize nitrogen heterocycles. Reductive cleavage of the PhS group and reduction of the nitro group to amino group can be accomplished with NiCl2/NaBH4 to give pyrrolizidinones (see Chapter 10).

O 1) LDA MeO

2) SPh

3) Me

O

NO2 SPh CO2Me Me SPh

MeO

SPh NO2 CO2Me 78%

NiCl2

(4.61)

N

NaBH4

O

O 76%

4.1

ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

93

4.1.3c Silyl Enolates and Enamines Yoshikoshi and coworkers have developed the Michael reaction of silyl enol ethers or ketene silyl acetals with nitroalkenes activated by Lewis acids. After hydrolytic treatment, 1,4-diletones and γ-keto esters are obtained (Eqs. 4.62 and 4.63).82 O

OSiMe3

Me

Me

1) SnCl4

+

2) H+, H2O

NO2

(4.62)

O 85%

O

Me

OMe Me

–78 ºC

NO2

OSiMe3

Me

TiCl4

+

(4.63)

CO2Me

Me 58%

Alkylation of ketene silyl acetals with nitroalkenes has several limitations such as modest yield, lack of generality, and inconveniently low reaction temperatures. Tucker and coworkers have found that sterically encumbered Lewis acids such as MAD give better results than other Lewis acids (Eq. 4.64).83 OEt Me

+ Ph

OSiMe2But

Ph MAD –78 ºC

NO2

But

O

O2N

MAD = Me OEt

AlMe

O But

(23)

2

(4.64)

58% (ds 6.3/1)

Valentin and coworkers have studied extensively the reaction of enamines with nitroalkenes. The reaction proceeds under mild conditions to give γ-nitroketones, which are converted into 1,4-diketones by the Nef reaction (Eq. 4.65).84 O N

+ Me

NO2

0 ºC 24 h

O N

O

Me NO2

85%

Me NO2

10% HCl

(4.65)

80%

The reaction of enaminones with nitroalkenes gives a pentalenone system via the Michael addition and aldol reaction (Eq. 4.66).85a Linear α-keto enamines react with nitroalkenes to afford [3 + 2] carbocyclized products.85b

94

MICHAEL ADDITION

Ph Me +

N O

Ph

NO2

O

Me NO2

MeCN N

1. RT 2. ∆

(4.66)

O

O ~100%

The Michael addition of enamines to nitroalkenes proceeds with high syn selectivity. The syn selectivity is explained by an acyclic synclinal model, in which there is some favorable interaction between the nitro group and the nitrogen lone pair of the enamine group (Eq. 4.67). 86a–b Both Z- and E-nitrostyrenes afford the same product in over 90% diastereoselectivity. O

O

O N

+

N Ph

NO2

H

N

Ph

H

Ph NO2

NO2

+ O

O

O

N

+ Ph

N

NO2

H

N

Ph NO2

H

Ph NO2

(4.67) The chiral enamines provide the opportunity for the enantioselective Michael addition to nitroalkenes, as shown in Eq. 4.68, where the ketone is obtained as a single diastereomer with an ee >90%.87 O

OMe N +

H

Ph NO2

Et2O, RT

Ph

NO2

(4.68)

70% (de > 90%)

The reaction of enamines with 2-nitro-2-propen-1-yl pivalate gives 4-nitrocyclohexanones, which is regarded as formal [3 + 3] carbocyclization. The reaction proceeds in high diastereoselectivity (60% to >95% selectivity), see Eq. 4.69.88 If chiral enamines such as that in Eq. 4.68 are employed, the products are obtained with high ee. NO2

O

Ph

NO2 N

Me

O

+ Me

t

Bu

1) CH2Cl2, –78 ºC 2) HCl

Ph

O

Me

Me O 59% (de >95%)

(4.69)

4.1

95

ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

The Michael addition of formaldehyde hydrazone of (S)-1-amino-2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidine to nitroalkenes gives β-nitrohydrazones in good chemical yield and stereoselectivity (Eq. 4.70).89 H MeO

O2N

N N

CH2Cl2

H

RT O2N MeO

(4.70)

N N

88% (80% de)

The addition of 2-nitropropene to the chiral imine derived from 2-methylcyclopentanone and (S)-1-phenylethylamine gives the adduct in high regio- and stereoselectivity (Eq. 4.71).90 The product is converted to a chiral 1,4-diketone via the Nef reaction. Me

Ph

H

N

O

O NO2

+ Me

Me 2) AcOH-H2O

Me

2) HCl

Me H

Me

77% (1 : 8)

O 1) NaOH

NO2

NO2 + H Me Me

1) THF, 0 ºC

Me

(4.71)

O 68% (95% ee)

The Michael type reaction of (3R)-5-t-butyldimethysiloxy-3-phenyl-1H-pyrrolo[1,2c]oxazole with nitroethylene proceeds in the presence of Lewis acid to give the alkylated product in good chemical yield and diastereoselectivity. In the case of nitroethylene, the Diels-Alder type transition state is favored to give the syn-adduct selectively (Eq. 4.72).91 Me Me ButMe2SiO

NO2 +

N O Ph

SnCl4 NO2

O

(4.72)

N

–78 ºC

O Ph 66% (90% de)

4.1.3d Organometallic Reagents The conjugate addition of various organometallic reagents such as RLi, RMgX, R2Zn, R2CuLi, and R3Al to nitroalkenes provides a useful method for nitro-alkylation. As the nitro group is transformed into various functional groups, this type of addition has been extensively used in organic synthesis. The 1,4-addition of Grignard reagents to β-nitrostyrene gives 1,1-diarylnitroethanes (Eq. 4.73).92 Addition of cerium chloride improves the yield of addition of RMgX to nitroalkenes (Eq. 4.74).93

96

MICHAEL ADDITION

Ph

NO2

1) Et2O

+

MgBr

S

(4.73)

NO2

S

+

2) H

Ph H 89% NO2

NO2 +

(4.74)

CeCl 3

MeMgBr

Me

THF

78%

The 1,4-addition of RMgX or RLi to nitroalkenes produces nitronate intermediates, which are converted into nitroalkanes, nitrile oxides (oxime chlorides), or carboxylic acids, depending on the conditions of hydrolysis (Scheme 4.14).94 The 1,4- addition of an ortho-lithiated benzamide to 1-nitrocyclohexene has been used for synthesis of pancratistatin models (Eq. 4.75).95 1) sec-BuLi TMEDA, –78 ºC CONEt2

2)

NO2

O2N

H 1) NaBH4, NiCl2

H

2) sec-BuLi CONEt2

(4.75)

NH

O 63%

79%

Seebach and coworkers have found that the addition of dialkylzinc to nitroalkenes is catalyzed by Lewis acids such as MgBr2, MgI2, and chlorotitanates.96 However, the nitro group of nitrostyrene is replaced by alkyl groups in the absence of Lewis acids (Scheme 4.15).97 Replacement of vinylic nitro groups by alkyl groups is unusual, for nitroalkenes are good

Ph dil. HCl Ph + PhCH2MgBr

Ph

95% Ph

O

NO2

NO2

PhCH2

N OMgCl

Cl

concn HCl PhCH2

PhH2C

N OH

93% 85% H2SO4

Ph H CO2H PhCH2 53%

Scheme 4.14.

4.1

97

ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

R R2Zn, MgBr2 20 ºC

up to 99% yield

NO2

Ar

NO2

Ar

R2Zn 20 ºC

R

Ar

up to 40% yield Scheme 4.15.

Michael acceptors and 1,4-addition of alkyl group is a normal process. The reaction mechanism is not clear, but the process via addition of alkyl radicals and subsequent elimination of NO2 radical is one of the possible routes. Recently, several related reactions have been reported, as shown in Eq. 4.7698, Eq. 4.77,99 and Eq. 4.78,100 in which alkyl radicals are involved. The reaction of trialkylgallium compounds with nitrostyrene gives also a similar substitution product (Eq. 4.79).101 Cl

Cl C5H11ZnI

+ NO2

NO2

Ph

Et3B

+

(4.76)

Ni(acac)2, Et3N THF

C5H11 90%

THF reflux

(4.77)

Et

Ph 80%

Ph NO2

Ph

+

Et3Al

concn HCl

Et

Ph

+

Et

24% NO2

Ph

+

Et3Ga

Hexane RT

N OH 49%

(4.78)

Et

Ph

Cl

(4.79)

68%

β-Nitrostyrene reacts with allylzinc reagents in dry DMF at room temperature to give the addition products in excellent yield (Eq. 4.80).102 The reaction of allyl tin compounds or allyl silanes with nitroalkenes requires the assistance of Lewis acids to give the addition products in good yield (Eq. 4.81).103

Ph

NO2

+

DMF ZnBr

(4.80)

NO2

Ph

RT

83% Ph Ph

NO2

+

SnBu3

TiCl4 CH2Cl2

NO2

(4.81)

Me 53% (anti/syn = 7/3)

Stannylallenes react with nitroalkenes in the presence of TiCl4 to give the propargylation products (Eq. 4.82).104

98

MICHAEL ADDITION

NO2 NO2

Ph

TiCl4

+

SnBu3

(4.82)

Ph

CH2Cl2

82%

Knochel and coworkers have developed the addition of highly functionalized zinc-copper reagents RCu(CN)ZnI to nitroalkenes. The polyfunctionalized zinc organometallics are readily transmetalated to the copper derivatives by the addition of the THF-soluble copper salt CuCN⋅2LiCl. These copper reagents add to nitroalkenes in good yields, leading to highly functionalized nitroalkanes (Eq. 4.83).105 EtO

EtO

Cu(CN)ZnI

NO2

THF

O +

O

–78 ºC

Pr

(4.83)

94%

NO2

This procedure is applied to synthesis of 1,3-diamines by the addition of metallated tert-butyl N,N-dimethylcarbamate to nitroalkenes and subsequent reduction (Eq. 4.84).106 Me

O2N N

THF

Cu(CN)ZnCl +

–78 ºC

Boc Me N Boc

O2N

RT Me N Boc

H2N

H2/PtO2

62%

(4.84)

80%

The Michael addition of the copper-zinc reagent derived from ethyl 4-bromobutyrate to the piperonal-derived nitroalkene proceeds cleanly to give the nitro ester, which is an intermediate for the synthesis of lycoricidine alkaloids (Eq. 4.85).107 O Br

1) Zn, LiI, DME, 75 ºC OEt

2) CuCN, LiCl, THF NO2

O O THF

CO2Et

O O

(4.85)

NO2

Reactions of zinc-copper reagents bearing acidic hydrogen and sulfur functionalities with various electrophiles, including nitroalkenes, have been reported, as shown in Eq. 4.86108 and Eq. 4.87,109 respectively. Cu(CN)ZnI + Ph

NO2

DME –78 ºC to 0 ºC

O2N Ph 78%

(4.86)

4.1

ADDITION TO NITROALKENES

99

NO2 PhS

Cu(CN)ZnI

DME

+ Ph

(4.87)

PhS

–78 ºC to 0 ºC

NO2

Ph 83%

Dialkylzincs react efficiently with nitroalkenes in a mixture of THF and N-methylpyrrolidinone (NMP) to give the addition products in good yield (Eq. 4.88).110 (CH2)5OAc NO2

Ph

THF-NMP –30 ºC, 3 h

+ [AcO(CH2)5]2Zn

Ph

(4.88)

NO2 84%

Organoaluminum compounds are also good nucleophiles for 1,4-addition to nitroalkenes as shown in Eq. 4.89.111 NO2 NO2 AlEt2

+

(4.89)

–15 ºC 86% (ds = 93/7)

Seebach and coworkers have developed enantioselective conjugate additions of primary dialkylzinc reagents to 2-aryl- and 2-heteroaryl-nitroalkenes mediated by titanium-TADDOLates (Eq. 4.90).96a TADDOLs and their derivatives are excellent chiral auxiliaries.96b Ti-TADDOL: NO2

Ph +

Et2Zn

–90 ºC Ti-TADDOL (1.2 equiv)

Ph

Ph

NO2

H

93% (74% ee)

Ph Ph H O TiCl2•(iPrOH)2 O O H Ph Ph

O

(4.90) Feringa and coworkers have used copper (I) phosphoramidite as a catalyst for asymmetric conjugate addition of dialkyl zinc reagents to α,β-unsaturated nitroacetates. The reaction of E,Z-mixtures of α,β-unsaturated nitroacetates provides 1,4-addition products in excellent yields but with low ee (Eq. 4.91). High enantioselectivities (ee up to 92%) are obtained with structurally rigid 3-nitrocumarins (Eq. 4.92).112 NO2 CO2Et

cat. (2.4 mol%)

+ Et2Zn

Et2Zn

NO2 CO2Et

(4.91) cat.

64% (25% ee) NO2

O +

Cu(OTf)2 (1.2 mol%)

O

Cu(OTf)2 (1.2 mol%)

NO2

O P N O

cat. (2.4 mol%) O O 95% (92% ee)

(4.92)

100

MICHAEL ADDITION

A radical approach to asymmetric aldol synthesis, which is based on the radical addition of a chiral hydroxyalkyl radical equivalent to a nitroalkene, has been reported, as shown in Eq. 4.93.113 The radical precursor is prepared from the corresponding carboxylic acid by the Barton reaction,114 which has been used for synthesis of new β-lactams.115 BnO BnO BnO

O

BnO BnO BnO

Me NO2

O O

Me O

O O O2N

hν N

Me * 77% (ds:5/1)

S

BnO BnO BnO

15% aq TiCl3

SPyr Me

O

NH4OAc, THF pH 5–6, 48 ºC

O

(4.93)

O

Me *

Me

4.2 ADDITION AND ELIMINATION REACTION OF >-HETEROSUBSTITUTED NITROALKENES Nitroalkenes with potential leaving groups in β-position such as a dialkylamino, an alkylthio, or a phenylsulfonyl group undergo addition-elimination reactions with nucleophiles. The chemistry of nitroenamines has been extensively investigated, and their potential utility in organic synthesis has been well established.26b,116 Severin and coworkers have developed the addition of elimination reactions of nitroenamines with carbon nucleophiles in 1960–1970, as exemplified in Eq. 4.94.117 NO2 MgBr +

Me2N

THF

NO2

(4.94)

80%

Node and Fuji have developed stereoselective nitroolefination of various carbonyl compounds using β-nitroenamines (Eq. 4.95).118 O

OSiMe3 Me

O MeLi

N

Me

NO2

NO2

(4.95)

THF 77%

They have developed direct asymmetric synthesis of quaternary carbon centers via additionelimination process. The reactions of chiral nitroenamines with zinc enolates of α-substitutedδ-lactones afford α,α-disubstituted-δ-lactones with a high ee through addition-elimination process, in which (S)-(+)-2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidine (SMP) is used as a chiral leaving group (Eq. 4.96).119 Application of this method to other substrates such as α-substituted ketones, esters, and amides has failed to yield high ee.

4.2

ADDITION AND ELIMINATION REACTION OF β-HETEROSUBSTITUTED NITROALKENES

OMe

O

OZnCl NO2 +

N

THF

Et

O

Et

NO2

O

(4.96)

Et

–78 ºC

Et

101

89% (96% ee)

If the chiral auxiliary in Eq. 4.96 is modified by changing MeO into more bulky groups such as trityl (Tr) or t-butyldimethylsilyl (TBS) group, an improved asymmetric nitro-olefination of α-alkyl-γ- and δ-lactones is possible (Eq. 4.97).120 OR

OZnCl NO2 +

N

Me

O

Et O THF –78 ºC

Me

NO2

O

R

Yield (%)

ee (%)

Me

82

56

Tr

75

83

TBS

92

88

(4.97)

Chiral nitroolefins prepared in Eqs. 4.96 and 4.97 are converted into various natural products as summarized in Scheme 4.16.121–123 The modification of chiral enamines enables the asymmetric nitro-olefination of oxyindoles, as shown in Eq. 4.98.124 An enantioselective synthesis of (–)-psudophyrnaminol is accomplished using this reaction.

N 1) n-BuLi N

NO2

2) ZnCl2

O

SiMe2Bu

Ph Ph OMe

N O t SiMe2Bu 85% (95% ee)

t

OH

NO2

(4.98) N N H H Me

The strategy based on asymmetric nitro-olefination is further applied to a total synthesis of (–)-horsfiline (Eq. 4.99).125

MeO + N O t SiMe2Bu

N

Ph Ph OMe

MeO

1) n-BuLi 2) ZnCl2

NO2

N

NMe MeO N H

O

O t SiMe2Bu 84%

NO2

(4.99)

102

MICHAEL ADDITION

N

O

N

NO2

O

H

(S)

N H

O

N H H OH

(Ref. 121)

O

MeHN

NO2

O

N

N

O (Ref. 122)

O

(S) HO2C

N N MeH Me

H

O NO2

O

(R)

OMe H

H

O H CO2H

O

(Ref. 123)

H CO2H

Scheme 4.16.

Nitroalkenes are generally prepared by the substitution reaction of β-nitro sulfides and sulfoxides with a variety of carbon nucleophiles via an addition-elimination sequence. This method is particularly useful for the preparation of cyclic nitroalkenes (Eq. 4.100).126 O2N O Me

O S

1) LDA N

O

Et Me

2) ZnCl2

–78 ºC

(4.100)

N NO2 87%

A chiral sulfoxide can be used as a leaving group for the asymmetric induction via addition-elimination process. δ-Lactam enolates are converted into the corresponding nitroalkenes substituted with lactams (Eq. 4.101).127 O O2N O Me N

Ph S

Me

1) LDA 2) ZnCl2

–78 ºC

Me NMe

Me

(4.101)

O NO2 91% (84% ee)

A total synthesis of (–)-physostigmine is accomplished from a chiral nitroolefin of Eq. 4.101 (Scheme 4.17).128 The addition-elimination reaction of copper-zinc organometallics RCu(CN)ZnX with (E)1-nitro-2-phenylsulfonylethylene gives highly functionalized (E)-nitroalkenes in excellent yields.129 Organometallics bearing esters (Eq. 4.102),13015 dienes (Eq. 4.103),131 or oxygen functions (Eq. 4.104)132 give nitroalkenes functionalized by these groups.

4.3

Br Me

Me

Br2, ButOK

N Me O NO2

O NO2 75% Me

ClCO2Et

29% (3 steps)

Me

N N H Me Me 35%

Me

RO

N Me O NH2

Br

2) NBS

O NHCO2Et

Me

N Me 1) ButOK, DMSO 2) H2, PtO2

1) LiAlH4

N Me

103

MICHAEL ADDITION OF NITROALKANES

NaOMe, CuI N N H Me Me 35%

R = Me R = CONHMe

Scheme 4.17.

Zn, CuCN 2 equiv LiCl

Et2OC(CH2)3I O2N

SO2Ph

EtO2C(CH2)3Cu(CN)ZnI

(4.102)

EtO2C(CH2)3CH=CHNO2 81%

O2N

NO2

SO2Ph

NO2 H

SiO2 hexane, RT

THF, –60 ºC

H

(CH2)3Cu(CN)ZnI

O2N

OAc Pri

85% (overall yield)

Cu(CN)ZnBr

(4.103)

OAc

SO2Ph

Pri

THF, –60 ºC, 2 h

(4.104)

NO2 74%

4.3 MICHAEL ADDITION OF NITROALKANES 4.3.1 Intermolecular Addition The Michael addition of nitroalkanes to electron-deficient alkenes provides a powerful synthetic tool in which it is perceived that the nitro group can be transformed into various functionalities. Various kinds of bases have been used for this transformation in homogeneous solutions, or, alternatively, some heterogeneous catalysts have been employed. In general, bases used in the Henry reaction are also effective for these additions (Scheme 4.18).133 R NO2 R1

R2 +

R

base

2

H

Y

R

Y 1

R NO2 3

Y = CO2Et, C(O)R , CN, S(O)Ph, SO2Ph, etc. base = RO-, F-, R3N, R3P, tetramethylguanidine (TMG), DBU, etc. Scheme 4.18.

104

MICHAEL ADDITION

When electron-deficient alkenes are very reactive, weak bases such as triethylamine or triphenylphosphine (Eq. 4.105)134 are reactive enough as base. On the other hand, stronger bases O

O Me

NO2

+

PPh3

Me

THF RT, 24 h

O

O

NO2

(4.105)

94%

such as DBU or tetramethylguanidine (TMG) are necessary when less reactive alkenes such as vinyl sulfoxides (Eq. 4.106)135 or α-substituted α,β-unsaturated carbonyl compounds are used (Eq. 4.107).136 TMG has been widely used for the Michael addition of nitroalkanes to various electron-deficient alkenes since the first report in 1972.137–140 High-pressure accelerates the reaction to induce the Michael addition with less reactive alkenes.141 Me NO2 Me

+

H

base (1.0 equiv)

O2N

MeCN RT, 24 h

Me NO2 Me

Base

SOPh SOPh

(2)

Me Me

Me

+

CO2Me

H

base (1.0 equiv) MeCN RT, 24 h

Me O2N

CO2Me (3)

Me Me

Yield (%)

Et3N

0

TMG

60

DBU

95

Base

Yield (%)

Et3N

0

TMG

19

DBU

61

(4.106)

(4.107)

The reaction of conjugated nitroalkenes with α,β-unsaturated esters, ketones, nitriles, and sulfones is catalyzed by TMG to give the Michael adduct of allylic nitro compounds (Eq. 4.108).142 NO2

Me

Me

TMG (0.1 equiv)

+

CN

NO2

MeCN

CN

(4.108)

Me 72%

Tetraalkylammonium fluorides or metal fluorides are also effective as catalysts for the Michael addition of nitroalkanes (see, Table 4.2).143–145 In recent years, there has been increased recognition that water is an attractive medium for organic reactions from the environmental point of view. The Michael addition of various nitroalkanes to conjugated enones can be performed in NaOH (0.025 M) and in the presence of cetyltrimethylammonium chloride (CTACl) as cationic surfactant in the absence of organic solvents (Eq. 4.109).146 The Michael addition of nitromethane to methyl acrylate is carried out in water using NaOH as a base to give the mono adduct (Table 4.2).147 O Me NO2 Me

H

Me + O

NaOH (0.025 M) CTACl, RT, 1 h

O 2N Me Me

Me

(4.109)

4.3

MICHAEL ADDITION OF NITROALKANES

105

Table 4.2. Michael Addition to nitro compounds Nitro compound

Alkenes O

CH3NO2

Base/conditions

(CH2)6CO2Me TMG/RT, 2 days

Product (yield, %) O (CH2)6CO2Me

Ref. (83)

137

(64)

139

(77)

140

(65)

143

(85)

144

(74)

145

(57)

147

(100)

148

(40)

180

(85)

181

(75)

182

(40)

183

(85)

184

CH2NO2

CH3(CH2)4NO2

O O

NO2

TMG

O

O O

CH3NO2

TMG

O

(CH3)2CHNO2

PhCH=CHC(O)Ph

C7H13NO2

Bu4NF⋅SiO2/DMF, 20 °C, 3 h CsF-Al2O3/20 °C, 1 h

Me O O

C2H5NO2

Me

N O

CH3NO2

CO2Me

CsF-Si(OR)4/80 °C, 74 h

O Ph

Ph

O Me Me NO2 NO2 O O Me

N O NO2

Me

NaOH, H2O/20 °C

O2N MeO2C O

KF-basic Al2O3/THF, RT, 24 h Me Me Me

DBU CO2Et S

CH3NO2

Ph

N H CO2Me

CH3NO2

Me

C6H13

O

C2H5NO2

CH3NO2

O NO2

Me3SiO

NO2 Me Me Me

CO2Et

O2N

DBU

O2N

S

Ph

Triton B

O

N CO2Me NO2 NC

[NC(H2C)2]3 NO2

CN

CF3 H3C

NO2

Me O

DBU

[NC(H2C)2]3 NO2

Al2O3

F3C NO2 Me

Me O

106

MICHAEL ADDITION

Ytterbium triflate is an extremely effective catalyst for the Michael addition of α-nitro esters to enones in water (Eq. 4.110).149 O Me

CO2Et

Me +

NO2

O2N

Yb(OTf)3

O

Me

(4.110)

Me CO2Et

H2O, RT

98%

The heterogeneous catalytic systems have some advantages over homogeneous reactions. Chemical transformations under heterogeneous conditions can occur with better efficiencies, higher purity of products, and easier work-up. Ballini and coworkers have found that commercial amberlyst A-27 is the best choice for the Michael addition of nitroalkanes with β-substituted alkene acceptors (Eq. 4.111).150 The reaction is also carried out by potassium carbonate in the presence of Aliquat 336 under ultrasonic irradiation (Eq. 4.112).151 O Me NO2 Me

+

H

O 2N

CO2Me

H

Me

(4.111)

Me Me 75% Ph

K2CO3 Aliquat 336

Ph

+

Amberlyst A-21 Solvent Free RT, 25 h

O

Me NO2 Me

Me

O2N

)))), 90 h

CO2Me

Me Me

(4.112)

70%

Recently very reactive solid bases have been devised, which are prepared by derivatization of amorphous silica and hexagonal mesoporous silica (HMS) with the dimethylaminopropyl group (Eq. 4.113).151b O Me NO2

+

Me N

O Si(OMe)3

(4.113)

HMS, RT, 2.5 h NO2 93%

In Table 4.1, the Michael addition of nitro compounds to various electron deficient alkenes is shown. The Michael addition of nitro compounds is a useful method for the preparation of various natural products. The Michael addition of nitroalkanes to dehydroalanines gives γ-nitro-αamino acids, which provides a convenient synthesis of side-chain modified α-amino acids (Eq. 4.114).152 Transformations of γ-nitro-α-amino acid derivatives into α-amino acids occur by reductive denitration (see Section 7.2) into γ-oxygenated α-amino acids by the Nef reaction (Eq. Me Me + O2N

H O2N

CO2Me NHCbz CO2Me

Me Me NHCbz

Me Me NHCbz 85%

RT, 22 h

Bu3SnH AIBN

CO2Me

O2N

Bu4NF

H

(4.114)

CO2Me

Me Me NHCbz 67%

(4.115)

4.3

107

MICHAEL ADDITION OF NITROALKANES

NH3+ Me Me OHC CO2H + NH3 +

O 2N

KOH-H2O

O 2N

H

CO2-

(4.116)

Me Me 50%

4.115).153 Condensation of glyoxalic acid, nitroalkanes, and amines provides a simple method for β-nitro-α-amino acids (Eq. 4.116).154 The base-catalyzed reaction of nitromethane with α-amidoalkyl sulfones gives the nitro compounds as in Eq. 4.117; the nitromethyl group is converted into a carboxylic group to give α-amino acids by the Nef reaction using KMnO4.155 O Ph

SO2Ph N H

NaH-CH3NO2 Ph THF, RT, 1 h NO2

O Ph

(4.117)

O

KMnO4 N H 88%

Ph

Ph

CO2H N H 90%

Ph

The Michael addition of nitroalkanes to α,β-unsaturated ketones followed by the Nef reaction has been extensively used as a method for the conjugated addition of acyl anions to enones (see Section 6.1, Nef Reaction). This strategy is one of the best methods for the preparation of 1,4-dicarbonyl compounds.156a–h Various natural products have been prepared via this route.157 For example, cis-jasmone is prepared from readily available materials, as shown in Scheme 4.19.156f O

CHO 1) Bu3P

+ CH3NO2

O O

2) H+, HO

OH

O

TMG

NO2

NO2 95%

62% O

O H2O2

O H+

O

K2CO3

O

O

CHO

O 85%

O 90% O

O

–

OH

Ph3P=CHCH2CH3 O

83%

60% Scheme 4.19.

O

O CO2Me

CH3NO2

CO2Me

TMG

NO2 70%

O (Nef) 1. NaOMe, MeOH 2. H2SO4

CO2Me

CO2Me

Wittig

CHO 71% CH2NO2

O

O CHO Scheme 4.20.

108

MICHAEL ADDITION

The Michael addition of nitromethane to cyclopentenone derivatives is used for synthesis of prostaglandins (Scheme 4.20).158 Here, the anion of nitromethane is used as a formyl anion synthon. Ballini and coworkers have used the Michael addition of nitro compounds followed by the Nef reaction for the synthesis of various spiroketalic pheromones (Scheme 4.21).159

O

H

Al2O3

MeNO2 +

O

O

O

O

H

NO2

NO2 53%

62% OH

OH

NaBH4

H

TiCl3

+

O

NO2 53%

O

O

H

O

Scheme 4.21.

Asymmetric synthesis of spiroketalic pheromones is also reported, in which the asymmetric reduction of carbonyl group is carried out with baker’s yeast (Scheme 4.22).160 OH O O

OH

O

amberlyst A-21

baker's yeast 3 days

nitromethane

NO2 (2S, 8S) 58%

NO2

O

O OH

OH

1) NaOH, EtOH 2) H2SO4, n-hexane, H2O, 0 ºC,1 h

O

O (2S, 5R, 7S) (Z, Z)

O

+

(2S, 5S, 7S) (E, E)

41% (1:3) Scheme 4.22.

The Michael addition of nitro compounds to electron-deficient alkynes affords allylic nitro compounds in good yields, in which KF-n-Bu4NCl in DMSO is used as a base and solvent (Eq. 4.118).161 O NO2

NO2

1) KF, n-Bu4NCl 2) CO2Me 3) H2C=CHC(O)Me

O

(4.118) 53%

A short enantioselective synthesis of (–)-(R,R)-pyrenophorin, a naturally occurring anti-fungal 16-membered macrolide dilactone, is prepared from (S)-5-nitropentan-2-ol via the Michael addition and Nef reaction (Scheme 4.23).162 The choice of base is important to get the E-alkene in the Michael addition, for other bases give a mixture of E and Z-alkenes. The requisite chiral (S)-5-nitropentan-2-ol is prepared by enantioselective reduction of 5-nitropentan-2-one with baker’s yeast.163

4.3

OAc

OH

OAc

O

KF, Bu4NBr,

Ac2O, py, RT

OMe

DMSO methyl propiolate

NO2

NO2

NO2 62%

98% OAc

OAc

O

15% TiCl3, pH 5.3

109

MICHAEL ADDITION OF NITROALKANES

OMe

O

HO(CH2)2OH O

p-TsOH

O 60%

OMe

O 95%

O OH

O

KOH O

MeOH

O OMe

O

O

O

O 95%

O (–)-(R, R)-Pyrenophorin I

Scheme 4.23.

Conjugate addition of nitroalkanes to allyl Baylis-Hillman acetates in the presence of NaOH (0.6 N) in THF gives 2-alkylidene-4-nitro ketones with high stereoselectivity; these are converted via the Nef reaction into the corresponding 1,4-diketones (Eq. 4.119).164 Et OAc + MeCH2NO2 O

NaOH THF, 0–20 ºC

Me

NO2

O

Et

Et Me O Me

NaOH

Me (4.119) O

H+, MeOH –50 ºC

Me

78%

61%

Polyfunctionalized nitro compounds are prepared by the Michael addition using 2-alkenylsubstituted 2-siloxycyclopropanecarboxylates as Michael acceptors (Eq. 4.120).165 O Me3SiO

CO2Me +

NO2

Triton B ∆

CO2Me (4.120) NO2 80%

Newkome and coworkers have developed synthesis of dendritic molecules using the Michael addition of nitromethane to α,β-unsaturated esters as a key reaction (Scheme 4.24).166 The addition of alkyl nitronate anions to imines in the presence of a Lewis acid proceeds in high yield with up to 10:1 diastereoselection favoring the anti isomer. This reaction is used for the stereoselective synthesis of 1,2-diamines (Eq. 4.121).167 Scandium triflate catalyzes the addition of 1-trimethylsilyl nitropropanoate to imines with a similar selectivity.35

110

MICHAEL ADDITION

OO

O OH

O O

OH

O2N

O OH

O

O

DCC, HOBT

+

R

DMF

O

O

NH H N

O

O O

O NH

O

O O

O

O

O

O

3 H2N

O

O O

O

DCC: dicyclohexylcarbodiimide HOBT: 1-hydroxybenzotriazole

R = NO2 R = NH2

O O

O

O

O O

O

O

O O

O OO

O

OO

O

O

O

O

O

H N

R

O O

O O

O NH

O O O

O

NH H N

O

O OH

O

O

HN

O DCC, HOBT DMF

O

O

NH O

OH OH

O HN O

HN

O

O

H2, Raney Ni

O O O

O2N

O

O O

O

NH

O

O

O O

NHO

O

O O O

O

O O

O

NH HN

O

O

OO

O O

O O O

O

O

O

R = NO2 R = NH2

H2, Raney Ni

Scheme 4.24.

NO2

1) n-BuLi, THF, –78 ºC 2) PhCH2N=CHPh 3) THF, AcOH, –78 to 0 ºC

PhH2C Ph

NH Et NO2

95% (anti/syn = 10/1)

(4.121)

4.3

111

MICHAEL ADDITION OF NITROALKANES

The sequence of the Michael addition of nitroalkanes and denitration provides a general method for conjugate addition of primary and secondary alkyl groups to electron deficient alkenes (Eq. 4.122).168

O

MeNO2

Me

O2N

CO2Me

CO2Me

Me

O2N

O

O PhO2S

CO2Me

SO2Ph DBU

Me

O2N

PhO2S

Bu3SnH AIBN benzene 80 ºC

O

CO2Me Me

H O

(4.122) NO2 TBDMSO

CHO

1) MeONa, MeNO2, MeOH, RT, 2 h 2) MsCl, Et3N, CH2Cl2 0 ºC, 1 h

Me Me

TBDMSO Me Me 62%

NO2 1) NaBH4, CHCl3/i-PrOH, RT, 40 min

RO Me

2) CH3CN/H2O, HF, RT, 24 h 3) (S)-2-methylbutyric anhydride, DMAP, 40 ºC, 20 min

amberlyst A-21, Et2O, RT, 2 h O

Me

OTBDMS

59%

O OTBDMS

O O

NO2

Me

n-Bu3SnH, AIBN

Me

toluene reflux, 30 min

Me 70% O

HO OTBDMS

O

O O

O O

O Me

Me

Me

Me

Me

Me 55%

(+)-dihydromevinolin Scheme 4.25.

112

MICHAEL ADDITION

Hanessian and coworkers have used this strategy for a total synthesis of (+)-dihydromevinolin (Scheme 4.25).169 Ballini and coworkers have developed a new strategy for alkenylation of carbonyl compounds based on the Michael addition followed by elimination of HNO2 (see Section 7.3). A variety of 2-alkylidene 1,4-dioles have been conveniently prepared, in two steps, by the Michael addition of a nitroalkane to the appropriate enedione derivatives under basic conditions, followed by chemoselective reduction with LiAlH4 (Eq. 4.123).170

Me NO2 Me

Me

CO2Me

H

CO2Me

CO2Me

Me

OH OH

LiAlH4

DBU MeCN

+

CO2Me

Me

Me 82%

94%

(4.123) The synthesis of 2,3,5-trialkylpyrroles can be easily achieved by conjugate addition of nitroalkanes to 2-alken-1,4-dione (prepared by oxidative cleavage of 2,5-dialkylfuran) with DBU in acetonitrile, followed by chemoselective hydrogenation (10% Pd/C as catalyst) of the C-C- double bond of the enones obtained by elimination of HNO2 from the Michael adduct. The Paal-Knorr reaction (Chapter 10) gives 2,3,5-trialkylpyrroles (Eq. 4.124).171 O Me

Me + O

DBU MeCN

PhCH2CH2NO2

O

Me

Me O

O Pd/C H2

Me

PhCH2NH2

Me O

H CH2Ph 77%

H CH2Ph 95%

Me

Ph

(4.124)

Me N CH2Ph 92%

The Michael addition of cyclic α-nitro ketones to acrolein or methyl vinyl ketone followed by reduction of the carbonyl group and treatment with base results in the ring expansion (Eq. 4.125).172 Hesse and coworkers have used this strategy for the preparation of various macrolides.173 For example, Michael addition of 2-nitrocyclodecanone methyl vinyl ketone followed by reduction with (S)-alpine-hydride gives the nitrolactone in 72% yield. Radical denitration of the nitrolactone with Bu3SnH gives (+)-(S)-tetradecan-13-olide in 44% yield (Eq. 4.126).173c O

H2C)n

CHO n

NO2

PPh3

NO2

n = 0, 1, 2, 6 (H2C)n

O

(H2C)n

O

NaBH4

84–93% OH

NO2 90–95%

CHO O NaH DME

(H2C)n

O

NO2 75–81% (4.125)

4.3

O

O

MICHAEL ADDITION OF NITROALKANES

O

113

O

NO2 NO2

PPh3 O

Me

O

(S)-alpine hydride

Me

Bu3SnH AIBN

NO2

(4.126) 44%

72%

The Michael addition of α-nitro ketones to α,β-unsaturated ketones followed by radical denitration provides a useful strategy for the preparation of 1,4-diketones.134b 1-Phenylheptane1,5-dione, isolated from the decayed heart wood of aspens, is prepared by this strategy (Eq. 4.127).174 O O Ph

PPh3

NO2 +

O

Ph

O

NO2 71% O

O

(4.127)

Bu3SnH Ph

AIBN

70%

The Michael addition of nitro compounds to α,β-unsaturated ketones or esters followed by reduction of the nitro to amino group is useful for the preparation of various heterocycles. This is presented in Chapter 10 (Synthesis of Heterocycles).

4.3.2 Intramolecular Addition Intramolecular Michael addition of nitro compounds proceeds in a stereoselective way to give various types of cyclic nitro compounds with high stereoselectivity. The Michael addition of 1-acetylcyclohexene to nitrostyrene followed by treatment with MeONa in MeOH gives 4-nitro-3-phenyldecalone with high stereoselectivity (Eq. 4.128).175 O

O

Ph NO2

1) LDA 2) Ph

NO2 75% H

O

H

MeONa-MeOH RT

H

Ph

O

+

NO2 45% (7:93)

H

Ph NO2

(4.128)

114

MICHAEL ADDITION

Double Michael additions of nitro compounds bearing tethered acidic carbons to 3-butyn2-one under NaH catalysis give nitrocyclohexanes with high stereoselectivity. The products are transformed into trans-fused bicyclic compounds via the Dickmann reaction on treatment with base. (Eq. 4.129).176 O

CN

Me

NO2

Me Me NaH, THF

CO2Et

CNO

CN CO2Et Me

O2N

Me

NaOEt

O2N

O 58%

OEt 80%

(4.129) The intramolecular Michael addition is used as a key step for synthesis of epibatidine (Scheme 4.26).177 Epibatidine is an analgesic, operating by a nonopioid mechanism, it is several hundred times more potent than morphine. O O2N 1) NaBH4/EtOH

KF/Al2O3 O Cl

THF, RT Cl

N

2) MeSO2Cl CH2Cl2, py

NO2

N 59%

OR

NO2

OMs SnCl2•2H2O EtOH

toluene

Cl N R = H (67%) R = Ms (91%) R = CO-menthyl

Cl

NH2

N 80%

H N H

N

t-BuOK t-BuOH

Cl

H N N H

Cl 50%

60% Scheme 4.26.

Barco and coworkers have reported a more elegant synthesis of the nitrocyclohexanone via the double Michael addition of nitromethane with enones. (Eq. 4.130).178 O TolSO2 O Cl

N

(4.130)

MeNO2 KF Cl

N

NO2

4.4

ASYMMETRIC MICHAEL ADDITION

115

The sequential process consisting of palladium-catalyzed alkylation and the intramolecular Michael addition of nitro compound provides a nitrocyclohaxane derivative, which is a good precursor for synthesis of Erythrina alkaloids (Eq. 4.131).179

O

+

O- Li N

O

O-

Pd(PPh3)4, PPh3

AcO

+

THF MeO2C

O

O NO2

O

1

H

D

C

O

CO2Me

A

3

H2C

N

(4.131)

B 6

MeO

57%

4.4 ASYMMETRIC MICHAEL ADDITION 4.4.1 Chiral Alkenes and Chiral Nitro Compounds Diastereoselective conjugate addition of nucleophiles to enones, enals, and enoates occurs with high stereocontrol and constitutes a powerful method in stereoselective synthesis.185 The conjugate addition of nucleophiles to optically pure γ-oxygenated substrates is of special interest in the enantioselective synthesis of natural products. Highly syn-selectivity is observed in the conjugate addition of ammonia,186 alkoxides,187 and alkyllithium derivatives.188 High anti-selective addition is observed in the addition of metal enolates and cuprates.189 The Michael addition of nitromethane to enoates derived from glyceraldehyde acetonide leads to syn-adducts with high diastereoselectivity (de 76–90%) (Eq. 4.132).190 Primary and secondary nitroalkanes afford syn-adducts diastereoselectively in the Bu4NF- or DBU-catalyzed Michael addition to the same enoates of Eq. 4.132.191

O O O

OEt

+

MeNO2

Bu4NF·3H2O

O

OEt

THF

(4.132)

O

O 2N 70% (syn/anti = 95/5)

O

Syn-selectivity of the DBU-catalyzed Michael addition of nitromethane to chiral γ-oxygenated enones is quite general, as shown in Scheme 4.27.192 Feringa and coworkers have used the optical active furanone or pyranone as an acceptor for the diastereoselective Michael reactions (Eq. 4.133).193 O O

OH

O

O N

O

O

OH

Me2CHNO2 N

N H

O2N O Me Me 76% (90% de)

(4.133) O

116

MICHAEL ADDITION

N

O N

O O

MeNO2

O O

O2N 92% (88% de)

O

MeNO2

O

S OBn

O

S

DBU

OBn

N

O

NO2 O

O

O

O

S

DBU

S

N

94% (83% de)

O

O

O

ButMe2SiO

S

MeNO2

Bu Me2SiO

DBU O

O

NO2 O

O

t

S O

N

O

N

92% (86% de)

Scheme 4.27.

Krief and coworkers have found that 2-lithio-2-sulfonylpropane and 2-lithio-2-nitropropane behave differently in the addition to dimethyl alkylidenemalonate. Thus, 2-lithio-2-sulfonylpropane reacts with it almost exclusively on the (Si)-face and leads to the anti-adduct, whereas 2-lithio-2-nitropropane reacts under similar reaction conditions, exclusively on the (Re)-face, providing the syn-product (Eq. 4.134).194 Me SO2Ph CO2Me Me

Me SO2Ph Me Li CO2Me O

CO2Me

O

O

CO2Me

THF

O 72% (92% de) Me NO2 Me Li

(4.134)

Me NO2 Me CO2Me

THF

O

CO2Me

O 71% (100% de)

The Michael addition of nitromethane to vinylogous esters of N-protected amino acids proceeds with good yields and with good diastereoselectivity (Eq. 4.135).195 NHBoc NHBoc EtO

Me O

MeNO2 DBU

EtO

Me O O 2N

(4.135)

95% (60% de)

Levoglucosenone, a cellulose-derived α,β-unsaturated ketone, is an interesting material because it is both chiral and contains an activated double bond. This compound has been used

4.4

117

ASYMMETRIC MICHAEL ADDITION

as a chiral starting material for synthesis of a variety of natural compounds such as alkaloids or antibiotics.196 The Michael addition of nitro compounds to levoglucosenone provides a useful tool for the synthesis of various chiral compounds. Nitromethane undergoes TMG-catalyzed addition to levoglucosenone, affording 2:1 and 1:2 adducts in high yield (95%); the products result from initial Michel addition exclusively at the exo-face of the alkene anti to the 1,6-anhydro bridge (Eq. 4.136).197 If nitromethane is used as a solvent, the 2:1 adduct is obtained. A reaction is carried out by stirring a mixture of nitromethane and levoglucosenone (2:1 ratio) in CH2Cl2 in the presence of catalytic amounts of TMG to give a 1:2 adduct. O MeNO2

O

O MeNO2

O

TMG

O

O

O2N

MeNO2 TMG

O

O

NO2

TMG OH

O2N

O O O2N

OH

(4.136)

O O

O

A variety of important synthetic reactions can be promoted by electrogenerated bases (EGB). The Michael addition and alkylation of compounds with activated hydrogen atoms are two examples in which using EGB has been very successful. The electrochemical method is very successful for functionalization of levoglucosenone as shown in Scheme 4.28.198

O

O O

O O

EtO

O OEt

O

NO2

Me O2N

O EtO2CCH(NO2)CH2CH2CO2Et

OEt O

MeCH(NO2)CO2Et

O

O

O

O O Me

Me2CHNO2

O

O

O2NCH2CO2Et O

NO2 Me

OEt

O2N O

O CH3NO2

cyclo-C5H9NO2

O

O O2NCH2CO2Et CH2=CHCH2Br

O O O2N

CH2(NO2)2

O O2N

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

EtO O

OH

NO2

O2N

Scheme 4.28.

NO2

O

118

MICHAEL ADDITION

4.4.2 Chiral Catalysts Catalytic enantioselective nucleophilic addition of nitroalkanes to electron-deficient alkenes is a challenging area in organic synthesis. The use of cinchona alkaloids as chiral catalysts has been studied for many years. Asymmetric induction in the Michael addition of nitroalkanes to enones has been carried out with various chiral bases. Wynberg and coworkers have used various alkaloids and their derivatives, but the enantiomeric excess (ee) is generally low (up to 20%).199 The Michael addition of methyl vinyl ketone to 2-nitrocycloalkanes catalyzed by the cinchona alkaloid cinchonine affords adducts in high yields in up to 60% ee (Eq. 4.137).200

N

HO H O

H

O

O

O NO2

N CCl4, –20 ºC, 60 h

+

(4.137)

NO2 84% (54.6% ee)

Matsumoto and coworkers have introduced a new strategy for asymmetric induction under high pressure. The Michael addition of nitromethane to chalcone is performed at 10 kbar in the presence of a catalytic amount of chiral alkaloids. The extent of asymmetric induction reaches up to 50% ee with quinidine in toluene.201 Chiral monoaza-crown ethers containing glucose units have been applied as phase-transfer catalysts in the Michael addition of 2-nitropropane to a chalcone to give the corresponding adduct in up to 90% ee. (Eq. 4.138).202

O

O Me Me +

H

NO2

NaOt Bu, toluene MeO

H

O R1O R1O

O

*

O N R

H

O

O

O2 N

Me Me 82% (90% ee)

(4.138) Yamaguchi and coworkers have found that proline rubidium salts catalyze the asymmetric Michael addition of nitroalkanes to prochiral acceptors. When (2S)-L-prolines are used, acyclic (E)-enones give (S)-adducts. Cyclic (Z)-enones give (R)-adducts predominantly (Eq. 4.139).203 Recently, Hanessian has reported that L-proline (3 ~ 7% mol equiv) and 2,5-dimethylpiperazine are more effective to induce catalytic asymmetric conjugate addition of nitroalkanes to cycloalkanones.204

O

NO2 +

N CO2Rb H (5–10 mol%) 20 h

O

(4.139) O2N 84% (84% ee)

REFERENCES

119

Heterobimetallic asymmetric complexes contain both Bronsted basic and Lewis acidic functionalities. These complexes have been developed by Shibasaki and coworkers and have proved to be highly efficient catalysts for many types of asymmetric reactions, including catalytic asymmetric nitro-aldol reaction (see Section 3.3) and Michael reaction. They have reported that the multifunctional catalyst (R)-LPB [LaK3tris(R)-binaphthoxide] controls the Michael addition of nitromethane to chalcones with >95% ee (Eq. 4.140).205 O2N O Ph

(R)-LPB, t BuOH CH3NO2 (1.2 equiv)

O

(4.140)

Ph

(S)

toluene –20 ºC, 109 h 59% (97% ee)

The catalytic asymmetric nitro Mannich-type reaction using the complex Yb, K, and binaphthol gives the best result (see Eq. 4.141).206 The reaction conditions are important to get a good ee, where nitromethane is added very slowly over 27 h.

O Ph

N

PPh2

+ CH3NO2 (5 equiv)

NO2

catalyst (20 mol%) (Yb/K/binaphthol = 1/1/3) toluene/THF (7/1) –40 ºC

O Ph

N PPh2 H 79% (91% ee)

(4.141)

REFERENCES 1a. Feringa, B. L., and J. F. G. A. Jansen. In Houben-Weyl Methoden der Organischen Chemie, 4th Ed Vol. E21, Chapter 1.5.2.4. Thieme, Stuttgart, 1995, p 2104. 1b. Perlmutter, P. In Conjugate Addition Reactions in Organic Synthesis, Tetrahedron Organic Chemistry Series, Vol 9, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1992. 1c. Boyd, G. V. In The Chemistry of Amino, Niroso, Nitro and Related Groups, Part 1, ed. by S. Patai, John Wiley, New York, 1996, p. 533–626. 2a. Parham, W. E., and F. L. Lamp. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 73, 1293 (1951). 2b. Ono, N., T. Hashimoto, T. X. Jun, and A. Kaji. Tetrahedron Lett., 28, 2277 (1987). 3. Vasilevskis, J., J. A. Gualtieri, S. D. Hutchings, R. C. West, J. W. Scott, D. R. Parrish, F. Bi zzarro, T., and G. F. Field. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 100, 7423 (1978). 4. Ono, N., A. Kamimura, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., 51, 2139 (1978). 5. Marx, M., F. Maeri, J. Reisdorf, R. Sandmeier, and S. Clark. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 99, 6754 (1977). 6. Confalone, P. N., G. Pizzolato, D. L. Lollar-Confalone, and M. R. Uskokvic. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 102, 1954 (1980). 7. Ahrach, M., R. Schneidert, P. Gerardin, and B. Loubinoux, Synth. Commun., 27, 1865 (1997). 8. Ono, N., A. Kamimura, and A. Kaji. Tetrahedron Lett., 25, 5319 (1984). 9. Nagao, Y., K. Kaneko, and E. Fujita. Tetrahedron Lett., 1215 (1976). 10. Kamimura, A., H. Sasatani, T. Hashimoto, and N. Ono. J. Org. Chem., 54, 4998 (1989). 11. Kamimura, A., H. Sasatani, T. Hashimoto, T. Kawai, K. Hori, and N. Ono. J. Org. Chem. 55, 2437 (1990). 12. Ono, N., A. Kamimuta, T. Kawai, and A. Kaji. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1550 (1987). 13. Kamimura, A., and N. Ono. Tetrahrdron Lett., 30, 731 (1989). 14. Hori, H., S. Higuchi, and A. Kamimura. J. Org. Chem., 55, 5900 (1990). 15. Ender, D., A. Haertwig, G. Raabe, and J. Runsink. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 35, 2388 (1996). 16. Feuer, H. The Chemistry of Nitro and Nitroso Groups, part 2, Interscience, New York, p. 131 (1970). 17. Duffy, J. L., J. A. Kurth, and M. J. Kurth. Tetrahedron Lett., 34, 1259 (1993). 18a. Rajender, S. V., K. Mirayam, and W. K. Geroge. Synthesis, 486 (1986).

120 18b. 19. 20a. 20b. 21. 22. 23. 24a. 24b. 25. 26a. 26b. 27a. 27b. 27c. 27d. 27e. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32a. 32b. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38a. 38b. 38c. 38d. 39. 40. 41a. 41b. 41c. 42a. 42b. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51a. 51b.

MICHAEL ADDITION

Dauzonne, D., and R. Royer. Synthesis, 348 (1984). Ono, N., K. Sugi, T. Ogawa, and S. Aramaki. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1781 (1993). Hassner, A., O. Friedmam, and W. Dehaen. Liebigs Ann., 587 (1997). Yao, C. Y., C. S. Yang, and H. Y. Fang. Tetrahedron Lett., 38, 6419 (1997). Yakura, T., T. Tsuda, Y. Matsumura, S. Yamada, and M. Ikeda. Synlett, 985 (1996). Dulcere, J. P., and E. Dumez. Chem. Commun., 971 (1997). Dumez, E., J. Rodriguez, and J. P. Dulcere. Chem. Commun., 1831 (1997). Dumez, E., and J. P. Delcere. Chem. Commun., 479 (1998). Dumez, E., J. Rodriguez, and J. P. Dulcere. Chem. Commun., 2009 (1999). Rodriguez, J. Synlett, 505 (1999). Perekalin, V. V., E. S. Lipina, V. M. Berestoviskaya, and D. A. Efremov. Nitroalkenes, Conjugated Nitro Compounds; Wiley, Chichester, 1994, Chapter 3, p 169. Rajappa, S. Tetrahedron, 55, 7065 (1999). Faulques, M., L. Rene, and R. Royer. Synthesis, 260 (1982). Rene, L., and R. Royer. Synthesis, 878 (1981). Tokumitsu, T., and T. Hayashi. J. Org. Chem., 50, 1547 (1985). Kamimura, A., and T. Nagashima. Synthesis, 694 (1990). Kamimura, A., and N. Ono. Synthesis, 921 (1988). Ono, N., K, Matsumoto, T. Ogawa, H. Tani, and H. Uno, J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 1905 (1996). Seko, S., and I. Komoto. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 2975 (1998). Imagawa, K., E. Hata, T. Yamada, and T. Mukaiyama. Chem. Lett., 291 (1996). Ender, D., and M. Klatt. Synthesis, 1403 (1996). Morris, M. L., and M. A. Sturgess. Tetrahedron Lett., 34, 42 (1993). Sturgess, M. A., and D. J. Yarberry. Tetrahedron Lett., 34, 4743 (1993). Ender, D., and J. Wiedemann. Synthesis, 1443 (1996). Lucet, D., T. Toupet, T. L. Gall, and C. Mioskowski. J. Org. Chem., 62, 2682 (1997). Adams, H., J. C. Anderson, S. Peace, and A. M. K Ponnell. J. Org. Chem., 63, 9932 (1998). Sabelle, S., D. Lcet, T. L. Gall, and C. Mioskowski. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 2111 (1998). Shibuya, M., M. Kuretani, and S. Kubota. Tetrahedron Lett., 22, 4453 (1981). Ranganathan, D., C. B. Rao, and S. Ranganatham. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 975 (1979). Yamada, M., and M. Yamashita. Synthesis, 1026 (1982). Yamasita, M., M. Sugiura, Y. Tamada, T. Oshikawa, and J. Clardy. Chem. Lett., 1407 (1987). Yamamoto, H., A. Noguchi, K. Torii, K. Ohno, T. Hanaya, H. Kawamoto, and S. Inokawa. Chem. Lett., 1575 (1988). Ono, N., N. Bansho, S. Ito, T. Murashima, and T. Ogawa. J. Heterocyclic Chem., 34, 1243 (1997). Somanathan, R., I. A. Rivero, G. Aguirre, M. Ramirez, L. H. Hellberg, and F. Bakir. Synthetic. Commun., 26, 1023 (1996). Barrett, A. G. M. Chem. Soc. Rev., 20, 95 (1991). Banks, B., A. G. M. Barrett, and M. A. Russell. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 670 (1984). Barrett, A. G. M., G. G. Graboski, and M. A. Russell. J. Org. Chem., 51, 1012 (1986). Ashwell, M., and R. F. K. Jackson. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 282 (1988). Ashwell, M., R. F. K. Jackson, and J. M. Kirk. Tetrahedron, 46, 7429 (1990). Barrett, A. G. M., M. C. Cheng, C. D. Spilling, and S. J. Taylor. J. Org. Chem., 54, 992 (1989). Barrett, A. G. M., G. G. Graboski, and M. A. Russell. J. Org. Chem., 50, 2603 (1985). Barrett, A. G. M., and S. Sakdarat. J. Org. Chem., 55, 5110 (1990). Barrett, A. G. M., and S. A. Lebold. J. Org. Chem., 55, 3853 (1990). Barrett, A. G. M., P. D. Weipert, D. Dhanak, R. K. Husa, and S. A. Lebold. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 113, 9820 (1991). Barrett, A. G. M., and S. A. Lebold. J. Org. Chem., 56, 4875 (1991). Barrett, A. G. M., D. C. Braddock, P. W. N., Christian, D. Pilipauskas, A. J. P. White, and D. J . Williams. J. Org. Chem., 63, 5818 (1998). Barrett, A. G. M., J. A. Flygare, and C. D. Spilling. J. Org. Chem., 54, 4723 (1989). Jackson, R. F. W., J. M. Kirk, N. J. Palmer, D. Waterson, and M. J. Wythers. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 889 (1993). Jackson, R. F. W., N. J. Palmer, and M. J. Wythes. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 95 (1994).

REFERENCES

121

51c. Jackson, R. F. W., N. J. Palmer, M. J. Wythes, W. Clegg, and M. R. J. Elsegood. J. Org. Chem., 60, 6431 (1995). 52. Hoffmann, R. W. Chem. Rev., 89, 1841 (1989). 53a. Jackson, R.F.W., N. J. Palmer, and M. J. Wythes. Tetrahedron Lett., 35, 7433 (1994). 53b. Adams, Z. M., R. F. W. Jackson, N. J. Palmer, H. K. Rami, and M. J. Wythes. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 937 (1999). 54. Ambroise, L., and R. F. W. Jackson. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 2311 (1996). 55. Hanessian, S., A. Bedeschi, C. Battistini, and N. Mongelli. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 107, 1438 (1985). 56. Baer, G., and L. Urbas. In the Chemistry of Nitro and Nitroso Groups, ed. by H. Feuer, Interscience, New York, 1970, Part 2, p. 63–146. 57. Boberg, F., K. H. Garburg, K. J. Gorlich, E. Piperreit, E. Redelf, and M. Ruhr. J. Heterocyclic Chem., 23, 1853 (1986). 58a. Fei, C. P., and T. H. Chan. Synthesis, 467 (1982). 58b. Nelson, J. H., P. N. Howells, G. C. DeLullo, G. L. Landen, and R. A. Henry. J. Org. Chem., 45, 1246 (1980). 59a. Yanami, T., M. Kato, and A. Yoshikoshi. J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun., 726 (1975). 59b. Yanami, T., A. Ballatore, M. Miyashita, M. Kato, and A. Yoshikoshi. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 1144 (1978). 59c. Yanami, T., A. Ballatore, M. Miyashita, M. Kato, and Y.Yoshikoshi. Synthesis, 407 (1980). 59d. Niwas, S., S. Kuma, and A. P. Bhaduri. Synthesis, 1027 (1983). 59e. Nakashita, Y., T. Watanabe, E. Benkert, A. L. Riatsch, and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta, 67, 1204 (1984). 60. Alcantara, M. P. D., F. C. Escribanon, A. Gomezsanchez, M. J. Dianez, M. D. Estarada, A. Lopezcastro, and S. Perezgarridon. Synthesis, 64 (1996). 61. Melot, J. M., F. T. Boullet, and A. Foucaud. Tetrahedron, 44, 2215 (1988). 62. Brunner, H., and B. Kimel. Monatsh. Chem., 127, 1063 (1996). 63. Ji, J., D. M. Bames, J. Zhang, S. A. King, S. J. Wittenberger, and H. E. Morton. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 121, 10215 (1999). 64a. Seebach, D., H. F. Leitz, and V. Ehrig. Chem. Ber., 108, 1924 (1975). 64b. Seebach, D., V. Ehrig, H. F. Leitz, and R. Henning. Chem. Ber., 108, 1946 (1975). 64c. Ehrig, V., and D. Seebach. Chem. Ber., 108, 1961 (1975). 65. Flintoft, R. J., J. C. Buzby, and J. A. Tucker. Tetrahedron Lett., 40, 4485 (1999). 66. Miyashita, M., R. Yamaguchi, and A. Yoshikoshi. J. Org. Chem., 49, 2857 (1984). 67. Awen, B. Z., M. Miyakoshi, T. Shiratani, and H. Irie. Chem. Lett., 767 (1992). 68. Ono, N., Y. Tanabe, R. Tanikaga, A. Kaji, and T. Matsuo. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 53, 3033 (1980). 69. Brana, M. F., M. Garranzo, and J. P. Castels. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 6569 (1998). 70a. Tanaka, T., A. Hazato, K. Bannai, N. Okamura, S. Sugiura, K. Manabe, S. Kurozumi, M. Suzuki, and R. Noyori. Tetrahedron Lett., 25, 4947 (1984). 70b. Tanaka, T., A. Hazato, K. Bannai, N. Okamura, S. Sugiura, K. Manabe, S. Kurozumi, M. Suzuki, and R. Noyori. Tetrahedron, 43, 813 (1987). 71. Mounir, N. B., D. Dugat, J. C. Gramain, and H. P. Husson. J. Org. Chem., 58, 6457 (1993). 72. Ghera, E., E. B.Yaakov, T. Yechezke, and A. Hassner. Tetrahedron Lett., 33, 2741 (1992). 73. Curran, D. P., P. B. Jacobs, R. L. Elliott, and B. H. Kim. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 109, 5280 (1987). 74. Lowley, M., P. D. Leeson, B. J. Wlliams, K. W. Moore, and R. Baker. Tetrahedron, 48, 3557 (1992). 75. Seebach, D., and P.Knochel. Helv. Chim. Acta., 67, 261 (1984). 76. Zuger, M., T. Weller, and D. Seebach. Helv. Chim. Acta., 63, 2005 (1980). 77. Calderari, G., and D. Seebach. Helv. Chim. Acta, 68, 1592 (1985). 78. Mulzer, J., R. Zuhse, and R. Schmiechen. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Eng., 31, 870 (1992). 79. Brenner, M., and D. Seebach. Helv. Chim. Acta., 82, 2365 (1999). 80. Busch, K., U. M. Groth, W. Kuhnle, and U. Schollkopf. Tetrahedron, 48, 5607 (1992). 80b. Ender, D., P. Teschner, G. Raabe. Synlett, 637 (2000). 81. Posner, G. H., and R. D. Crouch. Tetrahedron, 46, 7509 (1990). 82a. Miyashita, M., T. Yanami, T. Kumazawa, and A. Yoshikoshi. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 106, 2149 (1984). 82b. Yoshikoshi, A., and M. Miyashita. Acc. Chem. Res., 18, 284 (1984). 82c. Miyashita, M., T. Yanami, and A. Yoshikoshi. Org. Synth., 7, 414 (1990). 83. Tucker, J. A., T. L. Clayton, and D. M. Mordas. J. Org. Chem., 62, 4370 (1997).

122 84a. 84b. 85a. 85b. 86a. 86b. 87. 88a. 88b. 89. 90a. 90b. 91. 92. 93. 94. 95. 96a. 96b. 97. 98. 99. 100. 101. 102. 103a. 103b. 103c. 104. 105. 106. 107. 108. 109. 110. 111a. 111b. 111c. 112. 113. 114. 115. 116b. 117a. 117b. 117c. 118. 119a. 119b.

MICHAEL ADDITION

Risaliti, A., M. Forchiassin, and E. Valentin. Tetrahedron, 24, 1889 (1968). Pitacco, G., A. Pizzioli, and E.Valentin. Synthesis, 242 (1996) and references therein. Barbarella, G., S. Bruckner, G. Pitacco, and E. Valentin. Tetrahedron, 40, 2441 (1984). Felluga, F., P. Nitti, G. Pitacco, and E. Valentin. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 1645 (1991). Seebach, D., and J. Golinski. Helv. Chim. Acta, 64, 1413 (1981). Seebach, D., A. K. Beck, J. Golinski, J. N. Hay, and T. Laube. Helv. Chim. Acta, 68, 162 (1985). Blarer, S. J., and D. Seebach. Chem. Ber., 116, 2250 (1983). Seebach, D., M. Missbach, G. Calderari, and M. Eberle. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 112, 7625 (1990). Seebach, D., G. Calderari, W. L. Meyer, A. Merritt, and L. Odermann. Chimia, 39, 183 (1985). Fernandez, R., C. Gasch, J. M. Lassaletta, and J. M. Liera. Tetrahedron Lett., 35, 471 (1994). Thominiaux, C., S. Rousse, D. Desmaele, J. d’Angelo, and C. Riche. Tetrahedron Asymmetry, 10, 2015 (1999). d’Angelo, J., C. Cave, D. Desmaele, A. Gassama, C. Thominiaux, and C. Riche. Heterocycles, 48, 725 (1998). Uno, H., K. Kasahara, and N. Ono. Heterocycles, 53, 1011 (2000). Ashwood, M. S., L. A. Bell, P. G. Houghton, and S. H. B. Wright. Synthesis, 379 (1988). Bartoli, G., M. Bosco, and L. Sambri. Tetrahedron Lett., 35, 8651 (1994). Yao, C. F., K. H. Kao, J. T. Liu, C. M. Chu, Y. Wang, W. C. Chen, Y. M. Lin, W. W. Lin, M. C. Yan, J. Y. Lin, M. C. Chuang, and J. L. Shiue. Tetrahedron, 54, 791 (1998). Lopes, R. S. C., C. C. Lopes, and C. H. Heathcock. Tetrahedron Lett., 33, 6775 (1992). Schafer, H., and D. Seebach. Tetrahedron, 51, 2305 (1995). Seebach, D., A. K. Beck, and H. Heckel. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 40, 93 (2001). Seebach, D., H. Schafer, B. Schmidt, and M. Schreiber. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 31, 1587 (1992). Hu, Y., J. Yu, S. Yang, J. X. Wang, and Y. Yin. Synlett, 1213 (1998). Yao, C. Y., C. M. Chu, and J. T. Liu. J. Org. Chem., 63, 719 (1998). Chu, C. M., J. T. Liu, W. W. Lin, and C. F. Yao. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 47 (1999). Han, Y., Y. Z. Huang, and C. M. Zhou. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 3347 (1996). Kumar, H. M. S., B. V. S. Reddy, P. T. Reddy, and J. B. Yadav. Tetrahedron Lett., 40, 5387 (1999). Yamamoto, Y., and S. Nishii. J. Org. Chem., 53, 3597 (1988). Ochiai, M., M. Arimoto, and E. Fujita. Tetrahedron Lett., 22, 1115 (1981). Uno, H., S. Fujiki, and S. Suzuki. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 59, 1267 (1986). Haruta, J., K. Nishi, S. Matsuda, S. Akai, Y. Tamura, and Y. Kita. J. Org. Chem., 55, 4853 (1990). Retherford, C., M. C. P. Yeh, I. Schiper, H. G. Chen, and P. Knochel. J. Org. Chem., 54, 5202 (1989). Strekowski, L., Y. Gulevich, K. V. Aken, and D. W. Wilson. Tetrahedron Lett., 36, 225 (1995). McNulty, J., and R. Mo. Chem. Commun., 933 (1998). Knoess, H. P., M. P. Furlong, M. J. Rozema, and P. Knochel. J. Org. Chem., 56, 5974 (1991). Rao, S. A., T. S. Chou, J. Schipor, and P. Knochel. Tetrahedron, 48, 2025 (1992). Reddy, C. K., A. Devasagayaraj, and P. Knochel. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 4495 (1996). Pecunioso, A., and R. Menicagli. J. Org. Chem., 53, 45 (1988). Pecunioso, A., and R. Menicagli. J. Org. Chem., 54, 2391 (1989). Menicagli, R., C. Malanga, and V. Guagnano. Tetrahedron Lett., 33, 2867 (1992). Versleijen, J. P. G., A. M. van Leucen, and B. L. Feringa. Tetrahedron Lett., 40, 5803 (1999). Garner, P., R. Leslie, and J. T. Anderson. J. Org. Chem., 61, 6754 (1996). Barton, D. H. R., H. Togo, and S. Z. Zard. Tetrahedron, 41, 5507 (1985). Sumi, K., R. Dihabio, and S. Hanessian. Tetrahedron Lett., 33, 2789 (1992). Fuji, K., and M. Node. Synlett, 603 (1991). Severin, T., D. Scheel, and P. Adhikary. Chem. Ber., 102, 2966 (1969). Severin, T., and I. Schnabe. Chem. Ber., 102, 1707 (1969). Severin, T., and H. Pehr. Chem. Ber., 112, 3559 (1979) and references therein. Node, M., H. Nagasawa, Y. Naniwa, and K. Fuji. Synthesis, 729 (1987). Fuji, K., M. Node, H. Nagasawa, Y. Naniwa, and S. Terada. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 108, 3855 (1986). Fuji, K., M. Node, H. Nagasawa, Y. Naniwa, T. Taga, K. Machida, and G. Snatzke. J. Am., Chem. Soc., 111, 7921 (1989).

REFERENCES

123

120a. Node, M., R. Kurosaki, K. Hosomi, T. Inoue, K. Nishide, T. Ohmori, and K. Fuji. Tetrahedron Lett., 36, 99 (1995). 120b. Nishide, K., R. Kurosaki, K. Hosomi, H. Imazato, T. Inoue, M. Node, T. Ohmori, and K. Fuji. Tetrahedron, 51, 10857 (1995). 121a. Node, M., H. Nagasawa, and K. Fuji. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 109, 7901 (1987). 121b. Node, M., H. Nagasawa, and K. Fuji. J. Org. Chem., 55, 517 (1990). 122a. Node, M., X. Hao, H. Nagasawa, and K. Fuji. Tetrahedron Lett., 30, 4141 (1989). 122b. Node, M., X. Hao, and K. Fuji. Chem. Lett., 57 (1991). 123a. Fuji, K., S. Zheng, M. Node, and X. Hao. Chem. Pharm. Bull, 39, 202 (1991). 123b. Hao, X., M. Node, and K. Fuji. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 1505 (1992). 124. Fuji, K., T. Kawabata, T. Ohmori, and M. Node. Synlett, 367 (1995). 125. Lakshmaiah, G., T. Kawabata, M.Shang, and K. Fuji. J. Org. Chem., 64, 1699 (1999). 126. Node, M., A. Itoh, K. Nishide, H. Abe, T. Kawabata, Y. Masaki, and K. Fuji. Synthesis, 1119 (1992). 127. Fuji, K., M. Node, H. Abe, A. Itoh, Y. Masaki, and M. Shiro. Tetrahedron Lett., 31, 2419 (1990). 128. Node, M., A. Itoh, Y. Msasaki, and K. Fuji. Heterocycles, 32, 1705 (1991). 129. Retherford, C., and P. Knochel. Tetrahedron Lett., 32, 441 (1991). 130. Jubert, C., and P. Knochel. J. Org. Chem., 57, 5425 (1992). 131. Jubert, C., and P. Knochel. J. Org. Chem., 57, 5431 (1992). 132. Knochel, P., T. S. Chou, C. Jubert, and D. Rajagopal. J. Org. Chem., 58, 588 (1993). 133. Classical procedures, see, Houben-Weyl, Methoden der Organischen Chemie, 4th Ed., ed. by E. Muller, Vol. X/Part 1, George Thieme Verlag, Stuttgart, 1971. 134a. Nakashita, N., and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta, 66, 845 (1986). 134b. Ono, N., H. Miyake, and A. Kaji. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 875 (1985). 134c. Ono, N., A. Kamimura, H. Miyake, I. Hamamoto, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., 50, 3692 (1985). 135a. Ono, N., H. Miyake, A. Kamimura, N. Tsukui, and A. Kaji. Tetrahedron Lett., 23, 2957 (1982). 135b. Ono, N., H. Miyake, R. Tanikaga, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., 47, 5017 (1982). 136. Ono, N., A. Kamimura, and A. Kaji. Synthesis, 226 (1984). 137. Pollini, G. P., A. Barco, and G. DeGiuli. Synthesis, 44 (1972). 138. Bakuzis, P., M. O. F. Bakzuzis, and T. F. Weingartner. Tetrahedron Lett., 2371 (1978). 139. Stevens, R. V., and A. W. Lee. J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun., 102 (1982). 140. Osson, G. L., M. E. Voss, D. E. Hill, M. Kahn, V. S. Madison, and C. M. Cook. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 112, 323 (1990). 141. Matsumoto, K. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Eng., 19, 1013 (1980). 142. Ono, N., I. Hamamoto, A. Kamimura, A. Kaji, and R. Tamura. Synthesis, 258 (1987). 143a. Clark, J. H. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 789 (1978). 143b. Clark, J. H., J. M. Miller, and K. H. So. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 941 (1978). 143c. Clark, J. H. Chem. Rev., 80, 429 (1980). 144. Clark, J. H., D. G. Cork, and H. W. Gibbs. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 2253 (1983). 145. Chuit, C., R. J. P. Corriu, and C. Reye. Tetrahedron Lett., 23, 5531 (1982). 146. Ballini, R., and G. Bosica. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 8027 (1996). 147. Chasar, D. W. Synthesis, 841 (1982). 148. Bergbreiter, D. F., and J. J. Lalonde. J. Org. Chem., 52, 1601 (1987). 149. Keller, E., and B. L. Feringa. Synlett, 842 (1997). 150. Ballini, R., P. Marziali, and A. Mozzicafreddo. J. Org. Chem., 61, 3209 (1996). 151a. Jouglet, B., L. Blanco, and G. Rousseau. Synlett, 907 (1991). 151b. Mdoe, J. E. G., J. H. Clark, and D. J. Macquarrie. Synlett, 625 (1998). 152. Crossley, M. J., Y. M. Fung, J. J. Potter, and A. W. Stamford. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 1113 (1998). 153. Crossley, M. J., Y. M. Fung, E. Kyriakopoulos, and J. J. Potter. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 1123 (1998). 154. Coghlan, P. A., and C. J. Easton. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 2659 (1999). 155. Ballini, R., and M. Petrini. Tetrahedron Lett., 40, 4449 (1999). 156a. McMurry, J. E., and J. Melton. J. Org. Chem., 38, 4367 (1973). 156b. Dubs, P., and R. Stussi. Helv. Chim. Acta., 61, 990 (1978). 156c. Keinan, E., and Y. Mazur. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 99, 3861 (1977). 156d. Ho, T. L. J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun., 1149 (1980).

124 156e. 156f. 156g. 156h. 157. 158. 159a. 159b. 159c. 159d. 160. 161. 162. 163. 164. 165. 166a. 166b. 166c. 166d. 167a. 167b. 168. 169. 170. 171. 172. 173a. 173b. 173c. 173d. 173e. 173f. 173g. 174. 175. 176. 176b. 177. 178. 179. 180. 181. 182. 183. 184. 185a. 185b. 186. 187.

MICHAEL ADDITION

Miyakoshi, T., and S. Saito. Oil Chem., 31, 35 (1982). Miyakoshi, T., and S. Saito. Oil Chem., 31, 231 (1982). Ballini, R., M. Petrini, and E. Marotta. Synthetic Commun., 19, 573 (1989). Pinnick, H. W. (Review of Nef reaction.) Org. Reactions, 38, 655 (1990). Ballini, R. Studies in Natural Products Chemistry, ed. by A. Rahman, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 19, 117 (1997). Bagli, J., and T. Bogri. Tetrahedron Lett., 3815 (1972). Rosini, G., R. Ballini, M. Petrini, and E. Marotta. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 25, 941 (1986). Ballini, R., G. Boscia, and A. Uselli. J. Heterocyclic Chem., 31, 259 (1991). Rosini, G., R. Ballini, and E. Marotta. Tetrahedron, 45, 5935 (1989). Ballini, R., M. Petrini, and G. Rosini. Tetrahedron, 46, 7531 (1990). Occhiato, E. G., A. Guarna, F. DeSarlo, and D. Scapi. Tetrahedron Asymm., 12, 2971 (1995). Anderson, D. A., and J. R. Hwu. J. Org. Chem., 55, 511 (1990). Kalita, D., A. T. Khan, A. K. Saikia, G. Bez, and N. C. Barua. Synthesis, 975 (1998). Occhiato, E. G., A. Guarna, and L. M. Spinetti. Tetrahedron, 49, 10629 (1993). Chamakh, A., M. M’hirsi, J. Villieras, J. Lebreton, and H. Amri. Synthesis, 295 (2000). Zschiesche, R., and H. U. Reisig. Liebigs Ann. Chem., 1165 (1988). Newkome, G. R., C. N. Moorfield, and F. Vogtle. Dendritic Molecules, VCH, Weinheim, 1996. Newkome, G. R., C. N. Moorefield and K. J. Theriot, J. Org. Chem., 53, 5552 (1988). Newkome, G. R., R. Guther, C. N. Moorefield, F. Cardullo, L. Echegoyen, E. P. Cordero, and H. Luftmann. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 34, 2023 (1995). Brettreich, M., and A. Hirsch. Synlett, 1396 (1998) and references therein. Adams, H., J. C. Anderson, S. Peace, and A. M. K. Pennell. J. Org. Chem., 63, 9932 (1998). Anderson, J. C., S. Peace, and S. Pih. Synlett, 850 (2000). Ono, N., A. Kamimura, H. Miyake, I. Hamamoto, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., 50, 3692 (1985). Hanessian, S., P. J. Roy, M. Petrini, P. J. Hodges, R. D. Fabio, and G. Carganico. J. Org. Chem., 55, 5766 (1990). Ballini, R., G. Bosica, M. Damiani, and P. Righi. Tetrahedron, 55, 13451 (1999). Ballini, R., L. Barboni, G. Boscia, and M. Petrini. Synlett., 391 (2000). Cookson, R. C., and P. S. Ray. Tetrahedron Lett., 23, 3521 (1982). Hesse, M. Ring Enlargement in Organic Chemistry, VCH, Weinheim, 1991. Stanchev, S., B. Milenkov, and M. Hesse. Tetrahedron Lett., 38, 6107 (1993). Stanchev, S., and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta., 73, 460 (1990). Benkert, E. E., and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta, 70, 2166 (1987). Riatsch, A. L., Y. Nakashita, and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta, 67, 249 (1984). Walchli, R., A. Giggisberg, and M. Hesse. Tetrahedron Lett., 25, 2205 (1984). Kostva, K., A. L. Riatsch, Y. Nakshita, and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta., 65, 249 (1982). Ballini, R., and G. Bosica. J. Nat. Product, 57, 1462 (1994). Richter, F., and H. H. Otto. Tetrahedron Lett., 28, 2945 (1987). Grossman, R. B., R. M. Rasne, and B. O. Patrick. J. Org. Chem., 64, 7173 (1999). Grossman, R. B., D. S. Pendharkav, R. M. Rasne, and M. A. Varner. J. Org. Chem., 65, 3255 (2000). Szantay, C., Z. K. Balogh, I. Moldvai, C. Szantay, E. T. Major, and G. Blasko. Tetrahedron, 52, 11053 (1996). Barco, A., S. Benetti, C. DeRisi, P. Marchetti, G. P. Pollini, and V. Zanirato. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 1973 (1998). Jousse, C., D. Mainguy, and D. Desmaele. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 1349 (1998). Andruszkiewicz, R., and R. B. Silverman. Synthesis, 954 (1989). Sosbicki, J. G., and J. Liebscher. Synthesis, 1117 (1996). Grimm, E. L., R. Zschiesche, and H. U. Reissig. J. Org. Chem., 50, 5543 (1985). Newkome, G. R., and C. D. Weis. J. Org. Chem., 56, 4798 (1991). Beck, A. K., and D. Seebach. Chem. Ber., 124, 2897 (1991). Rossiter, B. E., and N. M. Swingle. Chem. Rev., 92, 771 (1992). Lee, V. J. Comprehensive Organic Synthesis, ed. by B. M. Trost and I. Fleming, Pergamon, Oxford, Vol. 4, 1991. Dondoni, A., A. Bascarato, and A. Marra. Synlett, 256 (1993). Mulzer, J., M. Kappert, G. Huttner, and I. Jibril. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 23, 704 (1984).

REFERENCES

188. 189. 190. 191. 192. 193. 194. 195. 196a. 196b. 197a. 197b. 198a. 198b. 199a. 199b. 200. 201a. 201b. 202a. 202b. 202c. 203a. 203b. 203c. 204. 205a. 205b. 206.

125

Leonard, J., G. Ryan, and P. A. Swain. Synlett, 613 (1990). Roush, W., R. Lesur, W. Cong, and D. Harris. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 111, 2984 (1989). Patrocinio, V. L., P. R. R. Costa, and C. R. D. Correia. Synthesis, 474 (1994). Costa, J. S., A. G. Dias, A. L. Anholeto, M. D. Monteiro, V. L. Patrocinio, and P. R. R. Costa. J. Org. Chem., 62, 4002 (1997). Dondoni, A., A. Marra, and A. Boscarato. Chem. Eur. J, 5, 3562 (1999). Knol, J., J. F. G. A. Jansrn, F. van Bolhuis, and B. L. Feringa. Tetrahedron Lett., 32, 7465 (1991). Krief, A., L. Province, and A. Froidbise. Synlett, 1936 (1999). Plummer, J. S., L. A. Emery, M. A. Stier, and M. J. Suto. Tetrahedron Lett., 34, 7529 (1993). Isobe, M., N. Fukami, and T. Goto. Chem. Lett., 71 (1985). Feskos, J. N., and J. S. Swenton. J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun., 658 (1985). Shafizadeh, F., D. D. Ward, and D. Pang. Carbohydr. Res., 102, 217 (1982). Forsyth, A. C., R. M. Paton, and I. Watt. Tetrahedron Lett., 30, 993 (1989). Niyazymebtov, M. E., and D. H. Evans. Novel Trends in Electroorganic Synthesis, ed. by S. Torii, Kodansha, Tokyo, p. 119 (1995). Samet, A. V., M. E. Niyazymbetov, V. V. Semenov, A. L. Laikhter, and D. H. Evans. J. Org. Chem., 61, 8786 (1996). Colonna, S., H. Hiemstra, and H. Wynberg. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 238 (1978). Colonna, S., A. Re, and H. Wynberg. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 547 (1981). Latvala, A., S. Stanchev, A. Linden, and M. Hesse. Tetrahedron Asymmetry, 4, 173 (1993). Matsumoto, K., and T. Uchida. Chem. Lett., 1673 (1981). Matsumoto, K., A. Sera, and T. Uchida. Synthesis, 1 (1985). Bako, P., T. Kiss, and L. Toke. Tetrahedron Lett., 38, 7529 (1997). Bako, P., E. Czinege, T. Bako, M. Czugler, and L. Toke. Tetrahedron Asymmetry, 10, 4539 (1999). Bako, P., K. Vizvardi, Z. Bajor, and L. Toke. Chem. Commun., 1193 (1998). Yamaguchi, M., Y. Igarashi, R. S. Reddy, T. Shiraishi, and M. Hirama. Tetrahedron, 53, 11223 (1997). Yamaguchi, M., T. Shiraishi, Y. Igarashi, and M. Hirama. Tetrahedron Lett., 35, 8233 (1994). Yamaguchi, M., T. Shiraishi, and M. Hirama. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 32, 1176 (1993). Hanessian, S., and V. Pham. Org. Lett., 2975 (2000). Funabashi, K., Y. Saida, M. Kanai, T. Arai, H. Sasai, and M. Shibasaki. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 7557 (1998). Shibasaki, M., H. Sasai, and T. Arai. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 36, 1237 (1997). Yamada, K., S. J. Harwood, H. Groger, and M. Shibasaki. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 38, 3504 (1999).

The Nitro Group in Organic Synthesis. Noboru Ono Copyright © 2001 Wiley-VCH ISBNs: 0-471-31611-3 (Hardback); 0-471-22448-0 (Electronic)

5 ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS The carbon-carbon bond forming reactions of nitro compounds by alkylation with alkyl halides or acylation with acyl halides have been encountered with difficulties of the competing O-alkylation or O-acylation, respectively. In this chapter, the recent developments of Calkylations and C-acylations of nitro compounds are summarized. The O-alkylated compounds undergo cycloaddition reactions, which are discussed in the chapter of cycloaddition (Chapter 8).

5.1 ALKYLATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS Anions derived from aliphatic nitro compounds are capable of covalency formation at either carbon or oxygen. Although the carbon alkylate is stable, and is isolated without difficulty, the oxygen alkylate is unstable and the carbonyl compounds corresponding to the alkyl halides are obtained. In general, nitroparaffin salts undergo oxygen alkylaton with little, if any, concomitant carbon alkylation; indeed, this is the basis of a useful synthesis of aldehydes and ketones (Scheme 5.1).1 However, there are some exceptions to give the C-alkylation, the reaction of p-nitrobenzyl chloride with the salt of 2-nitropropane give the C-alkylation exclusively [see the section of 7.1.1 radical substitution (SRN1)].

Me

Me

O

RCH2Br

N Me

NO2

+

70–80% Scheme 5.1.

126

N Me

OCH2R

or

N Me

Me RCHO

N

OH

O

Me R

O2N

O

O

Me Me

Me

Me

Me

OCH2R

5.1

ALKYLATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

127

C-Alkylation takes place in the reaction of methyl nitroacetate with alkyl halides; the products are useful intermediates for preparing amino acids (Eq. 5.1).2 The requisite nitro acetate is prepared by self condensation of nitromethane.3 CO2Me CO2Me

Br

NaOMe

+

O 2N

CO2Me

NO2

(5.1)

CO2Me

23–27%

Preparation of Merrifield resin-bound nitro acetates, which is a suitable building block for the development of combinatorial solid phase synthesis, is reported.4 The anion of ethyl nitro acetate is generated in DMF by an electrochemical method using Pt cathode, magnesium rod anode, and tetrabutylammonium bromide as an electrolyte. Alkylaton of this anion with alkyl halides gives mono-alkylated products in 80% yield.5 Arylsulfonylnitromethane easily undergoes C-alkylation to form α-nitro sulfones, which are useful intermediates in organic synthesis (Eq. 5.2).6 The sulfonyl group may be replaced by other groups via SRN1 reactions,7 including by hydrogen with various reducing reagents; for example, see Eq. 5.3, which shows reduction with N-benzyl-1,4-dihydronicotinamide.8a More convenient desulfonylation of α-nitro sulfones can be carried out with sodium dithionite by using octylviologen as an electron-transfer catalyst.8d The overall reaction is regarded as alkylation of nitromethane, which is rather difficult by any other methods. In contrast to the mono-anion of nitromethane, the α,α-dianion gives predominant C-alkylation; however, the yield is low.9 NO2

NO2 PhCH2Br

+

Na+

NO2

(5.2)

68%

H O NH2

SO2Ph +

SO2Ph

DMSO

SO2Ph

H

R

Ph

hυ

N CH2Ph

RCH2NO2

(5.3)

60–70%

(or NaTeH)

The reactivity of carbon is much enhanced by the double deprotonated intermediates of nitro compounds. Except for nitromethane, other nitroalkanes are alkylated to give the C-alkylated products in 50–60% yield by this procedure (see Eq. 5.4).9,10 EtCH2NO2

n-BuLi (2 equiv) THF, HMPA –90 ºC

NO2

PhCH2Br Et

Ph

(5.4)

50–60%

Mosher and coworkers have adopted this strategy for the enantioselective synthesis of 2,3-dideoxy-3-nitro-furanosides and pyranosides using chiral nitronate dianions, as shown in Eq. 5.5.11

128

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

CO2H O NO2

O

1) n-BuLi (2 equiv) THF, HMPA, –78 ºC

O

Br , –78 ºC

2)

OMe

NO2 NO2

O

OMe

O

3) AcOH

O 60%

HO NO2

(5.5) The dianion derived from methyl 3-nitropropanoate is formed on treatment with LDA, and it is alkylated by alkyl halides exclusively at the 2-position (Eq. 5.6). Elimination of HNO2 with DBU in THF furnishes methyl α-methylenealkanoate (see Section 7.3, which discusses alkene formation).12 O2N

C6H13

n-C6H13I

LDA (2 equiv) CO2Me

O2N

THF, TMPA, –78 ºC

(5.6)

CO2Me 72%

Dianions derived from cyclic α-nitro ketones have been used for the preparation of the natural product phoracanthlide and related macrocyclic lactones (see Scheme 5.2).13 Alkylation of dianion of α-nitro cyclic ketones is followed by radical denitration with Bu3SnH (see Section 7.2). Thus, the direct alkylation of the anions derived from nitroalkanes with alkyl halides has some difficulties, and such difficulties are partially overcome by the radical reaction or transition metal catalyzed reactions, as discussed in Sections 5.4 and 5.5.

5.2 ACYLATION OF NITROALKANES The carboxylation of nitroalkanes with magnesium methyl carbonate followed by esterification gives α-nitro esters in 40–58% yield.14 Magnesium methyl carbonate is prepared by the saturation of a magnesium methoxide suspension in DMF with CO2. More elegantly, sodium salt of nitroalkanes can be carboxylated by means of 1-ethoxycarbonylbenzotriazole to give α-nitro esters in 55–80% yield (Eq. 5.7).15 Nitroacetic acids and its esters can serve as useful

NO2

NO2

1) LDA

O

Bu3SnH

O

2) MeI

AIBN Me 75% O

O

m-CPBA

Me

O Me 89%

83% Scheme 5.2.

5.2

ACYLATION OF NITROALKANES

129

starting materials for the synthesis of many kinds of substances, including amino acids, oxazolines, and amino alcohols.16 N R

NO2

NO2 N

+

NaH DMSO

N

R = H, Me, Et

CO2Et

R

CO2Et

(5.7)

55–80%

Nitroacetaldehyde diethyl acetal is prepared by the reaction of nitromethane with triethyl orthoformate in the presence of ZnCl2 (Eq. 5.8).17 Jager and coworkers have used this reagent for the synthesis of amino sugars via nitro-aldol reaction.18 Preparation of this useful reagent is now described in volume 74 of Organic Synthesis.19

CH3NO2

+

ZnCl2

HC(OEt)3

OEt

O2N

(5.8)

OEt 40–42%

Nitromethane reacts with triethyl orthoformate in the presence of secondary amines to give nitroenamines (Eq. 5.9).20 O CH3NO2

+

HC(OEt)3

NH

O N

p-TsOH

NO2

(5.9)

70%

α-Nitro ketones are versatile compounds in the synthesis of ketones or related compounds. They can be prepared either by nitration of enol nitrates (see Section 2.1.5, which discusses nitration) or oxidation of nitro aldols (see Section 3.2.3, which discusses Henry reaction). Furthermore, direct acylation of nitroalkanes with suitable acylating agents also provides a reliable method. The acylation of the carbanions derived from nitroalkanes with acyl imidazoles or alkoxycarbonylimidazoles takes place at the carbon atom to yield α-nitro ketones or α-nitro esters, respectively (Eq. 5.10).21 The lithium salts of nitroalkanes were isolated and used in THF or DMSO in the original procedure. Later, potassium salts generated in situ on treatment with t-BuOK in DMSO are reactive enough to give α-nitro ketones in good yield (Eq. 5.11).22

Me

ON

N +

MeO

N

DMSO

OLi

CO2Me

Me

NO2

O

91%

N O

O

NO2

+

n-C6H13

N O

(5.10)

t-BuOK DMSO

O

O

O C6H13

(5.11)

NO2 88%

Although acyl imidazoles can be replaced by phenyl esters in some cases,23 acyl imidazoles are more effective for the acylation of nitroalkanes. A combination of diethyl phosphorcyanidates and triethylamime allows the direct C-acylation of nitromethane by aromatic carboxylic

130

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

acids. The procedure is very simple, and the use of hazardous alkali nitronates is avoided (see Eq. 5.12).24 CH3NO2

+

MeO

CO2H

(EtO)2P(O)CN Et3N, DMF

NO2

(5.12)

MeO O 81%

In summary, reactions of nitronates with acid anhydrides or acyl chlorides give the O-acylated products, and reactions with acyl imidazoles, phenyl esters, acyl nitriles, and enol-lactones gives the C-acylated products. (see Eq. 5.13).25 The C/O selectivity of nitronate acylation by RCOX is qualitatively correlated with strength (pKa) of the acid HX conjugated to the leaving group X–.25 Me

Me NaH DMSO

CH3NO2

+ O

O

O NO2

(5.13)

O 81%

α-Nitro ketones are useful intermediates for synthesis of α-amino ketones such as α-aminolevulinic acid (5-ALA), which is a precursor for the preparation of protoporphyrin IX (see Scheme 5.3).26 Selective reduction of the nitro group and concomitant hydrolysis are carried out under acidic catalytic hydrogenation conditions to give 5-ALA⋅HCl in 94% yield. N 2

O

N H EtOH, THF

Cl

Cl O O

OEt

N

N

1) MeNO2, t-BuOK, DMSO 2) AcOH

O 100% O

O

O2N

OEt

H2, 10% Pd/C, HCl

HCl•H2N

OEt

O 60%

94%

O

Scheme 5.3. Synthesis of δ-aminolevulinic acid (5-ALA).

A precursor for biotin, 7-keto-8-aminopelargonic acid, is also prepared by acylation of nitromethane, followed by the selective reduction of the nitro group, as shown in Eq. 5.14.27 O N

N

O

O OEt

EtNO2, t-BuOK, DMSO

O

Me

OEt NO2 76%

H2/Raney Ni AcOH/HCl

O Me

O OEt

NH2•HCl

(5.14)

RING CLEAVAGE OF CYCLIC =-NITRO KETONES (RETRO-ACYLATION)

5.3

131

5.3 RING CLEAVAGE OF CYCLIC =-NITRO KETONES (RETRO-ACYLATION) Because the anions of nitroalkanes are stable, retro-acylation of α-nitro ketones proceeds smoothly in the presence of a base catalyst. This type of reaction provides an important tool in organic synthesis.28 Nucleophilic attack of water or alcohol to α-nitro cycloalkanones produces the ring cleavage with the formation of ω-nitro acids and ω-nitro esters. This type of cleavage is a well-known reaction,29 but it has not been used in organic synthesis until quite recently. Ballini and coworkers have studied the effect of base and solvent for this reaction. They have found a significant improvement of the ring cleavage of cyclic α-nitro ketones using a weakly basic ion-exchange resin (amberlyst A-21) (Eq. 5.15).30 α-Nitro cycloalkanones are cleaved to ω-nitro acids (71–97%) in aqueous media (0.05 M sodium hydroxide) and in the presence of a catalytic amount of cetyltrimethylammonium chloride (CTACl) as cationic surfactant.28 O NO2 n

n = 1-4, 6-8, 11

NO2

amberlyst A-21

CO2Me

(5.15)

n

MeOH reflux, 1–72 h

75–99%

One-pot syntheses of 1,4-diketones, γ-oxoaldehydes, γ-ketoesters, and ω-oxoalkanoates have been reported by bond cleavage of cyclic α-nitroketones with KOH in methanol and subsequent Nef reaction (Section 6.1) with KMnO4 (Eq. 5.16).31 O NO2

O

n

KOH/MeOH reflux

H

MeO

(5.16)

n

R

R n = 0–2, 6, 7, 10 R = H, Me, t-Bu

O

N

O

O KMnO4 MgSO4

H

MeO

n

R

O

Regioselective reduction of 2-nitrocycloalkanones with sodium borohydride affords ω-nitro alcohols. This reaction is applied to the synthesis of spiroketals as shown in Eq. 5.17, in which spiro[4,5]- and spiro[4,6]ketal systems are obtained in good yields.32 O

R NO2 +

O base

O

NO2

NaBH4 R

O n

MeCN/H2O

n

R = H, Me, Et; n = 1, 2

OH

O

N

O H3O R

n

OH

O

+

n

O (E)

R

O +

60–75%

R

n

O (Z)

(5.17)

132

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Oxidative cleavage of 2-nitrocyclohexanones gives α,ω-dicarboxylic acids or their esters, as shown in Eq. 5.18.33 O O

NO2 K2S2O8, H2SO4 n

MeOH, 80 ºC

R n = 0–7, 10 R = Me, Ph, t-Bu

R

MeO

OMe n

(5.18)

O 80–92%

The reaction of organometallic reagents with cyclic α-nitroketones gives tertiary β-nitroalkanols (Eq. 5.19).34 However, the reaction of the same nitro ketone with trimethylsilylmethylmagnesium gives ring cleavage products (Eq. 5.20).35 Ballini postulates that the silicon β effect assists the cleavage of the C-C bond in the sense of the arrows. R

O NO2

Mg

RMgX

R NO2

RMgX

N

THF –30 to 0 ºC

HO

X O

O

O

R = Me, Et, n-Bu, CH2=CH, (CH3)2CHCH2, PhCH2, CH2=C=CH, PhC C,

(5.19)

O

60–85%

O

CH2

O

Mg NO2

2 Me3SiCH2MgCl

Me3SiCH2

n

O

O N

O

n

n = 0, 2 O

O Me3Si O ClMgO N

Me3Si

NH4Cl Satd. soln

(5.20)

O2N n

n

75–85%

The reaction of α-nitrocycloalkanones with an aqueous solution of formaldehyde in the presence of potassium carbonate affords 2-nitro-1,3-diol-ω-alkanoic acids (Eq. 5.21).36 O O

NO2 30% CH2O aq n

R n = 0, 1, 2, 7, 10 R = Me, t-Bu

K2CO3, RT

R

HO

n

HO 48–75%

NO2 OH

(5.21)

5.4

133

ALKYLATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS VIA ALKYL RADICALS

Ring enlargement of α-nitrocycloalkanones has been extensively used for the synthesis of macrocyclic compounds, as exemplified in Eq. 5.22.37

O

O

NaH (cat.) or NaOH

OH

O

(5.22)

MeOH NO2

NO2 85%

The retro-Henry reaction of 2-nitrocycloalkanols gives ω-nitro ketones, as shown in Eq. 5.23.38 OH

NO2

CuSO4•SiO2

NO2

(5.23)

O

benzene reflux

73%

5.4 ALKYLATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS VIA ALKYL RADICALS The ability of a nitro group in the substrate to bring about electron-transfer free radical chain nucleophilic substitution (SRN1) at a saturated carbon atom is well documented.39 Such electron transfer reactions are one of the characteristic features of nitro compounds. Kornblum and Russell have established the SRN1 reaction independently; the details of the early history have been well reviewed by them.39 The reaction of p-nitrobenzyl chloride with a salt of nitroalkane is in sharp contrast to the general behavior of the alkylation of the carbanions derived from nitroalkanes; here, carbon alkylation is predominant. The carbon alkylation process proceeds via a chain reaction involving anion radicals and free radicals, as shown in Eq. 5.24 and Scheme 5.4 (SRN1 reaction).40 Me O2N

O2N

CH2Cl

Me

+ Me

O2N

NO2

CH2Cl

O2N

CH2Cl

+

CH2

CH2

Me

Me O2N

+ Me

Me

Cl–

Me O2N

+

Me NO2

O2N

NO2

Me NO2 +

O2N

CH2Cl Me

Me NO2

O2N

Scheme 5.4. SRN1 reaction.

+

O2N

CH2Cl

NO2

134

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

O2N

+

CH2Cl

Me

Me

Me

Me Li+

NO2

DMSO O2N

NO2

(5.24)

92%

SRN1 reactions using related p-nitrophenyl or p-nitrocumyl systems41 as reductive alkylating agents have been studied by Kornblum and co-workers; these are well summarized in the reviews.39 At the same time, Russell discovered the SRN1 reaction of geminal halonitroalkanes with stabilized carbanions (see Eq. 5.25).42 The products are readily converted into alkenes via elimination of nitro groups (see Section 7.3). Et

Me Cl Me

NO2

EtO2C

Me NO2

DMSO

Li+ CO2Et

+

CO2Et

Me

(5.25)

CO2Et

Et

68%

The cyano group is also a good electron acceptor for SRN1 substrates, as shown in Eq. 5.2643 and Eq. 5.27,44 but a nitro group is a better electron acceptor than a cyano group. CN Me + Me Me SO2Ph

NC

Me

Li+ NO2

Me

Me Br

+

CN

Me

CN Me

Me

Li+ NO2

HMPA

NC

Me

Me O2N Me 84% Me Me NC

DMSO

Me Me NO2

(5.26)

(5.27)

82%

Geminal dinitro compounds,45 α-nitro sulfones,46 α-nitro esters,47 or α-nitro nitriles48 react with anions derived from nitroalkanes to give the SRN1 products, as shown in Eqs. 5.28, 5.29, 5.30 and 5.31, respectively (Section 7.1). NO2

Me +

NO2

Me

NO2

Me +

SO2Ph

Me Me O2N

Li+ NO2

Me

Li+ NO2

Me CO2Et

+ Me

Li+

NO2

NO2

DMSO

NO2

(5.28)

Me

Me 91% NO2

DMSO

NO2

(5.29)

Me

Me 85%

DMSO

Me Me EtO2C 70%

Me Me NO2

(5.30)

5.4

ALKYLATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS VIA ALKYL RADICALS

Me

NO2

Li+

+

CN

Me

Me Me CN NO2 92%

DMSO

NO2

135

(5.31)

The anion of nitromethane is particularly reactive in SRN1 reactions. Various kinds of tertiary nitro groups are replaced by a nitromethyl group on treatment with the anion of nitromethane (Section 7.1).49 2-Iodoadamantane reacts with the anion of nitromethane in the presence of acetone enolate (entrainment reaction) under irradiation of a 400-W UV lamp to give 2-nitromethyladamantane in 68% yield, (see Eq. 5.32).50a 1-Iodoadamantane also reacts with the anion of nitromethane in a similar way.50b I

CH2NO2

hυ

+ Na+ CH2NO2

(5.32)

O H3C

CH2–

68%

Crozet and co-workers have used SRN1 reactions for synthesis of new heterocycles, which are expected to be biologically active (see also Section 7.3, which discusses synthesis of alkenes). For example, 2-chloromethyl-5-nitroimidazole reacts with the anion of 2-nitropropane to give 2-isopropylidene-5-nitroimidazole. It is formed via C-alkylation of the nitronate ion followed by elimination of HNO2 (Eq. 5.33).51a Other derivatives of nitroimidazoles are also good substrates for SRN1 reactions.51b,c N O2N

Me CH2Cl

N Me

+

Li+

N

DMSO O2N

NO2

Me

O2N

Me NO2

N Me

Me

N base

Me

Me

N Me 88%

(5.33)

Reactions of nitrothiazole derivatives with anions of nitroalkanes, such as shown in Eq. 5.34, proceed via a SRN1 mechanism.52 N O2N

S

Me Me NO2

Me

Li+ NO2

+ Me

N

DMF O2N

Me

Me

NO2 Me Me 71%

S

(5.34)

The anion derived from ethyl 2-nitropropionate reacts with various reductive alkylating agents (SRN1 substrates) to give new unsymmetrically disubstituted nitro esters (Eq. 5.35), which are interesting precursors for unusual amino acids.53 NO2

N O2N

N Me

CH2Cl

+

OEt

Me O

NaH, DMSO hυ

O2N

N Me NO2 OEt N Me 70%

O

(5.35)

136

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Gem-nitro imidazolyl alkanes undergo SRN1 reactions with the anion of various nitroalkanes, as shown in Eq. 5.36.54 The nitro group is replaced by hydrogen in 80–90% yield on treatment with Bu3SnH (see Chapter 7, which discusses radical denitration). N

N

Me N

NO2

+ Me

Me Me

+

Li NO2

Me Me

ηυ

N

(5.36)

NO2

Me Me 65%

SRN1 reactions are generally accelerated by irradiation with tungsten lamps (200–500 W) or fluorescent lamps. They are retarded in the presence of oxygen or other radical inhibitors. Recently, microwave irradiation has been shown to be effective in inducing SRN1 reactions; the reaction of Eq. 5.37 proceeds under microwave irradiation (900 W, 5 min) in the presence of trace amounts of water.55 Me O2N

CH2Cl +

Me

Na+

O 2N

Me Me

microwave (900 W)

NO2

H2O, 4 min

NO2 82%

(5.37)

Alkyl mercury halides participate in a photo-stimulated radical chain reaction of the anion of nitroalkanes (see Eq. 5.38) in which a 275-W sun lamp is used.56a–c Primary, secondary, and tertiary alkyl radicals generated from alkyl mercury halides react with the anion of nitroalkanes to form new C-C bonds.

Me3CHgCl

+

PhCHNO2

Me Me

hυ DMSO

Me Ph NO2 71%

(5.38)

Branchaud and coworkers have used cobaloximes as alkyl radical precursors for the cross-coupling reaction with nitronates.57 This method is very useful for producing branchedchain monosaccharides, as shown in Eq. 5.39.57b CH2I O O O

py(dmgH)2Co- Na+

O O CH2Co(dmgH)2py O O O 1) hυ, CH2NO2– Na+ O O 82%

2) AcOH

CH2CH2NO2 O O O

(5.39)

O O 76%

Martin and coworkers have used this strategy for synthesis of α- and β-(1,6)-linked C-disaccharides (Eq. 5.40).58

5.4

137

ALKYLATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS VIA ALKYL RADICALS

OBn BnO BnO

OBn

O RO CH Co(dmgH) py 2 2 + NO2 AcO AcO

BnO BnO

hυ

O RO AcO AcO

R

O

R-Co(dmgH)2py =

AcO OMe

O N N O Co H H O N N O

30%

NO2 O AcO OMe

Py

(5.40) Carbon alkylation of simple nitronate anions is also possible by the reaction with N-substituted pyridiniums, as exemplified in Eq. 5.41. Such types of reactions are classified as SRN2 reactions, in which electron transfer reactions from nitronate anions to pyridiniums are involved as key steps.59 Ph + Ph

N

+ NaCH2NO2

EtOH

PhCH2CH2NO2

Ph

(5.41)

82%

CH2Ph

The anions derived from nitroalkanes are converted into the corresponding radicals on treatment with various oxidizing agents. The C-C bond-forming reactions using nitroalkyl radicals generated by this procedure are also important in organic synthesis. For example, aromatic nitromethylation can be carried out by heating a mixture of an aromatic compounds and Mn(III)OAc3 in acetic acid (see Eq. 5.42).60

Ar-H

+

CH3NO2

Mn(III)OAc3 AcOH

ArCH2NO2

Ar = Ph (4%) Ar = Tol (55%)

(5.42)

Recently, Narasaka and co-workers have found that 1-nitroalkyl radicals are generated by oxidation of aci-nitroanions with CAN, and they undergo the intermolecular addition to electron-rich olefins.61 For example, when oxidation is carried out in the presence of silylenol ethers, β-nitroketones are formed in good yield. β-Nitroketones are readily converted into enones on treatment with base (see Section 7.3), as shown in Eq. 5.43. O

1) KOH Ph(CH2)3

NO2

2) CAN,

OSiMe3

Ph 3) Et3N, –78 ºC

Ph(CH2)3

(5.43) Ph

99%

Interesting intramolecular cyclization of 1-nitroalkyl radicals generated by one-electron oxidation of aci-nitro anions with CAN is reported. As shown in Eq. 5.44, stereoselective formation of 3,4-functionalized tetrahydrofurans is observed.62 1-Nitro-6-heptenyl radicals generated by one electron oxidation of aci-nitroanions with CAN afford 2,3,4-trisubstituted tetrahydropyrans.63 The requisite nitro compounds are prepared by the Michael addition of 3-buten-1-al to nitroalkenes.

138

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

NO2

NO2

ONO2

1) NaH, THF

(5.44)

2) CAN, –78 ºC

O

H

O 58%

Radical cyclization of α,ω-dinitroalkanes is reported, as shown in Eq. 5.45. Oxidation of the dinitronate derived from 2,6-dinitroheptane with K3Fe(CN)6 in a two-phase system (water-ether) yields the cyclized vicinal dinitrocyclopentane in 71–85% yield in a cis-to-trans ratio of 60:40.64 NO2

NO2

1) MeONa

NO2

2) K3Fe(CN)3, Et2O-H2O

NO2

(5.45)

71–85%

Couplings of nitroalkyl radicals with nucleophiles such as CN–, N−3, NO−2, and other nitrogen nucleophiles provides a useful method for the preparation of nitro compounds with such groups at the α-position.49,65 The alkylation of nitromethane with trialkylborane is possible by electrolysis, in which alkyl radicals may be involved (Eq. 5.46).66

B

+

CH3NO2

NO2

e–, Et4N+ X–

(5.46)

3

50%

Oxidative cross-coupling reactions of alkylated derivatives of activated CH compounds, such as malonic esters, acetylacetone, cyanoacetates, and certain ketones, with nitroalkanes promoted by silver nitrate or iodine lead to the formation of the nitroalkylated products.67 This is an alternative way of performing SRN1 reactions using α-halo-nitroalkanes.

5.5 ALKYLATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS USING TRANSITION METAL CATALYSIS Monoanions derived from nitroalkanes are more prone to alkylate on oxygen rather than on carbon in reactions with alkyl halides, as discussed in Section 5.1. Methods to circumvent O-alkylation of nitro compounds are presented in Sections 5.1 and 5.4, in which alkylation of the α,α-dianions of primary nitro compounds and radial reactions are described. Palladiumcatalyzed alkylation of nitro compounds offers another useful method for C-alkylation of nitro compounds. Tsuji and Trost have developed the carbon-carbon bond forming reactions using π-allyl Pd complexes. Various nucleophiles such as the anions derived from diethyl malonate or ethyl acetoacetate are employed for this transformation, as shown in Scheme 5.7. This process is now one of the most important tools for synthesis of complex compounds.68a–b Nitro compounds can participate in palladium-catalyzed alkylation, both as alkylating agents (see Section 7.1.2) and nucleophiles. This section summarizes the C-alkylation of nitro compounds using transition metals.

5.5.1 Butadiene Telomerization The palladium-catalyzed linear telomerization of 1,3-butadienes provides a useful method for the preparation of functionalized alkenes. A proposed catalytic cycle for the palladium-catalyzed

5.5

139

ALKYLATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS USING TRANSITION METAL CATALYSIS

LnPd(0) Pd

L

H

X X

Pd L

H X

Pd L

X

+L

+

CH2

LnPd(0)

H

H

Scheme 5.5. Catalytic cycle in the palladium-catalyzed telomerization of 1,3-butadiene

telomerization of 1,3-butadiene is shown in Scheme 5.5; a wide range of H-X trapping reagents (X = nucleophilic carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur) are used.69 When nitromethane is used as a trapping reagent in the telomerization of butadiene using Pd(OAc)2 and Ph3P, mono-, di- and trialkylated compounds of nitromethane are formed (Eq. 5.47).70 They are selectively formed by changing the ratio of nitromethane and butadiene. As the nitro groups are transformed into various functional groups, the reaction of Eq. 5.47 is very useful in organic synthesis. + CH3NO2

Pd(OAc)2

NO2

Ph3P

+ NO2 +

(5.47)

NO2

Butadiene telomerization using nitroethane as a trapping reagent is applied to the total synthesis of the natural product, recifeiolide, where the secondary nitro group is converted into the ketogroup by the Nef reaction, and the terminal double bond is converted into the iodide via hydro alumination (Scheme 5.6).71 Extension to carbocyclization of butadiene telomerization using nitromethane as a trapping reagent is reported (Eq. 5.48).72 Palladium-catalyzed carbo-annulation of 1,3-dienes by aryl halides is also reported (Eq. 5.49).73 The nitro group is removed by radical denitration (see Section 7.2), or the nitroalkyl group is transformed into the carbonyl group via the Nef reaction (see Section 6.1). O

O

EtO EtO

+

CH3NO2

Pd(PPh3)4, PPh3

NO2

EtO EtO O

O

(5.48)

79% NO2 NO2 + I

Pd(OAc)2, PPh3, LiCO3

(5.49)

H 73%

140

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Pd(OAc)2

+

1) TiCl3

NO2

2) (HOCH2)2, H+

Ph3P

NO2 56% O O

O

1) LiAlH4, TiCl3, I2 2) NaBH4

SPh

Cl

OH I

70% O

O 1) KN(SiMe3)2 SPh

O

O

2) Raney Ni

I 82% Scheme 5.6. Synthesis of recifeiolide

Nitronate anions react with (π-allyl)cobalt complexes prepared from acylation of 1,3-dienes by acetylcobalt tetracarbonyl to produce nitro enones (Eq. 5.50).74

O + Me

O2N

+ + NaCH2NO2

O Me

Co(CO)3

(5.50)

74%

5.5.2 Pd-Catalyzed Allylic C-Alkylation of Nitro Compounds The palladium-catalyzed allylic alkylation of soft nucleophiles (Tsuji-Trost reaction) represents one of the most useful organic transformations. Various allylating reagents and nucleophiles can participate in this reaction, as summarized in Scheme 5.7. Although allyl acetates, allyl carbonates, or 1,3-dienemonoepoxides are generally used as alkylating reagents, allylic nitro compounds also can be used as alkylating reagents (see Section 7.1). Active methylene compounds are generally used as nucleophiles in Tsuji-Trost reaction. Nitroalkanes, α-nitro ketones, α-nitro esters, and α-nitro sulfones can be also used as nucleophiles for this transformation.

R

X

Pd(0)

R

Nu– Pd

R

Nu + Pd(0) + X–

X

X = OAc , OC(O)OR, SO2Ph, NO2, OP(O)(OR)2, NR2, SR, etc. NuH = CH2(CO2R)2, CH2(CN)CO2R, CH2(SO2Ph)CO2R, CH2(NO2)CO2R, CH2(NO2)SO2Ph, CH2(SO2Ph)2, etc. Scheme 5.7. Pd(0) catalyzed allylic alkylation

5.5

ALKYLATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS USING TRANSITION METAL CATALYSIS

141

The monoanions of primary nitroalkanes, phenylnitromethane, and α-nitro esters are all preferentially C-alkylated by cinnamyl acetate and 2-butenyl acetate in 50–89% yield in the presence of Pd catalyst (Eq. 5.51).75 The α-nitro ester gives the C-alkylate in 89% yield, but 2-nitropropane gives the C-alkylate in only 29% yield. The main product is cinnamaldehyde, which is derived from O-alkylation.75a

Ph

OAc

R1

R2

Yield

A/B

CO2Et

Et

89%

97/3

Me

Me

29%

93/7

Pd(PPh3)4

+ Li+ NO2

Ph R1 2 R + 1 R NO2

Ph A

NO2

R2

(5.51)

B

Wade and coworkers have found that α-nitro sulfones are useful reagents in organic synthesis because they are converted into nitroalkanes, nitriles, or carboxylic acids (see Eq. 5.52).76 (Phenylsulfonyl)nitromethane is preferentially C-alkylated by allylic acetates in the presence of Pd(PPh3)4 (5 mol%) to give various α-nitro sulfones as shown in Eq. 5.53.76 H H O NH2 N CH2Ph

R

SO2Ph

RCH2NO2

hυ

TiCl3

NO2

(5.52)

RCN

KMnO4

RCO2H

NO2 + OAc

PhO2S

Li+

Pd(PPh3)4, PPh3 THF, reflux, 5 h

(5.53)

NO2 83%

SO2Ph

Allylic carbonates are better electrophiles than allylic acetates for the palladium-catalyzed allylic alkylation.77 Reaction of Eq. 5.54 shows the selective allylic alkylation of α-nitro ester with allylic carbonates without affecting allylic acetates.78 NO2 AcO

OCO2Et +

EtO2C

Pd(dppe) THF, RT

NO2 AcO 81%

CO2Et

(5.54)

142

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

As the nitro group is removed by radical denitration with Bu3SnH, allylic alkylation of α-nitro ketones with allyl carbonates in the presence of Pd(0) followed by denitration with Bu3SnH provides a new regio-selective allylation of ketones under neutral conditions (Eq. 5.55).79 NO2

O2N

Pd(PPh3)4 + Ph

OCO2Et

Ph

THF, RT O 70%

O H Ph

Bu3SnH, AIBN

(5.55)

O 85%

2-Nitrocycloalkanones can be successfully C-allylated by Pd(0)-catalyzed reaction with various allyl carbonates and 1,3-dienemonoepoxides under neutral conditions, as shown in Eqs. 5.56 and 5.57, respectively.80a The product of Eq. 5.56 is converted into cyclic nitrone via the reduction of nitro group with H2-Pd/C followed by hydrolysis and cyclization.80b O

O NO2 CO2Me

+

NO2 CO2Me

Pd(PPh3)4

(5.56)

OCO2Et 92% O

O NO2

O +

NO2

Pd(PPh3)4

OH

Me

(5.57)

Me

90%

Recent papers have disclosed that Pd(0) catalyzed allylic alkylations under neutral conditions are not limited to allylic carbonates or epoxides but also can be extended in many cases to the more popular allylic acetates (Eq. 5.58).81a CO2Me Ph

OAc

+ O2N

Pd(dba)3

NO2

Ph

PPh3, DMSO

CO2Me

(5.58)

80%

Wong and co-workers have prepared various quaternary α-nitro-α-methyl carboxylic acid esters by the palladium-catalyzed allylic alkylation of α-nitropropionate ester (Eq. 5.59). The products can be kinetically resolved by using α-chymotrypsin and are converted into optical active α-methyl α-amino acids. Such amino acids are important due to the unique biological activity of these nonproteinogenic α-amino acids.82

5.5

143

ALKYLATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS USING TRANSITION METAL CATALYSIS

Me OAc

+

CO2Me

Me

Pd(PPh3)4

NO2

PPh3

O2N

(5.59)

CO2Me 94%

Rajappa and co-workers have reported synthesis of dipeptides with an α,α-bisallylglycine residue at the NH2-terminal, which are biologically important.83 Their strategy is based on (1) nitroacetylation of an amino acid derivative, (2) regioselective bisallylation by Pd-catalyzed reaction, and (3) generation of the free terminal NH2 from the NO2 group as shown in Scheme 5.8. Esters of L-proline, L-valine, and L-phenylalanine are converted into the corresponding N-nitroacetyl derivatives using 1,1-bis(methylthio)-2-nitroethylene84 (see Section 4.2, Michael addition). Subsequent palladium-catalyzed allylation followed by reduction with Zn in AcOH gives the desired dipeptides.

SMe

O2N

+

CO2CH2Ph

N H

SMe

O

CO2CH2Ph

HgCl2 MeCN, H2O

N

N

CO2CH2Ph

OAc

50–60%

Ph

N NO2 75%

NO2 Ph

Ph

CO2CH2Ph O

Ph

DBU, Pd(PPh3)4

O 2N

SMe

O 2N

TsOH

Ph

OAc

DBU, Pd(PPh3)4

O

N

PhH2CO2C 95% Scheme 5.8.

Hydroxamic acids constitute an important class of siderophores, which play a major role in iron solubilization and transport. Some of them are important as therapeutic agents. The Michael addition of nitroacetyl proline esters to allyl acrylate followed by Pd(0)-catalyzed intramolecular allyl transfer and subsequent reduction of the nitro group yields a novel class of cyclic hydroxamic acids related to pyroglutamic acid (Scheme 5.9).85 O2N H O O2N

O

+ OMe

O

KF

O

OMe O

O 85%

O2N

Pd(dba)2, PPh3 DBU, MeCN 30 ºC

HO

O

O

O

OMe Zn/AcOH Ac2O

O 63%

+ AcON

O

O 55%

Scheme 5.9.

OMe

OMe HON

40%

144

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Me

H N

HO

(CO2Me)2O NHBoc

MeO O

Me

O2N

O2N

N H

O 89%

O

NH2•TFA

O2N

Nef reaction

Boc2O, Et3N

S

Me

H N

60–65% TFA

CH3NO2

O

1) TFA, CH2Cl2

NHBoc 2) PhNCS

Pd(PPh3)4

NHBoc

DMAP (cat.)

O H N

Me

H N

O

N H

Ph

NHBoc

O2N

NHBoc

HO Scheme 5.10.

1,4-cis-Disubstituted cyclopentene precursors of carbocyclic nucleosides are prepared by acyl-nitroso hetero Diels-Alder reaction and subsequent Pd(0)-catalyzed allylic alkylation. Acylnitroso dienophiles derived from amino acids are used for asymmetric hetero Diels-Alder reaction. The alcohol in Scheme 5.10, prepared by this route,86 is converted into the corresponding nitromethyl group by Pd(0)-mediated alkylation.87 Removal of the L-alanine side chain followed by the Nef reaction leads to an important intermediate for the preparation of carbovir, aristermycin, and related analogs, which show potent and selective anti-HIV activity.88a A short, enantioselective synthesis of the carbocyclic nucleoside carbovir is also reported, in which the reaction of Pd catalyzed allylation of nitro compounds is used in a key step. Miller and coworker report a total synthesis of carbocyclic polyoxin C from cis-(N-tertbutylcarbamoyl)cyclopent-2-en-1-ol, as shown in Scheme 5.11.89 This synthesis features a NO2 AcO

NHBoc

OMe

+ O2N

Pd(PPh3)4

MeO

NHBoc

NaOAc

O

O 95%

2) CbzCl

MeO

NHCbz

1) TiCl3, tartaric acid, MeO NaBH4

NHBoc

H NCO 1) TFA 2) DBU

O 87%

NHCbz

O

MeO

H N

O

NH O

OMe

NHCbz

1) NaOH

N O 80%

2) H2, Pd/C

NH3+ –

O 2C

H N

O N

O HO

Scheme 5.11.

OH

H N

O

MeO

2) NH4OH 3) BnBr

84%

1) OsO4, NMO

O

O

O

5.5

Ph

O

145

ALKYLATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS USING TRANSITION METAL CATALYSIS

O

Ph +

O

Pd2(dba)3•CHCl3

Me3SiN3

Ph

THF

O

Ph

O NH

N3

PPh3 (BOC)2O

O 77% (98% ee)

Ph

O

O

HN

PPh 2 Ph2P

SO2Ph Ph

O

NHBoc

O 88%

O2N Pd2(dba)3•CHCl3 PPh3

NO2 NHBoc

PhO2S

DBU tetrabutylammonium oxone

96%

NH2 O O

N

N

NHBoc

MeO

N

HO

N

N

H HO

N

N N

NH2

47%

HO OH aristeromycin

carbovir

NH2 O

+

H2N

N H NH2Cl– amidinomycin

N NH2

N

O N

N

EtHN HO OH C-NECA

Scheme 5.12.

Pd(0)-catalyzed substitution reaction, a novel, mild reduction of α-nitro ester to an amino acid ester with TiCl3, and an improved procedure for uracil ring formation. Trost and co-workers have explored asymmetric transition metal-catalyzed allylic alkylations. Details on this subject have been well reviewed by Trost and others.90 With the use of asymmetric palladium-catalyzed desymmetrization of meso-2-ene-1,4-diols, cis-1,4-dibenzoyloxy-2-cyclopentene can be converted to the enantiometrically pure cis-4-tert-butoxycarbamoyl-1-methoxycarbonyl-2-cyclopentene.91 The product is a useful and general building block for synthesis of carbocyclic analogs of nucleosides as presented in Scheme 5.12. Another approach to asymmetric syntheses of carbonucleosides is presented in Scheme 5.13. The reaction of cis-1,4-dibenzoyloxy-2-cyclopentene with the lithium salt of (phenylsulfonyl)nitromethane in the presence of Pd catalyst and a chiral ligand gives a chiral isoxazoline N-oxide, in which C-alkylation and O-alkylation of nitronates take place simultaneously. Deoxygenation with SnCl2⋅2H2O in MeCN gives the isoxazoline in 94% yield, which is converted into the corresponding hydroxy ester on treatment with MeOH in the presence of K2CO3 followed by reduction with Mo(CO)6. Thus, diastereo- and enantio- selective hydroxyalkoxycabonylation of cyclopentene ring provides useful building blocks for the synthesis of important antiviral carbanucleosides, as shown in Scheme 5.13.92 Enantioselective allylations of α-nitro ketones and α-nitro esters with allyl acetates are carried out in the presence of 2 equiv of alkali metal fluorides (KF, RbF, CsF) and 1 mol% palladium catalysts prepared in situ from Pd2(dba)3⋅CHCl3 and chiral phosphine ligands. Moderate enantio-selectivity (ca 50% ee) is reported for allylation of α-nitroketones (Eq. 5.60). The highest selectivity (80% ee) is observed for allylation of the reaction of tert-butyl ester (Eq. 5.61).93

146

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

SO2Ph Ph

O

O

Ph

Ph

CO2Me

1) SnCl2•2H2O N

Pd2(dba)3•CHCl3 THF

O

O

SO2Ph

O2N O

O

Ph

O

O

2) MeOH/K2CO3 3) Mo(CO)6

OH 1) 94% 2) 91% 3) 94%

94% (95% e.e.)

PPh2 Ph2P

chiral ligand NH2

O LiAlH4

OH

O O

ClCO2Me O

OH

OMe

Pd(OAc)2 adenine

N OH

N

OMe

98%

95%

N

N

96%

Scheme 5.13.

O

O NO2

OAc

+

NO2

Pd2(dba)3•CHCl3 RbF, chiral ligand CH2Cl2, –20 ºC

(5.60) 95% (58% ee)

O O2N

O

O O N X O

OAc

+

Me

O OR Me NO2

RbF, chiral ligand

n Me

(5.61)

H Ph2P Fe chiral ligand Ph2P

*

Pd2(dba)3•CHCl3

Me

92% (80% ee)

Asymmetric synthesis of tricyclic nitro ergoline synthon (up to 70% ee) is accomplished by intramolecular cyclization of nitro compound Pd(0)-catalyzed complexes with classical C2 symmetry diphosphanes.94 Palladium complexes of 4,5-dihydrooxazoles are better chiral ligands to promote asymmetric allylic alkylation than classical catalysts. For example, allylic substitution with nitromethane gives enantioselectivity exceeding 99% ee (Eq. 5.62).95 Phosphinoxazolines can induce very high enatioselectivity in other transition metal-catalyzed reactions.96 Diastereo- and enantioselective allylation of substituted nitroalkanes has also been reported.95b

Ph

OCO2Me CH3NO2 Ph

+

PdL THF

Ph

NO2 Ph 87% (99% ee)

Me N PdL+ = Me O PPh2 Me + Pd2(dba)3•CHCl3

(5.62)

5.6

OAc

ARYLATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

OH

OH

acetylcholine esterase Phosphate buffer

LiCH(NO2)SO2Ph

25–27 ºC, 23 h

OAc 77% (92% ee)

OAc

Pd(OAc)2, PPh3 THF, 60 ºC

89% O

1) O3, NaOMe, MeOH 2) H+

AcOH, DMSO

Me

O Me

SO2Ph

65%

OH

OCO2Me

ClCO2Me

1) PhSO2CH2NO2 Pd(OAc)2, PPh3

pyridine

2) KOH

OAc

SO2Ph

O2N

OH KO2CN NCO2K O2N

147

OAc 91% 1) KO2CN NCO2K

NO2

OH 95%

O Me

PhO2S

O

2) O3, NaOMe, MeOH 3) H+

Me 58%

Scheme 5.14.

An enantio-selective enzymatic hydrolysis of meso-(E)-2,5-diacetoxy-3-hexene gives (+)(E)-(2S,5R)-5-acetoxy-3-hexen-2-ol in 77% yield (92% ee).97 The monoacetate with its two allylic groups offers possibilities for stereo-controlled introduction of nucleophiles via Pd(0) catalysis. Synthesis of both enantiomers of the Carpenter bee pheromone based on this strategy is presented in Scheme 5.14.98 Tamura and coworkers have reported a novel C-C-bond formation reaction using organotellurium chlorides and lithium nitronates. A combination of the bis(organo)tellurium dichlorides [(R1COCH2)2TeCl2] and LiC(NO2)R2R3 leads to the coupling products R1COCH = CR2R3 in good yields. The reaction proceeds by a polar mechanism that is initiated by coordination of the nitronate oxygen atom to the tellurium followed by intramolecular C-C bond formation and subsequent elimination of nitro and tellurium moieties.99

5.6 ARYLATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS Arylations of nitro compounds can be achieved by aromatic nucleophilic substitution using aromatic nitro compounds, as discussed in Chapter 9.100 Kornblum and coworkers reported displacement of the nitro group of nitrobenzenes by the anion of nitroalkanes. The reactions are usually carried out in dipolar aprotic solvents such as DMSO or HMPA, and nitroaromatic rings are substituted by a variety of electron-withdrawing groups (see Eq. 5.63).101 O2N

Me

X

X = NO2, CN, SO2Ph CO2Me, C(O)Ph

+ Me

Li+

NO2

HMPA

Me O2N Me 70–90%

X

(5.63)

There are many cine substitution reactions of aromatic nitro compounds using various nucleophiles.100 In this chapter, the cine-substitution reactions using the anion of nitroalkanes

148

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

are summarized. 1-Nitronaphthalene reacts with the anion of nitromethane to give the nitromethylated product, as shown in Eq. 5.64.102 Suzuki and coworkers have extended this reaction to m-dinitrobenzene (Eq. 5.65). Although the reaction proceeds slowly, this is the first example of nitromethylation of monocyclic nitrobenzenes. The reaction of Eq. 5.64 requires additional oxidizing agents to complete the reaction, but that of Eq. 5.65 does not need the external oxidizing agents.103 NO2

NO2 + Na+ CH2NO2

1) DMSO 2) Br2 3) Et3N

NO2

(5.64)

35% NO2

NO2 +

O2N

t-BuOLi (8.0 equiv)

CH3NO2

DMI, 24 h

NO2

O2N

(DMI: 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolizinone)

(5.65)

44%

In general, heterocyclic nitro compounds undergo cine substitution reactions more readily than nitrobenzenes. For example, the reaction of 5-acyl- or 5-alkoxycarbonyl-2-nitrofurans with the anion of nitroalkanes gives cine substitution products in excellent yields (Eq. 5.66).104 Me Me EtO

+

NO2

O

Me

O

Li+ NO2

Me NO2

DMF

(5.66)

EtO

O O 90%

The reaction of 1,2-dimethyl-5-nitroimidazole with 2-nitropropane anion gives the new highly branched imidazole derivative, which is formed via cine-substitution and SRN1 substitution (Eq. 5.67).51b Me

N Me

NO2

N Me

+ Me

Me Bu4N+

toluene-H2O

NO2

reflux, 24 h

N Me

Me Me NO2 Me (5.67)

N

NO2

Me

Barton and coworkers have explored the arylation of various nucleophiles including nitroalkanes using bismuth reagents.105 Reaction of 2-nitropropane with triphenylbismuth carbonate gives 2-nitro-2-phenylpropane in 80% yield.106 Recently, this arylation has been used for the synthesis of unusual amino acids. Arylation of α-nitro esters with triphenylbismuth dichloride followed by reduction gives unique α-amino acids (Eq. 5.68).107 NO2 OMe

O Me

O

+

Ph3BiCl2

DBU toluene

O

Ph NO2 OMe Me O 77%

(5.68)

5.7

INTRODUCTION OF HETEROATOMS TO NITROALKANES

149

The reaction of 1-nitrocyclohexene with triphenylbismuth dichloride in the presence of triethylamine gives the deconjugated arylated product, as shown in Eq. 5.69.108 O2N Ph

NO2 +

Ph3BiCl2

Et3N

(5.69)

CH2Cl2 86%

Aryllead triacetates are also good reagents for arylation of stabilized carbanions, including the anion of nitroalkanes (Eq. 5.70).109 As a related reaction, α-vinylation110 or α-acetylation111 of nitro compounds is possible using vinyllead triacetates or alkynyllead triacetates. Ph NO2

PhPb(OAc)3

NO2

(5.70)

DMSO 76%

In recent years, a variety of hypervalent iodine reagents have been available. The versatility of these hypervalent organoiodine reagents in organic synthesis has been well recognized. Diaryliodonium salts constitute an important reagent class for the transfer of aryl groups. These iodonium ion salts have been used effectively in C-arylation of a variety of nucleopohiles.112 The arylation of the anion of nitroalkanes with diaryliodonium salts was already reported in 1963.113 Intramolecular cyclization using palladium-catalyzed arylation of nitro compounds has been reported recently (Eq. 5.71).114 NO2

NO2 PdCl2(PPh3)2 Cs2CO3 O

O

(5.71) O

O

Br 58%

Buchwald and co-workers have developed highly active catalysts consisting of bulky, electron-rich phosphine ligands with a biphenyl backbone combined with Pd(OAc)2 for the arylation of ketones or nitroalkanes (Eq. 5.72).115 Me

Me + Cl

Et

NO2

NaOBut, Pd(OAc)2 (3 mol%)

(5.72)

dioxane, 120 ºC, 20 h ligand:

Et Me P(tBu)2

NO2 76%

5.7 INTRODUCTION OF HETEROATOMS TO NITROALKANES The anion derived from nitroalkanes react with various electrophiles to give α-hetero-substituted nitroalkanes (Scheme 5.15).116 Halogenation of nitroalkanes is especially well known and very

150

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

R NO2 R′

R NO2

base

R NO2

E+

R′

H

R′

E+ = Br+, Cl+, I+, F+, PhS+, PhSe+

E

Scheme 5.15.

simple, except for fluorination. The widespread interest in halogenated nitro compounds mainly stems from their antimicrobial and insecticide activities.116b The reaction of α-bromo or α-iodonitroalkanes with sodium benzenesulfinate gives α-nitro sulfones in 85–95% yields (Eq. 5.73), which proceeds via SRN1 reaction (Section 5.4).117 R NO2 R′

R NO2 +

PhSO2Na

(5.73)

SO2Ph

R′

DMSO

I

85–95%

α-Nitrosulfones react with various nucleophiles to give the SRN1-alkylated products, as discussed in Section 5.4. α,α-Dinitro compounds, α-nitrosulfones, and α-nitronitriles are prepared in excellent yields when nitroalkane salts are coupled to nitrite, benzensulfinate, and cyanide ions in the presence of potassium ferricyanide (Eqs. 5.74 and 5.75) (see Section 5.4). R NO2

+

NaNO2

R NO2

K3Fe(CN)6 R′

R′

(5.74)

NO2

80–90% R NO2

+ PhSO2Na

R NO2

K3Fe(CN)6 R′

R′

(5.75)

SO2Ph 80–90%

Bowman has surveyed the reactions of α-substituted aliphatic nitro compounds with nucleophiles, which undergo either SRN1 substitution or polar reaction (Scheme 5.16).118 The reactions between a wide variety of nucleophiles and BrCH2NO2 are shown in Scheme 5.17.119a–b All the thiolates, PhSO −2 and I– attack Br to liberate the anion of nitromethane. The hard nucleophiles, MeO–, OH–, and BH−4 attack the hard H+ electrophilic center. Phosphorous nucleophiles attack the oxygen electrophilic center, and only Me2S attacks the carbon electrophilic center. Bromonitromethane is used for the preparation of nitrocyclopropane. The reaction of N-benzylmaleimide and bromonitromethane in the presence of base gives the azabicyclo[3.1.0] hexane ring system. Many bases have been tried to improve the yield; however, amidine base, particularly 1,2-dimethyl-1, 4, 5, 6-tetrahydropyrimidine (DMTHP), gives the best yield

Me Br

+ Me

NO2

+

SET

Me

polar reaction

Me

Me Br

Me

NO2

Me

RS– Me

–

+ NO2

Scheme 5.16.

PhSBr

NO2

Br

5.7

INTRODUCTION OF HETEROATOMS TO NITROALKANES

151

BuCH2NO2 57%

PhSO3H + PhSO2Et

(EtO)3PO + HCN 94%

Bu3B-CH2NO2

PhSO2SO2Ph EtOH /H2O

(EtO)3P Bu3B /THF Ph3P

Ph3POHBr

PhSO2–

BrCH2NO2

I

PhSO2Br + –CH2NO2

RS–/EtOH

Me2S

-

PhSO2

–

IBr

RSBr

PhSO2CH2NO2

+ –CH2NO2

Me2SCH2NO2 II2 + Br MeSCH2NO2 + Me3S 68%

RSSR + Br– 75–95%

+

RS = PhS, EtS, o-NO2C6H4S, EtOC(S)S, H2N=C(NH2)S Scheme 5.17.

(30–35%). This reaction is used for a total synthesis of trovafloxacin (Scheme 5.18).120 Trovafloxacin is a new and powerful antibiotic that is active against a wide variety of microorganisms.121 α-Bromonitro compounds yield α-nitro radicals on treatment with allyltin compounds to give allyl coupling products (Eq. 5.76).122 Me NO2 Me

Br

+

Me NO2

AIBN ∆

Bu3Sn

(5.76)

Me 67%

O O2N

N

H

O

O

Ph

N

H Ph

DMTHP

K2CO3 MeCN

O

N

N

N

+

H3N

F H

+ Br

CO2–

F

O exo product

O NO2

H

F N

O2N

Ph

O endo product

Scheme 5.18.

trovafloxacin

152

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Ring cleavage often represents a particularly effective route to α,ω-difunctionalized frameworks. As discussed in Section 5.4, 2-nitrocyclocycloalkanones are able to produce a consistent array of functionalized molecules through an easy nucleophilic retro-Claisen condensation. Treatment of 2-nitrocycloalkanones with basic solution of sodium hypochlorite leads to the formation of ω,ω-dichloro-ω-nitroalkanoic acids. The ring cleavagebromination with NBS and MeONa in MeOH leads to the formation of the corresponding bromides. The reaction of these halides with allylstannane in the presence of AIBN gives the denitro-allylated or debromo-allylated products, depending on the halides, as shown in Eq. 5.77.123 Indium-mediated reductive cyclization of 2-nitroacylbenzenes into 2,1-benzisoxazoles in O

O 1) NaClO NaOH-MeOH

OMe NO2

2) amberlyst 15 MeOH

O NO2

OMe

Bu3Sn AIBN, ∆

Cl Cl 85%

O

O 1) NBS NaOH-MeOH 2) amberlyst 15 MeOH

OMe

(5.77)

OMe

Bu3Sn NO2

Cl Cl 68%

AIBN, ∆

2

NO2 70%

Br Br 72%

aqueous media is catalyzed by the presence of 2-bromo-2-nitropropane (Eq. 5.78).124 The mechanism is not clear yet; the electron transfer to 2-bromo-2-nitropropane may induce the reduction. The potassium salts of nitro compounds are fluorinated on treatment with FClO3, but it is CHO +

NO2 Br

NO2

O

In MeOH-H2O

(5.78)

N 90%

still troublesome to handle the fluorinating agents. Safer methods are highly desired (Eq. 5.79).125,126 α-Nitrosulfides have been often used in organic synthesis, especially (phenylthio)niO O

FClO3 NO2

NaH, THF

O NO2 F 60%

+

NO2

(5.79)

F F 20%

tromethane, which is a convenient reagent for synthesis of furan, for preparation of α-substituted thiol esters via the Michael addition followed by the Nef reaction and for the preparation of β-lactam.127 This useful reagent is prepared by sulfenylation of nitromethane with phenysulfenyl chloride (Eq. 5.80).128 Alternatively, this reagent may be prepared from the nitration of the dianion derived from (phenylthio)acetic acid.129

5.7

PhSCl

INTRODUCTION OF HETEROATOMS TO NITROALKANES

EtOH

+ NaCH2NO2

153 (5.80)

PhSCH2NO2 60–65%

In a similar way, α-nitroselenides are prepared via the reaction of nitronates with phenylselenyl bromide, which gives a new synthetic method of 1-nitroalkenes from nitroalkanes.130 The sequence of α-selenation, nitro-aldol reaction, and oxidation provides a useful method for the preparation of nitroalkenes with a hydroxymethyl group (Eq. 5.81).131 NO2

1) NaOEt, THF

NO2

2) PhSeBr

SePh 67%

CH2OH

1) HCHO, Ca(OH)2

NO2

2) H2O2 70%

(5.81) This strategy is applied to a general method for the preparation of 2,2-disubstituted 1-nitroalkenes. Conjugate 1,4-addition of complex zinc cuprates to 1-nitroalkenes, followed by trapping with phenylselenyl bromide and subsequent oxidative elimination, affords the corresponding 2,2-disubstituted 1-nitroalkenes in good yields (Eq. 5.82).132 NO2 + EtCu(CN)ZnI PhSeBr 0 ºC

THF 0 ºC H2O2

Et NO2

THF-H2O

(5.82)

77%

The review by Barrett (Ref. 127) documents synthetic application of hetero-substituted nitroalkenes (see also Chapter 4). 1-Chloro-1-nitroalkenes are readily obtained either by the Henry reaction of chloronitromethane with aldehydes or chlorination of 1-nitroalkenes. Dauzonne and coworkers have used 1-chloro-1-nitroalkenes for construction of dihydrobenzofuran or dihydrobenzopyran frameworks. (Eq. 5.83).133 OH NO2 Ph

CHO +

Cl

NO2 Cl

Et3N

OH

O 77%

(5.83)

Ph

α-Nitro ethers are difficult to prepare due to their instability. However, Vassella and co-workers have succeeded in preparation of deoxy-nitrosugars. Ozonolysis of N-glycosylnitrones obtained from the corresponding oximes affords 1-deoxy-1-nitroaldose (Eq. 5.84).134 They have developed new reactions and intermediates using 1-deoxy-1-nitroaldose, as summarized in Scheme 5.19.135 α-Nitroethers are good precursors of alkyl radicals or carbenium ions stabilized by the oxygen atom. Details of the reactions in Scheme 5.19 are discussed in Chapter 7. BnO

BnO BnO BnO

OH OBn

1) ArCHO N

OH

2) O3

BnO BnO

O OBn 73%

NO2

(5.84)

154

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

OR O

E NO2

RO OR O RO

E NO2 R

SRN1

R OR OR O

E SN1

RO

OR OR

R OR O

E radical reaction

RO

R OR

Scheme 5.19.

REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8a. 8b. 8c. 8d. 9. 10a. 10b. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20a. 20b. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28.

Hass, H. B., and M. L. Bender. Org. Synth., ", 932 (1963). Zen, S., and E. Kaji. Org. Synth., $, 503 (1988). Zen, S., M. Koyama, and S. Koto. Org. Synth.,$, 797 (1988). Sylvan, C., A. Wagner, and C. Mioskowski. Tetrahedron Lett, ", 875 (1999). Niyazymbetov, M. E., and D. H. Evans. J. Org. Chem., #&, 779 (1993). Wade, P. A., H. R. Hinney, N. V. Amin, P. D. Vail, S. D. Morrow, S. A. Hardinger, and M. S. Saft . J. Org. Chem.,"$, 765 (1981). Kornblum, N., S. D. Boyd, and N. Ono. J. Am. Chem. Soc., '$, 2580 (1974). Ono, N., R. Tamura, R. Tanikaga, and A. Kaji. J, Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 71 (1981). Chen, J., and D. D. Tanner. J. Org. Chem., #!, 3897 (1988). Suzuki, H., K. Takaoka, and A. Osuka. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., #&, 1067 (1985). Park, K. K., C. W. Lee, and S. Y. Choi. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 601 (1992). Seebach, D., R. Henning, F. Lehr, and D. A. Widdowson. Tetrahedron Lett., 1161 (1977). Seebach, D., and F. Lehr. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., #, 505 (1976). Henning, R., F. Lehr, and D. Seebach. Helv. Chim. Acta.,#', 2213 (1976). Williams, T. M., and H. S. Mosher. Tetrahedron Lett., $, 6269 (1985). Seebach, D., R. Henning, and T. Mukhopadhyay. Chem. Ber., #, 1705 (1982). Ballini, R., E. Marcantoni, and M. Petrini. Liebigs Ann., 1381 (1995). Finbeiner, H. L., and G. W. Wagner. J. Org. Chem., $, 215 (1962). Prostenik, M. V., and I. Butula. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., , 139 (1982). Shipchandler, M. T. Synthesis, 666 (1979). Rene, L., and R. Royer. Synthesis, 878 (1981). Wehner, V., and V. Jager. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., ', 1169 (1990). Jager, V., and P. Poggendorf. Org. Synth, %", 130 (1996). Crumbie, R. L., J. S. Nimitz, and H. S. Mosher. J. Org. Chem., "%, 4040 (1982). Baker, D. C., and S. R. Putt. Synthesis, 478 (1978). Faulques, M., L. Rene, and R. Royer. Synthesis, 260 (1982). Ono, N., M. Fujii, and A. Kaji. Synthesis, 532 (1987). Fied, G. F., and W. J. Zally. Synthesis, 295 (1979). Hamada, Y., K. Ando, and T. Shioiri. Chem. Pharm. Bull., ', 259 (1981). Jager, V., B. Seidel, and E. Guntrum. Synthesis, 629 (1991). Nudelman, A., and A. Nudelman. Synthesis, 568 (1999). Nudelman, A., A. Nudelman, D. M. Mizrahi, and D. Flint. Bioorg. Chem., #, 157 (1998). Ballini, R. Synlett, 1009 (2000).

REFERENCES

29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37a. 37b. 37c. 37d. 38. 39a. 39b. 39c. 39d. 40. 41a. 41b. 42a. 42b. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50a. 50b. 51a. 51b. 51c. 52a. 52b. 52c. 53. 54. 55. 56a. 56b. 56c. 57a. 57b. 58. 59a. 59b. 59c.

155

Fisher, R. H., and H. M. Weitz. Synthesis, 26 (1981). Ballini, R., M. Petrini, and V. Polzonetti. Synthesis, 355 (1992). Ballini, R., G. Bosica, and F. Gigli. Tetrahedron, #", 7573 (1998). Ballini, R., M. Petrini, and G. Rosini. Tetrahedron, "$, 16131 (1990). Ballini, R., M. Curini, F. Epifano, M. C. Marcotullio, and O. Rosanti. Synlett, 1049 (1998). Ballini, R., G. Bartoli, P. V. Gariboldi, E. Marcantoni, and M. Petrini. J. Org. Chem., #&, 3368 (1993). Ballini, R., G. Bartoli, R. Giovannini, E. Marcantoni, and M. Petrini. Tetrahedron Lett., !", 3301 (1993). Ballini, R., L. Barboni, and L. Pintucci. Synlett, 1839 (1997). Stach, H., and M. Hesse. Tetrahedron, "", 1573 (1988). Cookson, R. C., and P. S. Ray. Tetrahedron Lett., !, 3521(1982). Stanchev, S., B. Milenkov and H. Hesse. Tetrahedron Lett., !!, 6107 (1992). Benkert, E., and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta, %, 2166 (1987) and references therein. Bezbarua, M., A. K. Saika, N. C. Barua, D. Kalita, and A. C. Ghosh. Synthesis, 1289 (1996). Kornblum, N. In The Chemistry of Amino, Nitroso and Nitro Compounds and their Derivatives, ed. by S. Patai, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1982, Part 1, p. 361–394. Kornblum, N. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., ", 734 (1975). Russell, G. A. Adv. Phys. Org. Chem., !, 271 (1987). Bowman, W. R. Chem. Soc. Rev., !, 218 (1988). Kornblum, N., R. E. Michel, and R. C. Kerber. J. Am. Chem. Soc., &&, 5660, 5662 (1966). Kornblum, N., T. M. Davis, G. W. Earl, G. S. Greene, N. L. Holy, R. C. Kerber, J. W. Manthey, M. T. Musser, and D. H. Snow. J. Am. Chem. Soc., &', 5714 (1967). Kornblum, N., P. Ackermann, and R. T. Swiger. J. Org. Chem., "#, 5294 (1984). Russell, G. A., and W. Dane. J. Am. Chem. Soc.,&&, 5663 (1966). Russell, G. A., and B. Mudry. J. Org. Chem., "%, 1879 (1982). Kornblum, N., and M. J. Fifolt. J. Org. Chem., "#, 361 (1980). Ros, F., and J. D. L. Rosa. J. Org. Chem., #!, 2868 (1988). Kornblum, N., W. J. Kelley, and M. M. Kestner. J. Org. Chem., #, 4720 (1985). Kornblum, N., S. D. Boyd, and N. Ono. J. Am. Chem. Soc., '$, 2580 (1974). Kornblum, N., S. D. Boyd, and F. W. Stuchal. J. Am. Chem. Soc., ' , 5783 (1970). Kornblum, N., H. K. Singh, and S. D. Boyd. J. Org. Chem., "', 358 (1984). Kornblum, N., and A. S. Erickson. J. Org. Chem.,"$, 1039 (1981). Lukach, A. E., and R. A. Rossi. J. Org. Chem., $", 5826 (1999). Borosky, G. L., A. B. Pierini, and R. A. Rossi. J. Org. Chem., ##, 3705 (1990). Crozet, M. P., and J. M. Suzur. Tetrahedron Lett., $, 1023 (1985). Crozet, M. P., S. Lapouge, M. Kaafarani, and P. Vanelle. Tetrahedron Lett., !#, 3055 (1994). Vanelle, P., K. Benakli, L. Giraud, and M. P. Crozet. Synlett, 801 (1999). Gellis, A., P. Vanelle, J. Maldonado, and M. P. Crozet. Tetrahedron Lett., !&, 2085 (1997). Gellis, A., P. Vanelle, M. Kaafarani, K. Benakli, and M. P. Crozet. Tetrahedron, #!, 5471 (1997). Vanelle, P., S. Donini, J. Maldonado, J. F. Sabuco, and M. P. Crozet. Tetrahedron Lett., !#, 3305 (1994). Beraud, V., P. Perfetti, C. Pfister, M. Kaffarani, P. Vanelle, and M. P. Crozet. Tetrahedron, #", 4923 (1998). Beugelmans, R., T. Frinault, and A. Lechevarllier. Tetrahedron Lett., ', 2567 (1988). Vanelle, P., A. Gellis, M. Kaafarani, J. Maldonado, and M. P. Crozet. Tetrahedron Lett., ", 4343 (1999). Russell, G. A., J. Bershberger, and K. Owens. J. Am. Chem. Soc., , 1312 (1979). Russell, G. A., and D. Guo. Tetrahedron Lett., #, 5239 (1982). Russell, G. A., and R. K. Khanna. Tetrahedron, ", 4133 (1985). Branchaud, B. P., M. S. Meier, and Y. Choi. Tetrahedron Lett., ', 6545 (1988). Branchaud, B. P. Tetrahedron Lett., ! , 3639 (1991). Martin, O. R., F. Xie, R. Kakarla, and R. Benhamza. Synlett, 165 (1993). Katritzky, A. R., G. de Ville, and R. C. Patel. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 602 (1979). Katritzky, A. R., G. de Ville, and R. C. Patel. Tetrahedron, !%, 25 (1981). Katritzky, A. R., M. A. Kashmiri, G. D. Ville, and R. C. Patel. J. Am. Chem. Soc.,#, 90 (1983).

156 59d. 60a. 60b. 61a. 61b. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68a. 68b. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75a. 75b. 76. 77. 78. 79. 80a. 80b. 81a. 81b. 82. 83. 84. 85a. 85b. 86a. 86b. 87. 88a. 88b. 89. 90. 91. 92a. 92b. 92c. 93. 94. 95a. 95b. 96. 97. 98. 99.

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Katritzky, A. R., M. A. Kashmiri, and D. K. Wittmann. Tetrahedron, ", 1501 (1984). Kurz, M. E., and T. Y. R. Chen. J. Org. Chem., "!, 239 (1978). Kurz, M. E., P. Ngoviwatchai, and T. Tantrarant. J. Org. Chem., "$, 4668 (1981). Arai, N., and K. Narasaka. Chem. Lett., 987 (1995). Arai, N., and K. Narasaka. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., %, 2525 (1997). Durand, A. C., E. Dumez, J. Rodriguez, and J. P. Dulcere. Chem. Commun., 2437 (1999). Durand, A. C., J. Rodrigez, and J. P. Dulcere. Synlett, 731 (2000). Bowman, W. R., and S. W. Jackson. Tetrahedron, "$, 7313 (1990). Adebayo, A. T. O. M., W. R. Bowman, and W. G. Salt. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1 1415 (1989). Takahashi, Y., M. Tokuda, M. Itoh, and A. Suzuki. Synthesis, 616 (1976). Wrobel, Z. Pol. J. Chem., $&, 2613 (1994). Heck, R. F. Palladium Reagents in Organic Synthesis, Academic Press, 1985. Tsuji, J. Palladium Reagents and Catalysts, Innovations in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley & Sons, 1995. Jolly, P. W. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., ", 283 (1985). Mitsuyasu, T., and J. Tsuji. Tetrahedron, !, 831 (1974). Takahashi, T., S. Hasiguchi, K. Kasuga, and J. Tsuji. J. Am. Chem. Soc., , 742 (1978). Takacs, J. M., and J. Zhu. J. Org. Chem., #", 5193 (1989). Larock, R. C., and C. A. Fried. J. Am. Chem. Soc.,  , 5882 (1990). Hegedus, L. S., and R. J. Perry. J. Org. Chem., "', 2570 (1984). Wade, P. A., S. Morrow, and S. Hardinger. J. Org. Chem., "%, 365 (1982). Aleksandrowicz, P., H. Piotrowska, and W. Sas. Tetrahedron,!&, 1321 (1982). Wade, P. A., H. R. Hinne, N. V. Amin, P. D. Vail, S. D. Morrow, S. A. Hardinger, and M. S. Saft. J. Org. Chem., "$, 765 (1981). Tsuji, J., I. Shimizu, I. Minami, Y. Ohashi, T. Sugiura, and K. Takahashi. J. Org. Chem., #, 1523 (1985). Genet, J. P., and D. Ferroud. Tetrahedron Lett., #, 3579 (1984). Ono, N., I. Hamamoto, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., #, 2832 (1986). Ognyanov, V. I., and M. Hesse. Synthesis, 645 (1985). Huggenberg, W., and M. Hesse. Tetrahedron Lett., !, 5119 (1989). Giambastiani, G., and G. Poli. J. Org. Chem., $!, 9608 (1998). Yamamoto, Y., M. Al-Masum, and N. Asao. J. Am. Chem. Soc., $, 6019 (1994). Lalonde, J. J., D. E. Bergbreiter, and C. H. Wong. J. Org. Chem., #!, 2323 (1988). Manjunatha, S. G., P. Chittari, and S. Rajappa. Helv. Chim. Acta., %", 1071 (1991). Manjunatha, S. G., K. V. Reddy, and S. Rajappa. Tetrahedron Lett., !, 1327 (1990). Chittari, P., A. Thomas, and S. Rajappa. Tetrahedron Lett., !#, 3793 (1994). Thomas, A., and D. Rajappa. Tetrahedron, #, 10571 (1995). Ritter, A. R., and M. J. Miller. J. Org. Chem., #', 4602 (1994). Ghosh, A., and M. J. Miller. Tetrahedron Lett., !$, 6399 (1995). Zhang, D., A. Ghosh, C. Suling, and M. J. Miller. Tetrahedron Lett., !%, 3799 (1996). Park, K. H., and H. Rapopport. J. Org. Chem., #', 394 (1994). Peel, M. P., D. D. Sternbach, and M. R. Johnson. J. Org. Chem.,#$, 4990 (1991). Zhang, D., and M. J. Miller. J. Org. Chem., $!, 755 (1998). Trost, B. M., and D. L. V. Vranken. Chem. Rev., '$, 395 (1996). Trost, B. M., D. Stenkamp, and S. R. Pulley. Chem. Eur. J. , 568 (1995). Trost, B. M., G. H. Kuo, and T. Benneche. J. Am. Chem. Soc., , 621 (1988). Trost, B. M., L. Li, and S. D. Guile. J. Am. Chem. Soc., ", 8745 (1992). Trost, B. M., R. Madsen, S. D. Guile, and B. Brown. J. Am. Chem. Soc.,  , 5947 (2000). Sawamura, M., Y. Nakayama, W. M. Tang, and Y. Ito. J. Org. Chem., $, 9090 (1996). Genet, J. P., and S. Grisoni. Tetrahedron Lett., ', 4543 (1988). Rieck, H., and G. Helmchen, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., !", 2687 (1995). Trost, B. M., and J. P. Surivet. J. Am. Chem. Soc.,  , 6291 (2000). Pfaltz, A. Synlett., 835 (1999). Deardorf, D. R., C. Q. Windham, and C. L. Craney. Org. Synth.,', 487 (1998). Schink, H. E., and J. E. Backvall. J. Org. Chem., #%, 1588 (1992). Tamura, R., H. Shimizu, N. Ono, N. Azuma, and H. Suzuki. Organometallics, , 954 (1992).

REFERENCES

157

100. Terrier, F. Nucleophilic Aromatic Displacement. The Influence of the Nitro Group, VCH, New York, 1991. 101a. Kornblum, N., L. Cheng, R. C. Kerber, M. M. Kestner, B. N. Newton, H. W. Pinick, R. G. Smith, and P. A. Wade. J. Org. Chem., ", 1560 (1976). 101b. Norris, R. K., and D. Randles. Aust. J. Chem., ! , 2413 (1979). 102. Danikiewicz, W., and M. Makosza. Tetrahedron Lett., $, 3599 (1985). 103. Kawakami, T., and H. Suzuki. Tetrahedron Lett., ", 1157 (1999). 104a. Barnes, B. J., P. J. Newcombe, R. K. Norris, and K. Wilson. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1408 (1985). 104b. Ono, N., T. X. Jun, and, A. Kaji. Synthesis, 821 (1987). 104c. Crozet, M. P., P. Vanella, O. Jentzer, and M. P. Bertrand. Heterocycles, &, 849 (1989). 105a. Barton, D. H. R., and J. P. Finet. Pure. Appl. Chem., #', 937 (1987). 105b. Finet, J. P. Chem. Rev., &', 1487 (1989). 105c. Suzuki, H., and Y. Matano. The Chemistry of Arsenic Antimony and Bismuth; ed. by N. C. Norman, Blackie, London, 1996. 106. Barton, D. H. R., J. C. Blazejewski, B. Charpiot, D. J. Lester, W. B. Motherwell, and M. T. B. Papoula. J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun., 827 (1980). 107. Fornicola, R. S., E. Oblinger, and J. Montgomery. J. Org. Chem. $!, 6328 (1998). 108. Arnauld, T., D. H. R. Barton, J. F. Normant, and E. Doris. J. Org. Chem., $", 6915 (1999). 109a. Kozyrod, R. P., and J. T. Pinhey. Org. Synth., %, 229 (1990). 109b. Kozyrod, R. P., and J. T. Pinhey. Aust. J. Chem., !&, 713 (1985). 109c. Kozyrod, R. P., and J. T. Pinhey. Tetrahedron Lett., , 763 (1981). 110. Moloney, M. G., and J. T. Pinhey. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 965 (1984). 111. Moloney, M. G., J. T. Pinhey, and E. G. Roche. Tetrahedron Lett., %, 5025 (1986). 112. Moriarty, R. M., and R. K. Vaid. Synthesis, 431 (1990). 113. Kornblum, N., and H. J. Taylor. J. Org. Chem., &, 1424 (1963). 114. Muratake, H., and H. Nakai. Tetrahedron Lett., ", 2355 (1999). 115. Fox, J. M., X. Huang, A. Chieffi, and S. L. Buchwald. J. Am. Chem. Soc.,  , 1360 (2000). 116a. Nielsen, A. T. The Chemistry of Nitro and Nitroso Groups, Part I, ed. by H. Feuer, In the Chemistry of Functional Groups ed. by S. Patai, p. 349–486 (1969). 116b. Metcalf, R. L. Organic Insecticides; Their Chemistry and Mode of Action; Interscience, New York, p 134 (1955). 117. Kornblum, N., M. M. Kestner, S. D. Boyd, and L. C. Cattran. J. Am. Chem. Soc.,'#, 3345 (1973). 118. Bowman, W. R. Chem. Soc. Rev., %, 283 (1988). 119a. Fishwick, B. R., D. K. Bowles, and C. J. M. Stirling. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 834 and 835 (1983). 119b. Fishwick, B. R., D. K. Bowles and C. J. M. Stirling. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 1171 (1986). 120. Norris, T., T. F. Braish, M. Butters, K. M. DeVries, J. M. Hawkins, S. S. Massert, P. R. Rose, D. Santafianos, and C. Sklavounos. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 1615 (2000). 121. Brightly, K. E., and T. D. Gootz. Med. Res. Rev., $, 433 (1996). 122. Ono, N., K. Zinsmeister, and A. Kaji. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., #&, 1069 (1985). 123. Ballini, R., M. Petrini, and O. Polimanti. J. Org. Chem., $, 5652 (1996). 124. Kim, B. H., Y. Jin, Y. M. Jun, R. Han, W. Baik, and B. M. Lee. Tetrahedron Lett., ", 2137 (2000). 125. Takeuchi, Y., H. Ogura, A. Kanada, and T. Koizumi. J. Org. Chem., #%, 2196 (1992). 126. Adolph, H. G., and W. M. Koppers. Aliphatic Fluoronitro Compounds, in Nitro compounds, ed. by H. Feuer and A. T. Nielsen, VCH, New York, 1990. 127. Barrett, A. G. M. Chem. Soc. Rev., , 95 (1991). 128. Barrett, A. G. M., D. Dhanak, G. G. Graboski, and S. J. Taylor. Org. Synth., &, 550 (1993). 129. Miyashita, M., T. Kumazawa, and A. Yoshikoshi. J. Org. Chem., "#, 2945 (1980). 130. Sakakibara, T., I. Takai, E. Ohara, and R. Sudoh. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 261 (1981). 131. Sakakibara, T., S. Ikuta, and R. Sudoh. Synthesis, 261 (1982). 132. Denmark, S. E., and L. R. Marcin. J. Org. Chem., #&, 3850 (1993). 133a. Dauzonne, D., and R. Royer. Synthesis, 1020 (1987). 133b. Dauzonne, D., and R. Royer. Synthesis, 339 (1988).

158 133c. 133d. 133e. 134. 135.

ALKYLATION, ACYLATION, AND HALOGENATION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Dauzonne, D., and P. Demerseman. Synthesis, 66 (1990). Dauzonne, D., H. Josien, and P. Demerseman. Tetrahedron, "$, 7359 (1990). Dauzonne, D., and C. Grandjean. Synthesis, 677 (1992). Aebischer,. B., and A. Vasella. Helv. Chim. Acta, $$, 789 (1983). Vasella, A., Pure & Appl. Chem., $!, 507 (1991).

The Nitro Group in Organic Synthesis. Noboru Ono Copyright © 2001 Wiley-VCH ISBNs: 0-471-31611-3 (Hardback); 0-471-22448-0 (Electronic)

6 CONVERSION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO OTHER COMPOUNDS Nitro compounds are versatile precursors for diverse functionalities. Their conversion into carbonyl compounds by the Nef reaction and into amines by reduction are the most widely used processes in organic synthesis using nitro compounds. In addition, dehydration of primary nitro compounds leads to nitrile oxides, a class of reactive 1,3-dipolar reagents. Nitro compounds are also good precursors for various nitrogen derivatives such as nitriles, oximes, hydroxylamines, and imines. These transformations of nitro compounds are well established and are used routinely in organic synthesis.

6.1 NEF REACTION (ALDEHYDES, KETONES, AND CARBOXYLIC ACIDS) The conversion of primary or secondary nitro compounds into aldehydes or ketones is normally accomplished by use of the Nef reaction, which is one of the most important transformations of nitro compounds. Various methods have been introduced for this transformation: (1) treatment of nitronates with acid, (2) oxidation of nitronates, and (3) reduction of nitroalkenes. Although a comprehensive review is available,3 important procedures and improved methods published after this review are presented in this chapter. The Nef reaction after the nitro-aldol (Henry reaction), Michael addition, or Diels-Alder reaction using nitroalkanes or nitroalkenes has been used extensively in organic synthesis of various substrates, including complicated natural products. Some of them are presented in this chapter; other examples are presented in the chapters discussing the Henry reaction (Chapter 3), Michael addition (Chapter 4), and DielsAlder reaction (Chapter 8). 6.1.1 Treatment With Acid (Classical Procedure) The Nef reaction was originally carried out under acidic conditions using strong acid such as aqueous HCl.1–3 However, the use of base followed by acid is incompatible with polyfunctional substrates; in addition, some compounds are prone to undergo side reactions or fail to react, as discussed in the references.1–3 Thus, various modified methods have been developed, and they 159

160

CONVERSION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO OTHER COMPOUNDS

are well summarized in the review by Pinnick.3 Duplication of this review is minimized here; the recent progress of the Nef reaction is described. Silica gel can be used as an acid for the Nef reaction. The basic silica gel impregnated with sodium methoxide has been used very conveniently for the Nef reaction (Eq. 6.1).4 O

NO2 SiO2

(6.1)

CH3ONa 99%

In general, the acid-catalyzed Nef reaction is carried out in water or water-containing solvents. If the reaction is carried out in methanol, nitro compounds are converted into the corresponding dimethylacetals. This process has merits over the conventional one due to the wider applicability of the Nef reaction (Eq. 6.2).5

CH2CH2NO2

N3 N O

1) CH3ONa

N

2) H2SO4, CH3OH

Ar

CH2CH(OCH3)2

N3

O

Ar

(6.2)

95%

The Nef reaction is accelerated by the presence of silicon atom at γ-position of nitro functions, as shown in Eq. 6.3. The presence of the γ-silicon is essential for such smooth reaction.6 The conversion of 5-nitrobicyclo[2.2.1]heptenes to the corresponding ketones via the Nef reaction is very complicated by the degradation of the product. Thus, β-trimethylsilyl ketones can be prepared by a one-flask method via the addition of Grignard reagents containing trimethylsilyl groups to nitroalkenes and the subsequent hydrolysis, as shown in Eq. 6.4. Me3Si

Me3Si 1) KH

(6.3)

2) HCl O

NO2 NO2

64% O 1) Me3SiCH2MgCl 2) 10% H2SO4

CH2SiMe3

(6.4)

71%

6.1.2 Oxidative Method Various oxidizing agents such as KMnO4,7 m-chloroperbenzoic acid,8 MoO5-pyridine-HMPA complex,9 ceric ammonium nitrate,10 hydrogen peroxide,11 ozone,12 singlet oxygen,13 tBuOOH/VO(acac)2,14 OxoneTM,15 sodium chlorite,16 dimethyldioxirane,17 tetrapropylammonium perruthenate,18 and m-iodoxbenzoic acid19 are typical oxidizing agents for the Nef-type reaction. The use of KMnO4 provides a simple and effective method for converting various nitro compounds to aldehydes and ketones in 80–96% yield,7 and even quaternary aldehydes are prepared despite their instability by this method, as shown in Eq. 6.6.7b

6.1

161

NEF REACTION (ALDEHYDES, KETONES, AND CARBOXYLIC ACIDS)

O

O

O

O 1) LiOCH3

(6.5)

2) KMnO4 O

NO2

95%

O Me Me

O Me Me

1) t-BuOK

ButO

NO2

CHO

t

Bu O

2) KMnO4, 0 ºC, 10 min

Me Me

(6.6)

Me Me 95%

When the substrate does not contain a reactive carbon–carbon double bond, the ozonolysis procedure appears to provide a convenient and efficient method for the conversion of primary and secondary nitro compounds into carbonyl compounds (Eq. 6.7).12 O

O 1) CH3ONa 2) O3

NO2

(6.7)

O 73%

Anodic oxidation of nitronate anions provides an attractive method for the Nef reaction (Eq. 6.8).20 O

O (CH2)6CH3

(CH2)6CH3

electrolysis CH3OH, HCO2Na

O 90%

NO2

(6.8)

Dimethyldioxirane oxidation of nitronates anions affords the corresponding carbonyl products. Highest yields are obtained when one equivalent of water is added before the oxidation (Eq. 6.9).17 O

3) O O

NO2

O

1) t-BuOK 2) H2O, 2 min

(6.9) O 80%

Sodium chlorite under phase-transfer catalysis conditions (CH2Cl2-NaOH-Bu4NHSO4) is also a good choice for the Nef reaction of primary and secondary nitro compounds (Eq. 6.10).16 O

O NaClO2, CH2Cl2 NaOH, Bu4N+HSO4– NO2

(6.10) CHO 67%

162

CONVERSION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO OTHER COMPOUNDS

A very mild oxidative transformation of nitro compounds into ketones using tetrapropylammonium perruthenate (TPAP) has been developed. A stoichiometric amount of TPAP in the presence of N-methylmorpholine N-oxide (NMO) and 4 A molecular sieves (MS).18a As the reaction conditions are neutral and mild, this method is compatible with the presence of other sensitive functionalities (Eq. 6.11). This transformation can be carried out with 10 mol% of TPAP and 1.5 equiv of NMO in the presence of potassium carbonate, 4 A MS, and silver acetate (Eq. 6.12).18b O HO

TPAP, NMO 4 Å MS

(6.11)

O

NO2

83% O

NO2

OCH2Ph

TPAP (10 mol%) NMO, AgOAc

OCH2Ph

(6.12)

62%

Secondary nitro compounds are converted into ketones under very mild conditions using n-propyl nitrite and sodium nitrite in DMSO.21 The Nef reaction of primary nitro compounds gives aldehydes or carboxylic acids, depending on the reaction conditions. Each transformation provides an important tool in organic synthesis. Primary nitro compounds are converted into carboxylic acids with concentrated mineral acids.22 Because such harsh conditions also lead to side reactions, a milder method is required in organic synthesis. Basic phosphate-buffered KMnO4 rapidly converts primary nitroalkanes into carboxylic acids in 90–99% yield (Eq. 6.13).23 KMnO4, KOH

HO(CH2)11CH2NO2

(6.13)

HO(CH2)11CO2H

K2HPO4, t-BuOH

Scheme 6.1 shows a simple preparation of (+)-isomintlactone, isolated from a sample of peppermint oil. The addition of pyrrolidino enamine of (R)-3-methylcyclohexanone to ni-

O

NR2 pyrrolidine

O NO2 NO2

85%

85% H

OH

O

1) KMnO4

Baker's yeast NO2

O

2) p-TsOH H 68%

72% H

H O

LDA, MeI

O H 91%

O

1) Ph2Se2

O

2) H2O2 55% Scheme 6.1.

6.1

NEF REACTION (ALDEHYDES, KETONES, AND CARBOXYLIC ACIDS)

163

troethylene followed by reduction with baker’s yeast and the Nef reaction gives the condensed lactone. Methylation followed by olefination using α-phenylselenation and oxidation yields the desired lactone (Scheme 6.1).24 Strong oxidizing agents such as KMnO4 are not always useful for synthesis of highly sensitive compounds. In 1956, Kornblum found that a mixture of nitrite ester and sodium nitrite oxidizes primary nitro paraffins to the corresponding carboxylic acids.25 However, the reaction was prone to poor yields and long reaction time. Forty years later, a very efficient related reaction using a mixture of sodium nitrite and acetic acid in DMSO has been reported (Eqs. 6.14 and 6.15).26 Because carbon–carbon double and triple bonds and other various functional groups are compatible with this reaction condition, this method is useful for natural product synthesis. For example, one-synthesis of alkaloid, (–)-horsfiline is shown in Scheme 6.2, in which the creation of chiral quaternary carbon centers via an addition-elimination process is used as the key reactions.27 This strategy has been used very effectively for the synthesis of various natural products; this is discussed in Chapter 4 on the Michael addition to nitroalkenes. NaNO2, AcOH NO2

5

5

DMSO, 30 ºC, 6 h

TMS

(6.14)

95%

NaNO 2, AcOH

NO2

CO2H

TMS CO2H

DMSO, 30 ºC, 6 h

(6.15)

98%

Because primary alkyl bromides can be converted into the corresponding nitro compounds by the action of NaNO2 in DMSO, primary alkyl bromides are converted directly into the corresponding carboxylic acids by the reaction with an excess of sodium nitrite in acetic acid (Eq. 6.16).26

MeO

MeO

N

O

Ph Ph OMe

N

R

N R 95%

NO2 MeO

NO2 N

O

NO2 O

O

MeO NaNO2

CO2H

AcOH, DMSO N R 80%

R 97%

MeO

Me N

O N R (–) - horsfiline

Scheme 6.2.

O

NaBH4 O

, MeOH

164

CONVERSION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO OTHER COMPOUNDS

O BnO

BnO

NaNO2

Br

AcOH, DMSO

O

OH O

(6.16)

96%

6.1.3 Reductive Method The Nef reaction can also be carried out with reducing agents. Aqueous titanium chloride reduces nitro compounds to imines, which are readily hydrolyzed to carbonyl compounds (Eq. 6.17).28 The Michael addition of nitroalkanes to enones followed by reaction with TiCl3 provides an excellent route to 1,4-diketones and hence to cyclopentenones. For example, cis-jasmone is readily obtained,28 as shown in Eq. 6.18. TiCl3, H2O

CH3(CH2)4CH2NO2

(6.17)

CH3(CH2)4CHO

dimethoxyethane

80%

O CH2NO2

O , CH2Cl2

N H

NO2 O

O 1) base

TiCl3, H2O dimethoxyethane

2) H2 / Lindler

O 85%

cis-jasmone

(6.18) The TiCl3 solution is very acidic such that acid-sensitive compounds do not survive. In such cases, sodium acetate or ammonium acetate is added to the reaction mixture to control pH at 5–6.29 Highly functionalized substrates are synthesized by the Nef reaction using TiCl3 and sodium acetate, as shown in Eq. 6.19,30 and Eq. 6.20.31

O

CH2Ph N

O

CH2Ph N O

TiCl3

NO2

AcONa

(6.19)

63%

OH CH2CH(NO2)(CH2)4CO2CH3 RO

CH=CHCH(OR)n-C5H11

1) NaOCH3, CH3OH 2) TiCl3, NH4O2CCH3, H2O

OH CH2CO(CH2)4CO2CH3 RO

CH=CHCH(OR)n-C5H11 70%

(6.20)

Vanadium chloride,32 chromium chloride,33 and the combined use of tributylphosphine and diphenyldisulfide34 are also effective in promoting the reductive Nef reaction.

6.1

165

NEF REACTION (ALDEHYDES, KETONES, AND CARBOXYLIC ACIDS)

6.1.4 Direct Conversion of Nitroalkenes to Carbonyl Compounds Because nitroalkenes are directly prepared by the condensation of aldehydes with nitroalkanes, the conversion of nitroalkenes into carbonyl compounds provides a powerful tool in organic synthesis. In general, the reduction of nitroalkenes followed by the hydrolysis or oxidation gives carbonyl compounds. Old procedures for this transformation involve the reduction with FeHCl35 or Zn-AcOH.36 There are many modified procedures for the conversion of 1-phenyl-2nitropropene into phenylacetone (Eq. 6.21); method A37: Raney Ni-NaH2PO2, method B38: Cr(2)Cl, method C39: LiBHR3/HCl, method D40: CdCl2-Mg-H2O, method E41: electrochemical reduction using Pb as an electrode. Yield (%)

Method NO2

O

A

Raney Ni/NaH2PO2

88

B

CrCl2

80

C

LiBHR3, HCl

80

D

CdCl2 -Mg-H2O

80

E

Electrochemical reduction, Pb

80

(6.21) The direct conversion of nitroalkenes into ketones is especially useful for the preparation of arylacetones. They are readily prepared by the condensation of aromatic aldehydes with nitroethane and by the subsequent Nef reaction.42 Typical examples are presented in Eq. 6.2237 and Eq. 6.23; the product of Eq. 6.23 is used for total synthesis of perylenequinone, calphostin D, which is a potent inhibitor of protein kinase C.42b O

Me NO2

Me Raney Ni

(6.22)

NaH2PO2 N

CF3

N

CF3

86% OMe OAc

OMe OAc Me MeO

CrCl2

O

THF - H2O

MeO

NO2

Me 72%

OH

O

Me O OH

MeO

Me

MeO

Me O OH

O

(6.23)

OH

Me

Iodotrimethylsilane generated in situ from chlorotrimetylsilane and sodium iodide effects the reduction of nitroalkenes into ketones at 0 °C. This method is useful for the conversion of nitro steroids or nitro terpenoids to the corresponding ketones (Eq. 6.24).43

166

CONVERSION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO OTHER COMPOUNDS

O

O2N

O

O Me

O

Me

Me3SiCl-NaI

Me

Me

O

(6.24)

AcO

AcO O

O 78%

O

O

Ballini and his coworkers have used the strategy based on the Nef reaction after the carbon–carbon bond formation for the synthesis of various natural products.44 The requisite nitroalkenes are simply prepared by the nitro-aldol condensation using Al2O3. When double bonds are present in nitroalkenes, the reductive Nef reaction gives saturated compounds, as shown in Eq. 6.25.45 A new simple, cheap, and practical procedure for the direct transformation of nitroalkenes into ketones has been obtained by the NaBH4/H2O2 system. By this method, other functional groups such as double bonds, acetals, or aromatic nitro groups are preserved. A convenient synthesis of dihydrojasmone and brevicomine using this transformation is presented in Eqs. 6.25 and 6.26, respectively.46 Other applications of the Nef reaction to the synthesis of natural products such as spiroketalic pheromones and lactonic pheromones are demonstrated in Eqs. 6.27 and 6.28.47 O +

Al2O3

H O2N

NO2 Raney Ni NaH2PO2

63%

O 60%

O 1) PdCl2/ CuCl / O2

NaBH4 H2O2

(6.25)

2) base

O 58% O

NO2

H

65% O

NaBH4

1) mCPBA

H2O2

2) TsOH

O

NO2 Al2O3

+

OH

NO2 OTHP 54%

OTHP

H

O

+ H

Raney Ni NaH2PO2

O

1) NaBH4 +

40 ºC

O

n-C11H23

(6.26)

O H 88%

70% OH

NO2

Al2O3

+

NO2

2) H

(6.27) NO2

Al2O3 CO2Me

50 ºC

O

n-C11H23

OMe O

O

n-C11H23

CO2Me

Baker's yeast O

O

H

n-C11H23

(6.28)

6.2

NITRILE OXIDES AND NITRILES

167

The 4-hydroxyheptadecan-7-one, isolated from the root of Chiococca alba, is simply prepared using hydroxy-functionalized nitroalkenes, as shown in Eq. 6.29.48

NO2

NO2 +

Al2O3

CH3(CH2)8CHO

OH

OH

45%

O

Raney Ni

(6.29)

NaH2PO2

OH

60%

The Henry reaction of ketones with nitroalkanes in the presence of ethylenediamine gives allylic nitro compounds, which give α,β-unsaturated carbonyl compounds via the Nef reaction (Eq. 6.30).49 CH2NO2

CHO

1) NaOMe

(6.30)

2) TiCl3 66%

6.2 NITRILE OXIDES AND NITRILES Primary nitro compounds are good precursors for preparing nitriles and nitrile oxides (Eq. 6.31). The conversion of nitro compounds into nitrile oxides affords an important tool for the synthesis of complex natural products. Nitrile oxides are reactive 1,3-dipoles that form isoxazolines or isoxazoles by the reaction with alkenes or alkynes, respectively. The products are also important precursors for various substrates such as β-amino alcohols, β-hydroxy ketones, β-hydroxy nitriles, and β-hydroxy acids (Scheme 6.3). Many good reviews concerning nitrile oxides in organic synthesis exist; some of them are listed here.50–56 Applications of organic synthesis using nitrile oxides are discussed in Section 8.2.2. PhNCO Et3N RCH2NO2

R C NO

(6.31)

PCl3 R C N

The dehydration of primary nitro compounds with phenyl isocyanate (PhNCO) and triethylamine has been widely used for generating nitrile oxides (Mukaiyama-Hoshino method).57a Polymer-bounded nitrile oxide cycloaddition reactions employing phenyl isocyanate have experimental advantage of removing the urea by-product by simply washing the resin with solvent.57b The use of diisocyanates for in situ preparation of nitrile oxides from primary nitroalkanes is of similar advantage, in which the by-product urea polymer is simply removed by filtration.57c An alternative method for generating nitrile oxides is based on the chlorination of oximes. However, the former method is better, because the use of chlorinating agents can be avoided. Recently, some new preparing methods of nitrile oxides from nitro compounds have been achieved, as shown in Eqs. 6.32–6.35; however, the Mukaiyama-Hoshino method is still the most widely used in organic synthesis.

168

CONVERSION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO OTHER COMPOUNDS

R CNO

O

1,3-dipolar addition

+

N

O

1) Raney Ni, H2 R

2) Al2O

R 2-isooxazoline

LiAlH4

O

OH

NC R

OH

NH2 OH R

Scheme 6.3.

For example, the reaction of nitroalkanes with di-tert-butyl dicarbonate, (BOC)2O, and 4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP) as catalysts in the presence of dipolarophiles at room temperature affords cycloadducts in improved yields compared with the Mukaiyama-Hosino method.58 The conversion of Eq. 6.32 gives a 90% yield by this procedure, whereas the conventional method using PhNCO gives a 79% yield of the same product. An additional advantage of this new method is that the use of (BOC)2O allows the reaction to be carried out with substrates that contain NH or OH groups without prior protection. The cycloaddition leads directly to protected N- or O-Boc products (see Eq. 6.33). O

N MeCH2NO2

+ PhCH=CH2

Ph

(Boc)2O, DMAP

(6.32)

20ºC

Me 90%

Ph

NO2 O

O

(Boc)2O, DMAP

+

OEt

20ºC

OEt

N H

N O

Ph

N Boc 88%

(6.33)

The reaction of nitroalkenes or nitroalkanes with TiCl4 and Me3SiN3 gives α-azido functionalized hydroxamoyl chlorides, which act as precursors of nitrile oxides (Eq. 6.34).59 N3 Ph

NO2

Me3SiN3 TiCl4 RT 1 h

O Cl

Ph N 78%

OH

OEt Et3N, RT, 8 h

N3 Ph N

(6.34) O

OEt

88%

A new route to nitrile oxides based on the reaction of primary alkyl bromides with NaNO2 in the presence of acetic acid, is also reported (Eq. 6.35).60 This reaction is used for the direct

6.2

169

NITRILE OXIDES AND NITRILES

conversion of alkyl bromides or nitroalkanes to carboxylic acids on treatment with NaNO2 and acetic acid, if the alkenes are absent. The reaction proceeds via nitrolic acids, which can be isolated when the reaction is carried out at 20 °C. When heated in THF, they allow corresponding nitrile oxides to be obtained under neutral conditions.60b PhCH2Br

O

NaNO2, AcOH

+

CO2Me

CO2Me

N

DMSO, RT

(6.35)

Ph 68%

Primary nitro ketones, ethyl nitroacetate, and (phenylsulfonyl)nitromethane react with alkenes in the presence of Lewis acids to give nitrile oxide cycloaddition.61a Similarly, the reaction of α-nitro ketones with TeCl4 generates the corresponding nitrile oxides, as shown in Eq. 6.36.61b O

O NO2

Ph

+

Ph

TeCl4, Et3N

Ph

N

–78ºC ~RT

(6.36)

Ph O 82%

The conversions of nitro compounds into nitrile oxides have been used extensively in organic synthesis (see Section 8.2.2). On the other hand, nitro compounds have rarely been used as precursors of nitriles in organic synthesis. Some recent procedures for conversion of nitro compounds into nitriles are presented in Eqs. 6.37–6.40. The oxygen transfer from nitrile oxides by isocyanide gives nitriles; thus, treatment of nitro compounds with t-butylisocyanide, nbutylisocyanate, and triethylamine gives nitriles in 70–80% yield (Eq. 6.37).62 A combined process of dehydration and deoxygenation from nitro compounds is also possible by various reagents such as Me3SiI,63 PI3 in the presence of triethylamine,64 PCl3 in pyridine,65 and (Me2N)3P.66 However, they suffer from low yield in some cases. Recently, a more effective method has been obtained, which is based on the reaction using Sn(SPh)4, Bu3P, and diethyl azodicarboxylate (DEAD), as in Eq. 6.38, in which the reaction is complete in 5–10 min to give nitriles in 85–98% yield. Similar results are obtained, although not so rapid, using only Bu3P (2 equiv) and DEAD (1 equiv), as shown in Eq. 6.39.67 Deoxygenation using disilane is also effective for the conversion of nitro compounds into nitriles (Eq. 6.40).68 N NO2

n-BuNCO, t-BuNC Et3N

Ph

N

CN

(6.37)

Ph 74% NO2

CN

O

Sn(SPh)4, Bu3P, DEAD CO2t-Bu

O

0º C, 5 min

O CO2t-Bu

O

(6.38)

95%

O O

NO2

Bu3P, DEAD

O

0º C, 30 min

O

CN

(6.39) 92%

170

CONVERSION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO OTHER COMPOUNDS

1)

SLi

Ph

NO2

Ph

(6.40)

S

2) Me3SiSiMe3 3) hν

NC 82%

Radical fragmentation process using tin radical is applied to the conversion of nitro compounds into nitriles, as shown in Eq. 6.41.69

NaNO2 R

NO2

NaOH

N R

O C Cl

OH NO2

O N R

AIBN NO2

N R

Bu3SnH

O

R

OSn C O Ar

N R

-NO2• NO2

NO2

C N

90–100%

(6.41)

Indirect conversion of nitro compounds into nitriles via dehydration of oximes (see Section 6.3.3) is also a useful method for this purpose.

6.3 REDUCTION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO AMINES Reduction of aromatic and aliphatic nitro compounds gives various nitrogen compounds, such as amines, imines, and oximes, where the N–O bonds are cleaved, which is one of the basic reactions of nitro compounds. The sequence of nitration and reduction is the most important method for the preparation of aromatic amines. In aliphatic cases, the recent development of the stereoselective nitro-aldol and Michael reaction using aliphatic nitro compounds makes this conversion important as a tool for the stereoselective synthesis of biologically active amino compounds. Although the cleavage of N–O bond is general in the reduction of both aromatic and aliphatic nitro compounds, the C–N bond cleavage is possible in aliphatic nitro compounds (Scheme 6.4). Kornblum and co-workers reported that some kinds of anion radicals derived from aliphatic nitro compounds cleave the carbon-nitrogen bond to give the carbon radicals. In line with this observation, Ono and Tanner have found that aliphatic nitro compounds are reduced to the corresponding hydrocarbons on treatment with tin hydride in the presence of radical initiators. The conversion of R–NO2 to R-H is now widely recognized as a useful tool for organic synthesis (see Section 7.2). 6.3.1 Ar-NH2 From Ar-NO2 Particularly in the aromatic series, many amines have been prepared by the reduction of corresponding nitro compounds. A large number of reducing agents have been used for the reduction of nitro groups.70a–d The catalytic hydrogenation of aromatic nitro compounds to amines has long been recognized as one of the simplest procedures.71

6.3

Ar

NO2

171

REDUCTION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO AMINES

N-O cleavage

Ar-NO, Ar-NH2, etc.

N-O cleavage

R-NO, R-NHOH, R-NH2, etc.

C-N cleavage

R-H

R NO2

Scheme 6.4.

Procedures for the reduction of nitro compounds to amines are described precisely in the series of books; Organic Synthesis, namely, Fe + AcOH,72 Zn + NaOH,73 Fe + HCl,74 Sn + HCl,75 H2-Raney Ni,76a–c H2-PtO2,77 H2-Pd/C,78 and N2H4-Pd/C79 are presented there. Sodium sulfide and polysulfides are also effective for this transformation.80 The combination of sodium borohydride with cobalt(II), copper(II), and rhodium (III) halides has been used to reduce functional groups such as nitro, nitriles, amides, and olefins, which are inert to NaBH4 itself.81 Aromatic nitro compounds are reduced to amines with formic acid and triethylamine with Pd/C.82a Ammonium formate in the presence of Pd/C is a very convenient method for the reduction of both aromatic and aliphatic nitro compounds. For example, this method is applied for the preparation of indoles, as in Eq. 6.42.82b Synthesis of indoles via the reduction of the nitro group is presented in Section 10.2 (synthesis of heterocycles). MeO

MeO

OMe O NO2

O

10 % Pd/C HCOONH4

CO2Me N H 84–89%

(6.42)

The reductive alkylation of aromatic nitro compounds using H2+Pd/C in the presence of 40% aqueous formaldehyde gives directly dimethylamino derivatives in good yield (Eq. 6.43).83

O2N

CH2COOEt

CH2O, H2

CH2COOEt

Me2N

Pd/C

(6.43)

67–77%

Electrochemically generated nickel is very selective for the reduction of aromatic nitro compounds into anilines, in which alkenyl, alkynyl, halo, cyano, formyl, and benzyloxy groups are not affected.84 Sodium sulfide has been used for the selective reduction of aromatic nitro group in the presence of aliphatic nitro groups (Eq. 6.44).85 Me O2N

CH2 C Me NO2

Na2S•9H2O

Me CH2 C Me NO2

H2N

EtOH-H2O

(6.44)

70%

Treatment of aromatic nitro compounds with indium powder in aqueous ethanolic ammonium chloride results in selective reduction of nitro groups; ester, nitrile, amide, and halide substituents are unaffected.86 This method is more selective than the method of catalytic hydrogenation. For example, catalytic hydrogenation of 4-chloro-3-nitroacetophenone over Pd/C results in hydrogenolysis of the halide and reduction of the ketone as well as of the nitro group.87 Samarium iodide is a good reducing agent of both aromatic and aliphatic nitro

172

CONVERSION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO OTHER COMPOUNDS

compounds. Because the nitro group is a better electron acceptor than other functional groups, the reduction of nitro compounds with SmI2 proceeds selectively. Thus, p-nitrobenzonitrile is reduced to p-cyanoaniline selectively.88 Ultrasound-promoted, highly efficient reduction of aromatic nitro compounds to the aromatic amines has been achieved by samarium ammonium chloride mediated reaction.88c Intermolecular and intramolecular reductive coupling reactions between aromatic nitro compounds and nitriles are induced by SmI2 to give amidines and 2-aminoqunolines.89 6.3.2 R-NH2 From R-NO2 In general, the reduction of aliphatic nitro compounds gives amines, in which various reducing agents are as effective as they are in the reduction of aromatic nitro compounds.70 The reduction of β-nitro alcohols to the corresponding amino alcohols is the most important application of this process in organic synthesis. Hydrogenation catalyzed by Raney Ni under high pressure has been widely used for this conversion,90 and some recent examples are presented in Eq. 6.45,91 and Eq. 6.46.92 The stereochemistry of the nitro alcohol is retained by the Raney Ni-catalyzed hydrogenation. OH CF3

1) H2, Raney Ni

SiO CF3

2) Bu4NF

(6.45)

NH2 76%

NO2

OH 1) H2, Raney Ni

SiO Et

C3H9

2) Bu4NF

Et

C3H9

(6.46)

NH2

NO2

The reduction of nitro sugars with H2 in the presence of Raney Ni is one of the standard methods for the preparation of amino sugars (Eq. 6.47).93 OMe

OMe O

H2, Raney Ni

O

1 atm, 25 ºC, 4 h

HO NO2

(6.47)

HO NH2 73%

The hydrogenation in the presence of Pd/C is also effective for the conversion of nitro compounds to amines.94 The Michael addition of nitromethane to 2-alkenoic esters followed by catalytic hydrogenation using 10% Pd/C in acetic acid and hydrolysis is a convenient method for the preparation of 3-alkyl-4-aminobutanoic acids, which are important γ-amino acids for biological study (Eq. 6.48).94b The reduction can be carried out at room temperature and atmospheric pressure. O2N Me

H2N

O

1) H2, Pd/C, AcOH

O OEt

2) HCl

Me

OH 83%

(6.48)

6.3

REDUCTION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO AMINES

173

Jager and co-workers have prepared various amino sugars by the reduction of the corresponding β-nitro alcohols with H2 and Pd/C, as exemplified in Eq. 6.49 (see Chapter 3).95 OH

OH

OH

OEt

OH

OEt

H2, Pd, MeOH OEt

OEt

25 ºC, 24 h

OH

OBn NO2

(6.49)

NH2 98%

Hydrogen gas can be replaced by ammonium formate for the reduction of nitro compounds to amines. The ammonium formate method is efficient, and the rapid workup procedure by simple filtration makes it widely used for converting the NO2 to the NH2.96 For example, α-nitro esters are reduced to α-amino esters in excellent yields on treatment with HCO2NH4 and Pd/C in methanol.96 The reduction of γ-nitroketone acetals as in Eq. 6.50 with ammonium formate in the presence of Pd/C gives the corresponding amines in good yields. However, the reduction of γ-nitro ketones are reduced to cyclic nitrones (Eq. 6.51).97 This reduction is far superior to the classical method using Zn/NH4Cl due to improved yield and simple workup. HCO2NH4, Pd/C

O

O

Me

CO2Me

60 ºC, 1 h

O Me

HCO2NH4, Pd/C CO2Me

20 ºC, 30 min

CO2Me NH2

NO2

Me

O

O

Me

(6.50)

94%

O– N+

NO2

CO2Me 74%

(6.51)

The reduction of β-nitro alcohols with ammonium formate in the presence of Pd/C also proceeds with retention of their configurations (Eq. 6.52).98 OH

OH Me NO2

Me

HCO2NH4, Pd/C MeOH 20 ºC

NH2

(6.52)

87%

The reduction of β-nitro alcohols with LiAlH4 results in low yields of β-amino alcohols due to the occurrence of a retro-aldol reaction. This problem is resolved by protecting of OH of β-nitro alcohols, as shown in Eq. 6.53.99 OH O Si

NO2

LiAlH4

(6.53) NH2 69%

A reagent of nickel boride/hydrazine hydrate reduces both aromatic and aliphatic nitro compounds. For example, it has been used for synthesis of 4-(benzyloxy)indole and –alkyltryp-

174

CONVERSION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO OTHER COMPOUNDS

tamines, as shown in Eq. 6.54.100 This reducing agent has advantages over the method using H2 and Raney Ni because double bonds are inert to Ni2B/N2H4. OCH2Ph

OCH2Ph N

Ni2B N2H4•H2O

NO2 Me

N H

NO2

91% NO2

OCH2Ph

Me

OCH2Ph Ni2B N2H4•H2O

NH2 Me

(6.54)

N H 69%

N H 81%

Sodium borohydride is activated in the presence of Pd/C,101 CoCl26H2O,102 Ni(OAc)2,103 CuSO4,104 and NiCl2.105 Aromatic and aliphatic nitro compounds are reduced to the corresponding amines, by these reagents as summarized in Table 6.1. The active hydrogenation catalyst is formed by the reaction of NaBH4 with metal catalysts in such reductions.106 Because reaction proceeds rapidly under mild conditions, the method using activated NaBH4 is very convenient for the reduction of a variety of nitro compounds as shown in Table 6.1. Various other reducing methods are employed for the conversion of β-nitro alcohols to amino alcohols, namely, electrochemical reduction.107 The selective electrohydrogenation of nitroaliphatic and nitroaromatic groups in molecules containing other groups that are easy to hydrogenate (triple bond, nitrile, C-I) are carried out in methanol-water solutions at Devarda copper and Raney cobalt electrodes (Eq. 6.55).107 NHOH

OEt

Me OEt

Me

pH = 3 –0.70 V (vs. SCE)

NO2

OEt

Me Me

OEt

pH = 5 –0.90 V (vs. SCE)

NH2

OEt

Me

OEt

Me 72%

65%

(6.55) The sonochemical-promoted aluminum amalgam reduction of β-nitro alcohols provides an improved yield and accelerated conversion to the corresponding amino alcohols.108 The selective reduction of 4-nitrosteroid to the corresponding aminosteroid has been carried out by Pd/CaCO3 and quinoline (5 mol wt%) under H2 atmosphere (Eq. 6.56).109 This is the first reported catalytic reduction of an α-nitro enone to an α-amino enone. Other hydrogenation catalysts as well as the use of Na2S, Fe/AcOH, or Na2S2O4 fails to provide the aminosteroid. Reduction with SnCl2 in EtOH gives the aminosteroid in 46% yield. OH

OH H2, Pd/CaCO3 quinoline

(6.56) O

O NO2

NH2

64%

A variety of Group VIII transition metal phosphine complexes are shown to be active catalysts for hydrogenation of aliphatic nitro compounds. However, chiral phosphines have been found to be noneffective to induce asymmetric induction.110

6.3

REDUCTION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO AMINES

175

Table 6.1. Nitro compound

Reducing reagent NO2

Product NH2

NaBH4-CuSO4 EtOH, reflux, 30 min

NaBH4-exchange Resin-Ni(OAc)2, RT, 1 h

NO2

NO2

NH2

NH2

NaBH4-10% Pd/C THF, 40 min

104

94

103

75

103

90

103

76

105

73

102

84

129

80

129

CO2Et

CO2Et

NO2 O Me

NaBH4-10% Pd/C THF, 30 min

NC

NaBH4-NiCl2 MeOH, RT, 30 min

H2N

NH2 OH

Me

Me

Me Me NH2

NO2

OH

OH NaBH4-CoCl2⋅6H2O

MeOH, 0 °C

N H

N H NO2 Cl

80

OMe

OMe

O2N Me

Ref.

OMe

OMe

NC

Yield (%)

Cl

NO2

NH2

NaBH4-ZrCl4 THF, reflux

Cl

NaBH4-ZrCl4 THF, RT

Cl

NH2

6.3.3 Oximes, Hydroxylamines, and Other Nitrogen Derivatives The final reduction products of nitro compounds are amines, but reduction intermediate products such as oximes and hydroxylamines have been also isolated on reduction of nitro compounds, as shown in Eq. 6.57, where the reaction is controlled by the applied reduction potentials. The partial reduction of nitroalkanes gives either oximes or alkyl-substituted hydroxylamines, depending on reaction conditions. Samarium diiodide is a good single electron-transfer reagent and it is very easy to control the reaction. Primary, secondary, or tertiary nitroalkanes can be reduced with SmI2 and CH3OH as the proton source to either alkyl hydroxylamines or amines, depending on the amount of SmI2. Reaction with 4 equiv of SmI2 in THF/MeOH for less than 5 min provides hydroxylamines in 60–90% yields. Reaction with 6 equiv of SmI2 for 8 h provides amines in 50–80% yields.111 R-NHOH

4 equiv SmI2 THF-MeOH (2:1)

R NO2

6 equiv SmI2 THF-MeOH (2:1)

R-NH2

(6.57)

176

CONVERSION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO OTHER COMPOUNDS

The conversion of nitroalkanes to ketoximes can be achieved by the reduction with Zn in acetic acid,112 or Fe in acetic acid.113 Nitroalkenes are directly reduced into saturated ketoximes by these reagents, which are precursors for ketones (see Section 6.1.4 Nef reaction). Reduction of 3-O-acetylated sugar 1-nitro-1-alkenes with Zn in acetic acid gives the corresponding 2,3-unsaturated sugar oximes in high yield, which is a versatile route to 2,3-unsaturated sugar derivatives (Eq. 6.58).114 HC NOH CH CH H OAc

CHNO2 CH AcO H H

H OAc OAc CH2OAc

Zn, AcOH

H

(6.58)

OAc CH2OAc 88%

As shown in Eq. 6.59, Rapoport has prepared sinefungin, nucleoside antibiotics, via nitro-aldol reaction, dehydration, and reduction with Zn in acetic acid.115a β-Nitrostyrenes are selectivity reduced to the corresponding oximes by indium metal in aqueous methanol under neutral conditions.115b O Ts

OMe

NH

+ t-BuO O H3C

O CH3

NO2 O

Ts

1) KF, CH3CN, 24 h 2) DCC, CuCl, CH3CN

NH

t-BuO

3) Zn, THF, aq HOAc, 45 ºC, 15 min

OMe O

HO

(6.59)

N O

H3C 69% overall

O CH3

The conversion of nitroalkenes into the oximes can be achieved by electrochemical reduction (Eq. 6.60).116 NO2 CH C Me

C-Pt, e– MeOH, H 2SO4

CH2 C N OH Me 43%

(6.60)

Reaction of the salts of primary and secondary alkylnitro compounds with diborane in THF solution at 25 °C yields the corresponding hydroxylamines.117 Kabalka has reported the reduction of nitroalkenes to hydroxylamines or amines with a variety of borane and borohydride reagents (Eq. 6.61).118

NaBH4

NO2 78%

BH3, THF NO2

NOH

BH3, NaBH4 79%

88%

NH2

(6.61)

6.3

177

REDUCTION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO AMINES

Deoxygenation from nitroalkanes is possible by other various reagents, including TiCl3,119 Me3SiI,63 carbon disulfide in the presence of base,120 Me3SiSiMe3,121 and Sn(SPh)2-PhSH-Et3N (Eq. 6.62).122 NO2

N

Yield (%)

Reagent OH

84

Me3SiI BuLi + Me3SiSiMe3

(6.62)

69

A combination of tributylphosphine-diphenyldisulfide reduces secondary nitro compounds to imines, which is applied to pyrrole synthesis (Eq. 6.63).34 Ph

Ph

O Ph

Me

Bu3P, PhSSPh Me

NO2

(6.63)

Ph

N H 90%

A new selective reduction of nitroalkenes into enamides has been carried out by a combination of iron powder, a carboxylic acid, and the corresponding anhydride (Eq. 6.64).123 NHAc

NO2

Fe, AcOH

(6.64)

Ac2O 67%

A new multicomponent reaction of nitro compounds with isocyanides gives α-oxyiminoamides, which are important for drug synthesis such as cephalosporin and β-lactamase inhibitor (Eq. 6.65).124a Multicomponent reactions using isocyanides (Ugi reaction) is reviewed.124b O N

O2N

+

NC

OAc

N H

Ac2O

(6.65)

63%

Photoreduction of aromatic and aliphatic nitro compounds gives hydroxylamines or amines, which is well reviewed.125 The radical reaction of primary nitro compounds with tin hydride does not give the denitrated product (see Chapter 7), but give the corresponding oximes (Eq. OAc

OAc Bu3SnH, AIBN AcO AcO

O NO2 OAc

benzene, reflux

AcO AcO

O

OH N

OAc 90%

(6.66)

178

CONVERSION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO OTHER COMPOUNDS

6.66).126a This reaction is useful in carbohydrate chemistry and a nitromethylene linked disaccharide is prepared via this reaction.126b Nitroxides are N,N-disubstituted nitric oxide radicals, the unpaired electron being delocalized between the nitrogen and oxygen. The reduction of 2-methyl-2-nitropropane with sodium or electrochemically yields di-t-butyl nitroxide as the final product.127 Such nitroxide radicals are important for the study of a organic ferromagnet.128 Phosphorous reagents are well established as deoxygenating agents of nitro compounds. Cadogan and others have reported the abstraction of oxygen from aromatic nitro compounds by triethyl phosphite to form various heterocycles.130 These reactions proceed via nitrene intermediates to give heterocycles (Section 10.2). Diethyl chlorophosphite is more reactive than triethyl phosphite, and it reduces both aromatic and aliphatic nitro groups to the corresponding amino groups in the presence of tertiary amines.131

REFERENCES 1. Noland, W. E. Chem. Rev., 55, 137 (1955). 2. Nielsen, A. T. The Chemistry of Functional Groups; Nitrones, Nitronates and Nitroxides, ed. by S. Patai and Z. Rappoport, John Wiley, London, 1989. 3. Pinnick, H. W. In Organic Reactions, ed. by L. A. Paquette, John Wiley, 38, Chapter 3 (1990). 4. Keinan, E., and Y. Mazur. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 99, 3861 (1977). 5. Jacobsen, R. M. Tetrahedron Lett., 3215 (1974). 6. Hwu, J. R., and R. A. Gilbert. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 113, 5917 (1991). 7a. Shechter, H., and F. T. Williams. J. Org. Chem., 27, 369 (1962). 7b. Kornblum, N., A. S. Erickson, W. J. Kelley, and B. Henggeler. J. Org. Chem., 47, 4534 (1982). 7c. Steliou, K., and M. A. Poupart. J. Org. Chem., 50, 4971 (1985). 7d. Cookson, R. C., and P. S. Ray. Tetrahedron Lett., 23, 3521 (1982). 8. Aizpurua, J. M., M. Oiarbide, and C. Palomo. Tetrahedron Lett., 29, 5361 (1987). 9. Galobardes, M. E., and H. W. Pininick. Tetrahedron Lett., 22, 5235 (1981). 10. Olah, G. A., and B. G. B. Gupta. Synthesis, 44 (1980). 11. Olah, G. A., M. Arvananaghi, Y. D. Vankar, and G. K. S. Prakash. Synthesis, 662 (1980). 12. McMurry, J. E., J. Melton, and H. Padgett. J. Org. Chem., 39, 259 (1974); Org. Synth. 6, 648 (1988). 13. Williams, J. R., L. R. Unger, and R. H. Moore. J. Org. Chem., 43, 1271 (1978). 14. Bartlett, P. A., F. R. Green III, and T. R. Webb. Tetrahedron Lett., 18, 331 (1977). 15. Ceccherelli, P., M. Curini, F. Epifano, M. C. Marcotullio, and O. Rosati. Synth. Commun., 28, 3057 (1998). 16. Ballini, E., and M. Petrini. Tetrahedron Lett., 30, 5329 (1989). 17. Adam, W., M. Makosza, C. R. Saha-Moller, and C. G. Zhao. Synlett., 1335 (1998). 18a. Tokunaga, Y., M. Yagihashi, M. Ihara, and K. Fukumoto. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 955 (1995). 18b. Tokunaga, Y., M. Ihara, and K. Fukumoto. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 207 (1997). 19. Barton, D. R. H., W. B. Motherwell, and S. Z. Zard. Tetrahedron Lett., 24, 5227 (1983). 20. Nokami, J., T. Sonoda, and S. Wakabayashi. Synthesis, 763 (1986). 21. Kornblum, N., and P. A. Wade. J. Org. Chem., 38, 1416 (1973). 22. Edward, J. T., and P. H. Tremaine. Can. J. Chem., 49, 3483 (1971). 23. Saville-Stones, E. A., and S. D. Lindell. Synlett, 591 (1991). 24. Forzato, C., P. Nitti, G. Pitacco, and E. Valentin. Gazz, Chim, Ital., 125, 223 (1995). 25. Kornblum, N., R. K. Blackwood, and D. D. Moonberry. J. Am. Chem. Soc, 78, 1501 (1956). 26. Matt, C., A. Wagner, and C. Mioskowski. J. Org. Chem., 62, 234 (1997). 27. Lakshmaiah, G., T. Kawabata, M. Shang, and K. Fuji. J. Org. Chem., 64, 1699 (1999). 28. McMurry, J. E., and J. Melton. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 93, 5309 (1971). 29a. McMurry, J. E., and J. Melton. J. Org. Chem., 38, 4367 (1973). 29b. McMurry, J. E. Acc. Chem. Res., 7, 281 (1974).

REFERENCES

30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42a. 42b. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47a. 47b. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57a. 57b. 57c. 58. 59. 60a. 60b. 61a. 61b. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70a. 70b.

179

Walchli, R., S. Benz, and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta, 68, 484 (1984). Noyori, R., and M.Suzuki. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 23, 847 (1984). Kirchhoff, R. Tetrahedron Lett., 2533 (1976). Hanson, J. P. Synthesis, 1 (1974). Barton, D. H. R., W. B. Motherwell, E. S. Simmon, and S. Z. Zard. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 2243 (1986). Hass, H. B., A. G. Susie, and R. L. Heider. J. Org. Chem., 15, 8 (1950). Nightingale, D., and J. R. James. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 55, 352 (1944). Monti, D., P. Gramatica, G. Speranza, and P. Manitto. Tetrahedron Lett., 24, 417 (1983). Varma, R. S., M. Barma, and G. W. Kabalka. Tetrahedron Lett., 26, 3777 (1985). Mourad, M. S., R. S. Varma, and G. W. Kabalka. Synthesis, 654 (1985). Bordoloi, M. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 922 (1993). Torii, S., H. Tanaka, and T. Katoh. Chem. Lett., 607 (1983). Heinzelman, R. V. Org. Synth, 4, 573 (1963). Hauser, F. M., D. Sengupta, and S. A. Corlett. J. Org. Chem., 59, 1967 (1994). Singhal, G. M., N. B. Das, and R. P. Sharma. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1470 (1989). Ballini, R. Studies in Natural Product Chemistry, ed. by A. Rahman, 19, 117 (1997), Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1997. Ballini, R., and G. Bosica. Synthesis, 723 (1994). Ballini, R., and M. Petrini. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 3159 (1992). Ballini, R., and G. Bosica. J. Chem. Res. (S), 435 (1993). Rossini, R., G. Bosica, and R. Schaafstra. Liebigs Ann Chem., 1235 (1994). Ballini, R., G. Bosica, and G. Rafaiani. Helv. Chim. Acta, 78, 879 (1995). Tamura, R., M. Sato, and D. Oda. J. Org. Chem., 51, 4368 (1986). Torssell, K. G. B. Nitrile Oxides, Nitrones, and Nitronates in Organic Synthesis, by, VCH, New York, 1987. Carruthers, W. Cycloaddition Reactions in Organic Synthesis, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1990. Kozikowski, A. P., Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry, ed. by A. R. Katritzky, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1984. Kozikowski, A. P. Acc. Chem. Res. 17, 410 (1984). Advances in Cycloaddition Chemistry, ed. by D. P. Curran, JAI Press Inc. Greenwich, Connecticut, Vol.1, 1988; and Vol. 2, 1990. Kamimura, A. J. Synth. Org. Chem. Japan, 50, 808 (1992). Kanemasa, S., and O. Tsuge. Heterocycles, 30, 719 (1990). Mukaiyama, T., and T. Hoshino. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 82, 5339 (1960). Kantorowski, E. J., and M. J. Kurth. J. Org. Chem., 62, 6797 (1997). Kantorowski, E. J., S. P. Brown, and M. J. Kurth. J. Org. Chem., 63, 5272 (1998). Basel, Y., and A. Hassner. Synthesis, 309 (1997). Kumaran, G., and G. H. Kulkarni. J. Org. Chem., 62, 1516 (1997). Maiti, D., and P. K. Bhattacharya. Synlett, 385 (1998). Matt, C., A. Gissot, A. Wagner, and C. Mioskowski. Tetrahedron Lett., 41, 1191 (2000). Wade, P. A., N. V. Amin, H. K. Yen, D. T. Price, and G. F. Huhn. J. Org. Chem., 49, 4595 (1984). Suzuki, H., H. Shimidzu, T. Inamasu, H. Tani, and R. Tamura. Chem. Lett., 559 (1990). Kaim, J. E., and A. Gacon. Tetrahedron Lett., 38, 3391 (1997). Olah, G. A., A. C. Narang, L. D. Field, and A. P. Fung. J. Org. Chen., 48, 2766 (1983). Denis, J. N., and A. Krief. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 544 (1980). Wehril, P. A., and B. Schaer. J. Org. Chem., 42, 3956 (1970). Olah, G. A., Y. D. Vankar, and R. G. B. Gupta. Synthesis, 36 (1979). Urpf, F., and J. Vilarrasa. Terahedron Lett., 31, 7497 (1990). Tsay, S. C., P. Gani, and J. R. Hwu. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans, 1, 1493 (1991). Chang, R. K., and K. Kim. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 7791 (1996). Larock, R. C. Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH, New York, pp 411–415 (1989). Sandler, S. R., and W. Karo. Organic Functional Group Preparation, Academic Press, New York, p. 339–345 (1968).

180

CONVERSION OF NITRO COMPOUNDS INTO OTHER COMPOUNDS

70c. Kabalka, G. W., and R. S. Varma. Reduction of nitro and nitroso compounds, in Comprehensive Organic Synthesis, ed. by B. M. Trost and E. Fleming, Vol. 8, p. 363–379, Pergamon Press, Oxford (1991). 70d. Hudlicky, M. Reductions in Organic Chemistry, 2nd ed, American Chemical Society, Washington DC, 1996. 71. Rylander, P. Catalytic Hydrogenation in Organic Synthesis, Academic Press, 113, New York (1979). 72. Wertheim, E. Org. Synth., 2, 471 (1943). 73. Martin, E. L. Org. Synth., 2, 501 (1943). 74a. Mahood, S. A., and P. V. L. Schaffner. Org. Synth., 2, 160 (1943). 74b. Fox, B. A., and T. L. Threlfall. Org. Synth. 5, 346 (1973). 75a. Clarke, H. T., and W. W. Hartman. Org. Synth., 1, 455 (1941). 75b. Hartman, W. W., J. B. Dickey, and J. G. Stampfli. Org. Synth., 2, 175 (1943). 76a. Dirmoth, K., A. Berndt, H. Perst, and C. Reichardt. Org. Synth., 5, 1130 (1973). 76b. Ickk, R. N., C.E. Redemann, B. B. Wisegarver, and G. A. Alles. Org. Synth., 3, 59 (1955). 76c. Allene, G. F. H., and J. Van Allan. Org. Synth., 3, 63 (1955). 77. Adams, R., and F. L. Cohen. Org. Synth., 1, 240 (1941). 78. Mendenhall, G. D., and P. A. S. Smith. Org. Synth., 5, 829 (1973). 79. Bavin, P. M. G. Org. Synth., 5, 30 (1973). 80a. Boyer, J. H., and R. S. Buriks. Org. Synth., 5, 1067 (1973). 80b. Hartman, W. W., and H. L. Silloway. Org. Synth., 3, 82 (1955). 81a. Satoh, T., S. Suzuki, Y. Suzuki, Y. Miyazi and Z. Imai, Tetrahedron Lett., 4555 (1968). 81b. Nose, A., and T. Kudo. Chem. Pharm. Bull., 29, 1159 (1981). 81c. Satoh, T., K. Nanba and S. Suzuki. Chem. Pharm. Bull., 19, 817 (1971). 81d. Nishiki, M., H. Miyataka, Y. Niino, N. Mitsuo, and T. Satoh. Tetrahedron Lett., 23, 193 (1982). 82a. Coryese, N. A., and R. F. Heck. J. Org. Chem., 42, 3491 (1977). 82b. Modi, S. P., R. C. Oglesby, and S. Archer. Org. Synth. 9, 601 (1998). 82c. Heck, R. F. Palladium Reagents in Organic Syntheses, Academic Press, London, p. 418–423 (1985). 83. Romanelli, M. C., and E. I. Beckers. Org. Synth., 5, 552 (1973). 84. Yasuhara, A., A. Kasano, and T. Sakamoto. J. Org. Chem., 64, 2301 (1999). 85. Huber, D., G. Andermann, and G. Leclerc. Tetrahedron Lett., 29, 635 (1988). 86. Moody, C. J., and M. R. Pitts. Synlett, 1028 (1998). 87. Tafesh, A. M., and J. Weiguny. Chem. Rev., 96, 2035 (1996). 88a. Souppe, J., L. Dannon, J. L. Namy and H. B. Kagan. J. Organomet. Chem., 250, 227 (1983). 88b. Wang, L., L. Zhou, and Y, Zang. Synlett, 1065 (1999). 88c. Basu, M. K., F. F. Becker, and B. K. Banik. Tetrahedron Lett., 41, 5603 (2000). 89. Zhou, L., and Y. Zhang. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 2899 (1998). 90a. Dauben, H. J., Jr., H. J. Ringold, R. H. Wade, D. L. Pearson, and A. G. Anderson. Org. Synth. Coll. Vol. 4, 221 (1963). 90b. Diery, H. and B. Renger. Liebigs Ann. Chem., 1239 (1980). 90c. Forbes, D. C., D. G. Ene, and M. P. Doyle. Synthesis, 879 (1998). 91a. Beck, A. K., and D. Seebach. Chem. Ber., 124, 2897 (1991). 91b. Maeri, R. E., J. Heinzer, and D. Seebach. Leibigs Ann., 1193 (1995). 91c. Poupart, M. A., G. Fazal, S. Goulet, and L. T. Mar. J. Org. Chem., 64, 1356 (1999). 92a. Seebach, D., A. K. Beck, T. Mukhopadhyay, and E. Thomas. Helv. Chim. Acta., 65, 1101 (1982). 92b. Seebach, D., A. K. Beck, F. Lehr, T. Weller, and E. Colvin. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 20, 397 (1981). 92c. Eyer, M., and D. Seebach. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 107, 3601 (1985). 93a. Williams, T. M., and H. S. Mosher. Tetrahedron Lett., 26, 6269 (1985). 93b. Fukuda, Y., H. Kitasato, H. Sasai, and T. Suami. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 55, 880 (1982). 93c. Sakanaka, O., T. Ohmori, S. Kozaki, and T. Suami. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 60, 1057 (1987). 93d. Kanai, K., S. Ogawa, and T. Suami. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 60, 2079 (1987). 94a. Mahboobi, S., and K. Bernauer. Helv. Chim. Acta, 71, 2034 (1988). 94b. Andruszkiewicz, R., and R. B. Silverman. Synthesis, 953 (1989). 95a. Webner, V., and V. Jager. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 29, 1169 (1990).

REFERENCES

95b. 96a. 96b. 96c. 97. 98. 99. 100. 101. 102a. 102b. 103. 104. 105. 106. 107. 108. 109. 110. 111. 112a. 112b. 113. 114. 115a. 115b. 116. 117. 118. 119. 120a. 120b. 121. 122. 123. 124a. 124b. 125. 126a. 126b. 127. 128a. 128b. 129. 130. 131.

181

Kies, F. M., P. Poggendorf, S. Picasso, and V. Jager. Chem. Commun., 119 (1998). Ram, S., and R. E. Ehrenkaufer. Tetrahedron Lett., 25, 3415 (1984). Ram, S., and E. E. Ehrenkaufer. Synthesis, 133 (1986). Kotler, T., G. E. Decker, and K. Sandhoff. Tetrahedron, 90, 13425 (1994). Zschiesche, R., and H. U. Reisig. Liebigs Ann., 551 (1989). Barrett, A. G. M., and C. B. Spolling. Tetrahedron Lett., 29, 5733 (1988). Colvin, E. W., A. K. Beck, and D. Seebach. Helv. Chim. Acta., 64, 2264 (1981). Loyd, D. H., and D. E. Nichols. J. Org. Chem., 51, 4294 (1986). Petrini, M., R. Ballini, and G. Rosini. Synthesis, 713 (1987). Satoh, T., S. Suzuki, Y. Suzuki, Y. Miyaji, and Z. Imai. Tetrahedron Lett., 4555 (1969). deLaszlo, S. E., S. V. Ley, and R. A. Porter. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 344 (1986). Yoon, N. M., and J. Choi. Synlett, 135 (1993). Yoo, S., and S. Lee. Synlett., 419 (1990). Osby, J. O., and B. Ganem. Tetrahedron Lett., 26, 6413 (1985). Heinzman, S.W., and B. Ganem. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 104, 6801 (1982). Chapuzet, J. M., B. Cote, M. Lavoie, E. Martel, C. Raffin, and J. Lessard. Novel Trends in Electro Organic Synthesis, ed. by S. Torii, pp 321–324, Kodansha, Tokyo (1995). Fitch, R. W., and F. A. Luzzio. Tetrahedron Lett., 35, 6013 (1994). Curran, T. T., G. A. Flynn, D. E. Rudisill, and P. M. Weintraub. Tetrahedron Lett., 36, 4761 (1995). Harsy, S. G. Tetrahedron, 46, 7403 (1990). Kende, A. S., and J. S. Mendoza. Tetrahedron Lett., 32, 1699 (1991). Nightingale, D. V., and J. R. Janes. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 66, 352 (1944). Baer, H. H., and W. Rank. Can. J. Chem., 50, 1292 (1972). Wehrli, P. A., and B. Schaer. Synthesis, 649 (1977). Koos, M. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 415 (1996). Maguire, M. P., P. L. Feldman and H. Rapoport. J. Org. Chem., 55, 948 (1990). Yadav, J. S., B. V. S. Reddy, R. Srinivas, and T. Ramalingam. Synlett., 1447 (2000). Shono, T., H. Hamaguch, H. Mikami, H. Nogusa, and S. Kashimura. J. Org. Chem., 48, 2103 (1983). Feuer, H., R. S. Bartlett, B. F. Vincent, Jr., and R. S. Anderson. J. Org. Chem., 30, 2880 (1965). Kabalka, G. W., L. H. M. Guindi, and R. S. Varma. Tetrahedron, 46, 7443 (1990). Ho, T. L., and T. L. Wong. Synthesis, 196 (1974). Barton, D. H. R., I. Fernandez, C. S. Richard, and S. Z. Zard. Tetrahedron, 43, 551 (1987). Albanese, D., D. Kandini, and M. Penso. Synthesis, 333 (1990). Hwu, J. R., W. N. Tseng, H. V. Atel, F. Wong, D. N. Horng, B. R. Liaw, and L. C. Lin. J. Org. Chem., 64, 2211 (1999). Bartra, M., P. Romea, F. Urpi, and J. Vilarrasa. Tetrahedron, 46, 587 (1990). Laso, N. M., B. Q. Sire, and S. Z. Zard. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 1605 (1996). Dumestre, D., L. E. Kaim, and A. Gregoire. Chem. Commun., 775 (1999). Domling, A., and I. Ugi. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 39, 3168 (2000). Chow, Y. L. The chemistry of amino, nitroso and nitro compounds and their derivatives, Supplement F, ed. by S. Patai, p. 127 John Wiley, New York (1982). Huu, D. P., M. Petrusova, J. N. BeMiller, and L Petrus. Synlett., 1319 (1998). Huu, D. P., M. Petrusova, J. N. BeMiller, and L. Petrus. Tetrahedron Lett., 40, 3053 (1999). Aurich, H. G. In the Chemistry of amino, nitroso and nitro compounds, ed. by S. Patai, John Wiley, 1982, Part 1, p. 565–622. Chiarelli, R., M. Novak, A. Rassat, and J. L. Tholence. Nature, 363, 147 (1993). Viret, J. P., G. Rest, and A. Rassat. Tetrahedron Lett., 40, 7102 (1999). Chary, K. P., S. R. Ram, and D. S. Iyengar. Synlett, 683 (2000). J. I. G. Cadogan, Synthesis, 11 (1969). Fisher, B., and L. Sheihet. J. Org. Chem., 63, 393 (1998).

The Nitro Group in Organic Synthesis. Noboru Ono Copyright © 2001 Wiley-VCH ISBNs: 0-471-31611-3 (Hardback); 0-471-22448-0 (Electronic)

7 SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2 The aliphatic nitro groups can be displaced by various nucleophiles via one electron transfer reactions (SRN1)1 or ionic reactions2 using palladium-catalyzed reactions of allylic nitro compounds, Lewis acid-catalyzed reactions, or intramolecular nucleophilic substitution reactions. These reactions have been well summarized by Kornblum1 and Ono;2 therefore, duplication of these is minimized here. The SRN1 reaction has also been applied to the direct replacement of the nitro group by hydrogen. This transformation is relatively new compared with the Nef reaction of nitro compounds or the reduction of the nitro group to the amino group, but it has already been widely accepted as a useful transformation in organic synthesis (Section 7.2). Elimination of the nitro group to afford alkenes proceeds either via radical or ionic processes, which provides a useful strategy for olefin synthesis (Section 7.3).

7.1 R–Nu FROM R–NO2 7.1.1 Radical Reactions (SRN1) In 1970, a new reaction, the displacement of a nitro group from α-nitro esters, α-nitro nitriles, α-nitro ketones, and α,α-dinitro compounds by nitroalkane salts, was described.3 These displacements, which are exemplified by the reaction presented in Eq. 7.1, take place at room temperature and give excellent yields of pure products. The reaction proceeds via a radical chain mechanism involving one electron-transfer processes as shown in Scheme 7.1; the details of the mechanism are described in a review.1 A

NO2

A = CO 2Et, COPh CN, NO 2

DMSO

+ O2N

A

NO2

+

NO2–

(7.1)

When α,α-dinitro compounds are employed, the nitro group is displaced by various stabilized carbanions as shown in Eqs. 7.2–7.5.4 182

7.1

A

NO2

A

NO2

+

O2N

A + A

+

NO2

A

183

O2N

NO2–

+ A

+

NO2

NO2

A

O2N

A

R–Nu FROM R–NO2

A

NO2

NO2

+ A

NO2

Scheme 7.1. SRN1 mechanism

NO2

NO2 NO2

DMSO 25 ºC, 15 min

+ O2N

NO2

(7.2)

91% O

O + O2N

CO2Me

NO2

DMSO 25 ºC

NO2 CO2Me

(7.3)

86% CO2Et + O2N

NO2

Me

SO2Ph

DMF 25 ºC

SO2Ph

O2N

CO2Et 80%

(7.4)

EtO2C CO2Et NO2

+

EtO2C CO2Et

DMSO

NO2

25 ºC

NO2

(7.5)

80%

α,α-Dinitro compounds are very reactive substrates for SRN1 reactions. They are readily prepared by oxidation of nitroalkane salts in the presence of nitrite ion with potassium ferricyanide.5 In a similar way, α-nitrosulfones and α-nitronitriles are prepared in excellent yields (see Eqs. 7.6–7.8).5 The modified procedure using persulfate and a catalytic amount of ferricyanide is very effective for the preparation of these compounds.6 NO2

+

NaNO2

NO2

K3Fe(CN)6

NO2

H2O

(7.6)

88%

O2N

+

KCN

K3Fe(CN)6 H2O

O2N 71%

CN

(7.7)

184

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

NO2

+

NO2

K3Fe(CN)6

PhSO2Na

(7.8)

SO2Ph

H2O

86%

Various α-nitronitriles are readily prepared by the reaction of Eq. 7.7; the reaction of α-nitronitriles with nitroalkane salts provides an excellent method for the preparation of β-nitronitriles (Eq. 7.9).7 NO2

+ + Na CH2NO2

CH2NO2

DMSO

(7.9)

CN

25 ºC

CN

80%

The reaction of tertiary nitro compounds with the sodium salt of nitromethane followed by the Nef reaction provides a good method for the preparation of quaternary aldehydes (Eq. 7.10).8 Because the nitromethyl group can be transformed into other groups such as CN, CO2H, or CH2NH2, the SRN1 reaction of tertiary nitro compounds with the anion of nitromethane is a synthetically useful method (Kornblum reaction).10 For example, the nitromethylation of tertiary nitro compounds has been applied for preparing starting materials for cascade polymers (Eq. 7.11).9 + – NaCH2NO2

O

t-BuO

O2N

NO2

DMSO 25 ºC

CN 3

O

O 1) t-BuONa

t-BuO

CH2NO2

2) KMnO4

t-BuO

95%

+ .– NaCH2NO2 DMSO

91%

PCl3

CN

O2N

CHO

NC

(7.10) CN 3

3

69%

Triton-B 1) MeOLi 2) KMnO4 OHC

CN

CN

CN

CN

O2N

3

82%

(7.11) 3

40%

Vasella has used deoxy-nitro sugars for the synthesis of various biologically important carbohydrates,10 and the radical nitromethylation of deoxy-nitro sugars has been used for synthesis of fructose 6-phosphate11 and 6-C-methyl and 6-C-(hydroxymethyl)analogues of N-acetylneuraminic acid (see Scheme 7.2).12 The key step in the synthesis of the branched sugars presented in Scheme 7.2 is a Kornblum reaction of the nitropyranose. A mixture of anomers is obtained in the reaction of nitrofuranose, but the reaction with nitropyranose proceeds diastereoselectively to give a single product with an equatorially oriented side chain. Tertiary nitro compounds are converted into the corresponding thiols by the reaction with sodium sulfide and sulfur (S8) in DMSO followed by the reduction with Al-Hg. (Eq. 7.12). Secondary and primary nitro compounds do not give thiols in these reactions; instead, a complex set of product is formed.13 Me NO2

1) Na2S, S

Me SH

2) Ag/Hg 85%

(7.12)

7.1

BnO O

BnO

OBn NO2

OBn OCH2OMe

O

+

NO2

OCH2OMe

BnO

BnO BnO

OBn

DMSO

1) MeONa

BnO

1) MeONa

OMOM

AcHN NO O 2

O

+ – NaCH2NO2

Ph O O MOMO

DMSO

AcHN

OBn CHO OCH2OMe

BnO OMOM

O

O

2) O3

OCH2OMe 17%

O

CHO

BnO

NO2

BnO

OCH2OMe

BnO

OBn O

OBn O

2) O3

NO2 49% +

BnO

+ – NaCH2NO2

BnO

OCH2OMe

O

Ph O O MOMO

185

R–Nu FROM R–NO2

O

O NO2

1) MeONa 2) O3

Ph O O MOMO

O

OMOM

AcHN R

O

O

R = CHO, CO2Me

94%

Ph O O MOMO

O

OMOM

AcHN Me O 86%

O

Ph O O MOMO

Bu3SnH AIBN

O

AcHN O S

O

O

Ph O O 1) CS2, NaOH MOMO

O AcHN

2) Me2 SO4 DMSO

SMe

NaBH4

HO HO MOMO

O

O AcHN

O OH

O

MeOCH2Cl Et(i-Pr2)N

OMOM O OMOM

OMOM

70%

89%

OMOM

AcHN Me O 88%

OMOM

O

Na/NH3 HO HO MOMO

88%

O

Na/NH3

Ph O O MOMO

O AcHN

OMOM

O OMOM 91%

O

87%

Scheme 7.2.

7.1.2 Ionic Process Simple nitroalkanes such as nitroethane, 1-nitropropane, or 2-nitropropane are generally bad electrophiles for the SN2 reactions.14 In contrast, nitro groups at allylic positions are readily displaced by thiolate ions (Eq. 7.13)15 or lithium dialkylcuprates (Eq. 7.14).16

NO2

+

PhSNa

SPh

HMPA 50 ºC

(7.13)

62%

Me O2N CO2Me

+ (n-Bu) CuLi 2

ether –30 ºC

n-C5H11

CO2Me

Me 70% (E/Z = 96/4)

(7.14)

186

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

In 1982, a new reaction was reported by Tamura and Ono; namely, allylic nitro compounds undergo replacement of the nitro group by various nucleophiles in the presence of a palladium (0) catalyst.17a–b, 18a–b The details of these reactions are discussed in Ref. 2b; here, only some typical examples are presented. Carbon, sulfur, nitrogen, and phosphorous centered nucleophiles replace the nitro groups at the allylic positions. The reaction of allylic nitro compounds with triphenylphosphine is applied to the highly stereoselective olefination of aldehydes (Eqs. 7.15–7.18).19 Me Me + NaCH(CO2Me)2

Me NO2

Me

Pd(PPh3)4

+

Me

H

(7.15)

Me CH(CO2Me)2

THF

CH(CO2Me)2 63% (7:3) SO2Ph

NO2 +

Pd(PPh3)4

PhSO2Na

(7.16)

DMF 20 ºC, 10 h

H

70%

NO2

N Pd(PPh3)4

+

(7.17)

DMF 80 ºC, 10 h

N H

87% PPh3+ NO2–

NO2 +

Pd(PPh3)4

PPh3

(7.18)

MeOH-THF 65 ºC, 24 h 80%

Allyl acetates are more commonly used as electrophiles for the palladium-catalyzed allylic alkylation than allylic nitro compounds.20 However, the reaction of allylic nitro compounds has found wider applications. Allylic nitro compounds are readily available by nitration of alkenes. The regio- and stereoselective introduction of electrophiles and nucleophiles into alkenes is possible as outlined in Eq. 7.19. In fact, this strategy is applied to the synthesis of terpenoids.21 NO2

NO2

El: electrophiles Nu: nucleophiles

+ NO2

mixture EI

NO2

Nu, Pd(0)

EI

Nu

Me

Me

NO2

O TMG

EI

Me Me

O NO2 75%

7.1

Me

Me

Pd(PPh3)4 (5 mol%)

O

NaCH(CO2Me)2

187

R–Nu FROM R–NO2

terpenoid

MeO2C CO2Me 79% (E/Z = 89/11)

(7.19)

The starting allylic nitro compound is obtained by nitration of 2-methylpropene with NO2. Subsequent Michael addition to methyl vinyl ketone followed by Pd-catalyzed allylic alkylation affords terpenoids. Recently, elegant synthesis of anti-MRS carbapenum has been reported. Sequential reaction of nitromethane via conjugate addition-elimination to α,β-unsaturated esters followed by Pd-catalyzed substitution of the resulting allyl nitro compound with the naphthosultam affords the allylation product which is an anti (Eq. 7.20).22

O

Si

O

PNB : p-nitrobenzyl

Si

CH3NO2 OTf

N O

NO2

TMG

N O

CO2PNB

OH

HN SO2 Pd(OAc)4 (5%) (EtO)3P (15%)

CO2PNB 60–70%

O

OH

Si N SO2 N

O

CO2PNB

(7.20)

34%

Allylic nitro derivatives undergo the SN1 reaction in aqueous acetic acid. Allylic sulfones in the presence of a sulfinate salt (Eq. 7.21) or allylic lactones if the substrate contains a suitably located ester group are formed in these reactions (Eq. 7.22).22 Me

Me NO2

+

PhSO2Na

AcOH-H2O

SO2Ph

reflux, 1 h

(7.21)

84% O O MeO

NO2

O

O OMe

AcOH-H2O

O

MeO

(7.22)

reflux, 1.25 h

75%

Tamura and coworkers have reported a related substitution reaction; cyclic α-(nitroalkyl) enones undergo regioselective substitution of the nitro group by sulfinate ion, amino, and carbon nucleophiles (Eq. 7.23).24 Several reaction pathways are envisioned for this useful

188

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

transformation involving electron-transfer mechanisms, such as SRN1,25 or a simple additionelimination process.24 R1

O PhSO2Na

SO2Ph

DMF RT, 0.5 h

n

70–90% O

R1 NO2

O

R2

N H

R1

R2 N

MeCN RT, 1 h

(7.23)

n

n = 1, 2, 3

73–95% O

R1

NO2

NO2

DMF n

60%

This reaction is nicely applied to total synthesis of Clavularin A26b as shown in Scheme 7.3. The key reactions involve a high enantioselective addition-elimination process26a and stereoselective synthesis of cis-2,3-disubstituted cycloheptanones.27 OMe

O NO2

O

OMe

O

N H

N

Me2CuLi Me 87% (96% ee) O

97% O O SiMe3

Me Me

TiCl4

Me

41% (cis/trans = 94/6) Clavularin A Scheme 7.3.

Lewis acids are also effective to induce the nucleophilic substitution of allylic nitro compounds. These compounds react with allyltrimethylsilane,28 silyl enolates,28 or cyanotrimethylsilane29 in the presence of SnCl4 to give substitution products, respectively (see Eqs. 7.24–7.26). Me NO2

+

C6H13

–10 ºC, 10 min

Me

+

65%

Me O

OSiMe3 Me NO2

C6H13

SnCl4 Me3Si

(7.24)

Me

SnCl4

Me

–10 ºC, 30 min 75%

(7.25)

7.1

CO2Me

Me

Me CN

Me3SiCN SnCl4

Me NO2

189

R–Nu FROM R–NO2

CO2Me +

CO2Me

RT, 30 min

(7.26)

CN 75% (7:3)

Thus, the nitro group at the allylic position is replaced by nucleophiles in the following three ways: (1) assistance by transition metal, (2) assistance by Lewis acids, and (3) assistance by proton. Zard and coworkers have reported a short total synthesis of estrone derivatives, where acid catalyzed allylic 1,3-shift of nitro group is used as a key step as shown in Scheme 7.4.30 The Knoevnagel reaction of 6-methoxytetralone with nitromethane in the presence of ethylenediamine followed by the nitro-aldol reaction and the Michael addition gives the required allylic nitro compounds. Subsequent treatment with acetic acid induces 1,3-shift of the nitro group. Base catalyzed cyclization gives the estrone derivative. Finally the nitro group is removed by radical denitration (see Section 7.2). Allylic nitro groups are readily displaced by nucleophiles via an SN1-type mechanism. Thus, nitro groups with heteroatoms at the α- or β-positions (for example, α- or β-nitrosulfides) are expected to be cleaved in a similar way. In fact, the nitro group in α-nitrosulfides is replaced by nucleophiles in the presence of a Lewis acid31 or acetic acid.32 The nitro groups in the reaction of Eqs. 7.27 and 7.28 are cleanly replaced by CN, allyl, or PhS group on treatment with Me3SiY (Y = CN, allyl) in the presence of SnCl4 or simple treatment with PhSH in AcOH. SPh CN

SnCl4

C9H19

95%

C9H19

SnCl4

NO2

(7.27)

84% O

O

OAc

OAc

PhSH AcOH

NO2

(7.28)

SPh SPh 70%

SPh

O 2N

O

1) CH2O aq, Et3N, THF-i PrOH 2) Ac2O, DMAP, CH2Cl2

CH3NO2 cat.(CH2NH2)2 reflux

MeO

SPh

SiMe3

SPh

Me3SiCN C9H19

MeO

O 2N

OAc

MeO O

O 2N

O

O

Et3N THF-i PrOH

O 2N O

MeO

MeO 73% O O 2N

AcOH 55 ºC

O

O NO2

DBU MeOH

OH MeO

MeO 77%

89%

Scheme 7.4.

190

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

α-Nitro ethers effect a similar SN1-type substitution under solvolytic conditions; tertiary nitro compounds derived from 1-deoxy-1-nitroaldose and formaldehyde or methyl acrylate undergo denitro-hydroxylation or intramolecular lactonization, respectively (Eq. 7.29).33 O HCHO

O

O O

O

O

O O

NaHCO3

OH

H2O-dioxane 70 ºC

NO2 O

O

O

O

O

O

OH

O

76% OH

H

(7.29) O

NO2

CO2Me

O

CO2Me O

O

O

O

NaHCO3 H2O-dioxane 70 ºC

NO2

O

O

O

O O

69%

O

This type of substitution reaction is useful for the synthesis of biologically active nucleosides. 1-Deoxy-1-nitroribose reacts with 2,4-bis(trimethylsilyloxy)pyrimidine in the presence of FeCl3 in MeCN to give the nucleoside in 77% yield (Eq. 7.30).34 O RO

NH

NO2

OSiMe3

O O

OAc

O

FeCl3

N

+ N

RO

N

O

O

MeCN OSiMe3

O

O

OAc

(7.30) 77%

Furthermore, a neighboring group participation of a phenylthio function is observed in the Lewis acid-catalyzed nucleophilic substitution reaction of various β-nitrosulfides. Because the β-nitrosulfides are readily available, by the Michael addition of thiols to nitroalkenes (see Michael addition Chapter 4), this reaction is very useful. The β-nitrosulfides are prepared stereoselectively, and the reaction proceeds in a stereo-specific way (retention of configuration) as shown in Eqs. 31–34.35

NO2 +

TiCl4, CH2Cl2 Me3Si

RT, 1 h

SPh NO2 +

TiCl4, CH2Cl2 Me3Si

RT, 1 h

SPh

PhS

(7.31) SPh 65% (100% anti)

NO2 Me

SnCl4, CH2Cl2 RT, 6 h

(7.32) SPh 65% (anti/syn = 95/5)

SPh Me 76% (100% trans)

(7.33)

7.1

NO2

PhS

SnCl4, CH2Cl2

(7.34)

SPh Me 70% (trans/cis = 2/98)

RT, 6 h

Me

191

R–Nu FROM R–NO2

Ring expansion of cyclic ketones via nitro-aldol reaction of α-nitrosulfides followed by treatment with AlCl3 has been reported (Eq. 7.35).36 PhS HO

O PhS

Me

NO2

O

NO2

SPh

AlCl3 Me

–80 ºC

0 ºC, 30 min Ph

Ph

Ph

Me 74%

(7.35)

7.1.3 Intramolecular Nucleophilic Substitution Reaction Although the base-catalyzed addition of nitroalkanes to electron-deficient olefins has been extensively used in organic synthesis (see Michael addition Chapter 4), it is only recently that the reaction has been extended to the cyclopropanation reaction. In 1978, it was reported that the anion of nitromethane reacts with certain highly electron-deficient olefins to produce cyclopropanes in good yield (Eq. 7.36).36 More recently, this reaction has been extended to more general cyclopropanations, as shown in Eqs. 7.37 and 7.38, in which potassium salts of nitroalkanes are employed in DMSO as alkylidene transfer reagents.37–39 Me

Me

CO2Me

CO2Me

NaCH2NO2 MeOH 100 ºC, 2 h

(7.36)

MeO

MeO

85% CO2Me +

DMSO

+

25 ºC, 6 h

K

CN

CN

NO2

(7.37)

CO2Me 86%

R

CO2Me

K+ NO2

+ H

CN

DMSO 25 ºC

R

CN

H

CO2Me

(7.38)

Alumina-supported KF is an effective reagent for Michael addition of nitroalkanes to electron-deficient olefins. Subsequent cycloalkylations afford cyclopropanes.37 However, the reaction of α,β-unsaturated ketones with nitroalkanes in the presence of KF-Al2O3 in acetonitrile gives 4,5-dihydrofuranes (Eq. 7.39).40 Ph H

CO2Me

Ph

O Me CO2Me

+

NO2

KF-Al2O3 MeCN 80 ºC, 13 h

O 90%

(7.39)

192

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

Yosikoshi reported the synthesis of furan derivatives by the reaction of 1,3-diketones with nitroalkenes, in which the Michael addition of the anions of 1,3-diketones and the subsequent intramolecular displacement of the nitro group by enolate oxygen are involved as key steps (Eq. 7.40).42 O

O

O

SPh KF

+

NO2 H

O

NaIO4, CCl4

SPh

xylene reflux

reflux

O

O

81%

91%

(7.40) In some cases, no cycloalkylation is observed by the reaction of nitromethane with electrondeficient olefins with cyano and methoxycarbonyl groups. The reaction affords new, highly functionalized cyclohexenes in the presence of catalytic amount of piperidine under solvent-free conditions with focused microwave irradiation (Eq. 7.41).42

Ph

NH

CN +

H

Ph

MeNO2

microwave irradiation

CO2Me

NC CO2Me NH2

O2N

(7.41)

CO2Me Ph 70%

The tandem Michael and cyclopropanation reaction of lithium enolates with nitroalkenes gives tricyclic ketones in one pot, as shown in Eq. 7.42.43 Me

OLi

O

THF/HMPA

+

NO2

–78 ºC

Me

65 ºC

Me

(7.42)

Me 63%

7.1.4 Allylic Rearrangement Allylic nitro compounds undergo [2.3]sigmatropic rearrangement to afford rearranged alcohols, as shown in Eq. 7.4346 and Eq. 7.44.47 Because the allylic nitro compounds used in these reactions are readily prepared either by the Henry reaction or the Michael addition, these reactions may be useful in organic synthesis. OAc OAc

OAc OAc NO2

(7.43)

tetralin OH

190 ºC AcO

AcO

85% O NO2

Me

Me Ph

O

Me Me

214 ºC

Ph

Me

OH

O 15%

Me Me

H

+ Ph

O 18%

Me Me

(7.44)

7.2

R–H FROM R–NO2

193

7.2 R–H FROM R–NO2 The replacement of the nitro group by hydrogen is a relatively new reaction as compared with other traditional functional transformations. Good reviews are available for this transformation.48 The removal of the nitro group after the construction of the carbon frameworks using the activating property of the nitro group is a recent strategy in organic synthesis. Thus, anions derived from nitroalkanes can be regarded as equivalent of alkyl anions. Alkyl anions are generally difficult to generate (pKa = ca. 50 for R-H) and hence unstable at room temperature, but the anions of nitroalkanes are generated readily (pKa = ca. 10 for RCH2NO2), stable, and selective in the presence of other electron-withdrawing groups. The denitration reaction is now widely used for the synthesis of complex natural products with various functional groups. 7.2.1 Radical Denitration Denitrohydrogenation can be achieved either by radical or ionic processes. The first radical denitration was done with MeSNa in DMSO or HMPA (Eq. 7.45)49 followed by heating with KOH in ethylene glycol (Eq. 7.46).50 The reaction using MeSNa has played a pioneering role in this area. An electron-transfer chain mechanism has been proposed for these reactions, in which radical anions and free radicals are involved. The nitro groups, which are replaced by hydrogen using MeSNa, are limited to tertiary ones. Some of them are listed in Table 7.1. Me

Me

Me

NO2

Me

+

MeSNa

HMPA

(7.45)

25 ºC CN 82%

CN

Me

H

Me

H

O

O

NO2

O

O

Me

Me

+

KOH

HOCH2CH2OH 140 ºC

Me

(7.46)

Me

50%

In 1981, Ono51 and Tanner52 reported independently that Bu3SnH is a more versatile reagent for denitrohydrogenation than MeSNa. A radical initiator, 2,2-azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN)51 or benzoylperoxide,52 was used (see Table 7.1). α-Nitrocumene is converted into cumene in 92% yield on treatment with Bu3SnH (Eq. 7.47), whereas the yield is only 29% if the same conversion is carried out using MeSNa. Although several other radical denitration reagents such as 1,4-dihydronicotinamide (Eq. 7.48),53 NaTeH (Eq. 7.49),54 and Na2S2O4-Et3SiH (Eq. 7.50)55 have been used, tin hydride is most widely employed for effecting this useful transformation. Me

Me Me

Me

NO2 +

Bu3SnH

H

AIBN benzene reflux

(7.47) 92%

194

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

H CN O Et C CH2CH2 C Me NO2

H O C

+

NH2

Et

O CN C CH2CH2 C Me H

25 ºC

N CH2Ph

60%

(7.48)

Me

Me Me

HMPA

Me

NO2 +

NaTeH

H

(7.49)

C2H5OH 25 ºC SO2Ph

SO2Ph

82%

Table 7.1. Denitration of nitro compounds with MeSNa or Bu3SnH R-NO2

Product

Reagent

Yield (%)

Ref.

95

49

95

52

82

49

90

52

83

49

85

52

Bu3SnH, AIBN benzene (80 °C) 1.5 h

92

51

Bu3SnH, AIBN benzene, 1.5 h

92

51

Bu3SnH, AIBN benzene, 1.5 h

64

51

Bu3SnH, AIBN benzene, 1.5 h

75

51

Bu3SnH, AIBN benzene, 1.5 h

78

51

Bu3SnH, AIBN benzene, 1.5 h

83

51

MeSNa DMSO, 3 h Bu3SnH, (PhCO) 2O2 benzene, 18 h MeSNa HMPA, 16 h Bu3SnH, (PhCO) 2O2 benzene, 18 h MeSNa DMF, 8 h Bu3SnH, (PhCO) 2O2 benzene, 18 h

7.2

H Ph C C Me O NO2

+

H Ph C C Me

Na2S2O4

Et3SiH

195

R–H FROM R–NO2

(7.50)

O H

HMPA-H2O 25 ºC

70%

Tanner and coworkers investigated the denitrohydrogenation reaction and proposed an electron-transfer mechanism, which is analogous to the denitration mechanism using MeSNa.52. These nitro compounds are all tertiary and rather special. The results are summarized in Table 7.1. On the other hand, Ono and coworkers have selected the more general nitro compounds which are formed by the conventional reactions such as the Henry reaction or the Michael reaction, for denitration with tin radical. They have found that such nitro groups are cleanly denitrated with Bu3SnH. Now, the sequence of the Henry reaction or Michael reaction and denitration provides a very useful strategy for organic synthesis. The regio-controlled carboncarbon bond formation and functional selective denitration are very attractive, as exemplified in Eqs. 7.51–7.53. The nitro group is selectively removed from the compounds, which contain other functional groups such as Cl, OH, C?O, CN, SO, and SO2 groups. The sequence of the Michael addition of nitroalkanes and denitration provides a new and general method for conjugate additions of primary and secondary alkyl groups.56 Ph

NO2

NO2

+

Bu3SnH, AIBN CO2Me

Ph

benzene, 80 ºC

CO2Me

Ph

(7.51)

CO2Me

O +

O NO2

TMG

O NO2

DBU SOPh

NO2

SOPh

72%

NO2

CO2Me

TMG NO2

CO2Me 48%

TMG

(7.52) 70%

O

CH3NO2 O

SOPh

AIBN

72%

O

TMG

O

Bu3SnH

74%

O

O2N

CO2Me

SO2Ph

SO2Ph 73%

SO2Ph

Bu3SnH

CO2Me

AIBN O 85%

(7.53)

Synthetic chemists have long lauded the radical reactivity profile of Bu3SnH, but bemoaned its separation of organic tin compounds from the product and toxicity problems. To overcome these drawbacks of tin reagents, several alternatives to Bu3SnH have been devised: such as polymeric tin hydrides,57 acid soluble tin hydrides,58 water-soluble tin hydrides,59 and tris(2(perfluorohexyl)ethyl)tin hydride.60 The last reagent is used in C6H5CF3. Tin reagents and the denitrated products are separated by liquid-liquid extraction using perfluoromethylcyclohexane and CH2Cl2. This is a new technique for the purification and separation of organic compounds using organic fluorine compounds (Eq. 7.54).

196

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

O2N

OSO2Me OSO2Me (C6F13CH2CH2)3SnH OSO2Me

H

AIBN, C6H5CF3 reflux, 24 h

OSO2Me OSO2Me

(7.54)

OSO2Me 88%

Silicon hydrides, in particular (Me3Si)3SiH, can serve as substituents for Bu3SnH in a number of radical-mediated processes.61 However, silicon hydrides cannot promote the reduction of tertiary nitroalkanes to alkanes.62 In 1998, Fu reported the catalytic cycle for the Bu3SnH-catalyzed reduction of nitroalkanes to alkanes, using 10% Bu3SnH as the catalyst and PhSiH3 as the reducing agent (see Eq. 7.55 and Scheme 7.5). The new catalytic reaction proceeds with efficiency, comparable to the stoichiometric Bu3SnH method (Table 7.2).63 Like the stoichiometric method, the catalytic reaction is effective for the reduction of tertiary nitroalkanes and activated secondary nitroalkanes and is compatible with functionality, such as ethers, acetals, ketones, esters, nitriles, and mesylates. The conversion of nitroalkanes to alkanes is currently most often accomplished with stoichiometric Bu3SnH, but the environmentally friendlier Bu3SnH-catalyzed variant may become the method of choice for effecting these important transformations. NO2

H

Bu3SnH

PhSiONO

Bu3SnONO

PhSiH3

Scheme 7.5. Bu3SnH-catalyzed reduction of nitroalkanes to alkanes

Table 7.2. Bu3SnH-catalyzed reduction of nitroalkane to alkanes Yield (%) Substrate

a

Catalyzed

a

76

77

71

74

75

78

70

67

61

58

10% Bu3SnH, PhSiH3 (0.5 equiv), ACHN (0.2 equiv), toluene, 110 °C, 5 h. Bu3SnH (1.5 equiv), ACHN (0.2 equiv), toluene, 110 °C, 5 h.

b

Stoichb

7.2

R

NO2

R

R

R–H FROM R–NO2

10% Bu3SnH

R

H

0.5 equiv PhSiH3 initiator, toluene, ∆

R

R

197

(7.55)

Although the nitro compounds, which can be denitrated, are mostly tertiary ones, the radial denitration using Bu3SnH can also be applied to secondary nitro compounds. The nitro groups at benzylic and allylic positions are readily denitrated with Bu3SnH by the procedure that is used for the denitration of tertiary nitro compounds (60–80% yield). The secondary nitro groups of α-nitro ketones or α-nitro esters are also cleanly replaced by hydrogen on treatment with Bu3SnH (Eq. 7.56).56 SPh

SPh

CO2Me

Bu3SnH, AIBN

NO2

benzene

O

CO2Me

O

(7.56) 75%

The unactivated secondary nitro groups are rather difficult to be replaced by hydrogen. Rather drastic conditions using a large excess of Bu3SnH in refluxing toluene are required for the denitration of simple secondary nitro groups.64 Although the yield is moderate (40–60%), the direct removal of the secondary nitro groups is synthetically useful. Some examples are presented in Eq. 7.57,64 Eq. 7.58,65 and Eq. 7.59.66 The high yield reported in Eq. 7.59 is exceptional. Any other methods without using Bu3SnH fail in denitrating secondary nitro groups. O

Me

O Bu3SnH, AIBN

O

Me

(7.57)

O

toluene NO2

48% O

O NO2

CO2Me

CO2Me Bu3SnH

Si O O

Si

AIBN toluene

Si O O

Si

(7.58)

CO2Me

(7.59)

30% OAc

OAc CO2Me

Bu3SnH, AIBN benzene

NO2

93%

Primary nitro groups are much more difficult to be replaced by hydrogen. Indirect methods are required for the conversion of a nitromethyl group to a methyl group. The Nef reaction and subsequent reduction via the hydroxymethyl group and radical deoxygenation may be the method of choice for this conversion (see Scheme 7.2). However, in 1995, Witczak and Li reported the removal of primary nitro groups by reaction with Bu3SnH in the presence of 1,1′-azobis(cyclohexanecarbonitrile)(ABCN) (Eq. 7.60).67 This is the only report of the radical

198

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

denitration of a primary nitro group. The mechanism of denitration is shown in Scheme 7.6. When R is tertiary or secondary, alkyl radicals are formed. However, the scission of N–O bond to give nitroso (oxime) is the more favored process for the reaction of primary nitro compounds with tin radicals. O

O toluene

OH NO2

O2N

O

Bu3SnH, AIBN

O

(7.60)

Me OH

Me

70%

Recently, it was reported that a nitromethyl group was reduced to the corresponding oxime by reaction with Bu3SnH in the presence of radical initiator (Eq. 7.61).68 Interestingly, primary nitro groups are selectively reduced to oximes in the reaction of the compounds containing both primary and secondary nitro groups (Eq. 7.62).69 The product of Eq. 7.60 may not be correct, but may be the oxime. OAc

OAc O

AcO AcO

Bu3SnH, AIBN

NO2

benzene

O

AcO AcO

OAc 90%

OAc

(7.61)

CH=NOH

Me

Me NO2 O

O

O

O

O Me Me

Me

O

O O

Me

O NO2

Me

NO2 O

O

O

O

Bu3SnH

Me

ABCN

Me

Me

HC

O

O O

Me

O N OH

Me

Me

Me

O

Me Me

(7.62)

70%

The mechanism for the reduction of nitro compounds with Bu3SnH has been established as shown in Scheme 7.6. The key propagation steps are the addition of Bu3Sn– to the nitro group and the subsequent elimination of an alkyl radical. Cleavage at the carbon-nitrogen bond is characteristic to tin adducts of nitro compounds, whereas fragmentation takes place preferentially at the nitrogen-oxygen bond in the analogous adducts of other radicals. The mechanism of radical denitration with tin hydride and related reactions has been well studied.70 Because the radical denitration using Bu3SnH proceeds under neutral conditions with high-functional selectivity, it has been widely used in organic synthesis. It is noteworthy that the nitro group is selectively replaced by hydrogen without affecting other reducible groups, such as Cl, CF3, CHO, and PhSO groups. The Henry reaction of nitroalkanes followed by denitration is a good method for the preparation of alcohols. This methodology has been applied in carbohydrate chemistry. For

O R-NO2

+

B u3Sn

Bu3Sn O

N

R

+

Bu3SnONO

R

nitroxide Scheme 7.6.

R-NO

+

Bu 3SnO

7.2

199

R–H FROM R–NO2

example, the reaction of 1-deoxy-1-nitroaldoses with formaldehyde followed by denitration opens a new way to C-glycoside (see Eq. 7.63,71 Eq. 7.64,71 and Eq. 7.65.72 BnO

BnO O

BnO BnO

benzene

OAc BnO NO2

O

O

O

O

O

O

NO2

O

O

O

Bu3SnH, AIBN benzene

H OAc O

O

BnO BnO

Bu3SnH, AIBN

O

(7.63)

OAc

OBn 95% O O

O

H OAc O

O

O

O

O

(7.64)

O

89% Ph

O O AcO

OH

Ph

O AcHN

Bu3SnH, AIBN

O

NO2 O

OH

O O AcO

O AcHN

benzene

H

O

O(7.65)

97%

Martin has used this strategy for the preparation of β-(1,6) and β,β-(1,1) linked C-disaccharides, as shown in Scheme 7.7.73 Such C-disaccharides are a class of nonhydrolyzable mimics of disaccharide and potential glycosidase inhibitors in the treatment of metabolic diseases (Scheme 7.7). OAc OO

OAc AcO AcO

O CH2NO2 + OAc

NO2 O

O O

AcO AcO

KF CH3CN

O O

OH OAc OO

O

52% O OAc

O Ac2O pyridine

OAc

NO2 O

AcO AcO

OAc OAc

NO2 O

O NaBH4

O

AcO AcO

O O

OAc OO

O

71%

O

O

91% O

Bu3SnH

AcO AcO

OAc OO

AIBN

O

1) MeO– O O

2) H3O+ O

57%

Scheme 7.7.

HO HO

CH2OH O OH OH O HO 89%

OH

OH

200

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2 OBn

O NO2

O

BnO BnO

TMG

O

+

BnO OH

O

O OBn

O

Bu3SnH, AIBN

O

BnO BnO

toluene O

BnO OH NO2

O OBn BnO BnO

O

O BnO OH 68%

OAc

1) BF3•Et2O, Et3SiH 2) L-Selectride O 3) Pd(OH)2/C, H2 4) Ac2O

OAc O

AcO AcO

OAc

O

OAc OAc

Scheme 7.8.

The Michael addition of nitroalkanes followed by denitration is also a useful method for the preparation of C-disaccharide. The Michael addition of glucosyl nitromethane to the levoglucosenone proceeds stereoselectively, and subsequent denitration gives the C-disaccharide in 68% yield (Scheme 7.8).74 Elegant application of the Michael addition of nitroalkanes to enones followed by denitration is demonstrated in the synthesis of (+) dihydromevinol, (see Scheme 7.9).75

Si

NO2 O

Si

CHO Me

1) MeNO2, MeONa

Me

2) CH3SO2Cl, Et3N 3) NaBH4

Me

O

Me 70% O

1) HF 2) (S)-2-methyl butyric anhydride, DMAP O

O

O Si NO2 Me

O

NO2 Si O

O Me

amberlyst A-21

Me O

70%

O

Bu3SnH, AIBN

O Si

toluene reflux Me Me

Me 70%

55% Scheme 7.9.

7.2

201

R–H FROM R–NO2

Because the α-nitroketones are prepared by the acylation of nitroalkanes (see Section 5.2), by the oxidation of β-nitro alcohols (Section 3.2.3), or by the nitration of enol acetates (Section 2.2.5), denitration of α-nitro ketones provides a useful method for the preparation of ketones (Scheme 7.10). A simple synthesis of cyclopentenone derivatives is shown in Eq. 7.66.76 O MeO

O2N

O

NO2 +

N

N

OMe

(CH2)7CO2Me

OMe 80%

O O

(CH2)7CO2Me H

1) Bu3SnH, AIBN 2) H+

(CH2)7CO2Me OMe

t-BuOK DMSO

MeONa

(CH2)6CO2Me

O

(7.66)

73%

Magnus and coworker have presented a new strategy for the preparation of taxane diterpenes by using nitro-aldol reaction and denitration as key steps (see Scheme 7.11).77 The high acidity of α-nitroketones makes it possible to perform the Henry reactions or Michael additions under extremely mild conditions. The reaction proceeds in the presence of catalytic amounts of Ph3P to give the C–C bond formation products under nearly neutral conditions. Thus, 1,5-dicarbonyl compounds78 and α-methylenecarbonyl compounds79 are prepared by the denitration of α-nitroketones, as shown in Eqs. 7.67 and 7.68, respectively. O

O

n-C7H15

Me

H +

Ph3P

n-C7H15

O Bu3SnH, AIBN

H

Me

C6H13

O

O Me

3) Bu3SnH, AIBN 4) DBU

NO2

(7.67)

H Me 87%

1) HCHO, Ph3P 2) Ac2O

O

87%

O

n-C7H15

benzene

O

O

NO2

O

NO2

Me

C6H13

(7.68)

70% (overall)

Ballini and coworkers have reported a simple synthesis of 1-phenylheptane-1,5-dione based on the strategy of the Michael addition and denitration as shown in Eq. 7.69).80 The product is a natural product that is isolated from fungus. O O Ph

NO2 +

1) Ph3P O

2) Bu3SnH, AIBN

Ph O 50% (overall)

(7.69)

202

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

R1CH2NO2 +

O R2 C Im NO2

R1CH2NO2

base

2

+

R CHO

Oxidation

Bu3SnH

R2

1

R

O R2

R1

R2

R1

AIBN

O

NO2+

OAc NO2

NO2 R2

R1

+

base

E

O

R1

E

E = electrophiles

E

Bu3SnH

R2

R2

R1

O

O

Scheme 7.10.

Biologically active natural products frequently contain medium or large rings, and many methods have been used in preparing of such compounds.81 Hesse and coworkers have exploited an elegant ring expansion reaction of α-nitroketones using the ability of the nitro group to stabilize a carbanion (retro-acylation of nitro compounds). Various macro cyclic compounds are now prepared by this route (see Section 5.3).82 The carbon-carbon bondforming reactions of α-nitroketones followed by an intramolecular addition of the alkoxide to the carbonyl group give the ring-expanded products. The nitro groups are finally removed on treatment with Bu3SnH. For example, tetradecano-14-lactone is prepared via palladiumcatalyzed allylation (Section 5.5) of 2-nitrocyclodecanone followed by ozonolysis, reduction, ring expansion, and denitration, as shown in Scheme 7.12.83 In a similar way, (–)-15-hexadodecanolide (Scheme 7.13)84, (+)-13-tetradodecanolide (Scheme 7.14),85 and muscone (Scheme 7.15)86 are prepared.

NC

Me

Me

H

NC

O

O

O

MeNO2, DBU

DIBAL

CH2Cl2, –15 ºC

CH2Cl2, –78 ºC

H

O 2N

OTBS

O

OTBS

85% (α:β = 2:1) Me

Me OHC

HO

O

O

TMG O 2N

O

H

CH2Cl2, 25 ºC

O2N

OTBS

H

O

OTBS

90%

90% Me Dess-Martin oxidation CH2Cl2

O O 2N

Me O

O

O

Bu3SnH, AIBN benzene, reflux

H

O

OTBS

79%

H

O

60% Scheme 7.11.

OTBS

7.2

O

O

O NO2

O

203

R–H FROM R–NO2

NO2

CO2Et

CHO NO2

O3,Zn

Pd (0)

98%

O

91%

O O

O Bu3SnH

DIBAL NO2

AIBN

85%

28% Scheme 7.12.

Enantioselective nitro-aldol reaction (see Section 3.3) or Michael reaction (see Section 4.4) followed by radical denitration is useful as an alternative indirect method of enantioselective 1,2- or 1,4-addition of alkyl anions (see Eq. 7.7087 and Eq. 7.7188). OH

OH Me

CHO

Me

(R)

cat. Me H Me

OCOPh

Me

Me NO2 Me

Me (R)

Bu3SnH AIBN

NO2

H Me

(7.70) OCOPh

OCOPh 65% (88% ee)

70%

cat.: La-K-(S)-6,6-bis(triethylsilyl)ethynyl BINOL (see Section 3.3) O O

O

NO2

Bu3SnH

+ 84% (84% ee)

NO2

84% (84% ee)

O

O

O

AIBN

O2N

CO2Rb N H (5 mol%)

O

(7.71)

Me

Me Me

H +

Me

O O

O O

O Ti Me

Me

NO2 Et2O, –30 ºC, 3 h 63% O

O

Bu3SnH, AIBN toluene, reflux

47% Scheme 7.13.

Me

204

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

O

O NO2

O

O Base O

Me NO2 Me

O

O

(S)-Alpine hydride

O

Me

Bu3SnH NO2

AIBN

72%

44%

Scheme 7.14.

The reduction of nitro ketones with baker’s yeast is a good method for the preparation of chiral nitro alcohols.89 The reduction of 5-nitro-2-pentanone with baker’s yeast gives the corresponding (S)-alcohol, which is an important chiral building block. Various chiral natural products are prepared from it. In Scheme 7.16, the synthesis of the pheromone of Andrena haemorrhoa is described, where the acylation of the chiral nitro alcohol followed by radical denitration is involved as key steps.89a The Michael addition of heteroatom nucleophiles to nitroalkenes (Section 4.1.1) followed by denitration provides a useful method for the preparation of various natural products.

HO

O

Me O

NO2

NO2

CHO Bu3P

O

O

61%

OH

MeO

MeONa

Me NO2

Me NO2

CrO3

O

47%

O

MeO

51%

O

MeO

Me

Me

Bu3SnH

O

KOH

AIBN toluene 57% Scheme 7.15.

100% (±)-muscone

7.2

OH

Si Cl O

NO2

Si

O

1) DBU N

N

O

Si

NO2 62%

1) LDA

O

O

2)

Si

O

OTHP

Cl 3) NaI

92%

O

Me

100%

Bu3SnH, AIBN

Si

O

2)

NO2

97% ee

205

R–H FROM R–NO2

OTHP 43% O

OH

HCl/MeOH

O

O OH 46% (97% ee) Pheromone Andrena heamorrhoa Scheme 7.16.

Kitagawa and coworkers have used this strategy for the preparation of pseudo-nucleosides exhibiting various biological activities. The synthesis of (–)-aristeromycin from D-glucose is demonstrated in Scheme 7.17.90 Naturally occurring and synthetic polyhydroxylated pyrrolidine and piperidines have recently received considerable attention due to their biological activities. Barco has used tandem Michael-Henry reactions to synthesize 2-hydroxymethyl-3-hydroxy-4-nitro-pyrrolidines, from which the nitro group is removed to give the natural product, trans 2-hydroxymethyl-3-hydroxypyrrolidine (Eq. 7.72).91

NHBz N NO2

BzO

N H

D-glucose

OHCO

N

N N

NO2

BzO

OBn

N

NHBz

N OHCO

N

OBn 78% N

N N

N

NHBz

Bu3SnH

N

N

N

H2, Pd/C

AIBN HO

NH2

HO

BzO

HO

OBn

N

OH

93% (-)-aristeromycin

48%

Scheme 7.17.

206

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

O 2N

HO 1)

NO2

OH

2) Swern oxidation

HN Bn

OH

OH N

toluene

N

OTHP

OH

Bu3SnH, AIBN

(7.72)

Bn

Bn

70%

Dauzonne has reported a simple synthesis of flavanones by radical denitration and dehalogenation of 3-chloro-2,3-dihydro-3-nitro-2-aryl-4H-1-benzopyran-4-ones,92 which are readily prepared by the reaction of salicylaldehydes with 1-chloro-1-nitro-2-arylethenes (Eq. 7.73).93 O

O NO2

Bu3SnH, AIBN

Cl O

(7.73)

benzene

O

Ph

Ph

97%

Sequential Michael additions are versatile methods for the construction of cyclic compounds. Although a variety of these reactions have been developed, the use of alcohols as nucleophiles for the Michael addition to nitroalkenes has been little studied. Recently, Ikeda and coworkers have reported an elegant synthesis of octahydrobenzo[b]furans via the sequential Michael addition of 1-nitro-cyclohexene with methyl 4-hydroxy-2-butynoate in the presence of t-BuOK followed by radical denitration (Eq. 7.74).94 CO2Me

NO2

t-BuOK THF, 0 ºC

+

CO2Me

O2N

HO

CO2Me

1) Bu3SnH, AIBN, toluene 2) H+

O

O

100%

(7.74)

86%

The Diels-Alder reaction followed by radical denitration provides a useful strategy for construction of six-membered compounds, in which the nitro group accelerates the reaction and also controls the regio-chemistry of the addition (Eq. 7.75).95 O

O O + NO2

Bu3SnH benzene reflux

AIBN O2N 83%

Me

Me 86%

(7.75)

The intramolecular Diels-Alder reaction of nitrotrienes proceeds stereoselectively in the presence of LiClO4 in diethyl ether to give one stereoisomer from endo selectivity. The nitro group is removed from the adduct with Bu3SnH (Eq. 7.76).96

(7.76) Thus, radical denitration has developed as a reliable tool in organic synthesis and has been mainly carried out using tin hydride in total syntheses of natural products. There is one report in which NaTeH was used for removing the nitro group. Norslanadione, a biologically active

7.2

R–H FROM R–NO2

207

terpenoid is prepared by the double Michael addition and subsequent denitration with NaTeH, as shown in Eq. 7.77.97

(7.77) Denitration of nitro compounds with Bu3SnD provides an elegant method for the synthesis of deuterated compounds.98 Recently, the synthesis of deuterium labeled plant sterols has been reported (see Eq. 7.78).99

(7.78) Other applications of radical denitration in organic synthesis are summarized in Table 7.3. Application of radical reactions to organic synthesis has recently received much attention, and various important reactions have been discovered in this field. Alkyl halides, sulfides, selenides, and thiocarbonyl compounds have been used as precursors to alkyl radicals. Some examples are illustrated in Scheme 7.18.125

R-X

+

Bu3Sn•

R•

+

Bu3SnX

X= Br, I, SR', SeR', NC, OCR', NO2 S R Bu3Sn

R•

Y (Y= CN, CO2R', COR) Bu3Sn

R

Y

CO2Et R

Radical cyclization

Scheme 7.18.

CO2Et

208

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

Table 7.3. Radical denitration with Bu3SnH Yield (%) RH

RNO2

Ref.

Yield (%) RH

RNO2

Cl

Ref.

Me

87

NO2

Cl

S

100

S Me

NO2

Cl O

O OMe Cl NO2 Cl

78

104

O

95

112

78

107

83

106

63

108

58

72

87

116

85

115

65

117

82

118

91

120

90

121

85

122

O

O

NO2

O

P(OEt)2 O OAc

O H

O

NO2 CO2Me 6

NO2 CO2Me

Me

78

103

AcO O 2N

75

103

O

6

O

Ph

O OMe AcO Me H O 2N O O

O AcO

O2N

O

CH2Ph CO2Me F

80

102

O

O

H

O

O

NO2

O

CN

Me F3C

NO2

31

101

O

N

O

O2N

CO2Et

O

O Si

O

O

NO2

OH NO2 (S)

80

105

64

109

Et C4H9 C C CH2 CH CHPh O NO2

NO2

NHCbz CO2Et O

O NO2 OH

Me

HN

59

30

MeO

HOCH2 O RO O

N

NO2 Me Me NO2

MeO O

O

85

N NO2 O CO2Et

114

Ph NO 2

O NO2

26

111

91

113

N O

CPh O N

Ph N EtO2C O NO2

N Me C Me Me NO2

Me

(continues)

7.2

209

R–H FROM R–NO2

Table 7.3. Continued Yield (%) RH

RNO2

Ref.

MeO

RNO2

Yield (%) RH

Ref.

83

124

Me O

58

123

Me O

N O

NO2

Ph

O2N

Because reductive cleavage of aliphatic nitro compounds with Bu3SnH proceeds via alkyl radicals, nitro compounds are also used as precursors to alkyl radicals. Reactions using nitro compounds may have some advantages over other ones, since aliphatic nitro compounds are available from various sources. For example, the sequence of the Michael additions of nitro compounds provides an excellent method for the construction of quaternary carbon compounds (Eq. 7.79).126 Newkome has used this strategy for the construction of dendritic polymers (Eq. 7.80).127 Me Me

CO2Et

+

NO2

CO2Me

CO2Et

Me

Bu3SnH, AIBN

(7.79)

Me

CO2Me 60%

OCH2Ph OCH2Ph

O2N

+

CN

HO HO HO

OH OH OH

HO HO HO

OH OH OH

OCH2Ph Bu3SnH, AIBN benzene, 80 ºC OCH2Ph OCH2Ph NC OCH2Ph 61%

(7.80)

Trans-fused bicyclic compounds are prepared by the double Michael reactions of nitro compounds; the nitro group is further alkylated by the radical reaction (Eq. 7.81).128

Me

CN

CN

Me O +

O2N

O

Bu3SnH, AIBN CO2Et

OEt

benzene, 80 ºC

(7.81)

CO2Et

OEt

41%

Giese has used this strategy for the synthesis of sugar derivatives, as shown in Eq. 7.82.129

O R

O O

+

NO2 CN

O

Bu3SnH CN

AIBN

R

O O

CN

(7.82)

CN 55%

210

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

An intramolecular radical cyclization gives the exo-cyclic compounds, which has been extensively used in the synthesis of cyclic compounds. Michael additions of allyl alcohols or propargyl alcohols to nitroalkenes and the subsequent treatment with tin radicals provide a useful method for the preparation of substituted furans (Eqs. 7.83 and 7.84).126 AcO

NO2

1) CH2=CH-CH2OH, NaH

NO2

2) HCHO, Ac2O O AcO

Me

Bu3SnH, AIBN

(7.83)

O 74%

O2N

Me Ph

1) HC

C CH2OH, NaH

2)

CN

Me

NO2

Ph

O

NC

Me

NC

(7.84)

Bu3SnH, AIBN Ph 79%

This methodology has also been applied to the synthesis of nucleoside derivatives, which are used in the preparation of drugs against AIDS (Eq. 7.85).130 O HN OR

O O

O 2N HOH2C

O

Me

Me

HN N

Bu3SnH AIBN

RO HO

O O

N

(7.85)

O

O 88%

The tandem radial cyclization using the nitro compounds has been used for synthesis of the tricyclic sesequiterpenes, cedrene,131 and biotol132 and their derivatives, as shown in Schemes 7.19 and 7.20. The merits using nitro compounds are nicely demonstrated in these cases, in which the nitro group controls the reaction and it acts as a radical-leaving group at the final step. Carbon radicals bearing a single fluorine atom are produced via denitration. They react with styrene to give the adduct in good yield (Eq. 7.86), but with electron-deficient alkenes yields are very low.133 F

F PhCH2

CO2Et NO2

+

Ph

Ph3SnH, AIBN

PhCH2

CO2Et

(7.86) CH2CH2Ph 68%

7.2

R–H FROM R–NO2

211

HO

O H amberlyst A-21

Bu3SnH, AIBN

HO

NO2

benzene

NO2 62 % OH 1) CrO3 H

H

2) MeLi 3) SOCl2

Cedrene 80% (3 steps)

52%

Scheme 7.19.

H O2N

MgBr

O

Me

CHO DBU

SPh

O2N

SPh 66%

Bu3SnH, AIBN

HO

HO O2N

55%

SPh 60% Scheme 7.20.

7.2.2 Ionic Denitration Denitration is generally carried out via a radical process using tin hydride, but some nitro groups are replaced by hydrogen via an ionic process. Rosini and coworkers have developed an indirect denitration method of α-nitroketones by the treatment of the corresponding tosylhydrazones with LiAlH4, in which 1,4-elimination of HNO2 and the reduction of tosylazoalkanes to tosylhydrazones occur (Eq. 7.87).134

O R1

N

TsNHNH2

R2

R1

NO2

H N

Ts R2

LiAlH4 0–10 ºC

NO2

N

H N

R1 H

Ts R2

H3O+

O R2

1

R

H

(7.87)

212

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

Although this method is not a general procedure, being specific for α-nitroketones, it has several merits to avoid the use of toxic reagents such as organotin compounds. Functionalized ketones have been prepared by this denitration reaction, in which functionalized nitroalkanes are used as alkyl anion synthons. For example, 3-nitropropanal ethylene acetal can be used as synthon of the 3-oxo-propyl anion and 1,4-dicarbonyl compounds are prepared, as shown in Eq. 7.88.135 O

O

NO2

TsNHNH2

H

O

O

NO2 O

H

LiAlH4

O

O

NO2 H

H

NNHTs 93%

O

O

O

O

1) TsOH

H NNHTs 94%

H

2) BF3

(7.88)

O 85%

(Z)-1-Nitro-3-nonene is converted into a pheromone, (Z)-5-undecen-2-one, via nitro-aldol reaction (see Section 3.2.3), followed by oxidation, and denitration, as shown in Eq. 7.89.136 NO2

NO2

O

79% 1) TsNHNH2 2) LiAlH4 3) H3O+

70–80%

(7.89)

O

The simultaneous denitration-deoxygenation of α-nitroketones is performed on treatment with TsNHNH2 and NaBH4 at 80 °C to give alkanes (Eq. 7.90).137 O 1) TsNHNH2 NO2

(7.90)

2) NaBH4, 80 ºC 71%

The nitro groups in Eqs. 7.88–7.90 are readily replaced by hydrogen with tin hydride under radical conditions as discussed already. However, the nitro groups in the α-nitrosulfides or β-nitrosulfides are not replaced by hydrogen on treatment with tin hydride but the reaction affords desulfonated products (Eq. 7.51) and alkenes (Eq. 7.97) such radical elimination reactions are discussed in Section 7.3.1. (see Eqs. 7.91 and 7.92).138 SPh NO2 SEt NO2

NO2

Bu3SnH AIBN

80%

Bu3SnH OH

AIBN OH

(7.91)

H

93%

(7.92)

7.2

213

R–H FROM R–NO2

The nitro groups of α- or β-nitrosulfides are cleanly replaced by hydrogen via ionic hydrogenation to give sulfides, as shown in Eqs. 7.93–7.95. The attack of hydride takes place at the more substituted carbon.139 SPh

SPh

Et3SiH SnCl4

NO2 SPh

(7.93)

H

94% SPh

Et3SiH

(7.94)

AlCl3 NO2

89%

O2N

SPh Et3SiH

(7.95)

AlCl3 SPh

70%

The difficulty in controlling the regiochemistry during radical-denitration of allylic nitro compounds is well known. The migration of the double bond is a serious problem, as shown in Eq. 7.96. This problem is overcome by a hydride transfer reaction in the presence of a palladium catalyst (Eq. 7.97).140

CO2Me

CO2Me

Bu3SnH AIBN

NO2 R

- NO2

NO2

(7.96)

70% (15:85) R

Pd(0) –

CO2Me +

H– H–: HCO2NH4, NaBH3CN, NaBH4

Pd

R

R

or

(7.97)

The regiochemical control of Pd-catalyzed hydride transfer reaction is much more effective than that of the radical denitration, as shown in Eq. 7.98. The base-catalyzed reaction of nitroolefins with aldehydes followed by denitration provides a new synthetic method of homoallyl alcohols (Eq. 7.99).140 Exomethylene compounds are obtained by denitration of cyclic allylic nitro compounds with Pd(0), HCO2H and Et3N (Eq. 7.100).140b

Pd(PPh3)4 H–

CO2Me

NO2

CO2Me

+ B

35% HCHO NO2

Et3N

Yield (A/B)

NaBH4

70% (3/97)

HCO2NH4

60% (90/10)

CO2Me

A

R

H–

R

(7.98)

Me OH NO2 80–90%

NaBH4

R

Me OH

Pd(0) 86%

(7.99)

214

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

NO2 HCO2H, Et3N, THF

(7.100)

+

Pd(acac) 2, Bu3P 45 ºC, 16 h

89% (86:14)

This denitration of allylic nitro compounds catalyzed by Pd(0) is applied to total synthesis of kainic acid, as shown in Eq. 7.101. The tandem Michael addition of a nitrogen nucleophile to nitrodiene gives the requisite framework. The radical denitration does not give the desired product, but it gives a mixture of regio- and stereoisomer. On the other hand, the Pd(0)-mediated denitration proceeds with high regio- and stereoselectivity.141 In a similar way, other proteinogenic amino acids having a pyrrolidine dicarboxylic acid ring are prepared (Eq. 7.102).142 Bn

CO2Et

NO2

H

+ OBz

N

HO

O2N

NHBn

CO2Et

Bn N Pd(0), HCO2NH4

88% OH

CO2Et

OH

CO2H (–)-α-kainic acid

100%

CO2Et

PMB MeO2C

HN Bn

H N

H

THF

H CH2OH

OH

EtOH Yt · 15h

N

MeO2C O NO2

MeO2C

RT N Bn

PMB N O

CO2Et CH2OH

80%

Pd (0)

CO2Et

HCO2NH4 THF

PMB N O NO2

EtOH

+

(7.101)

N Bn 90%

(7.102)

CH2OH

7.3 ALKENES FROM R–NO2 Elimination of the NO2 group via radical process or via ionic process from aliphatic nitro compounds affords a useful method for the preparation of olefins. Nitro compounds, with two radical leaving groups at vicinal positions, are prone to undergo radical elimination to give olefins. The nitro group at a β-position with respect to an electron-withdrawing group is readily eliminated to give α,β-unsaturated compounds on treatment with a base (Scheme 7.21). 7.3.1 Radical Elimination In 1971, Kornblum and coworkers reported a new synthesis of tetra-substituted alkenes from vicinal dinitro compounds.143 The requisite vicinal dinitro compounds are prepared by the

7.3

X

Reagent

+

215

ALKENES FROM R–NO2

X–

O2N X = NO2, SO2Ar, SAr, OC(S)R Reagent: Na2S, Ca/Hg, NaTeH, Bu3SnH + AIBN

+

Y O2N

+

Base

NO2– Base H+

Y

H

Y = CO2R, CHO, C(O)R, SO2R Scheme 7.21.

oxidation of the anion derived from nitroalkanes. Unsymmetrical dinitro compounds are prepared by the reaction of geminal dinitro compounds with nitroalkane salts (see Eqs. 7.103 and 7.104).143 NO2

O2N NO2

I2

Na2S DMF

DMF

NO2

Me Me + O2N

(7.103)

90%

95% O2N NO2

DMF

Me

NO2

Me 90%

Me

Na2S DMF

Me 91% (7.104)

Because sodium sulfide is a strong nucleophile, other non nucleophilic reagents such as Ca/Hg 144 or Bu3SnH145 are more suitable than Na2S in the synthesis of functionalized olefins (see Eq. 7.105). NaTeH is also effective to induce the elimination reaction presented in Eqs. 7.103 and 7.104.146 NO2 Me

CH2CH2CO2Me

Me

CH2CH2CO2Me

CH2CH2CO 2Me

Me

CH2CH2CO 2Me

Me

NO2

Ca/Hg, DMF, HMPA: 84% Bu3SnH, AIBN: 84%

(7.105)

Vasella and coworkers have used this radical elimination for the chain elongation of 1-C-nitroglycosyl halides.147 The requisite 1-C-nitroglycosyl chlorides and bromides are easily available from sugar oximes.148 Treatment of 1-C-nitromannosyl chloride with the potassium salt of 2-nitropropane gives the vicinal dinitro sugar in 81% yield. Reduction of this dinitro sugar with Na2S gives the enol ether in 96% yield (see Eq. 7.106). Me Me

O O O

O

O NO2 Cl

Li+

NO2

O O O

O

O NO2

Na2S DMF

O O O

O

O

Me

NO2 Me

Me

Me

96%

(7.106)

Because anions of nitro compounds are good electron-transfer reagents, they can serve as reducing agents in radical type eliminations of vicinal dinitro compounds. In fact, N-azolyl-sub-

216

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

stituted olefin is spontaneously formed by an SRN1 reaction of the anion derived from gemnitroimidazolylethane with gem-chloronitropropane (Eq. 7.107).149 Similar sequential SN1 reaction followed by radical elimination is observed in the reaction of 1-methyl-2-trichloromethyl-5-nitroimidazole with the anion of 2-nitropropane (see Eq. 7.108),150a or difluoromethyl quinone (see Eq. 7.109).150b The main product of Eq. 7.109 is substitution product, but it can be converted to 2,3,5-trimethyl-6-(2-methyl-1-propenyl)benzo-1,4-quinone on treatment with the anion of 2-nitropropane. 80% O2N

O2N

N

Me Me

Me

DMF

+

N

O2N

Cl

Me

Li+

O2N

N

CCl3

O2N

NO2

Me

Me

Me

Me

(7.108)

Me

Cl 76%

CHF2

Me Me 58% (7.107)

Me

Me

O

Me

N N

(3 equiv)

Me

N

NO2 Me Me

Me O2N

N

N

O2N

N

NO2

Me

N

Me Me + NO2 Me

Me

NO2

Me

O

O

F

O

Li+

Me

Me

Me Me Me

Me O

O A

83% (A : B = 89 : 11)

B

(7.109)

Ono and coworkers have extended the radical elimination of vic-dinitro compounds to β-nitro sulfones151 and β-nitro sulfides.138,152 As β-nitro sulfides are readily prepared by the Michael addition of thiols to nitroalkenes, radical elimination of β-nitrosulfides provides a useful method for olefin synthesis. For example, cyclohexanone is converted into allyl alcohol by the reaction shown in Eq. 7.110. Treatment of cyclohexanone with a mixture of nitromethane, PhSH, 35%-HCHO, TMG (0.1 equiv) in acetonitrile gives a hydroxymethylated-β-nitro sulfide in 68% yield, which is converted into the corresponding allyl alcohol in 86% yield by the reaction with Bu3SnH.138 Nitro-aldol and the Michael addition reactions take place sequentially to give the required β-nitro sulfides in one pot. O

CH3NO2, PhSH, HCHO TMG (0.1 equiv), MeCN

NO2 OH SPh 68%

Bu3SnH, AIBN OH

benzene

(7.110)

86%

Tin radical-induced elimination from β-nitro sulfones or β-nitro sulfides proceeds in a stereoselective way to give anti elimination products.153 When diastereomers of β-nitro sulfones can be separated, each diastereomer gives (E)- and (Z)-alkenes selectively (Eq. 7.111). Such

7.3

217

ALKENES FROM R–NO2

stereo-specific radical elimination is rather unusual because usually radical reactions proceed in a nonspecific way. Et O2N Et Me

Me CN SO2Ar

Bu3SnH AIBN benzene

Me CN SO2Ar

O2N Me Et

Bu3SnH AIBN benzene

Me

Me CN (E) only 86% Me Me

(7.111)

Et CN (Z) only 85%

Stereoselective preparation of (E)-allyl alcohols via radical elimination from anti-γphenylthio-β-nitro alcohols has been reported.154 The requisite anti-β-nitro sulfides are prepared by protonation of nitronates at low temperature (see Chapter 4), and subsequent treatment with Bu3SnH induces anti elimination to give (E)-alkenes selectively (see Eq. 7.112). Unfortunately, it is difficult to get the pure syn-β-nitro sulfides. Treatment of a mixture of syn- and anti-βnitrosulfides with Bu3SnH results in formation of a mixture of (E)- and (Z)-alkenes. NO2

1) PhSLi

Ph

NO2

Ph

2) HCHO 3) –78 ºC, AcOH

OH

Ph

Bu3SnH, AIBN benzene

SPh

OH

E / Z = 95 / 5

(7.112)

Ono and coworkers have devised a new acetylene equivalent for the Diels-Alder reaction; namely, 1-phenylsulfony-2-nitroethylene is a very reactive dienophile, and the radical elimination from the adduct gives the Diels-Alder adduct of acetylene, as exemplified in Eq. 7.113.155 Other acetylene equivalents are summarized in a review.156 SO2Ph

O2N + PhO2S

Bu3SnH, AIBN

toluene 110 ºC, 3 h

benzene 60%

90%

NO2

(7.113)

Acetylene equivalent of β-sulfonylnitroalkene in the Diels-Alder reaction is used in part for total synthesis of pancratistatin (Eq. 7.114). Pancratistatin is isolated from the root of the plant Pancratium littorale Jacq., native to Hawaii, which exhibits anti-cancer activity.157 Me Si O Me

t-Bu Me Si O Me

t-Bu O

O

SO2Ph

O

+ NEt2

O

O

NEt2

O O2N O 2N 96%

SO2Ph

218

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

Me Si O Me

OH

t-Bu Bu3SnH

O

O

AIBN toluene

HO

OH H

O

NEt2

H

O

O

OH NH

OH O (7.114) pancratistatin

72%

Nitro-aldols, which are readily available (see Henry reaction Section 3.1), are converted into olefins via conversion of the hydroxyl group to the corresponding phenyl thiocarbonate ester and treatment with tin radical.158 The yield was not reported. Because the radical deoxygenation via thiocarbonate (Barton reaction) proceeds in good yield, the elimination of Eq. 7.115 might be good choice for olefin synthesis.159 OBn

BnO

O

BnO

O

S C

Ph NO2 O

BnO BnO BnO

OBn

BnO

O

BnO

Bu3SnH

(7.115)

BnO BnO BnO

AIBN

BnO OMe

O BnO OMe

Due to the toxicity of tin reagents, a new radical elimination without using Bu3SnH is highly desirable. Barton has reported that nitro olefins are converted into olefins via radical elimination of β-nitro trithiocarbonates (Eq. 7.116).160 The Michael addition of trithiocarbonate to nitroalkenes is carried out in CS2 to avoid the addition of EtSH.

S NO2

NO2

EtS S– CS2

O S hυ

S S

N

O

79%

SEt

(7.116)

7.3.2 Ionic Elimination of Nitro Compounds In a previous review dealing with β-elimination reactions of nitrous acid, the literature is covered up to 1985.161 The basic concept is very simple: the nitro group at the β-position of the electron-withdrawing groups is eliminated to give alkenes on treatment with base. A typical example is shown in Scheme 7.22; electrophiles can be introduced to ethyl β-nitropropionate at both α- and β-positions, and subsequent elimination of HNO2 gives various alkenes. The Henry reaction or Michael reaction of ethyl β-nitropropionate followed by elimination of HNO2 gives β-substituted acrylate.162 On the other hand, alkylation of the dianion derived from the same compound followed by elimination of HNO2 gives α-substituted acrylate (Eqs. 7.117 and 7.118).163

n-C6H13CHO + O2N

OH

N H CO2Et

DMSO

n-C5H11

(7.117) CO2Et

55%

7.3

E

O2N

β α

CO2Et

CO2Et α,β-unsaturated compounds

CO2Et

base O2N

219

ALKENES FROM R–NO2

E

2LDA

E O2N

E CO2Et

CO2Et

Scheme 7.22.

O2N

CO2Me R

LDA THF-HMPA RX

O2N

OLi O2N

RCHO

OMe

CO2Me

CO2Me 66–80%

HO O2N

R

DBU

85–90%

R

HO

DBU

(7.118)

R CO2Me

CO2Me 48–84%

The alkylation of dianion of methyl 3-nitropropionate requires 5 equiv of HMPA. HMPA is a listed mutagen and should not be used in industry or in academia. 1,3-Dimethyl-3,4,5,6-tetrahydropyrimidine (DMPU)164 and quinuclidine N-oxide (QNO)165 are recommended as replacements of HMPA (Eq. 7.119).

Additive (equiv)

O O O2N

LDA, THF, –78 ºC PhCH2Br OMe

O2N

OMe Ph

Yield (%)

None HMPA (5)

8 85

DMPU (10) QNO (5)

85 78

(7.119) The reaction shown in Eq. 7.120 has been applied to a total synthesis of (+)-brefeldin-A.166 CHO

R1O

CO2Me

OR2 +

N H DMSO

O2N

OH

OH 1

R O O

OMe OR2

O O

HO H (+)-Brefeldin-A

54%

(7.120)

Esters and ketones bearing β-nitro groups can be prepared in many ways. For example, the Diels-Alder reaction of methyl β-nitroacrylate is one typical case. Various cyclic dienes are prepared by this route, and the reactions of Eq. 7.121167 and Eq. 7.122168 are exemplified.

220

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

NO2 benzene

+

MeO O

RT

Me3SiO

NO2 DBU CO2Me

O 72%

O

CO2Me

(7.121)

99%

(7.122)

Another approach is the Michael addition to ethyl β-nitroacrylate, as shown in Eq. 7.123, which has been used in the synthesis of α-methylenebutyrolactone, a moiety characteristic of many sesquiterpenes.169

(7.123) The Michael addition of nitroalkanes to alkenes substituted with two electron-withdrawing groups at the α- and β-positions provides a new method for the preparation of functionalized alkenes. Although reactions are not new,170 Ballini and coworkers have used this strategy in the synthesis of polyfunctionalized unsaturated carbonyl derivatives by Michael addition of nitroalkanes to enediones as shown in Eqs. 7.124–7.126.171 Success of this type of reaction depends on the base and solvent. They have found that DBU in acetonitrile is the method of choice for this purpose. This base-solvent system has been used widely in Michael additions of nitroalkanes to electron-deficient alkenes (see Section 4.3, which discusses the Michael addition).172

(7.124)

(7.125)

7.3

221

ALKENES FROM R–NO2

(7.126)

Alkenylation using nitroalkanes followed by the selective reduction of the double bonds with NiCl2 and NaBH4 can be regarded as the addition of alkyl anions to electron-deficient alkenes (Eq. 7.127).173

(7.127) Very simple synthesis of α-substituted γ-methyl-γ-lactones is also possible by olefination using nitroalkanes followed by reduction, as shown in Eq. 7.128.174

(7.128) When the reduction of the double bond in the olefination product is carried out using H2 and Pd/C, 1-alkylated-1,4-diketone is obtained in good yield (Eq. 7.129).175

(7.129) The selective reduction of the carbonyl group in the olefination product of keto-esters using Na2HPO4 and NaBH4 leads to the synthesis of α-alkylmethylene-γ-butyrolactones (see Eq. 7.130).176

Me

Me Me

NO2 +

O CO2Me

DBU THF

O

Me 1) Na2HPO4•12H2O OMe NaBH4

Me

Me

O O

2) H+ O 87%

55%

(7.130)

222

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

All of these elimination reactions contain β-carbonyl groups in the nitro compounds. Of course, masked carbonyl groups are also frequently employed for such β-elimination of HNO2, as shown in Eq. 7.131,177 Eq. 7.132,178 and Eq. 7.133.179 In these cases, the sulfinylmethyl or hydroxymethyl group is converted into the carbonyl group by the Pummerer rearrangement or by simple oxidation. H NO2

DBU

SPh

+

O

O 2N

SPh

O CHO

O 2N

1) TFA

DBU CHO

2) NaHCO3 MeCN-H2O

Me

OH +

Me

OH

(7.131) 63% (overall)

NO2

SO2Ph

DBU

t-Bu

SO2Ph

O

Me

(7.132)

1) PCC

t-Bu Me

2) DBU

NO2

t-Bu

Me 78%

Me

O H +

amberlyst A-21

NO2 OH

O

NO2 OH 1) K2Cr2O7 2) Et3N

OH 85%

(7.133)

O 82%

A new synthesis of substituted 1,3-dienes by reductive elimination of allylic nitro derivatives has been reported (Eq. 7.134).180 Tertiary allylic nitro compounds, bearing an acetate group in the β-position, smoothly undergo reductive elimination to give conjugated 1,3-dienes when treated with chromous acetate and 2,2-dipyridine in DMF at 111–120 °C. O2N

OAc OAc

OAc

AcO

(7.134)

AcO 67%

7.3

ALKENES FROM R–NO2

223

α,β-Dehydro-α-amino acids are prepared by elimination of HNO2 from β-nitro-αamino acids, which are prepared by reaction of α-bromoglycine derivatives with alkyl nitronates (see Eq. 7.135).181 This process is a new type of the Michael addition of nitro compounds followed by elimination of HNO2. Such unusual amino acids are interesting as enzyme inhibitors.182

R′ O

t-BuO

Br N H + R

R′

OR

NO2

OMe

t-BuO O

OMe

N H

N H

O 60–70% R = R′ = H R = H, R′ = Me R = R′ = Me

Li+ NO2

O

t-BuO

R N H

R′ (7.135)

OMe O

quant. An elegant example of sequence of reactions involving the Henry reaction, the Michael reaction, and elimination of HNO2 is demonstrated in a short synthesis of anthracyclinones. Nitromethane is used to introduce the C10-group simultaneously with the C9-hydroxy group (Eq. 7.136).183

O

OH

O

O

O– O– HO N

+ MeNO2 NaOMe MeOH O

OH

OH

O

O

OH

HO 10 9

O

OH 65–92%

OH

(7.136)

The sequence of SRN1 reactions (see the section 7.1.1 discussing the radical reaction) and elimination of HNO2 provide a new synthetic method for various kinds of alkenes. For example,

224

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

the reaction of geminal halonitroalkanes with stabilized carbanions followed by elimination of HNO2 gives alkylidene derivative of β-diketones or β-keto esters (see Eq. 7.137). Enolate ions are also effective to induce SRN1 reactions followed by elimination of HNO2 (see Eq. 7.138).184 O O

O

Ph

OEt

+

O2N

Na+

–

Me Me Cl

O Li

Me

OEt

(7.137) O 74%

1) hυ, THF

Me +

Ph

Ph

Me

O2N Cl

+

hυ THF

Me

2) NaOH

Ph

(7.138)

O 54%

Crozet and coworkers have used S RN1 reactions followed by elimination of HNO2 for the synthesis of various new heterocyclic compounds substituted with alkenyl groups. These compounds are expected to be important for pharmaceutical use (see Eq. 7.139).185

N

Me

Cl

Me +

N

Me

NO2

Li

+

NO2

hυ DMSO

Me

N N 95%

NO2

(7.139)

SRN1 reactions of gem-halonitroalkanes with the anion of active methylene compounds followed by deethoxycarbonylation and denitration provide useful methods for preparing highly substituted olefins, as shown in Eq. 7.140.186 Because the SRN1 reaction is less sensitive to steric effects than the ionic reaction, such reaction as that shown in Eq. 7.140 has merits over other ionic reactions.

NO2 Br + CN EtO2C

HMPA 120 ºC

i-Pr Na+

NO2 CN i-Pr – CO Br 2Et

CN

i-Pr 63%

(7.140)

Base-promoted fragmentation of products resulting from SRN1 reactions between gem-halonitroalkanes and cyclic β-keto-esters as nucleophiles give rise to di- or trifunctionalized olefins (Eq. 7.141).187 If the product is treated with NaCl in DMSO at 120 °C, the ester and nitro groups are eliminated.

225

REFERENCES

O

O2N

Me

O

Cl

CO2Et Me

+ O CO2Et Na

Me

NaCl DMSO, ∆

Me Me

54%

NO2 Me

+

O KOH EtOH

CO2Et Me

EtO 84%

Me

(7.141)

Similar alkene formations via dealkoxycarbonylation and denitration have been reported for the synthesis of novel heterocycles. Heterocyclic nitro compounds such as 4-nitroisoxazole undergo the Diels-Alder reaction; subsequent dealkoxycarbonylation and denitration give the products, which are regarded as the Diels-Alder adducts of five-membered heterocyclic arynes (Eq. 7.142).121 Ph

Ph

NO2

+ N

CO2Et

O Ph

N

O Ph

NO2

N O CO2Et

NaBr HMPA 120 ºC

(7.142)

N O 70%

From the foregoing it can be seen that the nitro group can be activated for C–C bond formation in various ways. Classically the nitro group facilitates the Henry reaction, Michael addition, and Diels-Alder reaction. Kornblum and Russell have introduced a new substitution reaction, which proceeds via a one electron-transfer process (SRN1). The SRN1 reactions have recently been recognized as useful tools in organic synthesis. All these reactions can be used for the preparation of alkenes as described in this chapter.

REFERENCES 1a. Kornblum, N. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 14, 734 (1975). 1b. Kornblum, N., in Supplement F: The Chemistry of Amino, Nitroso and Nitro Compounds and Their Derivatives, Ed. by S. Patai, Wiley, New York, 1982, Part 1, p. 361. 1c. Kornblum, N. Aldrichim, Acta, 28, 71 (1990). 2a. Ono, N. In Nitro Compounds; Recent Advances in Synthesis and Chemistry: Ed. by H. Feuer and A. T. Nielsen, VCH, New York, 1990, p. 46–85. 2b. Tamura, R., A. Kamimura, and N. Ono. Synthesis, 423 (1991). 3. Kornblum, N., S. D. Boyd, and F. W. Stuchal. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 92, 5783 (1970). 4a. Russell, G. A., R. K. Norris, and E. J. Panek. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 93, 5839 (1971). 4b. Ono, N., R. Tamura, T. Nakatsuka, and A. Kaji. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 53, 3295 (1980). 4c. Kornblum, N., W. J. Kelly, and M. M. Kestner. J. Org. Chem., 50, 4720 (1985). 5. Kornblum, N., H. K. Singh, and W. J. Kelly. J. Org. Chem., 48, 332 (1983). 6. Garver, L. C., V. Grakauskas, and K. Baum. J. Org. Chem., 50, 1699 (1985).

226 7. 8. 9a. 9b. 9c. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17a. 17b. 18a. 18b. 19a. 19b. 20a. 20b. 20c. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26a. 26b. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35a. 35b. 36. 37. 38. 39a. 39b. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46.

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

Kornblum, N., H. K. Singh, and S. D. Boyd. J. Org. Chem., 49, 358 (1984). Kornblum, N., and A. S. Erickson. J. Org. Chem., 46, 1039 (1981). Newkome, G. R., and C. D. Weis. J. Org. Chem., 56, 4798 (1991). Newkome, G. R., C. N. Moorefield, and G. R. Baker. Aldrichimica Acta, 25, 31 (1992). Newkome, G. R., C. N. Moorefield, and F. Vogtle. Dendritic Molecules, VCH, Weinheim, 1996, p. 83. Vasella, A. Pure & Appl. Chem., 63, 507 (1991). Meuwly, R., and A. Vasela. Helv. Chim. Acta, 69, 751 (1986). Vasella, A., and R, Wyler. Helv. Chim. Acta, 73, 1472 (1990). Kornblum, N., and J. Widmer. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 100, 7086 (1978). Benn, M., and A. C. M. Meesters. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 597 (1977). Ono, N., I. Hamamoto, T. Yanai, and A. Kaji. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 523 (1985). Ono, N., I. Hamamoto, and A. Kaji. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 274 (1984). Tamura, R., and L. S. Hegedus. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 104, 3727 (1982). Tamura, R., Y. Kai, M. Kakihana, K. Hayashi, M. Tsuji, T. Nakamura, and D. Oda. J. Org. Chem., 51, 4375 (1986). Ono, N., I. Hamamoto, and A. Kaji. J. Chem.Soc., Chem. Commun., 821 (1982). Ono, N., I. Hamamoto, and A. Kaji. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 1439 (1986). Tamura, R., K. Kato, K. Saegusa, M. Kakihana, and D. Oda. J. Org. Chem., 52, 4121 (1987). Tamura, R., K. Saegusa, M. Kakihana, and D. Oda. J. Org. Chem., 53, 2723 (1988). Trost, B. M. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 28, 1173 (1989). Tsuji, J. Tetrahedron, 42, 4361 (1986). Tsuji, J. Palladium Reagents and Catalysts in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley, New York, 1995. Ono, N., I. Hamamoto, and A. Kaji. Synthesis, 950 (1985). Chung, J. Y. L., E. J. J. Grabowski, and P. J. Reider. Organic Letters, 1, 1783 (1999). Barlaam, B., J. Boivin, and S. Z. Zard. Tetrahedron Lett., 51, 7429 (1990). Tamura, R., H. Katayama, K. Watabe, and H. Suzuki. Tetrahedron, 46, 7557 (1990). Tamura, R., M. Kohono, S. Utunomiya, K. Yamawaki, N. Azuma, A. Matsumoto, and Y. Ishii. J. Org. Chem. 58, 3953 (1993). Tamura, R., K. Watabe, N. Ono, and Y. Yamamoto. J. Org. Chem., 57, 4895 (1992). Tamura, R., K. Watabe, N. Ono, and Y. Yamamoto. J. Org. Chem., 58, 4471 (1993). Tamura, R., K. Watabe, A. Kamimura, K. Hori, and Y. Yokomori. J. Org. Chem., 57, 4903 (1992). Ono, N., T. Yanai, A. Kamimura, and A. Kaji. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1285 (1986). Miyake, H., and K. Yamamura. Tetrahedron Lett., 27, 3025 (1986). Barlaam, B., J. Boivin, L. Elkaim, S. E. Farr, and S. Z. Zard. Tetrahedron, 51, 1675 (1995). Ono, N., T. X. Jun, T. Hashimoto, and A. Kaji. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 947 (1987). Boivin, J., C. Chauvet, and S. Z. Zard. Tetrahedron Lett., 33, 4913 (1992). Aebischen, R., J. H. Bieri, R. Prewo, and A.Vassella. Helv. Chim. Acta, 65, 2251 (1982). Mahmood, K., A. Vassella, and B. Bernet. Helv. Chim. Acta, 74, 1555 (1991). Ono, N., A. Kamimura, H. Sasatani, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., 52, 4135 (1987). Kamimura, A., H. Sasatani, T. Hashimoto, and N. Ono. J. Org. Chem., 54, 4998 (1989). Kim, S., and J. H. Park. Chem. Lett., 1323 (1988). Anen, K., H. Hofmeister, H. Laurent, A. Seeger, and R. Wiechert. Chem. Ber., 111, 3094 (1978). Ono, N., T. Yanai, I. Hamamoto, A. Kamimura, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., 50, 2806 (1985). Krief, A., L. Hevesi, G. Chaboteaux, P. Mathy, M. Sevrin, and M. J. DeVos. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1693 (1985). Krief, A., M. J. DeVos, and M. Sevrin. Tetrahedron Lett., 27, 2283 (1986). Babler, J. H., and K. P. Spina. Tetrahedron Lett., 26, 1923 (1985). Melot, J. M., F. T. Boullet, and A. Foucaud. Synthesis, 364 (1987). Melot, J. M., F. T. Boullet, and F. Boucaud. Tetrahedron, 44, 2215 (1988). Miyashita, M., T. Kumazawa, and A. Yoshikoshi. J. Org. Chem., 45, 2945 (1980). Michaud, D., S. A. E. Ayoubi, M. J. Dozias, L. Toupet, F. T. Boullet, and J. Hamelin. Chem. Commun., 1613 (1997). Cory, R. M., P. C. Anderson, F. R. McLaren, and B. R. Yamamoto. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 73 (1981). Boivin, J., L. L. Kaim, J. Kervagoret, and S. Z. Zard. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1006 (1989).

REFERENCES

227

47. Dumez, E., J. Rodriguez, and J. P. Dulcre. Chem. Commun., 2009 (1999). 48a. Ono, N., and A. Kaji. Synthesis, 693 (1986). 48b. Ono, N. Chapter 1 in Nitro Compounds; Recent Advances in Synthesis and Chemistry, Ed. by H. Feuer and A. T. Nielsen, VCH, New York (1990). 48c. Rosini, G., and R. Balini. Synthesis, 883 (1988). 48d. Pereyre, M., J. P. Quintard, and A. Rahm. Tin in Organic Synthesis, Butterworth, London, 1987, p. 106. 49. Kornblum, N., S. C. Carlson, and R. G. Smith. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 101, 647 (1979). 50. Krauska, A., N. Piotrowski, and H. Urbanski. Tetrahedron Lett., 1243 (1979). 51. Ono, N., H. Miyake, R. Tamura, and A. Kaji. Tetrahedron Lett. 22, 1705 (1981). 52. Tanner, D. D., E. V. Blackburn, and G. E. Diaz, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 103, 1557 (1981). 53a. Ono, N., R. Tamura, and A. Kaji. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 102, 2851 (1980). 53b. Ono, N., R. Tamura, and A. Kaji. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 105, 4017 (1983). 54. Suzuki, H., K.Takaoka, and A. Osuka. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 58, 1067 (1985). 55. Kamimura, A., K. Kurata, and N. Ono. Tetrahedron Lett., 30, 4819 (1989). 56. Ono, N., A. Kamimura, H. Miyake, I. Hamamoto, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., 50, 3692 (1985). 57. Newmann, W. P., and M. Peterseim. React. Polym. 20, 189 (1993). 58. Clive, D. L. J., and W. Yang. J. Org. Chem., 60, 2607 (1995). 59. Light, J., and R. Breslow. Tetrahedron Lett., 31, 2957 (1990). 60a. Curran, D. P., and S. Hadida, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 118, 2531 (1996). 60b. Curran, D. P. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 37, 1174 (1998). 61. Chatgilialoglu, C. Acc. Chem. Res., 25, 188 (1992). 62. Ballestri, M., C. Chatgilialoglu, M. Lucarini, and G. F. Pedulli. J. Org. Chem., 57, 948 (1992). 63. Tormo, J., D. S. Hays, and G. C. Fu. J. Org. Chem., 63, 5296 (1998). 64. Ono, N., H. Miyake, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., 49, 4997 (1984). 65. Tanaka, T., T. Toru, N. Okamura, A. Hazato, S. Sugiura, K. Manabe, S. Kurozumi, M. Suzuki, T. Kawagishi, and R. Noyori. Tetrahedron Lett., 4103 (1983). 66. Saika, A. K., M. J. Hazarika, N. C. Barua, M. S. Bezbarua, R. P. Sharma, and A. C. Ghosh. Synthesis, 981 (1996). 67. Witczak, Z., and Y. Li. Tetrahedron Lett., 36, 2595 (1995). 68. Huu, D. P. P., M. Petrusovia, J. BeMiller, and L. Petrus. Synlett, 1319 (1998). 69. Huu, D. P. P., M. Petrusova, J. N. BeMiller, and L. Petruis. Tetrahedron Lett., 40, 3053 (1999). 70a. Kamimura, A., and N. Ono. Bull. Chem. Soc., Jpn, 61, 3629 (1988). 70b. Korth, H. G., R. Sustmann, J. Dupsis, and B. Giese. Chem. Ber., 120, 1197 (1987). 70c. Tanner, D. D., D. J. Harrison, J. Chen, A. Kharrat, D. D. M. Wayner, D. Griller, and D. J. McPhe e. J. Org. Chem., 55, 3321 (1990). 70d. Bowman, W. R., D. Crosby, and P. J. Westlake. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans. 2, 73 (1991). 70e. Lucarini, M., G. F. Pedulli, and L. Valgimigli. J. Org. Chem., 61, 4309 (1996). 70f. Blackall, D. Hendry, R. J. Pryce, and S. M. Roberts. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans, 1, 2767 (1995). 71. Baumberger, F., and A. Vasella. Helv. Chim. Acta., 66, 2210 (1983). 72. Julina, E., I. Muller, A. Vasella, and R. Wyler. Carbohydrate Research, 164, 145 (1987). 73. Martin, O. R., and W. Lai. J. Org. Chem., 58, 176 (1993). 74. Witzank, Z. J., R. Chhabra, and J. Chojnacki. Tetrahedron Lett, 38, 2215 (1997). 75. Hanessian, S., P. J. Roy, M. Petrini, P. J. Hodges, R. Di Fabio, and G. Carganico. J. Org. Chem., 55, 5766 (1990). 76. Ono, N., M. Fujii, and A. Kaji. Synthesis, 537 (1987). 77. Magnus, P., and P. Pye. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1933 (1995). 78. Ono, N., H. Miyake, and A. Kaji. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 875 (1983). 79. Ono, N., H. Miyake, M. Fujii, and A. Kaji. Tetrahedron Let., 24, 3477 (1983). 80. Ballini, R., and G. Bosica. J. Nat. Product, 57, 1462 (1994). 81. Meng, Q., and M. Hesse. Top. Curr. Chem., 161, 109 (1991). 82a. Kostova, K., A. L. Riatsch, Y. Nakashita, and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta, 65, 249 (1982). 82b. Kostova, K., and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta, 67, 1713 (1984). 82c. Aono, T., and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta, 67, 1448 (1984). 82d. Stanchev, S., B. Milenkov, and M. Hesse. Tetrahedron Lett., 34, 6107 (1993). 83. Kostova, K., and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta, 78, 440 (1995).

228 84. 85. 86. 87. 88a. 88b. 89a. 89b. 90. 91. 92. 93. 94. 95a. 95b. 96. 97. 98. 99. 100. 101. 102. 103. 104. 105. 106. 107. 108. 109. 110. 111. 112. 113. 114. 115. 116. 117. 118. 119. 120. 121. 122. 123. 124. 125a. 125b. 125c.

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

Stanchev, S., and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta, 73, 460 (1990). Stanchev, S., and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta, 72, 1052 (1989). Bienz, S., and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta, 70, 2146 (1987). Oshida, J., M. Okamoto, S. Azuma, and T. Tanaka. Tetrahedron Asymmetry, 8, 2579 (1997). Yamaguchi, M., T. Shiraishi, Y. Igarashi, and M. Hirama. Tetrahedron Lett., 35, 8233 (1994). Yamaguchi, M., Y. Igarashi, R. S. Reddy, T. Shiraishi, and M. Hirama. Tetrahedron, 53, 11223 (1997). Nakamura, K., T. Kitayama, Y. Inoue, and A. Ohno. Tetrahedron, 46, 7421 (1990). Nakamura, K., T. Kitayama, Y. Inoue, and A. Ohno. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 63, 91 (1990). Yoshikawa, M., Y. Okaichi, B. C. Cha, and I. Kitagawa. Tetrahedron, 46, 7549 (1990). Barco, A., S. Benetti, C. De Risi, G. P. Pollini, R. Romangnoli, and V. Zanirato. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 7599 (1996). Dauzonne, D., and C. Monneret. Synthesis, 1305 (1997). Dauzonne, D., and C. Grandjean. Synthesis, 677 (1992). Yakura, T., T. Tsuda, Y. Mataumura, S. Yamada, and M. Ikeda. Synlett, 985 (1996). Ono, N., H. Miyake, and A. Kaji. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 33 (1982). Ono, N., H. Miyake, and A. Kaji. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 1929 (1987). Guy, A., and L. Serva. Synlett., 647 (1994). Anderson, D. A., and J. R. Hwu. J. Org. Chem., 55, 511 (1990). Ono, N., I. Hamamoto, H. Miyake, and A. Kaji. Chem. Lett., 1079 (1982). Marsan, M. P., W. Warnock, L. Muller, Y. Nakatani, G. Ourisson, and A. Milon. J. Org. Chem., 61, 4252 (1996). Latour, S., and T. D. Wuest. Synthesis, 742 (1987). Beck, A. K., and D. Seebach. Chem. Ber., 124, 2897 (1991). Takeuchi, Y., K. Nagata, and T. Koizumi. J. Org. Chem., 54, 5453 (1989). Rosini, G., R. Ballini, and M. Petrini. Synthesis, 269 (1985). Ballini, R., M. Petrini, and O. Polimati. J. Org. Chem., 61, 5652 (1996). Huffman, J. W., M. M. Cooper, B. B. Miburo, and W. T. Pennington. Tetrahedron, 48, 8213 (1992). Otani, S., and S. Hashimoto. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 60, 1825 (1987). Meuwly, R., and A. Vasella. Helv. Chim. Acta., 68, 997 (1985). Brade, W., and A. Vasella. Helv. Chim. Acta,, 73, 1923 (1990). Nakamura, K., T. Kitayama, Y. Inoue, and A. Ohono. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jon., 63, 91 (1990). Cooper, M. M., and J. W. Hoffman, J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 348 (1987). Arai, S., K. Nakayama, T. Isida, and T. Sioiri. Tetrahedron Lett., 40, 4215 (1999). Seebach, D., and P. Knochel. Helv. Chim. Acta, 69, 261 (1984). Nesi, R., D. Giomi, S. Papaleo, and M. Corti. J. Org. Chem., 55, 1227 (1990). Ono, N., T. Xia, and A. Kaji. Synthesis, 821 (1987). Ono, N., I. Hamamoto, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., 51, 2832 (1986). Full, M. H., and D. W. Knight. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 857 (1997). Crossley, M. J., Y. M. Fung, E. Kyriakopoulos, and J. F. Potter. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 1123 (1998). Garg, N., J. Plavec, and J. Chattopadhyaya. Tetrahedron, 49, 5189 (1993). Kitagawa, I., C. C. Cha, T. Nakae, Y. Okaichi, Y. Takinami, and M. Yoshikawa. Chem. Pharm. Bul., 37, 542 (1989). Nesi, R., D. Giomi, S. Papaleo, and M. Corti. J. Org. Chem., 55, 1227 (1990). Giomi, D., R. Nesi, S. Turchi, and T. Fabriani. J. Org. Chem., 59, 6480 (1994). Beugelmans, B., T. Frinault, A. Lechevallier, D. Kiffer, and P. Mailloe. Tetrahedron Lett., 29, 2567 (1988). Inoue, M., A. J. Frontier, and S. J. Danishefsky. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 39, 761 (2000). Uno, H., K. Kasahara, and N. Ono. Heterocycles, 53, 1011 (2000). Giese, B. Radicals in Organic Synthesis: Formation of Carbon-Carbon Bonds, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1986. Giese, B. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 22, 753 (1983). Motherwell, W. B., and D. Crich. Free Radical Chain Reactions in Organic Synthesis, Academic Press, London, 1992.

REFERENCES

229

125d. Curran, D. P., N. A. Porter, and B. Giese. Stereochemistry of Radical Reactions, Wiley-VCH, Weinheim, 1998. 126a. Ono, N., H. Miyake, and A. Kaji. Chem. Lett., 635 (1985). 126b. Ono, N., H. Miyake, A. Kamimura, I. Hamamoto, R. Tamura, and A. Kaji. Tetrahedron, 41, 4013 (1985). 127. Newkome, G. R., C. N. Moorefield, G. R. Baker, A. L. Johnson, and R. K. Behera. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 30, 1176 (1991). 128. Crossman, R. B., R. M. Rasane, and B. O. Patrick. J. Org. Chem., 64, 7173 (1999). 129. Dupsis, J., B. Giese, J. Hartung, and M. Leising. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 107, 4332 (1985). 130. Garg, N., N. Hossain, and J. Chattopadhyaya. Tetrahedron, 50, 5273 (1994). 131a. Chen, Y. J., and W. Y. Lin, Tetrahedron Lett., 33, 1749 (1992). 131b. Chen, Y. J., C. M. Chen, and W. Y. Lin. Tetrahedron Lett., 34, 2961 (1993). 132. Chen, Y. J., and W. H. Chang. J. Org. Chem., 61, 2536 (1996). 133. Takeuchi, Y., S. Kawahara, T. Suzuki, T. Koizumi, and H. Shinoda. J. Org. Chem., 61, 301 (1996). 134. Rosini, G., R. Ballini, and V. Zanotti. Synthesis, 137 (1983). 135. Rosini, G., R. Ballini, and P. Sorrenti. Tetrahedron, 39, 4127 (1983). 136a. Ballini, R., M. Petrini, and G. Rosini. Synthesis, 46 (1986). 136b. Ballini, R., M. Petrini, and G. Rosini. Synthesis, 849 (1986). 137. Ballini, R., R. Casragnani, and E. Marcantoni. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 3161 (1992). 138. Ono, N., A. Kamimura, and A. Kaji. Tetrahedron Lett., 25, 5319 (1984). 139. Ono, N., T, Hashimoto, T. X. Jun, and A. Kaji. Tetrahedron Lett., 28, 2277 (1987). 140a. Ono, N., I. Hamamoto, A. Kamimura, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., 51, 3734 (1986). 140b. Mandai, T., T. Matsumoto, and J. Tsuji. Synlett., 113 (1993). 141. Barco, A., S. Benetti, G. Spalluto, A. Casolari, G. P. Pollini, and V. Zanirato. J. Org. Chem., 57, 6279 (1992). 142. Barco, A., S. Benetti, G. P. Pollini, G. Spalluto, and V. Zanirato. Gazz, Chim. Ital., 123, 185 (1993). 143. Kornblum, N., S. D. Boyd, H. W. Pinnick, and R. G. Smith. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 93, 4316 (1971). 144. Kornblum, N., and L. Cheng. J. Org. Chem., 42, 2944 (1977). 145. Ono, N., H. Miyake, R. Tamura, I. Hamamoto, and A. Kaji. Chem. Lett., 1139 (1981). 146. Osuka, A., and H. Simidzu, and H. Suzuki. Chem. Lett., 1373 (1983). 147. Aebischer, B., R. Meuwly, and A. Vasella. Helv. Chim. Acta, 67, 2236 (1984). 148a. Meuwly, R., and A. Vasella. Helv. Chim. Acta, 67, 156 (1984). 148b. Aebischer, B., A. Vasella, and H. P. Weber. Helv. Chim. Acta, 65, 621 (1982). 149. Beugelmans, R., A. Lechevallier, T. Frinault, T. Gharbaoui, and R. Benhider. Synlett, 513 (1994). 150a. Vanelle, P., K. Benakli, L. Giraud, and M. P. Crozet. Synlett., 801 (1999). 150b. Giraud, A., L. Giraud, M. P. Crozet, and P. Vanelle. Synlett., 1159 (1997). 151. Ono, N., R. Tamara, J. Hayami, and A. Kaji. Tetrahedron Lett., 763 (1978). 152. Ono, N., A. Kamimura, and A. Kaji. Tetrahedron Lett., 27, 1595 (1986). 153. Ono, N., A. Kamimura, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., 52, 5111 (1987). 154. Kamimura, A., and N. Ono. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1278 (1988). 155. Ono, N., A. Kamimura, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., 53, 251 (1988). 156. DeLucchi, O., and G. Modena. Tetrahedron, 40, 2585 (1984). 157. Danishefsky, S., and J. Y. Lee. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 111, 4829 (1989). 158. Kobertz, W. R., C. R. Bertozzi, and M. D. Bednarski. J. Org. Chem., 61, 1894 (1996). 159. Hartwig, W. Tetrahedron, 39, 2609 (1983). 160. Barton, D. H. R., J. Dorchak, and J. Cs. Jaszberenyi. Tetrahedron Lett., 34, 8051 (1993). 161. Ono, N. In Nitro Compounds Recent Advances in Synthesis and Chemistry, ed. by H. Feuer and A. T. Nielsen, VCH, 1990, p. 86–110. 162. Bakuzis, P., M. L. F. Bakuzis, and T. F. Weingartner. Tetrahedron Lett., 19, 2371 (1978). 163. Seebach, D., R. Henning, and T. Mukhopadhyay. Chem. Ber., 115, 1705 (1982). 164. Mukhopadhyay, T., and D. Seebach. Helv. Chim. Acta, 65, 385 (1982). 165. O’Neil, I. A., J. Y. Q. Lai, and D. Wynn. Chem. Commun., 59 (1999). 166. Kitahara, T., and K. Mori. Tetrahedron, 40, 2935 (1984). 167. Danishefsky, S., M. P. Prisbylla, and S. Hiner. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 100, 2918 (1978). 168. Corey, E. J., and H. Estreicher. Tetrahedron Lett., 22, 603 (1981). 169. McMurry, J. E., J. H. Musser, I. Fleming, J. Fortunank, and C. Nubling. Org. Synth. 6, 799 (1988).

230

SUBSTITUTION AND ELIMINATION OF NO2 IN R–NO2

170. Kloetzel, M. C. J. Am. Chem., Soc., 70, 3571 (1948). 171a. Ballini, R., and G. Bosica. Tetrahedron, 51, 5213 (1995). 171b. Kapiuchi, T., H. Kato, K. P. Jayasundera, T. Higashi, K. Watabe, D. Sawamoto, H. Kinoshita, and K. Inomata, Chem. Lett., 1001 (1998). 172. Ono, N., A. Kamimura, and A. Kaji. Synthesis, 226 (1984). 173. Ballini, R., and G. Bosica. Liebigs Ann., 2087 (1996). 174. Ballini, R., and G. Bosica. Synlett., 1115 (1996). 175. Ballini, R., G. Bosica, L. Petrini, and M. Petrini. Synthesis, 1236 (1999). 176. Ballini, R., E. Marcantoni, and S. Perella. J. Org. Chem., 64, 2954 (1999). 177. Ono, N., H. Miyake, R. Tanikaga, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., 47, 5017 (1982). 178. Auvray, P., P. Knochel, and J. F. Normant. Tetrahedron Lett., 26, 2329 (1985). 179. Bakkini, R., and P. Astolfi. Liebigs Ann., 1879 (1996). 180. Barlaam, B., J. Boivin, and S. Z. Zard. Tetrahedron Lett., 34, 1023 (1993). 181a. Easton, C. J., P. D. Roselt, and E. R. T. Tiekink. Tetrahedron, 51, 7809 (1995). 181b. Coghlan, P. A., and C. J. Easton. Tetrahedron Lett., 40, 4745 (1999). 182. Seebach, D. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 29, 1320 (1990). 183. Krohn, K., and W. Priyono. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 25, 339 (1986). 184a. Russell, G. A., B. Mudryk, and M. Jawdosiuk. Synthesis, 62 (1981). 184b. Russell, G. A., M. Jawdosiuk, and F. Ros. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 101, 3579 (1979). 184c. Russell, G. A., B. Mudryk, M. Jawdosiuk, and Z. Wrobel. J. Org. Chem., 48, 1879 (1982). 185a. Crozet, M. P., and P. Vanelle. Tetrahedron Lett., 26, 323 (1985). 185b. Vanelle, P., N. Madadi, C. Roubaud, J. Maldonado, and M. P. Crozet. Tetrahedron, 47, 5173 (1991). 186a. Ono, N., H. Eto, R. Tamura, J. Hayami, and A. Kaji. Chem. Lett., 757 (1976). 186b. Ono, N., R. Tamura, E. Eto, I,. Hamamoto, T. Nakatsuka, J. Hayami, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., 48, 3678 (1983). 187. Morris, A. P., T. Frinault, R. Benhida, T. Gharbaoui, A. Lechevallier, and R. Beugelmans. Bull. Soc. Chim. Fr., 132, 178 (1995).

The Nitro Group in Organic Synthesis. Noboru Ono Copyright © 2001 Wiley-VCH ISBNs: 0-471-31611-3 (Hardback); 0-471-22448-0 (Electronic)

8 CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS Nitro compounds have been converted into various cyclic compounds via cycloaddition reactions. In particular, nitroalkenes have proved to be useful in Diels-Alder reactions. Under thermal conditions, they behave as electron-deficient alkenes and react with dienes to yield 3-nitrocyclohexenes. Nitroalkenes can also act as heterodienes and react with olefins in the presence of Lewis acids to yield cyclic alkyl nitronates, which undergo [3+2] cycloaddition. Nitro compounds are precursors for nitrile oxides, alkyl nitronates, and trialkylsilyl nitronates, which undergo [3+2]cycloaddition reactions. Thus, nitro compounds play important roles in the chemistry of cycloaddition reactions. In this chapter, recent developments of cycloaddition chemistry of nitro compounds and their derivatives are summarized.

8.1 DIELS-ALDER REACTIONS Diels-Alder reactions are one of the most fundamental and useful reactions in synthetic organic chemistry. Various dienes and dienophiles have been employed for this useful reaction.1 Nitroalkenes take part in a host of Diels-Alder reactions in various ways, as outlined in Scheme 8.1. Various substituted nitroalkenes and dienes have been employed for this reaction without any substantial improvement in the original discovery of Alder and coworkers.2 Nitrodienes can also serve as 4π-components for reverse electron demand in Diels-Alder reactions. Because the nitro group is converted into various functional groups, as discussed in Chapters 6 and 7, the Diels-Alder reaction of nitroalkenes has been frequently used in synthesis of complex natural products. Recently, Denmark and coworkers have developed [4+2] cycloaddition using nitroalkenes as heterodienes; it provides an excellent method for the preparation of heterocyclic compounds, including pyrrolizidine alkaloids. This is discussed in Section 8.3. 8.1.1 Nitroalkenes Using Dienophiles Nitroethene undergoes rapid cycloaddition to 1,3-dienes; the subsequent Nef reaction gives cyclohexenones, which are formally produced by the Diels-Alder reaction of ketene with 231

232

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

R

Nef reaction

O

X R X

R

Al/Hg

NO2

X

NH2

X R R

Bu3SnH AIBN

X

NO2 A O B

N

O

A

H

MeO2C

[2+3] cycloaddition

B R

A

O N O

MeO2C

B R H2/Raney Ni

A

O N

A MeO2C

B

HO

N

B

HO R

R

Scheme 8.1.

1,3-dienes (Eq. 8.1).3 This strategy has been used for the synthesis of prostaglandins by Corey and coworkers.4 Another synthesis of prostaglandin based on the Diels-Alder reaction of nitroalkenes is presented in Scheme 8.2, in which the nitro group is reduced to an amino group.5 A total synthesis of antheridium-inducing factor of the fern Anemia phyllitidis uses the Diels-Alder reaction of nitroethylene followed by the Nef reaction.6 CH2OCH2Ph

PhCH2O

PhCH2O Nef reaction

–20 ºC + NO2

NO2

71%

O

(8.1)

The Diels-Alder reaction of nitroalkenes followed by the Nef reaction is frequently used in natural product synthesis.7 For example, Scheme 8.3 shows an elegant synthesis of dl-mesembrane starting from the Diels-Alder reaction of 1-arylnitroethene with 1,3-butadiene.7a Ono and coworkers have developed a new strategy using nitroalkenes as alkene equivalents in Diels-Alder reactions. When unsymmetrical dienes are used, the nitro group controls the regiochemistry of the Diels-Alder reaction, as shown in Eq. 8.2. The nitro group in cycloadducts is removed by radical denitration (see Chapter 7); therefore, nitroalkenes can be regarded as reactive dienophilic alkene equivalents.8 Vinyl sulfones have similar utility in organic synthesis.9 In general, nitroalkenes are more reactive and selective than the corresponding sulfones, but the latter are more readily available than nitroalkenes.

8.1

233

DIELS-ALDER REACTIONS

C5H11 S

S

S

+ R

C5H11

R

S

C5H11

R Al/Hg

S

O2N

S

H2N (major)

NO2

90% O

R = (CH2)6CN

H2N

R

C5H11

1) OsO4

(CH2)6CO2H

O

2) Pb(OAc)4 3) HgCl2 HO

O HO

O

CHO

OH

OH Scheme 8.2.

NO2

O 2N

O Nef reaction

MeO

MeO

MeO

MeO

MeO

MeO MeO2C HN

O RhCl3

1) LiAlH4 MeO

2) CH3C(O)NCO 3) Tf2O

MeO 85%

MeO MeO OMe

O

OMe

Cl3C N CCl3COCl

MeO2C

CuCl (bipy)

Cl

O N CO2Me 88%

MeO MeO OMe

OMe

OMe

OMe Bu3SnH AIBN O N CO2Me

N Me dl-Mesembrane

Scheme 8.3.

Cl Cl

234

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

NO2 C4H9

C4H9

O2N

C4H9 Bu3SnH AIBN

Me

Me 80%

72% Me

NO2 O2N

Bu3SnH Me C4H9

C4H9

C4H9

Me

AIBN

(8.2)

52%

70%

The Diels-Alder reaction of morphinan-6,8-dienes with nitroethene affords a novel type of opium alkaloids (Eq. 8.3).10a High reactivity of nitroethylene is demonstrated for the Diels-Alder reaction with thermally unstable dienes, and this is used for synthesis of polycyclic kopsane-like alkaloids.10b MeO

MeO

+

O

O2N

benzene

O

reflux

N

N

CHO

CHO

NO2

(8.3)

63%

Functionalized nitroalkenes are important dienophiles in the Diels-Alder reaction. For example, (E)-methyl β-nitroacrylate is an important reagent in organic synthesis. The nitro group can be readily eliminated; the Diels-Alder reaction of β-nitroacrylate is equivalent to that of ethyl propiolate with an inverse regiochemistry (Eq. 8.4).11 CO2Et H

CO2Et

55% NO2 CO2Et O2N

CO2Et

DBU

CO2Et

(8.4)

60%

91%

Another example is presented in Eq. 8.5, in which the nitro group is more effective in controlling the direction of addition than the carbonyl group.12

O

O

O DBU

+ O2N

NO2 83%

(8.5)

8.1

235

DIELS-ALDER REACTIONS

Various dienes substituted with heteroatoms such as 1-oxabuta-1,3-dienes have been used in organic synthesis, as shown in Eq. 8.613 and Eq. 8.7.14 CO2Me

O2N + CO2Me

NHBoc

(8.6)

NO2 NHBoc 63% NO2

O2N

(8.7)

1) benzene, RT, 42 h

+ Me3SiO

benzene RT, 3 h

CO2Me

CO2Me

O

2) AcOH

72%

Nitroethene substituted with the Me3Si group is used in a Diels-Alder reaction (Eq. 8.8).15a An example of the reaction with 1-nitro-2-(trialkylsilyl)acetylenes has also been published.15b

NO2

SiMe3

110 ºC, 8h

+

(8.8)

Me3Si

NO2 61%

Recently, enhanced endo selectivity has been reported in the Diels-Alder reaction of (E)-1-acetoxybuta-1,3-dienes with methyl β-nitroacrylate. The selectivity is compared with that of the reaction using 1-methoxybuta-1,3-dienes and 1-trimethylsilyloxybuta-1,3-dienes.16 The degree of electron richness of a diene is an important consideration in endo:exo selectivity issues. In particular, electron-rich dienes favor the formation of exo-nitrocycloadducts (Eq. 8.9).

CO2Me

CH2 Cl2

+

R

endo

exo

Me

67

33

SiMe3

68

32

COMe

95

5

Yield (%)

RT

O2N

OR MeO2C +

O 2N

O2N

OR

endo

67

MeO2C

OR

exo

71

(8.9)

Node and co-workers have found that the Diels-Alder reaction of nitroalkenes with 1methoxy-3-trimethylsilyloxy-1,3-butadiene (Danishefsky’s dienes) exhibit abnormal exo-selectivity. Electrostatic repulsion between the nitro and the silyloxy group of the diene induces this abnormal exo-selectivity (Eq. 8.10).17 This selective reaction has been used for the asymmetric synthesis of various natural products as shown in Scheme 8.6.

236

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

OMe

NO2

1) benzene, reflux

+

2) HCl

R

R

exo

endo

Ph

87

13

60

66

34

71

OSiMe3 O

O

R

OMe

+

R

n-C5H11

OMe

NO2 exo

Yield (%)

NO2

(8.10)

endo

Total synthesis of epibatidine, a potent analgesic compound isolated from the Ecuadorian poison frog Epopedibates tricolor has been accomplished as shown in Scheme 8.4. Here the Diels-Alder reaction of 5-(2-nitrovinyl)-2-chloropyridine with 2-trimethylsilyloxy-1,3-butadiene is used as a key step.18 This alkaloid is prepared by using polymer-supported reagents and sequencing agents in a successive manner. The key steps are similar to those in Scheme 8.4, but no chromatographic purification steps are required to afford the product in >90% purity.19 The Diels-Alder reaction of nitroalkenes with Danishefsky’s dienes is applied to synthesis of truncated carbocyclic analogues of a potent neuraminidase inhibitor 4-guanidino-Neu4Ac2en (see Scheme 8.5).20 Carbocyclic analogs are found to retain interesting levels of antiviral activity comparable to those shown by their oxygen-containing compounds in Scheme 8.5.

δMe3Si O steric repulsion

OMe

OMe

δSiMe3 O

O N O

R H

R H

exo

O 2N

O2N

1) 120 ºC

N + OSiMe3

electrostatic repulsion

endo

NO2 Cl

O N O

O

2) CF3CO2H

1) L-selectride

OMs

2) MsCl Cl

N

Cl

N 53%

68% HO 1) NaOMe, O3 –78 ºC 2) NaBH4

MsO OMs

Cl

1) NaN3, DMF N3

2) MsCl, Et3N

N

Cl 80%

N 63% Cl

MsO ∆

SnCl2 MeOH-THF 25 ºC

H N

N

NH2 Cl

N

84%

80% Scheme 8.4.

8.1

DIELS-ALDER REACTIONS

PhCH2O OCH2Ph

OTMS toluene

+ O2N

OMe

1) H , HO

OH

2) NaBH4, CoCl2

O

MeO 58%

PhCH2O +

H

O2N

110 ºC

H O

1) Ac2O, pyridine DMAP

O

2) HCl

H2N

PhCH2O

PhCH2O Me3S+I-

O 66%

PhCH2O H

NaN3

H

AcHN

O

AcHN

H

AcHN

MeO 72%

n-BuLi

237

OH N3 CO2H

CO2H O

NH H

N H NHAc

HO

NH2

NH

H HO

N NH2 H NHAc Drug for influenza A and B

Scheme 8.5.

1-Nitrodiene systems such as 3-(2-nitrovinyl)indoles21 and 2-(2-nitrovinyl)furans22 are reactive enough as dienes for the Diels-Alder reaction, as shown in Eqs. 8.11 and 8.12. Elimination of HNO2 and dehydrogenation take place spontaneously to give aromatized products, respectively. NO2

O +

N H

O 140 ºC

(8.11)

N H O 50–60%

O

CO2Me NO2 O

+

140 ºC

(8.12)

CO2Me O 53%

Reactions of 2-(2-nitrovinyl)-1,4-benzoquinone with furans, indoles, and endocyclic enol ethers form angular, fused heterocyclic quinoid ring systems (see Eq. 8.13).23

238

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

O2N

O O2N

OH

heat

+

(8.13)

O

O

HO 87%

O

Aromatization is often observed during the Diels-Alder reaction using nitroalkenes. Jung24 and Ono25 have reported that 2-phenylsulfinyl-1-nitroalkenes act as nitroacetylene equivalents in Diels-Alder reactions to give aromatic compounds, as shown in Eqs. 8.14 and 8.15, respectively. Me

Me Ph

NO2

S O

+

(8.14)

benzene

OSiMe3

Me

Me NO2

reflux

OH 32%

OMe OMe

Ph

NO2

S

Me toluene 110 ºC, 2 h

+

O

(8.15)

HO

Me3SiO

51%

Another example of the preparing of aromatic compounds via the Diels-Alder reaction of nitroalkenes is presented in Eq. 8.16.26 Cycloaddition of methyl propiolate affords a high yield of the isomeric product. OMe CO2Me O2N

OMe OMe

1) 0–25 ºC 2) DBU

CO2Me

HO

(8.16)

80%

Me3SiO

OMe CO2Me

CO2Me HO

Node and coworkers have used this aromatization strategy for the synthesis of (–) aphanorphine.27 The Diels-Alder reaction of chiral nitroalkene, prepared by the asymmetric nitroolefination reaction of α-methyl-δ-valerolactone, with the Danishefsky’s diene followed by aromatization is used as a key step for this total synthesis, as shown in Scheme 8.6. Nitrodienes are conveniently prepared by elimination of benzoic acid from β-nitro-β-1-cyclopentenyl-α-benzoyloxyethane. They undergo the Diels-Alder reaction with methyl acrylate (Eq. 8.17).28 O2N

O2N

OC(O)Ph + CO2Me

AcONa benzene, 120 ºC

CO2Me 47%

(8.17)

8.1

O

O

OMe

O

Me

1) benzene, reflux

+

(R)

NO2

239

DIELS-ALDER REACTIONS

O Me

O

2) HCl NO2 OMe 30% (overall)

Me3SiO OMe Me

p-TsOH, MeOH

1) (COCl)2, DMSO

MeO2C

2) BF3•OEt2 OH 74% NMe MeO

MeO

Me (–) - aphanorphine

Me CO2Me 41% Scheme 8.6.

In intramolecular Diels-Alder reactions, two rings are formed in one step. The reaction has been used to synthesize a number of interesting ring systems.29 The intramolecular cyclization of (E)-1-nitrodeca-1,6,8-triene at 80 °C affords an endo cycloadduct with the trans ring fusion preferentially, as shown in Eq. 8.18. In contrast, (Z)-nitroalkenes produce a nearly 1:1 mixture of cis- and trans-fused cycloadducts.30 H 80 ºC

H +

Me

O2N

H NO2 89

Me :

H 25 ºC

H NO2 11 H

(8.18)

+ Me

O2N

H NO2 1

Me :

H NO2 1

Although Lewis acid-catalyzed-Diels-Alder reactions of enones are common, there are few reports on the catalysis of Diels-Alder reaction of nitroalkenes. The reaction of nitroalkenes with alkenes in the presence of Lewis acids undergoes a different course of reaction to give cyclic nitronates (see Section 8.3). Knochel reported an enhanced reactivity and selectivity of the intramolecular Diels-Alder reaction using silica gel as Lewis acid in hexane (Eq. 8.19).31 H Silica gel hexane O2N

Me

H NO2 85% (single diastereoisomer)

(8.19)

240

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

A concentrated solution of LiClO4 in diethyl ether has also been shown to activate the intramolecular Diels-Alder reactions (Eq. 8.20).32 The reaction proceeds at room temperature to give the adduct in good yield, whereas noncatalyzed reaction proceeds very slowly even at 80 °C (yield was 22% for 65 h). CO2Et

EtO2C CO2Et

LiClO4

O2N

CO2Et

Et2O

O2N

(8.20)

70%

Intramolecular Diels-Alder cyclizations of (E)-1-nitro-1,7,9-decatrienes under thermal conditions and Lewis acid conditions lead to the formation of decalin ring systems with excellent endo selectivity (Eq. 8.21). This strategy is used for preparing of the AB ring system of norzoanthamine.33 O2N MOMO

OMOM

NO2 H3C

H3C

H

CH3

H

benzene 85 ºC, 65 h

CH3

(8.21)

OPMB

OPMB

Oppolzer and Robbiani have reported highly stereoselective total syntheses of alkaloids such as chelidonine by an intramolecular o-quinodimethene/nitrostyrene-cycloaddition (Scheme 8.7).34 (Benzocyclobutane is used as a source of quinodimethene). The high regio- and stereoselectivity in the intramolecular cycloaddition is remarkable; a strong preference for transition state, exo-NO2, over transition state, endo-NO2, is responsible for the stereoselectivity. It has been known that aromatic heterocycles such as furan, thiophene, and pyrrole undergo Diels-Alder reactions despite their aromaticity and hence expected inertness. Furans have been especially used efficiently as dienes due to their electron-rich properties. Thiophenes and pyrroles are less reactive as dienes than furans. But pyrroles with N-electron-withdrawing substituents are efficient dienes. There exists a limited number of examples of five-membered, aromatic heterocycles acting as dienophiles in Diels-Alder reactions. Some nitro heteroaromatics serve as dienophiles in the Diels-Alder reactions. Heating a mixture of 1-(phenylsulfonyl)3-nitropyrrole and isoprene at 175 °C followed by oxidation results in the formation of indoles (see Eq. 8.22).35a N-Tosyl-3-nitroindole undergoes high-yielding Diels-Alder reactions with NO2

Me

O2N +

N

O2N Me

+

Me

N

N

H SO2Ph

H SO2Ph

SO2Ph Me 1) base 2) DDQ

+ N

Me N

SO2Ph 91% (3:1)

SO2Ph

(8.22)

8.1

241

DIELS-ALDER REACTIONS

1-(N-acyl-N-alkylamino)-1,3-butadienes in a regioselective manner to afford intermediates of alkaloids.35b Isoxazole ring systems play an important role in organic synthesis, and 4-nitroisoxazoles have been used as dienophiles in Diels-Alder reactions, as shown in Eq. 8.23.36 4-Nitro-2-phenyloxazole, obtained by thermal isomerization of the corresponding nitroisoxazole, is found to undergo Diels-Alder reactions with 2,3-dimethylbuta-1,3-diene (see Eq.

O Br

C7H7O2C

O

O N

O

O

NH

O

H7C7O2C

H

NaH

+

O R

O

H

R = H (80%)

1) AgNO2, I2 2) KOAc

R = NO2 (74%)

O

O O

H7C7O2C

N

120 ºC

O

H7C7O2C N H O

128 ºC

O

H O

O

H 92%

O2 N

O

O

H7C7O2C

O

H7C7O2C

N

H

H

NaBH4

O N

O

O

H

H O

NO2

O H 51%

O

AlH3

OH

H2, Pd O

O

O

O

Me H

HN H

N O

O

H

H O H

O

H

OH

H (±) norchelidinone 87%

(±) chelidonine 48%

O endo

O

O N CO2C7H7 H

O

O

NO2 O

C7H7O2C N H

O

exo

O2N O

exo Scheme 8.7.

endo

242

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

O2N Ph

NO2

Me

110 ºC

+ N

O

CO2Et

Me

N O EtO2C 87%

Me

Me

Me

150 ºC

Me

N

(8.23)

N O

O

Me

Me 68%

8.24).37 Thus, nitroheterocycles are important synthons of five-membered heteroarynes in cycloaddition reactions, which are generally difficult to be generated.38

NO2

Me

N Ph

+

111 ºC

O

Me

Me

N - HNO2

Me

Ph

Me

O

O2N N

DDQ

Ph O

N

Me

O

Me

(8.24)

Ph

Me

71% + 13% (aromatization)

Microwave irradiation at solvent-free conditions induces pyrazoyl 2-azadienes to undergo Diels-Alder reactions with nitroalkenes, within 5–10 min good yields of pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridines are obtained (see Eq. 8.25).39 Without irradiation the reaction produces only traces of products on classical heating.

N

S N Et

N

NMe2

NO2

240 W, 130 ºC, 5 min +

N N Et

NO2

S

(8.25)

N 84%

3,7-Dinitro-11-oxatricyclo[6.2.1.01,6]undec-9-ene has been prepared by an intramolecular Diels-Alder reaction of the furan with a nitroalkene group as shown in Eq. 8.26. This tricyclic compound is a versatile synthetic tool for the preparation of ergot alkaloids.41

NO2 O

CH2Cl2 NO2

O2N

O

(8.26)

25 ºC, 120 h H NO2

8.1

DIELS-ALDER REACTIONS

243

Amino-substituted dienes are also important dienophiles in Diels-Alder reactions. Recently, chiral and achiral 2-amino-1,3-dienes have been prepared to study their reactivity (see also asymmetric Diels-Alder reaction Section 8.1.2). The reaction of 2,3-diamino-1,3-butadienes with nitrostyrene gives unusual [3+2]carbocyclization products, 2-aminocyclopentanones, which are not formed by the direct cycloaddition but derived from the Michael addition products (see section discussing the Michael addition Section 4.1.3).42 A typical regioselectivity and endo/exo selectivity has been reported in the Diels-Alder reaction of 2-(N-acylamino)-1,3-diene with nitroalkenes (Eq. 8.27).43 Thus, exo products are predominantly formed, which is general for the Diels-Alder reaction of nitroalkenes with sterically hindered dienes. NO2 C5H11

C5H11

toluene

+

N Cbz OTHP

(8.27)

reflux

NO2

N Cbz OTHP 41%

The total synthesis of frodosin B, which is a potentially useful drug for HIV, has been reported (Scheme 8.8). The key steps in the synthesis are a Friedel-Crafts reaction to form the sevenmembered ring and a Diels-Alder reaction of nitroethylene to build the six-membered ring, thereby fixing the double bond in the proper position.44 Resin-bound 2-aminobutadiene reacts with 1-nitro-2-arylethenes to give, after cleavage of the resin, nitrocyclohexanones in good yields with high purity (Eq. 8.28).45 Ar1

Ar1

NO2 NO2 +

N

Ar2

N

THF, 2 h

N

N

Ar2

(8.28) 31–63%

The preparation of resin-bound nitroalkenes via a microwave-assisted Knoevenagel reaction of resin-bound nitroacetic acid with aryl and alkyl substituted aldehydes is reported. The potential of these resin-bound nitroalkenes for application in combinatorial chemistry is demonstrated by a Diels-Alder reaction with 2,3-dimethylbutadiene (Scheme 8.9). It is also used for one-pot three-component tandem [4+2]/[3+2] reactions with ethyl vinyl ether and styrene.46

8.1.2 Asymmetric Diels-Alder Reaction Asymmetric Diels-Alder reactions have been performed by using either chiral dienophiles or chiral dienes in the presence or the absence of catalysts.47 The progress in this field is remarkable; catalytic asymmetric Diels-Alder reactions are generally carried out either by the use of chiral dienophiles or by the use of chiral dienes. Here, the reactions of chiral nitroalkenes with dienes or the reactions of nitroalkenes with chiral dienes are discussed. Many different chiral auxiliaries are now available, and some of them have been used in asymmetric Diels-Alder reactions of nitroalkenes.

244

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

OHC

OMe

HO

chloroacetone K2CO3 2-butanone 80 ºC

OMe Br-Ph P+(CH ) CO Et 3 2 3 2 O

NaN(SiMe3)2 THF 0 ºC RT

O

72% MeO

MeO 1) H2, Pd/C EtOH, RT 2) LiOH, THF/ MeOH/H2O

O O

EtO

(COCl)2, CH2Cl2

O

O reflux, then SnCl4 -78 -10 ºC

HO

87%

100% MeO

MeO LiN(SiMe3)2

O

O

ZnCl2, acetone THF -78 -40 ºC

O

O

HO

67%

81%

MeO 1) MsCl, Et3N, CH2Cl2, 0 ºC 2) NaOMe, MeOH, 0 ºC

R1

MeO excess O

NO2

di-tert-butylpyridine

O O2N

R1 = O: 84% R1 = CH2: 97%

Tebbe reagent, pyridine, THF, -40 ºC

79%

OR2 R2 = Me: 58%

n-Bu3SnH AIBN toluene 110 ºC

O

R2 = H: 94% (Frondosin B)

Scheme 8.8.

NaSEt, DMF reflux

8.1

245

DIELS-ALDER REACTIONS

O NO2

O

+

OH LiAlH4

Ph

O

15 kbar [4+2] O

RHN

LiAlH4

N

Ph

Ph

O

NO2

SnCl2•H2O

O

NH2

LiAlH4

O

Ph

NH2 HO Ph

Ph

Scheme 8.9.

8.1.2.1 Nitroalkenes with Chiral Auxiliaries The use of carbohydrates as chiral auxiliary in Diels-Alder reactions for the stereoselective preparation of carbocyclic and heterocyclic chiral rings is well documented.48 For example, D-manno-nitroalkene reacts with 2,3-dimethyl1,3-butadiene to give a 65:35 mixture of adducts, as shown in Eq. 8.29. The configurations at C-4 and C-5 have been determined to be (4R,5R) and (4S,5S), respectively. Hydrolysis of the product followed by degradative oxidation of the sugar side chains leads to enantiomerically pure trans-nitrocyclohexene aldehyde.49 O2N

Me

H

toluene

+ H

105 ºC

Me

R

Me

NO2 R R

Me

Me

NO2 S S

+ R

Me

R

(8.29)

When D-galacto-1-nitroalkene is used, a 85:15 mixture of (4S,5S) and (4R,5R) is formed. Preferred attacks of dienes at the most stable conformers of these nitroalkenes are shown in Scheme 8.10.50 Uncatalyzed Diels-Alder reactions between 1-(trimethysiloxy)- or 1-acetoxy-1,3-butadiene and sugar-derived nitroalkenes having D-galacto or D-manno configurations proceed with complete regioselectivity. Diastereofacial selectivity is also complete with the D-galacto dienophile, whereas it is only moderate with the D-manno (Eq. 8.30).51

OAc OAc

R=

D-manno

OAc

65

:

35

OAc

15

:

85

OAc OAc OAc OAc

R=

D-galacto OAc OAc

R = CHO H H

NO2

Si Re

Me

OAc

Si attack C (4)

H

Me Me

NO2

Me

R

AcO

NO2

Si Re

Me

Me

H

Re attack C (4)

Scheme 8.10.

Me

NO2

Me

R

246

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

O2N

OC (O)Me NO2

OC (O)Me

H

H

OH

OH

R = D-galacto

+ R 75%

R

OH OH

OH

(8.30)

Diels-Alder reactions in which nitroalkenes act as dienophiles are accelerated in the presence of 4 M LiClO4 in nitromethane. This acceleration is higher than that observed when LiClO4 is used in diethyl ether. The diastereoselective Diels-Alder reaction using homochiral nitroalkenes shown in Eq. 8.31 has been demonstrated.52 H OBn

LiClO4, MeNO2

+ O 2N

RT, 96 h

Me

H 80

OBn H NO2

H + H 20

: 98%

OBn H NO2

(8.31)

Node and Fuji have developed a new chiral synthesis of various alkaloids using chiral nitroalkene, (S)-(–)-2-methyl-2-(2′-nitrovinyl)-δ-valerolactone. Scheme 8.11 shows a total synthesis of (–)-physostigmine, a principal alkaloid of the Calabar bean.53 The key nitroalkene is prepared by asymmetric nitroolefination of α-methyl-δ-lactone using a chiral enamine (see

O O

OTMS

Me

NO2

O

O

benzene

+

O

reflux OMe

Me H

OMe NO2

95% H Me Zn/CH2Br2

OH

O

TiCl4/CH2Cl2-THF MeO

N H H

1) NaH, MeI 2) O3

82% Me 1) p-TsO-•C5H5NH+

EtO O

OMe

H Me

O

AlCl3/NaI

O

N Me 64%

2) I2/EtOH 3) NaI/EtOH

OH

N Me 85%

Me EtO PDC

OMe

O N H Me MeO 76% Me EtO

O

CO2H

N Me 86%

Scheme 8.11.

RO

Me

N Me N H Me R = CONHMe: (-)-physostigmine R = Et: (-)-eserethole R = H: (-)-eseroline

8.1

247

DIELS-ALDER REACTIONS

section discussing Michael addition Section 4.2). The Diels-Alder reaction of the chiral nitroalkene with Danishefsky’s diene gives a diastereomeric mixture of the adduct. The exo-selectivity is general for this type of reaction, as discussed previously. The stereocontrol of newly created asymmetric carbons is not important because these isomers are converted into a single compound after aromatization of the resulting six-membered ring. Methylenation and reductive cyclization on treatment with CH2Br2 and Zn in the presence of TiCl4 give the lactam in 82% yield. The lactam is converted into the target compound via the processes shown in Scheme 8.11. Clive and coworkers have reported a total synthesis of calicheamicinone, the aglycon of the antitumor agent calicheamicin γ1, starting from the Diels-Alder reaction of methyl 3-nitropropenoate with ketene acetal (Eq. 8.32).54 An asymmetric Diels-Alder reaction between ketene acetal presented in Eq. 8.32 and 3-nitropropenoate derived from (–)-8-phenyl-menthol affords the optically pure adduct, which can be converted into either enantiomer of calicheamicinone (Eq. 8.33).55 O O

O O

O2N

NHCO2Me

NO2

–78 ºC

+

Me3SiO

O

CO2Me

O

THF

HO

CO2Me

HO

(8.32)

SSSMe

56% O

NO2

O O

O

+ O

H

–78 ºC 35 min THF

Me3SiO

O

O O

O

NO2

(8.33) Ph

Ph 64%

Asymmetric Diels-Alder reactions using chiral sulfinylalkenes have been extensively studied by Koizumi and coworkers.55 Fuji and coworkers have extended this strategy to chiral 1-(alkylsulfinyl)-2-nitroalkenes. Such nitroalkenes react with reactive dienes such as Danishefsky’s dienes to produce an adduct with a high enantiomeric excess (ee) (see Eqs. 8.34 and 8.35).57

NO2

OMe O

Ph

S

1) CH2Cl2

+

RT, 39 h

Me

NO2

OTMS

2) HCl

OMe O S

Ph Me

O2N

OMe

O 40% (>95% ee)

OTMS

2) HCl

(8.34) O 37% (>95% ee)

OMe

1) CH2Cl2 RT

OMe

+

O2N

+

O2N

O2N +

O 25% (88% ee)

OMe

(8.35) O 21% (91% ee)

Simple dienes are not reactive enough toward chiral 1-(alkylsulfinyl)-2-nitroalkenes. To resolve this problem, the reaction of optically active 1-(alkylsulfinyl)-2-nitroalkenes with simple

248

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

dienes such as cyclopentadiene or 1,3-pentadiene has been carried in the presence of Lewis acids or under high pressure.58 In these reactions, the Z-sulfinyl dienophiles show high diastereoand endo/exo selectivity, as shown in Eq. 8.36. NO2 O S

Me

Ph Me

(S)

ZnCl2, CH2Cl2

+

Ph Me

S O2N O 89%

RT, 15 h

Me

(8.36)

8.1.2.2 Dienes with Chiral Auxiliaries The use of dienes with the chiral auxiliary attached to the C-1 position of the dienes is the most popular in asymmetric Diels-Alder reactions.59 In 1980, Trost reported high asymmetric induction in the Diels-Alder reaction using 1-(S)-O-methylmandeloxy-1,4-butadiene.59a However, the result obtained by Trost et al. has remained unique for more than a decade, at least in terms of enantioselectivity. The asymmetric Diels-Alder reaction of chiral diene-amines with nitroalkenes gives aminocyclohexenes with good diastereoselectivity (Eq. 8.37).60 The development in the area of chiral dienes is slow; it may be due to the difficulty of preparing these compounds. H Ph O

H Ph O SO2Ph

But

N

+

N

CHCl3

But SO2Ph

(8.37)

reflux, 8 h

O2N

NO2 Me 46% (ds = 35%)

Me

Recently, the research groups of Enders (Eq. 8.38)61 and Barluenga (Eq. 8.39)62 reported on the cycloaddition of chiral 2-aminobutadiene and described elegant solutions to the stereochemistry problems (regio-, diastereo-, and enantioselectivity). The reaction of 2-[(S)-2methoxymethyl]pyrrolidin-1-yl]buta-1,3-diene with various 2-aryl-1-nitroethenes produces after hydrolysis 5-aryl-2-methyl-substituted 4-nitrocyclohexanones in excellent enantiomeric purity (ee = 75–95%) and with high diastereoselectivity (ds = 75–95%).61 O Me N

OMe

NO2 +

Me

1) Et2O, –78 ºC 2) SiO2, Et2O, H2O

R

R

OH Me + Ph OMe

26–60% (8.38) (ds = 75–95%) (ee = 95–99%)

OH NO2

N

NO2

1) MeOH, –80 ºC

Me

NO2

2) AcOH/AcONa, THF O

Ph

63% (94% ee)

(8.39)

8.2

1,3-DIPOLAR CYCLOADDITION

249

8.2 1,3-DIPOLAR CYCLOADDITION Since Huisgen’s definition of the general concepts of 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition, this class of reaction has been used extensively in organic synthesis. Nitro compounds can participate in 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition as sources of 1,3-dipoles such as nitronates or nitroxides. Because the reaction of nitrones can be compared with that of nitronates, recent development of nitrones in organic synthesis is briefly summarized. 1,3-Dipolar cycloadditions to a double bond or a triple bond lead to five-membered heterocyclic compounds (Scheme 8.12). There are many excellent reviews on 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition;63 in particular, the monograph by Torssell covers this topic comprehensively. This chapter describes only recent progress in this field. Many papers have appeared after the comprehensive monograph by Torssell. Here, the natural product synthesis and asymmetric 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition are emphasized.63c Synthesis of pyrrolidine and -izidine alkaloids based on cycloaddition reactions are also discussed in this chapter.

R2 R1

R2

N – X O X = R (nitrone) X = OR (nitronate)

Y

X R2

Y

Z

X

R1

R C N O

3 4 N2 1 5

Y

O

R1

Z

3 N2 1

O

R C N O

R1 R

R1 N

R

O

Y

N O R1

R1

Scheme 8.12.

8.2.1 Nitrones Nitrones have been generally prepared by the condensation of N-hydroxylamines with carbonyl compounds (Eq. 8.40).63 There are a number of published procedures, including dehydrogenation of N,N-disubstituted hydroxylamines, N-alkylation of imines, and oxidation of secondary amines. Among them, the simplest method is the oxidation of secondary amines with H2O2 in the presence of catalytic amounts of Na2WO4; this method is very useful for the preparation of cyclic nitrones (Eq. 8.41).64

R RCHO + R´NHOH O

H2O2, Na2WO4•2H2O N H

Me

H2O

N

R'

N Me O 62–70%

(8.40)

(8.41)

Reductions of γ-nitroketones yield cyclic nitrones, which undergo inter- and intramolecular cycloaddition to various alkenes. The result of addition to acrylonitrile is shown in Eq. 8.42, in which a mixture of regio- and stereoisomers is formed.65

250

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

O

O

(NH4)HCO3, Pd/C

N

CO2Me

CO2Me

NO2 CN

CN

O

NC

+

N

67%

R

R = (CH2)2CO2Me 60

N

+

N

15

CN +

N

CN R

R

R :

O

O

O

:

5

:

20

(8.42) Conjugated nitrones are formed by intramolecular reductive cyclizations of nitro groups onto ketones; the resulting nitrones give starting materials for preparing azasteroids. An example is shown in Eq. 8.43.66 SiMe3

SiMe3 O

NO2 Ph

O Fe, HCl

N

H2O-EtOH reflux, 1 h

Ph benzene 200 ºC, 3 h

62% O N

Ph

(8.43) 59%

Nitrones, reactive 1,3-dipoles, react with alkenes and alkynes to form isoxazolidines and isoxazolines, respectively. With monosubstituted olefinic dipolarophiles, 5-substituted isoxazolidines are generally formed predominantly; however, with olefins bearing strongly electronwithdrawing groups, 4-substituted derivatives may also be formed.63a The mechanism of 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition can be found in Ref. 63 and the references within. The reaction of nitrone with 1,2-disubstituted alkenes creates three contiguous asymmetric centers, in which the geometric relationship of the substituents of alkenes is retained. The synthetic utility of nitrone adducts is mainly due to their conversion into various important compounds. For instance, β-amino alcohols can be obtained from isoxazolidines by reduction with H2-Pd or Raney Ni with retention of configuration at the chiral center (Eq. 8.44). R N

O

NHR OH

(8.44)

Concerted cycloaddition reactions provide the most powerful way to stereospecific creations of new chiral centers in organic molecules. In a manner similar to the Diels-Alder reaction, a pair of diastereoisomers, the endo and exo isomers, can be formed (Eq. 8.45). The endo selectivity in the Diels-Alder arises from secondary π-orbital interactions, but this interaction is small in 1,3dipolar cycloaddition. If alkenes, or 1,3-dipoles, contain a chiral center(s), the approach toward one of the faces of the alkene or the 1,3-dipole can be discriminated. Such selectivity is defined as diastereomeric excess (de).

8.2

Me Me

N

Me N

O

RT 90%

+ O

Ph

O

Me

Me N

O

Me

+

OMe

Ph

OMe

Ph

O endo 1

MeO

251

1,3-DIPOLAR CYCLOADDITION

O exo (8.45) 1

:

The reactions of acyclic nitrones with dipolarophiles give mixtures of endo- and exo-type products, which are often difficult to predict.63a The development of a dipolarophile that gives high stereo- and regioselectivity is important. A recent study reports that diiron acyl complexes undergo stereo- and regioselective [3+2] cycloaddition with various nitrones. For example, C-phenyl-N-methylnitrone gives a 1:1 end:exo ratio of products in its reaction with methyl crotonate. This nitrone reacts with diiron acyl complex to give a 25:1 end:exo ratio (Eq. 8.46).67 Me

Me N O

O Fe (CO)3 (CO) 3Fe SPr + H Me N Ph O

RT

Me Me N

O Ph Fe (CO) 3 (CO) 3Fe S Pr 85% (endo:exo = 25:1)

O

Me

CAN SPr

Ph O

81% (8.46)

Cycloaddition of the cyclic nitrone derived from proline benzyl ester with alkenes proceeds readily to give isoxazolidines with good regio-and stereoselectivity (Eq. 8.47).68 The reaction favors exo-mode addition. However, certain cycloadditions are reversible and therefore the product distribution may reflect thermodynamic rather than kinetic control. CO2CH2Ph N O

CO2CH2Ph +

toluene Ph

N O

110 ºC, 21 h

(8.47)

Ph 65% (exo:endo = 98:2)

Alkenylboronic esters undergo regio- and stereoselective 1,3-dipolar cycloadditions with nitrones. These reactions lead to boronic ester-substituted isoxazolidines, which can be converted by oxidation with H2O2 to the corresponding 4-hydroxy derivatives (Eq. 8.48).69 The high selectivity could be the result of a favorable interaction between the boronic ester and the amino group.

O H

B

O + Ph

O N

O Bu

H

H

Ph

toluene RT

O B

Bu O

O Ph

(8.48)

N

O Ph 83% (ds 100%)

To control the stereochemistry of 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition reactions, chiral auxiliaries are introduced into either the dipole-part or dipolarophile. A recent monograph covers this topic extensively;70 therefore, only typical examples are presented here. Alkenes employed in asymmetric 1,3-cycloaddition can be divided into three main groups: (1) chiral allylic alcohols, (2) chiral amines, and (3) chiral vinyl sulfoxides or vinylphosphine oxides.63c

252

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Kibayashi and coworkers have used enantiometrically pure allylic silyl ethers obtained from amino acids in cycloaddition with nitrones (Eq. 8.49).71 Cyclic nitrone reacts with a chiral allyl ether to give selectively the exo and erythro isomer (de 90%). Optically active alkaloids containing a piperidine ring such as (+)-monomorine,71c (+)-coniine,71a and (–)-oncinotine71b have been prepared from the addition product. H toluene

+

reflux 85%

N O

OTBPS

H

Ph TBPS : Si But Ph

H

H +

N O

N O

OTBPS erythro (69%, isolated)

OTBPS

threo 7

:

93

(8.49)

Saito and coworkers have used C2-symmetrical alkenes derived from a variety of tartaric acid derivatives, for controller in discriminating π faces of dipolarophile in nitrone cycloaddition. Excellent endo/exo and diastereofacial selectivity (de) are obtained. Endo transition state assembly shown in Eq. 8.50 could be responsible for the formation of preferred distereoisomers.72

ButMe2SiO

ButMe2SiO

CO2Et +

ButMe2SiO

O N

benzene N

CO2Et

X

80 ºC

H

ButMe2SiO

O ButMe2SiO EtO2C ButMe2SiO

CO2Et

O

N

CO2Et

X = CH = CH-CO2Et

H

(8.50)

77% (endo:exo = 94:6; deendo > 98%)

Asymmetric 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition of cyclic nitrones to crotonic acid derivatives bearing chiral auxiliaries in the presence of zinc iodide gives bicyclic isoxazolidines with high stereoselectivity (Eq. 8.51). The products are good precursors of β-amino acids such as (+)sedridine.73 Many papers concerning 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition of nitrones to chiral alkenes have been reported, and they are well documented (see Ref. 63).

O

+ N O

N SO2

1) CH2Cl2, ZnI2 Me 2) LiOH

N O

CO2H

Me 74% (de = 60%)

H OH S S Me N H (+) sedridine

(8.51)

8.2

253

1,3-DIPOLAR CYCLOADDITION

Diastereoselective intramolecular cycloaddition of nitrones is useful for constructing nitrogen- containing cyclic structures. The reaction serves as a key step in a number of natural product syntheses.63 Tufarriello and coworkers have used this strategy for preparing cocaine and other alkaloids.74 As a classical example, enantioselective total synthesis of (+)-luciduline is presented in Scheme 8.13, in which a useful feature of the 1,3-dipolar addition of nitrones is nicely illustrated.75 H2C

NHOH

H

O

H2C O

H

N H

CH3

toluene CH3 reflux

H

H

O

Me H

H

N

N

H

CH3

CH3 H

H

O

(+) lucidine Scheme 8.13.

Tandem transesterification and diastereoselective intramolecular 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition of α-methoxycarbonylnitrones with chiral allyl alcohols give polycyclic compounds in one step with high stereoselectivity (Scheme 8.14).76 Transition state A in Scheme 8.14 is more favorable than B because B has severe steric interaction (allylic 1,3-strain).77 ButCO2

OH Me +

PhCH2 O

N

TiCl4 (0.1 eq.) RT, 2 days

O OMe

Me

H H

R1 N O H H

R2 H O

H R1 N

O O

O

H

O

R2

R2 = CH2OCOBut

H Me

B

A

PhCH2 H N O H ButCO2 100% (95 Scheme 8.14.

O O

+

PhCH2 H N O H

ButCO2

Me :

5)

O O Me

254

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

O Ph

N H

O

O

O

R O Bn

Ph

N

O

N

O N

O

O O O

Bn

N

Me Me

O

O OSiMe2But

O

O

N O

CO2Me

Scheme 8.15.

Various kinds of chiral acyclic nitrones have been devised, and they have been used extensively in 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition reactions, which are documented in recent reviews.63 Typical chiral acyclic nitrones that have been used in asymmetric cycloadditions are illustrated in Scheme 8.15. Several recent applications of these chiral nitrones to organic synthesis are presented here. For example, the addition of the sodium enolate of methyl acetate to N-benzyl nitrone derived from D-glyceraldehyde affords the 3-substituted isoxazolin-5-one with a high syn selectivity. Further elaboration leads to the preparation of the isoxazolidine nucleoside analog in enantiomerically pure form (Eq. 8.52).78 O

O O

H O

N

CH2Ph

+

MeO

ONa

THF quant.

O

O PhH2C

+ N

O

O

PhH2C

syn 95

O

:

N

O

O

anti 5 (8.52)

Enantioselective total synthesis of antifungal agent Sch-38516 is reported. Stereocontrolled carbohydrate synthesis is based on the 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition of chiral nitrone to vinylene carbonate, as shown in Eq. 8.53.79

(8.53)

8.2

1,3-DIPOLAR CYCLOADDITION

255

Scheme 8.16.

Intramolecular cycloadditions of chiral nitrones provide a useful tool for the preparation of bioactive heterocyclic compounds.63 Shing et al. demonstrated that 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition of nitrones derived from 3-O-allyl-hexoses is dependent only on the relative configuration at C-2,3, as shown in Scheme 8.16. Thus 3-O-allyl-D-glucose and -D-altrose (both with threo-configuration at C-2,3) produce oxepanes selectively, whereas 3-O-allyl-D-allose and -D-mannose (both with erythro-configuration at C-2,3) give tetrahydropyranes selectively.80 An optically active cyclic nitrone in 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition was first reported by Vasella in 1985.81 A variety of optically active cyclic nitrones have been devised since then. Some typical chiral nitrones described in Ref. 63c are shown in Scheme 8.17. Applications of these nitrones are also presented in this review. RO

OR

ButO

RO

OR H

OH

N

N O

N O

O R = CH2OMe, Me, But, , CH2Ph, SiPh2But

R = SiMe2But O

O N

O N O

CO2Et

N O

Ph O O Scheme 8.17.

N O

O

256

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

A new strategy for constructing chiral cyclic molecules is asymmetric cycloaddition catalyzed by chiral catalysts. Contrary to the broad application of catalysts in asymmetric Diels-Alder reaction,47a the use of metal catalysts in asymmetric 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition has been developed only recently. Kanemasa and coworkers have demonstrated that the stereochemistry of 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition can be controlled by the presence of ZnI2 or other Lewis acids.82 Extension of their work is nicely summarized in Ref. 63a. In 1994, two groups reported the first asymmetric 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition of achiral alkenes with achiral nitrones using a chiral TADDOL (tetraaryl-1,3-dioxolane-4,5-dimethanols) catalyst (TiCl2-TADDOLate), as shown in Eq. 8.54.83 Another approach using oxazaborolidinone as a chiral catalyst is also presented.84 These catalysts have successfully been applied in a number of asymmetric reactions, especially in the Diels-Alder reaction.85

O

O Me

N

Ph O

+

N

H

O

CH2Cl2 Ph Ph

Ph

O

O TiCl2 O

O

Ph Ph

(5 mol%) Ph N O

Ph N O

Me O +

N

Ph

(8.54) Me O

N

Ph O endo

O O exo (62% ee)

O

(exo/endo = 9/1)

The exo selectivity of the TiCl2-TADDOLate-catalyzed 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition is improved by the use of succinimide instead of oxazolidinone as auxiliary for the α,β-unsaturated carbonyl moiety (Eq. 8.55).86 A strong bidentate coordination of the alkenyl moiety to the metal catalyst is important in these reactions.

O O Me

N

Ph +

Ph N

CH2Cl2

Ph

O

O

O

O

O

Me O N

Ph Ph

H O

N

O

Ph TiCl2

Ph Ph

(5 mol%)

O O exo (72% ee) (exo/endo = 95/5)

(8.55)

Seebach has developed immobilization of TADDOL with a high degree of loading on porous silica gel and applications in enantioselective addition of Eq. 8.54. This catalyst leads to 85%

8.2

1,3-DIPOLAR CYCLOADDITION

257

ds and 92.5% ee, which are comparable with those of Eq. 8.54.88 Introduction of tosylato ligands in the catalyst Ti(OTos)3-TADDOLate provides an excellent endo selectivity of the reaction of Eq. 8.54, in which 91–93% ee is obtained.87 The typical 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition reaction of nitrones with alkenes involves a dominant interaction of HOMO (nitrone) and LUMO (alkenes). The inverse-electron demand of the 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition reaction of nitrones with alkenes requires a dominant interaction of LUMO (nitrone) and HOMO (alkenes). Such a reaction requires an activation of the nitrone with a Lewis acid. In 1999, Jorgensen and coworkers reported that chiral 2,2′-dihydroxy-1,1′binaphtol (BINOL)-AlMe complexes catalyzes a highly regio-, diastereo-, and enantioselective 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition reaction of aromatic nitrones with vinyl ether, giving the exo-diastereoisomer with 90% ds and 97% ee (Eq. 8.56).89

Ph H

N

O +

OBut

Ph N O

CH2Cl2

Ph exo (89% ee)

Ph O

OBut

+

Ph O

Ph N O

OBut

AlMe

Ph

endo

(exo/endo = 95:5)

Ph

(8.56)

(5 mol%)

Copper(II)-bisoxazoline also catalyzes asymmetric 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition reactions of nitrones with electron-rich alkenes (Eq. 8.57).90

PhH2C

N

O O +

H

CH2Cl2

OEt O

OEt

O N

N

Cu But TfO OTf

But

(5 mol%)

PhH2C

O

PhH2C

OEt

N

+

O OEt exo (89% ee)

O N

OEt

O

(8.57)

OEt endo (35% ee)

(exo/endo = 84:16)

Catalytic enantioselective 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition between nitrones with alkenes using a novel heterochiral ytterbium(III) catalyst is reported (Eq. 8.58).91 The desired isoxazolidine derivatives are obtained in excellent yields with excellent diastereo- and enantioselectivities.

258

Bn H

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

N

+

Me

chiral Yb (III) (20 mmol)

O

O

O

H O

O MS 4A, CH2Cl2, rt

N

Ph

NMeR2

Yb(OTf)3 O

Bn N

O

Me

N O exo (96% ee)

Ph

O

Bn N

O O +

Me

H

N

Ph

NMeR2

O O

O endo

92% (exo:endo = 99:1)

NMeR2

N

a novel heterochiral Yb(III) catalyst

(8.58) The products are converted into β-lactams with high enantiomeric purity (ee 96%), as shown in Eq. 8.59.

Bn N

O

Me

O

N

Ph

MeOMgI

Bn N

O

O

Pd/C, H2

Ph

OMe

Ph

O

NH2 OH

Me

CO2Me

O quant. NH2 OTBS TBSCl imid.

65% TBSO

LDA

H H Ph

Ph CO2Me quant.

(8.59)

NH O 78%

Reports on total synthesis of natural products using nitrones are numerous; some recent papers are as follows: marine alkaloid lepadiformine (Ref. 92) and β-lactam antibiotics (Ref. 93).

8.2.2 Nitrile Oxides As discussed in Section 6.2, nitro compounds are good precursors of nitrile oxides, which are important dipoles in cycloadditions. The 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition of nitrile oxides with alkenes or alkynes provides a straightforward access to 2-isoxazolines or isoxazoles, respectively. A number of ring-cleaving procedures are applicable, such that various types of compounds may be obtained from the primary adducts (Scheme 8.18). There are many reports on synthetic applications of this reaction. The methods for generation of nitrile oxides and their reactions are discussed in Section 6.2. Recent synthetic applications and asymmetric synthesis using 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition of nitrile oxides are summarized in this section. The review by Kozikowski94 and the monograph by Torssell63a demonstrate the synthetic utility of the isoxazolines. Reduction of isoxazolines with LiAlH4 or catalytic hydrogenation gives γ-amino alcohols, which have been used extensively in organic synthesis (Eq. 8.60).95 With alkyl or other noncoordinating substituents at C-4 or C-5 of the isoxazoline ring, addition of hydride taking place anti to the substituents to give erythro amino alcohols. Hydroxy or

8.2

1,3-DIPOLAR CYCLOADDITION

259

NH2 OH LiAlH4 O

N Me

R

1

Me

Me

O R1

Me

H2/Raney Ni

R1 C N O R2

R

1

N

H

O

R2

OH

NH2 O

H2 R

1

1

R2

R

Scheme 8.18.

hydroxymethyl substituents, on the other hand, direct attack of LiAlH4 to the syn face of the C?N double bond to give predominantly threo amino alcohols. Jager and coworkers have used this strategy for synthesis of glycosidase-inhibiting iminopolyols and amino sugars (Eq. 8.61).63b,96 Recently, diastereoselective synthesis of highly substituted 2,5-diaminohexanes via nitrile oxide cycloaddition to an optically active vinylogous amino acid has been shown.96d

Me

N

Me

Ph C N O

O

Ph

LiAlH4 Me

Me Me Me OH

O H

+

O

PhNCO

O

Et3N

O2N

O

Ph

OH NH2 89% (9:1)

O H

O

O O O

N 58%

O

(8.61) O

O O OH

(8.60)

NH2

HO

O H

LiAlH4

Me Ph + Me

NH2

OH

OMe NHAc

The conversion of isoxazolines to β-hydroxy ketones can be carried out by H2 in the presence of Raney Ni under various conditions.97 The reaction proceeds cleanly with complete stereospecificity (Eq. 8.62).

260

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

(8.62) Thus, isoxazolines are converted into γ-amino alcohols and β-hydroxy ketones stereoselectively. However, the intermolecular cycloaddition involving 1,2-unsymmetrically substituted alkenes such as trans-cinnamyl alcohol proceeds nonregioselectively to give a mixture of the two regioisomers (Eq. 8.63).98

(8.63)

Several strategies have been proposed to improve the regioselectivity of nitrile oxide cycloaddition. Kanemasa and coworkers have reported high-rate acceleration and regioselectivity in nitrile oxide cycloadditions to the magnesium alkoxides of allylic and homoallylic alcohols (Eq. 8.64).99

(8.64) Another strategy to control the regio- and stereochemistry of cycloaddition is a silicon-tethered reaction, as discussed in the section of nitronates (Section 8.2.3) (Eq. 8.65).100

(8.65) Isoxazolines are good precursors of α,β-unsaturated ketones.63,94 This transformation is useful for synthesis of polyenes. For example, nitrile oxide cycloaddition chemistry is used to prepare 4-oxo-2-alkenylphosphonates, which are useful to synthesize a long polyethylenic unit via Woodworth-Emmons olefination (Eq. 8.66).101

8.2

1,3-DIPOLAR CYCLOADDITION

261

(8.66)

As a new utility of nitrile oxide in organic synthesis, synthesis of medium and large rings by intramolecular nitrile oxide dimerization is reported (Eq. 8.67).102

(8.67)

Intramolecular 1,3-cycloadditions of nitrile oxides (INOC) provide a useful tool for the construction of fused cyclic ring systems. The stereochemical outcome of this reaction is presumed to be a consequence of reaction through the transition state that minimizes allylic 1,3 strain (Scheme 8.19).103 Kurth and coworkers have reported sequential 1,3-dipolar cycloadditions in the synthesis of bis-isoxazolo-substituted piperidinones (Scheme 8.20).104 The Michael addition of allyl alcohol to nitrostyrene followed by INOC gives a mixture of cis- and trans-furanoisooxazoles in 88% yield. The stereoselectivity is much improved by intramolecular silynitronate cycloaddition (ISOC) (see Section 8.2.3). The use of 1,4-phenylene diisocyanate as the dehydrating agent is recommended because the resulting urea polymer can be removed by simple filtration. The introduction of allyl group and formation of the nitroacetoamide provide a precursor of an isoxazoloisooxazoline-containing tetracycle. Finally, INOC of this precursor affords a desired tetracyclic compound stereoselectively.

Scheme 8.19.

262

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Ph Ph

OK Ph

OCN

NO2

NO2

N

NCO O

O

Et3N

O

H 88% (ds = 8:1) O

Ph MgBr Et2O, –78 ºC

Ph

H N

O

O

O2N

N

CO2H

O

DCC

NO2

O H

H 88%

86%

O

OCN

N

H

NCO

Ph

O

N Et3N

O

O H 65% Scheme 8.20.

INOC has been used for the synthesis of tricylic compounds having the taxane A/B ring system with an aromatic C ring (Eq. 8.68).105 O O2N

N

Cl Cl

N H

NCO

Et3N, 70 ºC, 10 h O

O

O

O

(8.68)

94%

A potentially useful approach to the marine alkaloid papuamine based on INOC strategy is proposed as shown in Scheme 8.21. In fact, a trans-hydrindane intermediate has been synthesized in racemic form using a model sequence of reactions involving a nitrile oxide cycloaddition as a key step (Eq. 8.69).106 H

H

N NO2

H PhNCO Et3N

O

LiAlH4

H

OH

H H

H 72%

NH2

H

90%

(8.69)

A diastereoselective synthesis of the model insect antifeedant related to 12-hydroxyazadiradione starting from α-cyclocitral has been reported. [The key steps involve INOC and a Stille

8.2

263

1,3-DIPOLAR CYCLOADDITION

coupling reaction of a vinyl iodide with a stannylfuran (Eq. 8.70)].107 Many related syntheses by means of INOC have been reported.108 O

NO2

H

N

PhNCO Et3N O HO

H

O

73%

H2, Pd/C

HO

9 steps

H

(8.70)

H3BO3 80%

Asymmetric synthesis based on INOC using a chiral nitrile oxides is a standard method for obtaining enantiomerically pure compounds. A useful synthesis of enantiomerically pure pyrano- and oxepanoisoxazole derivatives by application of INOC is presented in Eq. 8.71.109 O O

O

O2N O O

HO

O

H

N O

PhNCO Et3N

O O

O H 28%

O

O

O

O

(8.71)

Takahashi and coworkers have used INOC for synthesis of the chiral CD rings paclitaxel, which is an antitumor agent. Synthetic strategy starting from 2-deoxy-D-ribose is demonstrated in Scheme 8.22.110 The precursor of INOC was prepared by 1,2-addition of α,β-unsaturated ester to ketone. INOC and subsequent reductive cleavage by H2/Raney Ni afford the desired CD ring structure.

H H N

H H N

H

H

H H

H

H

NHR

H

H

RHN

H H

OR RO H

H

H

H

papuamine N H H

H

C N O

N O

O H

H H

H NO2

O2N

H

H H

Scheme 8.21.

O N C

H

H

H

H

264

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

9

8 3

2

O

O

X EEO CN

OR

OR

H

O

B

A

C

O

5

O

OH

2

OH H2 Raney Ni B(OH)3

RO

OR

O

N 8

OH OR

7 4

O

AcO 9

O

H

OR

4

H R O 2 R O OR3

0 ºC 15min

1

3

R1O

4

OBz

1) 1,2-addition 2) DIBAL 3) CH2=C(OMe)Me,H+ EtO 4) oxidation 5) oximation O 6) NaOCl

5

OR4

H R2O OR3

OTBS +

α

5

O

OBn OBn

OMe

OH

O 1) HCl/MeOH

1) m-CPBA Et2O•BF3

O

2) BnBr, NaH

OH

HO

2) LiAlH4

OBn OBn

OH

O

OAc

1) TBSCl, quant. 2) Swern ox, 89%

R1,R2 = C(CH3)3; R3 = R4 = Bn

OH

H

Paclitaxel

N

2

D

HO

Ph

OR

INOC

7

BzHN

OBn

OBn 83% (2 steps)

92%

Scheme 8.22.

Evans and coworkers have reported the synthesis and absolute stereochemical assignment of (+)-miyakolide.111 Miyakolide was isolated from a sponge of the genus Polyfibrospongia by Higa et al.112 The elegant synthesis is illustrated in Scheme 8.23, in which the carbon skeleton is assembled in a convergent fashion from three fragments via esterification, [3+2] cycloaddition, and aldol reaction. Here, intermolecular and intramolecular [3+2] cycloadditions of nitrile oxides are used to assemble small components to complex large sized molecules. 1,3-Dipolar cycloaddition of nitrile oxides using chiral alkenes or chiral nitrile oxides has been extensively studied. It has been established that allylic substituents have a strong influence in determining the π-facial selectivity and that notable high levels of diastereoselectivity (de 56–93%) are observed for cycloaddition to chiral allyl ethers.63c,113 For example, benzonitrile oxide adds to (S)-isopropylidenebut-3-ene-1,2-diol to afford an 85:15 mixture of the isoxazolines (Eq. 8.72).114 The preferred formation of the adduct (erythro) has been rationalized by Houk et al. in terms of an inside alkoxide effect that involves allylic oxygen (Scheme 8.24).115 The diastereomeric preferences observed in cycloaddition result from the alkoxy group preference for the inside conformation and the alkyl group preference for anti. Examples of the corresponding reactions with chiral allylamine derivatives have also been reported, but, in general, the degree of selectivity is lower and less predictable.116 N O

Ph C N O

O

N

Ph

O

O

O 85

+ :

O

Ph

O O 15

(8.72)

265

Scheme 8.23.

266

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Cycloaddition of nitrile oxides to alkenes with various chiral auxiliaries are summarized in Table 8.1, which shows chiral alkenes and differential excess (de). Compared with the related reactions of nitrones, there have only appeared a few publications of metal-assisted or metal-catalyzed 1,3-dipolar cycloadditions of nitrile oxides. This is due to

Table 8.1. Asymmetric Induction in Nitrile Oxide (PhCNO) Cycloaddition to Optically Active Acrylates Chiral alkene

de (%)

Ref.

56

117

62–90

118

90

119

98

120

50

121

90

122

86

123

H O O SO2N(C6H11)2

O N S O2

H

tBu O N S O2 OH N O O Ph BnO

O O N

H

O N

H OEt

O O O

N Ph

8.2

R

N

C

1,3-DIPOLAR CYCLOADDITION

267

O

RO

anti (erythro)

H R Scheme 8.24.

reactivity of nitrile oxides or the requirement of bases such as triethylamine for generation of nitrile oxides. Kanemasa and coworkers have solved some of these problems, as shown in Eq. 8.64.99 It has recently been found that Et2Zn promotes the 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition of nitrile oxides to allyl alcohol in the presence of catalytic amounts of diisopropyl tartrate (DIPT). By this method, 2-isoxazlines are obtained in good yields and up to 96% ee (Eq. 8.73).124a A positive nonlinear effect (amplification of ee of the product) has been observed in this reaction. There is an excellent review on positive and negative nonlinear effects in asymmetric induction.124b

OH +

NOH

DIPT

Et2Zn R Cl R = p-CH3OC6H4

R

Zn O N O O Zn O O

OiPr N O OiPr

OH

R

O

OH CO2iPr

(R, R)-DIPT= iPrO C 2

(8.73)

OH

8.2.3 Nitronates A lkyl and silyl nitronates are, in principle, N-alkoxy and N-silyloxynitrones, and they can react with alkenes in 1,3-dipolar cycloadditions to form N-alkoxy- or N-silyloxyisoxazolidine (see Scheme 8.25). The alkoxy and silyloxy groups can be eliminated from the adduct on heating or by acid treatment to form 2-isoxazolines. It should be noticed that isoxazolines are also obtained by the reaction of nitrile oxides with alkenes; thus, nitronates can be considered as synthetic equivalents of nitrile oxides. Since the pioneering work by Torssell et al. on the development of silyl nitronates, this type of reaction has become a useful synthetic tool. Recent development for generation of cyclic nitronates by hetero Diels-A lder reactions of nitroalkenes is discussed in Section 8.3. A series of 3-substituted-2-isoxazoles are prepared by the following simple procedure; in situ conversion of nitroalkane to the silyl nitronate is followed by 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition to produce the adduct, which undergoes thermal elimination during distillation to furnish the isoxazole (Eq. 8.74).125 Isoxazoles are useful synthetic intermediates (discussed in the chapter on nitrile oxides Section 8.2.2). Furthermore, the nucleophilic addition to the C?N bond leads to new heterocyclic systems. For example, the addition of diallyl zinc to 5-aryl-4,5-dihydroisoxazole occurs with high diastereoselectivity (Eq. 8.75).126 Numerous synthetic applications of 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition of nitronates are summarized in work by Torssell and coworker.63a CH3NO2

Me3SiCl Et3N

Ph O

N

OSiMe3

Ph

O

N OSiMe 3

∆

Ph

O 51%

N

(8.74)

268

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Ph

O

Zn

N +

2

THF –78 ºC

NH O 72% (ds = 6.9:1)

Ph

(8.75)

Eguchi and Ohno have used silyl nitronate induced 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition for functionalization of fullerene C60 (Eq. 8.76).127a Nitrile oxides also undergo 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition to C60.127b

C60

MeNO2

N OSiMe3

Me3SiCl Et3N

TsOH

N O

O 42%

(8.76)

Nitroethane undergoes base-catalyzed addition to C60 to give 2-hydroxy-1,2-dihydrofulleryl ketoxime by way of a unique intramolecular redox process, which is not observed in normal electron deficient alkenes (Eq. 8.77).128 (See Section 4.3 Michael addition of nitroalkanes).

Me NOH

EtNO2

C60

OH

Et3N

(8.77)

46%

Denmark and coworkers have developed an elegant method for generating cyclic nitronates using nitroalkenes as heterodienes in the Diels-A lder reaction (Eq. 8.78). The synthetic utility of this reaction is discussed in Section 8.3. O +

N

O

[2 + 4]

O

N

O

(8.78)

Lewis acid Recently, Kanemasa and coworkers found a new method for preparing cyclic nitronates. ω-Halo-α-nitropropane and -butane are cyclized with base to form cyclic nitronates which are labile 1,3-dipoles. They can be trapped by a variety of monosubstituted ethenes to give the corresponding adducts (Eq. 8.79).129a The N–O bonds in adducts are cleaved on treatment with acid to give functionalized isoxazeles. Cyclic nitronates are also prepared by intramolecular O-alkylation of ω-nitro alcohols via Mitsunobu condensation using triphenylphosphine and diethyl azodicarboxylate.128b A nother approach to cyclic nitronates has been developed by Rosini et al. in which nitro-aldol and subsequent cyclization is used as a key step. For example, 2,3-epoxy aldehydes react with ethyl nitroacetate on alumina surface in the absence of solvent to give 4-hydroxyisoxazoline 2-oxides in good yields (Eq. 8.80).130

8.2

NO2

I

H

CO2Me

DBU CH2Cl2 RT, 10 min

O

N

269

1,3-DIPOLAR CYCLOADDITION

O

O

H

N O

CO2Me

75%

CF3CO2H

N O HO

(8.79)

CO2Me (100%)

O

O

Me

CO2Et

H

NO2

O O

Al2O3 26 h

O

N

O

N

OEt + Me

Me OH

OH

O

OEt

OH 99% (ds = 1.5)

OH

O

(8.80)

Treatment of 2-bromo aldehydes and ethyl nitroacetate with alumina gives 4-hydroxy-2isoxazoline-2-oxides with high stereoselectivity (Eq. 8.81).131 O

O Ph

H

+

CO2Et NO2

Br

24 h

O

O N

Al2O3 Ph

O N CO2Et

OH

+

Ph

CO2Et

OH 62% (trans/cis = 9/1)

(8.81)

The products shown in Eqs. 8.80 and 8.81 are good precursors for biologically important compounds such as polyhydroxylated amino acids, aminopolyols, and amino sugars. Furthermore, 4-hydroxy-2-isoxazoline 2-oxides can be converted into tricyclic compounds via silicontethered 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition reactions, as shown in Eq. 8.82.132 The temporary silicon connection methodology gives rise to the regio- and stereoselective formation of new bonds by temporarily linking together the two reactants by means of an eventually removable silicon atom.133 This strategy is very useful for the control of stereochemistry in cycloaddition reactions (also see Section 8.3).

O O N

R2

CO2Et

1

R

OH

+

Cl

Si

ImH MeCN

R1

O O N CO Et 2 R2O

CO2Et R1 1 O N O R2

O Si

6

7

Si 80–99%

(8.82)

One-pot multi-bond-forming reactions are one of the ways to address the ever growing demand for efficiency in organic synthesis. Rosini and coworkers have developed (tandem) processes for the synthesis of a highly functionalized tricyclic system. The reaction is simply performed by bringing together, at room temperature, α-bromo aldehydes, ethyl nitroacetate, and chlorodimethylvinylsilane in the presence of imidazole as the base (Eq. 8.83).134

270

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

n-C12H25

O

n-C12H25

CO2Et H

+

Cl

+

O Si Me Me 61% (cis/trans = 1/1) (8.83)

NO2

Br

O N O

ImH

Si

The cleavage of the tricyclic structure such as the product presented in Eq. 8.83 leads to a linear aminopolyhydroxylated structure (Scheme 8.25).135 Two-step unfolding (silyl ether hydroxydesilylation/nitroso acetal hydrogenolysis) can be useful in the preparation of hydroxylated amino acids (Eq. 8.84).

R1 R2

CO2Et

CO2Et

i) KF, MCPBA, KHCO3, DMF, –15 ºC

O N O

R1

ii) Ac2O, Et3N

O Si

R2

Raney-Ni MeOH

O OAc OAc

O O

H2 (1 atm)

O

O N O

R2 5

6

O

NH2

(11)

OH

OH Anhydromyriocin

OH

R1

NH2

OAc OAc

(8.84)

The present tandem nitro aldol-cyclization process is used for the preparation of the enantiomerically pure 4-hydroxy-2-isoxazoline-2-ones. They are prepared starting from chiral α-mesyloxy aldehydes and ethyl nitroacetate under mild reaction conditions (Eq. 8.85).136 OMs

n-Pr

O H

CO2Et

Imidazole

+ NO2 +O O N

n-Pr

–

+O O N

CO2Et

+

n-Pr

OH

–

CO2Et OH

trans

cis 93% (trans/cis = 43/57)

(8.85) Hassner and coworkers have developed a one-pot tandem consecutive 1,4-addition intramolecular cycloaddition strategy for the construction of five- and six-membered heterocycles and carbocycles. Because nitroalkenes are good Michael acceptors for carbon, sulfur, oxygen, and nitrogen nucleophiles (see Section 4.1 on the Michael reaction), subsequent intramolecular silyl nitronate cycloaddition (ISOC) or intramolecular nitrile oxide cycloaddition (INOC) provides one-pot synthesis of fused isoxazolines (Scheme 8.26). The ISOC route is generally better than INOC route regarding stereoselectivity and generality. Michael additions of secondary allylamines to nitroalkenes followed by treatment with Me3SiCl and Et3N afford highly functionalized pyrrolidines via the stereoselective ISOC reaction (Eq. 8.86).137

8.2

271

Reduction Hydrolysis Decarboxylation

Hydrogenolysis R1

1,3-DIPOLAR CYCLOADDITION

CO2Et O N O

R2

O Si

HO H2N CH2OH, CO2H, H R2 OH R1 OH OH, Si, SiR3 Hydroxydesilylation Hydrodesilyation Si-O bond cleavage Scheme 8.25.

Ph +

Me3SiCl N

Et3N

HN

Ph

OSiMe3 N NaOH O MeOH

Ph

NO2

N N H 63%

H

OH OH

(8.86)

Scheme 8.27 presents a highly stereoselective one-pot tandem 1,4-addition-ISOC for the construction of functionalized carbocycles. Addition of Grignard reagents to nitroalkenes and subsequent ISOC are carried out in one pot. The advantages of ISOC over INOC, namely, greater stereoselectivity and adaptability to one-pot conditions, have been demonstrated in Scheme 8.27.138 One-pot tandem reactions, starting with nitroalkenes and allyl alcohols leading to functionalized tetrahydrofurans, have been reported (Eq. 8.87).139 Ph Ph

R

NO2

OH

+

NO2

HX

X

X = O, S, NH, CH2 R

N X

NO2

Me3SiCl Et3N

OSiMe3 O

R

H

X

PhNCO Et3N

OSiMe3 N O

H Scheme 8.26.

O

O

2) Me3SiCl 3) Bu4NF

R

+

N

1) t-BuOK, THF, -60 ºC

(8.87)

trans 74%

N O

R X

R

R

NH2

N X

O

X

OH

272

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Ph

OMgBr

NO2 +

N

Ph

O

–90 ºC MgBr

Me3SiCl

NO2

Ph

N

Ph

78%

OSiMe3 O

(t BOC)2O Ph

N O

Ph

Ph

Ph N

Ph

Ph

N

+ O

N O

:

3.5

OSiMe3 N O

N

+ O

O

trans cis 66% (one pot; trans/cis = 99/1)

1

80% (from nitro compound) Scheme 8.27.

β-Nitrosulfides, formed by Michael addition of allyl mercaptan to β-nitroenones, undergo either INOC or ISOC to give tetrahydrothiopheno[3,4-c] isoxazolines. In this case, stereoselectivity of ISOC is also better than that of INOC (Eq. 8.88).140 O

O

Me

HS O2N

Me

Et3N

Me

S

Me

NO2

99% O

Me

Me

PhNCO, Et3N (INOC) or 1) Me3SiCl, Et3N (ISOC) 2) HCl

O

N

N

+ O

S

Me

Me

O

S

(8.88)

H

H INOC

89%

71

:

29

ISOC

82%

4

:

96

Asymmetric 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition of nitronates using chiral alkenes has been reported, as shown in Eq. 8.89141,142 and Eq. 8.90.143

8.2

Me3SiO

O

O

O

N

RT

+

N

N

H R R = H, alkyl, Ph

S O2

R O N OSiMe3

S O2

O

p-TsOH

O

N S O2

(16)

R

O N

N N

O O

Me

+

Me3SiO

N

H

O

O

(8.89)

O Ph de = 86% (Ref. 18)

de = 70–80%

O

273

1,3-DIPOLAR CYCLOADDITION

O

COMe

O

R

(8.90)

O N R de = 66–88%

Recently, silicon-tethered diastereoselective ISOC reactions have been reported, in which effective control of remote acyclic asymmetry can be achieved (Eq. 8.91).144 Whereas ISOC occur stereoselectively, INOC proceeds with significantly lower levels of diastereoselection. The reaction pathways presented in Scheme 8.28 suggest a plausible hypothesis for the observed difference of stereocontrol. The enhanced selectivity in reactions of silyl nitronates may be due to 1,3-allylic strain. The near-linear geometry of nitrile oxides precludes such differentiating elements (Scheme 8.28). H

Me2Si

Me2Si

BnO Me

Me

NO2 A. Me3SiCl, Et3N (ISOC) BnO B. PhNCO, Et3N (INOC)

H O

R Si Me α

N OSiMe3

Me Me H Si R Me

O N OSiMe3

Me3SiO N R Si Me α

Me Me H Si R Me

Me

O H

O A N B

Stereo Yield (%) selectivity > 20:1

61

1:2

82

Me

(8.91)

H R Me

O N OSiMe3

Si N

Me Me H Si R

O

R Me

O

Me Me H Si R

Si

Reaction pathway for silylnitronates Scheme 8.28.

O N

N Me

O H N

Me

Reaction pathway for nitrile oxides

274

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

The use of silylketals derived from allylic alcohols and 1-substituted nitroethanols for the stereocontrolled synthesis of 3,4,5-trisubstituted 2-isoxazolines via intramolecular 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition has been demonstrated. Here again, the use of silyl nitronates (ISOC) increases the level of selectivity compared to INOC (Eq. 8.92).145 Ph

O

Ph

SiPh2

O SiPh2 O

O

O

O2N

Ph

H

N

Me

H

N

Me PhNCO, Et3N Me3SiCl, Et3N

40 70

O SiPh2 O

O

+

Me : :

60 30

(8.92)

Nitronates show a similar reactivity to that of nitrones, and nitrones are one of 1,3-dipoles that have been successfully developed to catalyzed asymmetric versions, as discussed in the section on nitrones (Section 8.2.1). However, asymmetric nitronate cycloadditions catalyzed chiral metal catalysts have not been reported. Kanemasa and coworkers have demonstrated that nitronate cycloaddition is catalyzed by Lewis acids (Eq. 8.93).146 This may open a new way to asymmetric nitronate cycloaddition catalyzed by chiral catalysts. O MeO MeO

OMe N O O

MeO +

OMgBr

RT 1h

N O MeO2C

CH2OH

MeO2C quant.

(8.93)

1,3-Dipolar addition to nitroalkenes provides a useful strategy for synthesis of various heterocycles. The [3+2] reaction of azomethine ylides and alkenes is one of the most useful methods for the preparation of pyrolines. Stereocontrolled synthesis of highly substituted proline esters via [3+2] cycloaddition between N-methylated azomethine ylides and nitroalkenes has been reported.147 The stereochemistry of 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition of azomethine ylides derived from aromatic aldehydes and L-proline alkyl esters with various nitroalkenes has been reported. Cyclic and acyclic nitroalkenes add to the anti form of the ylide in a highly regioselective manner to give pyrrolizidine derivatives.148

8.3 NITROALKENES AS HETERODIENES IN TANDEM [4+2]/[3+2] CYCLOADDITION Recently, Denmark and coworkers have developed a new strategy for the construction of complex molecules using tandem [4+2]/[3+2]cycloaddition of nitroalkenes.149 In the review by Denmark, the definition of tandem reaction is described; and tandem cascade cycloadditions, tandem consecutive cycloadditions, and tandem sequential cycloadditions are also defined. The use of nitroalkenes as heterodienes leads to the development of a general, high-yielding, and stereoselective method for the synthesis of cyclic nitronates (see Section 5.2). These dipoles undergo 1,3-dipolar cycloadditions. However, synthetic applications of this process are rare in contrast to the functionally equivalent cycloadditions of nitrile oxides. This is due to the lack of general methods for the preparation of nitronates and their instability. Thus, as illustrated in Scheme 8.29, the potential for a tandem process is formulated in the combination of [4+2] cycloaddition of a donor dienophile with [3+2]cycload-

8.3

A

O

NITROALKENES AS HETERODIENES IN TANDEM [4+2]/[3+2] CYCLOADDITION

N

O

D

A

O

N

O

D A *

O N O *

275

D *

* * *

Scheme 8.29.

dition of an acceptor dipolarophile. The resulting tandem process can construct new bonds, up to four new rings, and up to six new stereogenic centers. Various heterocycles have been prepared by the cycloaddition using nitroalkenes as heterodienes. The historical background of the tandem [4+2]/[3+2] cycloaddition is well documented in the review.149 8.3.1 Nitroalkenes as Heterodienes The introduction of heterodienes has extended the synthetic versatility of cycloaddition reactions in organic synthesis.150 Denmark and coworkers have developed the use of nitroalkenes as dienes in [4+2] cycloaddition. Nitroalkenes react with simple alkenes in the presence of SnCl4 as a promoter. For example, the reaction of nitrocyclohexene with cyclopentene gives three products. The major product is anti-isomer, which arises from an exo approach of cyclopentene toward nitrocyclohexene (see Eq. 8.94).151 O

N

O

O SnCl4

+

N

O H

H

O

N

O H

H

O

+

–60 ºC

N O

+

H

H :

24 (anti)

:

2 (syn)

1

(8.94)

(total yield 80%)

The reaction of nitrostyrene with cyclopentadiene gives the normal Diels-Alder adduct. However, the Lewis acid-catalyzed cycloaddition affords two isomeric nitronates, syn and anti in an 80-to-20 ratio. The major isomer is derived from an endo transition state. The preference of syn-fused cycloadducts can be understood by considering secondary orbital interactions (Eq. 8.95).152 Ph NO2

Ph

Thermal

NO2

+ O SnCl4 H

N

O H

H

O +

H

Ph 80 (syn)

H

: (total yield 66%)

N

O Ph

H

H H 20 (anti)

(8.95)

Intramolecular [4+2] cycloaddition of E,E- or E,Z-nitrodienes gives trans-nitronates or cis-nitronates, respectively, with high stereoselectivity (Eq. 8.96).153 These products have been converted into γ-lactones by the Nef reaction.

276 O

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

N

O

O

Me

N

SnCl4

O

Me

O

H

–76 ºC

N

O

Me

O SnCl4

N

O H

–76 ºC

H

Me

H

91%

(8.96)

The powerful nucleophilicity of enamines allows the addition of nitroalkenes to take place without the presence of Lewis acids. The isolation of secondary products, which can be explained by an initial Michael addition, suggests the participation of zwitterionic intermediates in the mechanism of the reaction (Eq. 8.97).154

O

NO2

1

2

R = Me, R = H H

1

R

O

N

N

Me

R2 + O

O

(8.97)

80% O

N

R1 = H, R2 = Me

O2N

N

Me 85%

An interesting Diels-Alder reaction using chiral enamines is reported by Backvall, in which a cyclic nitronate is formed in good yield and excellent diastereoselectivity (Eq. 8.98).155

MeO

N NO2

Me

OMe H

Me

O

N

O H

H

O N

Me Me

72% (99% de)

KOH MeOH/H2O

N

O H

OH Me Me

(8.98) 78%

The use of oxygen-containing dienophiles such as enol ethers, silyl enol ethers, or ketene acetals has received considerable attention. Yoshikoshi and coworkers have developed the simple addition of silyl enol ethers to nitroalkenes. Many Lewis acids are effective in promoting the reaction, and the products are converted into 1,4-dicarbonyl compounds after hydrolysis of the adducts (see Section 4.1.3 Michael addition).156 The trimethylsilyl enol ether of cyclohexanone reacts with nitrostyrenes in the presence of titanium dichloride diisopropoxide [Ti(Oi-Pr)2Cl2], as shown in Eq. 8.99.157 Endo approach (with respect to the carbocyclic ring) is favored in the presence of Ti(Oi-Pr)2Cl2. Titanium tetrachloride affords the nitronates nonselectively.

8.3

O OSiMe3 NO2

O

H

(i-PrO)2TiCl2

+

O

H

H

+

–90 ºC, 1.5 h O

N

+

O

O

Me3SiO

Me

O

277

NITROALKENES AS HETERODIENES IN TANDEM [4+2]/[3+2] CYCLOADDITION

N

O

O

Me3SiO :

1

4 (total yield 96%)

N

O

Me3SiO :

(8.99)

1

Denmark and coworkers have found that methylaluminum bis (2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenoxide) (MAD) or methylaluminum bis(2,6-diphenylphenoxide) (MAPh) is effective as the Lewis acid promoter for cycloaddition of 2,2-disubstituted 1-nitroalkenes (Eq. 8.100).158 Other Lewis acids such as SnCl4, TiCl4, and TiCl2(Oi-Pr)2 fail to promote the cycloaddition of 2,2-disubstituted 1-nitroalkenes. The products are converted into 3,3-disubstituted pyrrolidines via hydrogenolysis.158 Reductive cleavage of N–O bonds produces oxime hemiacetals, which are further reduced to amido aldehydes and finally to pyrrolidines. This reaction provides a useful synthetic method for pyrrolidines, which is discussed later. O

NO2 Me

OBu MAD OMe toluene, 0 ºC

N

H N

O H2, PtO2

H

MeOH

Me

OMe

OMe

Me MeO

(8.100

OMe

OMe 80%

98%

The mode of cycloaddition of (E)- and (Z)-1-propenyl ether with (E)-nitrostyrene (exo versus endo) and attendant stereostructure of the final product is dependent on the configuration of the vinyl ether and the Lewis acids employed (Scheme 8.30). Reactions conducted with TiCl2(O-i-Pr)2 produce nitronates that are enriched in isomers derived from an endo (EtO) approach of the dienophiles. It is believed that the transition structure of the titanium-promoted nitroalkene [4+2] cycloaddition is highly polarized, placing a partially positive charge on the nitrogen atom of the alkene. Therefore, the participating vinyl ether assumes an endo orientation of the electron-rich alkoxy group due to stabilizing interactions. In contrast, reactions performed using MAPh produce nitronates that are enriched in isomers derived from an exo approach. A preference for the exo orientation of a vinyl alkoxy group in nitroalkene [4+2] cycloaddition promoted by MAPh is the general trend. It is believed that the bulk of the aluminum-based Lewis acid forces the alkoxy group to take up an exo orientation to minimize nonbonded interactions. Hydrogenolysis of the individual nitronate diastereomers presented in Scheme 8.30 provides the corresponding trans- and cis-3,4-disubstituted pyrrolidines in good yields (Eq. 8.101).158

O

N

O

i) H2/PtO2

H

Me Ph

O

N

Ts N

OEt

O

ii) Et3N, TsCl 78%

Ph

OEt Me

Ph

ii) DBU, TsCl 83%

Me Ts N

i) H2/PtO2

H

O i) H2/PtO2

Ph

ii) Et3N, TsCl 79%

OEt Me

Ph O

ii) DBU, TsCl 65%

O

H

i) H2/PtO2 Me

N

N

O

H

(8.101) OEt Me

Ph

278

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

(Z)-1-propenyl ether exo endo H O H O N N Ph O Ph O HH H Me H OEt Me

O

N

OEt

O

H

H

OEt

O

Me

H

(E)-1-propenyl ether exo endo H O H O N N Ph O Ph O Me H H HH OEt

H

N

Ph

O

H

OEt

O

Me

H

OEt

N

O

Ph

Me

OEt

O

Me

H

N

H

O

OEt Me

Ph

Ph

Lewis acid (equiv)

Enol ether

Yield (%)

Ratio exo/endo

Ratio cis/trans

MAPh (2.0)

E

88

58:42

58:42

MAPh (3.0)

Z

92

88:12

12:88

TiCl2(OPri)2 (3.0)

E

89

6:94

6:94

TiCl2(OPri)2 (3.0)

Z

84

10:90

90:10

Scheme 8.30.

2-Substituted 1-nitroalkenes undergo highly diastereoselective Lewis-acid-promoted [4+2] cycloadditions with chiral vinyl ethers derived from (R)-2,2-diphenylcyclopentanol and (1R, 2S)-2-phenylcyclohexanol to afford cyclic nitronates in high yields. The resulting nitroates are reduced with hydrogen at 160 psi in the presence of platinum oxide to afford enantiomerically enriched pyrrolidines in good yields, as shown in Eqs. 8.102 and 8.103.159 The chiral auxiliaries are recovered in nearly quantitative yields after hydrogenation.

O

Ph Ph

NO2 +

O

H N

OG* H2

MAPh

O

H

Ph

PtO2

Ph 95% (90% de) O

Ph

NO2 + Ph

N

O Ph

MAPh

H

N

O

+ Ph

Ph

100%

74% (88% ee)

(8.102)

H N

OG*

Ph 96% (87% de) (separation)

Ph Ph HO

Ph

H2 PtO2

+ Ph

HO

Ph

85% (99% ee)

100%

(8.103)

2-(Acyloxy)vinyl ethers undergo regioselective [4+2] cycloadditions with nitroalkenes to produce substituted 5-acetoxy nitronates in good yields. The resulting nitronates can be converted into 3-hydroxy-4-substituted-pyrrolidines by hydrogenolysis. A chiral 2-acetoxyvinyl ether derived from (R)-2,2-diphenylcyclopentanol is employed in the cycloaddition-hydrogenation sequence to prepare optical active N-tosyl-3-hydroxypyrrolidines in 96% ee (Eq. 8.104).160

8.3

O

NITROALKENES AS HETERODIENES IN TANDEM [4+2]/[3+2] CYCLOADDITION

N

Ph Ph

O Et

H

+

H

O SnCl4

O

OG* OAc

Et

- 78 ºC H

O

N

279

OMe

O

OMe O

OMe

OMe

Me OH

TsN 1) PtO2, H2 2) TsCl, DBU 3) NaOH

Ph OMe

Ph

+

Et

(8.104)

OH 96%

OMe 75% (96% ee)

A few examples of cycloadditions between nitroalkenes and vinyl ethers without the use of Lewis acids have been reported (Eq. 8.105), in which additional activating electron-withdrawing groups are generally required.161 Me O

O2N

Ph

OEt

+

Et3N RT

EtO

O

O

N

O

(8.105)

87%

High-pressure promoted cycloadditions of nitroalkenes and enol ethers eliminate the use of Lewis acids (Eq. 8.106).162 Thus, even sterically hindered nitroalkenes react with 2,3-dihydrofuran to give the exo cyclic nitronates stereoselectively without using Lewis acids.

O

N

O

O +

Me

O

15 kbar 19 h

N

O

(8.106)

Me

Ph

O

Ph 60%

8.3.2 Tandem [4+2]/[3+2] Cycloaddition of Nitroalkenes Hetero Diels-Alder reactions using nitroalkenes followed by 1,3-dipolar cycloadditions provide a useful strategy for the construction of polycyclic heterocycles, which are found in natural products. Denmark has coined the term tandem [4+2]/[3+2] cycloaddition of nitroalkenes for this type of reaction. The tandem [4+2]/[3+2] cycloaddition can be classified into four families as shown in Scheme 8.31, where A and D mean an electron acceptor and electron donor, respectively.149 In general, electron-rich alkenes are favored as dienophiles in [4+2] cycloadditions, whereas electron-deficient alkenes are preferred as dipolarophiles in [3+2] cycloadditions.

8.3.2.1 Inter [4+2]/inter [3+2] The tandem intermolecular [4+2]/intermolecular [3+2] cycloadditions create bicyclic nitroso acetals with up to six stereogenic centers, which can be controlled by the choice of the stereochemistry of each component and the Lewis acids. The nitronate derived from 2-nitrostyrene and 1-trimethylsilyloxycyclohexene reacts with methyl acrylate to give the nitroso acetal in good yield and high diastereoselectivity (Eq. 8.107).154

280

A

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

O

N

O D

A

inter [4+2]/inter [3+2]

O

N

O D

A

inter [4+2]/intra [3+2]

O

N

O

D

O

A

intra [4+2]/inter [3+2]

O

N

D

intra [4+2]/intra [3+2]

Scheme 8.31.

However, α-substituted dipolarophiles give poor selectivity and β-substituted dipolarophiles such as methyl crotonate fail to react.

Me3SiO

Me3SiO O

N

O

O

O O

CO2Me

N O

OMe H

H

H

Ph

Ph

H

OH

H

1) Raney Ni, H2/KF

N (14)

2) K2CO3

H H

Ph 73%

89% (93% de)

(8.107)

Denmark and coworkers have succeeded in distinguishing the enantiofaces of achiral nitroalkenes using chiral dienophiles. For example, the nitronate shown in Eq. 8.108 reacts with methyl acrylate to give a nitroso acetal in a 7:1 mixture of two diastereomers. The structure of the major diastereomer arises as the result of a steric approach-controlled exo cycloaddition (to the face of the nitronate opposite the 3,4-dimethoxylaryl ring). Hydrogenolytic cleavage of the major nitroso acetal gives the α-hydroxy lactam in which four stereogenic centers are created with relative and absolute stereocontrol in only three steps from the simple starting materials (Eq. 8.108).160 O NO2

Ph Ph +

MeO

SnCl4

O

N

O

OG*

H

OAc Et

-78ºC OMe

OMe

OAc OMe 90% O

CO2Me

O N O

MeO

N OAc

Et

benzene 80 ºC

O

OG*

OMe

OAc

HO Raney Ni, H2 Et

OMe 84% (7:1)

OMe

OMe 58%

(8.108)

The strategy based on tandem cycloaddition leads to a short and efficient asymmetric synthesis of the pyrrolizidine necine base (–)–hastanecine, as shown in Scheme 8.32.163 Pyrrolizidine alkaloids have a long history for attracting the interest of synthetic chemists because of their physiological properties.164 The method of Denmark shown in this scheme is very simple and applied to synthesis of various alkaloids. The Lewis acid-promoted [4+2] cycloaddition between 2-acyloxy nitroalkene and chiral vinyl ether gives a nitronate that

8.3

NITROALKENES AS HETERODIENES IN TANDEM [4+2]/[3+2] CYCLOADDITION Ph

Ph

Ph O O2N

O

O O

Ph

Ti(O-iPr)2Cl2 CH2Cl2 –90 –78 ºC

N

O

MeO OMe O O

O

88% (single diastereomer)

H

MeO2C

N

PhO Cl DMAP Pyridine

OBz

O

S

S

HO

MeOH

O

PhO

MeO2C

H

OBz

82%

68% (97.7%)

OH 96%

O

MeO2C H OBz

OBz 71%

N Ph

O N O MeO2C

benzene 25 ºC

H

O 260 psi H2 Raney Ni

281

N

O

7a

N

n-Bu3SnH AIBN

H

MeO2C

1

7

LiAlH4

H

OH HO (–)-hastanecine

OBz

87%

72%

Scheme 8.32.

undergoes simple [3+2] cycloaddition with dimethyl maleate. The resulting nitroso acetal has all the required stereocenters for (–)-hastanecine. The simplest nitroalkene, nitroethene, undergoes Lewis acid-promoted [4+2] cycloaddition with chiral vinyl ethers to give cyclic nitronates with high diastereoselectivity. The resulting cyclic nitronates react with deficient alkenes to effect a face-selective [3+2] cycloaddition. A remote acetal center controls the stereochemistry of [3+2] cycloaddition. This strategy is applied to synthesis of the pyrrolizidine alkaloids (+)-macronecine and (+)-petasinecine (Scheme 8.33).165

NO2

+

OG*

O

MAPh toluene, –78ºC

CO2Me

N

O

ds

H

O N

O

G* = OG*

Ph Ph Ph

G* =

MeO2C

CO2Me

OG*

50:1

H MeO2C 81% N

N Raney Ni, H2

HO

HO LiAlH4

MeO2C H 53% (99% ee)

H HO (+)-macronecine 76%

Scheme 8.33.

20:1

282

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

Polyhydroxy pyrrolizidine and indolizidine alkaloids display a variety of interesting biological activities. The alexines,166 australines,167 and casuarines168 are a unique subset of pyrrolizidine alkaloids. The presence of a hydroxymethyl group adjacent to the ring nitrogen distinguishes this group from the larger class of necine bases. These alkaloids display glycosidase inhibitory properties169 as well as viral and retroviral suppression characteristics.170 To synthesize such polyhydroxy pyrrolizidines, the dipolarophile must contain the hydroxy functionality. Scheme 8.34 presents a total synthesis of (+)-7-epiaustraline, in which functionalized vinyl silane is used as a dipolarophile.171 Similarly, (+)-casuraline, a pentahydroxy pyrrolizidine alkaloid, is prepared by a tandem [4+2]/[3+2] cycloaddition involving nitroalkene, chiral vinyl ether, and vinyl silane. This process creates five of the six stereocenters present in this potent glycosidase inhibitor (Scheme 8.35).172 Intermolecular [3+2] cycloadditions between cyclic nitronates and a series of dipolarophiles have been examined as discussed so far. In summary, remarkably high facial selectivity is observed which is attributed to a combination of steric shielding from the nitronate substituent and an inherent facial bias from the chiral conformation of the nitronate. Monosubstituted dipolarophiles provide cycloadducts with extensive head-to-head regioselectivity. Regioselectivity with disubstituted dipolarophiles varies with the substituents. With regard to the β-substituents, head-to-tail regioselectivity is favored by O>C>Si>H. Stereoselectivity is dependent on the steric nature of the dipolarophiles. The exo approach of dipolarophiles bearing bulky substituents is generally favorable (Scheme 8.36).173 High-pressure promoted tandem [4+2]/[3+2] cycloadditions of nitrostyrenes with enol ethers has been reported, which do not require the Lewis acids. The products are converted into

OH

OH

OH

OH 8 3

3

HO

N

1

HO

7

H

3

HO OH

(+)-alexine

N

1

HO

7

H

OH

N

O

N

1

HO

(+)-australine Ph

O

3

HO

7

H

17a

OH

HO

(+)-7-epiaustraline

+

benzene

RO H O N O TDSO PhMe2Si

THF, 74 ºC

OH

PhMe2Si

H

R = H (87%; dr = 14/1) R = Ms (96%)

H

OTDS

OG* H2 (160 psi) Raney Ni

OBz

MeOH

HO

2) H2, 10% Pd/C MeOH-HOAc

N

TDS =

HO

Me Me Me Si C CH Me Me Me

HO H 61%

OH

Scheme 8.34.

N

PhMe2Si H 77%

Ms2O, pyridine OH

1) Hg(O2CCF3)2, TFA; HOAc-HO2Ac, 50 ºC

OG*

OBz 97% (dr = 26/1)

PhMe2Si

L-selectride

H

TDSO

25 ºC OBz

OH

6

7

O H O N O

TDSO

H

5

(+)-casuarine

O

O

N

2

HO

OBz

8.3

NITROALKENES AS HETERODIENES IN TANDEM [4+2]/[3+2] CYCLOADDITION

O O

O2N

OBz SnCl4 toluene –78 ºC

OBz

N

O

OG*

OG* TDSO

SiMe2Ph

H

PhMe2Si

OBz OBz

HPLC

OBz

H

OBz 76% 45:7:3:2:1:1 55% 41:0:0:2:1:1

RO H O N O TDSO

L-selectride

O N O

O

OTDS

OG*

283

PhMe2Si

THF, – 78 ºC

R = H (87%; 10:1) R = Ms (97%)

H

OG*

OTDS

1) Raney Ni, H2 (260 psi), MeOH

OBz OBz

N

OH

HO

2) K2CO3

Ms2O, pyridine, 1 h

H

PhMe2Si

OH

64% OH N

Hg(OTFA)2

OH

HO

TFA, HOAc AcO2H

H

HO

OH

84% Scheme 8.35.

a novel class of di- and tricyclic N-oxy-β-lactams (Eq. 8.109).174 High pressure is also applied to perform tandem [4+2]/[3+2] cycloaddition of enol ethers with nitrostyrene and resin-bound acrylate.175

OR

R

6

O N O

RO 6

R

O

Distal-face

O

R

N

O

Facial selectivity

O N

Proximal-face

O

OR

N

O

OR Regioselectivity

R Head-to-head

O N

Head-to-tail

OR

O N

O

H R

OR O

R H

exo

endo Scheme 8.36.

Stereoselectivity

284

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

RO

O

N

+

RO

O

O

N

15 kbar

O

[4+2] Ph

Ph

NO2

O

RO

Ph 15 kbar [3+2]

O

RO

N O

NO2

Ph

Ph

N O

Ph

+

NO2

Ph

base O

RO RO

O

N O

O N

NO2 H

Ph

H

(8.109)

Ph

Ph 20–63%

Ph

Asymmetric tandem cycloaddition of a chiral carbohydrate nitroalkene with ethyl vinyl ether in the presence of electron-withdrawing alkenes produces a facile assembly of bicyclic systems, which can further be selectively cleaved to give homologated carbohydrates (Eq. 8.110).176 OAc OAc

O

AcO

N

+

O

+

OEt

CO2Et

R

OAc OAc EtO2C

N

R

EtOH

O

H OEt

25 ºC

AcO R*

R* = D-lyxo-(CHOAc)3CH2OAc

CO2Et O R H N O

O

H

+ OEt AcO R*

75%

H 4%

(8.110)

8.3.2.2 Intra [4+2]/inter [3+2] This type of tandem reaction using nitroalkenes has not been extensively explored, and one example has been reported (Eq. 8.111).153

O H3C

N

O

CH3

O SnCl4 CH2Cl2 -78 ºC

H3C

N

O H

H

CH3 RO2C

H

RO2C

O N O H H3C

H

CH3

H

(8.111)

8.3.2.3 Inter [4 +2]/intra [3+2] This type of tandem reaction using nitroalkenes has been explored most extensively. Four subfamilies of tandem cycloaddition exist, which arise from the four different points of attachment of the dipolarophilic tether. They are defined as fused, spiro, and bridged modes, as depicted in Scheme 8.37.149 Di- and trisubstituted nitroalkenes tethered to dipolarophiles (unsaturated esters, nitriles) undergo tandem [4+2]/[3+2] cycloadditions with 2,3-dimethyl-2-butene or butyl vinyl ether in the presence of Lewis acids (Eq. 8.112). For the dimethylene tether, the E-configuration of the dipolarophile is preferred, and the products arise selectively from a syn-endo pathway.177

8.3

Me O

O

N

285

NITROALKENES AS HETERODIENES IN TANDEM [4+2]/[3+2] CYCLOADDITION

Me

Me

Me

Me

+

CO2Et

O O N H

SnCl4 –78 ºC

20 ºC

Me H

Me

Me

EtO2C O N

EtO2C H

Me Me

O

H

Me Me

H

68% ds (> 100:1)

O

H

Me

OBu

CO2Me

MeO2C

TiCl2 (OiPr)2 CH2Cl2 –70 ºC, 1 h

H OBu

O N O

O

N

(8.112)

+ H

Me

MeO2C

H 80% (87:13)

H OBu

O N O H

Me

H

O N

H2/ Raney Ni

HO H

Me

(8.113)

H

80–82% fused mode [C(4) tether] O

N

O

OG* R

R1

2

+

R3

H2C n

O R1

R4

Z

N

[4 + 2]

O R2 4

OG* [3 + 2] R4

R3

H2C n

Z

O N O R2

R3

Z

R4

R1

spiro mode [C(3) tether] O

N

O

O OG*

+ H2C

[4 + 2]

OG* [3 + 2]

O N O

Z

H H2C

3

H2C n

Z

n

O

N

Z

n

bridged mode [C(6) tether] O

N

O

[X] +

R1

O [4 + 2]

O

6

[X]

[X] [3 + 2]

R1

R3

R2

N

R3

O

O N

R2

R1

R3 R2

bridged mode [C(5) tether] O

N

O

R4 +

1

R3

OG* [4 + 2]

O

N

O

R1

R

R2

R3

OG* R4

5

R2 Scheme 8.37.

R4 [3 + 2]

OG* O O N 2 R1R R3

OG*

OG*

286

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

The synthetic potential of the tandem [4+2]/[3+2] cycloaddition process is greatly enhanced by the employment of vinyl ether dienophiles. For example, the use of vinyl butyl ether as a dienophile leads to a tricyclic nitroso acetal, which gives a tricyclic lactam, as shown in Eq. 8.113.

O

N

O

EtO H

Me

CO2Me

Me

H OEt

O N O H

Me

H

H

Me

H

H

Me

5% NOE

84–88%

O Me

N

O H

OG* Lewis acid solvent temp

CO2Me

OG*

O N O

EtO2C H

Me

H O

O H2/ Raney Ni

N

1

HO

or H

G*OH Me

1

Me

OG* =

Chiral vinyl ether

Ph

Ph

Ph O O

II II II I I I III III

Lewis acid Ti(OiPr)2Cl2 MAD MAPh Ti(OiPr)2Cl2 MAD MAPh Ti(OiPr)2Cl2 MAPh

II

Nitroso acetal yield (%) 73 88 85 82 86 83 88 86 Scheme 8.38.

Me

(+)-(1R)

Me I

H

(-)-(1S)

Me O OCH2But

N

HO

H

III

Lactam yield (%) 76 73 76 86 67 88 70 74

Lactam ee (%) (config) 98 (1S) 72 (1S) 79 (1R) 98 (1S) 2 (1S) 99 (1R) 98 (1S) 93 (1R)

Me

(8.114)

Me H

N HO H

Me

–78 ºC / 1 h (57:43) –78 ºC / 3 h (11:89)

O H2/ Raney Ni

MeO2C +

MeO2C

TiCl2 (OiPr)2 CH2Cl2 86%

H OEt

O N O

H

8.3

O

N

O

EtO H

Me

287

NITROALKENES AS HETERODIENES IN TANDEM [4+2]/[3+2] CYCLOADDITION

CO2Me

Me

MeO2C H

TiCl2 (OiPr)2 CH2Cl2 –70 ºC, 1–12 h

H

O N O Me

H

H

H

β 84% (α:β = 95:5)

N

Me

HO H

OEt Me

Me

α O

H2/ Raney Ni

+

Me

H

O N O

OEt MeO C 2

(8.115)

H

Me 83%

Two simple acyclic molecules are transformed into a single tricyclic compound bearing four contiguous stereogenic centers in high yield.177 Extension of this tandem process to create five contiguous stereogenic centers has been accomplished by using 2-substituted vinyl ethers (Eq. 8.114).178 The results for the cycloaddition

Me O

N

OG* (E) Lewis acid

O

Me MeO2C

Me

O N O

EtO2C H

OG* (Z)

Me

OG* Me H

Ti(OiPr)2Cl2

MAPh

Ph Ph

Ph CH3

O

Ph Ph

O

O

CH3 98% ee (12/1) O

O

O N Me

N

Me HO

HO H

83% ee (10/1)

H

H

Me

99% ee (>50/1) Me

Me O OCH2But

Me

H

H

92% ee (8.2/1) Ph Ph O CH3 Scheme 8.39.

74% ee (>50/1) O

N

Me HO

CH3

Me

N

Me HO H

H

Me

Me H

288

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

of the same nitroalkene substrate with ethyl (Z)-1-propenyl ether or ethyl (E)-1-propenyl ether are shown in Eq. 8.114 and Eq. 8.115, respectively. The extremely high selectivity for tandem cycloaddition, the ease of manipulation of the nitroso acetals, and the release of the vinyl ether appendage in the hydrogenolytic cleavage constitute ideal features for asymmetric modifications of the cycloadditions with chiral vinyl ethers. As discussed in Section 8.3.2.1 (Inter [4+2]/inter [3+2] cycloadditions of nitroalkenes), the stereochemical course depends on the Lewis acids. The results are summarized in Scheme 8.38.179 The high levels and complementary selectivity with three chiral vinyl ethers and two kinds of Lewis acids (Ti- and Al-based Lewis acids) are presented in this scheme. Extension of the enantioselective cycloaddition methods using chiral propenyl ethers is summarized in Scheme 8.39.179 The synthesis of pyrrolizidine alkaloid (–)-rosmarinecine illustrates the power of the fused mode tandem cycloaddition, as shown in Scheme 8.40.180 The all-cis relationship at the three contiguous centers C(1), C(7), and C(7a) can be constructed in a single-pot reaction with correct stereochemistry but C(6) cannot. The tandem [4+2]/[3+2] cycloaddition of nitroalkenes is an extremely flexible method for the synthesis of necins. All of the stereochemical attributes are subject to a high level of

NO2

O KO

Cl OiPr O

OiPr

NO2

III

MAPh

O

CH3NO2 CH2Cl2

Ph Ph

O

O

Li(s-Bu)3BH

PriO2C H

THF, –78 ºC

H

O

H

O

H

O 160 psi H2 Raney Ni

N

HO H

OH

H

Ph Ph

HO

reflux

H

O

64%

98% recovery

O N

HO

H

H

HO

O CH(OCH3)3 MeOH, TsOH

O

H O exo 74% (exo/endo 95/1) 20% (exo/endo 6.3/1)

Ph Ph

91% (α/β 6/1)

H

O

69%

O N O

PriO2C H

CH2Cl2 –78 ºC

O

O N O

H

H

4-NO2C6H4CO2H

H

Ph3P, DEAD

O

THF, RT

H3CO

N

4-NO2C6H4CO2

H

H O

H3CO 94% (97.3% ee)

73% O 90% TFA RT, 20 h

N

N

4-NO2C6H4CO2 H

H

HO H O

HO 87%

Red-Al THF reflux

H H H OH HO (-)-rosmarinecine 66%

Scheme 8.40.

Ph Ph

8.3

NITROALKENES AS HETERODIENES IN TANDEM [4+2]/[3+2] CYCLOADDITION

INTER

INTRA N HO

N

7a

H

7

7a

1

H OH

H

N

1

H OH HO hastanecine H

HO rosmarinecine

7

H

N

OH

HO

H OH

crotanecine

H H HO macronecine

10 different necines have the cis/cis relationship

7 different necines have the trans/trans relationship

H HO

289

Scheme 8.41.

O N O

O

NO2

Oi-Pr O

O

MAPh, toluene

+ Ph

i-PrO2C H

–14 ºC

SiMe2Ph

L-Selectride

i-PrO2C H

CH2Cl2 –78 ºC

H

H

H

O

O

OG* SiMe2Ph

Raney Ni 200 psi H2

N

EtOH

H

OH

HO

Ph 87% recovered

58% (95% ee)

SiMe2Ph

HO H

H

H O MeO 95% (α/β 6.0/1) O

H

H

H

O

95% O OH H

N 90% TFA

OH

MeSO3 H

60 ºC

O

H

H O

HO 75% BH3 N

N OH

MeSO3 HO

H

MeO

81%

THF 72 ºC

SiMe2Ph

MeSO3

Et3N

MeSO3 H

N MeSO2Cl

MeO

BH3

O

O

N AcOH, AcONa

H

H

HO

N

KBr, AcO2H

SiMe2Ph

HO

O

CH(OMe)3

SiMe2Ph

H

exo 73% (de > 50/1)

91%

TsOH, MeOH

O

OG*

O

O O N O

H

H

H

OH

Et3N/MeOH (2/1) 120–130 ºC

OH

Scheme 8.42.

HO

H 71%

OH

290

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

HO

6 8

HO

N

8a

HO

HO

OH

(+)-castanospermine

N

N

1

H

OH

OH

HO

N

H

HO

HO

HO OH

HO H

(+)-6-epicastanospermine

HO H

OH

(+)-australine

(+)-3-epiaustraline 1

HO 6 7

HO

8a H O N O

OH

8

N 8a

H OH

OH

HO

2

N

2

O

N

O

X

O

H

5a

O

cis trans cis X = Si(t-Bu)2 O

OG*

N

O

O

OG*

O +

[4 + 2] O Si

Si

t-Bu

H

7

HO OH OH

[3 + 2]

OG*

8b

7a

1

O

2a

H

3 1

OH

t-Bu

t-Bu

OLi +

+

KO

TfO

t-Bu

NO2

Cl Si

t-Bu

t-Bu

Scheme 8.43.

predictability and control. Furthermore, the installation of functional groups at key stereocenters can be achieved by appropriate modification of dienes and dienophiles. Finally, choice of chiral auxiliary and Lewis acid sets the absolute configuration of the molecule as a whole. There are 21 structurally 7-hydroxymethyl-substituted necines. Ten of these have the all-cis relationship exemplified in (–)-rosmarinecine and could arise from tandem inter [4+2]/intra [3+2] process, as shown in Scheme 8.40. Another seven necines have the all-trans relationship, as exemplified in (–)-hastanecine and could arise from a tandem inter [4+2]/inter [3+2] process (Scheme 8.32). Examples of different necines are classified as shown in Scheme 8.41. The synthesis of (+)-crotanecine is accomplished in 10 steps in a 10.2% overall yield, as shown in Scheme 8.42. The key step in the asymmetric synthesis is a Lewis acid-promoted, tandem inter [4+2]/intra [3+2] cycloaddition between a (fumaroyloxy)nitroalkene and chiral β-silylvinyl ether, in which the substituted silanes are used as hydroxy synthons.181 The total syntheses of the potent glycosidase inhibitors (+)-castanospermine, (+)-6-epicastanosperimine, (+)-australine, and (+)-3-epiaustraline have been reported. These four natural products are derived from a single common intermediate, the nitroso acetal (as shown in Scheme 8.43), which is created in the key step by the asymmetric tandem [4+2]/[3+2] cycloaddition between silaketal nitroolefin and chiral vinyl ether.182 The strategy of the synthesis is outlined in Scheme 8.43. Scheme 8.44 presents a total synthesis of (+)-castanosperimine and (+)-6-epicastanosperimine from the common intermediate prepared by tandem [4+2]/[3+2] cycloaddition.

291

Scheme 8.44.

292 Scheme 8.45.

8.3

293

NITROALKENES AS HETERODIENES IN TANDEM [4+2]/[3+2] CYCLOADDITION

The influence of Lewis acids on the stereochemical course of the [4+2] cycloaddition of nitroalkenes and chiral propenyl ether is examined. The possible stereochemical courses are shown in Scheme 8.45. All of the Lewis acids induce the exo approach to favor ul-relative diastereoselection. Within the titanium-based Lewis acids, increasing the halide-to-alkoxide ratio increases the degree of ul (relative) selectivity. TiCl4, TiBr3(Oi-Pr), SnCl4, and ATPh are the most effective for ul selectivity. The internal diastereoselectivity is also dependent on the Lewis acid; most titanium isopropoxide-halides and SnCl4 are highly selective for 1,3-lk approach, with the selectivity increasing with increasing halide content. Two aluminum-based Lewis acids are selective in the opposite sense of internal diastereoselection. The switch in internal diastereoselectivity is thought to arise from subtle changes in the steric nature of the Lewis acid-nitroalkene complex.183

O

N

Ph

O +

Me

O

N

O

OG*

SnCl4 O

Me

CH2Cl2 –75 ºC

Ph

Ph 98%

(8.116) OAc

OG*

K2CO3, toluene, reflux, 26 h

O

O N Me

Ph

N

O

Ph

G*OAc 83%

Me Ph

86%

O N O

1) MAPh, CH2Cl2, -78 ºC 2) toluene, 80 ºC

O

+

AcHN

H

75–82%

O

O

1) H2/Raney-Ni, MeOH K2CO3, 40 min, RT 2) Ac2O/py, 6 h, rt

OG* H

MeO2C

CO2Me

98% O N

H2, Raney-Ni

HO

MeOH 160 psi, 14 h G*OH 99% O

N

O

Ph +

O

78% (83% ee) O N O

1) MAPh, CH2Cl2, –-78 ºC 2) toluene, 75 ºC

CO2Me

MeO2C

95%

O H2, Raney-Ni MeOH 160 psi, 14 h G*OH 94% Scheme 8.46.

N HO

74% (89% ee)

OG* H

294 Scheme 8.47.

REFERENCES

295

glycosidase inhibitors HO

OH HO

SMe

HO O

N H

O

OH

O

N HO

OH

OH

HO

OH

OH

OH

HO

mannostatin

trehazolin

N

HO

NH2

NMe2

allosamizoline

carbocyclic nucleosides NH2

O N

N

NH

HO N

N N

NH2 HO

carbovir

NH

HO N

OH

aristeromycin Scheme 8.48.

When α-tethered nitroalkenes bearing three or four methylene chains and ester-activated dipolarophiles react with vinyl ethers, spiro mode tandem cycloaddition takes place to give tricyclic spiro nitroso acetals in good yield and high diastereoselectivity (Scheme 8.46).184 The third member of the tandem inter [4+2]/intra [3+2] cycloaddition family is classified as the bridge mode, in which the dipolarophile is attached to the dienophile. Simple, 1,4-pentadienes as well as 2-alkoxy-1,4-pentadienes can function effectively as dienophiles and dipolarophile combinations with excellent chemical selectivity and regio- and diastereoselectivity. Hydrogenation of the bridged nitroso acetals produces hydroxymethylated derivatives in high diastereo- and enantioselectivity (Eq. 8.116).185 When 1-alkoxy-1,4-pentadienes are used instead of 2-alkoxy-1,4-pentadienes, tandem inter [4+2]/intra [3+2] cycloaddition of nitroalkenes followed by hydrogenolysis affords a versatile asymmetric synthesis of highly functionalized aminocyclopentanes (Scheme 8.47).186 Aminocyclopentanols comprise an important structural motif, which is common to a variety of biologically interesting compounds including glycosidase inhibitors and carbocyclic nucleosides (Scheme 8.48). Asymmetric synthesis of highly hydroxylated aminocyclopentanes using the bridged mode (β-tether) process provides a useful strategy for the synthesis of such compounds.187

REFERENCES 1a. Oppolzer, W. In Comprehensive Organic Synthesis; ed. by B. M. Trost, I. Fleming and L. A. Paquette, Pergamon, Oxford, 1991,Vol. 5, p. 315. 1b. Perekalin, V. V., E. S. Lipina, V. M. Berestovitskaya, and D. A. Efremov. Nitroalkenes, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1994, pp. 131–154. 1c. Carruthers, W. Cycloaddition Reactions in Organic Synthesis, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1990.

296

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

1d. Fringelli, F., and A. Tatichi. Dienes in the Diels-Alder Reaction; John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1990. 2a. Alder, K., H. F. Rickert, and E. Windemuth. Ber. Dtsch. Chem. Ges., 71, 2451 (1938). 2b. Gold, M. H., and K. Klager. Tetrahedron, 19, Suppl. 1, 77 (1963). 3. Ranganathan, D., C. B. Rao, S. Ranganathan, A. M. Mehrotra, and R. Iyengar. J. Org. Chem., 45, 1185 (1980). 4a. Corey, E. J., N. M. Weinshenker, T. K. Schaaf, and W. Huber. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 91, 5675 (1969). 4b. Corey, E. J., T. Ravindranathan, and S. Terashima. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 93, 4326 (1971). 5. Corey, E. J., N. H. Andersen, R. M. Carlson, J. Paust, E. Vedejs, I. Vlattas, and E. K. Winter. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 90, 3245 (1965). 6. Corey, E. J., and A. G. Myers. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 107, 5574 (1985). 7a. Iwamatsu, S., K. Matsubara, and H. Nagashima. J. Org. Chem., 64, 9625 (1999). 7b. Bryce, M. R., J. M. Gardiner, and M. B. Hursthouse. Tetrahedron Lett., 28, 577 (1987). 8. Ono, N., H. Miyake, A. Kamimura, and A. Kaji. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 1929 (1987). 9. Carr, R. V. C., and L. A. Paquette. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 102, 853 (1980). 10a. Prazeres, M. A., J. A. Peters, J. T. M. Linders, and L. Maat. Recl. Trav. Chim. Pays-Bas, 105, 554 (1986). 10b. Magnus, P., A. H. Payne, and L. Hobson. Tetrahedron Lett., 41, 2077 (2000). 11. Tanis, S. P., and Y. M. Abdallah. Synth. Commun., 16, 251 (1986). 12. Corey, E. J., and H. Estreicher. Tetrahedron Lett., 22, 603 (1981). 13. Danishefsky, S. J., and F. M. Hershenson. J. Org. Chem., 44, 1180 (1979). 14. Danishefsky, S. J., M. P. Prosbylla, and S. Hiner. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 100, 2918 (1978). 15a. Hayama, T., S. Tomoda, Y. Takeuchi, and Y. Nomura. J. Org. Chem., 49, 3235 (1984). 15b. Schmitt, R. J., J. C. Bottaro, R. Malhotra, and C. D. Bedford. J. Org. Chem., 52, 2294 (1987). 16. Stoodley, R. J., and W. H. Yuen. Chem. Commun., 1371 (1997). 17. Node, M., K. Nishide, H. Imazato, R. Kurosaki, T. Inoue, and T. Ikariya. Chem. Commun., 2559 (1996). 18. Albertini, E., A. Barco, S. Benetti, C. D. Risi, G. P. Pollini, R. Romangnoli, and V. Zanirato. Tetrahedron Lett., 35, 9297 (1994). 19. Habermann, J., S. V. Ley, and J. S. Scott. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans, 1, 1253 (1999). 20. Chandler, M., R. Conroy, A. W. J. Cooper, R. B. Lamont, J. J. Scicinski, J. E. Smart, R. Storer, N. G. Weir, R. D. Wilson, and P. G. Wyatt. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans, 1, 1189 (1995). 21. Noland, W. E., M. J. Koonkel, M. S. Tempesta, R. D. Cink, D. M. Powers, E. O. Schlemper, and C. L. Barnes. J. Heterocycl. Chem., 30, 183 (1993). 22. Kusurkar, R. S., and D. K. Bhosale. Synth. Commun., 20, 101 (1990). 23a. Noland, W. E., and B. L. Kedrowski. J. Org. Chem., 64, 596 (1999). 23b. Noland, W. E., M. J. Konke, M. S. Tempestra, R. D. Cink, D. M. Powers, E. O. Schlemper, and C. L. Barnes. J. Heterocycl. Chem., 30, 183 (1983). 24. Jung, M. E., and D. D. Grove. J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun., 753 (1987). 25. N. Ono, A. Kamimura, and A. Kaji. J. Org. Chem., 53, 251 (1988). 26. Kraus, G. A., J. Thurston, and P. J. Thomas. Tetrahedron Lett., 29, 1879 (1988). 27. Node, M., H. Imazato, R. Kurosaki, Y. Kawano, T. Inoue, K. Nishide, and K. Fuji. Heterocycles, 42, 811 (1996). 28. Barco, A., S. Benetti, G. P. Pollini, G. Spaiuto, and V. Zanirato. Tetrahedron Lett., 32, 2517 (1991). 29a. Oppolzer, W. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 16, 10 (1977). 29b. Ciganek, E. Org. Reat., 32, 1 (1984). 29c. W. R. Rousch, In Comprehensive Organic Synthesis, ed. by B. M. Trost and I. Fleming, Pergamon Press, New York, 1991, Vol. 5, p. 513–550. 30. Kurth, M. J., M. J. O’Brien, H. Hope, and M. Yanuck. J. Org. Chem., 50, 2626 (1985). 31a. Retherford, C., and P. Knochel. Tetrahedron Lett., 32, 441 (1991). 31b. Jubert, C., and P. Knochel. J. Org. Chem., 57, 5431 (1992). 32. Guy, A., and L. Serva. Synlett, 647 (1994). 33. Williams, D. R., and T. A. Brugel. Organic Lett., 2, 1023 (2000). 34. Oppolzer, W., and C. Robbiani. Helv. Chim. Acta, 66, 1119 (1983). 35a. Wenkert, E., P. D. R. Moeller, and S. R. Piettre. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 110, 7188 (1988). 35b. Biolatto, B., M. Kneeteman, and P. Mancini. Tetrahedron Lett., 40, 3343 (1999).

REFERENCES

36a. 36b. 37. 38a. 38b. 38c. 39. 40. 41. 42a. 42b. 42c. 43. 44. 45a. 45b. 45c. 45d. 45e. 46. 47a. 47b. 47c. 47d. 47e. 47f. 47g. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53a. 53b. 54. 55a. 55b. 56. 57a. 57b. 58. 59a. 59b. 60. 61.

297

Nesi, R., D. Giomi, S. Papaleo, and M. Corti. J. Org. Chem., 55, 1227 (1990); Giomi, D., R. Nesi, S. Turchi, and T. Fabriani. J. Org. Chem., 59, 6840 (1994). Nesi, R., S, Turchi, D. Giomi, and S. Papaleo. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 978 (1993). Reinecke, M. G. Tetrahedron, 38, 427 (1982). Gribble, G. W., M. G. Saulnier, M. P. Sibi, and C. J. Moody. J. Org. Chem., 49, 4518 (1984). Nesi, R., S, Turchi, and D. Giomi. J. Org. Chem., 61, 7933 (1996). Oritz, A. D., J. R. Carrillo, M. J. G. Escalonilla, A. D. L. Hoz, A. Moreno, and P. Prieto. Synlett, 1069 (1998). Gribble, G. W., E. T. Pelkey, and F. L. Switzer. Synlett, 1061 (1998). Saderbakaouni, L., O. Charton, N. Kunesch, and F. Tillenquin. Tetrahedron, 54, 1773 (1998). Pocar, D., P. Trimarco, R. Destro, E. Ortoleva, and M. Ballabio. Tetrahedron, 40, 3579 (1984). Felluga, F., P. Nitti, G. Pitacco, and E. Valentin. Tetrahedron Lett., 29, 4165 (1988). Marc, G., P. Nitti, G. Pitacco, A. Pizzioli, and E. Valentin. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 223 (1997). Ha, J. D., C. H. Kang, K. A. Belmore, and J. K. Cha. J. Org. Chem., 63, 3810 (1998). Inoue, M., A. J. Frontier, and S. J. Danishefsky. Angew. Chem,. Int. Ed. Engl., 39, 761 (2000). Crawshaw, M., N. W. Hird, K. Irie, and K. Nagai. Tetrahedron Lett., 38, 7115 (1997). Sparey, T. J., and T. Harrison. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 5873 (1998). Chen, C., and B. Munoz. Tetrahedron Lett, 40, 3491 (1999). Smith, E. M. Tetrahedron Lett., 40, 3285 (1999). Schlessinger, R. H., and C. P. Bergstrom. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 2133 (1996). Kuster, G. J., and H. W. Scheeren. Tetrahedron Lett., 41, 515 (2000). Kagan, B. H., and O. Riant. Chem. Rev., 92, 1007 (1992). Togni, A., and L. M. Venanzi. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 33, 497 (1994). Penne, J. S. Chiral Auxiliaries and Ligands in Asymmetric Synthesis, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1995, p. 537–553. Whitesell, J. K. Chem. Rev., 92, 953 (1992). Paquette, L. A. In Asymmetric Synthesis, ed. by J. D. Morrison, Academic Press, Orlando, FL, 1984, Vol. 3, p. 455–482. Oppolzer, W. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 23, 876 (1984). Carruthers, W. Cycloaddition Reactions in Organic Synthesis, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1990, p. 61–73. Giuuliano, R. M. Cycloaddition Reactions in Carbohydrate Chemistry, ACS Symposium Series 494, Washington DC, 1992. Serrano, J. A., M. C. Moreno, E. Roman, O. Arjona, J. Plumet, and J. Jimenez. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 3207 (1991). Serrano, J. A., L. E. Caceres, and E. Roman. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 941 (1992). Serrano, J. A., L. E. Caceres, and E. Roman. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 1863 (1995). Ayerbe, M., and F. P. Cossio. Tetrahedron Lett., 36, 4447 (1995). Node, M., X. J. Hao, and K. Fuji. Chem. Lett., 57 (1991). Node, M., X. J. Hao, K. Nishide, and K. Fuji. Chem. Pharm. Bull., 44, 715 (1996). Clive, D. L. J., Y. Bo, Y. Tao, S. Daigneault, Y. J. Yu, and G. Meignan. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 118, 4904 (1996). Clive, D. L. J., and N. Selvakumar. Chem. Commun., 2543 (1996). Clive, D. L. J., Y. Bo, N. Selvakumar, R. McDonald, and B. D. Santarsiero. Tetrahedron, 55, 3277 (1999). Arai, Y., T. Kontani, and T. Koizumi. Tetrahedron Asymmetry, 3, 535 (1992). Fuji, K., and M. Node. Synlett., 603 (1991). Fuji, K., K. Tanaka, H. Abe, L. Itoh, M. Node, and M. Shiro. Tetrahedron: Asymmetry, 2, 1319 (1992). Fuji, K., K. Tanaka, H. Abe, K. Matsumoto, T. Harayama, A. Ikeda, T. Taga, Y. Miwa, and M. Node. J. Org. Chem., 59, 2211 (1994). Trost, B. M., D. O’Krongly, and J. L. Belletire. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 102, 7595 (1980). Arce, E., M. C. Carreno, M. B. Cid, and J. L. G. Ruano. J. Org. Chem. 59, 3421 (1994). Murphy, J. P., M. Nieuwenhuyzen, K. Reynolds, P. K. S. Sarma, and P. J. Stevenson. Tetrahedron Lett., 36, 9533 (1995). Ender, D., O. Meyer, and G. Raabe. Synthesis, 1242 (1992).

298

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

62a. Barluenga, J., F. Aznar, C. Valdes, A. Martin, S. G. Granda, and E. Martin. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 115, 4403 (1993). 62b. Barluenga, J., F. Aznar, C. Ribas, and C. Valdes. J. Org. Chem., 62, 6746 (1997). 63a. Torsell, K. B. G. Nitrle Oxides, Nitrones and Nironates in Organic Synthesis, VCH, New York, 1988. 63b. Jager, V., R. Muller, T. Leibold, M. Hein, M. Schwartz, M. Fengler, L. Jarskova, M. Patzel, and P. Y. LeRoy. Bull. Soc. Chim. Bel., 103, 491 (1994). 63c. K. V. Gothelf and K. Jorgensen, Chem. Rev., 98, 863 (1998). 63d. Mulzer, J. Organic Synthesis Highlights, VCH, Weinheim, 1991, pp 77–95. 63e. Wade, P. A. Comprehensive Organic Synthesis, ed. by B. M. Trost, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1991, Vol. 3, p. 1111. 64a. Murahashi, S., H. Mitsui, T. Shiota, T. Tsuda, and S. Watanabe. J. Org. Chem., 55, 1736 (1990). 64b. Murahashi, S., T. Shiota, and Y. Imada. Org. Synth., 9, 632 (1997). 64c. S. Murahashi, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 34, 2443 (1995). 65. Zschiesche, R., and H. U. Reisig. Liebigs Ann. Chem., 551 (1989). 66. Lopezcalle, E., J. Hofler, and W. Eberbach. Liebigs Ann. Chem., 1855 (1996). 67. Gilbertson, S. R., D. P. Dawson, O. D. Lopez, and K. L. Marshall. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 117, 4431 (1995). 68. Bernotas, R. C., J. S. Sabol, L. Simg, and D. Friedrich. Synlett., 653 (1999). 69. Carboni, B., M. Ollivault, F. L. Bouguenec, R. Carrie, and M. Jazouli. Tetrahedron Lett., 38, 6665 (1997). 70. Braun, K. R., and H. Kunz. Chiral Auxiliaries in Cycloadditions, Wiley-VCH, 1999. 71a. Ito, M., M. Maeda, and C. Kibayashi. Tetrahedron Lett., 33, 3765 (1992). 71b. Ina, H., M. Ito, and C. Kibayashi. J. Org. Chem., 61, 1023 (1996). 71c. Ito, M., and C. Kibayashi. Tetrahedron Lett., 71, 5065 (1990). 72. Saito, S., T. Ishikawa, and T. Moriwake. Synlett, 279 (1994). 73. Murahashi, S., Y. Imada, M. Kohono, and T. Kawakami. Synlett., 395 (1993). 74a. Tufariello, J. J., and G. B. Mullen. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 100, 3638 (1978). 74b. Tufariello, J. J., G. B. Mullen, J. J. Tegeler, E. J. Trybulski, S. C. Wong, and S. A. Ali. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 101, 2435 (1979). 74c. Tufariello, J. J. Acc. Chem. Res., 12, 396 (1979). 75. Oppolzer, W., and M. Petrzilka. Helv. Chim. Acta, 61, 2755 (1978). 76. Tamura, O., T. Yamaguchi, T. Okabe, and M. Sakamoto. Synlett., 620 (1994). 77a. R. W. Hoffmann, Chem. Rev., 89, 1841 (1989). 77b. Hoeyda, A. H., D. A. Evans, and G. C. Fu. Chem. Rev., 93, 1307 (1993). 78. Merino, P., S. Franco, N. Garces, F. L. Merchan, and T. Tejero. Chem. Commun., 493 (1998). 79. Xu, Z., C. W. Johannes, S. S. Salman, and A. H. Hoveyda. J. Org. Chem., 118, 10926 (1996). 80. Shing, T. K. M., Y. L. Zhong, T. C. W. Mak, R. Wang, and F. Xue. J. Org. Chem., 63, 414 (1998). 81. Bernet, B., E. Krawezyk, and A. Vasella. Helv. Chim. Acta, 68, 2299 (1985). 82a. Kanemasa, S., T. Uemura, and E. Wada. Tetrahedron Let., 33, 7889 (1992). 82b. Kanemasa, S., T. Tsuruoka, and H. Yamamoto. Tetrahedron Lett., 36, 5019 (1995). 83. Gothelf, K. V., and K. A. Jorgensen. J. Org. Chem., 59, 5687 (1994). 84. Seerde, J. P. G., A. W. A. Scholte op Reimer, and H. W. Scheeren. Tetrahedron Lett., 35, 4119 (1994). 85a. Corey, E. J., and Y. Matsumura. Tetrahedron Lett., 32, 6289 (1991). 85b. Narasaka, K., N. Iwasawa, M. Inoue, T. Yamada, M. Nakashima, and J. Sugimori. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 111, 5340 (1989). 85c. Haase, C., C. R. Sarko, and M. DiMare. J. Org. Chem., 60, 1777 (1995). 85d. Seebach, D., R. Dahinden, R. E. Mart, A. K. Beck, D. A. Plattner, and F. N. M. Kuhnle. J. Org. Chem., 60, 1789 (1995). 86. Jensen, K. B., K. V. Gothelf, R. G. Hazell, and K. A. Jorgesen. J. Org. Chem., 62, 2471 (1997). 87. Gothelf, K. V., I. Thomsen, and K. A. Jorgensen. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 118, 59 (1996). 88. Heckel, A., and D. Seebach. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 39, 163 (2000). 89. Simonse, K. B., P. Bayon, R. G. Hazell, K. V. Gothelf, and K. A. Jorgensen. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 121, 3845 (1999). 90. Jensen, K. B., R. G. Hazell, and K. A. Jorgensen. J. Org. Chem., 64, 2353 (1999).

REFERENCES

91. 92. 93a. 93b. 94. 95a. 95b. 96a. 96b. 96c. 96d. 97a. 97b. 97c. 98. 99a. 99b. 100. 101a. 101b. 102. 103. 104. 105. 106. 107. 108a. 108b. 108c. 108d. 108e. 109. 110. 111. 112. 113. 114a. 114b. 114c. 114d. 115. 116a. 116b. 117. 118. 119. 120. 121. 122a.

299

Kobayashi, S., and M. Kawamura. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 120, 5840 (1998). Werner, K. M., J. M. Santos, S. M. Weinreb, and M. Shang. J. Org. Chem., 64, 686 (1999). Jung, M. M., and B. T. Vu. J. Org. Chem., 61, 4427 (1996). Kang, S. H., and S. H. Lee. Tetrahedron Lett., 37, 451 (1995). Kozikowski, A. P. Acc. Chem. Res., 17, 410 (1984). Jager, V., V. Buss, and W. Schwab. Tetrahedron Lett., 34, 3133 (1978). Kozikowski, A. P., and H. Ishida. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 102, 4265 (1980). Schwab, W., and V. Jager. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 20, 601 (1981). Jager, V., and R. Schohe. Tetrahedron, 40, 2199 (1984). Muller, I., and V. Jager. Tetrahedron Lett., 23, 4777 (1982). Schreiner, E. P., and H. Gstach. Synlett., 1131 (1996). Curran, D. P. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 103, 5826 (1983). Kozikowski, A. P., and M. Adamczyk. Tetrahedron Lett., 23, 3123 (1982). R. H. Wollenberg and J. E. Goldstein, Synthesis, 757 (1980). Bast, K., M. Christl, R. Huisgen, and W. Mack. Chem. Ber., 106, 3312 (1973). Kanemasa, S., M. Nishiguchi, A. Kamimura, and K. Hori. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 116, 2324 (1994). Kanemasa, S., K. Okuda, H. Yamamoto, and S. Kaga. Tetrahedron Lett., 38, 4095 (1997). Dogbeavou, R., and L. Breau. Synlett, 1208 (1997). Lee, S. Y., B. S. Lee, C. W. Lee, and D. Y. Oh. J. Org. Chem., 65, 256 (2000). Lee, S. Y., B. S. Lee, and Y. Oh. Synlett, 2027 (1999). Maugein, N., A. Wagner, and C. Mioskowski. J. Org. Chem., 64, 8428 (1999). Kozikowski, A. P., and Y. Y. Chen. Tetrahedron Lett., 23, 2081 (1982). Huang, K. S. L., E. H. Lee, M. M. Olmstead, and M. J. Kurth. J. Org. Chem., 65, 499 (2000). Hirai, Y., and H. Nagaoka. Tetrahedron Lett., 38, 1969 (1997). Saha, A., and A. Bjattacharjya. Chem. Commun., 495 (1997). Mateos, A. F., G. P. Coca, R. R. Gonzalez, and C. T. Hernandez. J. Org. Chem., 61, 9097 (1996). Baraldi, P. G., A. Narco, S. Benneti, G. P. Pollini, E. Polo, and D. Simoni. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 757 (1986). Kozikowski, A. P., K. Hiraga, J. P. Springer, B. C. Wang, and Z. B. Xu. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 106, 1845 (1984). Omodani, T., and K. Shishido. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Comun., 2781 (1994). Ihara, M., Y. Tokunaga and K. Fukumoto. J. Org. Chem., 55, 4497 (1990). Souza, F. E. S., and R. Rodrigo. Chem. Commun., 1947 (1999). Pal, A., A. Bhattacharjee, and A. Bhattacharjya. Synthesis, 1569 (1999). Takahashi, T., Y. Hirose, H. Iwamoto, and T. Doi. J. Org. Chem., 63, 5742 (1998). Evans, D. A., D. H. B. Ripin, D. P. Halstead, and K. M. Campos. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 121, 6816 (1999). Higa, T., J. Tanaka, M. Komesu, D. C. Gravalos, J. L. F. Puentes, G. Bernardinelli, and C. W. Jefford. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 114, 7587 (1992). Kamimura, A. J. Synth. Org. Chem. Jpn., 50, 808 (1992). Kozikowski, A. P., and A. K. Ghosh. J. Org. Chem., 49, 2762 (1984). Annunziata, R., M. Cinquini, F. Cozzi, and L. Raimondi. Tetrahedron, 44, 4645 (1988). Amici, M. D., C. D. Micheli, A. Ortisi, G. Gatti, R. Gandolfi, and L. Toma. J. Org. Chem., 54, 793 (1989). Paton, R. M., and A. A. Yong. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 132 (1991). Houk, K. N., S. R. Moses, Y. D. Wu, V. Rondan, V. Jager, R. Schohe, and F. R. Fronczek. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 106, 3880 (1984). Boyd, E. C., and R. M. Paton. Tetrahedron Lett., 34, 3169 (1993). Blake, A. J., E. C. Boyd, R. O. Gould, and R. M. Paton. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans, 1, 2841 (1994). Curran, D. P., B. H. Kim, H. P. Piyasena, R. J. Loncharich, and K. N. Houk. J. Org. Chem., 52, 2137 (1987). Curran, D. P., B. H. Kim, J. Dougherty, and T. A. Heffner. Tetrahedron Lett., 30, 3555 (1988). Oppolzer, W., A. J. Kingma, and S. K. Pillai. Tetrahedron Lett., 32, 4893 (1991). Curran, D. P., J. K. S. Jeong, T. A. Heffner, and J. Rebeck, Jr. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 111, 9238 (1989). Waldmann, H. Liebigs Ann. Chem., 1013 (1990). Kim, Y. H., S. H. Kim, and D. H. Park. Tetrahedron Lett., 34, 6063 (1993).

300

CYCLOADDITION CHEMISTRY OF NITRO COMPOUNDS

122b. Kim, K. S., B. H. Kim, W. M. Park, S. J. Cho, and R. J. Mhin. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 115, 7472 (1993). 123. Kanemasa, S., T. Hayashi, H. Yamamoto, E. Wada, and T. Sakurai. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 64, 3274 (1991). 124a. Shimizu, M., Y. Ukaji, and K. Inomata. Chem. Lett., 455 (1996). 124b. Mikami, K., M. Terada, T. Korenaga, Y. Matsumoto, M. Veki, and R. Angeland. Agnew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 39, 3533 (2000). 125. Tossell, K., and O. Zeuthen. Acta. Chem. Scand., 32, B, 118 (1984). 126. Castro, F. J. F., M. M. Vila, P. R. Jenkins, M. L. Sharma, G. Tustin, J. Fawcett, and D. R. Russel l. Synlett, 798 (1999). 127a. Ohno, M., A. Yashiro, and S. Eguchi. Synlett, 815 (1996). 127b. Ros, T. D., M. Prato, F. Novello, M. Maggini, M. D. Amici, and C. D. Micheli. Chem. Commun., 59 (1997). 128. Ohno, M., Y. Yashiro, Y. Tsunenishi, and S. Eguchi. Chem. Commun., 827 (1999). 129a. Kanemasa, S., T. Yoshimiya, and E. Wada. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 8869 (1998). 129b. Falck, J. R., and J. Yu. Tetrahedron Lett., 33, 6723 (1992). 129c. Nielsen, A. T. The Chemistry of the Nitro and Nitroso Group, ed. by H. Feuer, John Wiley, New York, 1969, part 1, p. 349. 130. Rosini, G., R. Galarini, E. Marotta, and P. Righi. J. Org. Chem., 53, 781 (1990). 131. Rosini, G., E. Marotta, P. Righi, and J. P. Seerden. J. Org. Chem., 56, 6358 (1991). 132. Righi, P., E. Marotta, A. Landuzzi, and G. Rosini. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 118, 9446 (1996). 133a. Bols, M., and T. Skydstrup. Chem. Rev., 95, 1253 (1995). 133b. Tamao, K., K. Kobayashi, and Y. Ito. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 111, 6478 (1989). 133c. Stork, G., and J. J. La Clair. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 118, 247 (1996). 134. Marotta, E., P. Righi, and G. Rosini. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 1041 (1998). 135. Righi, P., E. Marotta, and R. Rosini. Chem. Eur J., 4, 2501 (1998). 136. Marotta, E., M. Baravelli, L. Maini, P. Righi and G. Rosini. J. Org. Chem., 63, 8235 (1998). 137. Gottlieb, L., and A. Hassner. J. Org. Chem., 60, 3759 (1995). 138a. Namboothiri, I. N. N., A. Hassner, and H. E. Gottlieb. J. Org. Chem., 62, 485 (1997). 138b. Liu, J. T., W. W. Lei, J. J. Jang, J. Y. Liu, M. M. Yan, C. Hung, K. H. Kao, Y. Wang, and C. F. Yao. Tetrahedron, 55, 7115 (1999). 139a. Hassner, A., O. Friedman, and W. Dehaen. Leibigs Ann/Recueil, 587 (1997). 139b. Hassner, A., and Dehaen. Tetrahedron Lett., 31, 743 (1990). 140a. Ahrach, M., R. Schneider, P. Gerardin, and B. Loubinoux. Synth. Commun., 27, 1865 (1997). 140b. Hassner, A., and W. Dehaen. J. Org. Chem., 55, 555 (1990). 141. Kim, B. H., and J. Y. Lee. Tetrahedron Asymmetry, 2, 1359 (1991). 142. Stack, J. A., T. A. Heffner, S. G. Geib, and D. P. Curran. Tetrahedron, 49, 995 (1993). 143. Galley, G., P. G. Jones, and M. Patzel. Tetrahedron Asymmetry, 7, 273 (1996). 144. Young, D. J. J., E. G. Bengoa, and A. H. Hoveyda. J. Org. Chem., 64, 692 (1999). 145. Marrugo, H., R. Dogbeavou, and L. Breau. Tetrahedron Lett., 40, 8979 (1999). 146. Kanemasa, S., S. Kaga, and E. Wada. Tetrahedron Let., 39, 8865 (1998). 147. Ayerbe, M., A. Arrieta, and F. P. Cossio, J. Org. Chem., 63, 1795 (1998). 148. Felluga, F., G. Pitacco, C. Visintin, and E. Valentin. Helv. Chim. Acta, 80, 1457 (1997). 149. Denmark, S. E., and A. Thorarensen. Chem. Rev., 96, 137 (1996). 150. Weinreb, S. M., and D. B. Boger. Hetero Diels-Alder Methodology in Organic Synthesis, Academic Press, Orlando, 1987. 151a. Denmark, S. E., C. J. Cramer, and J. A. Sternberg. Helv. Chim. Acta., 69, 1971 (1986). 151b. Denmark, S. E., C. J. Cramer, and. J. A. Sternberg. Tetrahedron Lett., 27, 3693 (1986). 152. Denmark, S. E., B. S. Kesler, and Y. C. Moon. J. Org. Chem., 57, 4912 (1992). 153. Denmark, S. E., M. S. Dappen, and C. J. Cramer. J. Am. Chem. Soc.,108, 1306 (1986). 154a. Riasaliti, A., M. Forchiassin, and E. Valentin. Tetrahedron, 24, 1889 (1968). 154b. Felluga, P., P. Nitti, G. Pitacco, and E. Valentin. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 1645 (1991). 154c. Pitasco, G., A. Pizzioli, and E. Valentin. Synthesis, 242 (1996) 155. Chinchilla, R., and J. E. Backvall. Tetrahedron Lett., 33, 5641 (1992). 156. Yoshikoshi, A., and M. Miyashita. Acc. Chem,. Res., 18, 284 (1985). 157a. Seebach, D., and M. A. Brook. Helv. Chim. Acta, 68, 319 (1985). 157b. Marti, R. E., J. Heinzer, and D. Seebach. Liebigs Ann. Chem., 1193 (1995).

REFERENCES

157c. 158. 159. 160. 161a. 161b. 161c. 162. 163. 164a. 164b. 164c. 164d. 165. 166. 167. 168. 169. 170. 171a. 171b. 172a. 172b. 173. 174. 175. 176a. 176b. 177. 178. 179a. 179b. 179c. 180a. 180b. 181. 182. 183. 184. 185. 186a. 186b. 187.

301

Mateos, A. F., and J. A. F. Blanco. J. Org. Chem., 55, 1349 (1990). Denmark, S. E., and L. R. Marcin. J. Org. Chem., 58, 3857 (1993). Denmark, S. E., and L. R. Marcin. J. Org. Chem., 60, 3221 (1995). Denmark, S. E., and M. E. Schnute. J. Org. Chem., 59, 4576 (1994). Barco, A., S. Benetti, C. De Risi, C. F. Morelli, P. Pollini, and V. Zanirato. Tetrahedron, 52, 9275 (1996). Backvall, J. E., U. Karlsson, and R. Chinchilla. Tetrahedron Lett., 32, 5607 (1991). Thoda, Y., N. Yamawaki, H. Matsui, T. Kawashima, M. Ariga, and Y. Mori. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 61, 461 (1988). Uittenbogaard, R. M., J. P. G. Seerden, and H. W. Scheeren. Tetrahedron, 53, 11929 (1997). Denmark, S. E., and A. Thorarensen. J. Org. Chem., 59, 5672 (1994). Naturally Occurring Pyrrolizidine Alkaloids; ed. by A. F. M. Rizk, CRC, Boston, 1991. Danishefsky, S., R. Mckee, and R. Singh. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 99, 7711 (1977). Hart, D. J., and T. K. Yang. J. Org. Chem., 50, 235 (1985). Mulzer, J., and M. Scharp. Synthesis, 615 (1993). Denmark, S. E., and A. R. Hurd. J. Org. Chem., 63, 3045 (1998). Nash, R. J., L. E. Fellows, J. V. Dring, G. W. J. Fleet, A. E. Derome, T. A. Hamor, A. M. Scofield, and D. J. Watkin. Tetrahedron Lett., 29, 2487 (1988). Molyneux, R. J., M. Benso, R. Y. Wong, J. E. Tropea, and A. D. Elbein. J. Nat. Prod., 51, 1198 (1988). Nash, R. J., P. I. Thomas, R. D. Waigh, G. W. J. Fleet, M. R. Wormald, P. M. Q. Lilley, and D. J. Watkin. Tetrahedron Lett., 35, 7849 (1994). Robins, D. J. J. Nat. Prod. Rep., 377 (1990). Gruters, R., J. J. Neefjes, R. E. Y. Goede, A. Tulp, H. G. Huisman, F. Miedema, and H. L. Ploegh. Nature, 330, 74 (1987). Denmark, S. E., and B. Herbert. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 120, 7357 (1998). Denmark, S. E., and B. Herbert. J. Org. Chem., 65, 2887 (2000). Denmark, S. E., and A. R. Hurd. Organic Lett., 1, 1311 (1999). Denmark, S. E., and A. R. Hurd. J. Org. Chem., 65, 2875 (2000). Denmark, S. E., M. Seierstad, and B. Herbert. J. Org. Chem., 64, 884 (1999). Kuster, G. J., F. Kalmoua, R. Gelder, and H. W. Scheeren. Chem. Commun., 855 (1997). Kuster, G. J., and H. W. Scheeren. Tetrahedron Lett., 39, 3613 (1998). Avalos, M., R. Babiano, P. Cintas, J. L. Jimenez, J. C. Palacios, and M. A. Silva. Chem. Commun., 458 (1998). Avalos, M., R. Babiano, P. Cintas, F. J. Higes, J. L. Jimenez, J. C. Palacios, and M. A. Silva. J. Org. Chem., 64, 1494 (1999). Denmark, S. E., Y. C. Moon, and C. B. W. Senanayake. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 112, 311 (1990). Denmark, S. E., and C. B. W. Senanayake. J.Org. Chem., 58, 1853 (1993). Denmark, S. E., and M. E. Schnute. J. Org. Chem., 56, 6738 (1991). Denmark, S. E., M. E. Schnute, and C. B. W. Senanayake. J. Org. Chem., 58, 1859 (1993). Denmark, S. E., M. E. Schnute, L. R. Macin, and A. Thorarensen. J. Org. Chem., 60, 3025 (1995). Denmark, S. E., A. Thorarensen, and D. S. Middleton. J. Org. Chem., 60, 3574 (1995). Denmark, S. E., A. Thorarensen, and D. S. Middleton. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 118, 8266 (1996). Denmark, S. E., and A. Thorarensen. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 119, 125 (1997). Denmark, S. E., and E. A. Martinborough. J. Am. Chem. Soc., 121, 3046 (1999). Denmark, S. E., and M. Seierstad. J. Org. Chem., 64, 1610 (1999). Denmark, S. E., and D. S. Middleton. J. Org. Chem., 63, 1604 (1998). Denmark, S. E., V. Guangnano, J. A. Dixon, and A. Stolle. J. Org. Chem., 62, 4610 (1997). Denmark, S. E., and J. A. Dixon. J. Org. Chem., 62, 7086 (1997). Denmark, S. E., and J. A. Dixon. J. Org. Chem., 63, 6167 (1998). Denmark, S. E., and J. A. Dixon. J. Org. Chem., 63, 6178 (1998).

The Nitro Group in Organic Synthesis. Noboru Ono Copyright © 2001 Wiley-VCH ISBNs: 0-471-31611-3 (Hardback); 0-471-22448-0 (Electronic)

9 NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC DISPLACEMENT Aromatic nitro compounds undergo nucleophilic aromatic substitutions with various nucleophiles. In 1991 Terrier’s book covered (1) SNAr reactions, mechanistic aspects; (2) structure and reactivity of anionic σ-complexes; (3) synthetic aspects of intermolecular SNAr substitutions; (4) intramolecular SNAr reactions; (5) vicarious nucleophilic substitutions of hydrogen (VNS); (6) nucleophilic aromatic photo-substitutions; and (7) radical nucleophilic aromatic substitutions. This chapter describes the recent development in synthetic application of SNAr and especially VNS. The environmentally friendly chemical processes are highly required in modern chemical industry. VNS reaction is an ideal process to introduce functional groups into aromatic rings because hydrogen can be substituted by nucleophiles without the need of metal catalysts.

9.1 SNAr A general nucleophilic aromatic substitution (SNAr) is shown in Scheme 9.1; here, Nu represents an anionic or a neutral nucleophile and L is a leaving group. Aromatic nitro compounds are most suitable for SNAr because the nitro group with its strong electron-withdrawing character activates this reaction. The nitro group shows also a high nucleofugacity, and its departure from the aromatic system frequently occurs if there is appropriate activation by other electron-withdrawing groups (Scheme 9.1). In this section, synthetically useful SNAr reactions are summarized. Other details of SNAr can be found in Ref. 1. L

Nu +

EWG

Nu

L: F, Cl, Br, I, NO2, SO2R EWG: NO2, CO2R, CN, F

EWG

Nu: RS-, RO-, RNH2,

, NO2

, etc. COR

Scheme 9.1.

Intermolecular displacements of a nitro group from p-dinitrobenzene proceed very rapidly to give various substitution products. o-Dinitrobenzene is as reactive as p-dinitrobenzene, but m-dinitrobenzene is less reactive. 302

9.1

SNAr

303

The anions derived from nitroalkanes, ketones, esters, and nitriles react with p-dinitrobenzene to give the corresponding products, as shown in Eq. 9.12 and Eq. 9.2.3 R2 NO2

R1 +

R2 R1

+

M

DMSO

NO2

or HMPA

NO2

NO2

NO2

R1 = R2 = Me R1 = Me, R2 = Me3C-CH2 R1 = Me, R2 = Me3C M+ = Li+, Bu4N+

(9.1)

70–90%

O NO2

Me O + Me

NH3

(9.2)

–70 ºC

CH2– K+

NO2

NO2 59%

Diaryl ethers, diaryl thioethers, and diarylamines are important subunits in a number of synthetically challenging and medicinally important natural products. They are also important in the field of electronic materials. An array of macrocycles containing biaryl ether bridges exists in nature. These compounds range from the macrocyclic (+) K-13, OF4949 to the bicyclic piperazinomycin bouvardin and to the exceedingly structurally complex polycyclic glycopeptide antibiotics exemplified by vancomycin (Scheme 9.2).4 Although the classical Ullmann ether synthesis has been used for the construction of such frameworks,5 SNAr-based reactions afford wider applications in the synthesis of such natural products.4 SNAr reactions also provide an important strategy for the preparation of various kinds of diaryl ethers. p-Dinitrobenzene reacts with even sterically hindered phenols to give the corresponding diaryl ethers (Eq. 9.3).6 OMe

NO2

O– Na+ +

MeO

OMe

O DMSO 90 ºC, 16 h

(9.3) O 2N

MeO

NO2

90%

The reaction of p-cyanophenol with o-dinitrobenzene in the presence of KF in DMSO gives the corresponding diaryl ether in 95% yield (Eq. 9.4).7 NO2

OH NO2

KF

+ NO2 CN

(9.4)

O

DMSO 110 ºC 90%

CN

SNAr substitutions of activated aromatic halides, especially aromatic fluorides, provide useful means for the construction of aromatic diethers or amines. Primary and secondary amines react with 1,2-dihalo-4,5-dinitrobenzene to give nitro group substitution at room temperature. The halogen substituents on the ring remain unsubstituted and can be used in further transformation (Eq. 9.5).8

304

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC DISPLACEMENT OR1

OH

O

O

O HO

O

H N

N H

HO2C

H N O H2NOC

O

N H

CO2H

H piperazinomycin

2

R

OF4949-I, R1 = Me, R2 = OH OF4949-II, R1 = H, R2 = OH OF4949-III, R1 = Me, R2 = H OF4949-IV, R1 = H, R2 = H

HO K 13

C HO H N

H N

O

H

B

O2 C

O

Me N OH O

H N

N H O

O

NH

O

N H

O

NH

O

R

O

NH2CH3

OHN HN

CH3

NH2

OH OH

O

E

D

Cl O

OH

OSugar Cl O

O

A

NN

H2N

NHAc

H

O

O

Me N

OMe

CH3

O bouvardin R = OH deoxybouvardin R = H

vancomycin

Scheme 9.2.

I

NO2

I

NO2

I +

NHC4H9

Et2O C4H9NH2

RT

I

(9.5)

NO2 95%

Sawyer and coworkers have developed an efficient alternative Ullmann synthesis of diaryl ethers, diaryl thioethers, and diarylamines using the SNAr reaction. Phenol, thiophenol, or aniline reacts with an appropriate aryl halide, in the presence of KF-alumina and 18-crown-6 in acetonitrile or DMSO to give the corresponding diaryl ether or diaryl thioether as shown in Eqs. 9.6 and 9.7.9a F

O

KF-Al2O3 18-crown-6 DMSO 140 ºC

OH +

(9.6) CHO 81%

CHO SH

F +

OMe

CN

KF-Al2O3 18-crown-6 DMSO 140 ºC

CN S

(9.7)

MeO 96%

Zhu and coworkers have developed SNAr-based macrocyclization via biaryl ether formation.4 The first example of SNAr-based macrocyclization for synthesis of model carboxylatebinding pocket C-O-D rings of vancomycin was reported in 1994 (Scheme 9.3).10 To study generality of SNAr-based macrocyclization, effects of leaving groups and bases have been examined in synthesis of 14-membered macrocycles (Eq. 9.8).11 Evidently, fluorides

9.1

HNO3-H2SO4

F

1) NaBH4

F

OHC

2) PBr3 3) Et4NCN

OHC

F

F AlH3 or NaBH4

DCC, Et3N

TFA

N-Boc glycine

TFA, then Et3N DCC HO

O N H

NH2

NHBoc

CH2CO2H

X

NO2 F

O

OH

t

DMF

H N

O

H N

N H

97% O

X = NO2

Fe-FeSO4

K2CO3 O

CN

NO2

NO2

N H

305

NO2

NO2

F

SNAr

X = NH2

BuONO DMF

X=H

NaNO2 HCl CuClCuCl2

X = Cl O 60%

Scheme 9.3.

O

H N O OH

O

H N

N H

N H

O X

(9.8) O

NO2

NO2

X = F, X = Cl X=F Entry

Base (equiv)

Additive

Temperature, time

Yield (%)

1

K2CO3 (3)

no

RT, 20 h

66

2

CsF (5)

no

RT, 20 h

62

3

K2CO3 (3)

18-crown-6

RT, 6 h

82

4

Li2CO3 (30)

no

RT, 4 days

No reaction

5

NaHCO3 (3)

no

RT, 2 days

Trace

Additive

Temperature, time

X = Cl Entry

Base (equiv)

Yield (%)

6

K2CO3 (3)

no

RT, 2 days

No reaction

7

K2CO3 (3)

no

40 ºC, 24 h

Degradation

8

K2CO3 (3)

18-crown-6

RT, 2 days

Degradation

9

K2CO3 (3)

no

80 ºC, 6 h

All reactions were run in dry DMF at a concentration of 0.01 M.

80

306

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC DISPLACEMENT

show better reactivity than the corresponding chlorides. Although chlorides are more readily prepared than the corresponding fluorides, the use of the fluorides is recommended for these cyclizations. Double intramolecular SNAr reaction leads to a model bicyclic C-O-D-O-E ring, as shown in Eq. 9.9.12 Synthesis of a model 22-membered AB-C-O-D ring of vancomycin using similar strategy has been reported.13 Total synthesis of vancomycin has been accomplished by Nicolaou and coworkers.14 OMe

NO2 HO

F O MeO2C

N H

NO2 OH

F

O

H N O

H N

N H

NHBoc O

OMe

NO2 O

O

C O

OMe CsF DMF, 5 ºC

MeO2C

N H

D H N

N H

O

E O2N O H N

NHBoc O

(9.9)

OMe 60%

Aromatic fluoro compounds are prepared by the reaction of aromatic nitro compounds with metal fluorides in good yields.15 Trifluoromethylthio and pentafluorophenylthio copper reagents are readily prepared by the reaction of the corresponding disulfides with copper in DMF. They react with nitro aromatic iodides to give the corresponding sulfides in good yields (Eq. 9.10).16 The reaction of silver trifluoromethanethiolate with KI in acetonitrile leads to the formation of a nucleophilic reagent of trifluoromethanethiolate. This reagent is capable of converting fluoro-, chloro-, bromo-, and iodoaromatics into the corresponding trifluoromethyl aryl sulfides under mild conditions.16b F SCF3

I CF3SCu DMF

F

F

F

F SCu

F O2N

F

S

F

DMF

NO2

F

NO2

80%

F

(9.10)

80%

Hartwig and Buchwald have developed a new methodology for arylation of amines or phenols with aryl halides and palladium catalysts.17 This reaction provides a very useful strategy for the preparation of various heterocyclic compounds such as phenazines, as shown in Scheme 9.4.18 The SNAr reaction followed by intramolecular cyclization provides a useful method for the preparation of heterocyclic compounds, as summarized in Ref. 1. Reaction of 1-fluoronitrobenzene or 1,2-dinitrobenzene with guanidine in hot THF followed by treatment with t-BuOK gives 3-amino-1,2,4-benzotriazene 1-oxide in good yield (Eq. 9.11).19 O NO2 F

1) guanidine 2) t-BuOK

N N 82%

N

(9.11) NH2

MeO2C CO2Me Br

H2N

OMe

+ Ph

NO2

H N

Pd(OAc)2 BINAP CsCO3 PhCH3, 100 ºC

O

307

SNAr

9.1

O OMe

NO2 Ph 99%

MeO2C

MeO2C

H N

O

H2, Pd/C

H N

Br2

OMe

O OMe

NH2 Ph

NH2 Br

100%

Ph

MeO2C Pd(OAc)2 BINAP CsCO3 PhCH3, 100 ºC

N

O OMe

N 50%

Ph

Scheme 9.4.

NH

H

NO2 O

O N N

N

H

I

H NO2 O

NO2 O

TMS

NO2 O

Ni0-promoted double cyclization

Michael cyclization

H

H

N

H

Addition of a propargylic silane

N

H

N

O NO2 O

N

H

NO2 O

H

HC N D A

B

N H

E

R2 H

R1 Strychnos alkaloids Scheme 9.5.

H

308

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC DISPLACEMENT

Bonjoch and coworkers have developed a general synthetic entry to strychnos alkaloids of the curan type via a common 3a-(2-nitrophenyl)hexahydroindole-4-one intermediate. Total synthesis of (–)-strychnine is presented in Scheme 9.5.20 The first step is based on the SNAr reaction of o-iodonitrobenzene with 1,3-cyclohexanone. Recently, an interesting reaction of p-dinitrobenzene with trialkylborane has been reported, in which the nitro group is replaced by an alkyl group in good yield (Eq. 9.12).21 The reaction is not a simple ionic reaction, but proceeds via free radical intermediates. NO2

NO2 + NO2

t-BuOK t-BuOH

R3B

(9.12) R 70–80%

R = Et, Bu

Biologically important arylamines, various kinds of heterocycles, and macrocyclic compounds have been prepared by using resin-bound nitro halo compounds via SNAr reactions. Such a process is very important for combinatorial synthesis of biologically important compounds. Typical examples are presented in Eqs. 9.13–9.21.22–31 1) HN

NO2

2) RX, CH2Cl2 3) 1% KCN -MeOH, RT

O O

MeO

NHR N

F

1)

NO2

NH2

HN

O

(9.13)

NO2 MeO N

NH

N R

O

n

n

99% NO2 O O

peptide

HN

NH F

O

S Tf

O NO2

N H

F

O 1) 2% TFA, 2% TES 2) 5% NMM, NMP HO 3) 90% TFA, 5% H2O, 5% thioanisole

HN

H N

O R1

N H

R2

O 1) R3CH2Br, K2CO3 acetone, 55 ºC 2) TFA-H2O (1:1)

H N

O

H2N

R1

(9.15)

2

R

R3 46–98% NO2 , DIPEA, 50 ºC F 2) SnCl2•2H2O, NMM, NMP, RT

(9.14)

S

N H

2) SnCl2•H2O, DMF 3) 1 M NaOH, THF (1:1) 4) DIC, HOBt, DMF

NO2

N H

40%

O

1) H2NCH(R2)CH(R1)CO2R, DIPEA, DMF, RT, 3 days

peptide

1) NH R1

N R1

NH2

1) R2CO2H, DIC, DMF, RT 2) TFA-CH2Cl2-Et3SiH (10:30:1), RT, 1 h 3) 4 M HCl, dioxane-MeOH (2:1), 50 ºC, 3 h

N N R1 77–98%

R2

(9.16)

9.2

309

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC SUBSTITUTION OF HYDROGEN (NASH)

O

O NO2

N H

NH R1

N H

1) SnCl2•2H2O, NMP, 50 ºC, 3 h 2) (BrCH2O)2O, DMF, 1 h 3) R2NH2 (or R2R3NH or R2SH), DMSO, RT, 4 h

X

R2

O NH

X = NH, NR3 1 R or S

O N

H2N

X R2

N

TFA, 3–16 h

(9.17)

R1 55–95%

Fullerene is nitrated with N2O4 to give hexanitro[60]fullerene C60(NO2)4, which undergoes SNAr reaction with various nucleophiles.32 9.2 NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC SUBSTITUTION OF HYDROGEN (NASH) Recently, nucleophilic aromatic substitution of hydrogen (NASH) has become a useful tool in organic synthesis.33 The reaction proceeds via initial addition of the nucleophile to the ring with formation of a σ-complex-type intermediate (Scheme 9.6). It subsequently lead to nucleophilic aromatic substitution of hydrogen in aromatic ring via various “oxidative pathways.” Spontaneous oxidation or oxidation of σ-complex-intermediates with external oxidizing agents gives the final product. Another approach is vicarious nucleophilic substitution (VNS), which provides the possibility of replacement of hydrogen atoms in electrophilic arenes with α-functionalized alkyl substituents. The VNS, pioneered by Makosza and coworkers, offers a selective mild method for the controlled substitution of hydrogen atoms of aromatic systems.33,34 Recently, much attention has been paid to the development of new environmentally favorable routes for preparing commercially relevant chemical intermediates and products. NASH process is an ideal process because NASH reactions generate functionalized aromatics without the need for halogenated materials.

Nu

H Nu

oxidation NO2

Nu-

NuNO2

NO2-

Nu-

Nu with leaving group NO2Scheme 9.6.

NO2

310

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC DISPLACEMENT

9.2.1 Carbon Nucleophiles The reaction of nitrobenzene with the anion derived from acetone gives a mixture of p-nitrophenyl acetone and o-nitrophenyl acetone, where nitrobenzene acts as an oxidizing agent. The reaction of p-chloronitrobenzene with acetonate ion gives 2-substituted-4-chloronitrobenzene in about 50% yield.35 Tertiary carbanions derived from 2-phenylpropanenitrile, in liquid ammonia, add to heterocyclic nitroarenes, such as nitropyridines or nitrothiophenes, to form corresponding σ-adducts, which are oxidized with KMnO4 to give substitution products.35d This type of reaction is named oxidative nucleophilic substitution of hydrogen (ONSH). The combination of silyl enol ethers and fluoride ion provides more reactive anions to give alkylated nitro compounds in good yields after oxidation with DDQ, as shown in Eq. 9.22.36 This process provides a new method for synthesis of indoles and oxyindoles (see Chapter 10, Synthesis of Heterocyclic Compounds). O O NO2

O

R1

X

DBU, DMF RT, 16 h

F

OH N

1) SnCl2, NMP, RT, X 12 h 2) TFA, 2 1 X = COR or CN; R CH2Cl2, R1 = COCH3, CONHPh 30 min or SO2CH3 NO2

O

R1 39–74%

1) (L)-Fmoc-Cys, DIEA, DMF 2) SnCl2•2H2O, DMF

N H

N H

1

F NO2

3) R CHO, (MeO)3CH, DMF, AcOH, MeOH 4) NaCNBH3, THF 5) 2% AcOH-H2O

1) DIC, PhH, CH2Cl2 2) piperidine, DMF

S R1

N NHR2

O

O

Cl NH O

O

3) (ClCH2CO)2O, DMAP, NMP, RT, 1 day

N R1

F 2

O

Cl

R

2

1) R CHO, Bu3P, DIPEA, NMP, RT, 1 day

NH n

N R1

F XH

O

26–43%

R2

O 1

O

(9.20)

N

HO2C

2) TFA-CH2Cl2

R2 N H O

R

O

1) K2CO3, DMF, RT, 2 day L N H 2) TFA-TIS-H2O, RT, 3 h

O NH

n

O N H O

R1 X = S, O or NH L = linker

X

TIS=triisopropylsilane NO2

(9.19)

S

R1

1) R1NH2, DMSO, RT, 16 h 2) SnCl2, NMP, RT, 16 h

NO2

O

NHFmoc CO2H

O

O 37–83%

O

NH

H2N

3) N-functionalization 4) TFA-CH2Cl2 (9:1)

N H

(9.18)

O

O

O

R2

NO2 9–98%

(9.21)

9.2

311

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC SUBSTITUTION OF HYDROGEN (NASH)

OSiMe3 NO2

1) TDSF

+

(9.22)

O NO2

2) DDQ

Cl

Cl 80% TDSF = tris(dimethylamino)sulfonium difluorotrimethylsiliconate

Alkyl lithium and alkyl Grignard reagents react with aromatic nitro compounds in a similar way to give alkylated products (Eq. 9.23).37 Cl

Cl +

KMnO4

MeLi (or MeMgBr)

(9.23)

Me NO2

NO2

56%

Typical VNS consists of a reaction between a nitroarene such as nitrobenzene and a carbanion containing a leaving group X at the carbanionic center. In the first step, addition of the carbanion to the nitroarene results in the formation of σ-adduct, which undergoes β-elimination of HX to form the nitrobenzylic carbanion, which is subsequently protonated during the work-up procedure (Scheme 9.7). R

X R H X

Z

+ NO2

Y R

base solvent

Y

R

Y

H+

Z

Z

Z

NO2–

NO2–

Y

NO2

X = Cl, Br, PhO, PhS, etc.; Y = SO2Ph, SO2N, CN, CO2Et, Cl, Ar, etc. Typical base/solvent system used for the reaction: KOH, NaOH, t-BuOK/DMF, THF, NH3 (l). Scheme 9.7.

Carbanions of α-chloroalkyl phenyl sulfones react with nitrobenzenes to effect direct nucleophilic replacement of hydrogens located ortho and para to the nitro group (Eq. 9.24).38 A very important feature is that VNS of hydrogen usually proceeds faster than conventional SNAr of halogen located in equally activated positions (Eq. 9.25).38 The rule that VNS of

CH2SO2Ph + PhSO2CH2Cl

KOH DMSO

NO2

+

CH2SO2Ph

(9.24)

NO2

NO2

75% (47:53) Cl

Cl + PhSO2CH2Cl NO2

(9.25)

KOH DMSO

CH2SO2Ph NO2 69%

312

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC DISPLACEMENT

hydrogen proceeds faster than SNAr of halogen located in equally activated positions holds in all cases. The most convincing example of such behavior is the reaction with 1-fluoro-2,4-dinitrobenzene, which is widely used in peptide chemistry because of the very high rate of replacement of fluorine by amino groups. Nevertheless, reactions of 1-fluoro-2,4-dinitrobenzene with α-halocarbanions proceed according to the VNS of hydrogen pathway.39 Alkyl 2-chloropropionates react with nitroaromatic compounds on treatment with base to give alkyl 2-(4-nitroaryl)propionates in good yield (Eq. 9.26).40 NO2 NO2 +

Me

CO2Et

(9.26)

t-BuOK DMSO

Cl

Me

CO2Et 80%

Similar results are obtained in VNS alkylations with carbanions derived from ClCH2CO2R,41 Cl2CHCO2R,42 PhOCH2CN,43 CHCl344 and CH2(SPh)2.45 The reaction is not limited to nitrobenzene derivatives. Nitronaphthalenes,46 nitro[10]annulenes,47 and a wide range of nitro derivatives of aromatic heterocycles such as furan,48 thiophene,48,49 pyrrole,48 pyrazole,50 imidazole,51 thiazole,52 pyridine,53 indole,54 benzoxazole,55 quinoline,56 and benzofuroxane57 also undergo VNS reactions, usually in excellent yield. In general, nitrothiophene derivatives are more reactive toward VNS reactions than the corresponding nitrobenzene derivatives. 2-Nitrothiophene and its derivatives react with a variety of carbanions; usually the hydrogen at the three position of thiophene is replaced (Scheme 9.8).48,49 R Y Z

S

XCHRY base solvent

NO2

Z

S

NO2

+

R S

NO2

Y

Z = H, Br, I, CN. XCHRY = ClCH2SO2Ph, ClCHMeSO2Ph, ArOCH2CN, PhSCH2But, Cl2CHCO2Et, CHCl3, CHBr3. Base/solvent: t-BuOK, KOH/NH3 (l), DMSO, DMF, THF. Yield: 50–90% Scheme 9.8.

The VNS reaction of 3-nitrothiophene occurs only at the C-2 position; for example, VNS with chloromethylphenylsulfone gives 2-phenylsulfonylmethyl-3-nitrothiophene in 93% yield (Eq. 9.27).48 Typical VNS reaction of nitro heterocycles are presented in Eq. 9.28–9.31. Nitrofurans and nitropyrroles are less reactive toward VNS reactions than nitrothiophenes. Control of the regioselectivity of VNS is important. It is governed by three major factors: the structure of the nitroarene; the nature of the nucleophile, and the reaction conditions, especially solvent and base. The different effect of methoxy and hydroxy groups is interesting; the reaction of 1-methoxy-2,4-dinitrobenzene with chloromethyl phenyl sulfone proceeds in NO2 S

NO2 PhSO2CH2Cl KOH/NH3

S

CH2SO2Ph 93%

(9.27)

9.2

313

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC SUBSTITUTION OF HYDROGEN (NASH) CH2SO2Ph

(9.28)

PhSO2CH2Cl NO2

O

KOH/NH3

NO2

O

23% CH2SO2Ph PhSO2CH2Cl NO2

N Ts

75% CH2SO2Ph NO2

N

(9.29)

NO2

N Ts

KOH/NH3

(9.30)

+

KOH/DMSO

Cl

NO2

NO2

PhSO2CH2Cl N

PhSO2CH2

Cl

N

Cl

7%

48% NO2

NO2

CH2SO2Ph

PhSO2CH2Cl NaOH/DMSO

(9.31)

N

N

83%

the 5-position, whereas 2,4-dinitrophenol, which enters the reaction as the phenoxide, substitution takes place in the 3-position (Eq. 9.32).58 OH

OMe NO2

O2N

OMe NO2

NaOH/DMSO

PhSO2CH2

O2N PhSO2CH2Cl

OH

NO2

NO2 NaOH/DMSO

CH2SO2Ph NO2

NO2 61%

(9.32)

89%

The regiochemistry of substitution is also strongly affected by the size of the nucleophiles. Bulky nucleophiles tend to react in the para-position, although these carbanions react with para-substituted nitroarenes satisfactorily in the ortho-position at low temperature.59 The effects of solvent and bases are also important in controlling the regiochemistry of VNS. Carbanions of chloromethyl phenyl sulfones generated with t-BuOK in THF exhibit a strong tendency to react with nitroarenes in the ortho-position. This is due to an attractive interaction of the potassium cation of the relatively tight ion-pairs with the oxygen of the nitro group (Eq. 9.33).60

NO2

Cl + SO2Ph

base/solvent 80–90%

F

NO2

NO2 CH2SO2Ph F

NO2

+

+

PhSO2CH2

F

F

CH2SO2Ph

base

solvent

NaOH

DMSO

32%

57%

11%

t-BuOK

THF

93%

0%

7%

(9.33)

314

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC DISPLACEMENT

A copper salt assists the control of the regioselectivity in VNS for m-dinitrobenzene. For instance, the reaction of m-dinitrobenzene with 4-iodophenol in the presence of copper tert-butoxide gives asymmetrical biphenyl in 78% yield (Eq. 9.34).61 O2N

OH O2N

t-BuOCu t-BuOK pyridine DMF

NO2 +

HO

(9.34) O2N 78%

I

The regioselective cross-coupling between anions of bromomalonate esters or bromoacetate esters and m-dinitrobenzene proceeds in the presence of copper tert-butoxide to give the 2-substituted product. Without the copper salt, the 4-substituted isomer is the only product (Eq. 9.35).62 NO2

NO2 CO2Me +

Br CO2Me

NO2

CO2Me

t-BuOCu t-BuOK pyridine DME

CO2Me

(9.35)

NO2 83%

Recently, the VNS intermediates have been used for further introducing electrophiles. For example, reaction of the enolate of ethyl 2-chloropropionate with nitrobenzene followed by subsequent reaction with an alkylating agent gives a series of esters bearing a quaternary center (Eq. 9.36).63 NO2 NO2

Cl

1) NaH, DMF

+ CO2Et

Me

2) PhCH2Br

(9.36) Me

CO2Et CH2Ph 63%

The anion produced by VNS of nitroarenes and α-chloro esters is hydroxylated by the action of air and benzaldehyde, thereby producing α-hydroxy esters (Eq. 9.37).64 NO2 NO2

Cl

1) NaH

+ Me

CO2Et

(9.37)

2) PhCHO/air Me

CO2Et OH 66%

Asymmetric aromatic VNS of hydrogen has been reported; the enolates of chiral cyclohexylphenylsulfanylacetates react readily with 3-chloronitrobenzene, followed by subsequent stereoselective alkylation (Eq. 9.38).65

9.2

Me

Me Me

Cl +

315

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC SUBSTITUTION OF HYDROGEN (NASH)

Ph 2) PhCH2Br

O

O 2N

Ph

O

1) NaH, DMF

O

PhS

CH2PhMe

Cl

O

O2N

(9.38)

Me

Me

70% (dr = 8:1)

The transformation of products obtained by VNS provides a useful tool in organic synthesis. Alkyl substituents can be introduced using VNS reaction with carbanions containing one group acting as an efficient carbanion-stabilizing and leaving group. Early examples of methylation of nitroarenes have been accomplished with anions derived from DMSO or related compounds.66 A more attractive and useful method for introducing alkyl groups into nitro compounds is a method based on VNS using α-chloroesters followed by decarboxylation (Eq. 9.39).67 NO2 Me

NO2 Me + CO2Et

Cl

NO2

CO2Et

t-BuOK DMF

Me

NaOH

Cl

Cl

(9.39)

Cl 45%

70%

A convenient method for introducing an aminomethyl group into nitroarenes can be accomplished by the use of the anion of phenylthiomethylisocyanide (Eq. 9.40).68 NO2

NO2

NO2 +

PhS

NC

NC

t-BuOK DMF

NH2

HCl

Cl

Cl

(9.40)

Cl 72%

The introduction of a formyl or acyl group can be achieved by transformation of VNS products. Hydrolysis of dichloromethylnitroarenes, VNS products between heteroaromatic nitro compounds and chloroform, is a method of choice for the preparation of heterocyclic aldehydes, as shown in Eq. 9.41, in which 4-nitroimidazole is converted into 5-formyl-4-nitroimidazole.69 NO2

NO2

N + CHCl3 N CH2Ph

t-BuOK DMF –70 ºC, 5 min

NO2

N

N

AgClO4 CHCl2 N CH2Ph

CHO N CH2Ph

H2O

78%

(9.41)

82%

VNS products derived from α-chloroalkyl sulfones are converted into the corresponding aldehydes or ketones via oxidation (Eq. 9.42).70

O2N

+ S

Ph

SO2Ph t-BuOK NH3 Li

O2N

Ph S 78%

SO2Ph

base O2

O2N

Ph S O 67%

(9.42)

316

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC DISPLACEMENT

Arenes, on complexation with Cr, Fe, Mn, and so forth, acquire strongly electrophilic character; such complexes in reactions with nucleophiles behave as electrophilic nitroarenes.71 Synthesis of aromatic nitriles via the temporary complexation of nitroarenes to the cationic cyclopentadienyliron moiety, cyanide addition, and oxidative demetalation with DDQ has been reported (Eq. 9.43).72 CN H

Me Me

NO2 CpFe+

CN DDQ

NaCN DMF

(9.43)

NO2

Me NO2 CpFe+ 72%

83%

9.2.2 Nitrogen and Other Heteroatom Nucleophiles Amination of aromatic nitro compounds is a very important process in both industry and laboratory. A simple synthesis of 4-aminodiphenyl amine (4-ADPA) has been achieved by utilizing a nucleophilic aromatic substitution. 4-ADPA is a key intermediate in the rubber chemical family of antioxidants. By means of a nucleophilic attack of the anilide anion on a nitrobenzene, a σ-complex is formed first, which is then converted into 4-nitrosodiphenylamine and 4-nitrodiphenylamine by intra- and intermolecular oxidation. Catalytic hydrogenation finally affords 4-ADPA. Azobenzene, which is formed as a by-product, can be hydrogenated to aniline and thus recycled into the process. Switching this new atom-economy route allows for a dramatic reduction of chemical waste (Scheme 9.9).73 The United States Environmental Protection Agency gave the Green Chemistry Award for this process in 1998.74 –

NH2

+

NO2

+O N O–

H

Me4N+OH–

N

50 ºC

H

NH2

X H2, Pd/C

N H

N H 86% X = NO, NO2 Scheme 9.9.

Amination of heterocyclic nitro compounds such as nitroquinolines, nitroisoquinolines, or nitropyridines can be carried out by means of a liquid ammonia-KMnO4 system, which has been studied by Wozniak and coworkers (Eq. 9.44). Frontier molecular orbital calculation can predict the reactivity and regioselectivity of this amination.75 In a similar way, nitroquinolines are methylaminated with a liquid methylamine solution of KMnO4.76 Br

NO2 N

NH2

Br

NO2

NH3/KMnO4

(9.44) H2N

N 85%

NH2

9.2

317

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC SUBSTITUTION OF HYDROGEN (NASH)

Another approach for oxidative nucleophilic substitution of hydrogen can be carried out with primary amines and CAN in aqueous MeCN (Eq. 9.45).77 NHC4H9 NO2

+

S

n-BuNH 2

CAN MeCN-H2O

NO2 S

(9.45)

42%

Interesting direct amination of nitroarenes has been reported; aromatic photo substitution of m-dinitrobenzene with primary amines is promoted by the presence of fluoride ion to give useful yields of the product (Eq. 9.46).78 NHPh NO2

NO2 +

PhNH2

Bu4NF·3H2O

(9.46)

hν

NO2

NO2 54%

Amination of nitroarenes via VNS reactions with hydroxylamine has been known for almost 100 years.79 However, this reaction was limited to highly electrophilic arenes such as m-dinitrobenzene and bicyclic nitroarenes. Recently, several modified reagents and procedures have appeared for amination of nitroarenes. A better aminating agent, 4-amino-1,2,4-triazole or sulfenamide, has been used by Katritzky80 and Makosza.81 Several sulfenamides have been tested to select the most effective aminating agents. 2,4,6-Trichlorobenzenesulfenamide and N-tetramethylenethiocarbamoylsulfenamide give satisfactory yields of amination under usual VNS conditions (Eqs. 9.47 and 9.48). The former reagent shows a preference for orthosubstitution, whereas the latter compound reacts at the para-position of the nitroarene ring. H2N Amination reagent

O 2N

t-BuOK/DMF Cl

N

O2N

O 2N

NH2

Cl 35%

34%

SNH2

Cl S

CF3

+

O2N

(9.47) 14%

SNH2

71%

H2N Amination reagent

t-BuOK/NH3

+

O2N

O2N

NH2

CF3 Cl

CF3

Cl SNH2

Cl

47%

33%

(9.48)

S H2NS

Me N Me

0%

90%

318

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC DISPLACEMENT

1,1,1-Trimethylhydrazinium iodide is a novel, highly reactive reagent for aromatic amination via VNS, as shown in Eq. 9.49, in which the regioselectivity is different from that obtained with other reagents.82 H2N + Me3N-NH2 I–

O2N

t-BuOK DMSO

+

O2N

O2N

NH2

(9.49)

85% (61:39)

Seko and coworkers have discovered a convenient copper-catalyzed direct amination of nitroarenes with O-alkylhydroxylamines (Eq. 9.50).83 H2N + H2NOMe

O2N

t-BuOK 10% CuCl DMF

O2N

+

O2N

NH2

(9.50)

93% (71:29)

Direct amination of 3-nitropyridines with methoxyamine in the presence of zinc chloride under basic conditions proceeds to give 2-amino amino-3-nitropyridines (Eq. 9.51).84 NO2

NO2 + H2NOMe MeO

N

ZnCl2

t-BuOK DMSO

N 87%

MeO

NH2

(9.51)

Carbo- and heterocyclic nitroarenes react with anions of tert-butyl and cumyl hydroperoxides in the presence of strong bases to form substituted o- and p-nitrophenols. Regiochemistry of the hydroxylation can be controlled to a substantial extent by selection of proper conditions (Eq. 9.52).85 OH Cl

Cl +

NO2

t-BuOOH

NaOH NH3

(9.52) NO2 73%

9.2.3 Applications to Synthesis of Heterocyclic Compounds Because the nucleophiles can be introduced at the ortho-position of the nitro group, various heterocycles can be prepared via VNS and related reactions. Indoles and related compounds are prepared via the VNS reaction and subsequent cyclization. The VNS reaction of nitroarenes followed by cyclization with Et3N-Me3SiCl gives 1-hydroxyindoles (Eq. 9.53).86 Cyclization is also catalyzed on treatment with bases, in which nitroso intermediates are postulated. The novel cyclization takes places by the silane-mediated condensation of nitroarenes with allylic carbanions, in which a six-membered nitrogen-containing ring is constructed (Eq. 9.54).87

9.2

319

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC SUBSTITUTION OF HYDROGEN (NASH)

CN Cl

CN

+

Ph

Br

K2CO3, Bu4NI

Cl

Ph

MeCN

NO2

NO2 66%

CN Ph Me3SiCl

(9.53)

N OH 91%

Et3N

Ph NO2

N +

1) DBU Ph

SO2Ph

SO2Ph

2) t-BuSiMe2Cl MeCN, RT, 24 h

(9.54) 69%

Base-promoted condensation of ketones with 3-nitroaniline results in the formation of indoles. The reaction proceeds in one pot via a NASH-type reaction and subsequent cyclization (Eq. 9.55).88 NO2

NO2 O

t-BuOK

+ Ph

Me

(9.55)

Ph

DMSO, RT

N H 62%

NH2

The foregoing examples show that the nucleophilic attack to nitroarenes at the ortho-position followed by cyclization is a general method for the synthesis of various heterocycles. When nucleophiles have an electrophilic center, heterocyclic compounds are obtained in one step. Ono and coworkers have used the anion derived from ethyl isocyanoacetate as the reactive anion for the preparation of heterocyclic compounds. The carbanion reacts with various nitroarenes to give isoindoles or pyrimidines depending on the structure of nitroarenes (Eqs. 9.56 and 9.57).89 The synthesis of pyrroles is discussed in detail in Chapter 10.

CO2Et

S

+

NO2

CNCH2CO2Et

N

DBU THF, RT

S

(9.56)

N O 40% N S

N S O2N

N

+

CNCH2CO2Et

N

DBU THF, RT

HN CO2Et 33%

(9.57)

320

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC DISPLACEMENT

OMe

OMe

OMe NO2

Cl

NO2

NO2

O

CN t-BuOK, DMF

MeCN

CN

Br

Br

BrCH2CO2Et

CN

Br

70% OMe

86% OMe

H N

O

Sn, HCl aq

H N

CO2Et

O

65% HNO3

MeOH

Br

Br CN 77%

NO2 CN 50%

OMe Me N

1) H2, Pd/C, EtOH, AcOH 2) BH3Me2S, THF then HCO2Ac 3) BH3Me2S, THF

HN 26%

Scheme 9.10.

O

O Cl

Br

OH

Br

O

Br Ph2O

CN t-BuOK, DMF

NO2

reflux NO2 CN

NO2 CN

51%

48% OMe

OMe 1) Me2SO4, K2CO3, acetone 2) m-CPBA, CH2Cl2

OH

Br

Br Bu4NBr

O

Br

Mg(NO3)2 NO2 CN

NO2 CN 78%

82% OMe Br

OMe NHBn

Br

O

1) CrO3, acetone

BnNH2

2) Et3N

NaBH3CN NO2 CN 94%

NO2 CN 75%

OMe NH2

H2, Pd (C) HN 57% Scheme 9.11.

321

REFERENCES

OH

OH NO2

MeO

OMe NO2

MeO

NO2

MeO

PhOCH2CN

Me2SO4

t-BuOK, DMF

NaHCO3 acetone

NO2 CN

NO2

NO2 CN

80%

83% OMe

OMe MeO

H N

MeO

NO2 H2/(PdCl2, Fe)

BrCH2CO2Et K2CO3 MeCN

CO2Et NO2 CN

EtOH, AcOH 4 days

HN

69%

48%

O

Scheme 9.12.

There are many variants of such syntheses of heterocycles. Recent examples are presented in Eqs. 9.58 and 9.59.90 Because these transformations do not require aromatic halides or transition metals, they may provide a clean technology for production of biologically important materials. HN N H

NO2 + N

Ph N

NH2

NaH DMF –10 ºC

N

N

Ph

Ph N

+ N

(9.58)

N 22%

19%

Ph NO2

NH +

N

Ph

NH2

N

t-BuOLi THF

N N

(9.59)

N 59%

To date, there are only few examples of applying the VNS reaction in the synthesis of natural products. Several natural products such as O-methylnordehydrobuffotenine (Scheme 9.10),91 an alkaloid of animal origin, 1,3,4,5-tetrahydro[cd]indole (Scheme 9.11),92 and 7,8-dimethoxy2-oxo-1,3,4,5-tetrahydropyrrolo[4,3,2-de]quinoline as key intermediates for marine alkaloids (Scheme 9.12)93 have been prepared via VNS reactions.

REFERENCES 1. Terrier, F. Nucleophilic Aromatic Displacement, Verlag Chemie, Weinheim, 1991. 2a. Kornblum, N., L. Cheng, R. C. Kerber, M. M. Kestner, B. N. Newton, H. W. Pinnick, R. G. Smith, and P. A. Wade. J. Org. Chem., ", 1560 (1970). 2b. Norris, R. K., and D. Randless. Aust. J. Chem., ! , 2413 (1979). 3. Iwasaki, G., S. Saeki, and M. Hamana. Chem. Lett., 31 (1986). 4. Zhu, R. Synlett, 133 (1997). 5. Boger, D. L., S. M. Sakaya, and D. Yohannes. J. Org. Chem., #$, 4204 (1991). 6a. Sammes, P. G., D. Thetford, and M. Voyle. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 3229 (1988).

322 6b. 7. 8. 9a. 9b. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15a. 15b. 15c. 16a. 16b. 17a. 17b. 17c. 17d. 17e. 17f. 18. 19. 20a. 20b. 20c. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34a. 34b. 34c. 34d. 35a. 35b. 35c. 35d.

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC DISPLACEMENT

Effenberger, F., M. Koch, and W. Streicher. Chem. Ber.,  ", 163 (1991). Clark, J. H., and N. D. S. Owen. Tetrahedron Lett., &, 3627 (1987). Senskey, M. D., J. D. Bradshaw, C. A. Tessier, and W. J. Youngs. Tetrahedron Lett., !$, 6217 (1995). Sawyer, J. S., E. A. Schmittling, J. A. Palkowitz, and W. J. Smith, III. J. Org. Chem. $!, 6338 (1998). Raeppel, S., F. Raeppel, and J. Suffert. Synlett., 794 (1998). Beugelmans, R., J. Zhu, N. Husson, M. B. Choussy, and G. P. Singh. J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun., 439 (1994). Beugelmans, R., S. Bourdet, and J. Zhu. Tetrahedron Lett., !$, 1279 (1998). Beugelmans, R., M. B. Choussy, C. Vergne, J. P. Bouillon, and Z. Zhu. J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun., 1029 (1996). Neuville, L., M. B. Choussy, and J. Zhu. Tetrahedron Lett., ", 1747 (2000). Nicolaou, K. C., H. J. Mitchell, N. F. Jain, N. Winssinger, R. Hughes, and T. Bando. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., !&, 240 (1999). Attina, M., F. Cacace, and A. P. Wolf. J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun., 108 (1983). Clark, J. H., and D. K. Smith. Tetrahedron Lett., $, 2233 (1986). Effenberger, F., and W. Streicher. Chem. Ber.,  ", 157 (1991). Kondratenko, N. V., A. A. Kolomeytsev, V. I. Popov, and L. M. Yagupolskii. Synthesis, 667 (1985). Adams, D. J., and J. H. Clark. J. Org. Chem., $#, 1456 (2000). Hartwig, J. F. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., !%, 2046 (1998). Wolfe, J. P., S. Wagaw, J. F. Marcoux and S. L. Buchwald, Acc. Chem. Res., !, 805 (1998). Hartwig, J. F. Acc. Chem. Res., !, 852 (1998). Frost, C. G., and P. Mendonca. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 2615 (1998). Old, D. W., J. P. Wolfe, and S. L. Buchwald. J. Am. Chem. Soc.,  , 9722 (1998). Hartwig, J. F., M. Kawatsura, S. I. Hauck, K. H. Shaughnessy, and L. M. A. Roman. J. Org. Chem., $", 5575 (1999). Emoto, T., N. Kubosaki, Y. Yamagiwa, and T. Kamikawa. Tetrahedron Lett., ", 355 (2000). Suzuki, H., and T. Kawakami. Synthesis, 855 (1997). Bonjoch, J., D. Sole, S. G. Rubio, and J. Bosch. J. Am. Chem. Soc., ', 7230 (1997). Sole, D., J. Bonjoch, S. G. Rubio, E. Peidro, and J. Bosch. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., !&, 395 (1999). Sole, D., J. Bonjoch, S. G. Rubio, E. Peidro, and J. Bosch. Chem. Eur. J. $, 655 (2000). Shifman, A., N. Palani, and S. Hoz. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., !', 944 (2000). Pan, P. C., and C. M. Sun. Tetrahedron Lett., !', 9505 (1998). Fotsch, C., G. Kumaravel, S. K. Sharmn, A. D. Wu, J. S. Gounarides, N. R. Nimala, and R. C. Petter. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett.,', 2125 (1999). Lee, J., D. Gauthir, and R. A. Rivero. J. Org. Chem.,$", 3060 (1999). Mazurv, A. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., , 67 (2000). Stephensen, H., and F. Zaragoza. Tetrahedron Lett., ", 5799 (1999). Schwarz, M. K., D. Tumelty, and M. A. Gallop. J. Org. Chem.,$", 2219 (1999). Zaragoza, F., and H. Stephensen. J. Org. Chem., $", 2555 (1999). Pan, P. C., and S. M. Sun. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett.,', 1537 (1999). Ouyang, X., N. Tamayo, and A. S. Kiselyov. Tetrahedron, ##, 2827 (1999). Feng, Y., and K. Burgess. Chem. Eur. J., #, 3261 (1999). Anantharal, V., L.Y. Wang, T. Canteenwala, and L. Y. Chiang. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 3357 (1999). Chupakhin, O. N., V. N. Charushim, and H. C. van der Plas. Nucleophilic Aromatic Substitution of Hydrogen, Academic Press Inc., London, 1994. Makosza, M. Chimia, "&, 499 (1994). Makosza, M., and J. Winiarski. Acc. Chem. Res., , 282 (1987). Makosza, M. Synthesis, 103 (1991). Makosza, M., and K. Wojciechowski. Liebigs Ann/Recl., 1805 (1997). Hamana, M., G. Iwasaki, and S. Saeki. Heterocycles, %, 177 (1982). Iwasaki, G., M. Hamana, and S. Saeki. Heterocycles,', 162 (1982). Iwasaki, G., K. Wada, S. Saeki, and M. Hamana. Heterocycles, , 1811 (1984). Makosza, M., and K. Stalinski. Synthesis, 1631 (1998).

REFERENCES

35e. 36a. 36b. 36c. 37. 38a. 38b. 39. 40a. 40b. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63a. 63b. 64. 65. 66a. 66b. 66c. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71a. 71b. 71c. 71d. 72. 73a. 73b. 74. 75a. 75b.

323

Makosza, M., and K. Stalinski. Chem. Eur. J., !, 2025 (1997). Rajanbabu, T. V., and T. Fukunaga. J. Org. Chem., "', 4571 (1984). Rajanbabu, T. V., G. S. Reddy, and T. Fukunaga. J. Am. Chem. Soc., %, 5473 (1984). Rajanbabu, T. V., B. L. Chenard, and M. A. Petti. J. Org. Chem., #, 1704 (1986). Bartoli, G., M. Bosco, and G. Baccolini. J. Org. Chem., ", 522 (1980). Makosza, M., J. Golinski, and J. Baran. J. Org. Chem., "', 1488 (1984). Makosza, M., and J. Winiarski. J. Org. Chem., "', 1494 (1984). Makosza, M., and J. Stalewski. Liebigs Ann. Chem., 605 (1991). Stahly, G. P., B. C. Stahly, and K. C. Lilje. J. Org. Chem., "', 579 (1984). Stahly, G. P., B. C. Stahly, and J. R. Maloney. J. Org. Chem., #!, 690 (1988). Mudryk, B., and M. Makosza. Synthesis, 1007 (1988). Makosza, M., and M. Bialecki. Synlett, 181 (1991). Makosza, M., and J. Winiarski. J. Org. Chem., "#, 1534 (1980). Makosza, M., and Z. Owczarczyk. J. Org. Chem.,#", 5094 (1989). Makosza, M., and J. Winiarski. J. Org. Chem., "', 5272 (1984). Makosza, M., W. Danikiewicz, and K. Wojciechowski. Liebig Ann. Chem., 711 (1987). Neidlein, R., and G. Lautenschlager. Chem. Ber.,  , 493 (1989). Makosza, M., and E. Kwart. Tetrahedron, #, 8339 (1995). Makosza, M., K. Sienkiewicz, and K. Wojciechowski. Synthesis, 850 (1990). Bernard, M. K., M. Makosza, B. Szafran, and U. Wrzeciono. Liebig Ann. Chem., 545 (1989). Makosza, M., and E. Kwart. Bull. Pol. Acad. Chem., !#, 287 (1987). Makosza, M., A. Rydz, and Z. Wrobel. Pol. J. Chem., $', 918 (1995). Macor, J. E., and J. M. Wehner. Tetrahedron Lett., !#, 349 (1993). Macor, J. E., J. T. Forman, R. J. Post, and K. Ryan. Tetrahedron Lett., !&, 1673 (1997). Wojciechowski, K., and M. Makosza. Synthesis, 106 (1989). Makosza, M., A. Kinowski, W. Danikiewicz, and B. Mudryk. Liebigs Ann. Chem., 69 (1986). Ostrowski, S., and K. Wojciechowski. Can. J. Chem., $&, 2239 (1990). Makosza, M., and S. Ludwiczak. J. Org. Chem., "', 4562 (1984). Mudryk, B., and M. Makosza. Tetrahedron, "", 209 (1988). M. Makosza, T. Glinka, and J. Kinowski. Tetrahedron, ", 1863 (1984). Haglund, O., A. Hai, and M. Nilsson. Synthesis, 942 (1990). Haglund, O., and M. Nilsson. Synthesis, 242 (1994). Lawrence, N. J., J. Liddle, and D. A. Jackson. Synlett., 55 (1996). Lawrence, N. J., J. Liddle, and D. A. Jackson. Tetrahedron Lett., !$, 8477 (1995). Lawrence, N. J., O. Lamarche, and N. Thurrab. Chem. Commun., 689 (1999). Drew, M. D., D. A. Jackson, N. J. Lawrence, J. Liddle, and R. G. Pritchard. Chem. Commun., 189 (1997). Russell, G. A., and S. A. Weiner. J. Org. Chem.,!, 248 (1966). Nozaki, H., Y.Yamamoto, and R. Noyori. Tetrahedron Lett., 1123 (1966). Trost, B. M. Tetrahedron Lett., 5761 (1966). Bull, D. J., J. Fray, M. C. Mackenny, and K. A. Malloy. Synlett, 647 (1996). Makosza, M., A. Kinowski, and S. Ostrowski. Synthesis, 1215 (1993). Ostrowski, S. Synlett, 253 (1995). Wojciechowski, K. Synth. Commun., %, 135 (1997). Semmelhack, M. F., G. R. Clark, J. .L. Garcia, J. J. Harrison, Y. Thebtaranonth, W. Wulff, an d A. Yamashita. Tetrahedron, !%, 3957 (1981). Kundig, E. P. Pure Appl. Chem., , 1855 (1985). Pike, R. D., W. J. Ryan, N. S. Lennhoff, J. van Epp, and D. A. Sweigart. J. Am. Chem. Soc.,  , 4798 (1990). Miles, W. H., P. M. Smiley, and H. R. Brinkman. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1897 (1989). Abd-El-Aziz, A. S., W. Boraie, and N. T. Gavel. Organometallics, &, 1562 (1999). Stern, M. K., F. D. Hileman, and J. K. Bashkin. J. Am. Chem. Soc., ", 9237 (1992). Stern, K. M., B. K. Cheng, F. D. Hileman, and J. M. Allman. J. Org. Chem., #', 5627 (1994). Bolm, C., O. Beckmann, and O. A. G. Dabard. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., !&, 907 (1999). Wozniak, W., A. Baranski, and K. Nowak. J. Org. Chem., # , 5643 (1987). Wozniak, M., A. Baranski, and B. Szpakiewicz. Liebigs Ann. Chem., 875 (1991).

324 76. 77. 78. 79a. 79b. 80. 81a. 81b. 82. 83a. 83b. 84. 85. 86. 87. 88. 89. 90a. 90b. 91. 92. 93.

NUCLEOPHILIC AROMATIC DISPLACEMENT

Wozniak, M., and M. Crzegozek. Liebigs Ann. Chem., 823 (1993). Surange, S. S., and S. Rajappa. Tetrahedron Lett., !', 7169 (1998). Huertas, I., I. Gallardo, and J. Marquet. Tetrahedron Lett., "1, 279 (2000). Angeli, A., and F. Angeelico. Gazz. Chim. Ital.,!, 27 (1901). Price, C. C., and S. T. Vong. Org. Synth., !, 664 (1955). Katritzky, A. K., and K. S. Laurenzo. J. Org. Chem.,#!, 3978 (1988). Makosza, M., and M. Bialecki. J. Org. Chem.,#%, 4784 (1992). Makosza, M., and M. Bialecki. J. Org. Chem., $!, 4878 (1998). Pagoria, P. F., A. R. Mitchell, and R. D. Schmidt. J. Org. Chem.,$, 2934 (1996). Seko, S., and N. Nakamura. J. Org. Chem., $, 442 (1996). Seko, S., K. Miyake, and N. Nakamura. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 1437 (1999). Seko, S., and K. Miyake. Chem. Commun., 1519 (1998). Makosza, M., and K. Sienkiewicz. J. Org. Chem., $!, 4199 (1998). Wrobel, Z., and M. Makosza. Tetrahedron, #', 5501 (1997). Wrobel, Z. Tetrahedron Lett., !&, 4913 (1997). Moskalev, N., and M. Makosza, Tetrahedron Lett., ", 5395 (1999). Murashima, T., K. Fujita, K. Ono, T. Ogawa, N. Uno, and N. Ono. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 1403 (1996). Suzuki, H., and T. Kawakami. J. Org. Chem., $", 3361 (1999). Kawakami, T., K. Uehata, and H. Suzuki. Org. Lett., 413 (2000). Makosza, M., and J. Stalewski. Tetrahedron,#, 7263 (1995). Makosza, M., J. Stalewski, K. Wojociechowski, and W. Danikiewicz. Tetrahedron, #!, 193 (1997). Makosza, M., J. Stalewski, and O. S. Maslennikova. Synthesis, 1131 (1997).

The Nitro Group in Organic Synthesis. Noboru Ono Copyright © 2001 Wiley-VCH ISBNs: 0-471-31611-3 (Hardback); 0-471-22448-0 (Electronic)

10 SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS As discussed in Chapter 6, nitro compounds are converted into amines, oximes, or carbonyl compounds. They serve as useful starting materials for the preparation of various heterocyclic compounds. Especially, five-membered nitrogen heterocycles, such as pyrroles, indoles, and pyrrolidines, are frequently prepared from nitro compounds. Syntheses of heterocyclic compounds using nitro compounds are described partially in Chapters 4, 6 and 9. This chapter focuses on synthesis of hetero-aromatics (mainly pyrroles and indoles) and saturated nitrogen heterocycles such as pyrrolidines and their derivatives.

10.1 PYRROLES Many natural products, such as the bile pigments, porphyrins, and related macrocycles, contain the pyrrole ring as a characteristic subunit and play an important role in nature.1 Pyrrole derivatives comprises a series of compounds with potential biological significance. Many methods are available for the synthesis of pyrroles as illustrated in Scheme 10.1. In the context of porphyrins and bile acid pigments, most procedures are based on the Paal-Knorr reaction (routes A and B) involving the reaction of α-amino ketones (normally generated in situ by reduction, usually with zinc dust, of an α-keto oxime) with β-ketoesters or β-diketones.2 Because nitro compounds are good precursors for preparing amines and ketones, they have been used for the preparation of pyrroles in various ways. In recent years, isonitrile cyclization using nitroalkenes and ethyl isocyanoacetate has become a useful method for pyrrole synthesis (route D). A convenient and general method has been developed for the synthesis of alkylpyrroles starting from ketones and nitroalkenes via reduction of the intermediate acetic nitronic anhydride as shown in Eq. 10.1. Ketone enolates react with a variety of nitroalkenes to yield the Michael adducts, lithium nitronates, which are trapped with acetic anhydride to give the corresponding acetic nitronic anhydrides. The acetic nitronic anhydrides are easily converted into alkylpyrroles by reduction with Zn(Cu).3 325

326

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

O

O RNH2

[2,3] or [2,4] cycloaddition route

A B NH2

O

NHR

NO2

N R

Y

R = H, alkyl, etc.

D

C

C N

Scheme 10.1.

1) Bu O

Me

NO2 –78 ºC 2) Ac2O

Bu

LDA

Me

OLi

O

Zn (Cu)

+

-

Bu

O

N

81%

Bu

Me N H (10.1) 65%

OAc NH4Cl, EtOH –90 ºC

The Michael addition of nitroalkanes to α,β-unsaturated ketones gives γ-nitroketones, which are converted into pyrroles by reduction of the nitro group with Bu3P and PhSSPh (Eq. 10.2).4 Ph Ph Ph

Me O O2N

PhSSPh Bu3P

Ph

N H 90%

(10.2)

Me

As a new and practical synthesis of pyrroles, Zard and coworkers have presented the reduction of γ-nitroketones with formamidinesulfinic acid (Eq. 10.3).5

Ph

Ph

NH

Ph CO2Et O O2N

H2N

SO2H Ph

Et3N

N H 85%

(10.3)

CO2Et

The condensation of nitroalkenes with enamino- ketones or enamino-esters (GrobCamenisch reaction) has been widely used for pyrrole synthesis (Eq. 10.4).6a This process is now carried out with resin-bound enamino-ketones for combinatorial syntheses of pyrroles.6b CO2Et

Me

CO2Et

MeCN +

O2N

Me

CO2Et

Me

NH Me

O2N

HN Me

Me

N Me

Me

70–80%

(10.4)

10.1

PYRROLES

327

Various variants of this process are presented for pyrrole synthesis. For example, reactions of 1,3-dicarbonyl compounds with β-nitrostyrene followed by treatment with amines give 3-acylpyrroles (Eq. 10.5).7 O O

Me

Ph +

Me Me

+

NH3

Me

O2N

O

Ph

(10.5)

N H 60%

Reactions of 3-aminocrotonic esters with sugar nitro-olefins give 3-(pentaacetoxypentyl)pyrroles (Eq. 10.6).8 CH2Ph

Me

N

NO2 MeO2C

CH2Ph H AcO H

OAc H OAc

Me

+

NH

H AcO H

MeCN

CO2Me

H OAc AcOCH 2

OAc H OAc

H

(10.6)

OAc CH2OAc

45% MeO MeO Ph + Me

NH

MeO

NO2

EtOH

N

MeO EtO2C 95%

EtO2C

Me Ph

(10.7)

Another pyrrole synthesis based on intramolecular substitution of the nitro group by amino function is presented in Eq. 10.7, in which the Michael addition of enamines to nitroalkenes is used.9 The Michael addition to nitroalkenes followed by cyclization provides a general method for the synthesis of various pyrroles. The reaction of nitroalkenes with acetoacetate followed by reduction with Zn in acetic acid provides another route to 2-methyl-3-pyrrolecarboxylates (Eq. 10.8).10 Ph Ph

CO2Et +

Me

NO2

Me

O

CO2Et

1) KOH 2) Zn

Me

Me

N H 96%

(10.8)

Reaction of cyclohexanone imines with nitroalkenes provides a new synthetic method of tetrahydroindole derivatives (Eq. 10.9).11 Ph Ph

toluene

+

N

NO2

0 ºC

(10.9)

N Ph

Ph 70%

328

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

A one pot samarium-catalyzed three-component reaction of aldehydes, amines, and nitroalkanes leads to pyrroles. The reaction proceeds via imines, generated from the amine and carbonyl compound, followed by the Michael addition of the nitro compound (Eq. 10.10).12a In Et

Me

n-C4H9NH2

+

O Et

SmCI3

+

NO2

H

THF 65ºC

N C4H9 65%

(10.10)

Me

a related reaction, a three-component coupling of the α,β-unsaturated carbonyl compounds amines and nitroalkanes on the surface of silica gel in the absence of a solvent under microwave irradiation gives highly substituted pyrroles.12b Various types of alkylpyrroles are prepared under mild conditions by reacting nitroalkenes with imines in the presence of Sm(Oi-Pr)3 (Eq. 10.11).13 Thus, the Grob-Camenish type reaction is accelerated by samarium catalysts. Ph + Ph

N

Et

Sm(Oi-Pr)3

NO2

(10.11)

N C4H9

THF 65°C

63%

All of these reactions proceed in a similar pathway which involves the Michael type additions of enamines to nitroalkenes or addition of nitroalkanes to imines and cyclization. This process has been achieved by solid-phase variation (Scheme 10.2).14

NH2

O O CH2Cl2, –15 ºC → RT, 2.5 h

O

O

O

R1NH2 DMF, TMOF, RT, 2 × 24 h

N H

3

R1

N H O

NO2 H

HN

3

HN

R DMF/EtOH (1:1), 60 ºC, 2 h

R3

H2N

O

R2

R

R2

N

20% TFA/CH2Cl2, 30 min

R1

N R1 70–80%

R2

Scheme 10.2.

Isonitrile cyclization provides a useful alternative method of the Knorr type cyclization for pyrrole synthesis. In 1972, Leusen and coworkers reported pyrrole synthesis based on the reaction of tosylmethyl isocyanide (TosMIC) with electron-deficient alkenes (Eq. 10.12).15 The most important advantage of this procedure is that α-free pyrroles are obtained directly. Reaction of nitroalkenes with TosMIC gives 3-nitropyrroles in 55–85% yield (Eq. 10.13).16 The R R

Y

Y = CO2Et, C(O)R, CN

+

Me

CH2NC (TosMIC)

Y

NaH DMSO-Et2O

(10.12) N H

10.1

329

PYRROLES

pyrrole synthesis shown in Eq. 10.13 is important because it is the only direct method to obtain 3-nitropyrroles unsubstituted in 2 and/or 5 positions. Such pyrroles are also prepared by the reaction of 1-isocyano-1-tosyl-1-alkenes with nitromethane (Eq. 10.14).17 An improvement of yields in the reaction shown in Eq. 10.13 is accomplished by using 2.4 equivalents of t-BuOK at low temperature (–80 °C) in THF.18 Ph Ph

base solvents

+ TosCH2NC

NO2

(10.13) N H

NaH, DMSO-Et2O: 55% t-BuOK, THF, –80 ºC: 85% Ph Ph

NC

NO2

NO2

(10.14)

t-BuOK

+ CH3NO2

N H 94%

THF

Tos

Nitrodienes19 and nitrotrienes20 can be used in Leusen-pyrrole synthesis to give 3-alkenyl4-nitropyrroles or 2-alkenyl-3-alkadienyl-4-nitropyrroles, as shown in Eqs. 10.15 and 10.16, respectively. Ph NO2 NO2

Ph

+

TosCH2NC

t-BuOK THF, –80 ºC, 1 h

(10.15)

N H 87% Ph

NC

Ph

NO2

+ Tos

NO2

t-BuOK THF

(10.16)

N H 67%

2,3-(Dialkenyl)-4-nitropyrroles are prepared by the reaction of nitrodienes with 1-isocyano1-tosyl-1-alkenes. 3-Nitroindoles are prepared in good yields via a thermal 6π-electrocyclization of 2,3-(dialkenyl)-4-nitropyrroles in nitrobenzene. Nitrobenzene causes aromatization of the initially formed dihydroindoles (Eq. 10.17).21 Ph

NO2

Ph

1) t-BuOK

+ Me

NC Ph

NO2

Tos

2) MeI

Me N Ph Me 91%

NO2 reflux

NO2 Ph Me Ph 85%

N Me

(10.17)

Barton and Zard found that the base-catalyzed reaction of nitroalkenes or β-nitroacetates with alkyl isocyanoacetate or TosMIC gives pyrrole-2-carboxylates or 2-sulfonylpyrroles, respectively (see Eqs. 10.18 and 10.19).22 This reaction is very convenient for the synthesis of

330

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

pyrroles with various substituents (R1 and R2) at the β-positions. The limitation of this reaction is that pyrroles unsubstituted in the 2-position, cannot be prepared. The yields are generally excellent (80–90%), but the yield is moderate, if R1 is H. Nonionic strong bases such as DBU and guanidine are generally used in the Barton-Zard reaction. 1

R

N

NO2 R2

AcO

R1 = H, R2 = Me R1 = Et, R2 = Et R1 = Me, R2 = (CH2)2CO2Me

+

CN

R

DBU or Me N NMe 2 2 R = H, t-Bu

CO2R

2

(10.18)

THF

R = Me, Et, t-Bu

1

R

R

CO2R

N H 50–90% OMe

MeO

NO2

Me

DBU THF-isopropanol

+ TosCH2NC

Me

(10.19) SO2Tol

N H

52%

The reaction pathways for the pyrrole formation are summarized in Scheme 10.3. The group that is eliminated at the final stage is a nitrite ion (Barton-Zard reaction) or a toluenesulfinate ion (Leusen reaction), depending on the reaction pattern. Benzyl isocyanoacetate is a useful reagent for the preparation of benzyl 5-unsubstituted pyrrole-2-carboxylates, which are widely used in the synthesis of porphyrins.23 Ono and coworkers have prepared pyrroles substituted with various substituents at the β-positions.23a Because the requisite β-nitro acetates (or nitroalkenes) are readily available by the Henry

O

R1

O R

Base (B)

R2

+

1

R +

O

H

R1

N

R1

R2 1,5 - H shift

R

H

O

O

B R

NO2

R

NO2

+ CN

Tos

NO2 R

Tos

N R

NO2

NO2 N H

N Scheme 10.3.

N

R2

R

H

N

R

Tos

O

NO2

R

BH

N

NO2

R2

NO2

R

R2

N C

NO2

CN

R2

R1

R1

R

N H

H

10.1

331

PYRROLES

reaction, various substituents are easily introduced into the 3- and 4-positions of pyrroles (Eqs. 10.20 and 10.21). MeNO2 +

DBU

O2N

O

KMnO4, MgSO4

CO2Me

0 ºC

CO2Me

H

CO2Me

CO2Me OAc 1) EtNO2, DBU

Me

2) Ac2O, H2SO4

Me CNCH2CO2CH2Ph

CO2Me

DBU, THF

NO2 1) 85%; 2) 94%

CO2CH2Ph

N H

(10.20)

69% NaNO2, AcOH

1) Me2S•BH3

O2N

CHO

CHO

O2N

2) Ac2O

OAc

AcO 1) CH3CHO, DBU

Me

NO2 Me

OAc

2) Ac2O, H2SO4

(10.21)

CNCH2CO2CH2Ph DBU, THF

CO2CH2Ph

N H

OAc

82%

The Barton-Zard pyrrole synthesis has now been extensively applied to synthesis of natural and unnatural products containing pyrrole units. Methyl 4-methylpyrrole-2-carboxylate is the trail-maker pheromone of the Texas leaf-cutting ant Atta texana.24 It is readily prepared by the Barton Zard method in 60% yield (Eq. 10.22).22 Me Me O2N

CNCH2CO2Et OAc

DBU

(10.22)

CO2Et

N H

60%

Pyrrolostatin is a novel lipid peroxidation inhibitor, which is isolated from Streptomyces chrestomyceticus. Its structure consists of a pyrrole-2-carboxylic acid with a geranyl group at the 4-position. It is readily prepared by applying the Barton-Zard pyrrole synthesis, as shown in Eq. 10.23.24

CNCH2CO2Et OAc NO2

CO2Et

DBU

NH 18%

LiOH

CO2H 73%

(10.23)

NH

Many other biologically active pyrroles have been prepared by this reaction. 2-Cyano-3,4disubstituted pyrroles are prepared by the reaction of isocyanoacetonitrile with β-nitro acetates.

332

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

This is used for synthesis of porphobilinogen (Eq. 10.24).25 Porphobilinogen is the key building block in the biosynthesis of pigments of life such as porphyrins, heme, and vitamin B12. Interesting application of porphobiliogen to synthesis of immunocomponents for the measurement of lead (Pb) by fluorescence polarization immunoassay has been reported.26 OTHP

NO2

CN

THPO

CO2Me +

DBU THF

NC

OAc

MeO O N H 81%

CO2Me 1) C5H5N•p-TolSO3H

MeO O

2) Jones´ oxidation 3) CH2N2

N H 55%

O MeO

1) Pd, PtO2, H2 2) EtOH, NH3

CN

CO2H HO2C

2N KOH

NH

O

CN

N H 55%

N H 51%

(10.24)

NH2

Total synthesis of (+)-deoxypyrrolorine, a potential biochemical marker for diagnosis of osteoporosis, is shown in Eq. 10.25.27 Osteoporosis is a crippling degenerative bone disease that affects the aged population, particularly postmenopausal women.

N(Boc)2

N(Boc)2

OAc CO2t-Bu

t-BuO2C NO2

CN

CO2CH2Ph

N(Boc)2

t-BuO2C

CO2t-Bu

DBU, THF

N(Boc)2 NH2

N H 57%

NH2

CO2CH2Ph

CO2H

HO2C N

(10.25)

NH2 CO2H

Total synthesis of phytochromobilin starting from 2-tosylpyrroles, which are prepared by β-nitro acetates with TosMIC (Scheme 10.4) has been reported.28 Phytochrome is a chromoprotein concerned in a variety of processes in higher plants such as growth, development, and morphogenesis.29 Barton-Zard pyrrole synthesis is also applied to synthesis of pyrroles with a variety of substituents. Pyrroles substituted with long alkyl substituents at the 3 and 4 positions,30 pyrroles with β-CF3 (Eq. 10.26),31 3,4-diarypyrroles (Eq. 10.27),32 and pyrrole-2-phophonates (Eq. 10.28)33 are prepared in a similar manner based on isonitrile cyclization. Me AcO

Me

F3C

NO2

CF3

CNCH2CO2Et DBU, THF

N H

CO2Et 60%

(10.26)

10.1

STol STol

Me 1) PhMe3N+Br–

THF O2N

STol

Me DBU, TosMIC

Me

H

2) TFA/H2O

Ts

N H

OAc

O

N Ts H 63%

96% STol Me Bu3P, THF Me

2) xylene, reflux CO2t-Bu

CO2t-Bu

N H

1) m-CPBA

NH HN O

OHC

CO2Allyl

Me

CO2Allyl

Me

77%

OO

Me

Me

Me

333

PYRROLES

CO2Allyl

NH

HN

N

HN

Me

several steps

Me NH HN

Me

Me

CO2t-Bu

O 62%

HO2C

phytochromobilin

CO2H

Scheme 10.4.

Ph AcO Ph

Ph

Ph

CNCH2CO2Et DBU, THF

NO2

(10.27)

CO2Et

N H

71% Me Me Ph

Ph

(10.28)

CNCH2P(O)(OEt)2 LDA

NO2

P(O)(OEt)2

N H

58%

Nitroalkenes derived from galactose or other carbohydrates are converted directly into pyrroles substituted with such carbohydrates at the β-position. They are important precursors for water-soluble porphyrins (Eq. 10.29).34 Such kinds of porphyrins are good candidates for photodynamic therapy of cancer and have been extensively studied. H N

NO2 O O

Me O

EtO2C CNCH2CO2Et

O O

Me O

DBU, THF O

O O 63%

O

(10.29)

334

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

Aida and coworkers have used the Barton-Zard reaction in the synthesis of axially dissymmetric pyrroles as shown in Eq. 10.30.35

preferential crystallization CNCH2CO2Et Et

Et

(10.30)

OMe

DBU

OMe

CO2Et N H (±) 77%

O2N

(R)

(S)

The combination of the Diels-Alder reaction of β-sulfonylnitroethylene and the Barton-Zard reaction provides a new synthesis of pyrroles fused with polycyclic skeletons (Eq. 10.31).36 Pyrroles fused with bicyclo[2.2.2]octodiene are important precursors for synthesis of isoindoles via the retro Diels-Alder reaction (Eq. 10.32).37

Diels-Alder reaction

PhO2S +

SO2Ph

DBU, THF

NO2

CO2Et

CNCH2CO2Et

NH

NO2

63%

94%

(10.31)

CHO CHO

(10.32)

NH 200 ºC

NH

CHO 100%

OHC

For example, 2,7-diformylisoindole is obtained in quantitative yield by heating the corresponding pyrrole fused with bicyclo ring. Certain aromatic nitro compounds are reactive enough to undergo the Barton-Zard reaction. For instance, polycyclic aromatic nitro compounds are generally reactive toward the anion of ethyl isocyanoacetate to give pyrroles fused with polycyclic aromatic rings, as shown in Eqs. 10.33 and 10.34.38

CNCH2CO2Et

(10.33)

DBU, THF CO2Et

N H

O2N

70% N N

N

N CNCH2CO2Et DBU, THF

O2N

N H 87%

CO2Et

(10.34)

10.1

PYRROLES

335

DBU is most widely employed as the base in the Barton-Zard reaction. Stronger nonionic bases such as P(MeNCH2CH2)3N and the phosphazene base (supplied by Fluka) are more effective to induce pyrrole formation in the reaction of nitroalkenes with isocyano esters than DBU.39 Sterically hindered nitroalkenes are converted into the corresponding pyrroles using these bases, as shown in Eq. 10.35,39b but DBU is not effective in this transformation. Ph Me

Ph Me Ph

NO2

CNCH2CO2Et

Ph

(10.35)

EtO2C

N N P N N

N H 35%

(phosphazene base)

This strategy using super nonionic strong base is also applied to less reactive aromatic nitro compounds. The reaction of 1-nitronaphthalene with ethyl isocyanoacetate proceeds very slowly in the presence of DBU, but this reaction is accelerated by the use of phosphazene base to give the corresponding pyrrole in reasonable yield (Eq. 10.36).40 NH NO2

CO2Et

CNCH2CO2Et

(10.36)

base, THF, RT DBU: 2% phosphazene base: 22%

Heterocyclic aromatic nitro compounds are more reactive toward nucleophiles than carbocyclic aromatic nitro compounds. Various heterocyclic aromatic nitro compounds are thus converted into the corresponding pyrroles by the Barton-Zard reaction (Eq. 10.37).38b,41

NO2

DBU, THF RT, 6 h

S

NH

CNCH2CO2Et S

CO2Et

(10.37)

60%

The 3-nitroindoles show interesting reactivity toward the anion of ethyl isocyanoacetate; N-sulfonyl derivatives give the pyrrolo[2,3-b]indole ring system (Eq. 10.38).42 On the other hand, N-alkoxycarbonyl derivatives give the normal product, the pyrrolo[3,4-b]indole ring system (Eq. 10.39).43

NO2 N SO2Ph

CO2Et CNCH2CO2Et DBU, THF RT, 20 h

N

NH

SO2Ph 85%

(10.38)

336

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

NH

NO2

CNCH2CO2Et

N

DBU, THF RT, 18 h

N

(10.39)

CO2Et

CO2Et

CO2Et

94%

Monocyclic nitro aromatics such as m-dinitrobenzene and its derivatives also react with ethyl isocyanoacetate to give the corresponding isoindoles (Eq. 10.40).44 CN

CN O2N

CO2Et

CNCH2CO2Et DBU, MeCN

(10.40)

NH O2N

NO2

64%

Polymer-supported reagents and other solid sequestering agents may be used to generate an array of 1,2,3,4-tetrasubstituted pyrrole derivatives using the Barton-Zard reaction as a key pyrrole formation reaction. Pure pyrroles are obtained without any chromatographic purification steps.45 Nitroalkenes can be replaced by α,β-unsaturated sulfones in the Barton-Zard pyrrole synthesis. Each method has its own merit. Nitroalkenes are more reactive than α,β-unsaturated sulfones; therefore, nitroalkenes should be used in less reactive cases. On the other hand, cyclic α,β-unsaturated sulfones are more easily prepared than cyclic nitroalkenes; pyrrole synthesis using sulfones is the method of choice in such cases, as shown in Eq. 10.41.46

SO2Ph O

CNCH2CO2Et

O

NH

t-BuOK, THF, RT

(10.41)

CO2Et 41%

Pyrroles prepared by the Barton-Zard reaction are very important as precursors of porphyrins and also of conducting polymers. The ester group at the 2-position is readily removed on heating with KOH in ethylene glycol at 170 °C to give α-free pyrroles, which are useful for preparing porphyrins (Eq. 10.42)47 or polypyrroles (Eq. 10.43).38a,48

Ph 1) PhCHO, BF3•OEt2 X N H X = CO2Et X=H

2) DDQ KOH, HO(CH2)2OH 170 ºC, 72%

N HN Ph

Ph NH N Ph 20%

(10.42)

10.1

337

PYRROLES

anodic oxidation

(10.43)

N H

n

N H

In 1988, Ono and Maruyama reported a very simple synthesis of octaethylporphyrin (OEP) from 3,4-diethylpyrrole-2-carboxylate, as shown in Eq. 10.44.49 Reduction of this pyrrole with LiAlH4 gives 2-hydroxyethylpyrrole, which is converted into OEP on treatment with acid and an oxidizing agent. This route is very convenient for synthesis of porphyrins. This method is now used extensively for synthesis of β-substituted porphyrins.50 For example, a highly conjugated porphyrin, shown in Eq. 10.45, has been prepared by this route.51 The requisite pyrroles are prepared from nitro compounds or sulfones; thus, various substituents are readily introduced into porphyrins. Et

Et

Et Et

Et

Et

NH

N H

N

1) p-TsOH

LiAlH4 CO2Et

Et

Et OH

THF, 0 ºC

(10.44)

2) DDQ

N H

N

HN

Et

Et Et

Et 50% NH

Ph O2

Ph N H +

N

NH

N

240 ºC

H N

CO2Et

N H

CO2Et

Ph

S

N

Ph

Ph N

Ph

HN

Ph Ph

Ph

Ph

Ph

Ph

Ph

NH N

NHN

NH N

NHN

N HN Ph

1) LiAlH4 +

2) H 3) p-chloranil

Ph Ph

NHN N HN

Ph

Ph

NHN N HN Ph

Ph

Ph

N HN Ph

Ph

NHN N HN

N HN Ph

DDQ

Ph

Ph 65~70%

Ph

Ph Ph

Ph

NHN N HN

Ph

Ph

NHN N HN Ph

Ph

Ph

N HN

Ph

Ph Ph NHN N HN

Ph

Ph ~ – 100%

(10.45)

Reduction of nitrostyrene with aqueous TiCl3 gives a 3,4-diarypyrrole directly in moderate yield (Eq. 10.46).52 The reaction proceeds via dimerization of anion radicals of nitrostyrene and reduction of the nitro function in the dimer to imines. Reduction of dinitrile with diisobutylaluminum hydride (DIBAL) gives α-free pyrroles (Eq. 10.47);53 both reactions may proceed in a similar mechanism. These pyrroles are useful intermediates for functionalized porphyrins.

338

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

Ph

Ph

TiCl3

Ph

NO2

O O

(10.46)

N H

– H2O

23%

H N

CN NC DIBAL

(10.47)

33%

1,3-Dipolar cycloaddition reaction of azomethine ylides to alkynes or alkenes followed by oxidation is one of the standard methods for the preparation of pyrroles.54 Recently, this strategy has been used for the preparation of pyrroles with CF3 or Me3Si groups at the β-positions.55 Addition of azomethine ylides to nitroalkenes followed by elimination of HNO2 with base gives pyrroles in 96% yield (Eq. 10.48).56 CH=NCH2CO2Et

O2N

NO2

Ph

AgOAc, Et3N

+

toluene

Ph

N H

CO2Et

Ph MeONa MeOH

Ph

N H

CO2Et

(10.48)

96%

10.2

SYNTHESIS OF INDOLES

The indole unit occurs in nature in a wide variety of structures, and there are over thousands of known indole alkaloids. Many of these naturally occurring compounds have important physiological activity.57 Although the continuing enormous interest in indoles has generated a large amount of information, this section is limited to recent development of indole synthesis using nitro compounds. 3-Substituted indoles are usually most easily prepared by substitution reactions on an existing indole nucleus, but, for indoles with other substitution patterns, it is necessary to synthesize the indole ring system. There are two general approaches to their synthesis: one based on benzenoid precursor with a nitrogen substituent and a free ortho position [Fisher synthesis (see Ref. 1), Bishler synthesis,58 and Gassman synthesis59] and the other on a precursor with adjacent carbon and nitrogen substituents (Reissert synthesis,60 nitrene cyclization,61 and isonitrile cyclization62) (see Scheme 10.5). Because aromatic nitro compounds are good precursors for the introduction of nitrogen substituents such as NH2, NC, and nitrene, many indoles have been prepared starting from nitroarenes. The Batcho indole synthesis involves the conversion of an o-nitrotoluene to a β-dialkylamino-o-nitrostyrene with dimethylformamide acetal, followed by reductive cyclization to indoles. This provides a useful strategy for synthesis of substituted indoles (Eq. 10.49).63

10.2

H+ (Fisher)

CH2R1 N H

R2

N

339

SYNTHESIS OF INDOLES

R1 R2

R1

O PhNH2, H+ (Bishler)

R2

N H

SMe

MeSCH2CO2R Et3N NHCl

N H

LDA (Saegusa)

NC

R

R

(Gassman)

CH2R

N H

H2/Ni

R

O NO2

R

N H R

N3

N H

∆ (Sundberg)

R N H

Scheme 10.5

OCH2Ph

OCH2Ph

OCH2Ph Me

N

Me2NCH(OMe)2

NO2

Ra (Ni) N2H4

NO2

N H

N H

95%

95%

(10.49)

This method has been applied to a large-scale preparation of 6-bromoindole, which reacts with various arylboronic acids via the Suzuki reaction to afford 6-arylindoles (Eq. 10.50).64 6-Bromo-5-methoxyindole for use in the synthesis of marine bromoindole65 and 5-amino-7ethoxycarbonylindole for use in synthesis of 1H-pyrrolo[3,2-g]quinazoline ring system (Eq. 10.51)66 have been prepared from the appropriate o-nitrotoluene.

Me Br

NO2

1) (MeO)2CHNMe2 pyrrolidine, DMF 2) H2, Raney Ni

1) Pd(PPh3)4 N H

Br

2) F

74% Me O2N

CO2Et NO2

B(OH)2

N H F

90%

1) (MeO)2CHNMe2 2) H2, Pd/C

N H

NH

NO2 96%

(10.50) O

CO2Et

N H

(10.51)

Batcho indole synthesis is a useful tool for synthesis of natural products. As outlined in Scheme 10.6, the Batcho indole synthesis is used for total synthesis of the slime mold alkaloid arcyriacyanin.67 Such indolocarbazole alkaloids represent a growing number of natural products isolated from soil organism, slime molds, and marine sources. They are important as antitumor compounds and protein kinase C and topoisomerase inhibitors. Recently, synthesis of the 4-arylindole portion of the antitumor agent diazonamide has been achieved starting from 3-bromo-2-methylnitrobenzene via Suzuki coupling and the Batcho reaction.67b

340

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

Me 1) (MeO)2CHNMe2OTHP

NH2

NO2

2) O

O

OTHP CH3

CH3 1) KNO2, H2SO4

NO2 1) 80% 2) 82%

N H

2) H2, pd/C

O

N

O

O

OTHP

Me

2) O

N

O

N N H Boc 57%

Br

60%

N Boc

Me PhN(SO2 CF3)2

N

1) EtMg Br

R = THP R=H

Me N

O

O

OTf Pd(OAc)2 NH

N

N H

N H

Boc 92%

81%

Scheme 10.6.

An important extension of this indole synthesis is the functionalization of the intermediate of indole. For example, acylation of the intermediate is possible (Scheme 10.7).68 The 2-aminophenethyl alcohols resulting from condensation of ortho-nitrotoluenes are good precursors for preparation of indoles. Watanabe and coworkers have developed ruthenium-catalyzed dehydrogenative N-heterocyclization for synthesis of indoles and other heterocycles from 2-aminophenethyl alcohols or 2-nitrophenylethyl alcohols (Eq. 10.52). 69a The oxidative cyclization of 2-aminophenethyl alcohols are also catalyzed by Pd-based catalysts.69 OH

Pd/C RuCl2(PPh3)3

NO2

(10.52)

N H 96%

A neat synthesis of 4-nitroindole depends on an acylation-deacylation sequence from 2-methyl-3-nitroaniline, as shown in Eq. 10.53.70 On the other hand, treatment of N-protected indoles with acetyl nitrate generated in situ at low temperature gives the corresponding

OEt Me Br

NO2

1) (MeO)2CHNMe2, pyrrolidine, DMF 2) EtOC6H4COCl, Et3N, PhH, reflux

O

dioxane-H2O reflux

NMe2 Br

NO2

OEt Na2S2O4 Br

O NO2 50% (overall)

H2O, EtOH, THF reflux

Br

N H OEt 63%

Scheme 10.7.

10.2

341

SYNTHESIS OF INDOLES

3-nitroindoles in good yields.71 The regioselective synthesis of nitroindoles is important for functionalization of indoles.72 NO2

NO2

NO2

Me

HC(OEt)3

Me

TsOH

(CO2Et)2, KOEt

N

NH2

DMF, DMSO

OEt

N H

88%

71%

(10.53)

As discussed in Chapter 9, various nucleophiles can be introduced at the ortho position of nitroarenes via the VNS process. This provides a useful strategy for the synthesis of indoles. One of the most attractive and general methods of indoles and indolinones would be the reductive cyclization of α-nitroaryl carbonyl compounds (Eq. 10.54). The VNS and related reactions afford α-nitroaryl carbonyl compounds by a simple procedure. For example, alkylation of 4-fluoronitrobenzene with a lactone silyl enol ether followed by reductive cyclization leads to tryptophols (Eq. 10.55).73 R´

R´

R´

R = alkyl X

R

H2, Pd/C

N H

R X

OSiMe3 +

O

–

X

O N (10.54) H OH

F 1) DIBAL

1) F

O

2) DDQ

O

H2, Pd/C

O NO2 NO2

NO2

R = O-alkyl

F

F

2) H2, Pd/C

N H

79%

(10.55)

98%

The cyanomethylation of nitroarenes followed by alkylation and reductive cyclization yields indoles (see Chapter 9, which discusses the VNS reactions) (Eq. 10.56).74

Ph3P-DEAD

MeO

MeO

CH2Ph

PhCH2OH NO2

CH2Ph

CN

CN

DEAD O O = EtOC–N=N–C–OEt

H2, Pd/C

MeO N H

NO2 70%

56%

(10.56)

Improvement was reported in the synthesis of 7-alkoxyindoles by reaction of alkoxynitrobenzenes with vinylmagnesium bromide (Eq. 10.57).75 This reaction proceeds via the addition of the Grignard reagent ortho to the nitro group and subsequent [3,3]sigmatropic rearrangement (Bartori indole synthesis).76 This indole synthesis is applied to a short synthesis of the pyrrolophenanthridone alkaloid hippadine, as shown in Scheme 10.8.77

NO2 OCHPh2

+

THF MgBr

–78 ºC

N H Ph2CHO 57%

(10.57)

342

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

NO2

MgBr THF, –70 ºC, 3 h

Br

KOH, DMSO CH2Br O

N H Br 53%

2 BuLi, THF, –78 ºC 2 CuI, P(OEt)3, 3 h to RT, 21 h

O

Br RT, 2 h

Br

72%

O O

X = H2 (49%) X = O (79%)

O N

O

N Br

X Scheme 10.8.

The intramolecular cyclization of nitrenes obtained either from deoxygenation of o-nitrostyrene by trialkyl phosphites78 or from thermal or photochemical decomposition of o-azidostyrenes79 provides a useful method for the construction of indole nucleus (Cadogan-Sundberg indole synthesis). Holzapfel has used this method to synthesize several carbazoles and norharman from the appropriate 2-nitrobiphenyls and also several 2-methoxycarbonylindoles from methyl o-nitrocinnamates.80 The novel generation of nitrenes from o-nitrostilbenes using CO and Se leads to an efficient synthesis of 2-arylindoles (Eq. 10.58).81 A new synthetic approach to the natural product arcyriaflavin-A, based on nitrene insertion, has been reported.81b R +

CO

Se, Et3N

(10.58)

N H

DMF, 100 ºC

NO2 R = Me, OMe, CF3

R

65–78%

The metal carbonyls Fe(CO)5, Ru3(CO)12, and Rh6(Co)16 are catalysts for the deoxygenation of o-nitrostyrenes under carbon monoxide pressure to give indole derivatives (Eq. 10.59).82 CO2Me +

2CO

NO2

CO2Me

Fe(CO)3 N H 75%

220 ºC

(10.59)

The Sundberg indole synthesis using aromatic azides as precursors of nitrenes has been used in synthesis of various indoles. Some kinds of aryl azides are readily prepared by SNAr reaction of aromatic nitro compounds with an azide ion. For example, 2,4,6-trinitrotoluene (TNT) can be converted into 2-aryl-4,6-dinitroindole, as shown in Eq. 10.60.83 Me O2N

NO2

NO2

OHC

CHO

(piperidine) -H2O

NO2

O2N

O2N

NO2

NO2

NO2 67%

10.2

O2N

N3

343

SYNTHESIS OF INDOLES

N3

NO2

NaN3, DMF - NaNO2

NO2

NO2 73%

O2N

NO2

HOCH2CH2OH 160 ºC

NO2

N H

(10.60)

N H

NO2

71%

The previously unknown 2-nitroindoles have been conveniently prepared from o-nitrobenzaldehyde via the Sundberg indole synthesis (Eq. 10.61).84 CHO

CHO

NaN 3, DMF 60 ºC

NO2

N3

NO2

1) MeNO2, KOH, EtOH 2) Ac2O, pyridine

N3 81%

NO2

Xylene

(10.61)

N H 54%

140 ºC

Soderberg and coworkers have developed a palladium-phosphine-catalyzed reductive N-heteroannulation of 2-nitrostyrenes forming indoles in good yields.85 For example, reaction of 6-bromo-2-nitrostyrene with carbon monoxide in the presence of a catalytic amount of palladium diacetate (6 mol%) and triphenylphosphine (24 mol%) in acetonitrile at 70 °C, gives 4-bromoindole in 86% yield (Eq. 10.62). Several functional groups, such as esters, ethers, bromides, triflates, and additional nitro groups, have been shown to be compatible with the reaction conditions. Br

Br Pd(OAc)2

(10.62)

Ph3P, CO NO2

N H 86%

With the use of this methodology, 2,4-dimethylindole, 4-(hydroxymethyl)-2-methylindole, and 4-(methoxymethyl)-2-methylindole are readily obtained, as shown in Eq. 10.63.86 These indoles have been recently isolated from European Basidmycetes.87 Watanabe and coworkers have used a catalytic amount of PdCl2(PPh3)2-SnCl2 under carbon monoxide for reductive N-heterocyclization of o-nitrostyrenes.88 Me

Me Pd(OAc)2 Ph3P, CO NO2

Me N H 66%

(10.63)

344

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

Fused indoles, as shown in Eq. 10.64, are also prepared by this method.85a MeO2C CO2Me

MeO2C CO2Me Pd(OAc)2

(10.64)

dppp, DMF CO (60 psi) 120 ºC

NO2

N H 61%

Similar to the Fisher indole synthesis, reductive cyclization of nitro aromatics offers a powerful means of forming indoles. Reductive cyclization of ortho, 2′-dinitrostyrenes has occurred in many ways, by TiCl3, NaBH4-Pd/C, H2-Pd/C, and other reductive methods.89 Corey and coworkers have used the Borchardt modification (Fe-AcOH, silica gel, toluene at reflux for the reductive cyclization of o-β-dinitrostyrenes) to prepare 6,7-dimethoxyindole (Eq. 10.65) in a total synthesis of aspidophytine (see Schemes 3.3 and 3.4 in Section 3.2.1).89d

NO2 Fe, AcOH MeO

NO2 OMe

N H

MeO

silica gel toluene, ∆

(10.65)

OMe 71%

Tin-mediated-radical cyclization of isonitriles provides a useful strategy for the preparation of indoles (Fukuyama reaction).90 This radical cyclization is used for synthesis of 6-hydroxyindole-3-acetic acid, which is the aromatic subunit of Nephilatoxin. The requisite isonitriles are prepared from nitroarenes via amines (Eq. 10.66).91

CO2Me PhCH2O

CO2Me Zn. AcOH PhCH2O

NO2

NH2 96%

CO2Me POCl3

AcOCHO pyridine

PhCH2O

NHCHO 96%

Et3N, CH2Cl2 CH2CO2Me

CO2Me Bu3SnH PhCH2O

NC 92%

AIBN

PhCH2O 83%

N H

(10.66)

The classic Reissert indole synthesis, involving the reductive cyclization of o-nitrophenylpyruvic acid, has been used for synthesis of 2-ethoxycarbonyl-4-alkoxymethylindoles.92 The modified Reissert reaction, involving the reductive cyclization of an o-nitrophenyl acetoaldehyde, has been adapted to solid-phase synthesis.93 Kraus has reported the synthesis of a tricyclic indole related to the pyrroloiminoquinone marine natural products (Scheme 10.9), in which an intramolecular SNAr and the reductive cyclization of a nitro aldehyde are involved as key steps.94 Related target compounds have been prepared by Joule and coworkers via a similar strategy.95

10.2

OMe OMe 1) O O 2) HNO3-H2SO4 3) CH2N2

O

NH2

OMe

NO2 OMe

O2N

345

SYNTHESIS OF INDOLES

1) t-BuOK, CAN

O

CHO

2) BH3 3) DIBAL

HN O

OMe O2N

NO2

O2N

HN

H N

H2, Pd/C HN 42% Scheme 10.9.

Rawal and Kozmin have utilized a Reissert type reaction in the total synthesis of tabersonine. The requisite nitro ketone is prepared by SNAr reaction of o-nitrophenylphenyliodonium fluoride with ketone silyl enol ether (Scheme 10.10).96 The reductive cyclization of o-nitrophenylacetic acids or esters gives oxyindoles, which has been applied to preparation of 6-hydroxy-7-methoxyoxyindole in a synthesis of (+)-paraherquamide B (Scheme 10.11).42 The pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine anticancer agent is prepared utilizing, as a key sequence, Michael condensation of 2,6-diamino-4(3H)-pyrimidinone with nitroalkenes, followed by the Nef reaction that leads to the annulated pyrrole ring (Eq. 10.67).98 O

O NO2

+

H2N

CO2Et

EtOAc-H2O

HN

NO2 CO2Et

HN

50 ºC N

H2N

NH2

N

NH2 91%

CO2H

O 1) NaOH

HN

2) H2SO4

H2N

(10.67) N

N H 57%

Annulation of pyridine to indole is accomplished by a tandem aza-Wittig/electrocyclization strategy as shown in Eq. 10.68.99

MeO2C MeO2C

N

I

–

NO2 F DMSO, THF TBSO

MeO2C

N TiCl3, NH4OAc NO2 O 94% Scheme 10.10.

aq THF N H 89%

N

346

R2

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

R1

H

Me MeO NH

O Me X N R3

(–)-paraherquamide A, R1 = OH, R2 = Me, R3 = H2, X = N (–)-paraherquamide B, R1 = H, R2 = H, R3 = H2, X = N O (–)-paraherquamide C, R1 = R2 = CH2, R3 = H2, X = N (–)-paraherquamide D, R1 = O, R2 = CH2, R3 = H2, X = N 1 2 3 O Me (–)-paraherquamide E, R = H, R = Me, R = H2, X = N Me Scheme 10.11.

NO2

NO2 N

N

R-NCO toluene reflux

PPh3

Ph

N

N

Ph 79–97%

N H

R

(10.68)

A novel indole ring formation involving DBU nucleophilic addition to 1,3,5-trinitrobenzene has appeared as shown in Eq. 10.69.100 NO2

NO2 DBU

N O2N

O2N

NO2

(10.69)

N 11%

10.3 SYNTHESIS OF OTHER NITROGEN HETEROCYCLES 10.3.1 Three-Membered Ring The direct aziridination of nitroalkanes has been reported for the first time. Treatment of nitroalkene with an excess of CaO and NsONHCO2Et (Ns = 4-nitrobenzenesulfonyl) gives the α-nitroaziridine in good yields (Eq. 10.70).101 The reaction proceeds via aza-Michael reaction followed by a ring closure. R1

R2

2

R R1

+ NO2

NsONHCO2Et

CaO CH2Cl2

NO2 N CO2Et

(10.70)

62–84%

10.3.2 Five- and Six-Membered Saturated Rings Pyrrolidines are structural subunits found in many natural and unnatural products, which have important biological activity.102 Depending on the substitution pattern and functionalization, pyrrolidines have been shown to be effective antibacterials,103 neuroexcitatory agents,104 potent venom,105 and glyosidase inhibitors.106 Nitro compounds have been extensively used for synthesis of pyrrolidines as discussed in Chapter 4 on the Michael addition and Chapter 8 on cycloaddition. Tandem [2 + 4]/[2 + 3]

10.3

347

SYNTHESIS OF OTHER NITROGEN HETEROCYCLES

cycloaddition using nitroalkenes provides an excellent route to stereoselective synthesis of pyrrolidines. This section describes the routes to the synthesis of pyrrolidines based on the Michael addition. The Michael addition of nitro compounds to α,β-unsaturated carbonyl compounds or esters followed by reduction gives pyrrolidines or related compounds. cis-2,3Disubstituted pyrrolidines are available from nitro ketones, which are prepared by the Michael addition of nitromethane to enones. Reduction of the nitro ketones with Raney Ni gives the pyrrolines, which, on NaBH3CN reduction, give quantitative yields of cis-2,3-disubstituted pyrrolidines (Eq. 10.71).107 R1

NO2

R2

R2

R2

H2, Raney Ni

NaBH3CN

R1

O

R1

N

N H cis

(10.71)

Ruthenium complex catalyzes reductive N-heterocyclization of γ-nitroketones to give pyrroline derivatives (Eq. 10.72).108 Me Me Ph

Ru(CO)12, CO

Me

Ph

NO2

N

O

(10.72)

Me

50% N

N

cis-2,5-Disubstituted pyrrolidines are prepared by the Michael addition of nitro compounds to enones followed by reduction with H2-Pd/C. This strategy has been widely used for synthesis of various alkaloids. Stevens and Lee have reported stereoselective total synthesis of the tail pheromone of the Pharaoh ant (Scheme 10.12)109 and gephyrotoxin 223, neurotoxic alkaloids

O

O

Cl

Mg, THF O

H

O

MnO2

O

OH

O

O

O H CH3(CH2)4NO2

O

O

O O2N

TMG

H2, Pd/C

O

(CH2)3CH3

64% H

H2N CO2– CO2H

H

H3O+ HO–

O

pH 3.8–5.4 N Me

N

H (CH2)3CH3

Me H

NaCNBH3

N

H (CH2)3CH3

Me

68%

Scheme 10.12.

H (CH2)3CH3

H (CH2)3CH3

348

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

SOPh

SOPh

O

O

+ O

Br

O

O

O 70%

O

O

CH3(CH2)4NO2 O

(CH2)3CH3 H

H

O

H2, Raney Ni

O O2N

O

TMG

O

H3O+ O CO2– H2N CO2H 64%

KCN

N

H (CH2)3CH3

H

H (CH2)3CH3

H H

N

H (CH2)3CH3

R

R = CN R = CHO

96% Scheme 10.13.

(Scheme 10.13).110 New alkaloids from ants, (3R, 5S, 9R)-3-butyl-5-(1-oxopropyl)indolizidine and (3R, 5R, 9R)-3-butyl-5-(1-oxopropyl)indolizidine, are identified and synthesized as outlined in Scheme 10.14.111 Battersby and coworkers have developed selective methods for total synthesis of chlorins on a model system, as shown in Scheme 10.15, in which the Michael addition of 5-(2-nitroethyl) pyrrole to enone and reductive cyclization are used as key steps.112

O EtONa

+

EtO

EtOH

O

NO2

O

O H2, Pd/C

EtO O2N

EtOH

90%

(CH2)3CH3

O

80%

H

EtO

H N R

H (CH2)3CH3

H R = OEt R = OH R = Et

LDA I2

HN

N

+

(CH2)3CH3 O 16% Scheme 10.14.

R

O 49%

(CH2)3CH3

10.3

O + NO2

O NO2

BuN4F THF

N 1) Zn, AcOH NH

2) TiCl3

NH

NH

CO2t-Bu

CO2t-Bu CO2t-Bu

88%

88%

Br N TFA

349

SYNTHESIS OF OTHER NITROGEN HETEROCYCLES

Br HN Br–

+ NH

NH HN

HBr

HN

Br

1) Cu(OAc)2 MeCN 2) TFA, H2S

N

HN

PMe

NH N

PMe

N PMe = CH2CH2CO2Me

HN PMe 71%

Scheme 10.15.

The Michael addition of lithium enolates to nitroalkenes followed by reaction with acetic anhydride gives acetic nitronic anhydrides, which are good precursors for 1,4-diketones, pyrroles, and pyrrolidines (Eq. 10.73).113 R1

R

R1 + R2

OLi

Zn (Cu)

R3

3

R4

1) THF, –78 ºC 2) Ac2O

NO2

R1 R2

R2

R4 O

N OAc O-

H2

R3

R4 N H 57–68% R1

R3

5%-Rh·Al2O3 R2

R4 N H 34–53%

(10.73)

Nitroalkenes are shown to be effective Michael acceptor B units in three sequential reactions (A + B + C coupling) in one reaction vessel. The sequence is initiated by enolate nucleophiles (A) and is terminated by aldehydes or acrylate electrophiles (C). The utility of this protocol is for rapid assembly of complex structures from simple and readily available components. A short total synthesis of a pyrrolizidine alkaloid is presented in Scheme 10.16.114

350

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

O

1) LDA 2) NO2

O MeO

3) SPh

SPh

MeO

SPh NO2 CO2Me 78%

SPh CO2Me

CO2Me

NH

NiCl2

O

NaBH4

+

MeO2C

HN O

∆

LiAlH4

N

N O

O

81%

76% Scheme 10.16.

The pyrrolizidines and indolizidines are a group of alkaloids that are characterized by the presence of the basic azabicyclo[3.3.0]octane and azabicyclo[4.3.0]nonane frameworks, respectively. These alkaloids exhibit remarkably diverse types of biological activity and have been reported to act as antitumor, hypotensive, anti-inflammatory, carcinogenic, or hepatoxic agents. Various pyrrolizidines and indolizidines have been prepared by 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition.115 Synthesis of these is described in the section 8.2 discussing cycloaddition. An interesting strategy for the synthesis of pyrrolizidines and indolizidines has been developed by Brandi and co-workers. Cycloaddition between nitrones or nitrile oxides with methylenecyclopropanes generates strained tricyclic spiro compounds, which are prone toward further transformations, such as rearrangement, ring opening, and new ring closure (Scheme 10.17).116 The Michael reaction of nitromethane with methyl vinyl ketone and 1-decene-3-one followed by reductive cyclization gives two isomeric pyrrolizidines, depending on reduction conditions (Eq. 10.74).117 H

H O H2, Pd/C

N Me

O

Me

C7H15

C7H15 65%

1) NH4OAc/KOH NaBH3CN 2) NaBH4

N

NO2

C7H15 Me (ds = 76%)

(10.74)

t-BuO

H +

Ot-Bu

benzene RT

N

O

xylene O

O

reflux

N

N

60%

NaBH4

HO

H

H

53%

Ot-Bu TFA

HO

H

N

N

82%

70% Scheme 10.17.

OH

Ot-Bu

10.3

O

CO2Et

O

O

PPh3

+

H

CO2Et CO2Et

O

H

CO2Et

NO2

351

SYNTHESIS OF OTHER NITROGEN HETEROCYCLES

NO2 63%

O

H2, Pd/C

H H CO2Et

O

H

EtOH

2) NaH, BnBr

HN

1) LiAlH4

H

BnN 69% H

CH2OBn

O

CH2OH

H2, Pd/C

H

2) HCl

H H CH2OBn

O

H

O

85% O

O

1) NaBH4

N HCl 66%

BnN 62% Scheme 10.18.

Another Michael addition route for synthesis of the pyrrolizidine alkaloide trachelanthamidin is shown in Scheme 10.18.118 A novel spiropentanopyrrolizidine oxime has been isolated from skin extracts of the Panamanian poison frog. This alkaloid can be synthesized via the Michael addition of cyclopentanecarboxaldehyde to nitroethene (Scheme 10.19).119 Baker’s yeast reduction of γ-nitroketones offers the corresponding chiral nitro alcohols, which are useful building blocks for the synthesis of chiral natural compounds.120 For example, optically active 2-substituted pyrrolidine can be prepared using the chiral nitro alcohol (Eq. 10.75).121 The enantioselective reduction of γ-nitroketones and γ-nitrodiketones by the chiral reducing agent (+)- or (–)-diisopinocamphenylchloroborane (DIP-ClTM) gives nitro alcohols having from 33 to 86% ee and nitrodiols with complete diastereoselectivity and > 95% ee.122

O CHO

1) pyrrolidine 2) AcO

O 1) (CH2OH)2

H

NO2

O

2) H2, PtO2

NO2

NH2

23%

81%

N H

+

H

1) I(CH2)3NO2 2) pyridine 76% NH2OH⋅HCl on MeONH2⋅HCI MeOH

H

NO2 TiCl3

H

N

N

58%

79%

NOR R = H or Me

N 63–87% Scheme 10.19.

O

352

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

OH

O

Baker's yeast

NO2

Ph

NO2

Ph

59% (78% ee) OH

H2, Raney Ni

1) TrCl 2) TsCl 3) TFA

NH2

Ph

Ph

(10.75)

N H (78% ee)

A short and efficient route to enantiopure 3,5-diarylpyrrolizidines using chiral nitrodiols has been reported (Scheme 10.20).123 The Michael addition of the carbanions derived from esters to nitroalkenes followed by reductive cyclization has been used extensively for the preparation of pyrrolidin-2-ones (Eq. 10.76).124 This strategy is used for synthesis of the carbazole alkaloid staurosporine aglycon (K-252c).124c Ar1

NO2 +

Ar2

LDA

O

O

CO2Me Ar1

MeO O Ar2

Ar1

H N

NO2 1) H2, Raney Ni 2) ∆

N O N Me OMe NHMe staurosporine

Ar2

N H

O

H N

N H

N H

(10.76)

staurosporinone (K252c)

The synthesis of kainic acid, acromelic acid, and related compounds such as domoic acid has been the subject of considerable investigation.125 A simple and direct route to neurophysiologically active kainic acid analogs has been reported, as shown in Scheme 10.21.126 Hydroxylated six-membered ring nitrogen containing heterocycles is a common feature of many natural products and biologically active compounds.127 Willis and coworkers have

O

OH

O

OH

TM

DIP-Cl

NO2

NO2

74% (95% ee) OH

OH

PhCHO NaBH3CN MeOH, AcOH 0–25 ºC, 24 h

H2, Raney Ni MeOH, 24 h, 25 ºC

NH2 80–82%

OH

H

OH

Cl–

MsCl, Et3N NHCH2Ph 84–92%

4 Å molecular sieves, CH2Cl2 0–25 ºC, 2 h H

K2CO3 MeOH-H2O 25 ºC, 2 h

N Ar

Ar 72–78% Scheme 10.20.

N

Ar

CH2Ph Ar 68–78%

10.3

353

SYNTHESIS OF OTHER NITROGEN HETEROCYCLES

OMe

OMe

H

t-BuOK

H

OMe CO2Me

CO2Me

NO2 O

O2N

CO2Me

O

N

OH

OH OMe

CO2Me N O– 73%

CO2Me

CO2Me 45%

OMe HCl MeOH

CO2Me

10% Pd/C HCO2NH4

CO2Me

NaBH3CN HCl-MeOH

CO2Me

N

CO2Me + N OH 4%

OH 71% OMe

1) H2, Pd black HCl, MeOH 2) ClCO2Bn Et3N

OMe CO2Me

OMe CO2Me

CO2Me +

CO2Me

N

1) H2, Pd black HCl, MeOH 2) ClCO2Bn Et3N

CO2Me

N

CO2Bn

CO2Me

CO2Bn 89% LDA, –78 ºC

Scheme 10.21.

developed an efficient approach for the preparation of them. Enzyme-catalyzed reduction of 5-nitro-2-oxopentanoic acid to the corresponding (S)- and (R)-2-hydroxy acids. Subsequent esterification, catalytic hydrogenation of the nitro group using Pt2O catalyst, and spontaneous intramolecular cyclization give enantio-pure 3-hydroxy-piperidin-2-one, as shown in Scheme 10.22.128 Asymmetric Michael addition of nitromethane to a crotonyl camphorsultam gives access to the enantio-pure 2-oxoesters, which may be converted into the 3-hydroxy-5-methylpiperidin2-one (Eq. 10.77).129

O

O N

CH3NO2

NO2

N

O +

DBU SO2

SO2

NO2

N SO2

(3:1) OH N CBz

O

OH +

N

O

(10.77)

CBz

The reaction of γ-nitrobutenoate with aldehydes and ketones in the presence of ammonium acetate gives 3-nitropiperidines.130 This reaction is used for synthesis of CP-99,994, a highly potent substance P antagonist (Scheme 10.23).131 A novel synthetic approach toward the AB-ring system of 9-azasteroids using the Diels-Alder reaction of nitroalkene and subsequent reductive cyclization has been shown (Scheme 10.24).132

354

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

OH Lipase BS-LDH

O O2N

O2N

OH (S)

CO2Me

N H

(S)

CO2Me

OH Lipase SE-LDH

O2N

O OH

(R) N O H 93% (99% ee, overall yield)

CO2Me (R)

Scheme 10.22.

NO2 NO2

CH3CO2–NH4+

+ PhCHO

O

CO2Me

2) NaBH3CN CHO

N Ph H 98%

MeO H N

1) Raney Ni, H2 O

N H

OMe

NOH 1) t-BuOK, O3 O

2) NH2OH, HCl

N Ph H 58%

MeO H N

Me2S·BH3 N H

Ph 46%

Ph CP-99,994 96%

Scheme 10.23.

OMe O2N CO2Et OMe

1) Danishefsky's diene, benzene, reflux 2) (CH2OH)2, p-TsOH benzene

H N

1) C11H23COCl Et3N, DMAP

O

2) Red-Al O

NO2

O

H 62%

CO2Et

OMe C12H25 N O

1) 6N HCl

H 66%

OMe C12H25 N

OMe C12H25 N Red-Al

O

2) TiCl3 3) Red-Al

2) H2/Pd(C) O

H 62%

1) Al/Hg, THF/H2O

O

HO

H 74% Scheme 10.24.

H 95%

10.3

SYNTHESIS OF OTHER NITROGEN HETEROCYCLES

Ar

Ar

NO2 +

CH2=C(CH2TMS)CH2OAc

Ar

CH2=CHCO2H

(i-PrO)3P THF

Triton B

CO2Me

O 90%

H N

NO2

Ar

Pd(OAc)2

O

1) Zn, HCl

NO2

O 100%

O O N

O

2) NaOH O 81%

O Y

O

O PhI(OAc)2, KOH

N

O

MeOH

355

N

O

TsOH

HO Y=O Y = H2

HO

OMe 78%

MeO OMe Scheme 10.25.

Palladium-mediated methylencyclopentane annelation of nitrostyrene is used for a total synthesis of cephalotaxine, which is the predominant alkaloid of the cephalataxus species (Scheme 10.25).133 10.3.3 Miscellaneous The reduction of aromatic nitro compounds to amino derivatives and cyclizations to various heterocyclic compounds are presented in Chapter 9. Recent advances are presented here. Reaction of 2-nitrobenzaldehyde with vinyl carbonyl compounds in the presence of 1,4-diazbicyclo[2.2.2]octane affords Baylis-Hillman products, the catalytic reduction of which results in direct cyclization to quinoline derivatives (Eq. 10.78).134 OH

O H2, Pd/C N

(10.78)

NO2 O 78%

Tandem reduction-Michael addition using suitably substituted nitroarenes provides a general route to aryl-fused nitrogen heterocycles (Eq. 10.79).135 X

X NO2

X = CH2: 98% X = O: 94% (10.79) X = NH: 89%

Fe, AcOH CO2Et

N H

CO2Et

Reductive cyclization of 2-formyl-2′-nitrobiaryl compounds gives phenanthridine derivatives.136 The Stille coupling of nitroarylstannanes with 2-bromobenzaldehyde are used for the preparation of the requisite 2-formyl-2′-nitrobiaryls. Subsequent treatment of biphenyl derivatives with zinc dust in acetic acid gives the phenanthridine derivatives as shown in Eq. 10.80.137

356

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

MeO

SnMe3

MeO

MeO

Pd(PPh3)4

+ Br

NO2

CHO NO2

MeO CHO

90%

Zn, AcOH

(10.80) MeO

N 90%

The carbinolamine-containing pyrrolo[2,1-c][1,4]benzodiazepine family of antitumor antibiotics is produced by various Streptomyces species; well-known members include abthramycine, tomaymycine, and DC-81.138 Various approaches to the synthesis of these compounds have been investigated over past years; reductive cyclization of suitably substituted nitroaldehydes is the frequently used method (Eq. 10.81).139 PhCH2O MeO

NH2 CH(SEt) 2

PhCH2O

NO2 CH(SEt) 2

SnCl2-H2O MeO

N O

N O

N

H

Hg2Cl2/CaCO3 N

MeCN-H2O

(10.81)

O 68%

Nitroenamines and related compounds have been used for synthesis of a variety of heterocyclic compounds. Rajappa has summarized the chemistry of nitroenamines (see Section 4.2).140 Ariga and coworkers have developed the synthesis of heterocycles based on the reaction of nitropyridones or nitropyrimidinone with nucleophiles. For example, 2-substituted 3-nitropyridines are obtained by the reaction of 1-methyl-3,5-dinitro-2-pyridones with ketones in the presence of ammonia (Eq. 10.82).141 O2N

NO2

O +

N H

O

O2N NH3 N 81%

Ph

(10.82)

Ph

3-Methyl-5-nitropyrimidin-4(3H)-one reacts with ketones in the presence of ammonium salts to give 4,5-disubstituted pyrimidines or 5,6-disubstituted 3-nitro-2-pyridones depending on reaction conditions (Eq. 10.83).142 O

O O2N

NMe

+

Sealed tube, 100 ºC N

N

NH3, MeCN N 85%

NO2 + N H

O

(10.83)

2,2-Dithio-1-nitroalkenes are prepared by the reaction of nitromethane with CS2 and KOH followed by alkylation with alkyl halides (Eq. 10.84).43 They are important reagents for synthesis

10.3

SYNTHESIS OF OTHER NITROGEN HETEROCYCLES

357

of functionalized nitro compounds such as 2-amino-2-thio-1-nitroalkenes or 2,2-diamino-1-nitroalkenes (Eq. 10.85).144

RS

EtOH

KS

H

KS

NO2

RX

H +

RS

KOH

+ CS2

CH3NO2

H2N(CH2)nNH2

RS

H

RS

NO2

N

H

N

NO2

(10.84)

(10.85)

(H2C)n

NO2

Nitroketene dithioacetal reacts with anthranilic esters to afford quinolone derivatives, which are converted into diazepinones by reductive cyclization. The review by Kolb covers synthetic application of nitroketene dithioacetal for heterocyclic compounds (see Scheme 10.26).145 Tominaga and coworkers have reported the formation of indolizine by the reaction of azomethine ylide with 1-nitro-2-phenylthioethylene (Eq. 10.86).146

MeS

N YH Me

NO2 Y = CH, N

Y NMe NH2

H N

CO2H

CO2R

H N

H N

NO2

N H

O OEt NH2

EtO

OEt

MeS

H

MeS

NO2

NO2

EtO NH

NO2 N H

MeS CN N H

CO2Et

NC

SMe NO2

N H

OH

O N Br –

Ph

O N Ph MeS

H2N

N

N N MeS

H N

NH2

Scheme 10.26.

SMe

O

358

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

Br –

+

N

Et3N

PhS

NO2

N

THF

(10.86)

EtO2C

CO2Et

56%

Reaction of nitroketene aminals with enaminoketones provides a route for the derivatives of 2-amino-3-nitropyridines (Eq. 10.87).147 O2N

O2N + H2N

Me2N

EtOH-AcOH O

NH2

H2N

R

N 63–82%

R

(10.87)

Reaction of diphenylcyclopropanone with nitroketene aminals gives 6-amino-2-pyridones (Eq. 10.88).148 O

O

NO2 +

Ph

Ph

PhHN

K2CO3

NHPh

Ph

N

Ph

Ph

(10.88) NHPh

56%

Reaction of 1-diethylamino-2-nitroalkenes with ethyl isocyanoacetate in the presence of DBU at room temperature, followed by quenching with HCl, leads to 1-hydroxypyrazoles in good yield (Eq. 10.89).149 Et2N

OH

Me + CNCH2CO2Et NO2

N N

DBU THF

EtO2C

Me

(10.89)

65%

REFERENCES 1a. Gossauer, A. In Houben-Weyl, Methoden der Organischen Chemie, Thieme Verlag, Stuttgart, 1994, Vol. E 6a, Part 1, p. 556–798. 1b. Sundberg, R. J. Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry; ed. by A. Katritzky and C. W. Rees, Pergamon, Oxford, Vol. 4, p. 313. 1c. Bean, G. P. Pyrroles; ed. by A. Jones, Wiley, New York, 1990, Vol. 1, p. 105. 2. Smith, K. M. Porphyrins and Metalloporphyrins, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1975. 3. Miyashita, M., B. Z. E. Awen, and A. Yoshikoshi. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 841 (1989). 4a. Barton, D. H. R., W. B. Metherwell, and S. Z. Zard. Tetrahedron Lett., #, 3707 (1984). 4b. Barton, D. H. R., W. B. Motherwell, E. S. Simon, and S. Z. Zard. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 224 (1986). 5. Sire, B. Q., I. Thevenot, and S. Z. Zard. Tetrahedron Lett.,!$, 9469 (1995). 6a. Crob, C. A., and K. Camenisch. Helv. Chim. Acta,!$, 49 (1953). 6b. Tratwein, A. W., and G. Jung. Tetrahedron Lett.,!', 8263 (1998). 7. Sanchez, A. G., B. M. Stiefel, R. F. Fernandez, C. Pascual, and J. Bellanato. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 441 (1982). 8. Sanchez, A. G., M. Mancera, and F. Rosado. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 1199 (1980). 9. Meier, H. Liebigs Ann. Chem., 1534 (1981).

REFERENCES

10. 11. 12a. 12b. 13. 14. 15a. 15b. 15c. 15d. 15e. 15f. 16a. 16b. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22a. 22b. 22c. 23a. 23b. 23c. 24. 25a. 25b. 25c. 25d. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31a. 31b. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37a. 37b. 38a. 38b. 38c. 38d.

359

Boberg, F., K. H. Garburg, K. J. Gorlish, E. Pipereit, and M. Ruhr. Liebigs Ann. Chem., 239 (1985). Lim, S., I. Jabin, and G. Revial. Tetrahedron Lett.,", 4177 (1999). Shiraishi, H., T. Nishitani, S. Sakaguchi, and Y. Ishii. J. Org. Chem., $!, 6234 (1998). Ranu, B. C., A. Hajra, and U. Jana. Synlett, 75 (2000). Shiraishi, H., T. Nishitani, T. Nishihara, S. Sakaguchi, and Y. Ishii. Tetrahedron, ##, 13957 (1999). Trautwein, A. W., and G. Jung. Tetrahedron Lett.,!', 8263 (1998). van Leusen, A. M., H. Siderius, B. E. Hoogenboom, and D. van Leusen. Tetrahedron Lett., 5337 (1972). Magnus, P., T. Gallagher, J. Schultz, Y. S. Or, and T. P. Ananthanaryan. J. Am. Chem. Soc., ', 2706 (1987). Carter, P., S. Fitzjohn, S. Halazy, and P. Magnus. J. Am. Chem. Soc., ', 2711 (1987). Aoyagi, K., H. Toi, Y. Aoyama, and H. Ogoshi. Chem. Lett., 1891 (1988). Magnus, P., W. Danikiewicz, T. Katoh, J. C. Huffman, and K. Folting. J. Am. Chem. Soc., , 2465 (1990). Hoogenboom, B. E., O. H. Oldenziel, and A. M. van Leusen. Org. Synth.,$, 987 (1988). Ono, N., E. Muratani, and T. Ogawa. J. Heterocyclic Chem., &, 2053 (1991). Disant, R., R. Costra, S. Massa, and M. Artisco. Synth. Commun., #, 819 (1995). van Leucen, D., E. Flentge, and A. M. van Leusen. Tetrahedron, "%, 4639 (1991). Have, R., F. R. Leusink, and A. M. van Leusen. Synthesis, 871 (1996). Leusink, F. R., R. Have, K. J. van Berg, and A. M. van Leusen. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1401 (1992). Boelle, J., R. Schneider, P. Gerardin, and B. Loubinoux. Synthesis, 1451 (1997). Have, R., and A. M. Leucen. Tetrahedron,#", 1913 (1998). Barton, D. H. R., and S. Z. Zard. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1098 (1985). Barton, D. H. R., J. Kervagoret, and S. Z. Zard. Tetrahedron, "$, 7587 (1990). Hartman, G. D., and L. M. Weinstock. Org. Synth.,$, 620 (1988). Ono, N., H. Katayama, S. Nishiyama, and T. Ogawa. J. Heterocyclic Chem., !, 707 (1994). Lash, T. D., J. R. Bellettini, J. A. Bastian, and K. B. Couch. Synthesis, 170 (1994). Burns, D. H., C. S. Jabara, and M. W. Burden. Synth. Commun., #, 379 (1995). Fumoto, Y., T. Eguchi, H. Uno, and N. Ono. J. Org. Chem.,$$, 6518 (1999). Adamczyk, M., and R. E. Reddy. Tetrahedron Lett., !$, 7983 (1995). Adamczyk, M., and R. E. Reddy. Tetrahedron Lett., !$, 9121 (1995). Adamczyk, M., and R. E. Reddy. Tetrahedron Lett., !%, 2325 (1996). Adamczyk, M., and R. E. Reddy. Tetrahedron,# , 14689 (1996). Adamczyk, M., J. R. Fishpaugh, K. J. Heuser, J. M. Ramp, R. E. Reddy, and M. Wong. Tetrahedron, #", 3093 (1998). Adamczyk, M., D. D. Johnson, and R. E. Reddy. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., !&, 3537 (1999). Kakiuchi, T., H. Kinoshita, and K. Inomata. Synlett, 901 (1999). Falk, H. The Chemistry of Linear Oligopyrroles and Bile Pigment, Springer, New York-Wien, 1989. Ono, N., and K. Maruyama. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., $, 4470 (1988). Ono, N., H. Kawamura, and K. Maruyama. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., $ , 3386 (1989). Uno, H., M. Tanaka, T. Inoue, and N. Ono. Synthesis, 471 (1999). Ono, N., H. Miyagawa, T. Ueta, T. Ogawa, and H. Tani. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 1595 (1998). Yuan, C., and W. Huang. Synthesis, 473 (1993). Ono, N., M. Bougauchi, and K. Maruyama. Tetrahedron Lett., !!, 1629 (1992). Fursho, Y., A. Tsunoda, and T. Aida. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 183 (1995). Ito, S., T. Murashima, and N. Ono. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 3161 (1997). Ito, S., T. Murashima, H. Uno, and N. Ono. Chem. Commun., 1661 (1998). Ito, S., N. Ochi, T. Murashima, H. Uno, and N. Ono. Heterocycles, # , 399 (2000). Ono, N., H. Hironaga, K. Smizu, K. Ono, K. Kuwano, and T. Ogawa. J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun., 1019 (1984). Ono, N., H. Hironaga, K. Ono, S. Kaneko, T. Murashima, T. Ueda, C. Tsukamura, and T. Ogawa. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 417 (1996). Lash, T. D., and B. H. Novak. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl.,!", 683 (1995). Lin, Y., and T. D. Lash. Tetrahedron Lett.,# , 9441 (1995).

360 39a. 39b. 40a. 40b. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46a. 46b. 46c. 46d. 47a. 47b. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55a. 55b. 56a. 56b. 57a. 57b. 57c. 57d. 57e. 57f. 57g. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63a. 63b. 63c. 63d. 63e. 63f. 64. 65.

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

Tang, J., and J. G. Verkade. J. Org. Chem., $', 7793 (1994). Bag, N., S. S. Chern, S. M. Peng, and C. K. Chang. Tetrahedron Lett., !$, 6409 (1995). Murashima, T., R. Tamai, K. Fujita, H. Uno, and N. Ono. Tetrahedron Lett., !%, 8391 (1996). Lash, T. D., M. L. Tompson, T. M. Werner, and J. D. Spence. Synlett, 213 (2000). Murashima, T., K. Fujita, K. Ono, T. Ogawa, H. Uno, and N. Ono. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 1403 (1996). Pelkey, E. T., L. Chang, and G. W. Gribble. Chem. Commun., 1909 (1996). Pelkey, E. T., and G. W. Gribble. Chem. Commun., 1873 (1997). Murashima, T., R. Tamai, K. Nishi, K. Nomura, K. Fujita, H. Uno, and N. Ono. J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans 1, 995 (2000). Caldarelli, M., J. Habermann, and S. D. Ley. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 107 (1999). Arnold, D. P., L. B. Dean, J. Hubbard, and M. A. Rahman. Aust. J. Chem.,"%, 969 (1994). Haake, G., D. Struve, and F. P. Montforts. Tetrahedron Lett.,# , 9703 (1994). Schmidt, W., and F. P. Montforts. Synlett, 903 (1997). Abel, Y., E. Haake, W. Schmidt, D. Struve, A. Walter, and F. P. Montforts. Helv. Chim. Acta, &, 1978 (1998). Sessler, J. L., A. Mozaffari, and M. R. Johnson. Org. Synth.,', 242 (1998). Novak, B. H., and T. D. Lash. J. Org. Chem., $!, 3998 (1998). Ono, N., C. Tsukamura, Y. Nomura, H. Hironaga, T. Murashima, and T. Ogawa. Adv. Mater., ', 149 (1997). Ono, N., and K. Maruyama. Chem. Lett., 1511 (1988). Ono, N., H. Kawamura, M. Bougauchi, and K. Maruyama. Tetrahedron, "$, 7483 (1990). Vicente, M. G. H., M. T. Cancilla, C. B. Lebrilla, and K. M. Smith. Chem. Commun., 2355 (1998). Sera, A., S. Fukumoto, T. Yoneda, and H. Yamada. Heterocycles, ", 697 (1986). Ramodenc, Y., R. Schwenninger, T. Phan, K. Gruber, C. Kratky, and B. Krautler. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., !!, 839 (1994). Lown, J. W. 1,3-Dipolar Cycloaddition Chemistry; ed. by A. Padwa, Wiley, New York, 1984, Vol. 1, p. 653. Porta, P. L., L. Capuzzi, and F. Bettarini. Synthesis, 287 (1994). Liu, J. H., H. W. Chan, F. Cue, Q. G. Wang, T. C. Mak, and H. N. C. Wong. J. Org. Chem., $", 1630 (1999). Pak, C. S., and M. Nyerges. Synlett, 1271 (1999). Fejes, I., L. Toke, M. Nyerges, and C. S. Pak. Tetrahedron, #$, 639 (2000). Sundberg, R. J. The Chemistry of Indoles, Academic Press, New York, 1970. Robinson, B. The Fisher Indole Synthesis, Wiley, Chichester, 1982. Gribble, G. W. Contemporary Org. Synth., 145 (1994). Moody, C. J. Synlett, 681 (1994). Sundberg, R. J. Indoles, Academic Press, San Diego, CA, 1996. Gilchrist, T. L. Synthesis of aromatic heterocycles, J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 2849 (1999). Gribble, G. W. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 1045 (2000). Moody, C. J., and E. Swann. Synlett, 135 (1998). Savall, B. M., and W. W. McWhorter. J. Org. Chem., $, 8696 (1996). Yamada, Y., K. Hayashi, Y. Yonezawa, K. Umemura, T. Tanji, and Y. Yoshimura. Heterocycles, "!, 891 (1996). Holzapfl, C. W., and C. Dwyer. Heterocycles, "&, 1513 (1998). Ito, Y., K. Kobayashi, and T. Saegusa. J. Am. Chem. Soc., '', 3532 (1977). Batcho, A. D., and W. Leimgruber. Org. Synth., %, 34 (1990). Clark, R. D., and D. B. Repke. Heterocycles, , 195 (1984). Feldman, P. L., and H. Rapport. Synthesis, 735 (1986). Lyod, D. H., and D. E. Nichols. Tetrahedron Lett., ", 4561 (1983). Moyer, M. P., J. F. Shiurba, and H. Rapoport. J. Org. Chem., #, 5106 (1986). Groenedaal, L., M. E. van Loo, J. A. J. M. Vekemans, and E. W. Meijer. Synth. Commun., #, 1589 (1995). Carrera, G. M., Jr., and G. S. Sheppard. Synlett, 93 (1994). Ochi, M., K. Kataoka, S. Ariki, M. Iwatsuki, M. Kodamaand, and Y. Fukuyama. J. Nat. Prod., $, 1043 (1998).

REFERENCES

361

66. Showalter, H. DH., L. Sun, A. D. Sercel, R. T. Winters, W. A. Denny, and B. D. Palmer. J. Org. Chem.,$, 1155 (1996). 67a. Brenner, M., G. Mayer, A. Terpin, and W. Steglich. Chem. Eur. J., !, 70 (1997). 67b. Chan, P., P. Magnus and E. G. McIver. Tetrahedron Lett.,", 835 (2000). 68a. Clark, C. I., J. M. White, D. P. Kelley, R. F. Martin, and P. Lobachevsky. Aust. J. Chem., #, 243 (1998). 68b. Coe, J. W., M. G. Vetelino, and M. J. Bradlee. Tetrahedron Lett., !%, 6045 (1996). 69a. Tsuji, Y., S. Kotachi, K. T. Huh, and Y. Watanabe. J. Org. Chem.,##, 580 (1990). 69b. Dhim, S. C., Y. Z. Youn, D. Y. Lee, T. J. Kim, C. S. Cho, S. Uemura, and Y. Watanabe. Synth. Commun., $, 1349 (1996). 69c. Aoyagi, Y., T. Mizusaki, and A. Ohta. Tetrahedron Lett., !%, 9023 (1996). 69d. Uribe, B. A. F., C. Moinet, and L. Toupet. Eur. J. Org. Chem., 419 (1999). 70a. Bergman, J., and P. Sand. Org. Synth., &, 493 (1993). 70b. Bergman, J., and P. Sand. Tetrahedron Lett., "$, 6085 (1990). 71. Pelkey, E. T., and G. W. Gribble. Synthesis, 1117 (1999). 72a. Pelkey, E. T., G. W. Gribble, and L. Chang. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1909 (1996). 72b. Pelkey, E. T., and G. W. Gribble. Chem. Commun., 1873 (1997). 72c. Pelkey, E. T., and G. W. Gribble. Tetrahedron Lett., !&, 5603 (1997). 72d. Gribble, G. W., E. T. Pelkey, and F. L. Switzer. Synlett, 1061 (1998). 73. BajanBabu, T. V., B. L. Chenard, and M. A. Petti. J. Org. Chem., #, 1704 (1986). 74. Dobson, D., A. Todd, and J. Gilmore. Synth. Commun., , 611 (1991). 75. Macor, J. E., and J. M. Wehner. Tetrahedron Lett., ! , 7195 (1991). 76. Bartoli, G., M. Bosco, R. Dalpozzo, G. Palmieri, and E. Marcantoni. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 2757 (1991). 77. Harrowven, H. C., D. Lai, and M. C. Lucas. Synthesis, 1300 (1999). 78. Sundberg, R. J. J. Org. Chem., !, 3604 (1965). 79a. Sundberg, R. J., H. F. Russel, W. V. Ligon, Jr., and L. S. Lin. J. Org. Chem., !%, 719 (1972). 79b. Sundberg, R. J., H. F. Russel, W. V. Ligon, and L. S. Lin. J. Org. Chem., "#, 4767 (1980). 80. Holzapfel, C. W., and C. Dwyer. Heterocycles, "&, 1513 (1998). 81a. Nishiyama, Y., R. Maema, K. Ohno, M. Hirose, and N. Sonoda. Tetrahedron Lett., ", 5717 (1999). 81b. Adeva, M., F. Buono, E. Caballeno, M. Medarde, and F. Tome. Synlett, 832 (2000). 82. Crotti, C., S. Cenini, B. Rindone, S. Tollari, and F. Demartin. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 784 (1986). 83. Rozhkov, V. V., A. M. Kusvshinov, V. I. Gulevskaya, I. I. Chervin, and S. A. Shevelev. Synthesis, 2065 (1999). 84. Pelkey, E. T., and G. W. Gribble. Tetrahedron Lett., !&, 5603 (1997). 85a. Soderberg, B. C., S. R. Rector, and S. N. O’Neil. Tetrahedron Lett., ", 3657 (1999). 85b. Soderberg, B. C., and J. A. Shriver. J. Org. Chem.,$ , 5838 (1997). 86. Soderberg, B. C., A. C. Chisnell, S. N. O’Neil, and J. A. Shriver. J. Org. Chem., $", 9731 (1999). 87. Garlaschelli, L., Z. Pang, O. Sterner, and G. Vidari. Tetrahedron, #, 3541 (1994). 88a. Akazome, M., T. Kondo, and Y. Watanabe. Chem. Lett., 769 (1992). 88b. Akamoze, M., T. Kondo, and Y. Watanabe. J. Org. Chem.,#', 3375 (1994). 89a. Showalter, H. D. H., and G. Pohlmann. Org. Prep. Proc. Int., ", 484 (1992). 89b. Mantus, E. K., and J. Clardy. Tetrahedron Lett., !", 1085 (1993). 89c. Sinhababu, A. K., and R. T. Borchardt. J. Org. Chem., "&, 3347 (1983). 89d. He, F., Y. Bo, J. D. Altom, and E. J. Corey. J. Am. Chem. Soc., , 6771 (1999). 89e. Fukuyama, Y., C. Iwatsuki, M. Kodama, M. Ochi, K. Kataoka, and K. Shibata. Tetrahedron, #", 10007 (1998). 89f. Novellino, L., M. d’Ichia, and G. Prota. Synthesis, 793 (1999). 90a. Fukuyama, T., X. Chen, and G. Peng. J. Am. Chem. Soc., $, 3127 (1994). 90b. Tokuyama, H., Y. Kaburagi, X. Chen, and T. Fukunaga. Synthesis, 429 (2000). 90c. Kobayashi, S., G. Peng, and T. Fukuyama, Tetrahedron Lett., ", 1519 (1999). 90d. Kobayashi, Y., and T. Fukunaga. J. Heterocycl. Chem., !#, 1043 (1998). 90e. Kobayashi, S., T. Ueda, and T. Fukuyama. Synlett, 883 (2000). 91. Shinada, T., M. Miyachi, Y. Itagaki, H. Naoki, K. Yoshihara, and T. Nakajima. Tetrahedron Lett., !%, 7099 (1996).

362

SYNTHESIS OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS

92. Shin, C., Y. Yamada, J. K. Hayashi, Y. Yonezawa, K. Umemura, T. Tanji, and J. Yoshimura. Heterocycles, " , 251 (1996). 93. Stephensen, H., and F. Zaragoza. Tetrahedron Lett., ", 5799 (1999). 94. Kraus, G. A., and N. Selvakumar. Synlett, 845 (1998). 95a. Roberts, D., M. Alvarez, and J. A. Joule. Tetrahedron Lett., !', 679 (1996). 95b. Alvarez, M., M. A. Bros, G. Gras, W. Ajana, and J. A. Joule. Eur. J. Org. Chem., 1173 (1999). 96. Kozmin, S. A., and V. H. Rawal. J. Am Chem. Soc.,  , 13523 (1998). 97. Cushing, T. D., J. F. S. Cervera, and R. M. Williams. J. Am. Chem. Soc., &, 557 (1996). 98a. Taylor, E. C., and B. Lin. Tetrahedron Lett., ", 4023 (1999). 98b. Taylor, E. C., and B. Lin. Tetrahedron Lett., ", 4027 (1999). 99. Molina, P., and P. M. Fresneda. Synthesis, 878 (1989). 100. Sutherland, J. K. Chem. Commun., 325 (1997). 101a. Fioravanti, S., L. Pellacani, S. Stabile, P. A. Tardella, and R. Ballini. Tetrahedron Lett.,!&, 3309 (1997). 101b. Fioravanti, S., L. Pellacani, S. Stabile, P. A. Tardella, and R. Ballini. Tetrahedron,#", 6169 (1998). 102a. Attygalle, A. B., and D. E. Morgan. Chem. Soc. Rev., !, 245 (1984). 102b. Massiot, G., and C. Delaude. The Alkaloids; ed. by A. Brossi, Academic Press, New York, 1986, Vol. 27, Chapter 3. 102c. Numata, A., and T. Ibuka. The Alkaloids; ed. by A. Brossi, Academic Press, New York, 1987, Vol. 31, Chapter 6. 103. Domagala, J. M., S. E. Hagan, T. Joannides, J. S. Kiely, E. Laborde, M. C. Schroeder, J. A. Sesn ie, M. A. Shapiro, M. J. Suto, and S. Vanderroest. J. Med. Chem., !$, 871 (1993). 104. Johnston, G. A. R., D. R. Curtis, J. Davis, and R. M. McCulloch. Nature, "&, 804 (1974). 105. Pedder, D. J., H. M. Fales, T. Jouni, M. Blum, J. MacConnell, and R. M. Crewe. Tetrahedron, ! , 2275 (1976). 106. Sinnot, M. L. Chem. Rev., ', 1171 (1984). 107. Pall, K., M. L. Behnke, and L. Tong. Tetrahedron Lett., !", 6205 (1993). 108. Watanabe, Y., J. Yamamoto, M. Akazome, T. Kondo, and T. Mitsudo. J. Org. Chem.,$, 8328 (1995). 109. Stevens, R. V., and A. W. M. Lee. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 102 (1982). 110. Stevens, R. V., and A. W. M. Lee. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 103 (1982). 111. Francke, W., F. Schroder, F. Walter, V. Sinnwell, H. Baumann, and M. Kaib. Liebigs Ann, 965 (1995). 112. Snow, R. J., C. J. R. Fookes, and A. R. Battersby. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 524 (1981). 113. Miyashita, M., B. Z. E. Awen, and A. Yoshikoshi. Tetrahedron, "$, 7569 (1990). 114. Posner, G. H., and R. D. Crouch. Tetrahedron, "$, 7509 (1990). 115. Broggini, G., and G. Zecchi. Synthesis, 905 (1999). 116a. Cicchi, S., A. Goti, and A. Brandi. J. Org. Chem.,$, 4743 (1995). 116b. Goti, A., F. Cardona, and A. Brandi. Synlett, 761 (1996). 116c. Anichini, B., A. Goti, A. Brandi, S. I. Kozhuskov, and A. de Mejere. Synlett, 25 (1997). 117a. Vavrecka, M., A. Janowitz, and M. Hesse. Tetrahedron Lett., !%, 5543 (1991). 117b. Janowitz, A., M. Vavrecka, and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta,%", 1352 (1991). 118. Horni, A., I. Hubacek, and M. Hesse. Helv. Chim. Acta, %%, 579 (1994). 119. Hutchinson, K. D., J. V. Silverton, and J. W. Daly. Tetrahedron,#, 6129 (1994). 120a. Nakamura, K., T. Kitayama, Y. Inoue, and A. Ohno. Tetrahedron, "$, 7471 (1990). 120b. Fantin, G., M. Fogagnolo, M. E. Guerzoni, E. Marrota, A. Medici, and O. Pedrini. Tetrahedron Asymmetry, %, 947 (1992). 121. Guarna, A., E. G. Occhiato, L. M. Spinetti, M. F. Vallercchi, and D. Scarpi. Tetrahedron, #, 1775 (1995). 122. Occhiato, E. G., D. Scarpi, G. Menchi, and A. Guarna. Tetrahedron Asymmetry, %, 1929 (1996). 123. Scarpi, D., E. G. Occhiato, and A. Guarna. J. Org. Chem.,$", 1727 (1999). 124a. Hoshiko, T. Chem. Pharm. Bull., ", 633 (1993). 124b. Mahboobi, S., A. Popp, T. Burgemeister, and D. Schllolmeyer. Tetrahedron Asymmetry, ', 2369 (1998). 124c. Mahboobi, S., E. Eibler, M. Koller, S. Kumar KC, A. Popp, and D. Schellmeyer. J. Org. Chem., $", 4697 (1999).

REFERENCES

125. 126. 127. 128. 129. 130. 131. 132. 133. 134. 135. 136a. 136b. 137. 138. 139a. 139b. 139c. 139d. 140a. 140b. 141a. 141b. 141c. 142a. 142b. 142c. 143. 144. 145. 146. 147. 148. 149.

363

Parsons, A. F. Tetrahedron, # , 4149 (1996). Maeda, H., and G. A. Kraus. J. Org. Chem.,$ , 2314 (1997). Michael, J. P. Nat. Prod. Rep., ", 619 (1997). Gibbs, G., M. J. Hateley, L. Mclaren, M. Welham, and C. L. Willis. Tetrahedron Lett., ", 1069 (1999). Crosby, S. R., M. J. Hateley, and C. L. Willis. Tetrahedron Lett.,", 397 (2000). Bhagwatheswaran, H., S. P. Gaur, and P. C. Jain. Synthesis, 615 (1976). Desai, M. C., P. F. Thadieo, and S. L. Lefkowitz. Tetrahedron Lett.,!", 5831 (1993). Stanetty, P., M. Kremslehner, and M. D. Mihovilovic. Tetrahedron Lett., ", 1717 (2000). Ishibashi, H., M. Okano, H. Tamaki, K. Maruyama, T. Yakura, and M. Ikeda. J. Chem. Soc., Chem. Commun., 1436 (1990). Familoni, O. B., P. T. Kaye, and P. J. Klaas. Chem. Commun., 2563 (1998). Bunce, R. A., D. M. Herron, and M. L. Ackerman. J. Org. Chem., $#, 2847 (2000). Yang, Y. Synth. Commun., ', 1001 (1989). Gronowitz, S., and G. Timari. J. Heterocycl. Chem., %, 1159 (1990). Li, D., R. Zhao, and E. J. LaVoie. J. Org. Chem.,$#, 2802 (2000). Thurston, D. E. Advances in the study of pyrrolo[2,1-c][1,4]benzodiazepine antitumor antibiotics in Molecular aspects of anticancer drug-DNA interactions; ed. by S. Neide and M. J. Waring, The Macmillan Press Ltd., 1933, Vol. 1, p. 54–88. Thurston, D. E., and D. S. Bose. Chem. Rev.,'", 433 (1994). Thurston, D. E., and D. R. Langley. J. Org. Chem., #, 705 (1986). Thurston, D. E., V. S. Murty, D. R. Langley, and G. B. Jones. Synthesis, 81 (1990). Kamal, A., B. S. P. Reddy, and B. S. N. Reddy. Tetrahedron Lett., !%, 2281 (1996). Rajappa, S. Tetrahedron, ##, 7065 (1999). Rajappa, S. Tetrahedron, !%, 1453 (1981). Thoda, Y., T. Kawara, M. Eiraku, K. Tani, M. Ariga, and Y. Mori. Heterocycles, ! , 2079 (1991). Thoda, Y., M. Eiraku, T. Nakagawa, Y. Usami, M. Ariga, T. Kashima, K. Tani, H. Watanabe, and Y. Mori. Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., $!, 2820 (1990). Nishiwaki, N., Y. Thoda, and M. Ariga. Synthesis, 1277 (1997). Nishiwaki, N., H. P. Wang, K. Matsuno, Y. Tohda, and M. Ariga. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 2261 (1997). Nishiwaki, N., T. Matsunaga, Y. Thoda, and M. Ariga. Heterocycles, !&, 249 (1994). Nishiwaki, N., T. Adachi, K. Matsuno, H. P. Wang, T. Matsunaga, Y. Thoda, and M. Ariga. J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans 1, 27 (2000). Gompper, R., and H. Schaefer. Chem. Ber., , 591 (1967). Manjunatha, S. G., K. V. Reddy, and S. Rajappa. Tetrahedron Lett., !, 1327 (1990). Kolb, M. Synthesis, 171 (1990). Tominaga, Y., Y. Ichihara, and A. Hosomi. Heterocycles, #, 1745 (1988). Mertens, H., R. Troschutz, and H. J. Roth, Liebigs Ann. Chem., 380 (1986). Takahashi, M., C. Nazaki, and Y. Shibazaki. Chem. Lett., 1229 (1987). Uno, H., T. Kinoshita, K. Matsumoto, T. Murashima, T. Ogawa, and N. Ono. J. Chem. Res. (S), 76 (1996).

SUBJECT INDEX Acetyl nitrate, 15 Acosamine, synthesis, 51 Acylation, nitroalkanes, 128–130 Acyl imidazoles, acylation, 129 Addition elimination process, 100–103 Aliquat, Michael addition, 106 Alkaloids, synthesis, 241, 282–295, 320, 340, 341, 345, 347, 352, 353, 354, 355 Alkenylation using nitroalkanes, 221 Alkenyl phosphonates, synthesis, 79 Alkoxycarbonyl imidazoles, 129 7-Alkoxyindoles, synthesis, 341 Alkylation O-alkylation, nitronate formation, 268 of nitroalkanes, 126–128 via radical process, 133–138 with transition metal catalysts, 138–147 Alkylidene transfer reagents, nitroalkanes, 191, 220–221 Alkyl nitrate, nitration, 10 Allethrine, synthesis, 89 L-Allothreonine, synthesis, 83 Allylation allylic nitro compounds, 185–189 nitro compounds, Pd catalyzed, 115, 140–147 radical allylation, 151–152 Allylic nitro compounds allylic rearrangement, 192 denitration, 107, 213 elimination, 222 Pd catalyzed reaction, 187 preparation, 37, 38, 104, 167 SN1 reaction, 187 substitution, ionic process, 185, 188–189 Allylic strain, 75, 83 Allylsilane, 9 Allylstannane, 9, 97, 151–152 Al2O3, nitro aldol reaction, 35, 166–167

Amberlite nitration, 18 nitro aldol reaction, 35 Amberlyst A-21 Michael addition, 106 nitro aldol reaction, 36 Amination with hydroxyamine, methoxyamine, or sulfeneamides, 317–318 of nitroalkenes, 76 of nitro arenes, 316–318 Amines, via reduction of nitro compounds, 170–178 5AA β-amino alcohols and amino acids Fe + AcOH, 355 HCOONH4 + Pd/C, 171, 173, 353 LiAlH4, 173, 245 NaBH4 + CoCl2, 237 NaBH4 + NiCl2, 64, 175 Na2S, 171 Ni2B, 174 Pd/C + H2, 51, 64, 65, 130, 172, 348, 355 Raney Ni + H2, 38, 48, 54, 111, 130, 172, 352, 354 SmI2, 175 SnCl2, 114, 245, 356 Zn + AcOH, 356 Zn(Cu), 349 α-Amino acids, synthesis, 79, 130 γ-Amino acids, synthesis, 90, 172 γ-Amino alcohol, via nitrile oxide addition, 260 β-Amino alcohols, 46, 172–173 4-Aminodiphenyl amine, synthesis, 316 δ-Aminolevulinic acid, synthesis, 130 Amino sugars, synthesis, 259 Amprenavir, HIV protease inhibitor, synthesis, 63–64 Anion radicals, 133, 182–183 Anthracyclinones, synthesis, 223 365

366

SUBJECT INDEX

Aphanorphine, synthesis, 239 Arcyriacyanin, synthesis, 339 Arylation of amines, 306 of nitroalkanes, Pd catalyzed, 149 of nitroalkanes, SNAr, 147–149 of phenols, 306 2-Aryl-4, 6-dinitroindoles, synthesis, 342 6-Arylindoles, synthesis, 339 Aryllead triacetate, arylation of nitroalkanes, 149 Arylnitromethanes, 10 (–)-Arysteromycin, synthesis, 205 Arylsulfonylnitromethanes, 127, 146–147, 169 Aspidophytine, synthesis, 42 Asymmetric reaction See Diels-Alder reaction Michael Addition, 86, 99, 101–102, 115–119, 353 nitrile oxide addition, 266 nitro aldol reaction, 56–65 nitronate addition, 272–274 nitrone addition, 252–257 tandem cycloaddition, 284 (+)-Australine and its epimer, synthesis, 290 9-Azasteroids, synthesis, 353 2,2-Azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN), radical initiator, 193–211 Azomethine ylides, pyrrole synthesis, 338 Baker’s yeast, asymmetric reduction, 46, 108–109, 162, 166, 352 Barton-Zard pyrrole synthesis, 330 Bartori indole synthesis, 341 Batcho indole synthesis, 338 Baylis-Hillman reaction product, 355 Benzoylperoxide, radical initiator, 193 Benzyl isocyanoacetate, pyrrole synthesis, 330 1-Benzyloxynitroalkene, 80 Biotin, synthesis, 71 Biotol, terpene synthesis, 210 Bismuth reagents, arylation of nitro compounds, 148 Brefeldin A, synthesis, 219 Brevicomine, synthesis, 166 4-Bromoindoles, synthesis, 343 2-Bromo-2-nitropropane, 151–152 Butadiene teromerization, Pd catalyzed, 138 Calicheamicinone, synthesis, 247

Calphostin D, synthesis, 165 Carbocyclic nucleosides, synthesis, 143–145, 205, 295 Carbon-disaccharide, synthesis, 200 Carboxylic acids, from primary nitroalkanes, 163 (+)-Casuraline, synthesis, see [4 +2]/[3 + 2] cycloaddition, 282 Cephalotaxine, synthesis, 355 Cedrene, synthesis, 210 Cetyltrimethylammonium chloride (CTACl), phase transfer catalyst Michael addition, 104 Nitro aldol reaction, 36 Chelidonine, synthesis, 240 Chiral auxiliaries (2R, 3R, 4R, 4S)-1-amino-3,4-dimethoxy2,5-bis(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidine, 78 (S)-1-Amino-2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidine, 95 Diels-Alder reaction, 245 (R)-2,2-diphenylcyclopentanol, 278 (S)-2-(1-ethyl-1-methoxypropyl)pyrrolidine, 91 (S)-2-(methoxymethyl)pyrrolidine (SMP) and its enantiomer (RMP), 77, 100 Michael addition, 77–79, 101–103 nitron addition, 256 (S)-1-phenylethylamine, 95 (R) or (S)-4-phenyl-2-oxazolidinone, 78 (S)-prolinol, 77 TADDOLs, 99, 256–257 tandem [4 + 2]/[3 + 2]cycloaddition, 279–295 Chiral enolates, addition to nitroalkenes, 90 Chiral catalysts allylation of nitro compounds, chiral ligands, 145 heterobimetallic complex, (R)-LLB, (R)-LSB, nitro aldol reaction, 57–63 Michael addition, 118–119 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition of nitrile oxides, 267 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition of nitrones, 256–258 Chiral nitroolefins, synthesis of alkaloids, 101–102 Chiral nitrones, 254–255 Chiral sulfoxides Diels–Alder reaction, 247 Michael addition, 102

SUBJECT INDEX

Chiral vinyl ethers, asymmetric tandem [4 + 2]/[3 + 2]cycloaddition, 287–290 Chlorins, synthesis, 348 Chloromethyl phenyl sulfone, 313 Cobaloximes, alkyl radical precursors, 136 Combinatory synthesis, heterocycles, 308, 310 Copper bisoxazolines, 1,3-dipolar addition, 257 (+)-Crotanecine, synthesis, 289 Cyanomethylation of nitroarenes, 341 2-Cyanopyrroles, 331 Cyclic nitrones, 252 Cyclic nitronates, 239, 267, 268, 274, 276, 278, 279, 281, 282 Cycloaddition See Diels-Alder reaction 1,3-dipolar addition of nitrones, 249–258 1,3-dipolar addition of nitronates, 267–274 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition of nitrile oxide, 258–267 tandem [4 + 2]/[3 + 2] addition, 274–295 Cyclopentenones, synthesis, 201 Daunosamine, synthesis, 50–51, 62 Dehydration of β-nitro alcohol, 38 with dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC), 39 with methanesulfonyl chloride, 39 with phthalic anhydride, 39 Dendritic polymers, synthesis, 111, 207 Denitration ionic reaction, 211–214 α-nitro ketones, 47, 128, 211, 212 radical reaction, 106, 193–211, 244 1-Deoxy-1-nitro sugars, 153, 190 Dialkyl 1-nitroalkanephosphonate, 23 1,2-Diamines, synthesis, 77–78, 109 Dianion of nitro compounds, 37 3,4-Diarylpyrroles, synthesis, 332, 337 3,5-Diarylpyrrolizidines, synthesis, 352 Diastereoselective reaction Diels-Alder reaction, 235 Michael addition, 116 nitro aldol reaction, 51–63 silicon-tethered method in 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition, 260 1,8-Diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene(DBU) for nitro aldol reaction, 31–32

367

for Michael addition, 104–105, 110, 116, 220–222 for pyrrole synthesis, 330–336 Di-t-butyl dicarbonate, generation of nitrile oxides, 168 Diels-Alder reaction 1-acetoxy-1,3-butadiene, 235, 245 2-aminobutadiene, 243, 248 asymmetric reaction, 245–248 intramolecular reaction, nitrotrienes, 206 1-methoxy-1,3-butadiene, 235 1-methoxy-3-trimethylsilyloxy-1,3butadiene (Danishefsky’s diene), 235, 237, 238, 239, 246, 247 nitroalkenes as dienophiles, 231–244, 353 nitro heterocycles, as dienophiles, 242 3-(2-nitrovinyl)indoles, 237 2-(2-nitrovinyl)furans, 237 2-phenylsulfinyl-1-nitroalkenes, 238 quinodimethene, 240 N-tosyl-3-nitroindole, 240 1-trimethylsilyloxy-1,3-butadiene, 235 3-trimethylsilyoxy-1,3-butadiene, 236 Dihydrojasmone, synthesis, 47, 166 1,4-Dihydronicotinamide radical denitration, 193 radical desulfonylation, 127 (+)-Dihydromevinol, synthesis, 200 (+)-Dihydromevinolin, synthesis, 113 Dihydrobenzopyran, synthesis, 153 threo-Dihydrosphingosine, synthesis, 61 5,6-Dihydroxyindole, synthesis, 41 1,4-Diketones, synthesis, 47, 95, 107–108, 110, 131, 161, 221 1,5-Diketones, synthesis, 201 6,7-Dimethoxyindole, 344 Dimethyldioxirane, 20, 161 2,4-Dimethylindole, 343 1,3-Dinitro compounds, 85 Dinitrogen pentoxide (N2O5), nitration, 5–6 1,3-Dipolar cycloaddition, 249–295 See Chiral catalysts, chiral nitrones, chiral auxiliaries Fullerene (C60), 268 intramolecular nitrile oxide cycloaddition (INOC), 261–265, 270–274 intramolecular silyl nitronate cycloaddition (ISOC), 270–274 nitronates, 267–275 nitrile oxides, 167–169

368

SUBJECT INDEX

Elimination of HNO2, 110, 137, 147, 218–225, 237–239, 242 Enantioselective reaction allylation of nitroalkanes, 145 nitro aldol reaction, 61–63, 203 Michael addition, 203 Diels-Alder reaction, 243–248 Endo and exo selectivity, See also Diastereoselective reaction Diels-Alder reaction, 235–236, 277 nitrones, 252–257 nitronates, tandem reaction, 283 Epibatidine, synthesis, 114 Ergot alkaloid, synthesis, 242 Ethyl isocyanoacetate, pyrrole synthesis, 330–336 Ethyl nitroacetate, 141, 169 Ethyl β-nitroacrylate, 220 Ethyl 3-nitropropanoate, 18, 218 Facial selectivity, 283 Fisher indole, synthesis, 338–339 Flavonones, synthesis, 206 α-Fluoro nitro compounds, synthesis, 152, 210 Fluoro nitro sugars, synthesis, 49 Frodosin B, synthesis, 243 Geminal dinitro compounds, 150 Geminal halo nitro compounds, See also α-Halo nitro compounds, 150, 224 α-Halo esters, 312, 314 α-Halo nitro compounds, 23, 134 Henry traction See Nitro aldol reaction Heterodienes, cycloaddition, 143, 268, 275–295 (–)-15-Hexadodecanolide, synthesis, 202 HIV protease inhibitor KNI-272, synthesis, 58 Homoallyl alcohols, 213 (–)-Horsfiline, synthesis, 101, 163 β-Hydroxy-α-amino acids, synthesis, 83 β-Hydroxy ketones, via nitrile oxides addition, 259 6-Hydroxyindole, 344 6-Hydroxy-7-methyoxyindole, synthesis, 345 2-Hydroxymethyl-3-hydroxypyrrolidine, synthesis, 205

3-Hydroxy-5-methylpiperidin-2-one, synthesis, 353 Iminopolyols, synthesis, 259 Indoles, synthesis, 171, 338–346 Indolizidines, 350 Isocyanoacetonitrile, pyrrole synthesis, 331 Isoindoles, 334–336 (+)-Isomintlactone, synthesis, 162 Isoxazoles, 258 Isoxazolines, 259 (Z)-Jasmone, synthesis, 47, 107, 164 Kainic acid, synthesis, 214, 352 Knovenagel reaction, 40 La-binaphthol (LLB), chiral catalyst for nitro aldol reaction, 56–63 chiral catalyst for Michael addition, 119 Lactonic pheromones, synthesis, 166 Leusen pyrrole synthesis, 328–330 Lewis acid catalyzed reaction [4 + 2] cycloaddition, 274–294 methylaluminum bis(2,6-diphenylphenoxide)(MAPh), 277–278, 293 Michael addition, 86, 91–95 SnCl4, 275–276, 280, 293 substitution of R-NO2, 188, 190–191 Ti(OR)2Cl2, 277 ZnCl2, 101–102, 129 Levoglucosenone, 116 (+)-Lucidine, synthesis, 253 Macrocyclization, 304 Macrocyclic lactones, synthesis, 128, 133 Macronecine, 289 Methyl α-methylenealkanoates, synthesis, 128 2-Methyl-2-nitropropane, 21 Methyl nitroacetate, 41, 127, 142, 144, 145, 219, 220 Methyl 3-nitroacrylate, 11, 220, 228–235, 238, 247 Methyl 2-nitropropanoate, 143 Methyl 3-nitropropanoate, 128, 219 Michael addition See Asymmetric reaction, diastereoselective reaction of active methylene compounds, 84–86

SUBJECT INDEX

of enolates, 87–88 Grignard reagents, 95–97 intramolecular reaction, 112–115 to nitroalkenes, 70–103, 349, 350–353 of nitro compounds, 103–119, 220, 347, 348, 351, 353 Microwave irradiation, 41 (+)-Miyakolide, synthesis, 264 Muscone, synthesis, 204 NaTeH, denitration, 193–194 Nef reaction with acid, 159–160 into carboxylic acids, 162–164 into ketones or aldehydes of nitroalkanes, 80, 87, 107, 159–164 with KMnO4, O3, dimethyldioxirane, anodic oxidation, 161 of nitroalkenes, 165–167 tetrapropylammonium perruthenate (TPAP), 162 TiCl3, 103, 110, 163, 167 Nitration of alkanes, 7–11 of alkenes, 11–15 of alkyl halides, 17–20 of aromatic compounds, 3–7 with NO, 13 with N2O4, 7 with N2O5, 5–6 with N2O4 and O3, 6, 9 with nitronium tetrafluoroborate, 13 Nitric oxide (NO), 11–12 Nitrile oxides, See 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition, cycloaddition, Nitriles, from nitroalkanes, 169–170 with MeSi3I, Bu3P + diethyl diazocarboxylate (DEAD), PI3, PCl3, (Me2N)3P, 169 with Me3SiSiMe3, 170 β-Nitro acetate, 71, 330–333 Nitroadamantane, 21 Nitro-aldol reaction (Henry reaction), 30–65 Nitroalkanes from alkyl halides, 18 azides, 25 amines 20 nitroalkenes, 44 oximes, 21

369

Nitroalkene dithioacetals, synthesis of heterocycles, 357 Nitroalkenes from alkenes, 11–15 See Diels-Alder reaction, Michael addition β-nitro alcohols, 38–44 Nitroalkyl pyridines, 18 Nitro alkyl radicals, for alkylation, 137–138, see SRN1 β-Nitro-α-amino acids, synthesis, 107 Nitroaziridines, synthesis, 346 Nitro compounds, preparation, 1, 3–25 Nitrocycloalkenes, 12, 15 Nitrocyclohexane, 118, 149, 160, 177, 203, 221, 222 Nitrocyclohexene, 12, 13, 72, 76, 77, 96, 98, 149, 160, 183, 206 Nitrocyclopropane, 11, 150 Nitro-1,3-dienes, 43 β-Nitroenamines, 76, 100, 129 Nitroethane, 7, 41, 49, 56, 129, 130, 140, 153, 328, 108, 166, 168 α-Nitro ethers, 153 β-Nitro ethers, Michael addition, 74–76 Nitroethylene, nitroethene, 39, 73, 74, 87, 88, 90, 91, 95, 162, 206, 232, 234, 350 α-Nitro esters Pd catalyzed allylation, 141–144 SRN1 reaction, 134, 182, 135 synthesis, 128 Nitrogen dioxide (N2O4), 6 Nitrogen trioxide (NO3), 6 2-Nitroindoles, synthesis, 343 3-Nitroindoles, synthesis, 240, 340 4-Nitroindoles, synthesis, 340 Nitroisoxazoles, 24 α-Nitro ketones, 16, 46–48, 129–130, 169 β-Nitro ketones, 137 Nitromethane, 37, 38, 42, 43, 45, 49, 57, 58, 59, 60, 62, 63, 64, 71, 80, 107, 108, 109, 114, 115, 116, 117, 119, 129, 130, 136, 138, 139, 144, 146, 148, 185, 187, 189, 192, 195, 202, 216, 223, 224, 353, 357 Nitromethylation of aldehydes, 44–45 of alkanes, 138 of aromatics, 137, 148 C-glycosyl compounds, 49 via SRN1 reaction, 135–136, 184–185 α-Nitro nitriles, for SRN1, 134

370

SUBJECT INDEX

Nitronium tetrafluoroborate, 9, 13, 15, 16 Nitroolefination, 100 (S)-5-Nitropentan-2-ol, 108 1-Nitro-2-phenylsulfonylethylene, 102, 217, 334 1-Nitro-2-phenylthioethylene, 76, 357 3-Nitropiperidines, 353 1-Nitropropane, 37, 55, 77, 106, 109, 127, 149, 153 2-Nitropropane, 86, 104, 106, 107, 110, 115, 117, 118, 133, 134, 136, 148, 188, 183, 220, 222, 191, 216 1-Nitro-1-propene, 39, 74, 75, 78, 87, 89, 91, 92, 93, 326 2-Nitro-1-propene, 39, 89, 93, 95, 100 3-Nitropyridine, 356 2-Nitropyrrole, 313 3-Nitropyrrole, 240, 329 β-Nitrostyrene, 44, 74, 75, 77, 86, 91, 93, 94, 96, 97, 98, 99, 113, 168, 170, 176, 177, 327, 328, 352 Nitro sugars, synthesis, 24, 48–51, 137 α-Nitro sulfides, 150, 212, 213 β-Nitro sulfides, 71–73, 79, 212, 213, 216 α-Nitro sulfones β-Nitro sulfones, 217 β-Nitro sulfoxides, 102 Pd-catalyzed allylation, 141 preparation, 150 SRN1 reaction, 134 Nitrothiazoles, 135 Norslanadione, synthesis, 206 Nucleophilic aromatic displacement (SNAr), 302 of o-dinitrobenzene, 303 of p-dinitrobenzene, 302, 303, 308 Nucleophilic aromatic substitution of hydrogen (NASH), 309 m-chloronitrobenzene, 315, 318 o-chloronitrobenzene, 311 p-chloronitrobenzene, 311, 315 m-dinitrobenzene, 313, 314, 317 m-fluoronitrobenzene, 313 3-nitroaniline, 319 nitrobenzene, 309, 311, 312, 314, 318 2-nitrofurans, 313 4-nitroimidazole, 315 2-nitropyrroles, 313 6-nitroquinoline, 321 2-nitrothiophene, 312, 315 3-nitrothiophene, 312

Nucleosides, synthesis, 205, 210 Octaethylporphyrin, 337 Organometallic reagents addition to nitroalkenes, 95–99 1-Oxabuta-1,3-diene, 235 Oxidation to nitro compounds of amines 20–22 of isocyanates 25 of β-nitro alcohol to α-nitro ketone, 46 of oximes, 21–23 with OXONE, 23 with m-perbenzoic acid (m-CPBA), 21 with peroxytrifluoroacetic acid, 21 Oximes, reduction of nitro compounds, 176–177 Paar-Knorr reaction, pyrrole synthesis, 110, 325–326 Pancratistatin, 218 (+)-Paraherquamide B, synthesis, 345 Pd(0) catalysis, see allylation of nitro compounds Penicillaric acids, synthesis, 81 Phenanthridines, 355 Phenylacetone, synthesis from nitroalkenes, 165 1-Phenylheptane-1,5-dione, synthesis, 201 Phenylisocyanate, generation of nitrile oxides, 167–168 Phenylnitromethane, 18 Phenylthiomethyl isocyanide, 315 1-(Phenylthio)-nitroalkenes, 81–83 Phenylthionitrometane, 80 Pheromone, synthesis, 35, 48, 331 Phosphazene base, pyrrole synthesis, 335 Phytochromobilin, synthesis, 332–333 Polyoxin C, synthesis, 81 Porphobilinogen, synthesis, 332 Porphyrins, synthesis, 337 Polypyrroles, 336 Proazaphosphatrane, base for nitro aldol reaction, 37 L-Proline, asymmetric Michael addition, 118 (–)-Psudophymaminol, synthesis, 101 Pyrazoles, synthesis, 358 Pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine, synthesis, 242 (–)-Pyrenophorin, synthesis, 108 Pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC), 46 Pyrimidines, synthesis, 345 Pyrroles, synthesis, 177, 325–338

SUBJECT INDEX

Pyrrolidines, synthesis, 277, 347–351 Pyrrolidin-2-ones, synthesis, 90, 352 Pyrrolines, synthesis, 347 Pyrrolizidines, synthesis, 350 Pyrrolo[2, 1-c][1, 4]benzodiazepine, synthesis, 356 Pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidines, synthesis, 345 Pyrrolostatin, synthesis, 331 Pummerer rearrangement, 222 Radical reaction addition, 209 cyclization, 210 elimination, 214–218 substitution, 133–138, see SRN1 Recifeiolide, synthesis, 139 Retro Diels-Alder reaction, 334 D-Ribo-nitro-aldol, synthesis, 50 Ring cleavage of cyclic α-nitro ketones (retro Henry reaction), 131–133 (–)-Rosmarinecine, synthesis, 288 Scandium triflate, 109 Secondary nitro group, denitration, 197 (+)-Sedridine, synthesis, 252 Selenation nitroalkanes, synthesis of nitroalkenes, 153 nitroalkenes, Michael addition, 74 Silver nitrite, synthesis of nitro compounds, 17 Silyl nitronates, 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition, 75, 268–273 nitro aldol reaction, 54–55 SmI2, reduction of nitro compounds, 175 Sm(Oi-Pr)3, 328 Sodium nitrite, Nef reaction, 163 nitration of alkyl halides, 18–19 Sodium perborate, 21 Sodium salt of methylmercaptan, Sodium sulfide, 215 SN1 reaction of nitro compounds, deoxy nitro sugars, 154, 190 allylic nitro compounds, 187 SN2 reaction of nitro compounds Lewis acid assistance, α-nitro sulfides, β-nitro sulfides, 189–191 Intramolecular reaction, 191–192 Spiro ketals, pheromones, synthesis, 131, 166

371

SRN1 reaction, 133–136, 154, 182–185 alkyl mercury halides, 136 deoxy nitro sugars, 185 geminal dinitro compounds, 134 geminal halonitroalkanes, 134 Kornblum reaction, 184 α-nitro nitriles, 184 p-nitrobenzyl halides, 133 tertiary nitro compounds, 184 SRN2, 137 Staurosporine, synthesis, 352 Stereoselective reaction nitro aldol reaction, 51 (–)-Strychnine, synthesis, 308 β-Sulfonyl nitroalkenes, 217 Sundberg indole synthesis, 342 Tandem [4 + 2]/[3 + 2] cycloaddition, 279–295 (+)-australine, synthesis, 290 (+)-castanospermine, synthesis, 290 (+)-casuarine, synthesis, 283 (+)-crotanesine, synthesis, 289 3,4-disubstituted pyrrolidines, cis and trans, 277 (+)-7-epiaustraline, synthesis, 282 (–)-hastanecine, synthesis, 280 (+)-macronecine, synthesis, 281 Tandem Michael addition, 92, 114 Taxane, synthesis, 201 Tethered reaction, 260 Tetrabutylammonium fluoride (TBAF), 52, 80–81, 104–106 Tetradecano-14-lactone, synthesis, 202 (+)-13-Tetradodecanolide, synthesis, 202 Tetramethylguanidine (TMG) for nitro-aldol, 32, 36 for Michael addition, 103–105, 117 Tetranitromethane, nitration, 5, 16 D-Threonine, synthesis, 83 Tosylmethyl isocyanide (TosMIC), pyrrole synthesis, 328–330 2-Tosylpyrrole, synthesis, 332 Trialkylborane, alkyl radical precursor, 97, 138, 308 Tributyltin hydride (Bu3SnH), radical denitration, 109, 111–113, 193–211, 216–218 indole synthesis (Fukuyama reaction), 344 Triethylsilane, ionic hydrogenation, 213 Trifluoroacetyl nitrate, nitration, 16

372

SUBJECT INDEX

Trimethylsilyl iodide, 169 1,3,5-Trinitrobenzene, indole synthesis, 346 2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene, indole synthesis, 342 Triton B, Michael addition, 109 Trovafloxacin, synthesis, 151 Tuberine, synthesis, 79 Ultrasound irradiation, 41 α,β-Unsaturated carbonyl compounds, synthesis, 88, 147, 167, 222, 224–225, 260 α,β-Unsaturated nitriles, 224 α,β-Unsaturated sulfones, pyrrole synthesis, 336

Urea-hydrogen peroxide (UHP), oxidation of amines or oximes, 21 Vancomycin, synthesis, 306 Vicarious nucleophilic substitution (VNS), 309–318 Vicinal dinitro compounds, radical elimination, 214–215 Ytterbium triflate, Michael addition, 106 Zirconium tetra tert-butoxide, oxidation of amines, 21 Zinc reagents, Michael addition, 97–99